Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstbookinlatinOOmcclrich 


EIEST  BOOK  II  LATH; 


CONTAINING 


GRAMMAR,  EXERCISES,  AND  VOCABULARIES, 


ON    THE    METHOD    OF 


CONSTANT  IMITATION  AND  REPETITION. 


JOHN    MvC>L  I  N^'%  C  K,  A.M., 

PROFESSOR  OF   LANQUA.GES, 


GEORGE   R.  CROOKS,  A.M., 

ADJUNCT  PROFESSOR  OF  LANGUAGES  IN  DICKINSON  COLLEGE. 


HARPER  &   BROTHERS,  PUBLISHERS, 
82  CLIFF  STREET,  NEW  YORK. 

1848. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Cingress,  in  the  year  1846, 

By  Harper  &  Brothers, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 


PREFACE. 


This  book  is  designed,  as  the  title-page  states,  to 
contain  within  itself  Grammar,  Exercises,  Reading- 
book,  and  Dictionary;  in  short,  all  that  the  pupil  will 
need  before  commencing  the  regular  reading  of  Cae- 
sar or  any  other  easy  Latin  author.  It  has  been  pre- 
pared, as  far  as  possible,  on  the  following  principles : 

1.  The  object  of  studying  languages  is  twofold  :  (1), 
the  acquisition  of  the  languages  themselves  ;  and  (2), 
the  mental  discipline  gained  in  acquiring  them. 

2.  No  language  can  he  thoroughly  acquired  with- 
out the  outlay  of  much  la^pour  and  time.  All  schemes 
which  promise  to  dispense  with  such  outlay  must  be 

•pronounced  visionary  and  chimerical. 

3.  But  labour  without  fruit  does  not  contribute  to 
mental  cultivation.  Labour  and  pain  are  not  neces- 
sary companions :  learning  should  not  be  "  wrung 
from  poor  striplings  like  blood  from  the  nose,  or  the 
plucking  of  untimely  fruit."* 

4.  The  grammar  of  a  language  cannot  be  understood 
until  the  language  itself  is  at  least  partially  acquired. 

5.  The  vernacular  may  be  learned,  so  far  as  its  use 
is  concerned,  without  grammar :  a  foreign  living  lan- 
guage may  be  so  learned,  but  never  so  thoroughly, 
nor  even  so  rapidly,  as  with  grammatical  aids.  In  the 
study  of  a  dead  language  grammar  is  indispensable. 

6.  "A  grammar  intended  for  beginners  should  be 
formed  altogether  differently  from  one  intended  for 

*  Milton. 


IV  PREFACE. 

the  higher  classes,  both  in  the  distribution  of  the  mat- 
ter and  in  the  mode  of  presenting  it.  Those  who  think 
that  the  pupil  should  use  the  same  grammar  from  the 
beginning  of  his  course  to  the  end, are  quite  in  error/'* 

7.  In  elementary  books,  or  in  teaching,  no  etymo- 
logical form  nor  grammatical  principle  should  be  pre- 
sented to  the  pupil  without  an  immediate  application 
thereof  to  practice,  which  should  be  kept  up,  both 
orally  and  in  writing,  from  the  very  first  lesson. 

8.  The  all-important  rule  of  practice,  in  the  acqui- 
sition of  language,  is  imitation  and  repetition.  This 
is  no  new  invention ;  all  good  teachers  have  known 
and  used  it ;  but  yet  it  has  been  but  slightly  employ- 
ed in  elementary  books  heretofore. 

9.  Models  for  imitation  should  be  simple  at  first, 
and  gradually  made  more  complicated ;  but  they 
should  always  be  selected  from  pure  authors,  say,  in 
Latin,  from  Cicero  and  Caesar. 

10.  The  pupil's  ear  should  be  trained  to  correct- 
ness from  the  beginning,  and  the  simplest  rules  of 
prosody  learned  and  applied  as  soon  as  possible. 
For  this  purpose,  the  quantity  of  all  syllables  should 
be  marked  in  elementary  books,  and  attention  to  it 
should  be  strictly  enforced  by  the  teacher. 

11.  The  foreign  idiom,  both  as  to  the  use  and  ar- 
rangement of  words,  should  be  made  famihar  to  the 
pupil  by  constant  practice.  Nothing  can  be  more 
hurtful  than  exercises  in  which  foreign  words  are  used 
in  the  idiom,  and  according  to  the  arrangement  of  the 
vernacular. 

How  far  we  have  been  successful  in  carrying  out 
these  principles,  the  book  itself  must  show. 

*  Kuhner. 


PREFACE.  V 

We  have  aimed  to  combine  the  advantages  of  con- 
stant repetition  and  imitation  of  Latin  sentences  from 
the  beginning,  with  a  more  thorough  drilling  in  ety- 
mological forms  than  is  common.  In  order  to  effect 
this  combination,  we  have  necessarily  deviated  from 
the  ordinary  grammatical  com'se  to  some  extent ;  but 
we  trust  that  experienced  teachers  will  find,  from  an 
examination  of  the  table  of  contents  alone,  that  our 
arrangement  is  not  devoid  of  systematic  and  even 
logical  order. 

While  we  have  not  gone  out  of  our  way  to  bring  in 
novelties,  we  have  yet  adopted  every  new  method 
which  we  have  deemed  to  be  an  improvement.  None 
of  the  class-books  of  any  repute  in  England  or  Ger- 
many have  escaped  our  notice  in  the  preparation  of 
this  work ;  and  we  have  made  free  use  of  them  all, 
without  slavish  adherence  to  any.  Perhaps  the  most 
marked  peculiarity  of  the  etymological  part  of  the 
book  will  be  found  to  be  the  doctrine  of  the  genders  of 
nouns  of  the  third  declension,  which  we  have  reduced, 
for  the  first  time,  to  a  form  at  once  philosophical,  we 
hope,  and  practical.^'  Some  steps  toward  the  meth- 
od here  presented  have  been  taken  by  Madvig,  Weis- 
SENBORN,  and  others  in  Germany ;  but  none  of  these 
writers  has  brought  out  a  clear  exposition  of  the  doc- 
trine, adapted  to  the  actual  purposes  of  instruction. 
The  arrangement,  also,  of  the  verbs,t  according  to 
the  formation  of  the  perfect-stem,  founded  mainly 
upon  the  classification  of  Grotefend  (better  set  forth 
by  Allen),  will  be  found,  we  trust,  to  be  an  improve- 
ment upon  any  yet  offered. 

*  The  summary  of  rules,  with  all  the  exceptions,  will  be  found  to  occu- 
py two  pages  only,  viz.,  p.  132,  133. 
t  Lessons  Ixii.-lxix.,  and  p.  268-279. 
1* 


VI  PREFACE. 


The  Syntax,  in  its  details,  generally  follows  Zumpt  ; 
but  in  the  arrangement,  especially  of  Part  II.,  we 
have  approached  nearer  to  the  plan  of  Billroth. 
The  admirable  syntax  of  Becker,  adopted  by  Kuhner 
in  his  Greek  and  Latin  Grammars,  we  deem  too  dif- 
ficult for  beginners. 

The  Exercises  are  selected,  as  far  as  possible,  from 
Csesar's  Gallic  War.  Although  we  have  laboured 
hard  to  keep  out  bad  Latin,  we  do  not  hope  that  all 
our  sentences  will  escape  criticism.  We  have  found, 
from  actual  experiment  in  our  classes,  that  the  exer- 
cises to  be  rendered  from  English  into  Latin  are 
within  the  capacity  of  any  student  of  ordinary  indus- 
try who  studies  the  book  in  order ;  and  we  do  not 
know  that  this  can  be  said  of  any  book  of  the  kind, 
of  equal  extent,  in  use  among  us. 

A  few  words  as  to  the  use  of  the  book  may  not  be 
out  of  place.  Our  own  method  has  been  to  employ 
the  lessons,  for  a  considerable  time  at  least,  entirely 
in  oral  instruction,  the  teacher  pronouncing  first  the 
Latin  sentences  distinctly,  and  requiring  the  pupil  to 
give  the  corresponding  English  without  book  ;  and 
then  pronouncing  the  English  sentences,  and  requi- 
ring the  pupil  to  give  the  corresponding  Latin.  As 
the  quantities  are  marked  (in  Part  I.)  in  all  syllables 
except  those  to  which  the  general  rules  apply,  we 
require  the  pupil  to  observe  quantity  in  his  pronun- 
ciation from  the  very  beginning,  so  that  he  learns 
prosody  by  practice  before  the  rules  are  given.  For 
the  purpose  of  review,  the  summary  of  Etymology 
(Part  III.),  which  contains,  in  short  compass,  all  that 
is  necessary  to  be  learned  by  heart,  will  be  found 
very   convenient.      After    the    student    has    passed 


PREFACE.  Vll 

through  Parts  I.  and  II.,  he  will  find  little  difRculty 
in  committing  accurately  the  Rules  of  Syntax  (Part 
IV.),  with  most  of  which  he  will  be  already  familiar. 
The  Reading  Lessons  at  the  end  will  give  him  easy 
practice  in  the  syntax*  and  in  word-building.  For 
the  convenience  of  those  who  may  need  it,  we  have 
condensed  into  a  few  pages,  in  Appendix  I.,  all  of 
Prosody  that  is  essential  for  the  understanding  of 
hexameter  verse. 

The  preparation  of  this  book  was  originally  sug- 
gested by  our  sense  of  the  inadequacy  of  the  ordina- 
ry modes  of  instruction,  and  especially  by  the  ad- 
vantage which  we  ourselves  had  derived  from  the 
use  of  Ollendorff's  method  in  the  study  of  the  Ger- 
man language.  Finding  that  Rev.  T.  K.  Arnold 
had  prepared  a  series  of  books  on  the  same  principle, 
we  used  them  in  our  own  classes  for  some  time,  with 
a  view  to  revising  them  for  republication.  They 
were  found  unsuited  to  our  purpose  in  many  respects, 
and  we  therefore  formed  the  design  of  preparing  an 
entirely  new  series,  adapted  to  the  use  of  American 
schools.  The  first  of  these  is  now  presented  to  the 
public. 

Dickinson  College,  April  7,  1846.  ^- 

*^*  In  Part  I.  the  quantity  is  marked  on  all  syllables  except  those  to 
which  the  general  rules  apply.  At  the  beginning  of  Pg-rt  II.  additional 
rules  of  quantity  are  given,  and  the  marks  are  subsequently  omitted  on 
many  syllables,  in  order  to  afford  the  pupil  exercise  upon  the  rules.  In  the 
Syntax  and  Reading  Lessons  they  are  omitted  almost  entirely.  Great  pains 
have  been  taken  to  ensure  accuracy  in  tlie  marks  of  quantity,  but  we  can- 
not hope  to  have  avoided  error  entirely. 

*  Our  Second  Book  in  Latin  will  contain  a  fuller  development  of  Syntax, 
in  a  series  of  progressive  exercises  in  writing  Latin. 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 


In  this  edition,  a  number  of  errors  in  the  marks  of 
quantity,  which  had  crept  into  the  first,  are  corrected. 
We  have  also  placed  a  series  of  Examination  Ques- 
tions at  the  end  of  the  book,  which  will  add,  we  hope, 
to  its  practical  value. 

Carlisle,  November,  1846. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Page 
J  1.  Division  of  the  Letters I 

$  2.  Syllables,  duantity,  Accent 1 

$  3.  Pronunciation 3 

§  4.  Division  of  Words •  4 

PART  I. 

PARTIAL  EXHIBITION  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  WORDS. 

Summary  of  Essential  Points 8 

$5.  First  Declension  of  Nouns. — First  Conjugation  of  Verbs.    (I. — V.)  10 
First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Nominative,  Vocative,  and  Genitive 

Cases  10 

First  Conjugation  of  Verbs, /7i^ra?is2Y22;e 14 

First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Accusative  Case. — ^First  Conjuga- 
tion of  Verbs,  Transitive 17 

First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Dative  and  Ablative  Cases     .        ,  19 
§  6.  Second  Declension  of  Nouns. — Second  Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

(VI.-VIII.) 22 

Second  Declension,  Masculine 22 

Second  Declension,  iVew^er. — Second  Conjugation  of  Verbs        .  26 
^  7.  Adjectives  of  First  Class,  Three  Endings.     (IX. — X.)  .        .        .28 

Forms  of  Adjectives  in  us,  a,  um 28 

Some  forms  of  E  s  s  e,  ^o  &e ,30 

$  8.   Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations  of  Verbs.     (XI.)  .        .        .33 

$  9.  Passive  Verbs.     (XII.— XIII.) 36 

$10.  Third  Declension  of  Nouns,  Partial  Treatment.  (XTV. — ^XV.) .  40 
$  11.  Adjectives  of  Second  Class,  Two  Endings.  (XVI.)  .  .  .44 
$  12.  Adjectives  of  Third  Class,  One  Ending.     (XVII.)        .        .        .46 

$  13.  Fourth  Declension  of  Nouns.     (XVIII.) 48 

^lA.  Fifth  Declension  of  Nouns.     (XIX.) 51 

$15.  Pronouns.     (XX.— XXXI.) 53 

Pronoun,  Personal,  1st  Person.    Verb,  1st  Person     .        .        .53 
Pronoun,  Personal,  2d  Person.    Verb,  2d  Person       .        .        .57 

Pronoun,  Personal,  3d  Person      . 61 

Pronouns,  Demonstrative 63 

Pronoun,  Relative 68 

Pronoun,  Interrogative 7* 


X  TABLE  OP  CONTENTS. 

Pago 

Pronoims,  iTideJinite 72 

Pronouns,  Correlative 74 

$  16.  Numerals.     (XXXIL— XXXIII.) 77 

$  17.  Ve7'bs  of  Third  Conjugation  in  io.    (XXXIV.)  ...  81 

$18.   Verbs,  Deponent.     (XXXV.) 83 

$  19.  Adverbs.     (XXXVI.) 85 

$  20.  Prepositions.    (XXXVII.— XXXVIII.) 88 

$  21.  Analysis  of  Tense  formations.    (XXXIX.— XLI.)      ...  92 

PAUT  II. 

FULLER  EXHIBITION  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  WORDS. 

$  1.  Additional  Rules  of  Quantity 99 

$  2.  Tenses  of  Verbs  for  Completed  Action,  Partial   Treatment. 

(XLIII.— XLVI.) 102 

Perfect  Tenses  of  E  s  s  e 102 

Perfect  Tenses  of  1st,  2d,  and  4th  Conjugations  ....  104 

Perfect  Tenses  of  3d  Conjugation 106 

$3.  Third  Declension  of  Nouns,  Fuller  Treatment.    (XL VII. 

— LVIL) 110 

Irregular  Nouns 129 

Summary  of  Rules  of  Gender,  Third  Declension  ....  132 
$4.  Comparison  of  Adjectives.     (LVIII. — LX.)         .        .        .        .134 

§  5.  Comparison  of  Adverbs 140 

$6.  Supine.    (LXL) 141 

$  7.  Tenses  of  Verbs  for  Completed  Action,  Active  Voice.    Fuller 

Treatment.     (L  XII.— L  XIX.) 144 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  1st  Conjugation 144 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  2d  Conjugation 146 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  3d  Conjugation 149 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  4th  Conjugation 159 

$8.  Tenses  for  Completed  Action,  Passive  Voice.    (LXX.)       .        .162 

$  9.  Participles.     (LXXI.— LXXV.) 165 

Present  Participle  Active 165 

Future  Participle  Active 168 

Perfect  Participle  Passive 170 

Ablative  Absolute 172 

$  10.  Infinitive.     (L XX VI.— L XXIX.) 176 

Forms  of  Infinitive 176 

Accusative  with  Infinitive 178 

$  11.  Gerund.     (LXXX.) 184 

$  12.  Gerundive.     (LXXXI.— LXXXH.) 187 

Gerundive  used  for  Gerund 187 

Gerundive  used  to  express  Duty  or  Necessity    .        .        .        .189 

$  13.  Imperative  Mood.    (L XXXIII.) 192 

$  14.  Sentences 194 

$  15.  Conjunctions.    (LXXXIV.--LXXXV.)     .       .       .       .       .  195 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  XI 

Page 

}16.  Subjunctive  Mood.    (LXXXVI.— XCIII.) 199 

Subjunctive  Present      .        .        •    ^ 199 

Subjunctive  Perfect 202 

Subjunctive  Imperfect   and  Pluperfect.    Conditional   Sen- 
tences          205 

Subjunctive  with  ut,  ne  (P'wrpose) 209 

Suh^xmctive  with  nt  (Consequence).    Succession  of  T^ises        .213 
Subjunctive  with  quin,  quo,  quo  minus.    Periphrastic  Forms  214 

Subjunctive  with  quum 217 

Subjunctive  in  Relative  Sentences 220 

$  17.  Oratio  Ohliqua.     (XCIV.) 223 

$  18.  Impersonal  Verbs.     (XCV.— XCVI.) 226 

$  19.  Irregular  Verbs.    (XCVn.— CI.) 230 

Posse •        ...  230 

Velle,  Nolle,  Malle 232 

Ferre 234 

Fieri,  Edere 236 

Ire,  duire,  Nequire    ••••••.        .238 

$  20.  Defective  Verbs,    (CH.) 241 

PAUT  m. 

SUMMARY  OF  ETYMOLOGY.  \ 

$  1.  LetterSy  Quantity,  4rc.         .       . 247 

$  2.  Noun 248 

$  3.  Adjective 251 

$  4.  Numerals 254 

$  5.  Pronoun 255 

$  6.  Verb .  258 

1.  Classes  of  Verbs 258 

2.  Parts  of  the  Verb 258 

3.  Conjugation 259 

4.  The  Auxiliary  Esse,  foJe  .        .        .        .        •        .        .        .260 

5.  Paradigms  of  Regular  Verbs 261 

6.  Verbs  in  io  of  the  3d  Conjugation        .        •        •        .        •        .266 

7.  Deponent  Verbs 266 

8.  Periphrastic  Conjugation 266 

9.  Formation  of  Perfect  Stem  .        .        .        .    '   .        .        .        .267 

10.  Lists  of  Verbs,  with  various  Perfects  and  Supines     .       .       .  268 

First  Conjugation 268 

Second  Conjugation 269 

Third  Conjugation 271 

Fourth  Conjugation 276 

Deponent  Verbs 277 

Inchoative  Verbs 279 

11.  Irregular  Verbs,  Paradigms 279 

12.  Defective  Verbs 282 


XU  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


M 


-^^  Page 

13.  Impersonal  Verbs •^^.        .  .  283 

$7.  Adverb .  .285 

$  8.  Preposition •        ,  288 

$  9.  Conjunction •  289 

$  10.  Interjection 290 

PART  IV. 

SUMMARY  OF  SYNTAX. 
PAKT  I.     SIMPLE  SENTENCES. 

I.  Subject  and  Predicate 293 

n.  Use  of  Cases 295 

Nominative ,        ,        .295 

Genitive 295 

Dative 298 

Accusative 300 

Ablative 302 

HI.  Use  of  the  Indefinite  Verb 306 

Infinitive 306 

participle 307 

Gerund 308 

Gerundive .  308 

Supine 309 

PART  II.     COMPOUND  SENTENCES. 

J.  Co-ordinate  Sentences "    •    "   .  310 

H.  Subordinate  Sentences 310 

A.  Participial  Sentences 311 

B.  Accusative  with  Infinitive 312 

C.  Conjunctive  Sentences .  313 

D.  Relative  Sentences 316 

E.  Interrogative  Sentences  .        •       .        ,        •        .        .        .318 
Oratio  Obliqua 319 

Ajpendix  I.  Prosody 323 

Appendix  II.  Greek  Nouns 326 

Appendix  III.  The  Calendar 327 

Appendix  IV.  Abbreviations 329 

Word -BUILDING 333 

Reading  Lessons •       •       •       .  340 

Latin-English  Vocabulary     •       •       • 355 

English-Latin  Vocabulabt     ••••••••  383 


rUUIVEESITYl 
INTRODUCTION.* 


^  1.  DIVISION  OF  THE  LETTERS. 

(1.)  The  letters  are  the  same  as  in  English,  with 
the  omission  of  w ;  k  is  used  in  but  few  words,  and  y 
and  z  only  in  words  borrowed  from  the  Greek. 

(2.)  Six  are  vowels,^  viz.,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y :  the  remaining 
nineteen  are  consonants,^ 

1  Sounds  formed  by  an  uninterrupted  emission  of  the  air  from  the  throat. 
Called  vowels  (vo c ale s  =  sounding  letters),  because  capable  of  being 
sounded  by  themselves. 

2  Sounds  formed  by  interrupting  the  emission  of  air  from  the  throat. 
Called  consonants  (con-sonare  =to  sound  together),  because  incapable 
of  being  sounded  by  themselves. 

(3.)  The  consonants  are  divided  into 
(a)  Liquids,^  Z,  m,  w,  r; 
(&)  Spirants,^  h^  5,  j  ; 

(c)  Mut&s,^  6,  c,  d,f,  g,  Jc,  p,  g,  t,  V ; 

3  The  Liquids  are  formed  by  a  partial  interruption  of  the  voice  ;  the  Spi- 
rants chiefly  by  the  breath ;  and  the  Mutes  by  a  more  complete  interrup- 
tion of  the  passage  of  the  air  from  the  throat,  ^is  regarded,  indeed,  sim- 
ply as  an  aspiration,  though  in  many  words  it  fills  the  place  of  a  conso- 
nant. 

(d)  Double  consonants,*  a:,  z. 

*  JCis  compounded  of  c  s,  gs,  and  z  (occurring  only  in  Greek  vrords)  of  d  s. 

(4.)  The  union  of  two  vowels  into  one  syllable  forms 
a  diphthong.  These  are,  in  Latin,  a  u,  e  u,  a  e,  o  e  (gen- 
erally written  cb,  «),  and,  in  a  few  words,  ei,  oi,  ui. 

§  2.  SYLLABLES,  QUANTITY,  ACCENT. 

(5.)  Every  word  contains  as  many  syllables  as  vow- 
els ;  e.  ^.,  m  i  1  e  s,  a  soldier,  is  not  pronounced  in  one  syl- 
lable, as  the  Enghsh  word  miles,  hut  in  two,  mi-les. 

(6.)  The  quantity  of  syllables  (that  is,  their  length 

*  This  Introduction  may  be  omitted  by  very  young  pupils  in  their  first 
study  of  the  work;  but  the  references  to  it  in  the  subsequent  lessons 
jBhouid  be  carefullv  attended  to.  ^ 


a  aUANTITY. ACCENT. 

or  shortness)  depends  upon  that  of  the  vowels  which 
they  contain.  The  dash  ("")  placed  over  a  vowel  de- 
notes that  it  is  long ;  the  semicircle  C^),  that  it  is  short, 
A  vowel  that  may  be  used  either  as  long  or  short  is 
marked  (^),  and  is  said  to  be  common. 

(7.)  The  following  rules  for  the  quantity  of  sylla- 
bles must  be  carefully  observed : 

{a)  All  diphthongs  are  long ;  e.  g,,  mens-ie,  tables; 
au-rum,  gold. 

(b)  A  vowel  followed  by  another  vowel  is  short  / 
e.  g.,  Deus,  God.  j^ 

This  rule  applies,  even  though  h  intervene  between  the  two  vowels,  as 
h  is  not  regarded  as  a  consonant  (3,  b,  n.  3) ;  e.  g.,  traho,  veho. 

(c)  A  vowel  followed  by  two  consonants,  or  a  doub- 
le one  (3,  d),  is  long  by  position ;  e.  g.,  in  am  ant,  the 
a  before  nt  is  long  by  position. 

^^^  [Every  syllable  to  which  none  of  these  three  rules  is  applicable  will  he 
marked  with  its  proper  quantity  in  the  following  pages,  until  other  rules  are  given.] 

(8.)  A  word  of  but  one  syllable  is  called  a  Monosyl- 
lable ;  of  two,  a  Dissyllable ;  of  more  than  two,  a  Pol- 
ysyllable. Thus,  lex  is  a  monosyllable ;  leg  is,  a  dis- 
syllable ;  in  col  as,  a  polysyllable. 

(9.)  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ulti- 
mate ;  the  next  to  the  last,  the  penult ;  the  second  from 
the  last,  the  antepenult.  Thus,  in  the  word  incolas, 
the  syllable  las  is  the  ultimate,  co,  the  penult,  and  in 
the  antepenult.  j 

(10.)  The  accent  of  a  syllable  is  a  stress  or  eleva- 
tion of  the  voice  in  pronouncing  it.  Observe  the  fol- 
lowing rules : 

(a)  Every  dissyllable  is  accented  on  the  penult ;  e. 
^.,  bonus,  pono. 

{b)  Every  polysyllable  is  accented, 

1.  On  the  penult,  when  the  penult  is  long;  e.  g., 
amare. 


PRONUNCIATION.  3 

2.  On  the  antepenulU  when  the  penult  is  short ; 
e.g.,  animus.  ^ 

^  3.  PRONUNCIATION. 

(11.)  [Almost  every  modem  nation  has  its  own  way  of  pronoimcing  Lat- 
in. But  as  the  vowels  have  nearly  the  same  sounds  in  all  the  different 
countries  of  Continental  Europe,  there  is  something  approaching  to  uni- 
formity in  their  pronunciation;  the  English,  however,  give  peculiar 
sounds  to  some  of  the  vowels,  and  they  pronounce  Latin,  therefore,  unlike 
all  the  rest  of  the  world.  In  this  country  two  methods  prevail,  which,  for 
convenience'  sake,  may  be  called  the  Continental  and  the  English.  We 
give  them  both,  stating,  at  the  same  time,  our  decided  preference  for  the 
first,  both  on  the  score  of  consistency  and  convenience.  Li  both  methods 
the  consonants  are  pronounced  nearly  as  in  English.] 

(a)  The  Continental  Method. 

Table  of  Vowel  Sounds. 

Short  a,  as  in  hat.  Long  i,  as  in  machine. 

Long  a,  as  in  father.  Short  5,  as  in  not. 

Short  e,  as  in  net.  Long  o,  as  in  no. 

Long  e,  as  in  there.  Short  u,  as  in  tub. 

Short  i,  as  in  sit.  Long  u,  as  in  full. 

Diphthongs. 

SB  or  oe,  as  e  in  there. 

au,  as  ou  in  our. 

eu,  as  eu  in  feud. 

ei  (rarely  occurring),  as  i  in  nice. 

(b)  The  English  Method. 
The  vowels  have  the  EngHsh  long  or  short  sounds. 
Exc.  A  final,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable, 
has  a  broad  sound ;  as,  fama  (fame-ah). 

Monosyllables* 

In  monosyllables,  if  the  vowel  be  the  last  letter,  it 
has  the  long  sound  ;  as  me,  do ;  if  any  other  letter,  the 
short  sound  ;  rs  et,db. 


4  DIVISION  OF  WORDS. 

Dissyllables  and  Polysyllables. 

(1.)  The  vowel  of  an  accented  penult  has  the  long 
sound, 

(a)  Before  another  vowel ;  as,  D  e  us. 

(b)  Before  a  single  consonant;  as,  J 6 vis. 
It  has  the  short  sound, 

(a)  Before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  consonant ; 
as,  mundus,  rexit. 

(2.)  The  vowel  of  an  accented  antepenult  has  the 
short  sound;  as,  regibus. 

(3.)  An  accented  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid 
has  usually  the  long  sound ;  as,  sacra. 

§  4.  DIVISION  OF  WORDS. 

(12.)  I.  Words  are  divided,  according  to  their  sig- 
nijication,  into  eight  classes,  called  Parts  of  Speech, 
viz..  Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Prep- 
osition, Conjunction,  Interjection. 

(13.)  The  Noun  is  the  name  of  an  object  (person, 
or  thing)  ;  e.  g.,  John,  man,  house. 

Nouns  are  divided  into, 

(a)  Proper,  denoting  individual  objects ;  e.  g,,  John, 
Ccesar,  Rome. 

(b)  Common,  denoting  one  or  more  of  a  class  of 
objects  ;  e.  g.y  man,  house,  horses. 

(c)  Abstract,  denoting  a  quality ;  e.  g.,  goodness, 
haste,  virtue. 

(14.)  The  Adjective  expresses  a  quality  or  property 
belonging  to  an  object ;  e.  g.,  good,  small;  as,  a  good 
boy,  a  small  house. 

(15.)  The  Pronoun  is  a  substitute  for  the  noun;  e. 
g.,  he,  she,  it,  are  substitutes  for  man,  woman,  book. 

(16.)  The  Verb  declares  something  of  a  person  or 
thing. 


DIVISION  OF  WORDS.  O 

E.  g.,  the  boy  dances ;  the  boy  sleeps ;  the  boy  is  good.     (In  this 
last  case  the  quality  "  good"  is  affirmed  of  "  boy,"  by  means  of 
the  verb  is.) 
^^  Participles,  Gerunds,  and  Supines  are  words  partaking  in  the 
meaning-  of  the  verb,  and  in  the  form  of  the  noun. 

(17.)  The  Adverb  qualifies  the  meaning  of  a  verb, 
adjective,  or  other  adverb  ;  e,  g.,  the  boy  learns  rapid- 
ly ;  the  boy  is  remarkably  faithful ;  the  boy  learns  very 
rapidly. 

(18.)  Prepositions  express  the  relations  of  objects 
simply  ;  e,  g.,from  me  ;  in  the  house. 

(19.)  Conjunctions  connect  words  and  sentences ; 
e.  ^.,  Thomas  and  John  went  to  town ;  Thomas  went, 
but  John  remained. 

(20.)  Interjections  are  merely  signs  of  emotion ;  e. 
g,,  alas! 

(21.)  II.  Words  are  divided,  according  to  their 
form,  into, 

(1)  Four  inflected,  viz..  Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun, 
Verb. 

(2)  Four  uninflected,  viz.,  Adverb,  Preposition,  Con- 
junction, Interjection. 

Hem.  Inflection  is  the  variation  of  a  word  to  express  different  rela- 
tions ;  e.  g.,  boy,  boys,  the  boy's  hat ;  I  love,  I  am  loved,  &c.  The  in- 
flection of  Nouns  is  called  DecZeTisi^w ;  oiYerbs,  Conjugation.  The 
Latin  language  makes  much  more  use  of  inflection  than  the  English. 

(22.)  III.  Words  are  divided,  according  to  their /or- 
mation,  into, 

(1)  Derivative,  i.  e.,  derived  from  other  words. 

(2)  Primitive,  i,  e.,  not  derived  from  other  words. 

E.  g.,  manly,  manhood,  are  derivatives  from  the  primitive  man. 

(3)  Compound,  i.  e,,  made  up  by  the  union  of  two 
or  more  words. 

(4.)  Simple,  i.  e.,  not  so  made  up. 

E.  g.,  man-kind  is  a  compound,  made  up  of  the  two  simple  words 
man  and  kind. 

A  2 


PART    L 


PARTIAL  EXHIBITION  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  WORDS, 


INCLUDING 


TENSES  OF  VERBS  FOR  INCOMPLETE  ACTION. 


*^ 


SUMMARY. 


[The  rales  and  statements  on  this  page  and  the  following  are  to  be 
thoroughly  learned;,  as  they  must  be  applied  constantly.] 

(23.)  Of  the  Letters* 

(1)  Six  are  vowels^  a,  e,  z,  o,  w,  y; 

(2)  Four  liquids.,  Z,  m,  n,  r ; 

(3)  Three  c-sounds,  c,  ^,  q  ; 

(4)  Twoj9-sounds,  6,^  ; 

(5)  Two  ^sounds,  d,  t ; 

(6)  Two  double  consonants,  x,  z. 

(7)  The  diphthongs  are  au,  eUfae^oc  (and  rarely  eiy  oi, 
ui)* 

(24.)  General  Rules  of  Quantity* 

(1)  A  vowel  before  another  is  short ;  e.  g.,  vi  a» 

(2)  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  one,  is 
long  hy  position  ;  e,  g.,  am  a  nt. 

[As  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  causes  some  excepticHis  to  this 
rule,  we  shaU  mark  the  quantity,  in  that  case,  doubtful ;  thus, 
Igri.] 

(3)  All  diphthongs  are  long  ;  e.  g,,  mens  si,  au-rum. 

[In  the  following  pages  of  Part  I.,  the  quantity  of  all  syllables  is 
marked,  except  those  which  are  covered  by  the  above  rales.} 

(25.)     General  Rules  of  Gender. 

[In  English,  gender  is  determined  by  &ex  alone ;  e.  g.,  man  is  mas- 
culine, woman  feminine.  But  in  Latin,  gender  is  determined  partly  by 
the  meaning  of  nouns,  and  partly  by  their  endings.  The  general  rules 
here  given  from  the  meanings  apply  to  nouns  of  all  the  declensions.] 


SUMMARY.  9 

I.  Masculines  :  Names  of  male  beings ;  of  most  rivers, 
winds,  mountains,  months,  and  nations. 

II.  Feminines  :  Names  of  female  beings,  cities,  countries, 
trees,  plants,  and  islands, 

III.  Neuters  :  All  indeclinable  words. 

IV.  Common  :  Such  as  have  but  one  form  for  masculine 

and  feminine ;  e.  ^.,  e  x  u  1,  an  exile  (male  or  female). 
[These  four  rules  are  contaiaed  in  the  following  verses.] 

(25.  a.)  Males,  rivers,  winds,  and  mountains  most  we  find 
With  months  and  nations  Masculine  declined ; 
Hut  females,  cities,  countries,  trees  we  name, 
As  Feminine  ;  most  islands,  too,  the  same. 
Common  are  such  as  both  the  genders  take. 
And  Neuter  all  words  undeclined  we  make. 

[There  are  many  exceptions  from  these  rules,  which  must  be  learned 
by  observation.] 

Explanation  of  Marks  and  Abbreviations. 
The  mark  ^  indicates  a  short  vowel. 
tt        u      —  indicates  a  long  vowel. 
"       "      =  indicates  that  two  words  or  phrases  are  equiV" 

alent  to  each  other. 
"       "      +  between  two  words  shows  that  they  are  com- 
pounded together. 
e.  g.  means,  ybr  example  (exempli  gratia). 
Passages  in  brackets  [  ]  are  not  meant  to  be  committed  to 
memory. 

In  the  Exercises,  words  in  parentheses  (  )  are  not  meant 
to  be  translated. 

The  References  are  made  to  paragraphs,  not  to  pages. 
In  a  reference,  R.  means  Remark ;  N.  jneans  foot-note. 




§  5. 

FIRST  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.— FIRST  CON- 
JUGATION  OF  VERBS.    (I.— V.) 


LESSON  L 

First  Declension  of  Nouns, — Nominative,  Vocative,  and 
Genitive  Cases. 

(26.)     Examples. 

(a)  Shade  or  shadow, 
(fe)  Of  the  shade, 

(c)  The  wood, 

(d)  Of  the  wood, 

Umbra. 
Umbrae. 
Sylva. 
Sylvae. 

(27.)  The  Latin  has  no  article.  Umbra  may  be  a 
shade,  or  the  shade,  according  to  its  connection  with 
other  words. 

(28.)  The  words  umbra  and  sylva  are  names  of 
things  belonging  to  certain  classes,  and  are,  therefore, 
common  nouns  (13,  h). 

(29.)  In  English,  certain  words  (of,  with,  by,  &c.) 
are  generally  placed  before  nouns,  to  express  their  re- 
lations to  other  words  ;  e.  g.,  of  the  wood,  &c. ;  but  in 
Latin  these  relations  are  commonly  indicated  by  dif- 
ferent endings  of  the  noun  (21,  (2),R.) ;  6.  ^.,  sylv-a, 
the  wood;  sj\Y'Sd,ofthe  wood. 

(30.)  That  part  of  the  noun  to  which  the  ending  is 
added  is  called  the  stem;  e.  ^.,  sylv-  is  the  stem  of 
sylv-a;  terr-  is  the  stem  of  terr-a,  the  earth. 

(31.)  There  are  in  Latin  six  endings,  which,  added 
to  the  stem,  form  six  cases,  the  Nominative,  Genitive, 
Dative,  Accusative,  Vocative,  Ablative. 

(32.)  And  as  we  may  speak  of  objects  as  one  or 
more,  there  are  two  numbers,  the  singular  and  plurdi^ 


V  ■      or 

fTTT"Tir  ^ 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 


f^r 


n 


It 


distinguished  by  their  endings ;  e,  g.,  umbra,  the  shad- 
ow ;  umbr  se,  the  shadows. 

(33.)  In  this  lesson  we  shall  use  but  three  cases,  the 
nominative,  vocative,  and  genitive. 

{a)  The  nominative  answers  to  the  question  who  ? 
or  what  ?  and  gives  the  simple  name  of  the  thing  spok- 
en of.  In  the  example  (26,  a), umbra, shade, is  in  the 
nominative. 

{h)  The  same  form  of  the  noun,  when  spoken  to,  is 
called  the  vocative  ;  e,  g,,  umbra,  shade;  O  shade  I 

(c)  The  genitive  expresses,  in  general,  those  rela- 
tions which  are  expressed  in  English  by  the  possessive 
case,  or  by  the  preposition  of,  and  answers  to  the  ques- 
tion whose?  of  whom?  of  v)hat  ?  e,  g.,  umbra,  the 
shade  (of  what .?) ,  s  y  1  v  ae  (of  the  wood).  Here  s y  1  v  ae 
is  in  the  genitive. 

(34.)  There  are  five  declensions  of  nouns,  distin- 
guished from  each  other  by  the  endings  of  the  geni- 
tive singular.  In  this  lesson  we  shall  use  only  nouns 
of  the 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

Case-Endings  and  Paradigm. — Nominative  and  Gen." 
itive. 

(35.)    (a)  ENDINGS. 


Nom.  aiid  Voc. 
Gen. 

Sing. 

a 

OB 

Plur. 

ae 
arum. 

(b)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stem  sylv-,  we 
get  the  following 


PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 


Nom.  and  Voc. 
Gen. 


Sing. 

sylv-a,  the  wood ;  O  toood  J 
sylv-ae,  of  the  irood. 


sylv-ae,  the  woods ;  O  woods  ! 
sylv-arum,  of  the  woods. 


(36.)  (a)  Thus,  nouns  of  the  first  declension  have  the  nom. 
and  voc.  ending  a  (short)^  and  the  gen.  ending  »  (long,  24,  3) 


12  FIRST  DECLENSION. 

(h)  The  penult  a  of  the  gen.  pi.  is  long,  (c)  They  are  of  the 
feminine  gender,  except  the  names  of  men  or  male  beings,  or 
rivers:  thus,  sylv-a  is  fern.;  but  naut-a,  a  sailor,  poet-a, 
a  poet,  and  the  like,  are  masc. 

[A  few  Greek  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  e  fern.,  and  as,  es,  masc. 
See  Appendix.] 

(37.)  EXERCISE. 

[In  the  Vocabularies,  the  nom.  case  is  always  given,  with  the  genitive 
ending  subjoined.] 


I.   Vocabulary. 


Galba,  Galba,  ae.  (m.) 

Flight,  fuga,  88. 

Province,  provincia,  ae. 

Memory,  recollection,  mSmoria,  s. 

Gaul,  Gallia,  se. 

Eagle,  aquila,  se. 

A  Belgian,  Belga,  ae. 

Injury,  injuria,  se. 

Language,  lingna,  se. 


Queen,  reglna,  as. 
Crown,  corona,  88. 
Wing,  ala,  se. 
Dove,  columba,  88. 
Feather,  pluma,  88. 
Daughter,  f  Ilia,  se. 
A  Celt,  Celta,  ae. 
Farmer,  agricola,  88.  (w.) 
Rose,  rosa,  08. 
Maid-servant,  anciUa,  ae. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin, 

Of  a  crown. — Of  a  queen. — O  Galba ! — Of  crowns. — Of  a 
feather.  —  Of  eagles. — Of  the  Celt.  —  Wings.  —  Roses.^Of 
doves.  —  Of  injuries. — Of  a  daughter. — O  daughter! — Of  the 
province. — Languages.  —  Provinces. — Belgians. — Of  the  prov- 
inces.— Of  the  maid-servant. — O  maid-servant ! — The  farmers. 
— O  farmer! — Of  memory.  —  O  Belgian!  —  Of  Gaul. — The 
eagles. 

III.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note.^ 

[A  few  questions  are  subjoined  in  the  foot-notes,  merely  as  specimens  to 
the  first  lessons.] 


LESSON  II. 
First  Declension  of  Nouns, — Nominative^  Vocative^  and 
Genitive  Cases, 
(38.)     Examples, 
{a)  The  queen's  crown.  \  Coron^reginae. 

*  "What  is  the  quantity  of  u  in  umbra  ?  (24,  2.)  Of  ae  in  sylv-ae  ?  (24,  3.) 
Of  u  in  columba?  (24,  2.)  Of  the  penult  (9)  in  flUa  ?  (24,  1.)  Of  i  m 
lingua?     Ofiinancilla?  (24,  2.) 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 


13 


{a)  Rule  of  Position. — The  genitive  (when  unemphatic) 
stands  after  the  noun  on  which  it  depends;  e.  g.,  re- 
gin  ae  in  (a)  stands  after  corona. 
(5)  The  queen's  crown  (i.6.,  i  Reginse  corona. 
not  the  king^s).  \ 

(&)  Rule  of  Position.  —  The   genitive   (when  emphatic) 
stands  hefore  the  noun  on  which  it  depends ;  e.  g.^  in  (6) 
r  e  g  i  n  8B  stands  hefore  corona. 
[Words  in  the  exercises  considered  emphatic  are  in  italics.^ 

(39.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 


Ala  columbae.  Rosa  ancillae. 

Pluma  aquilae.  Galhce  f  iiga. 

O  regina  (voc).  Provincia  Galliae. 

Filia  agricolae.  Memoria  fugae. 

Regince  filia.  O  filia ! 

Columhte  pluma.  Aquildrum  f  uga. 

II.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note.^ 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 


Fuga  Belgariim. 
Plumae  aquilariim. 
Injuridrum  memoria. 
Lingua  Celtarum. 
Filiae  reginarura. 
Lingua  Belgarum. 


The  queen's  dove. 
The  farmer's  eagle. 
The  flight  of  doves. 
The  girVs  rose. 
The  queen's  rose. 
The  flight  of  the  Celts. 
The  wings  of  the  doves. 
The  recollection  of  an  injury. 
O  Celts! 


The  wings  of  eagles. 

O  eagle. 

Galba's  daughter. 

The  shades  of  the  woods. 

The  memory  of  the  queen. 

The  girl's  dove. 

The  language  of  the  province. 

O  Belgians ! 

The  flight  of  the  queen. 


*  1.  What  is  the  quantity  of  the  ultimate  (9)  of  a  n  c  i  1 1  ge  ?  Why  ?  (24, 
3.)  Of  its  penult?  (9.)  Why?  (24,2.)  Of  the  penult  of  Galliae  ?  'Why? 
(24,  1.) 

2.  What  is  the  quantity  of  a  in  injuri  arum  ?  (36,3.)  in  memoria? 
(36,  a.) 

3.  What  is  the  stem  ofcolumba,  ala,  rosa?  &c.  (30.) 

4.  What  is  the  gender  of  r  o  s  a,  a  1  a,  f  u  g  a  ?  &c.  (36,  c.)  What  is  the 
gender  of  Galba,  agricola?  (25,  a.) 

5.  What  is  the  case  of  rosa,  provincise,  injuriarum,  memo- 
ria?    What  their  number  ? 

«.  How  many  cases  have  Latin  nouns  ?  (31.)     What  are  they?  (31.) 


B 


14  FIRST  DECLENSION. 

LESSON  III. 
First  Declension  of  Nouns, — Nominative  and  Genitive 
Cases. — First  Conjugation  of  Verbs. — Intransitives, 
(40.)     Examples. 


To  fly, 

To  dance, 
(a)  The  eagle  flies, 
{b)  The  girl  dances. 


volare. 
saltare. 
aquild  volat. 
puella  saltat. 


(41.)  SUBJECT    AND    PREDICATE. 

(a.)  Every  sentence  (e.  g.,  the  eagle  flies)  consists 
of  two  parts : 

1.  The  subject,  i.  e.,  that  of  which  something  is  de- 
clared (a  noun,  or  some  word  used  instead  of  a  noun) ; 
e,  g.,  eagle. 

2.  The  predicate,  i.  e.,  that  which  is  declared  of 
the  subject  (generally  a  verb) ;  e.  g,,  flies. 

Rem.  The  predicate  is  frequently  an  adjective  or  participle  connected 
with  the  subject  by  the  verb  is ;  e.  g.,  the  rose  is  sweeL 

(b.)  The  verb  in  the  predicate  agrees  with  the  sub- 
ject in  number  and  person;  e.  g.,the  eagle  flies:  here 
flies  is  in  the  third  person  singular,  to  agree  with  eagle. 


(42.)  Active  Verbs  are  those  which  express  activi 
ty ;  e.g.,  the  edi^e  flies,  the  boy  dances.  Active  verbs 
are  either 

(a)  Transitive,  i.  e.,  such  as  require  an  object  to 
complete  their  meaning ;  e.  g,,  the  boy  killed  (whom  ? 
or  what  ?)  the  squirrel.  Here  killed  is  a  transitive  verb. 

(p)  Intransitive,  i.  e.,  such  as  do  not  require  an  ob- 
ject; e.  g.,  the  birds  ^z/;  the  boy  dances. 

[All  the  verbs  used  in  this  lesson  are  intransitives.] 

(43.)  (a)  The  infinitive  form  of  a  verb  expresses 
its  action  indefinitely,  without  reference  to  person  or 
time  :  e,  g.,  to  dance,  to  plough. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS.  15 

(6)  The  indicative  mood  of  a  verb  expresses  its 
action  definitely,  as  a  fact  or  question ;  e,  g,,  he  ploughs. 
Does  he  dance? 

[The  imperative  and  subjunctive  moods  are  treated  of  here- 
after.] 

(44.)  Tenses. 

(a)  The  present  tense  expresses  incomplete  action 
inpixsent  time  ;  e.  g.j  I  am  ploughing,  I  plough. 

(p)  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  incomplete  ac- 
tion in  past  time  ;  e.  g,,  I  was  ploughing,  I  ploughed, 

(c)  The  future  tense  expresses  incomplete  action  in 
future  time  ;  e.  g.,  I  shall  be  ploughing,  I  shall  plough, 

[Rem.  As  these  three  forms  all  express  imperfect  or  incomplete  action, 
they  should  be  called  Present  Imperfect,  Past  Imperfect,  Future  Im- 
perfect.  But  as  the  present  names  are  fixed  by  almost  universal 
usage,  we  retain  them ;  advismg  the  student  to  fix  distinctly  in  his 
mind  the  principle  that  these  forms  properly  express  action  as  con- 
tinuing or  incomplete.  The  tense-forms  for  completed  action  will  be 
given  hereafter.] 

(45.)  Conjugations. 

(a)  In  Latin,  the  different  moods,  tenses,  numbers, 
and  persons  of  verbs  are  expressed  by  various  end- 
ings ;  and  the  affixing  of  these  to  the  proper  stem  of 
the  verb  is  called  conjugation.     (21,  Rem.) 

(6)  There  are  four  conjugations  of  verbs,  distin- 
guished by  their  infinitive-endings, 

(c)  The  infinitive-ending  of  the  first  conjugation  is 
Jlre  {a.  long)  ;  e.g.,  v5l-are,  tofiy;  ar-are,  to  plough, 

{d)  To  find  the  stem  of  any  verb,  strike  oflF  the  in- 
finitive-ending; e,  g.,  vol-are,  stem  vol-;  ar-are, 
stem  ar-.  To  form  any  mood,  tense,  &c.,  of  a  verb, 
affix  the  proper  ending  to  the  stem  thus  found. 


16 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. INTRANSITIVES. 


(46.) 


SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


INFINITIVE,  Srfe. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plural. 


Present. 

at. 
ant. 


Imperfect. 

abat. 
abant. 


Future. 

abit. 
abunt. 


(47.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  v  5 1-, 
we  get  the  following 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  vol-are,  to  fiy. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Present. 

v61-at,  he,  she, 

itjiies. 
vol-ant,      they 


Imperfect. 

vol-abat,  he,   she,  it 

was  flying. 
vol-abant,  they  were 

flying. 


Future. 

vol-abit,  he,  she,  it 

will  fly. 
vol-abunt,  they  will 


Rem.  In  Latin  we  need  not  use  the  personal  pronouns  he,  she,  it,  or 
they,  with  the  verb,  as  in  English,  because  the  person-endings  t  and 
n  t  indicate  the  person  sufficiently.* 

(48.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 


Girl,  puella,  ae. 
Forces,  c6piae,t  arum  (pi.). 
Sailor,  nauta,  ob  (m.). 
A  Belgian,  Belga,  ae. 
To  hasten,  festln-are. 
To  watch,  vigil-are. 


Galba,  Galba,  ae. 

To  fly,  vol-are. 

To  dance,  salt-are. 

To  cry  out,  exclam-are. 

To  sup,  coen-are. 

To  walk,  ambul-are. 


II.  Example. 

The  eagle  flies.  \  A  qui  la  volat. 
Rule  of  Position. — The  subject  nominative  generally  pre- 
cedes the  verb;   e.  g,,  in  the  above  example,  ftqulla 
precedes  volat. 

[In  the  above  example,  which  word  is  the  subject  ?  Why  ?  (41,  a,  1.) 
Which  the  predicate?  Why?  (41,  a,  2.)  How  does  volat  agree  with 
aquila?     Why?  (41,  b.)] 

III.  Translate  into  English, 

Columbse  volant. — Ancilla  saMt. — Puellae  exclamant. — Re- 
gina  coenabat. — Puella  ambiilabat. — Copise  festinant. — Aqm- 
lae  volabant. — Galba  festinabit. — Regina  saltat. — Naut«e  vigi- 
labant. — Fili^  reginge   saltabit. — Belgae  festinant. — Filia  Gal- 

*  But  when  a  new  subject  is  introduced,  or  emphasis  is  required,  the 
personal  pronoun  must  be  used  in  Latin. 
t  C  dpi  a,  in  the  singular,  means  abundance;  in  the  plural, /<?rcc5. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. TRANSITIVES.  17 

bsB  exclamat. — Puellae  ambiilabant. — Copige  Belgariim  festina. 
bunt. — Saltabant. — Ambulabant. — Coenabunt. — Nauta  ambula-. 
bit. — Vigilabunt. — Nautae  saltant. — Agricola  coenabit. 

IV.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note,^ 

V.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  dove  flies. — The  girl  walks. — The  maid-servant  hastens. 
— The  sailors  dance. — The  queen's  maid-servant  cries  out. — The 
farmer  was  supping. — The  queen  will  sup. — The  sailor  was 
watching. — The  farmer's  daughter  will  dance. — The  girl's  dove 
will  fly. — The  queen's  maid-servant  will  walk. — She  was  hast- 
ening.— They  were  watching. — He  (or  she)  was  supping. — 
The  eagles  were  flying.— Galba  was  hastening. — The  forces  of 
the  Belgians  will  hasten. — Eagles  will  fly. — The  sailors  were 
crying  out. — The  queen  was  walking. 


LESSON  IV. 

First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Accusative  Case. — First 

Conjugation  of  Verbs,  Transitives, 


(49.)  To  love. 

Queen, 
Daughter, 
(a)    The    queen    loves    her 
daughter. 


am-are. 

regina. 

filia. 

Regina     filiamam&t. 

The  queen  her-daughter  loves. 

Rem.  The  possessives,  his,  her,  &c.,  are  not  expressed  in  Latin,  except 
for  the  sake  of  perspicuity  or  emphasis. 

(50.)  (a)  It  has  been  stated  (41)  that  every  sentence 
consists  of  two  parts,  subject  and  predicate ;  so  the 
EngUsh  sentence  (49, a)  contains  the  subject,  queen,and 
the  predicate,  loves.     But  this  predicate  is  limited  by 

*  What  is  the  quantity  of  the  ultimate  of  Columbas  ?  W'hy  ?  (24,  3.)  Of 
the  penult?  Why?  (24,2.)  Of  the  ultimate  a  of  jtweZZ«?  (36,  a.)  Of  the  pe- 
nult? (24,2.)  Why.?  Of  the  antepenult  ?  Why?  (24,1.)  What  kind  of 
action  does  volant  express  ?  (44,  a.)  In  what  time  ?  What  kind  does  am- 
hulabat  7  (44,  b.)  In  what  time  ?  In  what  tenses  may  incomplete  action 
be  expressed  ?  (Pres.,  past,  and  fut.)  What  is  the  stem  of  volant  7  Of  ex- 
cldmant  7  Of  ccendbant  7  [The  stem  may  be  foimd  by  striking  off  any 
tense-ending.]  Why  can  the  personal  pronoun  be  omitted  in  Latin?  (47, 
Rem.)    When  must  it  be  used  ?     (47,  Rem.,  N.) 

B2 


18  OBJECT  ACCUSATIVE. 

the  word  daughter,  which  is  called  the  direct  object  of 
the  verb.     So,  in  the  Latin  sentence  (49,  a),  we  have, 

Svhject.  Direct  ohjecU  Predicate. 

Regina.  filiam.  amat. 

{h)  A  verb  thus  taking  an  object  is  called  a  Trans- 
itive  verb  (42,  «),  and  its  direct  object  is  said  to  be 
in  the  Objective  case  in  English  (e.  g,,  daughter),  and 
in  the  Accusative  case  in  Latin  (e.  g,,  filiam).  We 
have  thus  the  following : 
(51.)  Rules  of  Syntax. 

(a)  The  Accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object, 
{b)  Transitive  verbs  govern  the  accusative. 
(52.)  The  accusative -endings  of  the  first  declension  are, 
Sing,  am;  6.  g.^  fili-am,  regin-am,  daughter,  queen. 
Plur.  as ;  e.  g.,  fili-as,  regin-as,  daughters,  queens, 

(53.)  EXERCISE. 

L   Vocabulary, 

Moon,  luna,  ae. 

To  delight,  delectare. 

Medicine,  medicina,  OB. 


To  take  possession  of;  >  ^^^^^^^ 

or,  to  seize,  5 

Island,  insula,  83. 
To  call,  vocare. 
To  (prep.),  ad.  (with  accus.). 
Poet,  poeta,  ae. 
To  praise,  laudare. 
To  love,  amare. 
Earth,  terra,  sb. 


To  prepare,  parare. 

Shade  or  1^^.^^ 

Shadow,    ' 

To  obscure,  obscurare. 

To  arm,  armare. 

Through  (prep.),  per  (with  ace). 

II.  Example. 

The  poet  praises  the  queen.  |  Poeta  reginamlaud^t. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  object  accusative  stands  before  the 
ti'ansitive  verb ;  e.  g.,  in  the  above  example,  the  object 
reginam  stands  before  the  transitive  verb  laud  at. 

III.  Translate  into  English, 

LunS.  nautas  dslectat. — Agricola  f  ilias  amat. — Ancillae  mSdi- 
cinam  parant. — Umbra  terrae  (33,  c)  lunS,m  obscurat. — Nautas 
reginam  laudant. — Galba  copias  armabat. — Umbra  sylvarum 
agricolas  delectat. — Galba  sylvas  occupat. — Copiae  Belgarum 
sylvas  occupabant. — Columbae  p6r  sylvas  volabant. — Regina 
ancillas  vocat. — Ancillae  reginam  ^mant. — Agricola  filiam  voca- 


FIRST  DECLENSION. DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE.  19 

bat. — Regina  poetam  laudabit.— Rosae  ancillas  delectant. — Co- 
pias  armabunt  (47,  Rem.). — Sylvas  occupabunt  (47  Rem.). 

IV.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note  * 

V.  Ti^anslate  into  Latin. 

The  moon  delights  the  fai-mer. — The  farmer^  s  daughter  (38, 5) 
prepares  the  medicine. — The  eagle's  feathers  delight  the  queen. 
- — The  Belgians  arm  (their)  forces. — The  shade  of  the  wood  de- 
lights the  poet. — Galba  will  take  possession  of  the  wood. — 
(They)  walk  through  the  woods. — (They)  take  possession  of  the 
island. — The  farmer  loves  (his)  daughter. — The  farmer's  daugh- 
ter praises  the  poet. — The  queen  will  call  the  maid-servants. — 
The  queen  loves  (her)  maid-servants. — The  shadow  of  the 
earth  will  obscure  the  moon. — The  poet  will  praise  the  sailors. 


LESSON  V. 

First  Declension, — Dative  and  Ablative  Cases. 

(54.)  The  dative  case  of  nouns  expresses  the  object 

to  or  for  which  any  thing  is  done ;  e,  g.,  the  man  gives 

{to)  the  boy  a  book.     Here  boy  is  in  the  dative  case. 

Rem.  The  accusative  case,  book,  is  the  direct  object  of  the  verb  gives  ; 
the  dative,  bo;?/,  the  remote  object. 

(55.)  (a)  The  ablative  case  of  nouns  expresses  the 
person  or  thing  with,  from,  in,  or  by  which  any  thing 
is  done ;  e.  g.,  he  filled  the  cup  with  wine:  Here,  with 
wine  would  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  one  word,  in  the 
ablative. 

(b)  The  ablative  is  also  governed  by  prepositions 
expressing  the  relations  with,  from,  by,  &c. 

(56.)  The  Dative  endings  are.  Sing,  se :  Plur,  is 
{long). 

*  (1.)  What  pronouns  are  not  expressed  in  Latin  ?  (47,  R.,  49,  R.)  For  what 

gurpose  are  they  sometimes  used  ?     (2.)  By  what  is  the  transitive  verb 
mited  ?  (By  a  direct  object.)     What  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object  in 
Latin ?  (51,  a.)    What  is  the  direct  object  ofamat,  laudat?  &c. 


20 


DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE. 


The  Ablative  endings  are,  Sing,  a  (long) :  Plur, 
(long). 

(57.)  FIRST  DECLENSION. 

CASE-ENDINGS    AND    PARADIGM    COMPLETE. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

a. 

8B. 

Gen. 

SB. 

arQm. 

Dat. 

86. 

IS. 

Ace. 

am. 

as. 

Voc. 

a. 

Be. 

Abl. 

a. 

Is. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

sylv-a,  a  wood. 

sylv-ae,  woods. 

Gen. 

sylv-ae,  of  a  wood. 

sylv-arum,  oj  woods. 

Dat. 

sylv-ae,  to  a  wood. 

sylv-is,  to  woods. 

Ace. 

sylv-am,  a  wood. 

sylv-as,  woods. 

Voe. 

sylv-a,  O  wood  I 

sylv-ae,  O  woods  ! 

Abl. 

sylv-a,  with.  Sec,  a  wood. 

sylv-is,  with,  &c.,  woods. 

Rem.   Some  nomis  of  this  declension  are  used  only  in  the  plural; 

viz.,  d  1 V  i  t  i  ae,  riches ;  n  u  p  t  i  ae,  a  marriage ;  i  n  s  i  d  i  ae,  an  ambush. 

(58.)  EXERCISE. 


I.   Vocabulary. 


en, ) 


confirmare. 


Wa^/,  via,  ae. 

To  show,  monstrare. 

Ambush,   or   snares,    insidioe,  arum 

(used  only  in  the  pi.). 
Wild  beast,  fera,  ae. 
To  give,  dare.* 
To  beseech,  obsecrare. 
Letter,  litterae,  ariim.t 
Friendship,  amicitia. 

II.  Examples. 

(a)    The  farmer  shows    the 

way  to  the  girls. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  remote  object  usually  precedes 

the  direct ;  e.  g.,  in  example  (a),  puellls  precedes  vidm. 


To  establish, 
To  strengtiien 
With  (prep.),  cum  (governing  the  ab- 
lative case). 
To  abound,  abundare,  (with  abl.). 
Deserter,  perfuga,  ae. 
Tear,  lacryma,  ae. 
Inhabitant,  incola,  ae  (25,  IV.). 


Agricola  puellisvi^m  mon- 
strat. 


(ft)  The  queen  walks  with  the 
maid-servants. 


Regina  cum  ancillis  ambu- 
lat. 


Rule  of  Position. — The  preposition  and  its  noun  precede 
the  verb ;  €.  ^.,  in  example  (6),  the  words  cum  ancillis 
precede  amhitldt. 

*  D  are  has  a  short  before  re. 

t  LittSra,  sing.,  means  a  letter  (as  of  the  alphabet) ;  HttSroe,  plur.,  a 
letter  =  an  epistle. 


FIRST  DECLENSION.  21 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Galba  insidias  parat. — Galba  Belgis  (54)  insidias  parat. — Bel- 
gae  amicitiam  confirmant. — Belgae  cum  regina  amicitiam  confir- 
mant. — Insula  feris*  abundat. — Poeta  reginse  (dat.,  54)  rosam 
dabat. — Copise  per  insulam  festinant. — Perfiigse  reginam  obse- 
crabant. — Perfiigae  cum  lacrymis  reginam  obs^crabant. — Per- 
fuga  reginae  (dat.,  54)  litteras  dabat. — Incolae  reginam  obse- 
crabant. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  poet  praises  the  queen. — Galba  establishes  friendship. — 
Galba  establishes  friendship  with  the  Belgians. — The  Belgians 
will  prepare  snares. — The  Belgians  will  prepare  snares  for  the 
inhabitants  (54). — The  islands  abound  (in)  herbs  (58,  III.,  note). 
— Poets  give  roses  to  queens  (54). — The  Belgians  are  beseech- 
ing Galba. — The  Belgians  are  beseeching  Galba  with  tears. — 
The  queen  will  establish  friendship. — The  queen  will  establish 
friendship  with  the  Belgians. — The  deserters  will  beseech  the 
queen. — The  deserters  will  beseech  the  queen  with  tears. — 
The  Belgians  were  preparing  snares. — The  Belgians  were 
preparing  snares  for  the  deserters  (54). 

*  Feris  is  the  abl.  Rule  of  Syntax. — ^The  abl.  case  is  used  with  all 
verbs  and  adjectives  of  abounding  and  wanting. 


§  6. 


SECOND  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.— SECOND 
CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS.     (VI.— VIII). 


LESSON  VL 
Nouns, — Second  Declension^  Masculine, 
(59.)  Examples, 


CrassuSy        Crass -iis. 

Messenger,   nunti-iis. 

To  hasten,    festinare. 
The   messenger   of  Crassus 

hastens. 
The  messengers  hasten 


Of  Crassus, 
messengers, 


Crass-i. 
nunti-i. 


Nunti-us  Crass-i  festinS,t. 


Nunti-i  festinant. 


(60.)  The  Second  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 
whose  gen.  sing,  ending  is  i  {long).  The  nom.  has 
two  endings,  us  for  masc.  gender,  and  um  for  the 
neut. 

(6L)  The  case-endings  for  the  masculine  gender  are 
as  follows : 


Sing. 

Plur. 

Nom. 

Qs. 

Nom. 

1. 

Gen. 

1. 

Gen. 

orum. 

Dat. 

o. 

Dat. 

IS. 

Ace. 

tim. 

Ace. 

OS. 

Voc. 

e. 

Voc. 

i. 

Abl. 

0. 

Abl. 

IS. 

Rem.  The  nouns  in  Us  of  this  declension  are  the  only  Latin  nouns  in 
which  the  vocative-ending  difters  from  the  nominative. 

(62.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stem  serv-  of 
the  noun  serv-us  (a  slave),  we  get  the 

PARADIGM. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Sing. 

serv-us,  a  slave. 

serv-I,  of  a  slave. 

serv-o,  to  or  for  a  slave. 

serv-um,  a  sfave. 

serv-e,  O  slave  ! 

serv-5,  with,  by,  &c.,  a  slave. 

Plur. 

serv-1,  slaves. 

serv-orum,  of  slaves. 

serv-is,  to  or  for  slaves. 

serv-6s,  slaves. 

serv-i,  O  slaves  ! 

serv-Ts,  with,  by,  &c.,  slaves. 

SECOND  DECLENSION.  23 

[Rem,  1.  Nearly  all  nouns  in  us  are  masc. ;  but  the  names  oi trees, plants, 
&c.,  are  /em.  by  the  general  rule  (25,  a).  The  four  nouns,  alvus, 
belly;  coliis,  distaff;  humus,  ground;  vannus,/a7i,  are  also 
fern.  Yirus,  juice ;  pelagus,  the  sea;  vulgus,  the  common 
people,  are  neuter. 

Rem.  2.  rilius,  son,  and  proper  names  in  ius,  take  i  for  the  voc- 
ative-ending; e.  g.,i\\i,  O  son!  Tulli,  O  Tully  ! 

Rem.  3.  D  e  u  s ,  God,  has  d  e  u  s  for  voc.  sing. ;  and  in  the  plural  N. 
and  V.  dil,  G.  dedrum,  D.  and  Abl.  diis,  Ace.  deos.] 
[For  Greek  nouns  of  this  declension,  see  Appendix.] 

(63.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 

Master  (of  a  family  or  of  slaves),  do- 

min-iis,  i. 
Slave,  serv-us,  L 
Village,  vTc-iis,  i. 

Ambassador,  or  Ztewfenan/.legat-us,  I. 
Garden,  hort-us,  I. 
To,  ad  (prep,  with  ace). 
In,  in  (prep,  with  abl.). 


Captive,  captiv-iis,  i. 

A  German,  German-tis,  i. 

To  call,  vocare. 

To  recall,  revocare.* 

To  call  together,  conv6car6.* 

An  yEduan,  ^du-us,  I. 

Tojlog,  verberare. 

To  ride  (on  horseback),  SquitarS. 


f^^  He  rides  to  the  village,  ad  vicum  equitat.  When  to  implies 
motion,  it  must  be  translated  by  ad  with  the  accusative. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

Dominiis  servum  vocat. — Serviis  domino  (54)  medicinam  pS,r- 
at. — Crassiis  vicum  occiipat. — Nuntiiis  Crassi  vigilat. — Servi 
ad  viciim  festinant. — Nuntius  legato  (54)  viam  monstrat. — Servi 
dominos  laudant, — Agricola  ad  viciim  equitat. — Captivi  festina- 
bunt. — Galba  copias  (48,  I.)  Germanoriim  convocat.* — Nun- 
tiiis captivos  re  vocat. — Servi  in  horto  ambulabunt. — JEdui 
Crasso  (54)  insidias  parabant. — Nuntiiis  copias  iEduoriim  revo- 
cabat. — Dominiis  servos  verberat. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

[Recollect  that  words  in  parentheses  (  )  are  not  to  be  translated.] 
The  messengers  call-together  the  iEduans. — The  slaves  pre- 
pare medicines  for  (their)  master  (dat.,  54). — The  iEduans  take- 
possession-of  the  woods. — The  master  praises  (his)  slaves. — The 
slave  is  hastening  to  (ad,  tvith  ace.)  the  woods. —  The  ambassa- 
dors ride  to  the  village. — Crassus  will  prepare  an  ambush  for  the 

**  The  prefix  con  gives  the  verb  the  additional  meaning  of  together ;  the 
prefix  re  of  back,  as  in  revocare  and  convocdre. 


24 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 


iEduans. — The  lieutenant  calls  together  the  Germans. — The 
messenger  will  show  the  way  to  the  captives  (54). — The 
slaves  are  watching. — The  master  flogs  (his)  slave. — Galba  will 
r0call  the  lieutenant. — The  Germans  were  preparing  an  ambush 
for  Galba  (54). — The  slave  was  showing  the  way  to  the  mes- 
senger (54). — The  messenger  was  hastening  to  the  village. — 
The  slaves  are  watching  in  the  garden. 


LESSON  VII. 
Nouns, — Second  Declension,  Masculines  continued, 

(64.)  All  nouns  of  the  second  declension  whose 
stem  ends  in  r  reject  the  ending  us  in  the  nom.  and  e 
in  the  voc. ;  e,  g,,  N.  and  V.  aiger,  field,  instead  of 
ager-u  s,  ager-e.  Moreover,  most  of  those  which  have 
e  in  the  nominative  drop  it  in  the  obhque*  cases ; 
e.  g,,  N.  ager,  G.  agri  instead  of  ager-i. 

(65.)  Learn  the  following 


PARADIGM. 

SINGULAR.                                                                                 1 

Nom. 

^ger,  field  (m). 
agT-i,  of  the  f  eld. 

pu6r  (m.),  boy. 

vir,  man. 

Gen. 

puer-i,  of  the  boy. 

vir-i,  of  the  man. 

Dat. 

a^-5,  to  or  f 07' field. 

puer-o,  to  or  for. 

vir-o,  to  or  for. 

Ace. 

Sigr-\im,feld. 

puer-um,  boy. 

vir-um,  man. 

Voc. 

ager,  Of  eld  ! 

puer,  O  boy  ! 
pu6r-5,  with,  by,  Sf-c, 

vir,  O  man  ! 

Abl 

agr-5,  with,  by,  8^  c,  field. 

vir-o,  with,  by,  Spc. 

PLURAL.                                                                                         1 

Nom. 

^gr-i,fields. 

puer-i,  boys. 

vir-i,  7nen. 

Gen. 

agr-orum,  of  fields. 

puer-orum,  of  boys. 

vir-orum,  of 'men. 

Dat. 

5gi--is,  to  or  jor  fields. 

puer-is,  to  or  for. 

vir-Is,  to  or  for. 

Ace. 

Sigr-ds,  fields. 
agT-I,  O  fields  I 

pu6r-5s,  boys. 
puer-i,  O  boys  ! 

vir-os,  men. 

Voc. 

vir-i,  O  men  ! 

Abl. 

agr-is,  with  fields. 

puer-is,  with,  by,  SfC. 

\'\r-\s,with,by,Ss'C. 

Rem.  Only  the  following  nouns  keep  the  e  in  all  the  cases,  viz.,  didxxX' 
t^r, adulterer;  puer,  boy;  Bocer, father-in-law ;  gener,  son-in-law;  ves- 
per, evening ;  liberl  (used  only  in  plural),  children ;  with  the  com- 
pounds of /cr  and  ger;  e.  g.,  Lucifer,  Lucifer ;  comiger,  horned. 

*  The  oblique  cases  include  all  the  cases  except  the  nominative  and 
vocative. 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 


S5 


(66.) 

I.   Vocabulary, 


EXERCISE, 


Boy,  puer,  i 

Master  (of  a  school),  magister,  tri  (64). 

Father-in-law f  socer,  i  (65,  R.). 

Herb,  herba,  oe. 

Scholar,  discipul-us,  i. 

Son,  fili-us,  I  (62,  II.  2). 

II.  Example, 
(a)   The  wood  abounds  in 
wild  beasts. 


Man,  vir,  I. 
Game,  lud-us,  i. 
Son-in-law,  gener,  I  (65,  R.). 
Children,  llberi,  orum  (rarely  used  in 

singular). 
Field,  ager,  Sgrl  (64). 


SylvS,  feris  abundat. 
The      wood     in  -  loild  -  beasts 
abounds. 


(a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  ablative  case  is  used  with  ad- 
jectives and  verbs  of  abounding  and  wanting. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Puer  magistrum  amat. — Regina  soceriim  amabit. — Pu^ri  in 
agro  ambulabunt. — Agri  herbis  (abl.,  66,  II.,  a)  abundant. — Ag- 
ricola  per  agros  (58,  II.,  b)  equitat. — Agricola  socerum  vocat. — 
Piiellae  magistriim  laudant. — Viri  in  agrls  ambulabant. — Lu^ 
pueros  delectant. — Regina  generos  amabit. — Viri  ad  vicum 
festinabant. — Agricola  liberos  amat. — Magister  discipiilos  con- 
vocat. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  girls  walK  in  the  fields. — The  field  abounds  in  herbs  {66, 
II.,  a). — The  sailor  calls  back  the  boys. — The  queen  loves  (her) 
son-in-law.- — The  queen  gives  (her)  son-in-law (dat.,  54)  arose. 
— The  scholars  love  (their)  master. — The  fields  abound  in  herbs 
(66,  II.,  «).— The  farmers  were  walking  through  the  fields. — 
The  son  of  the  master  calls  the  boys. — The  master  walks  in 
the  garden  with  (his)  sons. — The  herbs  of  the  field  delight  the 
poet. — Games  delight  girls. — The  farmer  shows  the  way  to 
the  boy. — The  master  will  praise  (his)  scholars. — The  master 
will  flog  (his)  scholars. 

c 


26 


SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 


LESSON  VIII.        •. 
Nouns. — Second  Declension,  Neuter. — Verbs,  Second 
Conjugation. 


(67.)                         Slave. 
Cujp. 
To  fill. 
The  slave  fills  his  master'' s 
cup. 

servus  (masc). 

poculum  (neut.). 

implere. 
Servus      poculum 

implet. 
The-slave  ihe-cup  of-his' 

domim 
'master 

fills. 
(68.)  The  case-endings  of  the  second  declension  for 

le  neuter  gender  are, 

Nom.  Ace,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

Smg. 

um. 

1. 

6. 

PhXT. 

a. 

orum. 

IS. 

Rem.  The  endings  of  the  nom.,  ace,  and  voc.  are  always  the  same  in 
neuter  nouns.    In  this  declension,  those  of  dat.  and  abl.  are  alike  also. 

(69.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stem  p 6c ill-, 
we  get  the 


PARADIGM. 

Sing. 

FJur.                                j 

Nom. 

pocul-um,  a  cup. 

p6cul-a,  cups. 

Gen. 

pocul-i,  of  a  cup. 

pocul-orum,  of  ciips. 

Dat. 

pocul-6,  to  or  for  a  cup. 

p6cul-is,  to  or  for  cups. 

Ace. 

p6cul-um,  a  cup. 

pocul-a,  cups. 

Voc. 

pocul-um,  O  cup  ! 

p6cul-a,  O  cups  / 

Abl. 

pocul-5,  with,  by,  &c.,  a  cup. 

pocul-is,  with,  from,  &c.,  cups. 

THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 

(70.)  The  second  conjugation  comprises  all  verbs 
whose  infinitive-ending  is  ere  (e  long  before  r e) ;  e.  g., 
mon-ere,  to  advise;  doc- ere,  to  teach. 

(71.)   SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 


INFINITIVE,  6r6. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plural. 


Present. 
gt. 

ent. 


Imperfect. 

ebat. 
ebant. 


Future. 

ebit. 
ebunt. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS.  2*^ 

(72.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  m  5n-,  we 
get  the  following 

PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  mon-ere,  to  advise. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
:3d  Plur. 


Present.  I  Imperfect. 

mon-et,  he,  she,  &c.,  mon-ebat,  Ae,  s/ic,  &c., 

advises.  was  advising. 

mon-ent,  the^  advise.\mbn-eha.nt,  they  were 
advising. 


^  Future. 

mon^Bit,  he,  «J^  &c., 

will  advise. 
mon-ebunt,  they  will 

advise. 


To  Jill,  implere  (70). 
Danger,  perlciilum,  L 
To  fear,  timerS  (70). 
Foi^m,  forum,  i. 
Town,  oppidum,  i. 


(73.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 

Assistance,  auxiliiim,  i  (68). 
To  ask,  entreat,  rogarg. 
Camp,  castra,  or  urn  (pi.) 
To  move,  movere  (70). 
Cup,  poculum,  1. 
Wine,  vinum,  i. 

f?'^' II.  Translate  into  English, 

Legatiis  auxiliiim  rogat. — Galba  copias  ad  (63, 1.,  l^)  castr& 
revocat. — Serviis  poculum  vino  (55,  a)  implet. — Crassiis  castr& 
movet. — Copiae  ad  oppidum  festinabant. — Agricola  oppidiira 
laudat. — CopisB  Germanorum  ad  castra  festinabunt. — Nuntius 
periciilum  timet. — Pueri  p^r  forum  ambulant. — German!  peri- 
cula  non  timent. — LSgati  per  oppidum  ambiilabunt. — AgricolS. 
oppida  -^diiorum  laudabat. — Crassiis  oppidiim  occiipabat. — • 
Servi  pociila  implebant. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  iEduans  were  asking  assistance. — The  Germans  will 
move  (their)  camp. — The  Germans  were  praising  the  town.-^ 
The  ambassadors  of  the  ^duans  hasten  to  (63,  I.,  ^^)  the 
camp. — The  forces  of  the  Belgians  fear  the  danger. — The  mes- 
senger will  recall  the  ambassadors  to  the  camp. — Galba's  mes- 
senger will  recall  the  Germans  to  the  town. — The  ambassadors 
praise  the  towns  of  the  Germans. — The  farmers  were  walking 
through  the  forum. — The  boy  walks  through  the  town. — The 
sailors  will  not  fear  the  danger. — Crassus  will  not  move  (his) 
camp. — The  Germans  were-taking-possession-of  the  town. — 
The  servant  was  filling  the  cup. 


§  7. 
ADJECTIVES  OF  FIRST  CLASS.    (IX.— X.) 


LESSON  IX. 
Adjectives. — Class  /,  its,  a,  u m. 

(74.)  The  Adjective  (14),  in  Latin,  agrees  with  the 
noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  and  therefore  has 
endings  to  distinguish  these;  e,  g,,  puer  bon-us,  a 
good  boy ;  puelld  bon-a,  a  good  girl;  donum  b5n- 
u  m,  a  good  gift. 

(75.)  We  divide  adjectives  into  three  classes,  ac- 
cording to  their  endings.  Those  of  X\iq  first  class  have 
the  fern,  ending  of  the  first  decl.  of  nouns,  and  the  masc. 
and  neut.  endings  of  the  second.     Thus, 


(76.) 

ENDINGS. 

PARADIGM 

SINGULAR.                                                                                      II 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

US. 

a. 

um. 

bon-us. 

bon-a. 

bon-um. 

G. 

1. 

SB. 

1. 

bon-i. 

bon-aa. 

bon-I. 

D. 

6. 

89. 

6. 

b6n-5. 

bon-ce. 

bon-o. 

A. 

una. 

am. 

um. 

bon-um. 

bon-am. 

bon-um. 

V. 

e. 

5. 

um. 

b6n-6. 

bon-a. 

bon-um. 

A. 

0. 

a. 

0. 

bono. 

bon-a. 

bon-6. 

PLUBAL.                                                                                        il 

N. 

1. 

8S. 

a. 

bon-I. 

bdn-8B. 

bon-a. 

G. 

oroin. 

arum. 

orum. 

bon-orom. 

bon-arum. 

b6n-5rum. 

D. 

Is. 

IS. 

is. 

bon-is. 

bon-Is. 

bon-is. 

A. 

OS. 

as. 

a. 

b6n-5s. 

bon-as. 

bon-a. 

V. 

1. 

tB. 

a. 

bon-i. 

b6n-8D. 

bon-a. 

A. 

IS. 

IS. 

IS. 

bon-is. 

bon-Ts. 

bon-Is. 

(77.)  Adjectives  Vfho§e  stem  ends  in  er  do  not 
take  the  endings  u  s  of  the  nominative  and  e  of  the 
vocative. 

(a)  Most  of  them  drop  the  e  in  inflection ;  e.  g., 

pulch^r,     pulchr-a,     pulchr-um,     beautiful; 
pulchr-i,    pulchr-ae,    pulchr-i,    6cc, 


ADJECTIVES    OF    FIRST    CLASS. 


29 


-  (b)  But  a  s  p  e  r,  rough ;  1  a  c  e  r,  torn ;  liber,  free ;  m  i  s  6  r, 
miserable ;  prosper,  fortunate ;  t  e  n  e  r,  tender  (and  the  com- 
pounds of  ger  and  f  er;  e,  ^.,  cornig^r,  f  lammif  er),  re- 
tain it ;  e.  g,t 

miser,      miser-a,     miser-iim, 
miser-i,   miser-ae,    miser-i,     &c. 

(78.) 

I.   Vocabulary, 

Good,  bon-us,  a,  um. 
Great,  magn-iis,  a,  um. 
Many,  molt-us,  a,  um. 
Thick,  dens-US,  a,  um. 
Broad,  wide,  lat-us,  a,  um. 
JWy,  me-us,  a,  um. 
Thy,  tu-us,  a,  iim. 


EXERCISE. 


His,  hers,  its  (own),  su-us,  a 

To  see,  videre. 

Master  (of  slaves),  herus,  I. 

To  have,  habere. 

Example,  exemplum«  L 

River,  fluviiis,  i. 

To  frighten,  terrerS. 


II.  Examples. 

(a)  The  slave  fills  the  large  I  Serviis  pociilummagnum 
:     cup,  I     implet. 

Rule  of  Position, — (a)  The  adjective,  unless  emphatic,  fol- 
lows the  noun ;  c.  g,<,  in  the  above  example,  magnum 
follows  pociilum. 


(b)  The  slave  fills  the  queen^s 
large  cup. 


Serviis  magnum  rSginae  poc- 
iilum  implet. 

Rule  of  Position, — (6)  When  the  noun  governs  another  in 
the  genitive,  the  adjective  stands  first,  and  the  genitive 
between  it  and  its  noun ;  e,  g,,  in  example  (6),  magnum 
reginse  pociilum. 

III.   Translate  into  English. 

Reginaf  iliam  suam  amat. — Servus  poculum  meum  implet. — 
Servi  pocul^  magna  implent. — Pueri  magistrum  boniim  ^mant. 
— Belgae  vicos  multos  habent. — Agricola  bonus  viam  monstrat. — 
Magister  pueros  bonos  docebit. — Magistii  boni  exempli  bona 
pueris  (54)  dant. — Legatus  magnam  reginae  (78,  II.,  b)  c5ronam 
videt. — Perfugae  ad  fluviiim  latiim  festinant. — Servus  magnum 
pueri  (78,  II.,  b)  poculum  implebat. — Sylvae  densse  nuntios  ter- 
rent. — Pueri  sylvam  densam  timebunt. — Servus  bonus  herum 
amat. 

rV.   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  ^duans  have  many  villages. — The  queen  loves  (her) 
C2 


30  SOME    FORMS    OF    ESSE. 

good  son. — The  farmer  shows  the  thick  wood. — Good  slaves 
love  (thek)  masters. — Good  masters  love  (their)  slaves. — The 
Belgians  have  many  towns. — The  broad  rivers  frighten  the  de- 
serters.— The  boy  sees  the  large  town. — Crassus  recalls  the  good 
lieutenant. — The  son  praises  the  gi-eat  queen. — The  Germans 
have  large  villages. — He  praises  thy  slave. — He  loves  thy  daugh- 
ter.— He  will  praise  his  own  daughter. — The  deserters  were 
hastening  to  the  broad  river. — The  slave  will  fill  the  large  cup 
of  his  master  (78,  II.,  b), — The  lieutenant  will  see  many  villages 
of  the  Belgians  (78,  II.,  h). — The  thick  wood  will  frighten  the 
boys. 


Li;SSON  X. 
Some  Forms  ofMlss  e. — Adjectives  continued. 
(79.)  Learn  ^the  following  forms  of  the  irregular 
verb  Esse,  to  be : 


INFINITIVE,  esse,  to  he. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Pregent 
est,  15* 
sunt,  are. 


Imperfect. 

erat,  was. 
erant,  were. 


erit,  he,  she,  it  will  be. 
erunt,  they  will  be. 


(80.)  (a)  Indolence  is  a  vice.  \\^ff'^  ^'«»°»  ««*• 

I  Indolence   a  vice     is. 

Here  inertia  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence ;  v  i- 
t  i  u  m  is  the  predicate  ;  both  in  the  nominative. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — {a)  The  noun  in  the  predicate  must  be 
in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  when  it  denotes  the  same 
person  or  thing. 
(81.)  (&)   The  rose  is  feeati^i- [  Rosa  pulchra  est. 
ful.  I  The  rose  beautiful  is. 

Here  r  5  s  a  is  the  subject,  and  pulchra  the  py-ed- 
icate  ;  both  in  nom.  sing.  fem. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — (6)  The  adjective  in  the  predicate  agrees 
with  the  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 
[As  a  general  niJe,  a  sentence  should  not  end  with  a  monosyllahle ;  but 
in  short  passages,  such  as  the  above,  especially  when  the  word  before  est 
ends  in  a  vowel,  Gt  m,  it  is  admissible.] 


ADJECTIVES,    CLASS    FIRST. 


31 


(82.) 


EXERCISE. 


[Refer  to  Rules  of  Position  (78,  II.)  and  to  Rem.  on  adjectives  ending  in 
&•  (77).] 

I.   Vocabulary, 

Happy,  beatus,  a,  um. 

True,  verus,  a,  um. 

Friendship,  amicitia,  ae. 

Everlasting,  sempitemus,  a,  um. 

Labicnus,  Labienus,  i. 

Foolish,  stultus,  a,  um. 

Tender,  tener,  a,  um  (77,  b). 

Flame,  flamma,  as. 

Red,  ruddy,  ruber,  a,  um  (77,  a). 

A  leaf,  folium,  L 

Bull,  taurus,  I. 

Horned,  corniger,  a,  um  (77,  b). 

Lamb,  agnus,  i. 


Europe^  Europa,  ob. 

Peninsula,  peninsula,  ob. 

Anger,  Ira,  ae. 

Illust7'ious,  clarus,  a,  um. 

Croic,  corvus,  i. 

Black,  niger,  a,  um  (77,  a). 

Hot,  non  (always  placed  before  the 
word  which  it  qualifies) 

Always,  semper  (adv.). 

Cow,  vacca,  ob. 

Attica,  Attica,  as. 

Britain,  Britannia,  sb. 

Ireland,  Hibemia,  ob. 
Miserable,  miser,  a,  um  (77,  b). 

Rem.  In  such  phrases  as  the  good,  the  wise.  Sec,  the  noun  (men)  is 
omitted  in  Latin,  as  in  English  ;  e.  g.,  good  men  =  b  6  n  i ;  fools  = 
stultl ;  the  happy  =  beat!.  Also,  many  things  =multa  (neut.); 
all  things  =  omnia. 

II.  Examples, 

The  good  are  always  happy. 

True  friendships  are  everlast- 
ing, 

Lahiemts  was  a  lieutenant. 

The  foolish  are  not  happy. 


Boni  semper  beat!  sunt. 
Verae     amicitiae     sempitemae 

sunt. 
Labieniis  legatiis  Srat. 
Stulti  non  sunt  beati. 


III.  Translate  into  English, 

Puellapulchra  est  (81,  h). — Herbge  agrorumt^n^rae  sunt(81, 
h). — Alae  aquilariim  magnae  sunt. — Flamma  rubra  est. — Folia 
rosariim  pulchra  sunt. — Tauri  cornigeri  sunt. — Agni  teneri  in 
agris  sunt. — Regina  pulchra  in  horto  ambiilabat.-^Puer  agnos 
pulchros  videt. — Vera  amicitia  sempiterna  est. — Stulti  miseri 
sunt. — Europa  peninsula  (80,  a)  est. — Attica  peninsula  est. — Ira 
vitium  est  magnum. — Crassus  legatiis  erat. — Labienus  legatiis 
clarus  erat. — Corviis  plumas  nigras  habet. — Stulti  non  sunt 
beati. — Boniis  semper  beatiis  est. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  queen  was  beautiful. — The  queen's  daughter  was  beau- 


32  APJECTIVES  OF  FIRST  CLASS. 

tiful. — The  beautiful  daughter  walks  in  the  garden. — The  fields 
abound  in  tender  herbs  (66,  II., a). — The  feMhers  of  doves  are 
beautiful. — The  feathers  of  crows  are  black. — The  flames  were 
ruddy. — The  leaves  of  roses  are  tender. — Cows  are  horned. — 
The  queen  walks  in  the  garden  with  (cum)  her  beautiful  daugh- 
ters (f  iliabiis*). — The  girl  will  see  the  tender  lambs  in  the  fields. 
— The  good  are  not  always  happy. — Fools  are  not  always  mis- 
erable.— Crassus  was  a  great  lieutenant. — Britain  is  an  island. — 
Ireland  is  an  island. — Geneva  is  a  large  town. — ^Anger  is  always 
a  vice. — Everlasting  friendships  are  true. — Friendships  are  not 
always  everlasting. 

*  Fill  a,  daughter,  anddea^  goddess,  have  abl  pL  in  a  bus,  instead  of 
Is,  to  distinguish  thenx  from  fill  is,  sons„  diis^  gods. 


§  8. 


THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS  OF 
VERBS. 


LESSON  XI. 
Verbs. — Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations, 
(83.)  The  Third  Conjugation  comprises  all  verbs 
whose  infinitive  ending  is  ere  (e  short  before  re); 
e,  g.,  s  c  r  i  b-e  r  e,  to  write. 

(84.)      SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


INFINITIVE,  6re. 


INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 
Plural. 


Present. 

it. 
unt. 


Imperfect. 

ebat. 
ebant. 


Future. 

ent. 


(85.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  scrib-, 
we  get  the  following 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  scrib-ere,  to  vnite. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Present. 

scrib-it,  he,  she,  &c., 

writes. 
scrib-mit,  thei/  write. 


Imperfect. 

scrib-ebat,  h£,  she, 
&c.,  was  writing. 

scrib-  ebant,  they  were 
writing. 


Future. 

scrib-et,  he,  she,  &c., 

will  write. 
scrib-ent,    they   toill 

write. 


THE  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

(86.)  The  Fourth  Conjugation  comprises  all  verbs 
whose  infinitive-ending  is  ire  (i  long  before  re) ;  e.  g,, 
aud-ire,  to  hear. 

(87.)    SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


INFINITIVE,  ire. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plnr. 


Present. 

mnt. 


Imperfect 

iebat. 
iebant. 


Future. 

i6t. 
ient. 


(88.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  aud-, 
we  have  the  following 


34      THIRD    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGATIONS    OF    VERBS. 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  aud-ire,  to  hear. 

INDICATIVE. 

3d  Sing. 
3dPlur. 

Present 

aud-it,  he,  she,  &c., 

hears. 
aud-iunt,  they  hear. 

Imperfect. 

and-iebat,^,s^,  &c., 

was  hearing. 
aud-iebant,  they  were 

hearing. 

Future. 

aud-iet,  he,  she,  &c., 

will  hear. 
aud-ient,    they    will 

hear. 

(89.)                                   EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary. 

To  send,  mittere  (83). 

SmaU,  parvus,  a,  um. 

In  (prep.),  in.* 

To  come,  vgnire  (86). 

To  sleep,  dormire  (86). 

A  Roman,  Romanus,  a,  tim. 

Bed-chamber,  cubiciilum,  i. 

To  lead,  ducere  (83). 

To  run,  currSrS  (83). 

World,  mundus,  i. 

To  rule,  regere  (83). 

To  conquer,  vincerg  (83). 

A  Gmil,  Gallus,  i. 

To  fortify,  munire  (86). 

Tower,  a 

istellum,  i. 

Divitiacus,  Divitiacus,  i. 

II.  Example, 

Crassus  comes  to  the  Zar^e  I  Crassiis  magntlm  ad  oppl- 

town.  j      dum  venit. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  adjective  belonging  to  a  noun  gov- 
erned by  a  preposition  is  frequently  placed  he/ore  the 
preposition,  6.  ^.,  magnum  in  the  example. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Belgae  legates  mittunt. — Belgse  legates  ad  Crassiim  mittunt. — 
Pueri  in  ciibiculo  dormiunt. — Puellae  parvo  (89,11.)  in  cubiciilo 
dormiebant. — Regina  magnum  ad  oppidum  veniet. — Galba  c6- 
pias  Romanoriim  ducit. — Dii  (62,  R.,  3)  mundum  regunt. — 
Deus  mundum  semper  regit. — Roman!  Gallos  vincebant. — Le- 
gatiis  castella  muniebat. — ^Edui  nuntium  ad  Labienum  mittunt. 
—  Copiae  Belgarum  ad  oppidum  venient.  —  Divitiacus  copias 
^duoriim  ducebat. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  horse  runs. — The  boy  sleeps. — The  boy  was  running. — 
The  slave  comes. — Crassus  fortifies  many  towers. — The  slave 
was  coming  to  (63,1.,  i^')  his  master. — The  beautiful  boy  will 
sleep  in  a  little  bed-chamber  (89,  II.). — The  gods  always  govern 

*  In,  signifying  into  or  unto,  governs  the  accusative;  signifying  in 
governs  the  ablative. 


THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS  OP  VERBS.    35 

the  world. — The  Romans  are  coining  to  the  large  town. — The 
filmier  was  sleeping  in  the  field. — Divitiacus  was  leading  the 
forces  of  the  ^Eduans. — The  Belgians  send  messengers  to  Cras- 
sus. — Crassus  sends  a  messenger  to  tlie  Belgians. — The  girls 
will  sleep  in  a  little  bed-chamber. — Crassus  will  fortify  the 
towers. — The  Romans  take-possession-of  the  towers  of  Gaul. 


§  9. 
PASSIVE  VERBS.    (XII.— XIII.) 

-  ^  LESSON  XII. 

Verbs. — Passive  Voice, — First  and  Second  Conjuga- 
tions, 
(90.)  The  endings  of  the  third  persons  of  verbs,  in 
the  tenses  for  incomplete  or  continued  action  (44),  are 
the  same  in  the  passive  as  in  the  active  voice,  with 
the  addition  of  the  syllable  ur .     Thus,  we  have  in  the 

(91.)  FIRST    CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Active. 

sim-at,  he,  she,  it,  loves, 
am-ant,  they  love. 


Passive. 

am-at-Mr,  he,  she,  it  is  loved.* 
am-ant-itr,  they  are  loved. 


IMPEKFECT. 


3d  Sing,  am-dbat,  he  was  loving.        am-abat-wr,  he  was  loved. 
3d  Ploi*.  Km.-abant,they  were  loving,    am-abant-iir,  they  were  loved. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


am-ait^,  he  shall  or  will 

love, 
dim-abunt,  they    shall    or 

will  love. 


am-abJt-ur,  he  shall  or  will  be  loved. 

am-abunt-wr,  they  shall  or  will  be 
loved. 


(92.) 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Active. 

mon-c^,  he  ad/vises, 
mbn-ent,  they  advise. 


Passive. 

mon-et-wr,  he  is  advised. 
mon-ent-wr,  they  are  advised. 


IMPEKFECT. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


m.6n-ebdt,  he  was  advising, 
labn-ebant,  they  were  advi- 
sing. 


mon-ebat-itr,  he  was  advised. 
mon-ebant-wr,  they  were  advised. 


3d  Smg.\Tabn-ebU,  he  will  advise. 
3d  Plur.  vmon-ebunt,  they  will  ad- 


m5n-ebTt-Mr,  he  will  be  advised. 
mon-ebunt-wr,  they  will  be  advised. 


*  The  English  language  has  no  forms  for  incomplete  action  in  the  pass- 
ive voice.  He  is  loved,  ne  was  loved,  dec,  the  house  is  buiU,  &,c.,  properly 
express  action  complete.    An  awkw^ard  periphrasis — he  is  being  lovea^ 


Crassiis  legatum  y5c&t. 
Legatiis  a  Crasso  vocatur* 


PASSIVES    OF    FIRST    AND    SECOND    CONJUGATIONS.    37 
(93.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocabulary, 

Game,  sport,  ludus,  i.  »\  To  teachy  ddcdre. 

To  delight,  delectarg.  |  Seize,  occap&r6> 

II.  Examples. 

(a)  Crassus  calls  the  lieuten- 

ant. 

(b)  The  lieutenant  is  called 
/"  '^        by  Crassus. 

~  Jn  these  examples,  the  same  action  is  expressed  (viz.,  the  calling-  of 
the  lieutenant)  in  {a)  by  the  active  form,  in  (b)  by  the  passive.  Ev- 
ery sentence  in  which  a  transitive  verb  occurs  may  thus  be  changed 
into  the  passive  form.  The  agent  (Crassus)  is  the  subject  n/ymina- 
tive  in  (a) ;  and  in  (Jj)  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  f  Crasso  J  with  the 
preposition  a,  by. 
Rem.  K  the  subject  be  a  thing,  not  a  person,  nor  considered  as  a  per- 
son, the  preposition  is  omitted ;  e.  g.,  Pociilum  vItio  impletur,  the 
cup  is  filled  with  wine.    (This  is  the  abl.  of  cause  or  meajis.) 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

AuxiKum  a  legato  rogatur. — Auxilium  a  legat5  rogabatiir. — 
Auxilium  a  legato  rogabitur. — Copiae  a  Galba  revocantur. — Pocu- 
liim  a  servo  implebatur. — Oppida  a  Crasso  occupabantiir. — Me- 
(Kcina  ab  ancillis  parabitiir. — Puerl  boni  a  magistro  laudantiir. 
— Copiae  Germanoriim  a  Labieno  revocabuntur. — Pocula  vin5 
(93,  II.,  R.)  implentur.— PuSri  ludis  (93,  II.,  R.)  delectantur. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  master  is  loved  by  (his)  scholars. — The  master  will  be 
loved  by  (his)  good  scholars. — The  cups  will  be  filled  (with) 
wine  (93,  II.,  R.). — The  Germans  were  caDed  together  by 
Crassus. — The  villages  were  seized  by  the  Romans. — The 
towns  will  be  seized  by  the  ^duans. — Medicines  are  prepared 
by  the  slaves. — Good  boys  will  be  praised  by  their  masters. — 
The  good  boys  will  be  advised  by  their  masters. — The  scholars 
are  taught  by  their  master. — The  scholar  was  taught  by  his 

the  house  is  bein^  built — ^is  sometimes  employed,  but  is  not  to  be  approved. 
The  house  is  building  is  a  form  sanctioned  by  usage,  but  in  many  verbs  it 
would  be  ambiguous.  The  pupil  must  remember,  then,  that  in  the  exer- 
cises in  the  First  Part,  the  forms  is  loved,  is  advised,  was  advised,  &c.,  are 
used  to  express  incomplete  action. 

D 


38    PASSIVES    OF   THIRD    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGATIONS. 

master. — The  girls  are  delighted  with  games  (93,  II.,  R.). — 
The  slaves  will  be  delighted  with  games. — The  queen  is  praised 
by  (her)  maid-servant. — The  queen  was  praised  by  (her)  maid- 
servant.— The  queen  will  be  praised  by  (her)  maid-servant. 


LESSON  XIII. 
Verbs. — Passive  Voice. — Third  and  Fourth  Conjuga- 


(94.) 


tions, 

THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Active. 

reg-it,  he,  she,  it  rules, 
reg-wht,  they  rule. 


Passive. 

regit-wr,  he,  she,  it  is  ruled. 
regunt-ur,  they  are  ruled. 


IMPERFKCT. 


3d  Sing,  reg-ebat,  he  was  ruling:       ||regebat-Mr,  he  was  ruled. 
3d  Plur.  reg-ebant,  they  were  ruling. \\regehB.iit-ur,  they  were  ruled. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


reg-e^,  he  shall  or  will  rule, 
reg-ent,  they  shall  or  will 
rule. 


r6get-Mr,  he  shall  or  will  be  ruled. 
regent-wr,  they  shall  or  will  be  ruled. 


(95.) 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Active. 

aud-it,  he  hears. 
aud-iunt,  they  hear. 


Passive. 

audit-wr,  he  is  heard. 
audiunt-wr,  they  are 


IMPERFECT. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


aud-iebat,  he  was  hearing. 

aud-iebant,  they  were  hear- 

ing. 


audiebat-wr,  he  was  heard. 
audiebant-wr,  they  were  heard. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


aud-iet,  he  shall  or  will 

hear. 
aud-ient,  they  shall  or  will 

hear. 


aud-iet-Mr,  he  shall  or  will  be  heard, 
audient-wr,  they  shall  or  will  be  heard. 


(96.) 

I.   Vocabulary. 

A  Roman,  Rdmanus,  I. 
To  lay  aside,  depongrS. 
Garrison,  praesidium,  i. 


EXERCISE. 


A  Gaul,  GaHus,  L 

To  distribute,  ?  ,.     -  ^  ^ 
X  dispon6r8. 
arrange,     )       ^ 


XL  Translate  into  English. 

Lggati  a  Belgis  mittuntur. — Mundtis  a  Deo  rSglttir. — C6pi© 


PASSIVES  OF  THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS.     39 

Komanoriim  a  Galba  ducuntiir. — Galli  a  Romanis  vincuntiir. — 
Ira  a  regina  deponitur. — Castelliim  a  Labieno  munitiir. — Praesi- 
dia  a  legato  disponuntur. — Legati  ad  .^duos  mittebantiir. — Co- 
piae  iEduoriim  ad  vicum  ducentur. — EpistolS,  a  regina  scribitiir. — 
Oppida  Belgarum  muniebantur. — Nuntii  ad  Crassum  mittentur. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

Galba  is  conquered  by  the  Belgians. — The  camp  is  fortified 
by  Crassus. — The  forces  of  Crassus  are  led  to  the  camp. — The 
forces  of  the  JEdui  are  sent  to  the  village. — Anger  will  be  laid- 
aside  by  the  queen. — Galba  was  conquered  by  the  Gauls. — Let- 
ters will  be  written  by  the  queen. — Letters  are  written  to  (ad) 
Crassus. — The  gan-isons  are  not  distributed  by  Crassus. — The 
towers  are  not  fortified  by  the  Belgians. — The  world  is  always 
governed  by  God. — The  Germans  are  ruled  by  a  lieutenant. — 
A  letter  will  be  written  by  the  queen. 


§  10. 

THIRD  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.— PARTIAL 
TREATMENT.     (XIV.— XV.) 


LESSON  XIV. 
Nouns, — Third  Declension. 

(97.)  The  Third  Declension  comprises  all  nouns  * 
whose  gen,  sing,  ends  in  i  s. 

Rem.  To  find  the  stem  of  any  noun  of  tliis  declension,  strike  off  la 
from  the  gen.  sing.;  e.  g.,  gen.  hominis  {of  a  man),  stem  horn  in. 

(98.)  The  case-endings  are  as  follows :  ^ 


Singular. 

Plural.                                   ^ 

M.  &  F. 

Nent. 

M.  &r. 

Neut. 

N. 





N. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

G. 

is. 

IS. 

G. 

um  (ium). 

um  (ium). 

D. 

1. 

i 

D. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

A. 

em  (im). 

like  N. 

A. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

V. 

like  N. 

like  N. 

V. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

A. 

e(I). 

Mil- 

A. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

jRem.  1.  The  nom.  ending  is  not  given,  because  of  the  many  forms  in 
which  that  case  occurs.  Of  the  changes  to  which  the  stem  is  sub- 
ject, see  hereafter  (Part  II.). 

2.  Of  the  endings  i  m,  i  (in  ace.  and  abl.  sing.),  and  i  a,  i  u  m  (plur.),  see 
hereafter  (Part  II.). 

3.  The  genders  of  all  nouns  of  this  declension  are  marked  in  the  vo- 
cabularies. The  general  rules  of  gender  (25,  a)  of  cour^i?  apply  to 
this  declension :  special  rules  are  given  (355).    We  give  here  only 

(99.)  Partial  Rule  of  Gender, — Most  nouns  which  add  s  to 
the  stem  to  form  the  nominative  are  feminine. 

(100.)    PARADIGMS MASCULINE  AND  FEMININE  FORMS. 


Sing. 

Speech  (m.). 

Honour  (m.). 

City  (f.). 

Nation  (race),  f. 

Law  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 

serm6. 

honor. 

urb-s. 

gens  (gents). 

lex  (legs).    ■ 

Gen. 

sermon-is. 

honor-is. 

urb-is. 

gent-is. 

leg-is. 

Dat. 

sermon-i. 

honor-L 

urb-I. 

gent-i. 

leg-i. 

Ace. 

sermon-6m. 

honor-em. 

urb-em. 

gent-em. 

leg-em. 

Abl. 

sermon-e. 

honor-e. 

urb-e. 

gent-g. 

leg-e. 

Plur. 

Speeches. 

Honours. 

Cities. 

Races. 

Laws.             1 

N.,  A.,  V. 

sermon-es. 

honor-es. 

urb-es. 

gent-es. 

leg-es. 

Gen.      sermon-um. 

honor-um. 

urb-iiim. 

gent-mm. 

leg-um. 

D.  and  A.  sermon-ibiis. 

houor-ibiis. 

urb-ibtis. 

gent-ibiis. 

leg-ibus.       I 

THIRD  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.  41 

Rem.  1.  Observe  that  dor  tin  the  stem  is  dropped  in  the  nom.  before 
«;  and  c  or  s  combined  with  s  to  form  x  ;  e.  ^.,  laus  =  laud-s ; 
arx  =  arc-s;  lex  =  leg-s;  gens  =  gent-s. 
2.  All  the  endings  are  short  but  i  (dat.  sing.)  and  es  (N.,  A.,  V.  plnr.). 
(101.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 

[In  the  following  vocabularies,  the  stem  of  every  noun  of  the  third  de- 
clension is  placed  immediately  after  the  nominative  form,  and  before 
the  genitive  ending.] 

Rock,  pgtra,  as. 

Tree,  arbor,  (arbor)  is,  f. 

To  build  a  nest,  nidificarg.  - 

CcBsar,  Caesar,  (Caesar)  is. 

And,  6t  (conj.). 

Consul,  consul,  (consul)  is,  m. 

General,  impgrator,  (impSrator)  is,  m. 

A  Helvetian,  Helvetius,  I. 


K^.ng,  rex,  (reg)  is,  m. 
Law,  lex,  (leg)  is,  f. 
To  abrogate,  abrogare. 
Just,  Justus,  a,  um. 
Worthy,  digniis,  a,  um. 
Part,  pars,  (part)  is,  f. 
Common-^people,  plebs,  (pleb)  is,  f 
To  leave,  relinquere. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

Rex  leg-es  abrogat. — Copiae  ad  urb-em  festinant. — Leg-es 
justge  sunt. — Pars  pleb-is  urb-em  relinquit. — Magna  pars  pleb- 
is  urb-em  relinquit. — ^Aquilae  in  p^tris  et  arbor-ibus  tfidificant. — 
Leg-es  a.  reg-e  abrogantur. — Copiae  ad  urb-6m  revocantiir. — 
Helvgtii  ad  Caesar-em  legates  mittunt. — Nuntius  sermon-em 
consul-is  laudat. — Imperator  nuntios  revocat. — Rex  dignis  (64, 
and  82, 1.,  R.)  honor-es  dabit. — Copiae  Belgarum  urb-em  relin- 
quebant. — Caesar  ad  vicos  festinabat. — Legati  ad  imperq,t6r-em 
mittuntiir. —  Imperator  nuntios  ad  urb-em  mittet. — Legatus 
part-6m  copiarum  revocabit. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  laws  were  just. — The  king  will  revoke  the  laws. — The 
general  will  leave  the  village. — The  consuls  send  ambassadors. — 
The  consuls  recall  the  ambassadors. — Doves  build  their  nests  in 
gardens  and  trees. — The  consuls  are  praised. — The  city  is  for- 
tified.— Honours  will  be  given. — Honours  are  given  to  the  wor- 
thy (82,  I.,  R.). — Ambassadors  will  be  sent  to  the  consuls. — 
Honours  are  given  to  Caesar  (54). — The  speech  of  the  consul 
is  praised. — Honours  are  given  to  the  general. — A  great  part 
of  the  common-people  wiU  leave  the  city. — The  consuls  will 
recall  the  common-people. — The  ambassadors  will  leave  the 
city. — The  general  will  be  sent. — Caesar  will  be  recalled.^ — 
The  laws  were  unjust. 

D2 


43 


THIRD   DECLENSION. 


LESSON  XV. 
Nouns, — Third  Declension^  continued. 


(102.) 

PARADIGMS. NEUTER    FORMS. 

Sing. 

Sea  (n.). 

Song  (n.). 

Work  (n.). 

Animal  (n.). 

N.,  A.,  V. 
G, 
D. 

Abl. 

mar-e. 
mar-Ts. 
mar-i. 
mar-i. 

carmen, 
carmin-is. 
carmin-i. 
carmine. 

opiis. 
oper-is. 
6per-i. 
6per-e. 

animal, 
animal-is. 
animal-i. 
animal-i. 

Plur. 

Seas. 

Soa-js. 

Works. 

Animals. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

G. 
D.,  Abl. 

mar-ia. 

mar-iiim. 

mar-ibus. 

carmin-a. 

carmin-um. 

carmin-ibus. 

6per-a. 

6per-um. 

oper-ibiis. 

animal-Ta. 

animal-ium. 

animal-ibus. 

Rem.  1.  Neuters  whose  nom.  ends  in  al,  ar,  or  e,  take  i  for  abl.  sinsp. 

ending;  la,  nom.  plur.,  and  ium,  gen.  plur. 
2.  Partial  Rule  of  Gender. — Noims  whose  stems  end  in  a  1  or  ar  are 

neuter. 


(103.) 

I.   Vocabulary. 


EXERCISE. 


To  cure,  heal,  sanarS. 

To  mitigate,  mitigare. 

River,  flumen,  (flumin)  is  (n.). 

To  swim  across,  transnare  (gov.  acc). 

Work,  opus,  (oper)  is  (n.). 

Fish,  piscis,  (pise)  is  (m.). 

Tim£,  tempus,  (tempor)  is  (n.). 

To  change,  mutar6. 

Man,  homS,  (homin)  is  (m.). 

Stormy,  turbid,  turbidiis,  ft,  um. 


Name,  nomen,  (nomin)  is  (n.). 

To  enrol,  conscrlbere. 

Treaty,  foediis,  (foedSr)  is  (n.). 

To  violate,  violare. 

Spoil  or  booty,  praeda,  as. 

Ady,  Bociiis,  i. 

Summer,  aestas,  (aestat)  is  (f.). 

Cold,  frigus,  (frigor)  is  (n.). 

Burden,  onus,  (oner)  is  (n.). 

To  carry,  portarg. 

Wmind,  vulnus,  (vulner)  is  (n.). 

II.   Translate  into  English. 

Consul  nomina  conscribit. — Caesar  fcedus  (acc.)  vi61ab2,t,  6t 
praedam  sociis  (54)  dabat. — ^stas  frigus  (acc.)  mitigS,t. — Per- 
fugae  fliimen  (acc.)  transnabant. — Magnum  opiis  est. — Flumen 
piscibiis  abundat  (66,  L,  a). — Tempus  homines  mutat. — Tem- 
pora  mutantur. — Frigus  aestate  (93,  II.,  R.)  mitigabitur. — 
Copiae  Belgariim  flumina  transnabant.  —  Servus  onus  (acc.) 
magnum  poitat. — Caesar  npmina  non  conscribet. — Onus  mag- 
num est. — Medicina  vulnus  sanat. — Carmiua  puellas  delectant. 
— NominS,  hominum  mutabuntiir. — Mari3,  turbid^,  sunt. — FIu- 
m6n  magnum  erat  turbidiim. — Magn&  sunt  onSrS,  captivorum. 


THIRD  DECLENSION.  43 

III.   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  Germans  violate  treaties. — The  consuls  will  not  enrol 
the  names. — The  slaves  were  carrying  great  burdens. — The 
messenger  was-swimming-across  the  river. — The  boy  swims- 
across  the  river. — Great  burdens  ai*e  carried. — The  bm-den  will 
be  carried  by  the  slave. — The  rivers  abound  in  fish  {QQ,  II.,  a). — 
The  wounds  are  healed. — The  burdens  are  great. — The  lieu- 
tenant will  not  violate  the  ti'eaty. — The  names  are  enrolled  by 
the  consuls  (93,  II.). — The  treaty  is  violated. — The  treaty  is 
violated  by  Caesar. — The  treaty  will  be  violated,  and  the  spoil 
will  be  given  to  the  allies  (dat.). — The  consul  enrols  the  names 
of  the  deserters. — The  names  of  the  deserters  will  be  enrolled. 

The  woimds  of  the  prisoners  will  be  healed. 


§  11. 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  SECOND  CLASS. 


LESSON  XVL 

Adjectives, — Second  Class, — Two  Endings, 

(104.)  Adjectives  of  the  Second  Class  have  is  in 

the  nom.  sing,  for  masc,  and  fern,  endings,  and  e  for 

the  neuter.     They  are  decUned  throughout  hke  the 

third  declension  of  nouns ;  e.  ^.,  brevis,  short. 

(105.)  PARADIGM. 


SINGULAK. 

PLUKAL.                                     1 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N.V. 

brev-is. 

brev-is. 

brev-e. 

brev-es. 

brev-es. 

brev-ia. 

G. 

brev-is. 

brev-is. 

brev-is. 

brev-ium. 

brev-ium. 

brev-ium. 

D. 

brev-L 

brev-i. 

brev-i. 

brev-ibus. 

brev-ibus. 

brev-ibiis. 

Ace. 

brev-em. 

brev-ein. 

brev-e. 

brev-es. 

brev-es. 

brev-ia. 

Abl. 

brev-L 

brev-i. 

brev-L 

brev-ibiis. 

brev-ibiis. 

brev-ibus. 

Rem.  1.  Twelve  adjectives*  of  this  class  take  gr  for  the  ending  of 
the  nom.  sing.  masc.  instead  of  is;  e.  g'.,  acer,  acris,  acre  ;  cele- 
ber,  Celebris,  celebre. 
Rem.  2.  The  abl.  has  e  instead  of  i  in  juvenis,  a  youth;  aedilis, 

(Bdile.    The  gen.  pL  has  iim  instead  ofiiimincgler,  swifL 
(106.)  EXERCISE. 

L   Vocabulary, 

Uticertain,  incertus,  a,  iim. 
Useful,  utilis,  6. 
Iron,  ferrum,  L 

Gold,  aurum,  L  » 

Severe,  heavy,  gravis,  8. 
Life,  vita,  se  (f.). 
Brave,  fortis,  e. 
Patiently,  p&tientSr  (adv.). 
Wolf,  lupus,  i  (m.). 
Like,  similis,  6. 

A  chief,  princeps,  (princip)  is  (c,  25, 
IV.). 


Father,  pater,  (patr)  is. 
Noble,  nobilis,  e. 

-^^«^^'  ?onmis,g. 

All,  the  whole,  5 

Sweet,  dulcis,  e. 

To  demand,  poscere. 

Soldier,  miles,  (milit)  is  (m.). 

Study,  zeal,  studium,  i. 

Kind,hem^\\s,  a,  um. 

Dog,  canis,  (c&n)  is  (c,  25,  IV.). 

To  endure,  t6l6rar6. 

Hostage,  obses,  (obsid)is  (c,  25,  IV.). 


Acer,  sharp. 
Alacer,  cheerful. 
CampestSr,  oftheplain. 
CSlSbSr,  famous. 


C6l6r,  swift. 
Equester,  equestrian. 
Paluster,  marshy. 
P6dest6r,  pedestrian. 


Saluber,  salubrious. 
Sylvester,  woody. 
Terrester,  terrestrial. 
Volucer,  swift. 


ADJECTIVES,  SECOND  CLASS.  45 


Pater  fill 5  benignus  est. 
Cams  lup5  siimlis  est. 


II.  Examples. 

{a)  The  father  is  kind  to  his 

son, 
{b)   The  dog  is  like  {to)  the 
wolf, 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  dative  case  is  used  with  sll  adjec- 
tives that  are  followed  by  the  words  to  or  for  in  Eng- 
lish :  hence  with  adjectives  expressing  (a)  advantage  or 
disadvantage,  (b)  likeness  or  unlikeness, 
[Adjectives  of  likeness  or  ujilikeness  also  take  the  gen.] 

^III.   Translate  into  English. 

Milites  omnes  periciilum  timent. — Imperator  fortis  milites 
omnes  convocat. — Vita  brevis  est. — Vita  est  brevis  et  incerta. — 
Viniim  est  dulce. — Principes  fortes  oppida  omnia  muniebant. — 
Caesar  obsides  nobiles  poscit. — Tempiis  breve  est. — Non  omnes 
milites  sunt  fortes. — Ferriim  utile  est. — Auriim  et  ferriim  sunt 
utiEa  hominibus  (106,  II.,  c). — Miles  vulnus  gr§,ve  patienter 
tolerat. — Consul  fortis  perictila  n5n  timebit. — Ferriim  utile 
hominibus  (106,  II.,  c)  est. — Milites  fortes  vulnera  gravia  pa- 
tienter tolerabunt. — Studiiim  est  pueris  (106,  II.,  c)  utile. — 
Imperator  militibus  (106,  II.,  c)  benignus  erat. — Canis  lupo 
similis  est. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  noble  queen  comes  to  the  city. — The  brave  lieutenant  en- 
dures patiently  (his)  severe  wound. — All  the  soldiers  hasten  to 
the  camp. — The  brave  chiefs  will  fortify  many  towns — The 
noble  hostages  come  to  Caesar  (63,  I.,  i^'). — The  time  is  un- 
<;ertain. — Soldiers  are  not  always  useful. — Towns  are  useful 
for  men  (106,  II.,  c). — Noble  ambassadors  are  sent. — Many 
hostages  are  demanded  by  the  consuls  (93,  II.). — All  the 
soldiers  will  be  called  together. — Not  all  chiefs  are  noble. — 
Wine  is  sweet  and  iron  is  useful. — The  dangers  are  not  fear- 
ed by  the  brave  soldiers  (93,  II.). — The  brave  lieutenant 
praises  the  noble  chief. — Dogs  are  like  wolves  (106,  II.). — 
The  study  of  letters  (litterariim)  is  useful  for  all  (106,  II.). — 
The  soldiers  are  kind  to  the  prisoners  (106,  II.). — Gold  is  heavy. 
— Iron  is  not  like  gold  (106,  II.). 

Even  in  these,  the  ending  is  is  sometimes  found  in  nom.  sing.  masc. ; 
e.  g.,  tumuUus  eqvsstris,  Liv.,  xsix.,  35. 


§  12. 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  CLASS. 


LESSON  XVII. 

Adjectives, — Third  Class. — One  Ending. 

(107.)  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Class  have  but  one 
ending  in  the  nominative  for  all  three  genders ;  e,g,, 
felix  (m.,  f.,  n.),  happy ;  audax  (m.,  f.,  n.),  hold: 
pauper  (m.,  f.,  n.),  poor. 

-Felix,  happy. 


(108.) 


PARADIGM.- 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL.                                    1 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N.V. 

fellx. 

feHx. 

fellx. 

fellc-es. 

fellc-es. 

felic-ia. 

a. 

fellc-is. 

fellc-is. 

fellc-is. 

felic-ium. 

fellc-ium. 

felic-ium. 

J). 

felTc-1. 

felTc-i. 

fellc-i. 

fellc-ibus. 

felic-ibus. 

felic-ibus. 

Ace. 

fellc-6m. 

felic-em. 

fellx. 

felloes. 

felic-es. 

felic-ia. 

Abl. 

fellc-i. 

felic-i. 

felic-T. 

felic-ibiis. 

felic-ibus. 

felic-ibus. 

[Rem,  1.  The  abl.  has  e  instead  of  i  (a)  in  pauper,  poor;  sen  ex,  old 
(gen.  senis) ;  princeps.  chief;  compos,  possessed  of,  and  most  end- 
ing in  es;  e.  g:,  hospes,  guest;  pub 6s,  grown  up,  &c.  Also  in 
the  compounds  of  corpiis,  color,  and  pes. 

{b)  Participles  in  ns  have,  as  participles,  e,  but  as  adjectives  i;  e.  g., 
florente  r6sa,  the  rose  blooming;  florenti  rosa,  m  «  blooming 
rose. 

(c)  Adjectives  used  as  nouns  take  e ;  e.  g.,  sapiens,  a  wise  man, 
abl.  sapiente. 

Rem.  2.  The  gen.  pi.  takes  u m  instead  of  i ii m  in  v  e  t  u  s,  old  (veteriim) ; 
censors,  partaking  of ;  d  e  g  e  n  6  r,  dege  nerate ;  dives,  rich  ; 
Ino^ 8,  helpless  ;  m.^ m or,  mindful ;  im.TaeraoT,  unmindful ;  sjap- 
pi  ex,  suppliant;  uber,  rich;  vigil,  watching.  Also  in  all  which 
take  6  in  the  abl. ;  e.  g.t  princeps,  principg,  principiim.] 


OF  THE 
ADJECTIVES. THIRD  ClMJB.  .         47 


Stag,  cervus,  i. 

Powerful,  potens,  (potent)  Is  (107). 

Scout,  explorator,  is  (m.). 

To  kill,  occidere. 

Battle,  praelitim,  i. 

And,  et  (conj.). 

Swift,  velox,  (veloc)  is. 

Horse,  6quus,  i. 

Citizen,  cms,  (civ)  is  (c,  25,  TV.). 


(109.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocabulary. 

War,  belluin,  i. 

Fierce,  Strox,  (Stroc)  is  (107). 

To  wage,  carry  on,  gerere. 

Horse-soldier,  equ6s,  (equit)  is  (m.). 

Tenacious,  tenax,  (tenac)  is  (107). 

Wise,  sapiens,  (sapient)  is  (107). 

Death,  mors,  (mort)  is  (f.). 

To  renew,  redint^grare. 

Rich,  dives,  (divit)  is  (107). 

To  terrify,  terrere. 

II.  Example. 

The  inhabitants  carry  on  a  I  Incolae  bellum  §,trox  gerunt. 
fierce  war.  j  [Refer  to  78,  II.,  a.] 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Incolae  bella  magna  et  atrocia  gerunt. — Nuntiiis  velox  ad  castr^ 
v^nit. — Equites  veloces  ad  sylvam  festinant. — Vir  sapiens  mor- 
tem non  timet. — Discipuliis  memoriam  tenacem  hab^t. — Me- 
moria  in  pueris  est  tenax. — Imperator  nuntiiim  velocem  mittdt. 
— Principes  fortes  prgelium  atrox  redintegrabunt. — Cervus  ve- 
lox est. — Equus  velox  currit. — Canes  sunt  veloces. — Sapiens 
(82,  I.,  R.)  non  semper  dives  est. — Divites  non  semper  beat! 
sunt.' — Princeps  potens  legates  mittit. — Principes  potentes 
captives  occidunt. — Imperator  principes  omnes  convocat. 

ly.   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  thick  woods  terrify  the  swift  messenger. — The  fierce 
battle  terrifies  all  the  inhabitants. — The  noble  general  was  prais- 
ing the  swift  messenger. — The  illustrious  consul  sends  ambas- 
sadors to  (63,  I.,  E^^)  the  powerful  chief. — The  powerful 
chief  will  kill  aU  the  prisoners. — Rich  (men)  are  not  always 
wise. — The  wise  (man)  does  not  fear  the  fierce  battle. — The 
soldiers  praise  the  rich  citizen. — The  memoiy  in  boys  is  al- 
ways tenacious. — Dogs  and  horses  are  swift. — The  consul 
will  not  renew  the  fierce  battle. — The  illustrious  general  will 
recall  the  swift  horse-soldiers. — Rich  citizens  fear  fierce  wars. 
— The  fierce  battles  were  ten-ifying  all  the  hostages. — The 
wise  general  calls-together  all  the  ambassadors. — The  fierce 
batde  will  be  renewed. — All  the  prisoners  will  be  killed  by  the 
powerful  chiefs  (93,  II.). — The  swift  messengers  are  frighten- 
ed.— Great  wars  are  carried  on. — Rich  citizens  are  killed. 


§  13. 
FOURTH  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


LESSON  xvm. 

Nouns. — Fourth  Declension. 

(110.)  The  Fourth  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 
whose  gen.  sing,  ends  in  us  (long).  The  nom.  ending 
for  masculines  is  u  s,  and  for  neuters  u ;  e.  g.,  f  r  u  c  t- 
u  s,  fruity  masc. ;  c  o  r  n  -  u,  horn,  neut. 

(111.)  The  case-endings  are  as  follows: 


Sing. 

Masc. 

Neut. 

Plur. 

Masc. 

Neut. 

N.  and  V. 

US. 

U. 

N.  and  V. 

US. 

ua. 

Gen. 

US. 

US  or  u. 

Gen. 

tium. 

uum. 

Dat. 

Ul. 

u. 

Dat. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

Ace. 

um. 

u. 

Ace. 

us. 

ua. 

Abl. 

u. 

u. 

Abl. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

(112.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stems  fruct- 
and  corn-,  we  get  the 

PARADIGM.* 


Sing.,  fruit  (m.). 

Plur.,  fruit 

Sing.,  horn  ( n. ). 

Plur.,homB. 

N.  and  V. 

fhict-us. 

fruct-us. 

Gen. 

fract-us. 

fruct-uum. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

corn-u. 

com-iia. 

Dat. 

fract-ui. 

fruct-ibiis. 

Gen. 

corn-US,  or  u. 

com-uum. 

Ace. 

fruet-um. 

fruct-us. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

com-u. 

com-ibus. 

Abl. 

fract-u. 

fruct-ibus. 

[Rem.  1.  The  following  take  ubus  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  instead  of 
ibiis,  viz.,  acus  (f,),  needle;  arcus  (m.),  bow ;  artus  (m.),  joint; 
ficiis  (.t), Jig-tree;  laciis  (m.),  lake;  partus  (m.),  birth;  portQs 
{m.),  harbor ;  querciis  (f.),  oak;  specus  (m.),  den;  tribiis  (f.), 
tribe;  pecii  (n.),  cattle;  v6ru  (n.),  a  spit.^] 

2.  The  feminine  nouns  of  this  declension  are,  acGs,  needle;  anus, 

*  The  fourth  declension  is  only  a  contracted  form  of  the  third :  thus, 

N.      fruct-us. 

G.      fruct-uis,  contr.  fructus. 

D.      fruct-ui. 

Ace.  fnict  mm,  contr.  fructOm,  &c. 
t  The  following  verses  embrace  these : 

Arcus,  actts,  portQs,  vSru, 
Ficus,  lactis,  artiis, 

SpgciSs,  querciis ;  also,  pScu, 
TribOs  too,  and  partus. 


NOUNS.— FOURTH  DECLENSION; 


49 


old  woman;  domiis,  house;  ficns,  Jig ;  mSniis,  hand;  nuriis, 
daughter-in-law  ;  It  or  t^u^,  gallery  ;   tribus,  tribe;    querctts, 
oak.    Also,  Idus,  -uum  oXi  only  in  plural),  tfie  Ides."* 
3.  Domtis  (f.),  house,  is  thus^clined: 


Sing. 
Plnr. 


K,  V. 
dom-us. 

dom-us. 


G. 

-us.  ? 


-uum, 
-orum. 


»J 


D. 

-ui. 

-ibus. 


Ace. 


-OS, 

-us  (rarely) 


J 


Abl. 
-6. 

-ibiis. 


-uiuiii.  3  -us  ^^^a^e^y;.  ) 

4.  The  gen.  do  mi  is  used  only  in  the  sense  of  at  home;  e.  g.,  do  mi 
Ta^ss,  at  my  home,  at  my  house. 
-fi^3.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 


To  lead  over,  or  across,  transducSre. 

Approach,  adventus,  us  (m.). 

To  a2vait,  expectare. 

Singing,  eantus,  us  (m.). 

Fi'uit,  fructus,  us  (m.). 

To  adorn,  omarg. 

Four,  quattuor  (indeclin.). 

To  build,  aedificarS. 

Horn,  comu,  us  (n.). 

Army,  exercitus,  us  (m.). 

Harbour,  portus,  us  (m.). 

Enemy,  hostis,  (host)  is  (c,  25,  IV.). 

Bird,  avis,  (av)  is  (f.). 

II.  Exarkples. 

(a)  The  Helvetians  lead 
part  of  their  forces  across 
the  Rhine, 

(6)  Ccesar  leads  a  great  ar- 
my of  Germans  across  the 
Rhine. 


Grief,  luctus,  iist  (m.). 

To  lay  aside,  dep6n6r6. 

Sadness,  moeror,  orist  (m.). 

Tempest,  procella,  se. 

To  raise,  tollere. 

Wave,  fluctus,  us  (m.). 

Star,  sidus,  (sider)  is  (n.)  (102). 

^^ore,.  llttus,  (littor)  is  (n.)  (102). 

Wind,  ventus,  i  (m.). 

Roll,  volvere. 

Boundary,  finis,  (fin)  is  (m.). 

The  Rhine,  Uhenus,  i. 

Ship,  navis,  (nav)  is  (f). 

Helve  til     partem     copiarum 
Rhenura  transducunt. 


C  ae  s  a  r     magnum    Germano- 
riim     exercitum     trans 
R  h  e  n  u  m  ti-ansducit. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — (a)  Verbs  compounded  with  the  prepo- 
sition trans  are  generally  followed  by  two  accusatives ;  e, 
g.,  partem  and  Rhenum  in  (a), 
{h)  But  sometimes  the  preposition  is  repeated ;  e.  g.^  trans 
in(6). 
III.   Translate  into  English. 
Helve  til  Ccesdrzs  (38,  h)  adventiim  expectabant. — Adventu 


*  Acus,  manus,  tribus,  domiis,  porticus,  and  idus. 
the  general  rule  (25,  II.). 
t  M.osror=^sile7it  ginef;  luctQs  =  mourning. 


The  rest  are  fern,  by 


50  NOUNS.— FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

(abl.,  65,  a)  Caesarls  hostes  terrentiir. — Avis  puellam  cantu  (55, 
a)  delectat. — Fructus  arb6res  (ace,  pi.)  ornant. — Fructus  terrae 
^giicolam  delectant. — Pat6r  domus  (ace.  pi.)  quattuor  sedifica- 
bit. — Naves  in  portti  sunt. — Regina  luctiim  deponit. — Sapientes 
luctiim  et  moerorem  deponunt. — Procella  magnos  flucttis  (ace. 
pi.)  toUebat. — Procella  fluctus  (ace.  pL)  ad  siderS,  toUit. — Puer 
tauriim  cornu  (abl.,  55,  a)  tenet. — Cornua  cervi  magna  sunt.— 
Fluctus  magni  ventis  (55,  a)  volvuntiir. — Legatus  exercitura  du- 
cit. — Legatus  ab  ^duis  (from  the  iEduans ;  i.  6.,  their  country) 
exercitum  ducit. — Agi-icola  tam-um  cornibiis  (55,  a)  tenebat. — 
Adventiis  patris  puellam  delectabit. — Caesar  exercitiini  flum^n 
transducit  (113,  II.,  a). — Legatus  per  fines  Helvetiorum  exer- 
citiim  ducet. — Ariovistus  Germanos  ti'ans  Rheniira  transducit 
(113,  II.,  6). 

Rem.  Home  is  translated  by  do  mil  m,  the  ace.  of  domns;  thus,  The 
sailor  leads  the  boy  liome — ^Nauta  puerum  do  mum  ducit. 

IV.   Translate  into  Latin. 

My  father  will  build  four  houses. — The  tempest  is  rolling 
great  waves  to  the  shores  (63, 1.,  ^^). — Vast  waves  are  raised 
to  the  stars  by  tempests. — The  turbid  sea  is  roUing  vast  waves 
to  the  shores. — The  farmer  leads  the  girls  home  from  (ah)  the 
city. — Caesar  will  lead  the  army  over  the  turbid  river. — Cassius 
leads  the  army  through  the  boundaries  of  the  ^duans  and 
Helvetians. — The  Helvetians  await  the  coming  of  Caesar. — 
The  boy  will  hold  the  bull  by  the  horns  (55,  a). — The  farmer 
is  delighted  by  the  fruits  (55,  a)  of  the  earth. — The  king  lays 
aside  his  griefs  and  sadness. — The  singing  of  the  birds  (avium) 
will  delight  the  soldiers. — The  trees  are  adorned  by  many  fruits. 
— There  are  many  large  ships  in  the  harbour. — The  winds  raise 
the  great  waves  to  the  stars. — The  lieutenant  was  leading  the 
army  of  the  JEduans  across  the  Rhine.  (Repeat  trans  (113, 
tl.,  h)  ). — The  horns  of  bulls  are  large. — The  queen  will  lay 
aside  her  grief  and  sadness, — The  master  sends  his  slaves  home 


§  14. 
FIFTH  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


LESSON  XIX. 

Nouns, — Fifth  Declension, 
(114.)  The  Fifth  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 

whose  gen,  ending  is  6  i.     The  nom,  ending  is  e  s. 
(115.)  There  are  but  few  nouns  of  this  declension, 

and  they  are  all  feminine  except  dies,  day,  and  me- 

ridies,  mid-day;  and  even  dies  is  fern,  in  the  sing. 

when'  it  means  a  fixed  day. 

(116.)  The  case-endings  are  as  follows: 


Sing. 
Plur. 

N.V. 

es. 
es. 

G. 

Si. 
erum. 

D. 

SI. 
ebiis. 

Ace. 
em. 

es. 

AbL 
e. 

ebils. 

Rem.  In  the  gen.  and  dat.  the  e  in  e  lis  long"  when  a  vowel  stands  be- 
fore it ;  e.  ^.,  di-ei:  short  when  a  consonant  stands  before  it;  e.  g., 
fid-6i. 

(117.)  By  adding  the  endings  to  the  stems  r-  and 


di-,  we  get  the 


PARADIGMS. 


Thin^  (f.). 
Smgular. 

N.V. 

G. 

D. 

Ace. 

AbL 

r-es. 

r-ei. 

r-ei. 

r-Sm. 

r-e. 

Plural. 

r-es. 

r-erum. 

r-ebus. 

r-es. 

r-ebus. 

Dai/  {m.). 

Singular. 

di-gs. 

di-ei. 

di-ei. 

di-gm. 

dY-e. 

Plural. 

di-es. 

di-erum. 

di-ebiis. 

di-es. 

di-ebus. 

Eem.  Only  res,  dies,  species 
dat,  and  abl.  plur.  are  wanting 

EX  ERCISE. 


have  the  plur.  complete ;  the  gen., 
in  all  others. 


(118.) 
<-'^  1.   Vocabulary, 

Hope,  spes,  6i. 

Day,  dies,  ei  (m.). 

To  appoint,  constituerS, 

To  lead  out,  ediicerg. 

To  lead  back,  reducere. 

Line  of  battle,  acies,  ei. 

To  draw  upr  instruere. 

About,  circiter  {prep,  with  ace). 

About  mid-day,  circitSr  meridigm. 

Victory,  victoria,  e. 


Mid-day,  mgridies,  ei  (m.). 

Sixth,  sextus,  a,  um. 

Reward,  praemium,  i. 

Sun,  sol,  (sol)  is  (m.). 

Setting,  occasus,  \is. 

Seventh,  septimus,  a,  um. 

Out  of,  e  or  en  {prep,  with  ablative). 

Faith,  promise,  fides,  6i. 

T?ie  next,  post^riis,  ft,  Um. 

To  fight,  pugnftrS. 


52  NOUNS. FIFTH  DECLENSION. 


Caesar  aci^m  instruit. 
Posterodie  castra  movent. 


II.  Examples, 

(a)  Ccesar  draws  up  the  line 
of  battle. 

(b)  The  next  day  they  move 
the  camp, 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax, — The  point  of  time  at  which  any  thing 
occm-s  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  ;  e.  g,,  in  (b)postero 
die, — At  sun-set  =  solisoccasu. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Spes  victoriae  milites  delectat. — Milites  spe  (93,  II.,  R.)  vic- 
toiiae  delectantiir. — Diesvenit. — Caesar  diem  constituit. — Caesar 
diem  ciim  legatis  constituit. — Imperator  fortis  exercitiim  educit, 
et  aciem  instruit. — Circiter  meridiem  pugnant. — Caesar,  circiter 
meridiem,  exercitiim  in  castra  reducit. — Sexto  die  (118,  II.,  c) 
Caesar  exercitiim  ex  castris  ediicit. — Spes  praemioriim  piieros 
delectat. — Piieri  spe  praemioriim  delectantur. — Solis  occasu 
Helve  til  castra  movebant. — Septimo  die  Belgae  copias  omnes 
ex  castris  educebant. — Solis  occasii  Ariovistus  ^ciem  instriiit. 
— Circiter  meridiem  proeliiim  redintegrabunt. — Consiil  clariis 
diem  ciim  legatis  constituit. — Principes  nobiles  fidem  violant. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin.^ 

The  hope  of  victory  delights  the  noble  chiefs. — The  consul 
about  mid-day  leads  out  the  army  and  renews  the  fierce  battle. 
— The  powerful  chiefs,  at  the-setting  of-the-sun  (118,  II.,  c), 
kill  all  the  prisoners. — The  day  will  come. — The  consul,  at  the 
setting  of  the  sun,  will  renew  the  great  battle. — At  the  setting 
of  the  sun  the  great  battle  will  be  renewed. — On  the  sixth  day 
all  the  forces  will  be  led  back  to  the  camp. — The  Germans  ap- 
point a  day  with  Caesar. — The  next  day  the  Germans  move 
(their)  camp.— Ariovistus,  on  the  next  day,  draws  out  the  line 
of  battle. — Caesar  appoints  the  mid-day  with  the  ambassadors. — 
About  mid-day  the  messengers  come. — About  mid-day  the  con- 
sul will  come. — Caesar  will  not  violate  (his)  promise. 


§  15. 
PRONOUNS.     (XX.— XXXI.) 


LESSON  XX. 

Pronouns. — Substantive-Personal  and  Adjective^ 
Personal. —  Verbs,  First  Person. 

(119.)  The  three  pronouns  eg 5,  /;  tu,  thou;  sui,  of 
Mmself,  herself,  itself,  are  called  Substantive,  because 
they  are  used  as  substantives,  not  as  adjectives ;  and 
Personal,  because  they  express  the  person  speakings 
the  person  spoken  to,  and  the  person  spoken  of. 

(120.)  The  Substantive-Personal  Pronoun*  of  the 
first  person  is  thus  decUned : 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing,    ggo,  L 
Plur.    nos,  we. 

mei,  of  me. 

^o«*^^      I  of  us. 
nostrum,  5 

mih!,  to  me. 
nobis,  to  XLS. 

me,  me. 
nos,  us. 

me,  hy  me,  &c. 
nobis,  by  us,  Sec. 

(121.)  Derived  from  the  Substantive-Personal  Pro- 
nouns are  the  Adjective- Personal  or  Possessive  Pro- 
nouns ;  called  Adjective,  because  they  agree  with 
nouns ;  and  Possessive,  because  they  express  possession 
(my,  thy,  his,  &c.). 

(122.)  The  Adjective- Personal  Pronouns  of  the^r5^ 
person  are  declined,  in  both  sing,  and  plur.,  like  adjec- 
tives of  the  First  Class  (76,  77,  a).     They  are. 


(«) 

Derived  frommeX, 

N. 

meus. 

mea,    meum,  my,  mine. 

G. 

mel, 
&c. 

meae,    mei,  of  my  (voc.  masc.  mi). 
&c.(Uke  bonus,  76.) 

m 

"        from  nostrl. 

N. 

noster, 

nostra,    nostrum,  our,  ours. 

G. 

nostri, 
&c. 

nostrsB,    nostri,  of  our. 
Sec.  (like  p  u  1  c  h  6  r,  77,  a). 

(123.)  The  following  forms  of  Verbs  in  the  first  per 
son  must  now  be  learned : 

E2 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


FIRST    CONJUGATION  :    FIRST    PERSON    ENDINGS. 


INFIN.  ACT.,  are. 

INFIN.  PASS.,  ari.                           |j 

Indie,  present. 

Imperfect. 

Future.                  | 

1st  Sing. 
1st  Plur. 

Act. 
amus. 

Pass. 

or. 
amur. 

Act. 
abam. 
abamus. 

Pass. 

abar. 
abamar. 

Act. 
abd. 
abimus. 

Pass. 
abor. 
abimur. 

(124.)  Thus,  from  the  stem  am,  of  am- a  re,  to  love, 
we  have : 


INFIN.  ACT.,  amare,  to  love. 


INFIN.  PASS.,  dmarl,  to  be  loved. 


Indie.  Pres. 


Act. 
am-6, 
I  love. 
dju-amus, 
toe  love. 

Pass. 
am-6r, 
/  am  loved. 
am-amur, 
we  are  loved. 

Imperfect. 


Act. 
am-abam, 
I  teas  loving. 
am-abamus, 
we  were  loving. 


Pass. 
am-abar, 
/  was  loved. 
am-abamur, 
we  were  loved. 


Future. 


A  a. 
am-abd, 
/  shall  love. 
am-abimus, 
we  shall  love. 


Pass. 
am-abor, 
/  shall  be  loved. 
am-abiraur, 
we  shall  be  loved. 


[Rem.  The  student  will  learn  the  passive  endings  readily  by  observing 
that  r  is  the  passive  characteristic,  which  is  added  to  the  active ;  the  con- 
sonant ending  of  the  active,  where  it  has  one,  being  dropped.] 
(125.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocabulary, 

Book,  ITber,  bri  (m.),  (64). 
Friend,  amicus,  i  (m.). 
Brother,  frater,  (fratr)  is  (m.). 
Cicero,  Cicero,  (Ciceron)  is  (m.). 
Sister,  soror,  (soror)  is  (f.). 
With   (i.   e.,  at  one's  house),  &pud 

(prep.  ace). 
Fault,  ctdp&,  83. 
Yesterday,  heri  (adv.). 

II.  Examples, 
{a)  I  have  a  hook. 


All   my   (possessions),   omnia   meft 

(neut.  pL). 
Five,  quinque. 
Sharply,  acriter. 
To-morrow,  eras  (adv.). 
Very  much,  greatly,  valde  (adv.). 
To  blame,  vitiiperarS. 
To  sing,  cantare. 
Threet  tres,  tri&  (adj.  of  Class  II.). 


Est  mihi  lib^r  (i.  e.,  there  is 
a  booJc  to  me). 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  dative  case  is  used  with  est  or  sunt, 
to  denote  the  person  who  has  or  possesses  something.* 
The  thing  possessed  is  nom.  to  est  or  sunt. 


Puer  me  cum  in  horto  h6ri 
ambulabat. 


(6)  The  hoy  wa^  walking 
with  me  in  the  garden  yes- 
terday. 

Rule  of  Position, — The  preposition  cum  is  sufficed  to  the 
personal  pronouns ;  e.  ^.,  m  e  c  ii  m,  with  me  ;*ii 6 bi s  c  u  m, 
with  us,  instead  of  cum  me,  cum  nobis. 
[Recollect  that  the  personal  and  possessive  pron6uns  are  not  expressed 
in  Latin,  unless  emphasis  or  perspicuity  demands  it.] 

*  This  is  called  the  Dative  of  Possession,  and  should  always  be  refen'ed 
tQ  BA  Auoh  hv  (he  paplL 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. FIRST  PERSON.  55 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Ego  canto,  amicus  audit. — Ego  et  frater  ambulamiis.* — Ego 
6t  filiiis  meiis  festinamus. — Sunt  mihi  tres  libri  (125,  II.,  a).— 
Sunt  mihi  quattuor  equi  et  quinqiie  c^nes. — In  horto  ambula- 
bain. — A  b6nis  (82,  I.,  R.)  amabor. — Cicero  ^me  laudatiir. — - 
Hostes  nobisciim  (125,  II.,  b)  acriter  pugnant. — H^ri  in  agris 
ambulabamiis. — Pater  ad  nos  nuntiiim  mittet. — Culpa  nostra  est. 
— Cras  in  horto  caenabimiis. — Delectabamiir. — Pueri  in  horto 
nobiscum  ambiilabunt. — Litterarum  studiumf  (38,  h)  mihi  (106, 
II.)  utilS  erit. — A  magistro  laudabar. — OmniS,  mea  mecum 
porto. — Ego  a  frati-e  valde  amor. — Nos  laudamur,  puellae  vitu- 
perantiir. — Nos  a  magistro  verberabimiir. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin, 

We  praise  the  beautiful  girl. — We  have  (125,  II.,  a)  four  large 
cups — I  have  (=  there  are  to  me)  four  sons  and  three  daughters 
(125,  II.,  a). — We  shall  praise  Caesar's  brave  soldiers. — I  walk, 
my  friend  rides. — I  and  my  sister  wiU  ride.* — I  and  my  brother 
will  walk*  in  the  king's  garden.^ — I  and  my  father  will  sup*  in 
the  garden  to-morrow. — We  shall  always  praise  the  wise  and 
good. — The  works  of  Cicero  will  be  praised  by  vs  (93,  II.,  fe), 
the  works  of  Caesar  by  the  soldiers. — The  fault  is  mine. — ^We 
have  many  large  cups  (125,  II.,  a). — I  have  three  beautiful  sisters. 
—I  have  four  brothers. — My  father  will  walk  with  me  in  Cae- 
sar's garden  {Ccesdris  in  hortd),t — The  study  of  literature  is 
useful  to  us  (X06,  II.). — To-day  we  shaU  sup  with  (apud) 
Crassus.  • 


LESSON  XXI. 

Pronouns,  Personal  and  Possessive,  continued, — Verbs^ 
First  Person,  continued. 
(126.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  for 
the  first  person  in  verbs  of  the 

*  If  a  predicate  have  two  or  more  nominatives,  connected  by  a  conjunc- 
tion, it  takes  generally  the  plural  number ;  and  if  the  nominatives  be  of 
different  persons,  the  verb  takes  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second, 
the  secoiid  rather  than  the  third. 

tLittera!-umstudium  =  ^Ae  pursuit  (or  study)  of  literature  (letters). 

X  In  all  such  cases,  put  the  prep,  betwee?^  the  genitive  and  the  noon 
governed  by  the  prep. 


*» 


56 


VERBS. FIRST  PERSON^ 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

SIXGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.           |[ 

Present 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

mon- 
mon- 
mon- 

Active. 

e6. 

eb&n. 

ebo. 

Passive. 

eor. 

ebar. 

eb5r. 

Active. 

emus. 

ebamus. 

ebimus. 

Passive. 

emur. 

ebamur. 

ebimur. 

[Rem.  The  student  wiU  learn  these  forms  readily  by  observing  that 
they  differ  chiefly  from  those  of  the^rs^  conjugation  in  having  e  be- 
fore the  last  syllable  instead  of  a.  By  adding  the  endings,  as  above 
given,  to  the  stem  mon-,.  which  stands  at  the  left  hand,  he  will  form 
the  paradigm  of  monere,  to  advise.\ 

(127.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  for 
the  first  person  in  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations* 

THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.          \ 

Present. 

Imperfect 

Future. 

reg- 
reg- 
reg- 

Active. 

6. 

ebam. 
am. 

Passive. 

or. 

ebar. 

ar. 

Active. 

imus. 

ebamus. 

emus. 

Passive. 

imiir. 

ebamur. 

emur. 

[Rem.  Compare  these  with  the  endings  of  the  2d  conj.,  and  observe 
that, 

1.  In  the  ^res.  e  is  dropped  in  the  sing.,  and  i  assumed  in  the  plur. 

2.  The  imperfect  is  precisely  the  sazue. 

3.  But  th.Q  future  is  a  new  form. 

4.  By  adding  the  endings  to  the  stem  placed  at  the  left,  you  form  the 
paradigm  of  reggre,  to  rule.] 


(128.) 

FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 

STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.        ^ 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

aud- 
aud- 
aud-^ 

Active. 

id. 

iebam. 

iam. 

Passive, 

ior. 

iebar. 

iar. 

Active. 

imiis. 

iebamiis. 

iemus. 

Passive. 

imur. 

iebamur. 

iemur. 

[Rem.  Observe  tfcat  the  endings  of  the  4th  conj.  differ  from  those  of 
V     the  3d  simply  by  prefixing  the  letter  i.     In  the  1st  plur.  the  t  pre- 
fixed combines  with  that  of  the  endings  unus,  imur,  and  forms  imus, 
uniir.] 


(129.)  EXERCISE. 

aei^-Ht^  Vdcabulary. 

Fierce,  ferox,  (feroc)  is  (107). 
Nothmg,  nihil  (neut.  indecl.). 
To  he  well,  valere. 
To  arrange,  disponere. 

11.  Example, 
I  have  nothing  to  do  with 
Antony  (125,  II.,  a). 


WicTced,  improbiis,  a,  fim. 
Garrison,  proesidium,  T. 
Latin,  Latiniis,  a,  Gm. 
Antony,  Antonius,  i. 

Nihil  est  mihi  ciim  Antonio 
(i.  c,  there  is  nothing  to  mc 
with  Antony), 


VERBS. SECOND  PERSON. 


5T, 


III.  Translate  into  English, 

2d  Conjugation. — Ego  et  frater  valemiis  (125,  III.*). — ^A 
magistro  docebimur. — Linguam  Latinam  doceo. — A  patre  mo- 
neor. — ^A  magisti*o  bono  docemur. — ^Ab  hoste  timebar. — Hos- 
tium  adventiim  non  tamebo.  ^d  Conjugation. — Regebamur. — 
Praesidia  disponebamiis. — ^A  Deo  regimur. — Ego  exercitum 
ducam. — A  filio  ineo  relinquar. — Lup5s  feroces  occidimus. 
Ath  Conjugation. — Castella  muniemus. — Avium  cantum  audi- 
miis. — Cras  ad  urbem  veniam. — Nihil  est  mihi  cum  improbis. 
— Nihil  est  nobis  ciim  hostibiis. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

2d  Conjugation. — I  and  my  son  are  well  (125,  III.*). — 
We  shall  see  the  brave  soldiers. — I  am  taught  by  good  masters. 
— We  were  fearing  the  approach  of  the  enemy. — 1  was  teach- 
ing the  Latin  language. — We  shall  be  feared  by  the  enemy. — 
We  shall  be  advised  by  our  father.  3d  Conjugation. — We 
were  led  by  a  brave  general. — I  was  killing  three  wolves. — We 
are  ruled  by  a  good  king. — We  shall  arrange  the  gamsons. — • 
I  shall  bring  (ducere)  my  daughter  from  (ab)  the  city. — We 
shall  lead  the  forces  of  the  Germans.  Ath  Conjugation. — We 
were  heard  by  the  master. — We  shall  sleep  in  the  little  town 
(89,  XL). — ^We  shall  come  to  the  town  to-morrow. — I  shall  be 
heard  by  the  girls. — ^We  were  fortifying  the  towns. — We  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  foolish  (129,  II.). — I  have  nothing  to  do 
with  Caesar. 


LESSON  XXII. 
Pronouns, — Substantive-Personal  and  Adjective-Per- 
sonal,— Verbs,  Second  Person, 
(130.)  The  Substantive-Personal  Pronoun  of  the 
second  person  is  thus  declined : 


I       Norn. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


tu,  tTwu. 
vos,  you. 


tuT,  of  thee. 
vestri,      >    of 
vestrum,  \  you. 


tibi,  to  thee. 
vobis,  to  yoi 


te,  thee. 
vos,  you. 


tu,  thou. 
vos,  you. 


(131.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  of  the 
second  person  of  verbs  of  the 


58 


PERSONAL  PRONOUN. SECOND  PERSON. 


FIRST 

CONJUGATION. 

STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.                | 

Pres. 
Imp. 
Fut 

am- 
am- 
am- 

Act. 

as. 

abas, 
abis. 

Pass. 

aris. 

abaris. 

aberis. 

Act. 

atis. 

abatis. 

abitis. 

Pass. 

amM. 

abamini. 

abimim. 

(132.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocabulary. 

Yesterday,  hen.  (adv.).  I  To  wound,  vulnerare. 

To-day,  Hodie  (adv.).  I  To  fight,  pagnare. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

Cras  mecum  coenabis. — Tu  me  amas,  ego  te  amo. — Vos 
vdbisciim  pugnatis. — Tu  cantas,  nos  audimus. — In  horto  ambii- 
labatis. — Tu  a  patre  valde  amaiis. — Vos  vituperamini,  nos  lau- 
damiir. — Nihil  est  tibi  cum  Caesare. — Cras  vobisciim  coenabo. 
— Nos  laudabimur,  vos  vituperabimini. — Nihil  vobis  est  ciim  bo- 
nis.— Heri  ambiilabatis. — ^Hodie  pugnabitis. — Laudabamini. — 
Vulnerabimini. — Vocatis.  — Vocamini. — Amatis. — Amamini. 
— Cantabatas. — Vocabamini. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin, 

To-day  ye  were  supping  with  us  (125,  II.,  h), — Ye  love  us, 
we  love  you. — Ye  were  singing,  we  were  hearing. — Ye  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  king  (129,  II.). — Thou  wast  greatly 
loved  by  Caesar. — Ye  shall  be  praised  by  our  master. — Ye  shall 
t>e  blamed  by  the  good  (82, 1.,  R.). — Ye  are  called  by  the  mes- 
senger.—Thou  fightest  with  thyself*  (125,  II.,  5).— Ye  shall 
sup  with  us  to-morrow. — Thou  wilt  fight  to-morrow. — Thou 
wast  loving. — Thou  wast  loved. — Thou  wilt  blame. — Thou 
wilt  he  blamed. — Ye  are  praising. — Ye  are  praised. — Thou 
woundest. — Thou  art  wounded. 


LESSON  XXIII. 

Pronouns,  Personal  and  Possessive,  continued, — Verbs, 
Second  Person,  Second  Conjugation, 
(133.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  for 
the  second  person,  in  verbs  of  the 

*  Tecum. 


VERBS. SECOND  PERSON. 


s» 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.                   |j 

Act. 

Pass. 

Act, 

Pass. 

Pres. 

mon- 

es. 

eris. 

etis. 

eminl. 

Imp. 

mou- 

ebas. 

ebarls. 

ebatis. 

ebaminl. 

Fut. 

mon- 

ebis. 

eberis. 

ebitis. 

ebiminl. 

(134.)  The  Adjective- Personal  (or  Possessive)  Pro- 
nouns of  the  Second  Person  are,  tiiiis,  a,  um,  thy  ; 
and  vester,  vestra,  vestrum,  your, 

(a)  Derived  from  t  u  i,        |  N.  tuiis,  a,  um,  thy,  thine, 

I  G.  tui,  ae,  i,  of  thy,  &€. 
(6)  Derived  from  vestri,  N.  vester,  vesti'a,  vesti'um,  your. 
I  G.  vestri,  vestrae,  vestri,  of  your, 

(135.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 


Thou  art,  es  (Sd  person  sing.  ind. 

pres.  of  esse). 
Ye  are,  estis  (2d  person  pi.  of  do.). 
/  was,  ^ram  {1st  imperf.  do.). 
Cause,  )  causa. 

For  the  sake  of,  )  causSL  (abl.). 
To  learn,  disc6r6. 

II.  Examples, 

(a)  N  e  is  an  interrogative  particle  used  in  asking  questiojis. 
It  is  annexed  to  the  word  to  vv^hich  it  especially  refers ;  e,  g,^ 


Of  concerning',  d©  (prep.  abl.). 
To  laugh,  ridere. 
To  rejoice,  gaudere. 
Sajety,  salus,  (salut)  is  (f.). 
Leader,  guide,  dux,  (due)  is  (m.). 
Why,  cur  (adv.). 
Because,  that,  qudd  (conj.). 


(1 )  Do  you  teach  the  boy  ? 

(2)  Do  you  teach  the  boy  ? 

(3)  Do  you  teach  the  hoy  ? 


Tune  pueriim  doces  ? 
D  6  c  e  s  n  ^  pueriim  ? 
Puerumne  doces  ? 
In  (1)  tu  has  the  emphasis;  in  (2)  doces;  and  in  (3) 
p  u  e  r  ii  m. 
(6)  Ye  are  warned,  ^br  iAei  Vestrae    salutis    causit 
sake  of  your  (own)  safety,  \      m6nemini. 
Rule  of  Position. — C  a  u  s  a,  for  the  sake  of  (the  abl.  of 
causa,  a  cause),  is  always  placed  after  the  genitive  which 
depends  on  it. 
(c)  I ivas  your  leader,  |Dux  egfi   vester  er^m. 

III.   Translate  into  English, 

Videsne  serviim  meiim?  (135,  II.,  2). — Tuae  salutis  causa  , 
(135,  II.,   h)  moneris.  —  Cur  ridetis  ? — Vestrae  salutis  causa 
moneminl. — Gaudeo  quod  tu  et  pater  tuus  valetis  (125,  III.,  *)• 


60 


VERBS. SECOND  PERSON. 


— Videbasne  milites  ? — De  culpa  tua  monebaiis. — Cur  ridsba- 
tis. — Hostium  adventum  non  timebis. — Tuae  salutis  causa  mon- 
eberis. — Nos  discemus,  vos  docebimini. — Timetisne  Caesaris 
adventum? — Esne  tu  beatus  ? — Culpa  tua  est  {the  fault  is  thine), 
— Pueri  in  horto  v5biscum  ambiilabant. — M agister  ego  vester 
eram  (135,  II.,  c). 

IV.   Translate  into  Latin,* 

[The  emphatic  words  are  in  italics.] 
Did  you  see  your  master  ? — Do  you  fear  the  approach  of 
Caesar? — Are  you  happy? — You  were  warned  (advised)  for 
the  sake  of  your  own  safety. — Are  you  and  your  father  well  ? 
(125,  III.,  *). — The  fault  was  yours. — You  shall  see  the  ene- 
my, but  (sed)  shall  not  fear  (them). — I  am  your  friend. — I  was 
your  friend. — You  teach,  but  we  learn. — You  shall  teach,  but 
we  shall  learn. — ^Why  do  you  not  (non)  fear  the  master  ? — You 
were  warned  of  (d  e)  your  fault. — Do  you  see  your  slaves  ? — 
Are  you  Caesar  ? — Why  do  you  fear  the  master  ? — You  shall 
see  great  cities  and  many  men. — We  shall  sup  with  you  to-mor- 
row.— You  shaU  be  warned,  for  the  sake  of  your  own  safety. — • 
We  rejoice  that  you  and  your  daughter  are  well  (125,  III.,  *). 


LESSON  XXIV. 
Verbs,  Second  Person,  Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations, 
(136.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  of 
the  second  person  in  verbs  of  the 

THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

ACTIVE  ENDINGS, 

PASSIVE  ENDINGS.                   \ 

Pres. 

Imper. 

Fut. 

reg- 
reg- 
reg- 

2d  Sing. 

is. 
ebas. 

es. 

2d  Plur. 

itis. 

ebatis. 
etis. 

2d  Sing. 

eris. 

ebaris. 

erls. 

2d  Plur. 

imini. 

ebamini. 

emini. 

(137.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  of 
the  second  person  in  verbs  of  the 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

ACTIVE  ENDINGS. 

PASSIVE  ENDINGS.                   j 

Pres. 
Imp. 
Fut. 

aud- 
aud- 
aud- 

2d  Sing. 
IS. 

iebaa. 
ies. 

2d  Plur. 

itis. 

iebatis. 

i:tis. 

2d  Sing. 

iris. 

iebaris. 

ieris. 

2d  Plur. 

imini. 

iebamini. 

iemini. 

*  When  you,  your,  occur,  translate  them  both  in  sing,  and  plur.,  for 
the  sake  of  practice. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  61 

(138.)   Observe, 

(a)  That  the  present  endings  of  the  3d  and  4th  conjugations  are  nearly 
alike,  the  vowel  (i)  of  the  fourth  being  long  (i). 

(b)  That  the  imperfect  and  future  endings  of  the  fourth  conjugation 
diflPer  from  those  of  the  third  by  prefixing  the  letter  1. 

EXERCISE. 

(139.)   Vocabulary. 


Plant,  planta,  ae. 

To  sow,  to  plant,  sererS. 

To  find,  iuvenirS. 

Orator,  orator,  (orator)  Is  (m.). 

Voice,  vox,  (voc)  is  (f.). 

To  read,  legerfi. 


Whence,  und6  (adv.). 
Long;  longe  (adv.). 
Badly,  mSlS. 
To  punish,  punirS. 
So,  tam  (adv.). 
Bird,  avis,  (av)  is  (£) 


(140.)   Translate  into  English, 

3d  Conjugation. — Cur  n5n  scribis. — Arbores  et  plantas  s6r6- 
batas. — Hodie  ad  Caesarem  mitteris. — Cur  tam  male  scribis  ? — 
Ad  castra  reducemini. — Legis-ne  Ciceronis  opera  ? — Scribis- 
n6  epistolam  ad  Caesarem?  4tli  Conjugation. — Unde  venis? 
— Cur  tam  longe  dormis  ? — Magistriim  boniim  invenies. — Audis- 
-ne  magistri  v6c6m? — Cur  non  venietis  ? — A  Caesare  audiris. 
— A  magistro  puniemini. — Oratorem  audietis. — ^In  horto  dor- 
miebatis. — Cantiim  avium  auditis. 

(141.)  Translate  into  Latin.  [Refer  to  1 35,  II.] 
3d  Conjugation. — Are  you  writing  a  letter  ? — Thou  wast 
planting  a  tree  to-day. —  Were  (you)  reading  the  works  of  Cicero  ? 
— ^Why  do  you  read  so  badly  ? — Are  you  writing  a  Letter  to  the 
messenger? — Thou  wilt  read  Caesar  to-day. — Thou  art  sent 
to  the  camp. — Thou  wilt  be  led  by  the  ambassadors.  4th  Con- 
jugation.— ^Why  do  you  not  come  ? — Ye  shall  hear  the  voice  of 
Caesar. — Thou  wilt  sleep  in  the  camp. — Ye  shall  be  heard  by 
the  master. — Thou  shalt  be  punished. — Ye  are  heard. — Thou 
shalt  hear  the  singing  of  the  birds. 


LESSON  XXV. 
Pronouns. — Substantive- Personal  and  Adjective-Per- 
sonal,  Third  Person. 
(142.)  The  Substantive  Pronoun  of  the  third  per- 
son is  thus  declined : 

F 


62 


PERSONAL  PRONOUN. ^THIRD  PERSON. 


__ 


Sing. 
Plur. 


sui,  ofhimsdf, 
herself,  itself. 

sui,    of     tltem- 
selves. 


sib!,   to  him- 
self, &c. 
sibi,  to  them- 


se, /imseZ/i  &c.  se,  by  himself, 
I     &c. 
;,    by    them- 
selves, &c. 


(143.)  The  Adjective  Pronoun  of  the  third  person 

is  decHned  hke  an  adjective  of  the  first  class  :  thus, 

Derived  from  sui,  I  N.  suus,  a,  um,  his^  hers,  its,  his  own, 

I  G.  sui,     98,  i,      of  his,  hers,  its,  &c. 

Rem.  Observe  that  sui  is  not  a  regular  pronoun  of  the  third  person, 
like  the  English  he,  she,  it,  but  reflexive ;  e.  g.,  puer  s  e  laudat,  the 
boy  praises  himself.  It  therefore  has  no  nom.  case.  [The  nom. 
pronouns  he,  she,  it,  are  not  often  expressed  in  Latin;  but  when 
they  Tnust  be,  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  generally  hie,  is,  or  i lie,  is 
employed.] 

EXERCISE. 

(144*)    Vocabulary, 

Hand,,  manus,  us  (f.)  (112,  2). 
To  love  [with  esteem),  dilig-ere. 
To  live,  viv-€r6. 
To  contend,  contend-^re. 
To  defend,  defeud-erg. 
To  burn,  incend-ere. 
Townsman,  oppidanus,  a,  um. 
A  Sequanian,  Sequanus,  i. 

(145.)  Examples, 

(a)  Caesar  colls  Divitiacus 
to  himself. 

(h)  The  girl  writes  the  let- 
ter with  her  own  hand. 


Am^ong,  inter  (prep.). 

Com,  friimentum,  i. 

From  (prep.)  a  or  Sb.f 

A  legion,  legid,  (legion)  Is  (f.). 

To  ride,  command,  imper-^re  (with 

dat.  of  person). 
To  send  away,  j 

dismiss, 


?  dimitt-€rg. 


Caesar  Divitiaciim  ad  se  v6c&t. 


Puella  ^pistoiam   m^nu  suft 
scribit. 


[Rem.  Se  is  often  doubled,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis.] 


(c)  Men  always  love  them- 
selves. 

(d)  The  good  live  not  for 
themselves,  but  for  all. 


Homings    semper   sese    dili- 

gunt. 
Boni   non   sib!,  s^d  omnibus 

vivunt. 


(146.)   Translate  into  English, 

Hostes  inter  s&  contendunt. — Oppidan!  se  suaque  ab  hosti- 
bus  defendebant. — Helv^tii  oppidS,  sua  omnia  incendunt. — Cae- 
sar ti-es  legiones  seciim  habet. — ^Consul  legatos  ab  se  dimittet. 
— Sapiens  omnia  sua*  seciim  portat. — ]3elvetii  et  Sequani  ob- 

*  Omnia  sua  =  all  his  {property) ;  the  noun  being  understood. 

t  A  is  used  before  consonants  only ;  ab  before  either  vowels  or  consonants. 


DEMONSTEATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


63 


sides  inter  sese  dabant. — ^Boni  sese  non  diligunt. — HelvStu 
frumentum  omne*  s6cum  portabant. — Improbi  sibi  semper  vi- 
vunt. — Sapiens  sibi  semper  imperat  (147). 

(147.)    Rule  of  Syntax. — The   Dative  is  used  with  some 
verbs  signifying  to  command,  to  rule,  to  obey, 

(148.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Good  men  do  not  praise  themselves. — The  townsmen  were 
fighting  with  each  other  (inter  s  e). — The  wise  man  always 
carries  all  his  (property)  with  him. — Bad  men  always  love  them- 
selves.— The  general  has  three  legions  with  him. — The  towns- 
men will  carry  all  their  corn  with  them. — Bad  men  do  not  rule 
themselves  (147). — The  jEduans  will  defend  themselves  and 
their  (property)  from  the  soldiers. — Caesar  was  dismissing  the 
messenger  from  him  self. — The  Germans  will  burn  their  vilk^es. 


LESSON  XXVI. 
Demonstrative  Pronouns. 
(149.)  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are  so  called 
because  they  are  used  to  point  out  an  object ;  e.  ^., 
this,  that,  these,  those. 

J  (150.)  Is,  that  (often  used  for  he,  she^  it  (143jR.), 
is  thus  declined;  also  idem,  the  very  same,  com- 
pounded of  i  s  and  d  e  m . 


Singular. 

Plural 

Singular, 

Plural. 

N. 

is,  ea,  id. 

il,  eae,  ea. 

idem,     eadem, 
Idgm. 

iidem,  eaed6m, 
eadem. 

G. 

ejus. 

eorum,  earum, 
eoriim. 

ejusdem. 

eorundem,  ea- 
rundgm,  eo- 
rundem. 

D. 

ei. 

us,  or  eis. 

eidem. 

iisdem. 

Ace. 

gum,  €Sm,  Id. 

COS,  eas,  ea. 

gundem,    ean- 
dem,idem. 

eosdem,     eSs- 
dem,  eadem. 

Abl. 

eo,  ea,  eo. 

us,  or  eis. 

eodem,  eadem. 

iisdem. 

eodem. 

(151.)  The  following  forms  of  the  verb  esse,  to  be, 
ftiust  now  be  learned. 

*  Frfimentum  omnd  =  all  their  eom. 


64 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


TENSES. 

SINGULAK.                                                               f 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

1st. 

Slim,  I  am. 
eram,  ivas. 
er6,  shall  07' will  be. 

2d. 

es,  thou  art. 

eras. 

eris. 

3d. 

est,  lie,  she,  Scc.,is. 

erat. 

erit. 

PLURAL.                                                             1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

Ist. 

siimus,  we  are. 
eramiis,  were. 
erimiis. 

2d. 

estis,  7/e  are. 

gratis. 

eritis. 

3d. 

sunt,  thei/  are. 

erant. 

erunt. 

—  ■ ' 

EXERCISE. 


(152.)    Vocabulary , 

To  keep  off,  >      ^,  ^_  ^ 

To  prevent,] '''''^^'''' 

To  refrain,  temperare. 

Merchant,  mercator,   (mercator)  Is 

(m.). 
Colour,  color,  (color)  is  (m.). 
And,  atquS  (conj.). 
Plato,  Plato,  (Platon)  is. 

(153.)  Examples. 

(a)  The  Helvetians  contend 

with    the    Germans,    and 

"keep  them  off  from  their 

hoimdaries. 

(h)  mhe father  calls  his  {own) 

sm  to  hmi{self)» 
(c'Wrhe    father     calls     his 
daughter  and  her  son  to 
him(seZ/). 

B^  Observe  carefully,  that  if  his,  hers,  its,  refers  to  the  principal  sub- 
ject of  the  sentence,  it  is  expressed  by  the  possessive  (suiis,  a,  um);  but 
if  not,  by  the  genitive  (ejiis)  of  the  demonstrative  (is,  ea,  id). 

(154.)   Translate  into  English. 

(1)  Is,  e a,  id,  used  for  he,  she,  it  (personal). 

li  ab  injuria  tempeptnt. — Is  est  in  provincia  tua. — Merca- 
tores  ad  eos  saepe  veniunt. — Ab  iis  multa  (82,  I.,  R.)  poscimus. 
— ^Belgae  cum  iEduis  contendunt,  eosqiie  suis  finibiis  (153,  a) 
prohibent.  •  W 

(2)  I  s,  used  as  demonstrative,  this,  that ;  also,/m  e  m^  the  same 

____ . : ^i^ -v.. 

*  Suisfinibus  is  in  the  ablative.    All  verbs  o^  separating,  depriving,  Jcc 
may  take  a  noun  in  the  ablative,  with  the  direct  object  in  the  accusative. 


Elegant,  61egans,  (elegant)  is. 
Gladly,  willingly,  libenter  (adv.). 
Way,  journey,  iter,  (itiner)  is  (n.). 
Kingdom,  regnilm,  I. 
Flower,  flos,  (flor)  is  (m.). 
Writer,  scriptor,  (scriptor)  is  (m.) 
Never,  nunquam  (adv.). 


Helve  til  cum  Germanis  con- 
tendunt," eos  que  suis  fim- 
bus  prohibent.* 

PatSr  f ilium  suum  ad  se  v6- 

cat. 
PatSr  filiam  suam  ^t  f ilium 

e j  ii  s  ad  s  e  vocat. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


65 


In  eo  itinere  Caesar  Crassum  videt. — Dumnorix,  ed  tempore 
{118,  II.,  c)  regnum  tenebat. — Non  semper  idem  floribus  (125, 
tl.,  a)  est  color. — In  ea  provincia  sunt  quattuor  legiones. 

(3)  Distinction  between  ejus  and  suus,  a,  iim. 

Cicero  est  scriptor^lariis ;  ejUs  Kbros  Kbenter  legimus. — 
Caesar  ad  se  Dumnorigem  atque  f  iliiim  ejus  vocabit. — Plato  est 
scriptor  elegans  ;  ejus  opera  lib  enter  lego. 

Dux  ego  vester  eram. — Es-ne  tu  Socrates  ? — Estisne  beati? 
— Caesar  dux  vester  erat. 

(155.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

They  were  walking  in  the  garden  yesterday. — The  king 
will  give  them  (dat.,  54)  rewards. — They  are  in  Gaul. — Mer- 
chants never  come  to  them. — ^We  were  demanding  rewards  of 
(ab)  them. — In  that  province  Caesar  finds  many  deserters. — In 
that  province  there  are  three  legions. — At  that  time  (abl.»,  118, 
II.,  c)  Caesar  was  leading  the  army.- — Horses  (125,  II.,  a)  have 
not  always  the  same  colour. — Caesar  calls  Divitiacus  and  his 
brothers  to  him  (self). — Caesar  is  an  elegant  writer ;  we  read  his 
works  with  pleasure. — I  am  your  leader. — You  shall  be  our 
leader. — Caesar  was  our  leader. — The  -^duans  contend  with 
the  Helvetians,  and  keep  them  off  their  boundaries. 


LESSON  XXVII. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns,  continued. 

(156.)   The  Demonstrative  hie,   haec,   hoc,  this^ 

pomts  out  an  object  which  is  present  to  the  speaker, 

and  is  called  demonstrative  of  the  first  person;  e.  g., 

this  book  {of  mine),  h i c  1  i b  e  r. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

hic,  haec,  hoc. 
hi,  hae,  haec. 

hujus. 

horum,  harum, 
horiim. 

huic. 
his. 

hunc,  hanc, 

hoc. 
hos,    has, 

haec. 

hoc,  hac,  hoc. 
his. 

Bern.  Hic  is  used  also  (as  was  stated  143,  K)  for  he,  she,  it ;  e.  g'.,  hie 
dicit,  he  (this  man)  speaks. 

(157.)  IstCvista,  istud,  this,  that,  points  out  an 


66 


PBMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


object  which  is  present  to  the  person  spoken  to,  and  is 
called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  ;  e,  g,, 
that  book  {of  yours),  iste  liber. 


1       Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat 

F    Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

iate,  ista, 
istQd. 

istI,  istae, 
ista. 

istlus. 

istoriim,    arum, 
orum. 

istl. 
istis. 

istum,  ist^m, 

isttid. 
istos,  istas, 

ista. 

isto,  ista,  isto. 
istls. 

Rem.  Iste  is  often  used  to  denote  contempt;  e.  g.,  iste-ne  dicit? 
Does  that  fellow  speak  ? 

(158.)  II le,  ilia,  illud,  points  out  an  object  re- 
mote from  the  speaker  {that,  the  former,  opposed  to 
hie),  and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  thii^d  per- 
son. It  is  used  often  for  the  personal  pronoun  he,  she, 
U  (143,  R.). 

It  is  declined  throughout  like  iste,  ista,  istud. 


Mem.  In  the  genitives,  istlus,  illius,  ipsius,  the  penult  i  is  long, 
contrary  to  the  general  rule  (84,  1)  that  a  vowel  before  another  is 
short. 

(159.)  Ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  is  properly  an  adjunc- 
tive pronoun,  as  it  is  added  to  other  pronouns ;  e,  g., 

Ego  me  ipse  laud6. 
Eg6  m.&  ipsum  laudd. 


/  (and  not  another)  praise  myself. 
I  praise  myself  (and  not  another). 


EXERCISE 

(160.)   Vocabulary. 

Opi7iion,  sententia,  ce. 

To  please^  placSre. 

To  displease,  dispUcerg. 

Soul,  animtis,  i. 

Proverb,  proverbmm,  i. 

Lazy,  ignavus,  a,  um. 

Excellent, 

Celebrated, 

Reason,  r&tifi,  (ration)  is  (f.). 


Animal,  animal,  (animal)  Is  {neut). 
Pleasing,  agreeable,  gratus,  a,  iim. 
Base,  torpis,  g  (104). 
Friend,  amicus,  I. 
To  boast,  praedicarg. 
To  obey,  parere  (with  dat.,  147). 
Old,  vetus,  (veter)  is  (108,  R.,  2). 
Song,  carm6n,  (carmin)  is  (n.). 
prseceptum,  i. 


[  praeclarus,  S,  iim. 


(161.)     Examples, 

(a)  This  opinion  jp leases  me,  I  Haec  sententid   mih!  pl^c^t 
ikmt  displeases  {me),  \     ilia  displicet. 


Turpe  est  de  seipso  praB- 
dicare. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS.  67 

Rule  of  Syntax. — Verbs  of  pleasing,  obeying,  persuading, 
commanding,  favouring,  and  the  reverse,take  the  Dative 
case. 

(b)  Thot  friend  of  yours  w    Ist6  tuus  Amicus  vir  clarus 
an  illustrious  man.  est. 

(c)  The  soul  itself  moves  it-    Animus  ips6  se  mSvet. 
self. 

(d)  It  is  base  to  boast  of  one's 
self. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  of 
a  verb,  and  is  then  regarded  as  a  noun  in  the  neuter  gen- 
der; e.  g.,  prsedicare  (to  boast),  in  {d),  is  nom.  to  est, 
and  turpe  (base)  agrees  with  it  in  the  neuter. 

(162.)   Translate  into  English, 

{a)  Hi  pueri  magistro  parent. — Hae  litterge  valde  me  delec- 
tant. — Ciceronis  libri  valde  mihi  placent:  eos  libenter  lego. — 
Hoc  belliim  gr^ve  est. — Hie  puer  bonus  est,  ill§  ignavus. 

(b)  Ista  tua  f  ilia  pulchra  est. — Istud  tuiim  carmen  mihi  (106, 
II.,  c)  gratiim  est. — Praeclara  sunt  ista  tua  praecepta. — Vetus 
illud  proverbiiim  mihi  placet. 

*(c)  Omne  animal  seipsum  diligit. — Imperator  ipse  militibus 
(147)  imperat. — Ego  mfe  ips6  non  laudabam. — Tu  teipsum  laud- 
abis. — Sapiens  sibi  ipsi  imperat. 
(d)  Jucundum  est  amare. 

(163.)  Translate  into  Latin. 

(a)  That  illustrious  precept  was-pleasing-to  (placeb^t)  Cato. 
■ — That  brave  general  will  command  the  soldiers. — The  soldiers 
willingly  obey  this  brave  general. — This  precept  pleases  me, 
that  displeases  (me). — The  works  of  Caesar  please  me  very 
much;  I  read  them  gladly  (libenter). 

(6)  That  horse  of  yours  is  a  beautiful  animal. — I  keep  in 
memory  (memoria  teneo)  that  excellent  precept  of  yours. — 
Those  songs  of  yours  are  pleasing  (grata)  to  me. — That  letter 
of  yours  was  delighting  me  very  much. 

(c)  The  soul  rules  itself  (161,  c)  by  reason  (rS^tione,  55,  a). — 
The  poet  himself  praises  himself  (159). — Csesar  himself  will 
command  the  legions  (161,  c). — The  soldiers  willingly  (libentdr) 


68 


RELATIVE   PRONOUN. 


obey  Caesar  himself. — Do  you  (135,  II.,'  1)  praise  yourself? — 
Wise  men  themselves  always  rule  themselves  (147). 

{d)  It  is  pleasant  to  love  (one's)  friends. — It  is  base  to  boast 
of  (one's)  friends. — It  is  agreeable  to  please  (one's)  father. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 
(164.)  The  Relative  Pronoun  {who,  which),  qui, 
q  u  ae,  q  u  5  d,  is  thus  declined : 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

qui,  quae, 
quod. 

qui,  quae, 
quae. 

cujus. 

quorum,  quarum, 
quorum. 

CUl. 

quibus. 

quern,    quam, 

quod, 
quos,  quas,  quae. 

quo,  qua,  quo. 
quibus. 

Rem.  duicunque,  quoecunque,  quodcunque  {whosoever,  which- 
soever, whatsoever)  is  declined  like  qui,  quae,  quod:  cunque  be- 
ing simply  annexed  to  the  different  cases. 

(165.)  The  Relative  commonly  refers  to  some  preceding 
word,  which  is  therefore  called  the  antecedent ;  e.  g.^  The  man, 
who  lives  well,  is  happy.  Here  man  is  the  antecedent;  who, 
the  relative.  The  sentence  in  which  the  relative  occurs  is  call- 
ed the  relative  sentence  ;  the  other  the  principal  or  antecedent 
sentence  ',  e,  g,  (above),  the  man  is  happy,  is  the  principal  son- 
tence  :  who  lives  well,  the  relative  sentence. 

EXERCISE. 

( 1 66,)    Vocabulary, 

Poor,  aegens,  (aegent)  is  (108). 

Enough,  satis  (adv.). 

Nearest  to,  neighbours  to,  proximus, 

a,  iim. 
To  dwell,  incolere  (intrans.). 
To  inhabit,  incolere  {trans.). 
Blood,  sanguis,  (sanguin)  is  (m.). 
Also,  etiSm  (conj.). 
Heart,  cor,  (cord)  is  (n.). 
To  despise,  contemnere. 
Magnanimous,  magnanimus,  a,  iim. 
Honest,  honourable,  honestiis,  a,  iim. 

(167.)  Examples, 
(a)   The   boy,    who    reads, 
learns* 


Fountain,  fons,  (font)  is  (m.). 

Water,  aqua,  ae. 

Winter-quarters,  hibemft,  drum  (pi.). 

To  winter,  hiemare. 

Arethusa,  Arethiisa,  ae. 

To  return,  restore,  reddere. 

Virtue,  virtiis,  (virtiit)  is  (f.). 

To  repel,  propulsare. 

To  vaunt,  ostentare. 

Fame,  fama,  se. 

To  do,  to  make,  f  acere. 

One,  urms,  a,  iim. 

P  u  6  r,  qui  l^glt,  discit. 


RELATIVE    PRONOUN. 


69 


c  The  girl,  who  reads,  learns,  Puella,  quae  l^g!t,  discit. 

(b)   The  hoy,  whom  we  see,  Puer,    quern    vTdemus,    est 

15  handsome.  pulchSr. 

The  girl,  whom  we  see,  is  Puella,  quam  videmus,  est 

handsome.  pulchra. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  Relative  Pronoun  must  agree  witli 
its  antecedent  in  gender  and  number  (as  in  («)  ),  but  its 
case  is  fixed  by  the  construction  of  the  relative  sentence 
(e.  g.,  in  (a)  qui  is  nomin.  to  legit:  in  (b)  quern  is 
ace,  governed  by  videmus). 


(c)  J  who  write. 
We  who  write. 


(d)  He  is  poor  who  has  not 
.     enough. 


qui  non 


non 


Ego,  qui  s c r i b 6. 

Nos,  qui  scribimiis. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  verb  in  the  relative  sentence  agrees 
with  the  relative  in  number,  but  takes  the  person  of  the 
antecedent. 

(1)  Mgens  est  is, 
satis  habet. 

(2)  Is    aegens   est,    qui 
satis  habet. 

(3)  Qui  non  satis  habSt,  is 
aegens  est. 

(4)  Qui    non    satis    hab^t, 
aegens  est. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  relative  generally  stands  at  the  be- 
ginning of  its  sentence,  and  (1)  as  near  to  its  antecedent 
as  possible.  (2)  I  s  and  qui  are  made  emphatic  when 
IS  begins  the  principal  sentence  and  qui  the  relative 
sentence ;  (3)  and  still  more  emphatic  when  the  relative 
sentence  stands  first.  (4)  The  antecedent  is  often 
'  omitted  entirely. 

(168.)   Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rheniim  incSIunt. — 
Omne  animal,  quod  sanguinem  habet,  habet  etiam  cor. — Cae- 
sar, ti-es  legiones,  q  u  ae  in  provincia  hiemabant,  ex  hibernis  edu- 
cit. — Omnia  (82,  I.,  R.)  quae  pulchra  sunt,  honesta  sunt. 

(b)  Felix  est  rex,  que  m  omnes  cives  amant. — In  hac  insu- 
la est  fons  aquae  dulcis,  cui  nom^n  est  Arethusa  (125,  II.,  a). 


70  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

— Ariovistus  obsides  reddit,  quos  h^bet  ab  JEduis, — Galliae 
Sunt  partes  tres,  quarum  un^m  Belgae  incolunt. 

{d)  (1)  Beat!  sunt  ii,  quorum  vita  virtute  (abl.,  55,  a)  regi- 
tfir. — (2)  Is  fortis  est,  qui  injuriam  propuls^t. — (3)  Qui  se 
ostentat,  is  stultus  dicitur  {is  called  a  fool), — (4)  Qui  famam 
bonam  contemmt,  virtutem  contemnit. — Fortis  et  magnanimiis 
est,  non  qui  facit,  sed  qui  propulsat  injuriam. 

(169.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

(a)  The  songs  which  we  hear  are  pleasant  (grata)  to  us 
(106,  II.,  c). — The  king  who  rules  wisely  is  hap^. — All  animals 
which  have  blood  have  also  hearts. — Caesar  leads  across  the 
Rhine  the  five  legions  which  were  wintering  in  the  province. 

(6)  Happy  is  the  teacher  whom  all  (his)  scholars  love. — In 
tliat  (e  a)  island  (there)  is  a  city  whose  name  is  {to  which  the 
name  is*.,  125,  II.,  a)  Syracuse  (Syracusae). — In  this  (hac) 
city  there  is  a  fountain  whose  name  is  Arethusa. — Of  Britain 
(there)  are  three  parts,  of  which  (gen.)  the  English  inhabit 
one. 

{d)  (1)  Happy  is  he  whose  life  is  ruled  by  the  precepts  of 
virtue. — He  is  wise  who  diligently  serves  (c5lit)  the  gods. — 
(2)  They  are  brave  who  repel  an  injury. — (3)  They  who  vaunt 
themselves  are  called  fools. — (4)  Who  repels  an  injury,  is 
brave  and  magnanimous. 


LESSON  XXIX. 

Interrogative  Pronoun. 

(170.)  The  Interrogative  Pronoun  is  precisely  like* 
the  Relative  in  form,  excepting  that  for  the  nom.,  sing., 
and  masc,,  it  has  q  u  i  s,  and  for  the  nom.  and  ace,  neut, 
quid;  thus,  qui s,  quae,  quid. 

(171.)  Quisnam,  qusenam,  quidnam,  express  a  more 
emphatic  interrogation  than  the  simple  q  u  i  s,  q  u  ae,  quid,  the 
syllable  nam  answering  to  our  English  *' pray  ;"  e,  ^., 

Pray,  what  are  you  doing  ?  \      Q  u  i  d  n  a  m  agis  ?  | 

*  S u n t,  plural,  because  Syracfissa  is  plural. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


71 


(172.)  In  asking  questions,  the  different  cases  of  quis  can  bo 
used  as  substantives  or  as  adjectives,  excepting  that 

(1)  In  the  nom.  sing,  masc,  quis  is  used  as  a  substantive. 
In  the  nom.  sing,  masc,  qui  is  used  as  an  adjective. 

(2)  In  the  nom.  and  accus.,  neut.,  quid  is  used  as  a  sub- 

stantive. 
In  the  nom.  and  accus.,  neut.,  quod  is  used  as  an  ad- 
jective. 


Quis  venit? 
Qui  homo  venit  ? 
Quis  homo  est  1 
Quid  times? 
Quod  periciilum  timgs  1 


(1)  Who  comes  7 
What  man  comes  ? 
Who  is  the  man  ? 

(2)  What  do  you  fear  ? 
What  danger  do  you 

fear  ? 

(173.)  The  answer  yes  is  given  by  repeating  the  verb  which 
asks  the  question  ;  no,  by  repeating  the  verb  with  non.  Vero 
{certainly),  added  to  the  verb  in  an  affirmative  answer,  gives  it 
more  emphasis  ;  e,  g., 


Are  you  writing  J 

I  am  writing. 

Are  you  reading  7 

I  am  not  reading. 

Will  you  do  what  I  ask  7 

I  will  certainly  do  (it), 

EXERCISE, 

(174.)    Vocabulary, 


Scribis-n6  ? 
Scrib8. 
Legis-n6  ? 
Non  16  go. 
F^cies-ne  quae*  r6g5? 
Faciam  vero. 


New,  novus,  a,  van. 

News,  novi  (neat.  gen.  of  noviis,  used 
with  a  neut.  adj.  or  pronoun). 

Num,  interrogative  particle,  used 
when  no  is  expected  as  the  an- 
swer. 

To  do,  agerg. 

To  he  among,  intSresse  (inter + 
essg) ;  but  quid  interest  ?  =  ickai 
is  the  difference  ? 


Between,  among,  IntSr  (prep.,  ace). 

Beast,  brute,  bestia,  ae. 

An  evil,  malum,  I. 

Without,  sine  (prep.,  abl.). 

Figure,  figura,  ae. 

Mortal,  mortalis,  e. 

Certainly,   ver6   (afltenative  parti 

cle). 
To  carry,  v6hSr#. 
Immortal,  immortdlis,!  S. 


*  HaBC,  quae,  plural,  should  be  translated  this,  what,  singular, 
t  Observe  the  force  of  in  prefixed  to  adjectives.    Mortalis  =  mortal  j 
in  4-  mortalis  =  immortalis,  immortal. 


72  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

(175.)  Examples, 


(a)    What  is  the  news  ? 

(6)  Is  there  anything  new  ? 

(There  is  not,  is  there  ?) 
(c)    Why  do  you  laugh  ? 


Quid   est  novi?    (=What 

is  there  of  new?) 
Num  est  quidnam  novi? 

(N  u  m  expects  the  answer  no.) 
Quid  rides? 


(176.)   Translate  into  English, 

Quis  nos  vocat?  —  Cujus  hic  liber  est? — Quern  vides?— 
Quid  agis. — Quid  interest  inter  hominem  ^t  bestiam  ? — Quam 
domiim  invenies  sine  mails? — Quid  legis? — Epistolam. — Quaa 
amicitia  est  inter  improbos  ? — Niim  Csesar^m  times  ? — Non  ti- 
meo. — Qua  in  urbe  (125,  IV.,  N.,  X)  siimus? — Quis  homS 
est? — Ego  sum  Csesar. — Niim  animus  f igtiram  habet ? — Sunt 
ne  homines  mortales  ? — Sunt  vero. — Quid  times  ?  Caesarem 
veins. 

(177.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Who  calls  me  ? — Whose  are  those  books  ? — ^What  men  do 
you  see  ? — ^What  are  you  writing  ? — A  letter. — What  book  are 
you  reading  ? — What  is  the  difference  between  the  good  and 
the  wicked  ? — Who  is  the  soldier  ? — What  is  the  difference  be- 
tween wolves  and  dogs  ? — Do  you  not  fear  the  enemy  ? — I  do 
not  fear  (them.) — What  man  will  you  find  without  a  fault  (cul- 
p  a)  ? — In  what  town  are  we  ? — Whose  house  is  this  ? — What 
city  will  you  find  without  evils? — What  is  the  difference 
between  men  and  beasts  ? — What  do  you  fear  ?  You  are  car- 
rying the  king. — Are  men  immortal  (niim)  ? — They  are  not. 


LESSON  XXX. 
Indefinite  Pronouns, 
(178.)  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  denote  an  object  in 
a  general  way,  without  reference  to  a  particular  indi- 
vidual ;  e,  g.,  any  one,  some  one,  &c.     They  are, 

1.  duidSm,  a  certain  one,  &c.,  plural,  some. 

2.  Cluivis,      )  , 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


73 


3.  Cluisquam,  any,  any  one  (e.  g.,  when  it  is  denied  that  there  are  any). 
[Neut.  q  u  i  c  q  u  a  m  {subst)  ;quodquam  (adj.).     This  pronoun  is  used 

chiefly  in  negative  sentences.] 

4.  duispiam,  somebody,  some  (neut.). 

5.  Aliquis,  some  one,  something  (neut);  any  (adj.). 

6.  Q,uisqu6,eac/i,  unusquisqu6,eac^  owe  (stronger  than  quisquS). 

7.  Ecquis?  used  mterrogatively,  (does)  any  onel  anything  1 

^^  Observe  carefully  that  each  of  the  above  takes  quid  in 
neuter  nom.,  and  ace,  when  used  substantively;  and  quod 
when  used  adjectively. 

EXERCISE. 

(179.)    Vocahulary, 

The  tenth,  dgclmiis,  a,  um. 

A  javelin,  tragula,  ae. 

To  see,  to  owtice,  conspicerS. 

Judgment,  discretion,  consilium,  i. 

Eternity,  aetemitas,  (setemitat)  is  (f.). 

Maker,  artificer,  faber,  fabri  (m.). 

Fifth,  quintus,  a,  um. 

Youth,  juventus,  (juventut)  is  (f.). 

Fortune,  fortunfi,  oe. 

Forever,  in  aetemura. 

Belong,  pertinerS. 

(180.)  Examples, 
{a)  Something  new. 
JEach  one  of  us. 
A  certain  thing  new. 
Some  dignity. 


Art,  ars,  (art)  is  (f.). 

Form,  forma,  ae. 

To  discover,  inv6nirS. 

For,  etenim,  conj.  (alvp'ays   stands 

first  in  its  clause). 
Cultivation,  humanity,  humamtag, 

atis  (f.). 
Common,  communis,  is,  6. 
Bond,  vinculum,  i. 
Dignity,  dignitas,  (dignitat)  is  (f.). 
Body,  corpus,  (corp6r)  is  (n.). 


Aliquid  novi. 
Unusquisque  nostrum. 
Quiddara  novi. 
Aliquid  dignitatis. 
TR,ule  of  Syntax. — The  indefinite  pronouns  may  be  used 
partitively,  and  then  govern  the  genitive. 


(h)  A  certain  one  of  the  sol- 
diers. 
Some  of  the  soldiers. 


Quidam  (sing.)  ex  militl- 

bus. 
Quidam  {plur.)  ex  militi- 

bus. 

Rem.  The  ablat.  with  ex  is  used  instead  of  the  genitive,  especially 
with  quidam. 

(181.)   Translate  into  English. 

Quidam  ex  militibiis  decimae  legionis  venieb§,t. — Quinto  did 
(118,  II.,  c)  tragula  a  quod  am  milite  conspicitur. — Yiri,  in 
quibus  aliquid  consilii  (180,  a)  est,  magnanimi  simt.- — Tempua 

G 


74  CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

est  pars  q used  am  aeternitatis. — Cuivis  (125,  11.,  a)  &nimali 
corpus  est. — Quilib^t  est  faber  fortunae  suae. — IJnicuique* 
(125,  II.,  a)  nostrum  (180,  120)  est  animus  immortalis. — 
Qui s que  nostrum  (180)  in  aetemum  vivet. — Animus  non  habet 
form^m  aliquam,  nee  figurdm. — A  liquid  novi  invenies. — 
Etenim  omnes  artes,  quae  ad  humanitatem  pertinent,  habent 
quoddam  commune  vinculum. 

(182.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

[The  pronouns  of  the  lesson  are  italicized  in  the  exercise.] 
Some  of  the  soldiers  of  the  fifth  legion  are  wounded  (pres.).-^ 
On  the  fifth  day  (118,  II.,  c)  the  enemy  is  noticed  by  a  certain 
soldier  of  the  tenth  legion. — Men,  in  whom  there  is  some  dignity 
(180),  are  magnanimous. -^To  each  man  (=of  men)  there  is 
a  soul  and  a  body.— I  will  give  the  book  to  any-one-you-please 
of  the  scholars.  Each  one  of  us  shall  live  forever. — You  will 
discover  a  certain  thing  new. — Some  of  the  soldiers  are  in  the 
city. — For  all  the  arts  which  belong  to  cultivation  have  a  certain 
common  bond. — Youth  is  a  certain  part  of  life. — Is  not  (estne) 
any  man-you-please  the  maker  of  his  own  fortune  ?— Has  the 
soul  {use  num)  any  form  or  figure  ? 


LESSON  XXXI. 
Correlative  Pronouns. 
(183.)  Correlative  Pronouns  are  such  as  an5t^?er  to 
each  other ;  e,  g,,  how  great  ?  so  great.     How  many  f 
so  many,  &c. 

[This  correlation  is  often  expressed  in  English  by  adverbs  or  conjunc- 
tionB :  stick  a  man  as :  as  Is  the  general,  so  are  the  troops,  &c.] 
(184.)  The  Correlative  Pronouns  are 


Demonstrative: 

Relative. 

Indefinite. 

talis,  such. 

tantus,   so    great,    so 
much. 

*t6t,  so  many. 
*t6tid6m,  just  so  mxmy. 

qaalis  ;  as,  of  what 
kind. 

quantus,  as  great.  ^ 

i 

*qu6t,  as  many. 

qualiscunquS,    of    whatever 

kind. 
quantuscunquS,        however 

great. 
Sliquantus,  somewhat  great. 
*&liqu6t,  some. 
*quotqu6t,  however  many. 

*  Unus  and  quisquft  are  both  declined  in  unnsquisqu6.    UnQg 
has  gen.  unius,  dat.  uni. 


CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


75 


Rem.  1.  dualis?   of  what  kind?   quantus?   how  great?   qn5t? 

how  many  ?    are  also  used  interrogatively. 
2.  Those  marked  thus  (*)  are  indeclinable ;  the  rest  are  declined  like 

adjectives. 

EXERCISE. 


(185.)   Vocabulary, 

Vhere,  ubi  (adv.). 
Toil,  opera,  ae. 

'Pleasure,  voluptas,  (voluptSt)  Is  (f.). 
Reward,  praemium,  i. 
3rold,  aurum,  i. 
y,  pScuni^,  ae. 


(186.)  Examples. 

[a)  So  much  toil  (=  of  toil). 
How  much  pleasure  ?  (==  of 

pleasure  ?) 
No  reward  (=:  nothing  of  re- 
ward^. 
Much  gold  (=  of  gold). 


Fear,  timor,  (timor)  is  (nx.). 

Or,  v6l  (coiy.). 

Advantages,  bonS  (neut.  adj.). 

To  afford,  praeberg. 

To  covet,  expetere.  [is  (f.). 

Liberality,    liberalitas,    (Hberalitat) 


Tantum  6peraB. 
Quantum  v61uptat!s? 

Nihil  praemii. 

Multum  auri.  (But,  much 
money  =  magna,  pecunia, 
not  multum  pecuniae.) 

Aliquantum  &gri. 


A   pretty    large   piece    of 

ground. 

Rule   of  Syntax. — The    neuters,    tantum,    quantum, 

aiiquantiim;  also,  multum,  nihil,  quid,  aliquid, 

and  others,  are  used  as  neuter  nouns,  and  followed  by  the 

genitive  (Synt.,  695,  6.,  K.). 

Ohs.  Tantum,  quantum  in  neut,  with  genitive  =  so  much,  so 
many,  how  much,  how  many ;  but  in  masc.  and  fern.,  agreeing  with 
the  noun,  io  greats,  how  great;  e.  g.,  how  many  books  ?  quantum 
Hbrorum;  so  great  fear,  tantus  timor. 


(6)  As  is  the  master,  so  are  the 
scholars. 


Qualis  est  magister,  tales 
sunt  discipiili ;  or  (with  est 
and  sunt  omitted),  qualis 
magister,  tales  discipuE. 

(187.)  Translate  into  English, 

Quales  sunt  duces,  tales  sunt  milites. — Fortunae  bona  (82, 
II.),  quantacunque  sunt,  incerta  sunt. — Tantus  timor  omnem  ex- 
ercitiim  occupabat. — Ubi  tantam  virttitem  invenies? — Quan- 
tum voluptatis  virtus  prsebet ! — Fratri  est  (125,  II.,  a)  ftliquan- 


76  CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

tiim  pecuniae. — Virtus  nihil  praemii  vel  pecuniae  expetit. — Pat6r 
inihi  magnam  pecuniam  dabit. — Quantum  (166,  Obs.)  librorum 
habes  ? — Quot  homines,  tot  sententiae. 

(188.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

As  are  the  generals,  so  are  the  soldiers. — As  is  the  king,  so 
are  the  leaders. — As  are  the  masters  (heri),  so  are  the  slaves. 
— As  ai*e  the  fathers,  so  are  the  children. — So  great  an  army 
is  coming. — The  advantages  of  the  body,  however  gi-eat  they 
may  be  (sunt),  are  uncertain. — Where  will  you  find  so  great 
liberality  ? — How  many  (186,  Obs.)  rewards  does  virtue  afford  ? 
— Good  (men)  covet  no  (186,  a)  reward. — Will  your  father 
give  (135,  II.)  you  much  money  ? — Has  your  brother  much 
gold  ? — ^As  are  the  chiefs,  so  are  the  citizens. — My  father  has 
(125,  II.,  a)  a  pretty  large  piece  of  ground. 


§  16. 


NUMERAL  S.     (XXXII.— XXXIII.) 


LESSON  XXXIL 


Numerals, — Partial  Table, 
(189.)  Numerals  are  divided  into  the  four  classes 
bllowing,  of  which  the  first  three  are  adjectives,  the 
burth,  adverbs. 


CAKDINAi. 

ORDINAL. 

DISTRIBUTIVE. 

ADVERBIAL. 

One  apiece,  one  by 

One,  two,  &c. 

First,  second,  &c. 

one,  one  at  a  time, 
&c. 

singuli,  8B,  a. 

Once,  twice,  &c. 

I. 

unus,  a,  um. 

primus,  a,  um. 

s6mel. 

II. 

duo,  oe,  6. 

secundus,  a,  um. 

blnl,  ae,  a. 

bis. 

III. 

tres,  es,  triS. 

tertius,  a,  um. 

temi,  ae,  a. 

t6r. 

IV. 

quattuor. 

quartus,  a,  um. 

quatemi,  ae,  a. 

quater. 

V. 

quinque. 

quintus,  a,  um. 

quinl,  ae,  a. 

qumquies. 

VI. 

sex. 

sextiis,  a,  um. 

seni,  ae,  a. 

sexies. 

VII. 

sept6m. 

Septimus,  a,  um. 

septeni,  ae,  a. 

septies. 

VIII. 

octo. 

octavus,  a,  iim. 

octoni,  ae,  a. 

octies. 

IX. 

D6v6m. 

noniis,  a,  um. 

noveni,  ae,  a. 

novies. 

X. 

dec6m. 

decimiis,  a,  um. 

denl,  ae,  a. 

d6cies. 

XL 

undgcim. 

undecimus,      a. 

undenT,  ae,  a. 

andficies. 

XII. 

duSdScim. 

duodficimus,   a, 
um. 

duodeni,  ae,  &. 

duodecies. 

Rem.  For  the  declension  of  uniis  and  duo,  see  194.  Tres  is  declined 
like  a  plural  adjective  of  second  class,  194.  The  remaining  cardinals 
are  undeclined.  The  ordinals  and  distributives  are  declined  like 
adjectives  of  the  first  class. 

EXERCISE. 


(190.)   Vocabulary, 

In  ally  altogether,  omnind. 
Multitude,    multitudd,    (multitudln) 

is  (f). 
Hour,  hora,  as. 
To  he  distant,  distarS. 
Mile,  miUia,*  (mill)  ium  (pi.  n.). 
Year,  annus,  i. 
Month,  mensis,  (mens)  is  (m.). 


Another,  altSr,  a,  um  (194,  R.  1.). 
Thirty -six,  sex  et  triginta. 
To  levy,  conscriberS. 
Night-watch,  vigilia,  83. 
From,  after,  de  (with  abl.). 
To  strive,  to  hasten,  contenders. 
Italy,  Italia,  8B. 


*  Mi  lis,  plur.  milli&  =  1000.    Millia  (passuum,  of  paces  understood) 
=2  a  mile, 

G2 


*f8 


NUMERALS. 


Horas  quattuor  pugnant. 
UrbsdistatquinquS  millia. 


(101.)  Examples. 

(a)  They  fight  four  hours, 

(b)  The  city  is  distant  five 
miles. 

(c)  A  ditch  eleven  feet  wide ,   Foss&  undecim  p6des  lata. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  accusative  answers  to  the  questions 
how  long  1  (whether  of  time  or  space),  how  broad  ?  how 
high?  &c.;  e.  g.,  m  (a)  IjLor&s;  in  (b)  milliS.;  in  (c) 
pedes. 

(d)  How  long  ?  may  also  be  expressed  by  a  noun  in  the  geni- 
tive, depending  on  another  noun ;  e.  g.,  a  ditch  of  ten  feet, 
fossa  decern  pedum. 

(192.)   Translate  into  English. 

Erant  ommno  itinera  duo. — Galliae  sunt  partes  txes,  quarum 
imam  incolunt  Belgse,  alteram  Aquitani. — Uniis  6  raultitudinS 
vulneratiir. — Horas  sex  pugnabant. — Urbs  distat  dec6m  milli^. — * 
In  anno  duodecim  menses  sunt. — Caesar  diias  legiones  conscri- 
bit. — Caesar  tres  legiones  quae  in  Gallia  hiemabant  educit. — 
Caesar  tres  legiones  ex  hibernis  educit. — Sunt  omnino  itinera 
quattuor.— Caesar  de  quarta  vigilia  legiones  educit. — Consul 
legiongm  d^cim^m  in  castrS,  reducit. — Caesar  cum  quinque  le- 
gionibiis  in  Itali&m  contendit. — Erat  omnino  in  Gallia  legiS 
una. 

(193.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

There  are  in  all  three  ways. — There  are  of  Gaul  three  parts, 
of  which  the  Sequanians  inhabit  one. — There  are  of  the  city 
five  parts. — Four  of  (=  out  of)  the  multitude  are  wounded. — 
The  soldiers  fight  seven  hours. — In  three  years  are  thirty-six 
months. — The  villages  are  distant  nine  miles. — The  wood  is  dis- 
tant four  miles. — The  consuls  will  levy  six  legions. — Caesar  will 
lead  out  five  legions  from  Italy. — The  general  was  levying  two 
legions  in  Gaul. — Caesar  will  lead  out  the  soldiers  in  the  second 
watch. — The  consul,  in  the  third  watch  leads  back  the  soldiers 
into  the  camp. — The  tenth  legion  fights  (pugnat). — There  are 
altogether  in  Gaul  two  legions. — Caesar  brings  back  the  fifth  le- 
gion.— Caesar  brings  back  the  fifth  legion  after  the  second  watch. 


NUMERALS. 


79 


LESSON  XXXIII. 
Numerals^  continued. 
(194.)  Declension  of  unus,  du5,  and  tres. 


/ 


One,  Sing. 

Two,  Plur. 

Three,  Plur. 

N. 
G. 
D. 

unus,  a,  iim. 
unms,  Tus,  lus. 
unT,  i,  i. 
the  rest  regular. 

N.V. 
Gen. 
D.  Ab. 
Ace. 

duo,  duee,  duo. 
duorani,  duarum,  duorum. 
duobus,  duabus,  duobus. 
duos  and  duo,  duas,  duo. 

tres,  tres,  tria. 
trium,  trium,  triiim. 
tribus,tribus,tribus. 
tres,  tres,  tria. 

Rem.  (1.)  Like  unus  are  declined 


ilius,  a,  ud,  another. 

yt6r,  a,  um,  the  one,  the  other  (of  two). 

S'euter,  trtL,  trum,  neither  of  tlve  two, 

S^ullus,  §,  um,  no  one. 

Solus,  a,  um,  alone. 

lotus,  ft,  fipa,  the  whole. 


Ullus,  a,  una,  an^  one. 

IJtSr,  trft,  trum,  which  of  the  two. 

UterquS,  traqu6,  tmmque,  each  of 

the  two,  both;  and  other  compounds 

of  titer. 


(3.)  Like  dtio  is  declined  ambd,  od,  6,  both. 


EXERCISE 

(195.)   Vocabulary. 

What  one,  quotiis,  ft,  um. 

Most,  plerusque,  ftquS,  umquS  ;  e.  g., 

most  men,  homines  plerlqu6 ,  most 

insects,  insecta  plerftquS. 
Virgil,  Virgilius,  i. 
More,  mftgis  (adv.). 

[Refer  to  the  colmxm  of  distributives  (189).] 

(196.)  Examples. 


A  beam,  trabs,  (trab)  is  (£).' 

Insect,  insectum,  i. 

Horace,  Horatius,  i. 

To  migrate,  m!grftr6. 

Writer,  scriptdr,  (scriptdr)  fe  (m.). 

Mother,  matSr,  (matr)  is  (f.). 


{a)  My  father  will  give  us 

two  hooks  apiece. 
(6)  What  hour  is  it  ?     The 

third, 
(c)  He  will  come  for  my  sake 

alone. 
{d)   Which    pleases     you  ? 

Neither. 
(e)    The    beams    are    three 

feet  distant  (apart)  from 

each  other. 


Pater  nobis  bin 6s  Kbros  d&- 

bit. 
Quota    horl  est?     Tertia. 

Mea  uniiis  causa  (abl.)  v6- 

niet. 
titer  tibi  placet?     Neut6r. 

Trabes  inter  se  distant  ternos 
pedes  (191,  c). 


*  When  ftlius  is  repeated,  it  means  some,  others. 


60  NUMERALS. 

(197.)   Translate  into  English. 

Mat^r  nobis  quaternos  libros  dabit. — Nobis  sunt  (125,  II.,  a) 
temi  equi. — Binae  omnibus  avibiis  alas  sunt. — Insecta  pleraque 
senos,  alia  octonos,  p^des  habent. — Quota  hora  est  ?  Nona. — 
Milites  utriusque  exercitus  sunt  fortes. — Tua  iinius  causa  ve- 
nient. — Virgiliiis  atque  Horatiiis  poetae  sunt  praeclari ;  uter  tibi 
magis  placet?  (161,  a.)  Virgiliiis. — Bis  in  Einno  milites  veni- 
unt. — September  est  nonus  anni  mensis. — Trabes  int^r  se  dis- 
tant binos  pedes  (191,  c). 

(198.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

[Some  of  the  words  will  be  found  in  194,  R.  1.] 
We  have  (125,  II.,  a)  four  dogs  apiece  (196,  a). — The  mas- 
ter gives  us  five  books  at  a  time. — All  men  have  (125,  II.,  a) 
two  eyes  apiece.  —  Most  insects  have  six  (senos)  feet;  some 
(194*)  nine,  others  (194*)  ten,  others  (194*)  twelve.— What 
o'clock  (hour)  is  it  ? — The  fifth.— The  eighth.— The  eleventh. 
— The  tweljfth. — The  generals  of  each  army  are  brave. — Why 
do  you  come  ?  For  your  sake  alone  (196,  c). — Cicero  and 
Caesar  are  excellent  writers ;  which  pleases  you  ?  Neither. 
— Which  pleases  you  more  ?  Caesar. — The  birds  migrate  twice 
in  the  year. — The  soldiers  will  come  eight  times  a  year. — Oc- 
tober is  the  tenth  month  of  the  year ;  November  the  eleventh ; 
December  the  twelfth. — The  beams  are  four  feet  distant  from 
each  other. — The  beams  are  seven  feet  apart  from  each  other. 


§  17. 
/ERBS  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION  IN  18. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 
Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  in  id, 

(199.)  Some  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  instead 
of  taking  the  simple  verb-stem  for  the  tense-stem  in 
the  tenses  for  incomplete  action,  add  i  to  the  verb- 
stem  in  these  tenses.  They  form  the  infinitive,  how- 
ever, in  ere,  like  other  verbs  of  the  third. 

(200.)  Infin.  Active,  cap-gre,  to  take. 


SINGULAR.                                                                                  ll 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

capi-6. 

cap-i-ebam. 

cfip-i-5m. 

cap-is, 

cap-i-ebas. 

cap-i-es. 

cap-it.           II 

cap-i-ebat. 
cap-i-6t. 

PLURAI.. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

cftp-i-mus. 

cfipi-ebamus. 

cap-i-emiis. 

cap-i-tis. 

cap-i-ebatis. 

cap-i-etis. 

cap-i-unt. 

cap-i-ebant. 

cap-i-ent. 

Infin.  Passive,  cap-i,  to  &6  taken. 

SINGULAR.                                                                                  1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

cap-i-6r. 

capi-ebar. 

cap-i-ar. 

cap-6-ris. 

cap-i-ebaris. 

cap-i-eris. 

cap-i-tur. 

cap-i-ebatur. 

cap-i-etur. 

PLURAL.                                                                                1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

cap-i-mur. 

capi-ebamur. 

cap-i-emur. 

cap-i-mini. 

cap-i-ebamini. 

cap-i-emini. 

cap-i-untur. 

capi-ebantur. 

cap-i-entur. 

EXERCISE. 


(201.)   Vocabulary. 


[In  aU  cases,  verbs  of  the  class  described  above  will  be  indicated  in 
the  vocabularies  by  the  ending  id,  after  the  infinitive  form ;  e.  g.,  to 
make,  ftlc6r6  (id).] 


82  VERBS    OF   THIRD   CONJUGATION   IN   10. 


Pardon,  favour y  vSniS,  89. 

Excuse,  excusatid,   (excusation)  is 

(£)• 

To  receive,  accept,  accipSrS  (io). 
Way,  road,  iter,  (itingr)  is  (neut.). 
To  undertake,  susciperfi  (id). 
To  make,  facerS  (id). 

(202.)  Example. 
Willingly  Ccesar  gives  par- 
don and  receives  the  excuse. 


And,  quS.* 

Ship,  navis,  (nav)  is  (f»). 

To  repair,  to  renew,  to  rebuild,  rSfi- 

c6r6  (io). 
Lon^,  lon^s,  a,  um. 
Wall,  murus,  i.  » 

Harbour,  portiis,  iis  (m.). 


Libenter    Caesar   dat  veniam, 
excusationemque*  accipit. 

(203.)   Translate  into  English, 

Labieniis  multa  Germanorum  (78,  II.,  b)  oppida  capiebat. — 
Helvetii  per  provinciam  nostram  iter  faciunt. — Vulnera  gravia 
a  militibus  accipiuntur. — Mdui  bellum  raagniim  suscipiebant. 
— Libenter  Caesar  nuntios  accipit,  iisque  (201,  N.)  veniam  dat. 
— Imperator  obsides  civitatis  libenter  accipiet. — Nuntiiim  a 
patre  eras  accipies. — Crassiis  naves  longas,  quae  in  portu  sunt, 
reficit. — Consul  muros  urbis  reficit. 

(204.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  enemy  were  making  (their)  way  through  our  province. — 
The  Romans  were  rapidly  (celeriter)  making  their  way  through 
Gaul. — We  shall  receive  a  messenger  from  the  city  to-day. — 
The  Helvetians  were  undertaking  a  severe  and  great  war. — 
The  soldiers  receive  many  and  severe  wounds. — We  shall  make 
(our)  way  through  Britain. — Caesar  will  willingly  receive  the 
excuse  of  the  iEduans,  and  grant  them  (iisque)  favour. — The 
gifts  of  a  father  are  gladly  (libenter)  received. — The  long  ships 
are  repaired  by  Caesar — The  general  was  rebuilding  the  old 
(ve teres)  ships  which  were  in  the  harbour. — We  shall  re- 
build the  old  walls. 

(205.)  Observe  the  formation  of  the  following 
words : 

Accip6r6  {to  receive),  =  ftd  {to)+c&p&Y^  {to  take), 
Suscip6r6  {to  undertake),  =  sub  {under)-\-c&peiY6. 
Kef ic6r6  {to  rebuild),  =  rfi+facSrd  {to  make  again).  § 

{^*  In  the  composition  of  verba  with  prepositions,  ^  £requen|iy  passei 
into  i,  as  in  these  examples. 

*  E  t  joins  words  or  sentences  which  are  considered  independent  and 
of  equal  importance  with  each  other ;  qu6  joins  a  word  or  sentence  close- 
ly  to  another,  as  an  appendage  to  it. 


§  18. 
DEPONENT  VERBS. 


LESSON   XXXV. 


Deponent  Verbs. 

(206.)  Deponent  verbs  are  such  as  have  the  pass- 
ive form,  but  an  active  meaning  ;  6.  ^.,  ho r tor,  I  ex- 
hort  (not  /  am  exhorted), 

(207.)  The  forms  of  deponents  in  the  tenses  for 
incomplete  action  of  the  indicative  mood  are  precisely 
the  same  as  those  of  passive  verbs  (Lessons  XIL, 
XIIL) ;  we  therefore  need  only  give  the^r^^  persons. 

(208.) 


DEPONENT    FORMS. 


INDICATIVE. 


let  conj. 
2d  conj. 
Sd  conj, 
4th  conj. 


hortor,  I  exhort,  [hortabar,  I  was  exhorting, 
fateor,  I  confess,  fatebar,  Iwcls  confessing. 
sequor,  I  follow,  sequfibar,  I  was  following. 
metior,  /  measure.  raeMeh^r,  I  was  measuring. 


hortabor,  I  will  exhort. 
f  atebor,  /  will  confess. 
sequar,  I  will  follow. 
metiar,  I  tdU  measure. 


INFINITIVE. 


1.  hort-ari, 
totxhorL 


2.  ftlt-€i1, 
to  confess. 


3.  sequ-i, 
to  follow. 


4.  m6t-iri, 
to  measure. 


[  B^"  In  the  vocabularies  deponent  verbs  are  always  given  by  the  in- 
Jinitive  forms.  Observe  that  the  ending  -ari  shows  that  the  yerb  is  of 
the  1st  conj.;  -eri,  the  2d;  -i,  the  3d;  -iri,  the  4th.] 


EXERCISE. 

(209.)   Vocabulary, 

[Transitive  deponents  govern  the  accusative,  unless  it  is  otherwise 

mentioned  in  the  vocabularies.] 

To  embrace,  amplect-i. 

To  gain,  to  possess  on^s  self  of,  p6t- 
M  (with  gen.  or  abL ;  general- 
ly gen.  in  Caes.). 

To  endeavour,  con-ari. 

To  follow,  sequ-T. 

Asi  as  if,  tanquam  (adv.). 


To   strive  after,  purstte,  persequ-i 

(per  +  sequi,  to  follow  through). 
Glory,  gloria,  ae. 
All,  tottis,  a,  urn  (194,  R.,  1). 
Bravery,  virtue,  virtus,  (virtut)  is  (f.). 
Long,  diu  (adv.). 
Sin, fault,  peccatum,  i. 


84  DEPONENT    VERBS. 


(210.)  Example. 


Helvetii  p6r  provinciS,m   nos- 
tramit^rf^cere  conantiir. 


The  Helvetians  endeavour  to 

pass    (=  to    make  way) 

through  our  province. 

Rule  of  Syntax, — The  infinitive  is  used  in  Latin  (as  in 
English)  to  complete  the  imperfect  ideas  expressed  by 
certain  verbs ;  e.  g.^  I  wish,  I  can,  I  hasten,  I  endeavour, 
&c.,  as  facer e  in  the  above  example.* 

(211.)   Translate  into  English. 

P  ater  filiiim  et  filiam  amplectitiir. — Imperator  milites  diti  hor- 
tabatur. — Dumnorix  totiiis  (194,  R.  1)  Gallise  potitur. — Pecca- 
tS,  me  a  fatebor. — Principes  totius  Galliae  potiri  conabantiir. — 
Romani  per  Britanniam  iter  facere  conantiir. — Gloria  virtutem 
tanquam  umbra  sequitiir. — Magnos  homines  virtute  (55)  m^ti- 
miir,  non  fortuna. — Milites  semper  gloriam  persequuntiir. — 
Milites  ducem  libenter  sequebantiir. 

(212.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  father  will  embrace  (his)  sons  and  daughters. — The  chiefs 
possess  themselves  of  all  the  province. — Do  you  confess  (135, 
II.)  your  fault? — The  Helvetians  were  endeavouring  to  pass 
through  Gaul. — Glory  will  foUow  bravery  as  a  shadow. — We 
were  exhorting  the  soldiers  yesterday. — ^We  shall  gladly  follow 
Caesar. — They  are  rapidly  making  their  way  through  our  prov- 
ince.— ^You  measure  men  by  (their)  fortune,  not  by  (their) 
bravery. — The  chiefs  will  endeavour  to  lead  the  army  across  the 
Rhine  (113,  II.,  a). — Generals  always  strive  after  glory. — Are 
you  exhorting  (135,  II.)  your  son  ? — The  Romans  always  fol- 
lowed glory.  ' 

*  Observe  carefully  that  a  purpose  is  never  expressed  by  the  simple 
infinitive  in  Latin.  It  would  not  be  Latin  to  saydiscferg  venit,  Accowes 
to  learn. 


§  19. 
ADVERBS. 


LESSON  XXXVI. 
Adverbs, 


[This  section  need  not  be  learned  by  heart  in  the  first  course,  but  the 
iistinction  oi primitive  and  derivative  should  be  acquired ;  and  the  section 
ihould  be  afterward  referred  to  whenever  examples  occur.] 

(213.)  Adverbs  (17)  are  either  Primitive  or  Deriva- 
tive. 

[We  give  but  a  few  here ;  a  fuller  list  will  be  given  hereafter. — See 
Summary  of  Etymology,  678.]  $.  7. 

(214.)  Primitive  Adverbs: 

1.  Negative. — ^N5n,  not;  baud,  not;  ne  (interrog.  crimper.),  not;  ne- 
quidem  (always  separated  by  some  word),  nx)t  even. 

2.  Of  Place. — Ub!,  where;  ibi,  there;  quo?  whither?  hiic,  hither j 
illuc,  thither;  undS,  whence ;  ind6,  thence,  &c. 

3.  Of  Time. — ^unc,  now;  tvLm  or  tunc,  then ;  nuy&r,  lately ;  eras, 
to-m,orrow ;  ho  die,  to-day  ;  hSri,  yesterday,  &c. 

4.  Of  Quality,  &c. — Admodum,  very;  an,  whether;  cur,  why  (in- 
terrog.) ;  6tiam,  also ;  f6re,  almost,  &c. 

(215.)  Derivative  Adverbs  are  nearly  all  formed 
from  adjectives  or  participles  by  adding  e  or  iter  to 
their  stems. 

1.  Add  e  to  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  the ^rs^  class ;  e.  g., 

Adjectives.  Adverbs. 

Alt-US,  high.  Alt-e,  high. 

LibSr,  free.  Lib6r-e,  freely. 

Clar-us  illustrious.  Clar-e,  illustriously. 

&c.  &c. 
Rem.  Bonus  makes  b6n6,  well,  and  milus  {bad),m.^\^,  badly.   All 
others  end  in  e  {long). 

'  2.  (a)  Add  it  fir  to  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  the  second  and  third  doss* 
es ;  e.  g., 

Adjectives.  Adverbs. 

C6l6r,  swift.  Celer-itfir,  swiftly. 

BrSv-is,  brief.  Brev-it6r,  briefly, 

{h)  But  those  which  end  in  ns  do  not  take  the  connecting  vowell; 

H 


86 


ADVERBS. 


Prudens,  prudent.  I  Pruden-tSr,  prudently. 

Sapiens,  wise.  \  Sapien-tfir,  wisely. 

Rem.  Audax,  bold,  makes  audac-tSr,  boldly. 

3.  Some  are  derived  from  nouns  by  adding  tus  or  timto  the  stem 
by  means  of  a  connecting  vowel ,  e.  g.,  ccel-itus, /row  heaven ;  fund- 
ita&ifrom  the  ground,  totally  ;  gr6g-a-tim,  byjlocks,  &c. 

(216.)  Cases  of  adjectives,  especially  in  the  neuter 
gender,  are  often  used  as  adverbs  ;  e.  g,,  dulce,  sweet- 
ly  ;  ^rimUm,  first ;  islso,  falsely,  &>c. 

EXERCISE. 

(217.)   Vocabulary. 

Well,  b6n6,  derived  irregularly  from 

bonus,  good. 
Bravely,  fortit6r,  derived  regularly 

(215,  2,  a)  from  fortis,  brave. 
Sharply,  spiritedly,  acrit^r,  derived 

regularly  from  ac6r  (acr-is),  sharp. 
Swiftly,  cel6rit6r,  derived  regularly 

from  cel6r,  swift. 
Happily,  beate,   derived  regularly 

(215,  1)  from  beatiis,  happy. 
Honestly,  honeste,  derived  regularly 

from  honestus,  honest. 


Almost,  fere. 

Rightly,  recte,  derived  regularly 
from  rectus,  right. 

Impiously,  impie,  derived  regularly 
from  impius,  impious. 

In  flocks,  gregatim. 

To  labour,  I&b6rar6. 

To  blame,  to  accuse,  find  fault  with, 
incusare. 

Socrates,  Socrates,  (Socrat)  is. 

Not  even,  nequidem  (always  separa- 
ted by  one  or  more  words). 


Honeste  et  recte  viv^re  est 
bene  et  beate  viverS. 


(218.)     Examples, 
{a)   To    live    honestly    and 

rightly  is  to  live  well  and 

happily. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  adverb  is  generally  placed  hefore  the 
word  which  it  qualifies. 
(6)  Almost  all  men  love  them-  I  Omnes  f  6r  6  h6mines  s^se  diM- 

selves.  I      gunt. 

Fere  is  generally  placed  between  the  adjective  and  noun. 


(c)  He  does  not  praise  even 
Socrates 


Ne  SocrS-temquidSmlaudat. 


(219.)   Translate  into  English. 

Hostes  nobiscum  (125,  II.,  b)  acrit^r  pugnabant. — Equi  in 
§,gris  celeriter  currebant. — B6n§  vivSre  est  beate  viv^r^. — Cer- 
vi  grSgatlm  semp6r  currunt. — Semper  sapiens  rect©  vivit. — Diu 


ADVERBS.  87 

et  acntSr  milites  pugnabant. — Omnes  fere  homines  impie  vivunt. 
— Omnes  fere  aves  bis  in  anno  migrant. — Ne  Ciceronem  quidem 
laudabit. — Ne  hoc  quidem  (not  even  with  this)  delectabitiir. 

(220.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  JEduans  were  fighting  long  and  bravely. — Caesar  sharply 
accuses  the  Helvetians. — Horses  and  stags  run  swiftly. — The 
farmers  were  labouring  long  in  the  fields. — Almost  all  men  love 
their  (own)  children. — Caesar  led  almost  all  the  Germans  across 
the  Rhine  (113,  II.,  a). — I  waited  for  you  long. — The  bad  do 
not  live  happily. — To  live  happily  is  to  live  rightly. — You  will 
not  be  delighted  even  with  this. — Not  even  this  will  delight  (my) 
father. — Not  even  Caesar  will  be  praised. — Almost  all  birds  fly  in 
flocks. — They  do  not  praise  even  Virgil. — Almost  all  wise  (men) 
live  happily. — Almost  all  men  strive-after  glory. — To  live  pru- 
dently is  to  live  happily. — The  commander  will  blame  the 
lieutenant  sharply. 


§  20. 


PREPOSITIONS.     (XXXVII.— XXXVIII.) 

LESSON  XXXVII. 
Prepositions, 

[This  section  (221)  need  not  be  learned  by  heart  in  the  first  course,  but 
should  be  constantly  referred  to  whenever  examples  occur.] 

(221.)  The  following  prepositions  govern  the  ac- 
cusative case : 


Ad,  to. 

Jtpiid,  at. 

Ante,  before  (of  time  and  place). 

Adversus,  adversum,  against. 

C 1  s,  c  i  t  r  a,  071  this  side. 

Circa  and  circum,  around,  about. 

Circit6r,  about,  towards  (indefi- 
nitely of  time  or  number). 

Contra,  against. 

Erga,  towards. 

Extra,  beyond,  without. 

Infra,  beneath,  below  (the  contrary 
of  supra). 

Int6r,  between,  among. 

Intra,  within  (the  contrary  of  ex- 
tra). 


•Tux t  ft,  near  to,  beside. 

Ob,  on  account  of. 

P  e  n  6  s,  in  the  power  of. 

P6r,  throu.^h. 

P6n6,  behind. 

Post,  after  (both  of  time  and  space). 

Proetfir,  beside. 

P  r  6  p  6,  near. 

Propter,  near,  on  account  of. 

Secundum,  after,  in   accordance 

with. 
Supra,  above. 
T  r  a  n  s,  071  the  other  side. 
Versus  (is  put  after  its  noun),  t(h 

wards  a  place. 
Ultra,  beyond. 


PrsB,  before,  owing  to. 
Pro,  before,  for. 
Sin6,  without. 

T  6nu  s  (is  put  after  its  noun),  as  far 
as,  up  to.  , 


(222.)  The  following  govern  the  ablative  case : 

A,  lib,  from,  by. 

Clam,  without  the  knowledge  of. 

Coram,  in  the  presence  of. 

Cum,  with. 

De,  down  from,  concerning. 

£,  ex   (e   before   consonants    only, 

ex  before    both   consonants    and 

vowels),  out  of  from. 

The  following  lines  contain  the  prepositions  governing  the  ablative,  and 
can  be  readily  learned  by  heart : 

Absque,  a,  ab,  abs,  and  de, 
Coram,  clam,  cum,  ex,  and  e, 
Teniis,  sin6,  pro,  and  prse. 

(223.)  The   following   govern   the    accusative    or 
ablative : 

1.  f  n,  [a]  with  the  accus.,  (1)  into,  on,  to  (to  the  question  whither  7)  (2) 
against,    (b)  With  the  ablative,  in,  on  (to  the  question  where  ?) 

2.  Sub,  [a)  with  the  accus,,  (1)  under  (to  the  question  whither?)  {2)  about 


PREPOSITIONS. 


89 


or  towards  (indefinitely  of  time),     {b)  With  the  ablative,  under  (to  the 
question  where  ?) 

3.  SupSr,  (a)  with  the  accus.,  above,  over,     [b)  With  the  ablative,  upon, 
concerning-. 

4.  Subt6r,  under,  beneath  (but  Kttle  used). 

EXERCISE. 


(224.)   Vocabulary. 

The  Garonne  (river),  G&nimna,  ae. 
An  Aquitanian,  Aquitaniis,  i. 
Aquitania,  Aquitania,  ae. 
The  Leman,  or  Geneva  (lake),  L6- 

mannus,  T. 
Jura  (mountain),  JurS,  ae  (m.  25,  a). 
To  extend  or  carry,  perducSrS  (pSr 

+duc6r6). 
State,  civitas,  (civitat)  is  (f.). 
Royal  power  (kingdom),  regnum,  i. 

(225.)  Examples. 


History,  hist6ria,  sb. 

Fable,  fabiila,  ae. 

To  bound  (limit),  continerfi  (con+t6- 

nerS). 
Part  or  side,  pars,  (part)  is  (f.). 
On  one  side,  ima  ex  parts. 
The  Rhone  (river),  Rhoddniis,  i. 
To  divide,  dividSre. 
Lake,  lacus,  us  (m.),  (112,  R.  1). 
To  remain,  mfinerfi. 


Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  G&rum- 
na  fltimen  dividit. 


{a)  The  river  Garonne  sepa- 
rates the  Gauls  from  the 
Aquitanians. 

Rule  of  Syntax, — Two  nouns  expressing  the  same  person 
or  thing  take  the  same  case,  and  are  said  to  be  in  appo- 
sition with  each  other ;  6.  g.^  in  the  above  example,  G  a- 
rumna  flumen. 


Csesarin  Galliam  contendit. 
Erat  omnino  in  Gallia  legi6 
una. 


(&)   Ccesar  haptens  into  Gaul. 
(c)   There  was  altogether  in 
Gaul  one  legion, 

(226.)  Translate  into  English. 

CaBs2.r  a  lacu  ad  montem,  muriim  perducit. — Apiid*  Herodo- 
tiim,  patrSm  historiae,  sunt  multae  fabiilse. — Caesar  a  lacu  Le- 
manno  ad  montem  Juram,  muriim  perducit. — Mercator  in  urbe 
manet. — Pueri  in  domo  sunt. — Princeps  regnum  in  civitate  oc- 
cupat. — Consul  exercitiim  in  fines  Sequanorum  ducit. — Hel- 
ve tii  continentur  una  ex  parte  (125,  IV.,  N.J)  flumine  Rheno ; 
altera  ex  parte  monte  Jura,  tertia  ex  parte  l^cu  Lemanno  6t 
flumine  Rhodano. 

*  A^nid  is  used  with  the  names  of  authors  (instead  of  in,  with  the  name 
of  their  works) ;  e.  g.,  ipud  Cic6r6nem  l^gimus,  we  read  in  Cicero, 

H2 


90  PREPOSITIONS. 

(227.)   Translate  into  Latin* 

Caesar  was  extending  walls  and  ditches  (fossasque)  from  the 
river  to  the  camp. — The  soldiers  remain  in  the  camp. — Caesar 
will  seize  the  royal  power  in  the  state. — The  river  Rhine  sep- 
arates the  Gauls  from  the  Germans. — Caesar  hastens  into  Italy 
and  levies  (conscribere)  five  legions. — The  deserters  remain  in 
the  town. — The  general  will  lead'the  soldiers  into  Italy. — Aqui- 
tania  is  bounded  on  one  side  by,  the  river  Garumna ;  on  another 
side  by  mountains;  on  the  third  side  by  the  river  Rhone. — 
You  will  find  (invenies)  many  fine  (praeclara)  precepts 
in  (apud)  Cicero. — You  will  find  many  fables  in  Herodotus,  the 
father  of  history. 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 
Prepositions  in  Composition, 

(228.)  Most  of  the  prepositions  given  in  Lesson 
XXXVII.  are  used  as  prefixes  in  composition  with 
verbs,  and  modify  their  signification;  e.  ^.,  pone  re, 
to  place;  post-ponere,  to  place  after, 

(229.)  The  foUow^ing  prepositions  are  never  used 
alone,  but  always  as  prefixes  in  composition : 

1.  Amb,  round,  about  (from  am  bo,  both) ;  ambir6  (from  amb-j-ird,  to 

go  round),  to  walk  round,  to  canvass  for  votes. 
%  Con,  together  (a  variation  of  cam,  with) ;  con-jnng6r6  (con+jun- 

g6r6),  to  join  together,  to  unite. 

3.  D  i  or  d  i  s,  asunder  (a  variation  of  d  e,from) ;  dis-ced6r6(di  s-f-c  h- 
d6r6,  ^o  give  place  asunder),  to  depart. 

In,  with  adjectives,  means  not;  in-doctus,  unlearned;  with 
verbs,  means  in,  into;  e.  g.,  ir-rump6r6  (in+rump6r6),  to 
burst  into. 

4.  R e,  back,  again ;  r  S - fi c  6 r  6  (r  6+f  &o6v6,to  make  again),  to  refit 

5.  Be,  aside;  se-duc$r6  (8e+duc6r6,  to  lead  astray),  to  seduce. 


PREPOSITIONS.  91 


Cohort,  c6hors,  (c6hort)  is  (f.) 

To  station,  coll6car6  (con+l6car6). 

To  distribute,  distribuSrS  (dis+trf- 

buere). 
Africa,  Africa,  ae. 
Europe,  EuropS,  ae. 
Horseman,  6quSs,  (Squit)  ia  (m.). 


EXERCISE, 

(230.)   Vocabulary. 

Again  (adv.),  rursus. 

To  join  together,  conjungSrS. 

To  burst  iruo,  irrumpSre. 

To  burst  into  the  camp,  in  castri  ir- 

rumpSrS. 
Mediterranean,    MSditerranens,    ft, 

um. 
To  separate,  separarS  (se+parllrS). 

(231.)   Translate  into  English. 

Consul  rursus  legiones  in  hiberna  reducit. — Legatiis  quinqu^ 
cohortes  ciim  exercitu  conjungit. — Milites  omnes  in  oppidum 
irrumpunt. — Mare  Mediterraneum  AMcara  ab  Europa  sepa;rat. 
— Belgae  se  cum  Germams  conjungebant. — Imperator  exercitiira 
in  hibernis  coDocat. — Germani  equites  in  castrd  (223,  1,  a) 
irrumpere  conantur. — Galba  exercitum  in  hibernis  collScat, 
l^gionesque  in  civitates  distribuit. 

(232.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  will  lead  the  cohorts  back  again  into  winter-quarters. 
— All  the  Gei-mans  were  bursting  into  the  camp. — The  Belgi- 
ans will  unite  themselves  with  Caesar. — The  brave  soldiers  were 
trying  to  burst  into  the  town. — The  illustrious  general  was  sta- 
tioning the  soldiers  in  winter-quarters. — The  legions  are  distrib- 
uted among  (in,  with  accus,)  the  states. — The  legions  are  led 
back  into  winter-quarters. — The  Mediterranean  Sea  separates 
Spain  (Hispania)  from  Africa. — Caesar  will  join  all  the  horsemen 
with  the  army. 


§  21. 

ANALYSIS  OF  TENSE-FORMATIONS.    (XXXIX 
— XLI.) 


LESSON  XXXIX. 

Active  Voice. 
(233.)  (a)  The  student  must  have  observed  that  in 
all  the  tenses  for  incomplete  action  in  the  active  voice 
the  person-endings  are  as  follows  : 


Sing. 
Plur. 

1st  person,  o  or  m, 
1st  person,  mus. 

2d  person,  s. 
2d.  person,  tis. 

3d  person,  t. 
3d  person,  nt. 

(b)  He  must  have  observed,  also,  that  these  end- 
ings are  added  to  the  proper  tense-stem  in  each  tense. 
We  take  up  the  tenses  in  order. 

(234.)  PRESENT    TENSE.  — 

(a)  Person-endings,  o,  s,  t,  m  u  s,  t  i  s,  n  t.  ^ 

(h)  The  Tense-stem  is  the  simple  verb-stem. 

(c)  To  connect  the  person-endings  v^ith  the  tense- 
stems,  certain  connecting  vowels  are  used.  In  the 
present  tense  these  are,  for 

(1.)  First  conjugation,  a;  e,  g,,  am-a-if. 

(2.)  Second       "  e ;  e,  g,,  mon-e-t. 

(3.)  Third  "  i;  e,  g,,  reg-i-t. 

(4.)  Fourth        "  i ;  e,  g.,  aud-z-^.* 

Hem.  1.  Observe  that  in  the  1st  person  of  the  1st  and  3d  conjugations 
the  connecting  vowel  does  not  appear ;  a  m  -  o,  r  e  g  -  o  (not  am-a-o, 
reg-i-o). 

Rem.  2.  In  the  3d  person  plural,  the  third  conjugation  uses  u  instead 
of  i;  e.  g.,  reg-vL-nt',  the  fourth  inserts  u ;  e.  ^.,  a  u  d  -  i  -  u  n  t. 

*  Am  a,  mone,  audi,  are  the  proper  crude  forms  of  these  verbs  re- 
spectively. They  are  classed  together,  in  a  philosophical  treatment  of  the 
language,  as  one.  conjugation  oi pwre  verbs  ;  while  those  of  the  third  con- 
jugation form  the  conjugation  of  consonant  verbs. 


U'     ■•  ■>»•■> 


ANALYSIS    OF   TENSE 


(235.) 

TABLE. 

Tense- 
Stem. 

Connect. 
Vowel. 

Person - 

Endings. 

FORMS   COMPLETE. 

4. 

am- 

mon- 
reg- 

ETld- 

a. 

e. 

i. 

i(u). 

O. 

s. 

t 

mus. 

tifl. 

nt. 

1. 

amo  (ama-o). 

ama-8. 

ama-t. 

ama-mus. 

ama-tis. 

ama-nt 

2. 
mone-o. 
mone-s. 
mone-t. 
mone-mus. 
mone-Hs. 
mone-nt. 

3. 

reg-o. 

reg-is. 

reg-i-t. 

reg-i-mils. 

reg-i-tis. 

reg-u-nt 

4. 

audi:0. 

audi-3. 

audi-t 

audi-mus. 

audi-tis. 

audi-u-nt 

Rem.  Observe  that  the  vowels  are  long-  before  the  person-endings  hi 
1st,  2d,  and  4th  conjugations,  except  where  they  come  before  o  or 
t.  In  those  before  o,  the  general  nde  (24, 1)  prevails  ;  and  it  is  also 
an  invariable  rule,  in  Latin,  that  no  vowel  tn  ajinal  sellable  can  be 
long  before  t. 


(236.) 


EXERCISE. 


[The  pupil  should  hereafter  analyze  the  tense-forms,  as  they  occur,  some- 
what  as  follows :] 

A  mas:  verb-stem,  am-;  pres.  tense-stem,  am-;  connecting 
voivel,  a;  2d  per  s,  ending,  s. 

Mon^mus:  verb-stem,  mon-;  pres. tense-stem,  mon-;  con^ 
necting  vowel,  e  ;  1st  plur.  ending,  mus. 

Regitis:  verb-stem,  reg-;  pres.  tense-stem,  r6g-;  connect* 
ing  vowel,  i ;   2d  plur,  ending,  tis. 

Audiunt:  verb-stem,  aud-;  jpres.  tense-stem,  aud-;   cori' 
necting  vowels,  i  and  u;  2d  plur.  ending,  nt. 

In  like  manner,  analyze 
Festinas,         h^bet,  videtis,        convoco, 

Vigilamus,      prohibent,      legit,  habetis, 

Vocatis,  poscimus,      dormimiis,  muniunt, 


festinatis, 

pugnat, 

laudant. 


Revocant,       veniunt,         auditis,        ambiilamus,  vuln^ramus. 


LESSON  XL. 

Analysis  of  Tense-Formations,  continued. 

Active. 

(237.)  IMPERFECT    TENSE. 

(a)  Person-endingSj  m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 
{b)  The  tense-stem, 

(1.)  In  1st  conj.  adds  ab  to  the  verb-stem ;  e.  g.,  ftm-ab. 

(2.)  In  2d  conj.    "     eb  **  6.  ^.,  mon-eb. 

(3.)  In  3d  conj.     "     6b  "  e.g.,r&g-eh. 

(4.)  In  4th  conj.    **    l6b  "  e.  ^.,  aud-i6b. 


94 


ANALYSIS   OP   TENSE-FORMATIONS. 


(c)  The  connecting  vowel  a  is  used  to  join  the  tense- 
stems  and  person-endings  ;  e.  g.,  amab-a-m. 


Tense- 
Stem. 

Con. 
Vow. 

Person- 
Endings. 

FOBMS   COMPLETE. 

1. 

1 

4. 

am-ab- 
mon-eb- 
reg-eb. 
aud-ieb- 

a. 

m. 

8. 
t. 

mus. 
tis. 

1. 

Smaba-m. 

amaba-s. 

amaba-t. 

amaba-mus. 

amaba-tis. 

amaba-nt 

2. 

moneba-m. 

moneba-s. 

moneba-t. 

moneba-mus. 

moneba-tis. 

moneba-nt. 

3. 
regeba-m. 
regeba-s. 
regeba-t 
regeba-mus. 
regeba-tis. 
regeba-nt 

4. 
audieba-m. 
audieba-s. 
audieba-t 
audieba-mus, 
audieba-tis. 
audieba-nt 

FUTURE    TENSE. 

(238.)  I.  We  treat  the  1st  and  2d  conjugations  first. 
In  these, 

(a)  The  person-endings  are,  o,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 

(b)  The  tense-stems,  precisely  like  the  imperf.  in 
the  same  conjugations, 

(1.)  In  1st  conj.,  add  ab  to  the  verb-stem;  e.  g.y  ^m-ab. 
(2.)  In  2d  conj.,      "    eb  "  e.  g.^  mon-eh. 

(c)  The  connecting  vowel  i  is  used  to  join  the  tense- 
stems  and  person-endings;  6.  ^.,  amab-i-t ;  moneb- 
i-t. But  in  the  third  person  plural,  u  is  used  instead 
of  i;  e.  g.j  amab-u-nt. 

Rem.  In  the  1st  person  the  connecting  vowel  is  dropped  (as  in  234, 
c,  R.  1) ;  thus,  amab-o  (not  ftmftb-i-o). 

(239.)  TABLE. 


Tense-stem. 

Connecting 
Vowel. 

Peraon- 
Endings. 

FORMS  COMPLETE.                    || 

1. 

2. 

&m-ab- 

i. 

u. 

0. 

il: 

^  mus. 

I  tis. 

nt. 

1. 

&mab-o. 

ftmabi-s. 

amabi-t. 

amftbi-mus. 

amabi-tis. 

&mabu-nt. 

2. 
moneb-o. 
monebi-s. 
monebi-t. 
monebi-mus. 
monebi-tis. 
monebu-nt       | 

(240.)  n.  The  3d  and4th  conjugations  present  some 
irregularity  in  the  future. 

(a)  The  person-endings  dire,  m,  Sftf  mus,  tis,  nt. 

(b)  The  tense-stem, 

(1)  In  the  3d  conj.,  is  the  simple  verb-stem;  e,  g.^  reg. 

(2)  In  the  4th  conj.,  it  adds  i  to  the  verb-stem ;  €.  ^.,  au  d  -i. 


ANALYSIS   OP  TENSE-FORMATIONS. 


95 


(c)  The  connecting  vowel  e  is  used  to  join  the 
tense-stem  and  person-endings;  reg-e-miis,  aud-i- 
e-mus.  But  in  the  first  person  a  is  substituted  for  e 
in  both  conjugations;  e.  g.,  reg-a-m,  aud-i-a-m, 
not  reg-e-m,  audi-e-m. 

(241.)  TABLE. 


Tense-Stem. 

Con'g. Vowel. 

Pere.  Endings. 

FORMS 

COMPLETE. 

3. 

4. 

r6g. 

a. 

m. 

r6ga-m. 

audia-m. 

fs. 

rSge-s. 

audie-s. 

t. 

r6g6-t. 

audie-t. 

audi- 

e. 

<  mus. 

rfige-mus. 

audie-mu0. 

tis. 

rege-tis. 

audie-tis. 

[nt. 

r6ge-nt. 

audie-nt. 

(242,)    (a)  EXAMPLES. 

Amsiheiti a  I  verb^stem J  &m-;  tense-stem,  &ma,b-;  imperf,  con, 
vowels  a ;  2d  plur,  ending,  -tis. 

Amabitis:  verb-stem^  ftm-;  tense-stem,  Siin^h -;  fut,  con. 
voweL  i;  2dplur,  ending,  -tis. 

Audiemus:  verb-stem,  aud-;  fut.  tense-stem,  audi-;  cow- 

necting  vowel,  e;  1st  plur.  ending,  -miis. 

[i^^  The  pupil  should  keep  up  the  hahit  of  finding  any  ten«e-form 
which  he  may  need  to  use,  by  putting  together  its  proper  parts;  e.  ff., 
stem,  ending,  &c.,  rather  than  by  recurring  to  the  paradigms.] 

(b)  Analyze  the  following : 

Laudabam,  laudabo,  laudabitis, 

Docebamiis,  muniebamfis,  legam, 

Occidebant,  dormiebatis,  scribemiis, 

Dormiam,  audiet,  docebunt, 

6cc.  &CC.  &c. 


LESSON  XLI. 
Analysis  of  Tense-Formations^  continued. 

PASSIVE   VOICE. 

(243.)  The  passive-endings  are, 

Sing.   1st  person,  r;   2d  person,  ris  or  r6;   3d  person,  tur. 
Plur.   1st  person,  m  ii  r ;   2d  person,  mini;   3d  person,  n  t  u  r. 

(244.)  These  endings  are  affixed  to  the  tense-stems, 
formed  as  in  the  active  voice,  and  with  the  same  con- 


96  ANALYSIS  OF  TENSE-FORMATIONS. 

necting  vowels.     Only  the  following  apparent  irregu- 
larities are  to  be  noticed. 

(a)  In  the  1st  pers.  pres.  indie,  the  ending  r  is  added  to  the 
full  present  active  form ;  e.  g-.,  amo,  amo-r;  doceo,  doceo-r, 
&c. 

(b)  In  the  3d  conj.,  2d  pers.  sing.,  pres.,  e  is  used  for  con- 
necting vowel  instead  of  i ;  e.  g*.,  reg-e-ris,  reg-e-re,  in- 
stead of  reg-i-ris,  &c. 

(c)  In  the  1st  and  2d  conj.,  future,  2d  pers.  sing.,  e  is  used 
for  connecting  vow^el instead ofz;  e. g,,  moneb-e-ris,  amab- 
e-ris,  instead  of  amab-i-ris,  moneb-i-ris. 

(245).  EXERCISE. 

Examples. — D  6  c  e  n  t  ii  r  :  verb-stem,  doc-;  pres,  tense-stem, 

doc-;  connecting  vowel,  e ;  3d  plur,  pass,  ending,  -  n  t  u  r. 
Amabamur:  verb-stem,  am-;  imperf.  tense-stem,  amab-; 

imperf.  conn,  vowel,  a;  1st plur. pass,  ending,  -mur. 
Audientiir:  verb-stem,  aud-;fut.  tense-stem,  audi-;/w^ 

conn,  vowel,  e;  3d  plur,  pass,  ending,  -ntiir. 
Regor:  verb-stem,  reg-;  pres.  act.  1st  pers.,  rego-;  1st 

pers.  pass,  ending,  -r. 

(246.)  Analyze 

Regebamiir,  occidemiir,  laudantiir, 

Docebimur,  audiemini,  videbimur, 

Timebaris,  doceb^ris,  docebuntiir, 

Docebamini,  &matur,  rSgitiir, 

&c.  &c.  &c. 


PART    11. 


FULLER  EXHIBITION  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  WORDS. 


§1. 

ADDITIONAL  RULES  OF  QUANTITY. 


LESSON  XLII. 

[The  student  should  now  learn  thoroughly  the  following  rules  of 
quantity,  most  of  which  he  has  seen  illustrated  frequently  already.] 

GENERAL  RULES. 

(246.)  (1)  A  vowel  before  another  is  short ;  e,  g.,  vl-a. 

(2)  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  one,  is  long 
hy  position ;  €.  ^.,  b  e  11  um. 

Rem.  A  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  in  the  same  syllable  renders  the 
preceding  short  vowel  common  in  verse;  e.  g,,  volfl-cris.  (In 
prose,  the  short  vowel  remains  short.) 

(3)  All  diphthongs  and  contracted  syllables  are  long ;  e.  g.^ 
au-riim,  co-go  (for  co+ago). 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

(1.)  Final  Syllables* 
1.  MoTiosyllables. 
(247.)  {a)  Most  monosyllables  ending  in  a  vowel  are  long  ; 
but  the  particles  que,  ve,  ne,  pte,  &c.,  attached  to  other  words, 
are  short. 

(6)  Most  monosyllables  ending  in  a  consonant  are  long  ;  but 
the  nouns  c  6  r,  f  e  1,  m  e  1,  v i r,  6  s  (ossis) ;  the  pronouns  q ui  s, 
quid,  qu6t;  and  the  particles  nee,  in,  an,  ad,  s6d,  with 
all  ending  in  ^,  are  short ;  also  es,  2d  person  of  sum. 

2.  Dissyllables  and  Polysyllables* 
(A)  Final  Vowels. 

(248.)  a  final  is  short  in  nouns,  except  the  abl.  of  the  1st  de- 
clension ;  long  in  verbs,  and  in  indeclinable  words, 
except  1 1  a,  quia,  e  j  a. 

(249.)  c  final  is  short  in  nouns  (except  5th  declension)  and 
verbs  (except  imperatives) ;  long  in  adverbs  de- 
rived from  adjectives  of  the  first  class,  with 
ferme,  fere,  ohe. 

(250.)  i  final  is  long ;  but  mihi,  tibi,  sib!,  ibi,  iibl,  are 
ccfftimon ;  nisi,  quasi,  short. 


100  ADDITIONAL  RULES  OF  aUANTITY. 

(251.)  o  final  is  common;  but  long  in  dat.  and  abl.  cases  of 
nouns  and  adjs.  used  as  adverbs  (e.  ^.,  falso, 
(tec);  ego,  duo,  6c to,  ure  short, 

(252.)  u  final  is  always  long ;  e.  g.,  diu. 

(B)  Final  Consonants. 

(253.)  All  final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant  (except  s)  are 
short 

Rules  for  s  final. 

(254.)  Final  as,  es,  6  s,  are  generally  Zow^ ;  e.g.,  am  as, 
doces,  equ6s. 

Rem.  1.  6  s  is  short  (1)  in  nouns  which  have  short  penult  in  the  gen. ; 

e.  g.,  mil  6  s  (mil  i  t  -is). 
2.  6  s  is  short  in  comp  6  s,  imp  6  s. 

(255.)  Final  is  and  us  are  generally  short;  e,  g.,  reg-is, 
domin-  ii  s. 

Rem.  Lis  is  long'  (1)  in  dat.  and  abl.  plural  of  nouns  ;  (2)  in  2d  per- 
son sing,  of  verbs  of  4th  conjugation ;  (3)  compounds  of  v  i  s ;  e.  g., 
mavis,  quamvis,  &c. 

2.  u  s  is  long  (1)  in  nouns  of  3d  decL  v^hich  have  u  long  in  the  penult 
of  gen.;  e.g.,  virtus  (utis),  palus  (udis);  (2)  in  gen.  sii^,  and 
N.,  A.,  V.  plur.  of  4th  declension. 

(2.)  Derivation  and  Composition, 
(256.)  Derivative  and  compound  words  generally  retain  the 
quantity  of   the    primitive    and   simple    words;   e.g.,   &mo, 
a  micus  ;  p  6  no,  im  p  6  no. 

(3.)  Increase, 
[A  noun  is  said  to  increase  v^hen  it  has  more  syllables  in  the  gen. 
than  in  the  nom.  [e.g.,  mil-6s,  mil- it -is  ;  here  it  is  the  increase); 
a  verb,  when  it  has  more  syllables  than  the  2d  pers.  sing,  indie. 
[e.g.,  ftm-as,  am- at -is  ;  here  at  is  the  increase.] 

(257.)  In  the  increase  of  nouns,  a  and  o  are  generally  long  ; 
e,  i,  u,  y,  short, 

(258.)  In  the  increase  of  verbs,  a,  e,  and  o  are  generally 
long ;  i,  w,  short. 

(4.)  Penults, 
(259.)  Every  perfect  tense  of  two  syllables  has  fhe  first  long 
,  (as  V  i  di),  except  b  i  bi,  f  i  di,  t  ii  li,  d  6  di,  s  1 6  ti,  and  s  c  i  di. 
(260.)  Penults  of  adjectives,    (1)  id  us,   icu5,   short;  (2) 


ADDITIONAL  RULES  OP  aUANTITY.  101 

!nus,  doubtful  (often  Zong) ;  (3)  ilis  and  bills,  derived  from 
verbs,  short ;  from  nouns,  long, 

[All  exceptions  to  the  above  rules  that  are  not  stated  will  be  marked 
ua  the  vocabularies.] 

(261.)  EXERCISE  ON  QUANTITIES. 

[Give  the  quantity  of  the  unmarked  syllables  of  the  following  words, 
with  the  rule  for  each.] 

1.  Final  Vowels. 

Ipse,  agmine,  die,  r6g6re,  rege,  docebgre,  re,  m6ve,  movere,  bSne  (adv., 
from  bonus),  Caesare,  optime  (adv.,  from  optimiis),  me,  domini,  vigilia,  audi, 
adventu,  ire,  hi,  consilio,  consule,  de,  tertia,  vigiliae,  contra,  roga,  m6neo, 
ita,  fructu,  amo. 

2.  Final  Consonants. 

Obsides,  bonas,  vigilias,  5mat,  miles  (milTtis),  milites,  rogavgras,  has, 
bSnum,  lampas  (lampadis),  pedes  (pSditis),  pgdites,  illas,  adventus  (gen.), 
rggis,  simul,  audis,  linter,  auditis,  vigiliis,  caput,  virtus  (virtutis),  ddminis, 
manus,  regitur,  regitis,  munis,  muniveras. 

3.  Increase. 

Amatis,  militis,  audiris,  obsidem,  monemus,  monebatis,  itineris,  rSgabas, 
mSnebamur,  audimus,  monebimini,  voluptatis,  sermonis,  murmure,  pSdites, 
clamorem,  milites,  vulturem,  amatis,  mSnebatis,  mSnetote,  audite,  legimas, 
pedem,  s6getis  (from  seges). 

4.  Penults. 

MalSdicus,  mirificus,  b§n6ficus,  fecilis  (from  fido),  pu6rilis  (from  puer), 
fimabilis  (from  Smo),  servilis  (from  servus). 


§  2. 

TENSES  OF  VERBS  FOR  COMPLETED  AC- 
TION.—PARTIAL  STATEMENT.  (XLIIL— 
XLVL) 


LESSON  XLIIL 
Tense  Forms  for  Completed  Action, — Indicative, 

(262.)  In  Part  I.  we  made  use  only  of  those  tenses 
of  the  verb  which  express  action  as  continuing  or 
incomplete,  viz.,  the  present,  imperfect,  and  future. 
There  are  three  tenses  also  for  completed  action,  viz., 
perfect  {I  have  i^n^^e/i),  pluperfect  {I  had  written),  fu- 
ture perfect  {I  shall  have  written).  The  stem  for  all 
these  is  the  same. 

(263.)  The  endings  for  these  three  tenses  are. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL.                                 1 

Perfect. 

Pluperf. 
Fut.  Perf. 

Ist. 
I. 

gram. 
erd. 

2d. 

isti. 

6ras. 
eris. 

3d. 

It. 

erat. 
grit. 

Ist 

imus. 

gramus. 
erimus. 

2d. 

istis. 

eratis. 
eritis. 

3d. 

J  erunt,  or 
^ere. 

grant. 

erint. 

(264.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  perfect-stem 
fu'  of  the  verb  esse,  to  be,  we  obtain  the  forms  per- 
fect {I  have  been),  pluperfect  {I  had  been),  future  per- 
fect {I  shall  have  been). 


Tense-Stem. 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

Future  Perfect 

f'^' 

gr&n. 

erd. 

isti. 

gras. 

giis. 

Fu- 

lit. 

grat. 

grit. 

)  imus. 

gramus. 

grimus. 

istis. 

gratis. 

gritis. 

V  grunt,  or  ere. 

grant. 

grint. 

(265.)  Double  use  of  the  Perfect, — It  must  be  carefully  ob- 
served that  the  Latin  perfect  has  two  uses,  one  answering  to 
the  English  perfect,  and  the  other  to  the  English  imperfect. 


TENSES  FOR  COMPLETED  ACTION. 


103 


Thus,  ful  *aeans  not  only  /  have  been,  but  /  was.  We  call 
the  former  che  perfect  present ;  the  latter  the  perfect  aorist,* 
which  expresses  momentary  action  in  past  time ;  e.  g,,  Crassiis 
w*      chief  of  the  embassy — Crassiis  princeps  legationis  fuit. 

EXERCISE. 

(266.)   Vocabulary. 


Praise,  laas,  (laud)  is  (£). 
After,  post  (prep.  ace). 
Before,  ante  (prep,  ace,). 
Because,  qui*  (conj.,  248). 
How  long  7  quamdiu  (adv.). 
Afterward,  postea. 
Virtuous,  probils,  a,  um. 


Si  in  vita  semper  probi  fuSri- 
mus,  etiam  post  mortem 
beati  erimus. 

Milites  Romani  praeliis  multis 
interfuerunt. 


To  be  over,  to  preside  over,  to  com- 
mand, praeasfi  (prae+esse,  to  be 
before). 

To  be  wanting,  de-ess^  (de+essfi, 
to  be  from). 

To  be  in,  to  be  present  at,  interess6 
(inter+esse,  to  be  among). 

Sick,  aeger,  gra,  gram  (77,  a). 

(267.)  Examples, 

(a)  If  we  shall  have  been  al- 
ways virtuous  in  life,  after 
death  also  we  shall  be 
happy, 

(b)  The  Roman  soldiers 
were  present  at  many  bat- 
tles. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — ^The  compounds  of  esse  with  the  prepo- 
sitions p  r  ae,  i  n  1 6  r,  o  b,  p  r  o,  d  e,  take  the  dative  case. 

(268.)    Translate  into  English, 

Theniistocles  vir  magniis  6t  clarus  fuit. — CGr  h^ri  in  schola 
non  fuisti  ? — Quia  ciim  patre  in  horto  fui. — Quamdiu  in  urbe 
fuistis  ? — Sex  dies  (191,  c), — Ante  belluin  in  urbe  fueramiis. 
— Crassus  legatus  (225,  a)  copiis  Romanoriim  praefuerat. — 
Nunquam  deerit  tibi  laus  hominiim,  si  semper  probus  fueris. 
— iEgerne  (1^5,  II.,  a)  fuisti  heri  ? — Ante  Ciceronis  setatem 
oratores  multi  et  clari  fuerant,  nee  postea  defuerunt. — Caesar 
praeliis  multis  interfuit. 

(269).   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Recollect  the  double  use  of  the  perfect  [present  and  aorist,  265).] 
Divitiacus  commanded  (praef  uit)  the  forces  of  the  ^duans. 

*  The  aorist  use  of  the  perfect  is  more  common  in  Latin  than  the 
present. 


104  TENSES  FOR  COMPLETED  ACTION. 

— If  you  shall  have  been  always  virtuous  in  life,  after  death 
also  you  shall  be  happy. — If  we  are  always  virtuous,  the  praise 
of  men  shall  never  be  wanting  to  us. — We  were  not  in  school 
yesterday,  because  we  had  been  in  the  garden  with  (our)  fa- 
ther.— Had  you  been  (135,  II.,  a)  in  our  garden  ? — Have  you 
been  sick  ? — How  long  have  you  been  in  the  city  ?  Four 
days  (191,  c). — The  lieutenant  had  been  in  the  city  before  the 
war. — Before  the  age  of  Caesar  there  had  been  many  and 
great  generals ;  nor  were  they  wanting  afterward. — Caesar  and 
the  Roman  soldiers  were  present  at  many  battles. 


LESSON  XLIV. 
Tenses  of  Verbs  for  Completed  Action,  continued, 

(270.)  The  tense-stem  of  the  perfect  tense  is  form- 
ed in  most  verbs  as  follows  : 

(1)  In  1st  conj.  by  adding  av  to  the  verb-stem ;  e.  g.,  am-av. 

(2)  In  2d  conj.        "         u  "  6. ^.,m6n-u. 
(4)  In 4th conj.        "         iv               "  e.^.,  aud-iv 

[The  third  conjugation  is  treated  in  the  next  lesson.] 

(271.)  By  adding  the  perfect-endings  (263)  to  tht5 
tense-stems  formed  (as  in  270),  we  obtain  the  follow- 
ing perfect-tense  forms  of  am  are,  to  love  ;  monere> 
to  advise  ;  audire,  ^o  Ae^r.* 




PBF.-STEMS. 

ENDINGS. 

Isfconj. 
2d  conj. 
4th  conj. 

amav- 
m6nu- 
audiv- 

/,  thou,  he,  we,      ye,     they, 

>i,    isti,    it,   imus,  istis,  erant,or  J 
)                                            er6,           ( 

have  loved, 
have  advised, 
have  heard. 

*  In  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations, it  is  obvious  that  the  per- 
fect is  made  up  of  the  crude-form  of  the  verb  and/wi;  e.  g.,  ama-fui=^ 
ftmavi ;  mone-fui  =  mouui ;  audi-fai  =  audivL 


PERFECT  TENSE.  106 


Pleasant,  jucxindus,  S,  um. 
All  night,  p6r  totSm  noctfim. 
Diligently,  diligentSr  (215,  2,  h). 
From  every  side,  undiqu6  (adv.). 
To  excite,  excitarS. 


Puerum  &mavi. 
A   puero  (i,  €.,  from  a   hoy) 
matrem  amavi. 


EXERCISE, 

(272.)   Vocabulary. 

preceptor,  praeceptor,  (proeceptor)  is 

(m.). 
Tribune,  tribunus,  i  (m.). 
Sister,  soror,  (soror)  is  (f.). 
Disgrace,  ignominia,  ae  (f.). 

(273.)  Examples, 
(a)  I  loved  the  hoy. 
(h)  From  my  hoyhood  I  have 
loved  my  mother. 

[Obs.  In  (a)  the  perfect  aorist  is  used;  in  [b]  tlaQ  perfect  present.'] 

(274.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  omnes  undique  mercatores  ad  se  (145,  a)  convocavit. 

< — A  puero  fratrem  et  sororem  amavi. — Cur  per  totam  noctem 

vigilavisti  ? — Quia  pater  seger  fuit. — Milites  diu  et  acriter  pug- 

naverunt. — Hos   pueros*   magister  diligenter   docuit  linguam 

Latinam.* — Tua  ipsius  (159)  causa  (135,  II.,  h)  te  saepe  monui. 

— Timor  ignominiae  Germanos  ad  virtutem  excitavit. — Jticun- 

diim  aviiim  (78,  II.,  h)  cantiim  audivimus. — Dormivistine  ? — 

Non  dormivi. — Csesaris  adventiis  oppidanos  terrmt. 

[Inflect  all  the  verbs  in  this  lesson  through  the  perfect  tense,  and 
form  the  perfect  according  to  (270).] 

(275.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  called  together  aU  the  lieutenants  from  every  side  to 
himself  (145,  a), — From  myAoyhood  I  have  loved  my  precep- 
tors.— The  good  preceptor  taught  me*  the  Greek  language. — 
Caesar  called-together  all  the  lieutenants  and  tribunes  (tribunos- 
que,  202,  N.)  of  the  soldiers  to  himself. — The  slaves  have 
watched  all  night. — (Your)  father  has  often  advised  you  for 
your  own  sake  (135,  II.,  6). — The  Gauls  took-possession-of 
Rome. — The  love  of  glory  has  always  excited  the  Romans  to 
bravery. — ^We  have  diligently  taught  the  boys. — Why  did  you 
not  sleep  ?  Because  my  mother  was  sick. — They  have  heard 
the  pleasant  singing  of  the  birds. — We  have  fortified  all  the 

*  Verbs  of  teaching  tak©  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  the  other 
of  the  thing. 


1»0*.  PERFECT  TENSE. 

towers  of  Gaul. — The  coming  of  Caesar  terrified  the  ^Eduans 
and  Helvetians. — I  have  often  walked  in  Caesar's  garden,  on- 
the-other-side-of  the  Tiber  (trans  Tiberim). 


LESSON  XLV. 

Tenses  for    Completed  Action,   continued,  —  Perfect 
Tense^  Third  Conjugation, 
(276.)  The  perfect  tense-stem  of  most  verbs  of  the 
third  conjugation  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the  verb- 
stem;  e.g,, 

Perfect-stem. 

reg-ere,         to  rule,        reg-s     =    rex- 
scrib-ere,      to  write,       scrib-s  =     scrips- 
lud-ere,  to  play,       liid-s     ^^    lus- 

(277.)  Rules  of  Euphony. 

(1)  A  c-sound  before  s  forms  x;  duc-s  =  dux;  reg-s  = 
rex. 

Rem.  c,  g,  h,  gu.,  qu,  are  classed  among  k-sounds.    v  also  (generally) 
before  s  forms  x;  viv-s  =  vix. 

(2)  b  before  s  is  changed  into  p  ;  e.  ^.,  s  c  r  i  b  -  s  =  s  c  r  i  p  s  ; 
nub-s  =  nups. 

(3)  A  t-sound  is  (generally)  dropped  before  s;  lud-s  =  lus; 
claud-s  =  claus. 

Rem.  t  and  d  are  the  t-sounds. 

(278.)  By  adding  the  perfect-endings  (263)  to  the 
stems  of  reg-ere,  scrib-ere,  lud-ere,  we  obtain 
the  perfect  tense-forms  (have  ruled,  have  written,  have 
played). 


PEBFECT-STEMS. 

ENDINGS. 

(r6g-s  =  )rex- 
(scrib-s  =  )  scrips- 
{lud-s  =  )lus. 

/,  thou,  he,  we,      ye,     they, 

>l,  isti,    it,   imus,  istis,  enint,or< 
>                                           ere.          ( 

have  ruled, 
have  written, 
home  played. 

PERFECT  TENaB.  107 


EXERCISE, 

(279.)    Vocabulary, 

Suddeidy,  siibito. 

To  say,  dlcSre. 

To  draio  (as  a  sword),  stringSrg. 

Sword,  gladius,  i. 

Tried,  judicium,  i. 

To  lead  together,  conduc6rg. 

(280.)  Examples, 
(a)  Did  not  Ccesar  say  these 
things  ? 


To  divide,  dividSrg. 

Household,  famflift,  8B. 

Orgetorix,  Orgetorix,  (Org^tortg)  is. 

A  dependent,  cliens,  (client)  is  (c). 

Nature,  natura,  ae. 

Stoic,  stoicus,  i. 


(5)  Did  Caesar  say  this  (i,e., 
is  it  possible  that  he  did)  ? 


N  o  n  n  e  Caesar  haec  dixit  ? 
(NonnS  is  used  in  asking  ques- 
tions when  the  answer  yes  is 
expected.) 
N  u  m  Caesar  hsec  dixit  ? 
(N  u  m  is  used  when  the  answer 
710  is  expected.) 

(281.)   Translate  into  English. 

[Recollect  double  use  of  perfect  (265).] 
Caesar  duas  legiones  consci*ipsit ;  tres  ex  hibernis  eduxit. — 
Principes  Germanorum  omnes  suas  copias  Rhenum  (113,  II., 
a)  transduxerunt. — Consul  gladium  strinxit. — Nonne  (280,  a) 
gladios  strinxistis  ? — Num  imperator  gladium  strinxit  ? — Or- 
getorix ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam  et  omnes  clientes 
conduxit. — Caesar  exercitiim  in  duas  partes  divisit. — Nonne 
epistolam  ad  pati'em  scripsisti  ? — Stoici  diviserunt  naturam 
hominis  in  3,nimura  6t  corpus. — Mult^s  litt^ras  h6die  scrip- 
simiis. 

[What  is  the  force  of  S  in  eduxit  ?  of  con  in  conduxit  ?  of  trans  in 
transduxit?  Describe  the  formation  of  the  perfect,  and  the  euphonic 
changes,  in  aU  the  verbs  of  this  lesson.] 

(282.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  soldiers  suddenly  drew  their  swords. — Caesar  levied  five 
legions  in  Italy. — Caesar  levied  six  legions  in  Italy,  and  led  out 
four  from  (their)  winter-quarters  in  Gaul. — The  ^duans  en- 
deavour to  lead  (113,  II.,  a)  all  their  forces  across  the  Rhine. 
— The  general  divided  the  army  into  five  parts. — Did  Cfesar 
say  these  (things)  yesterday  (280,  h)  1 — Didyounot  write  a  let- 
ter to  your  brother  ? — Have  you  written  a  letter  to  the  king 
(280,  b)  ? — Orgetorix  led- together  all  his  household  to  the  trial. 


108 


PLUPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT. 


— Orgetorix  led-together  to  the  trial  all  his  household  and  all 
(his)  dependents. — Why  have  you  drawn  (your)  sword  ? — Why 
have  you  not  written  to  (your)  father  ? — The  iEduans  levied 
many  soldiers. — We  have  divided  the  nature  of  man  into  soul 
and  body. 


LESSON  XL VI. 

Tenses  for  Completed  Action,  continued. — Pluperfect 
and  Future  Perfect  Tenses. 

(283.)  (a)  The  pluperfect  tense  simply  adds  to  the  perfect 
tense-stem  the  imperfect  of  esse  {to  he)  ;  viz.,  6  r  d  m, 
6ras,  &c. 

(h)  The  future  perfect  simply  adds  to  the  perfect  tense-stem 
the  future  of  esse;  viz.,  e  r  6,  6  r  i  s,  &c. ;  but  in  3d  plural  it 
changes  u  into  i;  viz.,  erint,  instead  of  ^runt. 

(284.)  Thus,  from  am-are,  mon-ere,  reg-ere 
aud-ire,  we  have, 


PKF.-STEM. 

PLUPERFECT-ENDING. 

1.  amav- 

2.  m6nu- 

3.  rex- 

4.  audiv- 

/,         thou,  he,     we,         ye,        they, 
\  gram,  gras,  6rat,  6ramus,  eratis,  6rant,< 

had  loved, 
had  advised, 
had  ruled, 
had  heard. 

FUTUBE  PERFECT. 

1.  amav- 

2.  monii- 

3.  rex- 

4.  audiv- 

\  6rd,     ens,  erit,  6rimus,   giitis,   6rint,  \ 

shall  have  loved, 
shall  have  advised, 
shall  have  ruled. 

shall  have  heard. 

.1 

EXERCISE. 


(285.)   Vocabulary, 

Defiles,  angustiae,  arum  (pL). 

To  err,  errarS. 

To  draw,  duc6re. 

A  principle,  principium,  I. 


To  attack,  oppngnflrS. 
Near,  juxta  (prep.  ace). 
Already,  jam  (adv.). 
To  take  by  storm,  expngnarS. 


(286.)   Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Pluperfect. — Milites  diu  et  acrit^r  pugnav^rant. — PS,t6r 
filium  saep6  m5nu6r^t. — Duas  legiones  in  Italia  conscripsera- 
mus. — Helv6tii  j&m  p6r  angustias  copias  suas  transduxSrant.— 


PLUPERFECT  AND  FUTUEE  PERFECT.       109 

Caesar  castella  Galliae  muniverat  et  tres  legiones  ex  hibernis 
eduxerat. 

{b)  Future  Perfect, 
Hem.  The  future  perfect  is  sometimes  used  in  Latin,  when  in  Eng- 
lish we  should  use  the  simple  perfect;  or  future ;  e.  g.. 
When  I  {shall)  have  written  the  I  daum  epistolam  scripserd,  ^t6 
letter,  I  shall  come  to  you.        \     veniam. 

Quum  amicum  in  hortiim  duxero,  ad  te  veniam.— Haud 
erravSro,  si  a  Platone  principiiim  duxero. — Quum  hostes  cas- 
tella explignaverint,  urbem  ipsam  (159)  oppugnabunt. — Haud 
erraveris,  si  a  Cicerone  principia  duxeris. 

(287.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

(a)  Pluperfect. — The  general  had  drawn  his  sword. — Near 
the  city  the  soldiers  had  fought  long  and  spiritedly. — Caesar  had 
levied  one  legion  in  Italy,  and  led-out  seven  from  (their)  win- 
ter-quarters in  Gaul. — The  Helvetians  had  ah'eady  led  their 
forces  across  the  Rhine  (113,  II.,  a),  through  the  boundaries 
of  the  Sequanians. — I  had  often  advised  you  for  your  own 
sake  (135,  II.,  6). 

(i)  Future  Perfect  (R.,  286,  h). — When  we  have  written 
the  letters,  we  shall  come  to  the  city. — We  shall  not  have  err- 
ed, if  we  shall  have  drawn  (ducere)  our  principles  from  Plato. 
— When  Caesar  shall  have  taken-by-storm  the  city,  he  will  at- 
tack the  tower  itself  (159). 

K 


§  3. 

NOUNS  OF  THIRD  DECLENSION.— FULLER 
TREATMENT.  (XLVII.— LVII.) 

[The  third  declension  contains  more  nouns  than  all  the  others  togeth- 
er. It  also  involves  greater  difficulties  ;  and  we  therefore  give  it  a 
full  treatment  in  the  following  section,  which  should  be  carefully 
studied.] 


LESSON  XLVIL 

(288.)  The  genitive-ending  of  the  third  declension 
is  is. 

Rem.  To  find  the  stem  of  any  noun  of  this  declension,  strike  off  is 
from  the  gen.;  e.g.,  G.,  ndmlnis  {of  a  name),  stem,  ndmin. 

(289.)  ENDINGS   FOR  ALL  THE   CASES. 


SINGULAR. 

PLUKAL.                            ll 

M. and  F. 

N. 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

N. 

— 

— 

N. 

es. 

a(m). 

G. 

is. 

is. 

G. 

um  (ium). 

um  (ium). 

D. 

i. 

i. 

D. 

ibus. 

ibas! 

A. 

6m  (im). 

Uke  Nom. 

A. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

V. 

like  Nom. 

like  Nom. 

V. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

A. 

6(i). 

6(i). 

A. 

ibus. 

ibiis. 

(290.)  The  nom. -ending  is  not  given,  because  of  the  many 
forms  in  which  that  case  occurs.  The  most  common  nom.-end- 
ing  is  s ;  but  the  stem  itself  is  often  employed  as  the  nom. ; 
and  IS  often,  again,  changed.  We  make  six  classes,  which 
must  be  carefully  distinguished,  viz. : 

(291.)  CLASSES. 

I.  Nouns  which  add  s  to  the  stem  in  the  nominative  with- 
out any  vowel  change.     {Feminines.) 
II.  Nouns  which  insert  a  connecting  vowel  (e  or  i)  before 
adding  s.     (Feminines,) 

III.  Nouns  which  change  the  stem-vowel  (i  into  e)  before 

adding  s.     (Masculines,) 

IV.  Nouns  which  add  6  to  the  stem.  (Neuters,) 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  I. 


Ill 


V,  Nouns  which  present  the  unchanged  stem  in  the  nom- 
inative without  adding  s.  (Masculines^  except  -al, 
-ar,  -ur,  which  are  Neuter.) 
,  VI.  Nouns  which  present  the  stem  changed  in  the  nomina- 
tive without  adding  s.  (Masculines,  Feminines,  and 
Neuters.) 

(292.)  [Before  entering  upon  the  paradigms,  the  student  should  learn 
thoroughly  the  following  rules  of  euphony,  which  prevail  generally 
in  Latin  nouns  and  verbs.] 

(1)  c  or  g  before  s  unites  with  it  to  form  x  ;  e.  ^.,  le  g-s  is 
written  lex;  arc-s  =  arx;  voc-s  =  vox,  &c. 

(2)  d   or  t  before   s    is   dropped;  e.  g.,   laud-s  =  laus; 
quie  t-s  =  quies ;  parent-s  =  parens. 

(293.)  Class   I. — The  Nominative   adds   s   to   the 
Stem,  without  any  Vowel  change,     (Feminines.) 


Sing. 

City  (f.). 

Citadel  (f.). 

Praise  (£). 

Race  (nation),  f. 

Quiet  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 

urb-s. 

arx  (arc-s). 

laus  (laud-s). 

gens(gent-s). 

quies. 

Gen. 

urb-is. 

arc-is. 

laud-Is. 

gent-is. 

quiet-Ts. 

Dat. 

urb-i. 

arc-I. 

laud-T. 

gent-i. 

quiet-i. 

Aoc. 

urb-Sm. 

arc-6m. 

laud-em. 

gent-em. 

quiet-em. 

Abl.       urb-e. 

arc-e. 

laud-6. 

gent-e. 

quiet-e. 

Plur. 

Cities. 

Citadels. 

Praises. 

Races  (nations). 

N.,  A.,  V. 

urb-es. 

arc-es. 

laud-es. 

gent-€S. 

quiet-es. 

Gen. 

urb-ium. 

arc-ium. 

laud-um. 

gent-iiim. 

quiet-iim. 

D.  and  A. 

urb-rbus. 

arc-ibus. 

laud-ibtis. 

gent-ibus.      jquiet-ibus.    | 

On  this  class,  observe  carefully  that, 

(294.)  As  to  the  case-endings,  i  ii  m  is  the  gen.  plur.  ending 
of  those  nouns  whose  stems  end  in  two  consonants  ;  e.  g.,  urb-s, 
urb-is,  urb-ium;  nox,  noct-is,  noct-iiim;  cohors,  cohort- 
is,  cohort- iiim. 

(295.)  As  to  gender,  they  are  mostly  feminine.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  add  s  to  the  stem,  without 
changing  the  stem- vowel,  to  form  the  nom.,  are  feminine, 

[Rem.  Exceptions.    The 'SoUowiag  are  Tnasculines  : 


1.  dens  (dent-is),  tooth. 
mons  (mont-is),  mountain. 
fons  [font-Is),  fountain. 
pons  (pont-is),  bridge. 
riidens  (rudent-is),  rope. 


*bidens  (bident-rs),  hoe. 
*torrens  (torrent-is),  torrent. 
*tridens  (trident-is),  trident. 
*6riens  (orient-is),  east. 
'^occidens  (occident-Ts),  west. 


*  These  nouns  in  ens  are  properly  adjectives,  with  a  masc.  noun  under- 
Btood ;  e.  g.,  oriens  sol,  torrens  amms,  &c. 


112 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  I. 


2.  Grex,  (greg)  is,  ajlock;  also  a  few  nouns  in  ix  and  ax. 

3.  Paries,  (pariet)  is,  wall;  pes  (ped-is), /oo^ ;  lapis,  (lapid)  is,  stone, 
vas  (vad-is),  surety.] 

{7^^  The  rules  of  gender  should  be  learned  by  heart ;  the  lists  of  ex* 
ceptions  need  not  be,  unless  they  are  very  short.  All  exceptions  ai  j 
marked  in  the  vocabularies  ;  and  the  Usts  should  be  referred  to  whenever 
cases  occur.] 

To  Class  I.  belong  the  nouns  of  the  following  endings,  of  which  the 
pupil  has  had  frequent  examples  : 

Libertas,  libertat-is,  liberty;  dignitas,  dignitat-is,  dig' 

nity ;  and,  in  short,  all  nouns  in  as,  a t i s. 
Virtus,  \ir  tut -IS,  virtus;  and  all  others  in  us,  utis. 
P a  1  u s,  p a  1  u d -is,  swamp ;  and  others  in  us,  u d i s. 

In  the  following  exercise  several  of  the  exceptions  will  be  found. 

EXERCISE. 

(296.)    Vocabulary, 

Highest  [the  top),  summus,  a,  um. 

Middle,  medius,  a,  um. 

To  leave,  relinquere  (perf-stem,  r6- 

liqu-). 
To  secede,  seced6re  (perf.-stem,  se- 

cess-). 
To  take  care  of,  curare. 
To  touch  upon,  to  reach,  attingere. 
To  seek,  to  aim  at,  pet6re. 
To  cut  down,  rescindere. 


Romulus,  Romulus,  i. 
Hercynian,  Hercynius,  a,  um. 
Senate,  senatus,  us  (m.). 
Agrippa,  Agrippa,  ae  (m.).     ' 
Wliere,  ubinam  ? 

The  common  people,  plebs,  (pl6b)  Is. 
Patricians  [of  Rome),  patres,  (patr) 

iim  (pi.). 
An  interreign,  interregnum,  i. 
Speedy,  citus,  a,  um. 

[The  nouns  which  occur  in  the  preceding  lesson  are  not  named  in  the 
vocabulary :  the  learner  will  find  them,  and  observe  their  gender.] 


(297.)  Examples. 


In  summo  montS. 


In  summis  arbdribus. 
In  media  urb^. 
Ubinam  gentium? 


(a)  On  the  top  of  the  mount- 
ain, 
(6)  On  the  tops  of  the  trees. 

(c)  In  the  middle  of  the  city. 

(d)  Where  in  the  world  ? 

(298.)   Translate  into  English, 

Magn^  pars  plebis  m-bem  reliquit,  et  in  mont^m  (295,  R.  ] ) 
86cessit. — Turn  patres  Agrippam  ad  pleb^m  miserunt  (401, 3,  h), 
— HercyniS,  sylva  fines  multariim  gentium  attingit. — Cassiiis, 
l6gatus  (225,  a),  tres  cohortes  in  arcem  oppidi  duxit. — Ubi- 
nam gentium  sumus  ? — Deiis  curat  gentes. — Aquilae  in  sum- 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  II. 


113 


mis   montibus   nidificant. — Magnus  (78,  II.,   b)   avium   grex 

(295,  R.,  2)  summam  arcem  petunt. — Milites  pontem  (295,  R., 

1)  rescindunt. — Leges  Romanorum  justae  fuerunt. — Summiis 

mons  (295,  R.,  1)  ab  hostibus  tenetiir. — Caesar  ad  utramque 

(194,  R.  1)  partem  pontis  presidium  reliquit. — Post  Romuli 

mortem  uniiis  (194)  anni  interregnum  fuit. — Sapientes  mortem 

non  timent. — Mors  cita  veniet. 

[All  the  nouns  should  be  declined,  the  rule  of  gender  given,  and  the  ex- 
ceptions referred  to  if  necessary.  The  formations  of  the  verbs  should  be 
carefully  analyzed.] 

(299.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  laws  were  just. — The  fountain  was  beautiful. — The 
Hercynian  forest  touches  the  boundaries  of  five  nations. — The 
common-people  left  the  city,  and  seceded  to  the  mountain. — 
The  doves  built-their-nest  in  the  top  of  the  citadel  (297,  a). — ^A 
large  flock  of  birds  flew  over  the  city. — The  soldiers  fought 
long  on  the  middle  of  the  bridge  (297,  c). — Then  the  senate  sent 
an  ambassador  to  the  common-people. — God  takes  care  of  cities 
and  nations. — The  Belgians  inhabit  one  part  of  Gaul,  the  Aqui- 
tanians  another. — Where  in  the  world  (297,  d)  are  we  ?  in 
what  city  do  we  live  ? — Caesar  fortified  each  part  of  the  bridge. 


LESSON  XLVIIL 

Nouns, — Third  Declension,  continued. 
(300.)  Class  II,— The  Nominative  inserts  a  Con- 
necting-vowel (e  or  i)  before  adding  s  to  the  Stem. 
(Feminines,) 


e  inserted. 

i  inserted.                1 

Singular. 

Cloud  (f.). 

Ship  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

nub-<?-s. 

nub-is. 

nub-i. 

nub-em. 

nub-6. 

nav-«-s. 
nav-is. 
nav-i. 

nav-em  or  im. 
nav-6  or  i. 

PJural. 

Clouds. 

Ships. 

N.  A.  V. 
Gen. 
1           D.  and  Abl. 

nub-es. 

nub-ium. 

nub-ibus. 

nav-es. 

nav-ium. 

nav-ibus. 

K2 


114 


NOUNS,    THIRD    DECLENSION,    CLASS    II. 


On  this  class,  observe  carefully, 

(301.)  As  to  the  case-endings:  [(1)  The  acc.-ending  im 
instead  of  6  m  is  used  :  1.  sometimes  (but  rarely)  in  the  words 
clavis,  hey;  messis,  harvest',  navis,  ship:  2.  commonly 
in  f  e  b  r  1  s,  fever  ;  pelvis,  basin ;  p  u  p  p  i  s,  stern  ;  r  e  s  ti  s, 
rope;  securis,  axe;  turris,  tower:  3.  always  in  amussis, 
a  rule  ;  s 1 1 1 s,  thirst ;  t u s  s i s,  cough ;  vis,  force.] 

[(2)  The  abl.-ending  i  instead  of  e  is  used  (not,  however,  to 
the  exclusion  of  e)  in  all  those  words  which  take  im  in  the 
ace;  e,  g.,  turris,  turrim,  turri:  vis,  vim,  vi  (al- 
ways).    Also  in  ignis, fire;  civis,  citizen.] 

(3)  The  gen.  plur.  ending  ium  instead  of  iim  is  used  in 
most  nouns  which  insert  e  or  i  before  adding  s  to  the  stem. 
[Proles,  canis,  panis,  vatis,  juvenis  have  um.] 

(302.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  insert  a  vowel  (e  or  i) 
before  adding  s  in  the  nominative  arefeminines, 
[Rem.  Exceptions: 


Ainuis  (m.),  river. 
Axis  (m.),  axle. 
Callis  (m.),  path. 
Caiiftlis  (m.),  canal. 
CoUTs  (m.),  hill. 
Criiiis  (m.),  hair. 
Ensis  (m.),  sword. 


fascis  (m.),  bundle. 
foUis  (m.),  bellows. 
funis  (ra.),  rope. 
fustis  (m.),  club. 
igiiis  [to..],  fire. 
mensis  (m.),  month. 
orbis  (m.),  circle. 


panis  (m.),  bread. 
piscis  {m.),fish. 
postis  (m.),  post. 
sentis  (m.),  bramble. 
unguis  [vdi],  finger  nail. 
vectis  (m.),  lever. 
vennis  (m.),  wormi] 


EXERCISE. 

[In  the  vocabularies,  the  Roman  numerals  L,  IL,  &c.,  placed  after 
nouns,  refer  to  the  class  to  which  they  belong.] 

(303.)    Vocabulary. 


To  dread,  formidare. 
Pilot,  gubemator,  is  (m.). 
To  bring,  aggrS  (perf.-stem,  eg-). 
To  procure,  comparare. 
A  Carthaginian,  Cartliaginiensis,  is. 
To  raise,  to  kindle,  excitftre. 
Power,  potestas,  (potestat)  is  (f.,  L), 
Barbarian,  barb^rus,  I. 
Vehemently,    greatly,    vShfimentfir 
(215,  2,  b). 


Afl^et,  classis,  is  (f.,  IL). 
And,  ac. 

Twenty,  viglnti  (indecl.). 
Lofty,  altus,  H,  um. 
Thirteen,  tredecim  (indecl.). 
The  Druids,  Druides,  um  (m.,  pL). 
Thirst,  Bitis,  (sit)  is  (f,  IL). 
To  relieve,  levarg. 
To  disp^ite,  disputare. 
To    terrify,    terrerg    (perfect-stem, 
terru-). 


To  build,  aedif  icare. 

(304.)   Translate  into  English, 
Nubes  saep^  lunam  obscui'ant. — Gives  classSm  hostium  for- 


NOUNS,   THIRD    DECLENSION,    CLASS   III. 


115 


nudant. — Caesar  naves  Ion  gas  gedificavit,  et  nautas  giibernato- 
resque  (202,  N.)  comparavit. — Crassus  ad  oppidiim  turres 
altas  egit. — Ve teres  Romani  vim  Carthaginiensium  non  formi- 
daverunt. — Caesar  tuiTes  tredecim  excitavit. — Milites  ignes 
magnos  in  summo  monte  (297,  a)  excitaverunt. — Druides  de 
deoriim  immortalium  vi  ac  potestate  disputant. — Classis  adven- 
tiis  cives  terruit. — Aqua  sitim  (301,  1)  levat. — Nova  navium 
figura  vehementer  (215,  2,  h)  barbaros  terruit. 

(305.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Lofty  tow^ers  are  raised  by  Caesar. — The  general  prepared 
twenty  long  ships. — The  lieutenant  brought  the  towers  to  the 
wall  of  the  city. — The  power  of  the  Romans  terrified  the  Gauls. 
— Wine  does  not  relieve  thirst. — The  sun  is  often  obscured 
by  the  clouds. — The  approach  of  the  fleet  and  the  soldiers  ter- 
rified the  citizens. — A  great  fire  is  kindled  on  the  top  of  the 
mountain  by  the  iEduans. — The  general  stationed  the  ships 
near  the  wall  of  the  city. — The  clouds  are  black. — The  coming 
of  our  fleet  and  the  sti'ange  (nova)  figure  of  the  ships  terrified 
all  the  barbarians. 


LESSON  XLIX. 
Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued. 
(306.)  Class  III. — The   Nominative    changes    the 
Stem-vowel  (i  into  e)  before  adding  s  to  the  Stem. 


Vowel  i  changed  into  e.                                                     || 

Singular. 

Soldier  (m.). 

Book  (m.). 

N.  and  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

mil^-s  (milet-s). 

milTt-is. 

milit-i. 

mTlit-6m. 

milit-e. 

cod^  (codecs). 

codic-is. 

codTc-I. 

c6dic-6m. 

codic-e. 

Plural. 

Soldiers. 

Books. 

N.  A.   V. 

Gen. 
D.  and  A. 

milTt-es. 

milTt-um. 

milit-ibus. 

codic-es. 

codic-iim. 

codic-ibna. 

On  this  class,  observe  that, 

(307.)  As  to  the  case-endings^  they  are  all  regular. 

(308.)  As  to  gender^  they  are  masculine.     Hence, 


lid 


NOUNS,    THIRD    DECLENSION,    CLASS    III. 


Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  change  the  stem-vowel 
i  into  e  before  adding  s  in  the  nominative  are  masculine, 

Exc.  Merges  (f.),  (mergitis),  a  sheaf. 

EXERCISE. 

(309.)   Vocabulary. 


To  double,  duplicare. 

Brutus,  Brutus,  i. 

Sharp,   spirited,    acer,    acris,    acre 

(105,  R.  1). 
Defender,    vindex,  (vindic)    is    (m., 

III.). 
Liberty,  libertas,  (libertat)  is  (f.,  I.). 
Foot-soldier,  footman,  ped6s,  (p6dit) 

IS  (m..  III.). 
Embark  upon,    conscendere,  con-f- 

scandere    (perf.-stem,    conscend), 

(for  upon,  in  with  the  accusative). 
To  depart,  discedere. 
I  began,  coepi.     Perfect,  defective. 
To  sustain,  sustinerS  (sub  and  tS- 

nere),  perf.-stem,  sustinu. 


At  his  own  expense,  sumptti    suo 

(abl.). 
Expense,  sumptus,  us. 
To  support,  alere  (perf -stem,  alu). 
Greatness,  magnitudd,  (magnitudin) 

IS  (f.). 
A  Briton,  Britannus,  i. 
Guest,  hospes,  (hospit)  is  (m.  and  f., 

25,  a). 
To  injure,  to  maltreat,  violare. 
Companion,  comes,  (comit)  is   (m. 

and  f.,  25,  a). 
Narrow,  angnstus,  a,  um. 
Place,  locus,  i  (nom.  pi.,  I6ci  and 

loca). 
Conspiracy,  conjuratio  (nis)  (f).     '-  -' 


(310.)   Translate  into  English, 

Caesar  numeriim  obsidiim  duplicabit. — Brutus  erat  acer 
hbertatis  vindex. — Equites  et  pedites  in  naves  con- 
scenderunt. — Dumnorix  ciim  equitibiis  discedere  coepit. — 
Dumnorix  magnum  numeriim  equitiim  suo  sumptu  ^uit. — 
Milites  omnes  magnitudinem  sylvariim  timuerunt. — Bn- 
tanni  antiqui  hospites  nunquam  violaverunt.  —  Comites 
principis  angustO  in  loco  e  q u 1 1 ii m  nostroriim  vim  diu 
sustinuerunt. 

(311.)  Translate  into  Latin.  ^ 

The  chiefs  began  to  go  away  with  all  the  horsemen. — The 
horse-soldiers  and  foot-soldiers  did  not  sustain  the  attack  (vim)  of 
the  enemy. — The  general  supported  the  soldiers  at  his  own 
expense. — The  companions  of  Dumnorix  sustained  bravely  the 
attack  of  our  footmen. — The  Germans  malti-eated  the  ambas- 
sadors.— The  companions  of  the  lieutenant  are  embarking-upon 
the  ships. — The  greatness  of  the  woods  terrifies  the  horsemen 
and  the  footmen. — Dumnorix  always  maltreats  (his)  guests. — 
The  messenger  began  to  depart  with  all  the  guests. — Brutus, 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECi.ENSION,  CLASS  IV, 


117 


the  defender  of  liberty,  made  (fecit)  a  conspiracy .-»-The 
townsmen  for  a  long  time  supported  a  large  number  of  footmen 
at  their  own  expense. — The  chiefs  doubled  the  number  of 
horsemen. 


LESSON  L. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(312.)  Class  IV. — The  Nominative  adds  e  to  the 
Stem, 


Sea  (n.). 

1             Seas. 

Net  (n.). 

Nets. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 
Dat.,  Abl. 

inar-6. 
mar-is. 
mar-i. 

mar-ia. 

mar-ium. 

mar-ibus. 

ret-g. 
ret-is, 
ret-i. 

ret-ia. 

ret-idm. 

ret-ibus. 

On  this  class,  observe  that, 

(313.)  As  to  the  case-endings,  the  abl.  is  always  i,  the  nom. 
plur.  ia,  and  the  gen.  plur.  iiim. 

(314.)  As  to  gender,  they  are  all  neuter.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  add  e  to  the  stem  (instead 
of  s)  in  the  nom.  are  neuter. 

EXERCISE. 

(3 1 5.)   Vocabulary. 

By  sea  and  land,  terra  manque,  ahl. 
{not  mSri  et  terra). 

To  wash,  allugre  (ad+luere). 

To  use,  uti  (dep. governs  ail.). 

To  be  accustomed,  consuesc6re  [per- 
fect-stem, consuev). 

Navigation,  navigatio,  (navigation) 
IS  (f.). 

Vast,  vastus,  a,  um. 

Open,  apertus,  a,  um. 

Ocean,  Oceanus,  i. 

The  Venetians,  V6n6ti,  orum  (pi). 

Broad,  latus.  ft,  um. 


But,  autgnji  (not  so  strongly  advers- 
ative as  sM,  and  always  placed  af- 
ter one  or  more  words  of  the  sen- 
tence). 

Other,  different,  alius  (194,  R.  1). 

Bed,  cublle,  (ciibll)  is  (IV.). 

Splendid,  splendidus,  ft,  um. 

A  dock-yard,  navale,  (naval)  is  (IV.). 

To  commit,  to  join  (as  battle),  com- 
mittSre  (perf..stem,  commis). 

In  the  m^an  time,  interim  (adv.). 

HuntsTnan,  venator  (is),  m. 

For,  longe  (adv.). 


118  NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  IV. 


(316.)  Examples, 
(a)  For  Marseilles  is  washed 
on  three  sides  hy  the  sea. 


Massilia  Snim  tribus  ex  pari- 
bus marl  (abl.,  93,  II.,  h, 
R.)  alluitur. 

Nostro  mari  (55)  longis  navi- 
bus  uti  consuevimus. 


(&)  In  our  sea  {i.  e.,  the  Med- 
iterranean) we  were  accus- 
tomed to  use  long  ships. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  deponent  verb  uti,  to  use^  governs 
the  ablative;  e.  g.,  navibus,  in  (b). 

(317.)   Translate  into  English. 

Longe  alia  navigatio  est  in  angust5  m^ri  atque  in  vastd 
atque  aperto  oceano. — Longae  fuerunt  naves  quibus  (abl.,  316, 
b)  nostro  mari  (55)  uti  (infin.)  consuevimus. — Veneti  autem 
latis  navibus  uti  consueverunt. — Mihi  (125,  II.,  a)  cubil^  est 
ten*a. — Romanoriim  cub  ilia  magna  fuerunt  et  splendida. — 
Imperator  quinque  naves  ex  n  a  v  a  1  i  eduxit  et  praelium  com- 
misit. — Turris  erat  proxima  portui  (106,  II.,  c)  navalibus- 
que. — Caesar,  interim,  omnes  naves  quae  erant  in  navalibiis 
incendit. — Venator  rete  diligenter  parabat. — Venatores  retiS. 
cervis  (54)  parabant. 

(318.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  farmers  were  preparing  nets  for  the  (54)  doves. — Cor- 
inth is  washed  on  two  sides  by  the  sea. — The  ships  which  (316, 
b)  the  Venetians  were  accustomed  to  use  in  our  sea  were  long. 
— In  the  vast  and  open  ocean  we  use  broad  ships. — Navigation 
is  far  different  (1  o  n  g  e  a  1  i  a)  in  a  narrow  river  and  in  the  open 
sea. — I  had  (125,  II.,  a)  a  high  tree  (for  my)  bed. — Caesar  was 
pursuing  Pompey  by  sea  and  land. — The  tower  was  very  near 
to  the  dockyard. — The  general,  in  the  mean  time,  was  rebuild- 
ing all  the  old  ships  in  the  port  and  dockyards. 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 


119 


LESSON  LI. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(319.)  Class   V.  —  The   Nominative  presents  the 

Stem  unchanged. 

1.  Masculine  Forms. 


Singular. 

Honour  (m.). 

Consul  (m.). 

Goose  (m.). 

Brother  (m.). 

N.  and  V. 

honor. 

consul. 

anser. 

frater. 

Gen. 

honor-is. 

consul-is. 

ans6r-is. 

frati--is. 

Dat. 

honor-i. 

consul-i. 

anser-i. 

fratri. 

Ace. 

h6n6r-6m. 

consul-6m. 

ans6r-6m. 

fratr-6m. 

Abl. 

h6n6r-6. 

consul-e. 

anser-e. 

fratr-e. 

Plural. 

Honours. 

Consuls. 

Geese. 

Brothers. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

honor-es. 

consul-es. 

ans6r-6s. 

fratr-es. 

Gen. 

h6u6r-um. 

consul-um. 

ans6r-um. 

fratr-um. 

D.  and  Abl. 

h6n6r-Ibus. 

consul-ibus. 

ans6r-ibus. 

fratr-ibiis. 

On  these,  observe, 

(320.)  As  to  case-endings^  they  nearly  all  take  the  regular 
endings  throughout ;  but  those  whose  stem  ends  in  ter  or  ber 
drop  the  e  in  all  cases  but  the  nom. ;  c.  g*.,  f  r  a  t  e  r,  f  r  a  t  r  i  s  ; 
i  m  b  e  r  (a  shower)  i  m  b  r  i  s. 

Retn.  ImbSr,  linter,  ventSr,  take  liim  for  gen.  pi.  ending. 
(321.)  As  to  gender^ 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  present  the  unchanged 

stem  in  the  nom.  (except  those  whose  stems  end  in  al, 

ar,  ur,  or)  are  masculine. 

[Exception  (1.)  In  or:  arbor,  diis  [tree),  is  feminine;  and  addr,  6ris, 

{pure  wheat),  sBquor,  oris  (sea),  mar  mo  r,  6ris  [marble),  are  neut.     (Obs., 

masculines  have  o  (long)  in  the  stem ;  neuters  6  (short) ).    The  ending  ul 

generally  belongs  to  names  of  male  beings  (e.  g'.,  consul):  if  applied  to 

females,  it  may  be  feminine  also  [e.  g.,  exul,  a  female  exile). 

Exception  (2.)  <ir:  linter  [boat)  is  masc.  or  fern.:  the  following  are 
neuter:  cftdftver  [corpse),  fiber  [teat),  ver  [the  spring-),  verber  [lash) 
also,  all  names  of  plants  in  er:  e.  ^.,  piper  [pepper),  zingiber  [ginger), 
&c.] 

EXERCISE. 

(322.)   Vocabulary. 


Noise,  clamSr  (oris,  V.,  1). 
Cassius,  Cassius,  i. 
Yoke,  jugum,  i. 
Archer,  sSgittarius,  i. 
Stinger,  funditor  (oris,  V.,  1). 
Succour,  subsidium,  i. 
Rain,  imb«r  (ii,  320). 


Continuance,  contmiiatid,  (contanfia- 

tidn)  is  (f.). 
Skin,  tent  made  of  skins,  pellis,  (pell) 

is  (f  n.). 

Desert,  desertum,  i. 
Shepherd,  pastSr  (oris,  V.,  1). 
Hunter,  vtofttOr  (Oris,  V.,  1). 


120  NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 

(323.)  Translate  into  English. 

Imperator  ad  se  mercatores  undique  convocavit. — 
Milites  omnes  magno  cum  c  1  a  m  o  r  e  in  oppidum  irruperunt. 
— Helvetii  Cassium  consiilem  occidunt,  exercitumque  ejus 
(153,  c)  sub  jugum*  mittunt. — Caesar  sagittarios  et  fundi- 
tores  subsidiof  (dat.)  oppidanisf  (dat.)  misit. — Milites  con- 
tinuatione  imbrium  (320,  R.)  sub  pellibus  continentur. — 
Incolae  desertorum  sunt  pastores,  venatores,  et  mer- 
catores.— Divitise  mercatorum  sunt  incertge.  —  Caesar 
omnem  equitatum  funditores  sagittariosque  pontem  (113, 
II.,  a)  transduxit  et  ad  hostes  contendit. 

(324.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  Britons  slew  the  general,  and  sent  all  the  soldiers  under 
the  yoke. — The  archers  and  slingers  killed  the  chief. — By  the 
continuance  of  the  rains,  the  merchants  are  kept  in  the  town. — 
The  townsmen  burst  into  the  tents  (pelles)  with  a  great  noise. 
— The  archers  and  the  slingers  hasten  to  the  town. — The  con- 
sul Cassius  led  all  the  slingers  over  the  bridge. — The  Britons 
killed  the  scouts  (exploratores),  and  sent  the  archers  and  sling- 
ers under  the  yoke. — The  scouts  hasten  to  the  consul. — The 
general  sent  twenty  soldiers  for  a  succour f  (dat.)  to  the  mer- 
chants, f — The  inhabitants  of  the  town  are  merchants. — The 
riches  of  merchants,  however  great  (184)  they  are,  are  uncer- 
tain.— The  soldiers  slew  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  desert. — The 
illusti'ious  consuls  led  all  the  footmen  over  the  bridge  (113, 
II.,  a). 

*  A  conquered  army  was  made  to  march  under  a  sort  of  yoke  or  gallows 
as  a  mark  of  disgrace. 

t  Rule  of  Syntax. — Double  Dative.  Two  datives,  one  of  the  person,  the 
other  of  tne  thing,  may  be  used  with  esse,  and  with  verbs  of  giving, 
coming,  sending,  &c. 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 


121 


LESSON  HI. 

Nouns, — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(325.)  Class  V. —  The    Nominative   presents    the 

Stem  unchanged. 

2.  Neuter  Forms. 


Singular. 

Animal  (n.). 

Spur  (n.). 

Lightning  (n.). 

Marble  (n.). 

N.,  A.,  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Abl. 

animal. 
animal-Ts. 
animal-i. 
animal-i. 

calcar. 
calcar-is. 
calcar-i. 
calcar-i. 

fuls^r. 
fulgur-is, 
fulgiir-i. 
fulgur-6. 

marmSr. 
marmor-is. 
marmor-i. 
marmor-e. 

Plural. 

Animals. 

Spurs. 

Lightnings. 

Marbles. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 
D.  and  Abl. 

animal-ia. 

animalium. 

ammal-ibiis. 

calcar-ia. 

calcar-Tum. 

calcar-ibus. 

fulgur-ft. 

ful^ir-um. 

ful^r-ibus. 

marmor-a. 

marmor-um. 

marmor-ibus. 

On  these,  observe, 

(326.)  (a)  As  to  case-endings^  those  in  al,  ar,  make  abl.  T, 
nom.  plur.  i  a,  gen.  plur.  i  u  m. 

(&)  As  to  gender^  they  are  neuter.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  present  in  the  nom.  the 
unchanged  stem  in  al,  ar,  ur,  and  or  (short),  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  al:  Sal  [salt)  is  masc.  and  neut.  in  the  sing.,  and  masc, 
sales,  in  plur.     Lar,  laris  {household  god),  masc. 

Exceptions  in  ur:  Fur  [thief),  furfur  [bran),  turtur  {turtle-dove), 
vultur  {vulture),  are  masc. 

Exceptions  in  6r.  (Recollect  that  or,  oris  (with  o  long),  is  a  masc, 
ending  (321) ;  and  that  arbor,  oris  {tree),  is  fern.) 
Hem.  Os,  OS  SIS  {bone),  is  neut. 

EXERCISE. 

(327.)   Vocabulary. 

Level,  plain,  planus,  a,  iim. 

A  plain,  the  sea,  cequdr,  is  (V.,  2), 

(derived  from  sequus,  plain:  see 

below,  328). 
Revenu£,  tax,  vectigal,  (vectigal)  is 

(V.,  2). 
To  create,  creare. 
Hatred,  odium,  6dium,  i. 
Many,  very  many,  complures,  &  or 

ia  (gen.  um  or  ium),  used  only  in 

plural. 
Clai9,  ggnun,  (g6n6r)  Ts,  neut 


T&mple,  templum,  i. 

To  place,  ponCre. 

Abode,  domiciliiim,  i. 

To  goad,  concitare. 

Frugality,  parsimSnia,  88. 

Indeed,  quidem  (adv.). 

Placid,  pl&cidus,  a,  iim. 

A  marhle  temple,  a  temple  of  marble, 

templum  de  marm6r6. 
Sharp,  acutus,  S,  um. 
Glare,  splendor,  (splendor)  is  (V.,  1), 
To  farm,  r^dimSre  (rfidem-). 


122  NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLAS3  V. 


(328.)  Example. 

The  sea  is  levely  from  which 

also     the    poets    call    it 

aequor  {the  sea). 


Mare    planum    est  ;    ex    quo 
etiam   ae  q  u  o  r  iUiid   poetse 
vocant. 
1^^  Here  the  antecedent  of  quo  is  the  sentence  mirfi  planum  est. 

(329.)    Translate  into  English. 

Magnum  hoc  fuit  vectigal,  sed  magnum  creavit  odiiim. — 
Dumnorix,  complures  annos  (191,  a,  Rule)  omnia  jEduorum 
vectigalia  redemerat. — Complura  (or  compluria)  sunt  gene- 
ra animalium. — Templiim  de  mar  more  in  foro  ponam. 
Crassus  domum  magnam  de  marmore  splendido  aedif icavit. 
— F  ulgii  r  a  milites  vShementer  terruerunt. — Ten-a  est  dom- 
iciliiim  hominiim  etanimaliii m. — Milites  subito  equos  c a I- 
c  a  r  i  b  ii  s  (abl.,  55,  a)  concitare  coeperunt. — C  a  1  c  a  r  i  a  acuta 
sunt. 

(330.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Glory  is  a  great  spur  to  brave  men. — The  horses  fear  the 
sharp  spurs. — The  glare  of  the  lightnings  terrified  the  horses. 
— Almost  (fere,  218,  h)  all  animals  are  useful  to  men. — These 
were  great  revenues  indeed,  but  they  created  great  hatreds. — 
The  seas  were  level  and  placid. — Frugality  is  a  great  revenue. 
— We  shall  place  a  temple  of  splendid  marble  in  the  midst  (in 
medio  foro,  297,  c)  of  the  forum. — The  poets  call  (mare)  the 
sea  aequor,  because  (quia)  it  is  level. — The  woods  are  the 
abode  of  many  animals. — Pompey  for  many  years  had  farmed 
the  revenues  of  Asia. — The  c^ahy  (equites)  began  to  put 
spurs  to  their  horses  (=  to  goad  the  Jiorses  with  spurs). 

^1k 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


123 


LESSON  LIII. 
Nouns, — Third  Declension^  continued, 

(331.)  Class  VL — The   Nominative   presents 
Stem  changed, 
1.  Masculine  Forms. 


the 


(a)  n  of  the  Stem  dropped. 

(b)  r  of  the  Stem  changed  to  s. 

{c)  VerbaU in  io  {all Jem.}. 

Singular. 

Speech  (m.). 

Dust(m.). 

F  lower  (rn.) 

Reason  (f.). 

N.andV. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

sermo. 

sermon-is. 

sermon-i. 

sermon-em. 

sermon-e. 

pulvis. 

pulv§r-is. 

pulv6r-i. 

pulver-em. 

pulv6r-6. 

flos. 

flor-is. 

flor-i. 

flor-em. 

flor-e. 

rStio. 
ration-is. 
ratio  »-I. 
ration-em. 
1  fttion-e. 

Plural. 

Speeches. 

Flowers. 

Reasons. 

N.,A.,V. 

Gen. 
D.&Abl. 

sermon-es. 
sermon-iim. 
sermon-ibus. 

pulvSr-es. 

pulver-um. 

pulver-Tbiis. 

flor-es.. 
flor-um. 
flor-ibus. 

ration-es. 
ration-um. 
ration-ibus.        | 

On  this  class,  observe, 

(332.)  As  to  case-endings :  1.  Final  n  of  the  stem  is  gener- 
ally  dropped  in  Latin  nouns  in  the  nominative.  (In  sanguis, 
sanguin-is  (blood),  it  is  changed  into  s.) 

2.  Final  r  of  the  stem  is  often  changed  into  s,  as  in  p  ul  vi  s, 
flos,  mos,  &c. 

(333.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  simply  drop  n  of  the 
stem  in  the  nom.  are  masculine  (except  abstract  nouns 
in  io). 
Special  Rem. — Abstract  nouns  in  io  (onis)  are  feminine ;  e.  g.,  ratio, 
reason ;  ultio,  reveiige.    (They  are  a  very  large  class,  formed  by  add- 
ing io  to  the  supine-stem  of  verbs.) 

(334.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  change  6r  of  the 
stem  into  is,  or  into  os,  are  masculine;  e.  g,,  pulvis 
(pulvSr),  flos  (flor). 

exercise. 
(335.)   Vocabulary. 

Manner,  custom,  mos,  (mor)  is  (VI., 

1,^'). 
Robber,  latro,  (latron)  is  (VI.,  1,  a). 
Pirate,  proedo,  (proedon)  is  (VI.,  1,  a). 
Centurion,  centurid,  (centurion)  is 

(VI.,  1,  a). 
Lion,  led,  (leon)  is  (VI.,  1,  a). 


Speech,  language,  sermft,  (sermOn) 

is  (VL,  1,  a). 
Surrender,    deditid,    (dedition)    is 

(VL,  1,  c). 
Rebellion^    rgbellifi,     (rebellion)    & 

(VL,  1,  c). 
The  Sacred  Way,  ViS  Sacrtt, 


124 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


To  slay,  triicidare. 

Nurse,  nutrix,  (nutric)  is  (I.). 

Devoid  of,  expers,  (expert)  Is  (107). 

To  draw,  trahere  (trax- ;  277,  1). 

Eloquent,  disertus,  a,  um. 

Adorned,  omatus,  ik,  um. 

To  go,  ire. 

By  chance,  fort6  (adv.). 

As,  sicut. 

Kind,  blandus,  a,  um. 

More  latronum. 
More  suo. 


Speech  (in  the  abstract),  or  an  ora- 
tion, oratio,  (oration)  is  (VI.,  1,  c). 

Dust,  pulvTs,  (pulv6r)  is  (VI.,  1,  b). 

Egyptian,  .ffigyptus,  i. 

Sweet,  pleasant,  suavis,  is,  e. 

To  wander,  errare. 

To  employ,  uti  (with  abl.,  316,  b). 

To  finish,  conficere  (io). 

The  rest,  the  remaining,  rfeliquus,  a, 
um. 

(336.)  Examples, 

(a)  After  the  manner  ofroh- 

hers, 
(J))  After  his  (her  or  their) 

own  manner, 

(c)  Devoid  of  reason,  R&tionis  expers. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — ^Adjectives  signifying  abounding,  want, 

privation f  &c.,  govern  the  genitive  (sometimes  abl.). 

(d)  We  say,  a  cloud  of  dust ;  the  Latin  says,  a  power  of 
dust — ^vis  pulveris. 

(337.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  (Masculines,  Class  VI.,  1,  n  dropped.) — Centuriones 
militiim  Labieniim  libenter  sequebantur. — Legatus  sermo- 
nem  longum  conficit. — Multi  JEdui  CaesS,ris  sermoni  (dat., 
267,  b)  interfuerunt. — Imperator  reliquos  latrones  prsedo- 
nesque  trucidavit. — Africa  nutrix  est  leoniim  ferociiim. 

3.  (Verbal  Nouns  in  ion,  all  Feminine.) — Helvetii  legatos 
de  (concerning)  dsditione  ad  Caesar^m  miserunt. — Barbari 
rebellionem  turpem  fecerunt. — Legatus,  oratione  acri 
(abl.,  55,  a),  barbaros  addeditionem  traxit. — Oratio  disertS. 
6t  ornata  omnibiis  (161,  a)  placet. — Ferae  sunt  rationis  et 
oratio  nis.expertes. 

3.  (Nouns  changing  er  of  the  Stem  into  is,  or  into  Os;  all 
Masculines.) — Pulvis  et  umbra  siimus. — Milites,  eodem  tem- 
pore (118,  IL,  c)  magnam  vim  pulveris  videbant. — Ibam 
forte  via  sacra  (abl.,  55,  a)  sicut  meus  est  mos. — iEgypti, 
more  praedonum  (336,  a),  naves  incend^re  (infin.,  210)  con- 
suevgrunt. — Suaves  tui  mores  mihi  (161,  a)  valde  placent. — 
Piaedones,  more  suo,  oppid^  incendere  coeperunt. 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


125 


(338.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

1.  {Masculines^  Class  VL^  1,  n  dropped,) — Caesar  employs 
kind  language*  (abl.,  316,  &),  and  draws  the  barbarians  to  a  sur- 
render.— Many  of  the  Helvetians  heard  the  severe  speech  (78, 
II.,  h)  of  Caesar. — The  bands  of  robbers  and  pirates  wander  by 
sea  and  land. — The  general  slew  all  the  wicked  pirates. — Is 
(135,  II.,  a)  Africa  the  nurse  of  lions  ? — Is  Europe  (nuin,  280, 
h)  the  nurse  of  fierce  lions  1 

2.  {Verhals  in  io,  all  Feminine,) — Caesar  drew-out  from 
(their)  winter-quarters  the  four  legions  which  he  had  levied 
(conscripserat)  in  Italy. — The  eloquent  oration  pleased  all. 
— The  baibarians  made  a  base  rebellion  after  (their)  surrender. 
— Lions  are  devoid  of  reason  and  speech. 

3.  (Nouns  changing  er  of  the  Stem  into  is,  or  into  os  ;  Mas- 
culines,)— The  flowers  are  beautiful. — The  customs  of  the 
Germans  were  good. — Death  turns  (vertit)  all  things  into 
dust. — At  the  same  time  (118,  II.,  5)jagreat  cloud  of  dust  (336, 
d)  was  seen  by  the  soldiers. — I  was  sleeping  in  the  garden,  as 
is  my  custom. — The  ^duans,  after  the  manner  of  pirates,  slew 
the  ambassadors. 


LESSON  LIV. 
Nouns, — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(339.)  Class  VI. — The   Nominative  presents    the 
Stem  changed. 
2,  Feminine  Forms. 


n  of  the  Stem  dropped,  and  i  changed  into  6.                                  || 

Singular. 

Image  (f.). 

Hail  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

imago. 

imagin-is. 

imagin-i. 

imagin-em. 

imagin-e. 

grand  d. 

grandin-is. 

grandin-i. 

grandin-6m. 

grandin-6. 

Plural. 

Images. 

Hail. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 
D.  and  Abl. 

imagin-es. 

imagin-um. 

imagin-ibiis. 

grandin-es. 

grandin-um. 

grandin-ibiSs. 

' 

Sermo. 

L2 


126 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


On  the&e,  observe, 

(340.)  Rvle  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  drop  n,  and  change 
i  into  o  in  the  nom.,  wee  feminine. 
Exceptions.  Or  do  [order],  car  do  (hinge),  turbo  {whirlwind),  are 
masculine.    Nemo   (nobody),   mar  go   {margin),   are   common, 
(Homo,  man,  is  masc,  by  the  general  rule,  25,  a.) 
Rem.  Card  {Jlesh)  makes  gen.  carnis,  dat.  carni,  &c.,  contracted 
from  carinis,  carini,  &c. 

EXERCISE. 

(341.)  Vocabulary. 

Sleep,  somnus,  i. 

Same,  idem,  eSdem,  idem  (150). 

Multitude,  multitude,  (multitudin)  is 

(VL,  2). 
To  set  forth,  exponere. 
Swallow,  hirundo,  (hirundin)  is  (VI., 

2). 
Harbinger,  praenuntia.  oe. 
Spring,  ver,  is  (321,  exc.  2). 
Resemblance,    similitudS,    (similitu.- 

din)  is  (VI.,  2).^ 
To  preserve,  keep,  servare. 
To  call  {n^me),  appellarS. 
Council,  concilium,  i. 

(342.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  Somniis  imago  mortis  est. — Legati  eadem  quae  Caesar 
dixerat  multitudini  exponunt. — Hirundines  praenuntiae 
veris  sunt. — Galli  oppidum  ex  si  mill  tu  dine  floris  Liliiira 
appellabant. — Consul  matrum  virginum-que  precibus  exci- 
tatur. — Poetae  celebrant  Romiilum,  originem  gentis. 

2.  Principes  ^duoriim  magnam  multitudinem  homi- 
num  ex  agns  coegerunt. — Milites  ordines  non  servant. — 
Caesar  centiiriones  piimorum  ordiniimad  concilium  convocat. 
— Cicero  in  magnis  turbinibus  navera  reipublicae  (351,  3) 
gubernavit,  et  salvam  in  portu  collocavit. 

.  (343.)   Translate  into  Latin, 
1.  Speech  (sermo)  is  the  image  of  the  mind. — Sleep  is  often 
the  harbinger  of  death. — The  soldiers  feared  the  force  of  the 


Lily,  lilium,  i. 

Virgin,  virgd,  (virgin)  is  (VI.,  2). 

Prayer,  prex,  Tiom.  not  used,  (prfic) 

is  (L). 
To  celebrate,  to  extol,  celebrare. 
Origin,  origo,  (origin)  is  (VI.,  2). 
To  collect,  cogere,  c6n+ag6re  (perf.- 

stem,  coeg). 
Order,  rank,  ordo,  (ordiii)  is  (VI.,  ^) 

(m.). 
Whirlwind,  turbd,  (turbin)  is  (VI., 

2,  340,  exc). 
Safe,  salvus,  fi,  um. 


*  Similitudd  fi6n3^=s  resemblance  to  ajhwer. 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


127 


hail. — The  centurions  were  setting-forth  the  same  (things) 
which  the  general  had  commanded. — The  brave  soldiers  are 
moved  by  the  prayers  of  the  mothers  and  the  virgins. 

2.  The  consuls  collect  a  great  multitude  of  men  from  the 
towns. — Caesar  dismisses  from  (ab)  the  council  the  centurions 
of  the  first  ranks. — The  archers  and  the  slingers  did  not  keep 
their  ranks. — Caesar  calls  (vocare)  to  the  council  the  centuri- 
ons of  all  the  ranks. — The  brave  consul  in  the  great  whirlwinds 
will  govern  the  ship  of  state  (351,  3). — Caesar  will  place  the 
ship  of  state  safe  in  the  port. 


LESSON  LV. 

Nouns, — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(344.)  Class   VI. — The   Nominative  presents   the 

Stem  changed, 

3.  Neuter  Forms, 


(a)  Vowel  changed.             \ 

(b)  Vowel  and  Cons,  changed.  \ 

{c)  Cons,  changed. 

Singular. 

Song  (n.). 

Strength  (n.). 

Work(n.). 

Body  (n.). 

Law  (n.). 

N.,A.,V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Abl. 

carmen, 
carmin-is. 
carminl. 
carmin-e. 

robur. 
robor-is. 
robor-i. 
robor-e. 

opus. 
6per-is. 
6p6r-T. 
6p6r-e. 

corpus. 
coi-por-Ts. 
corpor-i. 
corp6r-e. 

jus. 
jur-is. 
jur-i. 
jur-6. 

Plural. 

Songs. 

.  Works. 

Bodies. 

Lawf?. 

N.,A.,V. 

Gen. 
D.,Abl. 

carmm-a. 

carmm-iim. 

carmin-ibus. 

robor-a. 

robor-um. 

robor-ibus. 

6per-a. 

oper-um. 

op6r-ibus. 

corp6r-&. 

corp6r-um. 

corpor-ibus. 

jur-a. 

jur-um. 

jur-ibus. 

On  this  class,  observe, 

(345.)  As  to  gender,  they  are  all  neuter.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which,  in  the  nominative,  change 
the  stems  i  n  into  ^  n,  6  r  into  u  r,  and  6  r,  6  r,  or  u  r  into 
u  s,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions.  (1.)  In  6n:  only  pecten,  pectinis  (masc),  a  comb. 
(2.)  or  into  ur:  none. 
(3.)  er  into  us:  none. 

(4.)  or  into  us  :  only  I6pus,  iSporis  (masc),  a  hare. 
(5.)  ur  into  us:  mus,  muris  (masc),  mouse;  tellus,  liris 
(fern.),  earth 


128 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


(346.)  Under  this  head  may  be  classed  the  follow- 
ing  nouns  of  rare  endings : 

.1.  Poem  a,  atis  (neuter),  a  poem.  Nouns  of  this  form  are 
derived  from  the  Greek,  and  are  all  neuters.  They  prefer  the 
ending  is  to  i b ii  s  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  plur. 

2.  Halec  [neuter),  halecis,  trine,  and  lac  {neuter),  lactis, 
milk,  are  the  only  Latin  nouns  ending  in  c  in  the  nom. 

3.  Caput,  capitis,  head,  is  the  only  Latin  noun  ending  in 
t  in  the  nom.     It  is  neuter. 

EXERCISE. 

(347.)   Vocabulary, 

Arrogance,  arrogantia,  as. 

Crime,  crimen,  (crimia)  is  (VI.,  3, 

a). 
To  want  (lack),  to  he  free  from,  c&- 

rere  (with  abl.). 
Folly,  stultiti^. 
Wonderful,  mirif icus,  a,  um  (mirus 

+facio). 
Naked,  nudus,  5,  um. 
Strong,  validus,  &,  um. 
The  whole  affair,  omnis  res. 

(348.)  Examples, 
(a)   To  condemn  to  death. 


To  delay,  tardarS. 

Gift,  munus,  (muner)  is  (VI.,  3,  b). 

Quickly,  cito  (adv.). 

Hare,  lepus,  (lep6r)  is  (m.,  345,  4). 

Milk,  lac,  (lact)  is  (n.,  346,  2). 

Flesh,  car6,  (cam)  is  (f.,  340,  R.). 

Young  man,  JuvSnis,  is  (m.) :  gen. 

pi.,  um. 
Danube,  Danubiiis,  i  (m.). 
Jugurtha,  JugurthS,  ae. 
If,  SI  (conj.). 


capitis  (or  c§,pit^)  condem- 
nare  (  =  io  condemn  of  the 
head). 

Rule  of  Syntax. — ^With  verbs  of  condemning,  the  punish- 
ment (if  capital)  is  put  in  the  gen.  or  abl. 

(&)   To  he  free  from  a  crime.    Crimine  carere  (  =  to  want 

crime). 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  ablative  case  is  used  with  verbs  (and 
adjectives)  of  abounding  and  wanting. 

(349.)   Translate  into  English. 

Socrates  arrogantiae  et  stultitiae  criming  carebat. — Rhenus 
et  Rhodaniis  magna  sunt  flumina. — Magna  et  mirifica  sunt 
omnia  Dei  opera. — G  alii  semper  nudo  cor  pore  (synt.,716,  2) 
pugnabant. — CorporS,  Germanoriim  valida  et  mirific^  fuerunt 
— Magnltudd  opSriim  omnSm  rem  tardabat. — Si  mun6r& 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS.  129 

tardas,  nihil  das  ;  bis  dat,  qui  cito  dat. — Venator  lepores  timi- 
dos  in  sylvis  persequitiir. — Athenienses  Socratem  capite  con 
demnarunt.*  —  Cur  talem  virum  capitis  condemnastis ?— 
Britanni  lacte  et  carne  vivunt. 

(350.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  bodies  of  the  young  men  were  strong. — The  man  (viri 
was  free  from  the  crime  of  folly. — The  Danube  and  the  Rhine 
are  great  rivers. — Do  the  Gauls  (num,  280,  h)  fight  with  naked 
body  ? — The  works  of  Cicero  are  excellent :  I  read  them  (eos) 
vnxh  pleasm-e  (libenter). — The  Romans  condemned  Jugurtha 
to  death  (348,  a). — Did  the  Athenians  (280,  h)  condemn  Socra- 
tes to  death  ? — The  captives  were  condemned  (imperf.  pass.)  to 
death. — The  timid  hare  was  wandering  in  the  woods  and  fields. 
— Is-it-possible-that  (280,  h)  the  Britons  live  (on)  (abl.)  milk 
and  flesh? — ^Your  pleasant  songs  (161,  h)  delighted  (delec- 
tare)  me. 


LESSON  LVL 

Irregular  Nouns. 

(351.)  We  give  here  the  declension  of  a  few  irreg- 
ular nouns. 


1. 

J 

upi 

ter. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Jupiter. 

Jovis. 

J6vi. 

JovSm. 

Jov^. 

^  *  The  perj[.  Biidj?lup.  tenses  are  often  thus  contracted:  amdrdt  for 
dmdvSrat ;  vtgtlastts  for  vigUavistis. 


t» 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 


2.  Bos,  an  ox  or  cow. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  Bos.  Boves. 

Gen.    Bovis.  Bourn. 

Dat.     Bovi.  Bobiis  or  Bubiis. 

Ace.    Bovem.  Boves. 

Voc.    Bos.  Boves. 

Abl.     Bove.  Bobus  or  bubus. 

[In  double  nouns,  each  noun  is  inflected ;  e.  g.,] 

Respublica  (res+publica),  a  republic,  state. 

Singular. 

Nom.  Respublica. 


Gen.  Reipublicae. 

Dat.  Reipublicae. 

Ace.  Rempublicam. 

Voc.  RespubKca. 

Abl.  Republica. 


Plural. 

Respublicae. 

Rerumpublicarum. 

Rebuspublicis. 

Respublicas. 

RespubKcae. 

Rebuspublicis. 


4.  Jusjurandum  (jus+jurandum),  an  oath. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  Jusjurandum.  Jurajuranda. 

Gen.    Jurisjurandi.  

Dat.     Junjurando.  

Ace.    Jusjurandum.  Jurajuranda. 

Abl.     Jurejurando.  

Rem.  The  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative  plural  are  not  used. 
EXERCISE. 


(352.)   Vocabulary. 

Faith,  promise,  fides,  el. 

To  bind,  obstringerS,  (6b+string6re) 

(perf.-stem,  obstrinx). 
To  take  care  of,  curarS. 
Folly,  stultitia,  ae. 
To  lose,  amittgre,  (a+mitt6re)  (pejf.- 

stem,  amis). 
To  intrust,  committers,  (con+mit- 

t6t&)  commTs  (with  dat.). 
Especially,  maximS  (adv.). 
To  worship,  c6l$r6  (perf.-stem,  c6- 

lu-). 


Apis,  Apis,  is  (f.). 

Sacred,  sanotus,  S,  um. 

Formerly,  olim. 

Guardian,   custoar,.  (custod)   is   (m. 

and  f.). 
Juno,  Juno,  (Junon)  is  (f.). 
Husband  or  wife,  conjux,   (conjug) 

is  (m.  and  f.). 
Nation,  natid,  (nation)  is  (f.). 
An  Egyptian,  ^gyptus,  i. 
Hut  especially,  maxime  autdm. 
Minerva,  MinervS,  s. 


1 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS.  131 

(353.)   Translate  into  English, 

Principes  inter  se  fidem  et  jusjurandum  d^bant. — Am 
vistus  cmtatem  jurejurando  (55)  et  obsidibiis  obstrinxit. — 
Apiid  Romanos,  consiiles  rempublicam  curaverunt. — Multae 
nationes  per  stultitiam  respublicas  suas  amiserunt. — Vete- 
res  maxime  Jovem  coluerunt.  —  iEgypti  Apim,  sanctum 
bovem  (225,  «),  olim  coluerunt. — Jupiter  est  hujiis  urbis 
custos. — Juno  erat  Jovis  conjux — Gives  ir^m  Jo  vis  timent. 
— Cornua  bourn  sunt  magna. 

(354.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  robbers  will  give  an  oath  among  themselves. — Caesar 
binds  all  the  Germans  by  a  promise  and  an  oath. — Caesar  bound 
the  chiefs  of  the  state  by  an  oath  and  by  hostages. — The  senate 
intrusts  (com  mitt  it)  the  whole  republic  to  Cicero. — The 
consuls  will  take  care  of  our  republic. — The  ancients  worship- 
ped many  gods,  but  especially  Jupiter. — We  have  lost  the  re- 
public by  (per)  our  own  folly. — Jupiter  is  the  guardian  of  our 
house. — Apis,  the  sacred  ox,  is  the  guardian  of  this  city. — 
Minerva  was  the  daughter  of  Jupiter. — Good  men  do  not  fear 
the  anger  of  Jupiter. 


132      RULES  OF  GENDER,  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

(355.)  LESSON  LVIT. 


Summary  of  Rules  of  Gender  from  the  Nominative 
Formation.^ 


I.  Masculines  either 

1.  Add  s,  and  change  the  stem-vowel  before  it;  e.  g.^ 
gurges,  gurgit-is,  whirlpool;  miles,  milit-is,  sol- 
dier;  codex,  codic-is,  hook. 


2.  Present  the  stem  er,  ul,  or,  without  adding  s ;  e.  ^., 
anser,  anser-is,  goose;  consul,  consiil-is,  consul; 
honor,  honor-is,  honour. 


3.  Drop  n  without  adding  s;  e,  g,^  sermo,  sermon-is, 
speech;  carbo,  carbon -is,  cooZ. 

4.  Change  ^r  of  the  stem  into  is,  or  into  os  ;  €.  ^.,  ) 
cinis,  ciner-is,  ashes;  pulvis,  pulv^r-is,  dust;^ 
flos,  flor-is,  ^oi^er.  ) 

II.  Feminines  either 

1.  Add  s  without  changing  the  stem-vowel;  e.  ^.,  urb-s, 
urb-is,  city;  nox  (noct-s),  noct-is,  night;  vox 
(voc-s),  v6c-is,  voice;  quies,  quiet-is,  quiet. 


2.  Insert  a  vowel  (e  or  i)  before  adding  s  ;  e.  g*.,  nub-e-s, 
nub-is,  cloud;  nav-i-s,  nav-is,  ship. 


3.  Drop  n,  and  change  i  into  o  ;  e.  g.,  imago,  imagin-is, 
image;  grando,  grandin-is,  hail, 

III.  Neuters  either 

1.  Add  e  to  the  stem  ;  e.  g.,  mare,  mar-is,  the  sea, 

2.  Present  the  unchanged  stem  al,  ar,  ur,  or;  e.  g.,  ani- 
mal, animal-is,  animal;  calcar,  calcar-is,  spur; 
fulgiir,  fulgur-is,  lightning ;  gequor,  aequor-is,  sea, 

3.  Change  in  of  the  stem  into  en,  or  into  ur,  and  er,  or, 
or  ur  into  us;  c.^.,  carmen,  carmin-is,  5on^;  ebur, 

.  6b6r-is,  ivory;  opus,   6per-is,  work;  corpus,  cor- 
p6r-is,  body  ;  crus,  crur-is,  leg. 


*  Abundant  illustrations  of  these  rules  have  been  given.  The  student 
ehould  now  learn  them  thoroughly  by  heart,  and  apply  them  in  the  sub- 
Bequent  lessons. 


EXCEPTIONS.  133 


Exceptions. 


I.  1.  Only  merges,  mergitis  (f.),  sheaf, 

'  er,  feminine  :  linter,  boat. 

e  r,  neuter :  cadaver,  tiber,  verber,  v6r,  tuber,    spin- 
ther,  with  all  the  names  of  plants  in  e  r. 
I.  2.  <  6  r,  feminine  :  arbor,  tree. 

or,  neuter:  cor,  ador,  sequor,  marmor. 

Rem.  The  neuters  have  6  {short)  in  the  stem ;  the  mas- 
^  culines,  6  (lo7ig). 

Y    «  J  The  abstract  nomis  in  io  are  dSi  feminine  ;  e.  g.<,  r&tio 
Jb      t      (f')»  ratidnis,  reason. 

I.  4.  None. 


IT, 


II.  2. 


{Masculines.      Viz.,   fons,  mons,  pons,  dens  and  its 
compounds,  torrens,  occidens,  oriens. 
Grex,  Greek  nouns  in  ax,  and  a  few  in  ix  ;  l^pis, 
vas,  paries,  pes.* 
Masculines.     Latin  nouns  ending  in  nis  ;  e.g.,  ignis 
{m.),fire  ;  with 
Piscis,  orbis,  callis,  and  canaJis  ; 
Unguis,  caulis,  axis,  and  annalis ; 
Fascis,  sentis,  fustis,  cams,  ensis  ; 
Vectis,  vermis,  postis  ;  also  mensis* 
jy    «  J  Masculines.     Ordo,  cardo,  homo,  turbo. 
'     *  I  Common.  Nemo,  margo. 

III.  1.  None. 

fC  Sal,  masculine  and  neuter  in  singular ;  masculine  in 
Til.  2.  <      plural.     Lar,  lans,  masculine. 
I  Fur,  furfur,  turtur,  vultur,  masculine. 
Masculine  :  changing  i  n  into  e  n,  only  pecten,  comb  ; 
changing  o  r  into  u  s,  only  lepiis,  hare  ;  chang- 
ing ur  into  us,  only  mus,  mouse.     Feminine  : 
teUus,  earth. 


*  There  are  also  a  few  Greek  words  that  are  masculine.    As,  assis, 
coin,  is  masculine  ;  vas,  vftsis,  vase,  is  neuter. 

M 


§  4. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.    (LVIIL— LX.) 

(356.)  Adjectives   are  inflected  both  in  English 
and  Latin  to  express  degrees  of  quahty ;  e.  ^., 


Positive. 

Brave, 
Fort- is, 


Comparative. 

braver, 
fort-  i  6  r, 


Superlative. 

bravest. 

fort-  i  s  s  i  m  u  s 


LESSON  LVIII. 


The  Comparative  Degree. 

(357.)  The  comparative  has  the  ending  ior  for 
the  masculine,  and  ius  for  neuter.  These  endings 
are  added  directly  to  the  stem  of  the  adjective  ;  e.  g,, 


Masculine. 

Brave,  fort-is  ; 

braver,  fort-  ior; 

fort-ius 

Hard,  dur-us ; 

harder,  dur-ior; 

dur-ius. 

Beautiful,    pulch-er )  ,         .  /.  , 

{stem,  pulchr-) ;  S    ^^^  beautiful,  pulchr-ior ;    pulchr-ms. 

Rem.  If  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  the  comparative  is  formed  by  the 
use  of  m&gis,  more,  instead  of  the  ending;  e.  g., 

piouSf  pi-US ;  more  pious,  m&gis  pius. 

Jit  J        idone-us ;  m^rejit,        mSgis  idoneus. 


(358.) 


•DECLENSION   OF    COMPARATIVES. 


SINGULAR. 

PLUKAI,.                           ll 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

N.  and  V. 

dur-ior. 

dur-iiis. 

dur-iores. 

dur-iora. 

Gen. 

dur-ioris. 

dur-ioris. 

dur-iorum. 

diir-iorum. 

Dat. 

dur-iori. 

dur-iori. 

dur-ioribus. 

dur-ioribus. 

Ace. 

duriorem. 

dur-ius. 

dur-iores. 

dur-iori. 

Abl. 

dur-ior6. 

dur-iore. 

dur-ioribus. 

dur-ioribus. 

Rem.  In  the  later  writers,  I  is  used  for  abl.  sing,  ending  frequetttty 
instead  of  S. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


135 


EXERCISE. 

(359.)    Vocabulary, 


Like,  similar  to,  similis  (takes  dot., 

sometimes  gen.,  106,  II.,  c). 
Amiable,  amabilis,  is,  6. 
Eloquent,  eloquens. 
Excellent,  praestans. 
Ignorance,  ignoratio,  (ignoration)  is. 
Knowledge,  scientia,  ae. 
Silver,  argentmn,  L 
Vile,  paltry,  vilis,  is,  6. 
Justice,  justitia,  ae. 

(360.)  Examples, 
(a)  A  pirate  is  more  like  a 
mild  beast  than  a  man. 


Dear,  precious,  carus,  ft,  um. 
Few,  pauci,  ae,  &  (used  only  in  pL). 
Indeed,  quidem  (adv. ;  always  stands 

next  after  the  word  to  which  it 

refers). 
Swift,  celer  (105,  R.  1). 
Than,  quam  (conj.). 
To  seekf  quoerer^. 
Antonine,  Antoninus,  L 
Future,  futurus,  a,  um. 


(6)  Nothing  is  more  amiable 
than  virtue. 


Praedo  f^rae  (106,  II.,  b)  est 
similior     quam     homini 
(dat.). 
Nihil  est  amabilius  quam 

virtus,  or 
(c)  Nihil  est  virtu te  Ama- 
bilius. 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  conjunction  quam  (than)  is  fre- 
quently omitted,  and  then  the  noun  with  the  compara- 
tive must  be  put  in  the  ablative  case. 


Cicero    ivas    more    eloquent 
than  Caesar. 


Cicero  fuit  Caesare  el6- 
quentior. 

(361.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nihil  est  virtute  praestantius. — Virtus  est  praestantior 
quam  robur  (344). — Ignoratio  malorum  titilior  est  quam  sci- 
entia.— Auriim  gravius  est  argento. — Argentum  vilius  est 
auro,  virtutibus  aurum. — Liipi  ferociores  sunt  quam 
c^nes. — Tullus  Hostilius  ferocior  erat  Romiilo. — Justitiam 
quaerimus ;  rem  (app.,  with  justitiam,  225,  a)  auro  cario- 
rem. — Paucis  (dat.  gov.  by  carior,  106,  II.,  b)  carior  fides 
est,  quam  pecunia. — Mihi  (dat.)  amicus  fuit  me  ipso  carior. 
— Omnes  suos  {i.  e.,  his  friends)  caros  habet  {he  holds) ;  me 
(ace.)  quidem  seipso  caridrem. — Nemo  Romanorum  (par- 
titive gen.)  eloquentior  fuit  Cicerone. 

(362.)   Translate  into  Latin. 
1.   With  q u  am. — The  horse  is  svdfter  than  the  dog. — Igno- 


136 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


ranee  of  future  evils  is  better  than  knowledge  (of  them). — Lions 
are  fiercer  than  wolves. — Antonine  was  more  pious  (357,  R.) 
than  Caesar. — The  son  was  more  amiable  than  the  father. — ^A 
robber  is  more  like  a  wolf  (dat.,  106,  II.,  b)  than  a  man. 

2.  Without  quam  (with  ablative). — Justice  is  a  thing  more 
precious  than  gold. — Gold  is  more  paltry  than  virtue. — Nothing 
is  more  amiable  than  virtue. — To  Crassus  his  friends  were 
dearer  than  himself. — He  (had)  held  all  his  own  (friends) 
dear,  but  Cicero  even  dearer  than  himself. — What  (170)  is 
heavier  than  water  ?  Gold. — ^What  is  more  excellent  than 
strength  ?     Virtue. 


LESSON  LIX. 

Superlative  Degree. 
(363.)  The  superlative  ending  is  i  s  s  i  m  u  s,  which 
is  added  to  the  stem  of  the  adjective. 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

Z>€ar,  car-US  ;  clearer,  car-ior  ;  dearest,  cax-issimus. 

Brave,  fort-is ;  braver,  fort-ior  ;  bravest,  fort-  i  s  s  i  m  u  s. 

Happy,  more  happy,  most  happy, 

felix  (felic-s) ;  felic-ior ;  felic-  i  s  s  i  m  u  s. 

(364.)  But  adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  e  r  add 
the  ending  r  i  m  u  s. 

Unhappy,  miser ;  most  unhappy,  miser-  r  i  m  u  s. 

Swift,  celer  ;  swiftest,  celer-  r  i  m  ii  s. 

V  Beautiful,  pulcher  ;  most  beautiful,  pulcher- r  i  m  ii  s. 

(365.)  Several  adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  1  add 
1  i  m  u  s. 

Easy,  f acil-is ;  easiest,  facil- 1  i  m  u  s. 

EXERCISE. 

(366.)   Vocabulary, 

Cyrus,  Cyrus,  i.  To  preserve  moderation,  mddum  hS- 

Hannibal,  Hannibfil,  (Hannibal)  is.  ber6  (=  to  luwe  moderation). 

Difficult,  difficilis  (di-f-facilis).  Carthage,  Carth&go,  (Carthagpfn)  is. 

Moderation,  m6dus,  i.  Metal,  mfitallum,  i. 

Darius,  Darius,  i.  To  stain,  mactHarS. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  137 

(367.)  Examples. 

(a)  Socrates  was  very  wise.   \  Socrates    sapientissimus 
1      fuit. 

A  high  degree  of  quality  [very  good,  very  wise,  &c.)  is  expressed  in 
Latin  by  the  superlative. 


(h)  Of  all   these,    the   Bel- 
gians are  the  bravest. 


Horum  omnium  fortissimi 
sunt  Belgse. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  genitive  plural  is  used  with  the 
superlative  degree  :  the  most  learned  of  the  Romans  ; 
doctissimus  Romanorum  (partitive  gen.,  synt.,  697). 


(c)  Among    the    Helvetians 
the  noblest  was  Orgetorix. 


Apud    Helvetios     nobi- 
lissimus  fuit  Orgetorix. 


(368.)   Translate  into  English. 

Urbs  Syracusae  (app.,  225,  a)  Graecarum  urbium  est  pul- 
cherrima. — Praestantissimi  Persarum  regesfuerunt  Cyrus  et 
Darius. — Pompeius  magnam  belli  gloriam  morte  (55,  a)  tur- 
pissima  maculavit. — Hannibal  fortissimiis  erat  omnium 
Carthaginiensium. — Gallorum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Bel- 
gae. — Cicero  eloquentissimus  fuit  Romanorum. — Difficilli- 
mum  est  modum  habere  (161,  d). — Apud  iEduos  nobilissi- 
mus  et  fortissimus  fuit  Divitiacus. 

(369.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Plato  was  very  wise  (367,  a). — Plato  was  the  wisest  of  all 
the  Greeks  (367,  h). — The  city  Rome  was  the  most  beaufiful 
of  all  the  Roman  cities. — Of  all  these,  the  Britons  are  the  bra- 
vest.— The  most  excellent  leaders  of  the  Romans  were  Caesar 
and  Pompey. — Carthage  was  a  very  beautiful  city. — Of  all 
things,  the  most  difficult  is  to  preserve  moderation. — Of  all 
(men),  the  most  happy  (beatus)  is  the  wise  (man). — The  hard- 
est of  all  metals  is  iron. — Among  the  Greeks  Themistocles 
was  the  noblest. — Caesar  led  the  bravest  soldiers  across  the 
very  broad  river. 

M2 


138 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


LESSON  LX. 
Irregular  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 
(370.)  Several  adjectives  are  quite  irregular  in 
their  comparison.     The  following  are  the  most  im- 


Dortant. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

good,  bonus. 
bad,  mSlus. 

better,  m6li6r. 

best,  optimus. 

worse,  pejor. 

worst,  pessimus. 

great,  magnus. 

greater,  maj6r. 

greatest,  maximiis. 

much,  multus. 

'^'^^'  \  plures,  a  (pi.). 

very  many,  5  ^     ^^""o- 

small,  parvus. 

less,  minor. 

least,  minimus. 

old,  senex. 

older,  senior. 

wanting. 

young,  juvenis. 

younger,  junior. 

wanting. 

outivard,  exterus. 

more  outward,  exterior. 

outermost,  extremiis. 

below,  inf  gnis. 

lower,  inferior. 

lowest,  infimiis,  or 
imus. 

above,  sup6rus. 

higher,  superior. 

highest,  supremiis,  or 
summus. 

hind,  posteriis. 

hinder,  posterior. 

hindmost,  postremus. 

(371.)  Several  adjectives  have  no  positive,  but  form 
the  comparative  and  superlative  from  a  preposition, 
adverb,  or  obsolete  word. 




Comparative. 

Superlative. 

{on  this  side,  citra.) 
[within,  intra.) 

{beyond,  ultra.) 

{near,  prope.) 
{bad,  deter.) 

rwarer,  citerior. 
inner,  intgrior. 

farther,  ulterior. 

nearer,  pr6pi6r. 

worse,  deteriSr. 
former,  prior. 

nearest,  citimus. 
inmost,  intimus. 

worst,  deterrimui 
first,  primus. 

Rem.  1.  Dives,  rich;  richer,  ditior,  divitior;  richest,  dItissTmus, 
tissimus.     (Cicero  uses  the  longer  form,  Caesar  the  shorter.) 

2.  Compound  adjectives  in  dicus,  ficus,  volus,  add  entior  for  the 
comp.,  and  entissimus  for  the  superl. ;  e.  g.,  bSne-volus  [benevolent), 
bSn6v6l- entior,  bSnSvol- en  tissimus. 


EXERCISE 

(372.)   Vocabulary. 

Disgraceful,  unworthy,  indignus,  S, 

tim  (in+dignus). 
Infamy,   disgraceful    crime,    fl&gi- 

tium,  T. 
Wisdom,  sapientia,  oe. 


The  Su£vians,  Suevi,  orum. 
Warlike,  bellicosiis,  a,  iim. 
Condition,  conditio,  (condition)  is. 
America,  America,  09. 
Emperor,  impgrator,  oris  (355,  L,  2). 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  139 


(373.)  Examples. 

(a)  It  is   disgraceful  to  he 

conquered  by  a  superior ; 

more    disgraceful    {to    he 

conquered)  hy  one  inferior 

and  lower. 


Indignum  est  a  siiperiore 
vinci ;  indignius  ab  inferi- 
or e  atque  humiliore. 


[Here  the  infin.  pass,  vinci  is  used  as  a  neut  notm,  nom.  to  est,  and 
indignum  agrees  with  it  in  the  predicate.] 

(h)    What  is  hetter  for  man  I  Quid  est  homini  meliiis  sa- 

than  wisdom ?  |      pientia  (360,  c)  ? 

[Here  homini  is  in  the  dat.  (advantage  or  disadvantage,  106,  II.,  b).] 

(374.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nihil  est  melius  quam  (360,  h)  sapientia. — Hibemia 
minor  est  quam  Britannia. — Nihil  est  pejus  flagitio. — Hos- 
fes  celeriter  loca  (309)  siiperiora  occupabant. — Maxima 
pars  AquitaniaB  obsides  ad  Caesarem  misit. — Suevorum  gens 
est  longe  maxima  et  bellicosissima  Germanorum  omnium 
(367,  6). — Ariovistus  agrum  Sequanum,  qui  optimus  erat 
totius  Galliae  occiipavit. — Infima  est  conditio  et  forttina  ser- 
vorum. — Primus  et  maximus  regum  Romanorum  fuit 
Romiilus. 

(375.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

It  is  disgraceful  to  be  conquered  by  a  junior,  more  disgrace- 
ful by  a  senior. — What  is  better  than  virtue  ?  what  worse  than 
vice  1 — What  is  better  for  man  than  honour  ?  Wisdom. — Eu- 
rope is  less  than  Asia ;  Asia  than  America. — The  bravest  of 
the  Belgians  were  seizing  the  higher  grounds  (loca). — The 
greatest  part  of  Gaul  made  (fecit)  a  surrender. — The  first 
and  greatest  of  the  Roman  emperors  was  Caesar. — The  poor 
are  often  more  benevolent  (371,  R.  2)  than  (quam)  the  rich. 
— The  worst  (men)  are  often  more-happy  than  (quam)  the 
best. — Among  the  Helvetians  (by)  far  the  richest  and  noblest 
was  Orgetorix. 


§  5. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS. 

(376.)  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  admit  of 
comparison.  The  comp,  is  the  neuter  form  of  the 
comparative  of  the  adjective :  the  superlative  substir 
tutes  e  for  u  s. 

Learnedly,  more  learnedly,  most  learnedly, 

doct-  e  ;  doct-  i  u  s  ;  doct-  i  s  s  i  m  e. 

Joyfully,  more  joyfully,  most  joyfully, 

Iset-  e  ;  laet-  i  ii  s  ;  laet-  i  s  s  i  m  e. 

Happily,  more  happily,  most  happily, 

felic-i  t  e  r ;  felic-i  ii  s  ;  felic- i  s  s  i  m  e. 

Well,  bene  ;  letter^  melius  ;  hest,  optime. 
[No  separate  exercise  upon  these  is  necessary.] 


sy    or  '^^^ 


§  6. 

SUPINE. 

(377.)  The  Supine  presents  the  action  of  the  verb 
under  the  form  of  a  noun  in  two  cases,  the  accusative 
and  ablative.  The  former  supine  ends  in  um,  the  lat- 
ter  in  u ;  which  endings  are  added  to  the  supine-stem 
of  the  verb. 

LESSON  LXI. 
Supines. 
(378.)  The  Supine-stem  is  formed  by  adding  to 
the  verb-stem, 

(1)  In  1st  conj., at;  c.  ^.,  am-at-. 

(2)  In  2d  conj., it;  e.  ^.,  mon-it-. 

(3)  In  3d  conj., t;  c.  g-.,  reg-t  =  rect-. 

(4)  In  4th  conj., it;  c.  ^.,  aud-it-. 

[Rem.  Many  supines,  however,  use  different  connecting  vowels,  or 
take  s  (and  not  t)  before  nm  and  n.  For  this  reason,  therefore,  all 
supine-stems  will  be  given  in  the  following  vocabularies.  Where 
no  supine-stem  is  given,  it  is  to  be  understood  that  the  verb  has  no 
supine.] 

(379.)  The  supine  in  um  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  accusative 
case,  and  is  put  after  verbs  of  motion  to  express  the  design  of 
that  motion  ;  e.  g., 


Legati    S,d   Caesarem   veniunt 

rogatiim*  auxilium. 
Ire  dormitiim. 


(a)  Ambassadors    come    to 

Ccesar  to  ask  assistance, 
(6)   To  go  to  sleep  (to  sleep- 
ing). 

(380.)  The  supine  m  u  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  ablative  case, 
and  is  used  after  adjectives  signifying  good  or  bad,  easy  or  diffi- 
cult, pleasant  or  unpleasant,  &cc. 

*  R6gatum=  accus.  answering  to  the  question  whither. 


142 


SUPINE. 


Est  facile  fact  u.* 


Est  mirabilS  d  i  c  t  u. 


(a)  It  is  (a  thing)  easy  to  do 

(or,  to  he  done), 
(6)  It  is  (a  thing)  wonderful 

to  tell  (or,  to  be  told). 
(381.)  The  following  are  nearly  all  the  supines  in  u  which 
are  in  use  :  dictu,  audit u,  cognitu,  factu,  invent u, 
meraoratu. 

EXERCISE. 

(382.)   Vocabulary, 

To  asJc,  demand,  postulare   (postu- 

l§t). 
To   congratulate,    gratulari    (gratii- 

lat),  dep. 
To  come  together,  convfenire  (con+ 

venire,  conven-,  convent-). 
To  complain,  queror  (quest). 
Custom,   consuetude,    (consuetudin) 

IS  (f.,  355,  II.,  3). 
To  collect  corn,  frumentari  (friimen- 

tat). 
A  Trevirian,  Tr&vvc,  i  (65). 

(383.)  Example, 


To  besiege,  oppugnarS  (oppugnat). 

Hand,  band  ofme7i,  manus,  us. 

Wonderful,  mirabflis,  e  (104). 

Very  easy,  perfacilis,  e  (104). 

To  do,  facere  (fact). 

To  say,  tell,  dicere  (diet). 

Best,  optimus,  a,  um  (370). 

To  find,   invemre   (in+v6nir6),  ii 

vent. 
To  happen,  accidSre. 
To  endure,  tolSrare  (t6l6rat). 
Senate,  s6natus,  us. 


Divitiacus   came    to    Rome 
to  ask  assistance. 


Divitiacus      .R  5  m  a  m      venit 
auxiliiim  postulatiim. 
Mule  of  Syntax. — The  accusative  is  used  with  the  names 
of  towns  and  small  islands,  to  answer  to  the  question 
whither  ;  e.  g.,  in  (a)  Romam. 

(384.)   Translate  into  English, 

1.  Supine  in  um. — Principes  civitatis  ad  Csesarem  gratu- 
latiim  convenerunt. — Treviri  magna  manu  (55,  a)  castrS,  op- 
pugnatiim  venerunt. — L egati  ab  ^duis  venerunt,  q u e s t u m. 
— Caesar  ex  consuetudme  unam  legionem  misit  frumenta- 
tiim. — Legati  Romam  M  senatiim  venerunt  auxilium  pos- 
tulatum. 

2.  Supine  in  u. — Est  perfacile  factu. — Est  jucundum  au- 
di tu. — Quaedam  (178,  1)  sunt  turpia  dictu. — Quod  optimum 
est  factu,  faciam. — Virtus  diflficilis  est  inventti. — ^Mult& 
accidunt  dura  toleratu. 


F  actu  =  ablative  of  respect,  wherein. 


SUPINE.  143 

(385.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Words  in  Italic  to  be  rendered  by  supines.] 

1.  Supine  in  um. — The  consuls,  according  to  (ex)  custom, 
sent  a  large  band  to  collect  corn, — All  the  chiefs  of  the  jEduans 
were  coming  to  Rome  to  ask  assistance. — All  the  ambassadors, 
according  to  custom,*  came-together  to  Caesar  to  congratulate 
(him). — The  soldiers  of  the  tenth  legion  came  to  the  general  to 
complain, — The  Germans  came  (in)  a  large  band  to  attack  the 
town. 

2.  Supine  in  u. — It  is  (a  thing)  wonderful  to  he  heard, — 
What  (quod)  is  base  to  he  said,  I  will  not  say. — What  is  diffi- 
cult to  he  done,  I  will  do. — A  true  (verus)  friend  is  difficult  to 
he  found, — Some-things  are  very  easy  to  he  done, 

*  According  to  custom  =  ex  consuetudine. 


Uli.^ 


§  7. 

TENSES  OF  VERBS  FOR  COMPLETED  AC- 
TION.—PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FU- 
TURE PERFECT.  — FULLER  STATEMENT. 
(LXIL— LXIX.) 

(386.)  It  has  been  stated  (262)  that  the  tense-stem  of  the 
perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  tenses  is  the  same.  In 
Lessons  XL IV.,  XLV.  we  gave  one  mode  of  forming  this 
tense-stem  for  each  conjugation.  There  are  several  other 
modes,  which  we  now  proceed  to  state,  taking  up  the  conjuga- 
tions separately.  To  make  the  tables  complete,  we  shall  repeat 
the  first  method  at  the  head  of  each. 


d-^re,         dSd- 


LESSON  LXIL 
Forms  of  Perfect-stem, — First  Conjugation. 
(387.)  There  are  four  ways  of  forming  the  per- 
fect-stem in  the  first  conjugation, 

I.  By  adding  av  to  the  verh-stem  ;  am -are,      am-av 
II.  "  u  "  son -are,     son-u 

III.  reduplicating*  the  first  con- 

sonant with  e  ; 

IV.  lengthening  the  stem-vowel ;    juv-arS,    juv-. 

On  this  table,  observe  that  Class 

I.  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation. 
II.  contains  eleven  simple  verbs  (of  which  a  list  may  be  found,  664). 
m.  contains  but  ttoo  simple  verbs,  viz.,  dS.r6,  to  give,  and  starfi,  to 

stajid. 
rV.  contains  but  two  simple  verbs,  viz.,  juvarS,  to  assist,  and  ISvarg, 
to  wash. 

(388.)  To  form  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  or  future  perfect  of  a 

*  To  reduplicate  a  consonant  is  to  prefix  it  to  a  stem  with  some  con- 
necting-vowel;  thus,  mord-,  reduplicate  with  o,  momord;  st- are,  re- 
duplicate with  e,  stest-,  but  the  second  s  is  dropped,  stfit-. 


PERFECT-STEM,  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


145 


verb  of  any  of  the  above  classes,  simply  add  the  endings  of  those 
tenses  respectively  to  the  perfect-stem  ;  thus  : 

Infinitive.  Perfect-stem.  Perfect  tense. 


To  forbid,  v6t-ar6,  v  6 1  u  - 
To  give,     d-  fir6,      d  6  d  - 
Tohdp,     juv-ar6,   juv- 


1. 

isti. 

It. 

imus. 

istis. 

eront,  or  ere. 


Pluperfect 

eram. 

Sras. 

6rat. 

Sramus. 

Gratis. 

erant. 


Future  Perfect. 
6r6. 
6ris. 
erit. 
erimus. 
6ritis. 
erint. 


EXERCISE. 


(389.)  [S^^  Hereafter,  in  all  the  vocabularies,  the  perfect  and  supine 
stems  of  verbs  will  be  given  in  parentheses,  immediately  after  the  injini' 
tive.  When  no  perfect  or  supine  stem  is  given,  it  will  be  understood  that 
those  forms  of  the  verb  are  wanting ;  and  where  two  are  given,  that  the 
verb  uses  both.  Thus  :  to  help,  juvftr6  (juv-,  jut-) ;  to  glitter,  micarS 
(micu-) ;  to  fold,  plicare  (plicav-,  plicu-,  plicat-,  plicit-).  In  these  exam 
pies  micare  has  no  supine ;  plicare  has  two  perfect  and  two  supine  forms.] 

(390.)    Vocabulary: 

To   demand    [command],   impSrare 

(av-,  at-). 
To  give,  dare  (ded-,  dat-,  387,  HI.). 
Hunger,  fames  (is),  (300). 
To  taine,   domare   (domu-,   d6mit-, 

387,  II.). 
To  shine,   or  flash  forth,   emicare 

(emicu-,  e+micare,  387,  II.). 
To  surround,  circumstare  (stit-  and 

stet-). 

The  sand,    dry  ground,  aridum,  i 

{n£ut.  o/aridus,  dry). 
An  attack,  impetus,  us  (110). 
To  assist,  adjuvar6  (juv-,  jut-,  ad+ 

juvare). 

(391.)  Examples. 

(1)  Stare  =  to  stand;  con-stare,  to  stand  together,  to 
halt ;  circum-stare,  to  stand-around^  to  surround. 
(The  compounds  of  s  t  a  r  e,  with  prepositions  of  one  sylla- 
ble, have  stit-  for  perfect-stem  ;  those  with  two,  st§t-.) 

(2)  To    resist  or  vnthstand    Alicui  resistor e. 
any  one. 

Partial  Rule  of  Syntax.— Monj  verbs  compounded  with 
prepositions  govern  the  dative, 

N 


Door,  foris,  (for)  is  (300). 

To  creak,  cr6par§  (crepu-,  crepit-). 

To  chide,  reprove,  incrSpare  (in+ 

crepare,  crepu-,  crepit-). 
A  little  while,  paullisper  (adv.). 
To    withstand,    rgsist^re     (restate 

re-|-stare). 
To   halt,    constarS  (constit-,   con-f- 

stare). 
As  soon  as,  simulatque  (adv.). 
To  slay,  kill,  interfic^re  (interfec-, 

interfect-). 
To   make,   facSre,    id    (fee-,    fact-, 

199). 


146  PERFECT-STEM,  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


(3)  To  put  any  one  to  flight, 

(4)  To  make  an  attack. 


Aliquem    in    fiigam    dare 

( =  to  give  unto  flight), 
Impetum  facere. 

[The  Latin  words  in  the  following  exercises  which  illustrate  the  leS' 
sons  are  spaced.] 

(392.)   Translate  into  English, 

Oppidani,  obsides  quos  Caesar  imperav-erS.t,  ded-erunt. — 
Venatores  fame  (abl.,  55,  a)  lupos  domu-erunt. — Ex  monte 
subito  (adv.)  flammae  emicu-erunt. — Imperator  oppidanos 
frumento  (55)  adjuv-it. — Num  ere pu-e runt  fores  ? — Cae- 
sar vehementer  (215,  II.,  b)  milites  increpu-it. — Hostes 
nostris  paullisper  r es tit -e runt. — Hostes  militibus  (391,  2) 
circumstet-erunt,  multosque  interfec-erunt.  —  Nostri  in 
hostes  impetum  fec-erunt,  atque  eos  (391,  3)  in  fugam  ded- 
erunt. — Nostri  simiilatque  in  an  do  constit-erunt,  in  hostes 
impetum  fec-erunt  atque  eos  in  fiigam  ded-erunt. 

(393.)  Translate  into  Latin, 
•  The  flame  shone-forth. — From  (e  x)  the-top-of  the  mountain 
(297,  a)  the  flame  suddenly  shone-forth. — The  huntsman  had 
tamed  the  wolf. — The  townsmen  had  given  the  hostages. — 
The  Belgians  gave  all  the  hostages  that  {rel,  pron.)  Caesar  had 
demanded. — The  general  had  reproved  the  lieutenant  and 
(que)  the  soldiers. — Our  (men)  were-withstanding  the  enemy 
(dat.) — Our  (men)  bravely  withstood  the  enemy,  and  (que) 
killed  many. — The  Belgians  surrounded  our  {men)  (dat.,  391, 
2),  and  killed  many. — The  Romans  often  put  the  Belgians  to 
flight. — Our  men  haltsd  upon  {in)  the  dry-ground. — As-soon-as 
our  men  halted  upon  diy-ground,  they  bravely  withstood  the 
enemy  (391,  2). — Our  men  put-to-flight  the  enemy  whom 
(dat.,  391,  2)  they  had  bravely  withstood. 


LESSON  LXIII. 

Perfect-stem, — Second  Conjugation. 

(394.)  The  perfect-stem  in  second  conjugation  is 
formed  mfive  ways. 


PERFECT-STEM,  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


147 


mord-erS,  mo-mord-, 


I.  By  adding  u  to  the  verb-stem  ;  mon-ere,  mon-ii-. 
II.           "            ev             *'                del-ere,  del-ev-. 

III.  **  s  "  man-er^,  man-s-. 

IV.  reduplicating  the  first  con- \ 

sonant  and  vowel ; 

V.         lengthening  the  stem-vowel ;  v  i  d  -ere,  v  i  d  -. 

(395.)  On  this  table,  observe  that  Class 

I.  contains  w.ost  of  the  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation.* 

II.  contains  only  f  1  e  r  e,  to  weep ;  n  e  r  e,  ^o  spin ;  d  e  1  e  r  6,  ^o  destroy  ; 

with   the   compounds  of  the   obsolete  words   pi  ere,  to  Jill; 
6lere,t  to  grow ;  suere,t  to  be  accustomed.     [For  a  list,  see 
663,  II.] 
HL  contains  many  verbs,  of  which  a  list  may  be  found  (663,  III.). 
The  rules  of  euphony  must  be  applied  here. 
{a)  b  before  s  sometimes  passes  into  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Sap<ne. 

To  command,      jub-ere,      jub-si=jussi,      jussum  (jub-stim). 
(5)  t-sound  before  s  dropped. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  laughf  rld-ere,       rid-si  =  risT,         risum  (rid-sum). 

(c)  c-sound  +  s  =  X.    Any  c-sound  before  t  =  c. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

TotTicrease,         aug-ere,      aug-sl  =  aux-i,     auctum  (aug-tum). 

(d)  c-soand  after  1  or  r  dropped  before  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect,  Supine. 

To  glitter,  fulg-ere,      ful-si  (ful(g)s-i),  ful-sum(ful(g)suin). 

IV.  contains /cmr  simple  verbs.    See  list  (663,  IV.). 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  bite,  champ,   mord-ere,    mo-mord-T,    morsum  (mord-sum). 
To  vow,  promise,  spond-ere,  spo-pond-i,    sponsum  (spond-sum). 
[The  compounds  of  these  verbs  drop  the  reduplication ;  e  g.. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  answer,  respondere,    respond-i,    responsum  (respond-sum).] 
V.  contains  eight  simple  verbs,  for  which  see  list  (663,  V.). 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  favour,  fav-ere,  fav-i,  faiitum. 

To  move,     m6v-erS,  mov-i,  motum. 

EXERCISE. 
[Refer  to  386  and  389.] 

(396.)   Vocabulary, 


Carthage,  Carthago,  (Carthagin)  Ts 

(339). 
To  destroy,   deler6    (delev-,    delet-, 

395,  II.). 


To  fill  up,  complere  (complev-,  com- 
plet-,  395,  II.)  [con+plere]. 

Good  will,  voluntas,  (voluntftt)  Is 
(293). 


*  Many  examples  of  this  class  have  already  occurred. 

\  Some  of  these  have  sco  in  present  indicative  :  adolesco,  consuescow 


148  PERFECT-STEM,  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


Scipio  )  ScTpio,  nis. 

[surnamed)  > 
AfricanuSj      }  Africanus,  i. 
Numantia,  Niimantia,  ae. 
A  defence,  fortification,  munitio  (nis), 

(f.,  333,  R.)- 
Even  up  to,  as  far  as,  usqufe  (adv.). 
Great,  ingens,  (ingent)  is  (107). 
Standard,  signum,  I. 
Tooth,  dens,  (dent)  is,  (m.,  295,  R.)- 


To  remain,  manere  (mans-,  mans-, 

394,  III.). 
To  come,  venire  (ven-,  vent-). 
A  slayer,  interfector,  5ris  (319). 
To  see,  videre  (vid-,  vis-,  395,  V.). 
To  open,  aperire  (aperu-,  apert-). 
Gate,  porta,  ae. 

To  flee,  fugere  (io),  (fug-,  fugit-). 
Bit,  bridle,  fraenum,  i  (plur.  I  and  a). 
Saguntum,  Saguntum,  i. 
Hill,  coUis,  is  (m.,  302,  R.). 

(397.)  Example. 

On  the  very  day  of  his  ar-  lEodem  quovenerat  die 
rival,  \      {^=ithe  very  day  on  which 

I      day  he  had  come), 

(398.)   Translate  into  English, 

Hannibal  Saguntum  delevit,  Scipio  Carthaginem. — Scipio 
Africanus  urbes  duas  potent) ssimas,  Carthaginem  et  Niiman- 
tiam  delevit. — Caesar  has  munitiones  diligenter  auxit. — 
Galli  partem  coUis,  usqiie  ad  murum  oppidi,  castris  (55,  a) 
compleverant. — Adventus  legati  summa  spe  et  voluntate 
urbem  complevit. — Diu  barbari  in  fide  manserant. — Ita 
complures  dies  (191,  a)  manserant  castr^. — Caesar  eodem 
die  (118,  II.,  c)  in  ^duos  castra  movit. — Imperator,  eodem 
quo  venerat  die  (397)  castra  movit. — Brutus  et  Cassius,  in- 
terfectores  (225,  a)  Caesaris,  bellum  ingens  moverunt.* — 
Legiones,  simiilatque  nostrS,  signa  viderunt,  portas  aperue- 
runt. — Equus  fraenos  momordit. — Spopondistine  pro  am- 
ic6  ?     Spopondi. 

(399.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Scipio  destroyed  Carthage,  a  most  powerful  city. — God  has 
filled  the  world  with  all  blessings  (bona,  neut.). — Socrates 
never  laughed. — The  forces  of  the  Gauls  had  filled  the  whole 
(o  m  n  e  m)  place,  even-up  to  the  wall  of  the  town. — The  Gauls 
had  fiUed-up  the  higher  (superior)  part  of  the  hill  with 
(their)  very -crowded  (densissimus)  camp. — The  coming 
of  Caesar  filled  the  army  with  the  highest  hope  and  good-will. 
For  many  years  the  barbarians  had  remained  in  friendship  and 

*  In  the  sense  of  excited,  stirred  up. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGAIION.  140 

fidelity  (fide que). — Caesar  moved  (his)  camp  into  the  (terri- 
tory of  the)  ^duans  on  the  very  day  of  his  an-ival. — The  ene- 
my saw^  our  soldiers,  and  fled. — The  horses  were  champing  the 
bits. — The  wolf  bit  the  dog  with  his  teeth  (55,  a). 


LESSON  LXIV. 
Perfect-stems, — Third  Conjugation, 

(400.)  The  perfect-stem  in  the  third  conjugation  is 
formed  in  six  ways. 

I.  By  adding  s  to  the  verb-stem  ;  scrib-ere,  scrip-s-. 
II.  "  XL  "  col-ere,       c61-u-. 

III.  "  V,  or  iv    "  pSt-er^,       pet-iv-. 

IV.  reduplication  ;  c  u  r  r  -ere,     c  u  c  u  r  r-. 
V.         lengthening  the  stem-vowel ;  f  u  g-^re,       f  u  g-. 

VI.         taking  the  simple  verb-stem ;  v  o  1  v  -ere,     v  o  1  v-. 

We  shall  take  up  these  separately,  treating  in  this  lesson 
only  the  first. 

(401.)  Class  I. — Perfect-stem  formed  by  adding  s 
to  the  Verb-stem. 

Most  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  come  under  this  class^ 
It  has  already  been  illustrated,  but  we  here  give  a  fuller  ac- 
count of  the  rules  of  euphony,  in  connexion  with  the  various 
stem-endings. 

1 .  b  before  s  or  t  passes  into  p. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  write,  scrib-ere,        scrips-i  (scrib-s-i),        scriptnm  (scrib-tum). 
To  marry,  nub-6r6,  nnps-i  (nub-s-i),  nuptum  (nub-tum). 

2.  A  c-sonnd  H-s  =  x  (c,  g,  h,  v,  gu,  qn  are  classed  with  c-sounds.    If  a 

stem  ends  in  ct,  the  t  is  dropped,  and  the  c  unites  with  s  to  form 
x).    Any  c-soand  before  t  =  c. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  lead,      duc-6re,  dux-I  (dnc-s-i),  duc-tum. 

To  cover,    t6g-er6,  tex-i  (teg-s-i),  tec-tnm  (teg-tum). 

To  dranjD,    trSh-grS,         trax-i  (trah-s-i),  trac-tum  (trah-tum). 

N2 


150 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


Supine. 

flux-nm  (fluv-sum). 


Infinitive.  Perfect  Supine. 

To  live,       viv-6r6,  vix-i  (viv-s-i),  vic-tum  (viv-tum). 

rrr  T         .  .        ,       .  ,    {  extiiic-tum 

To  quench,  extingu-6rS,  extinx-i  (extingu-s-i),  \      /     ^        4ttj^\ 

To  hail,       c6qa-$re,        cox-i  (coqu-s-i),  coc-tum  (coqu-tum). 

We  class  here  also, 

Infinitive.  Perfect. 

To  flow,       flu-ere  (fluv-),         flax-i  (fluv-s-i), 

To  huild,     stru-gre  (struc-),     strux-i  (struc-s-i),    struc-tum. 

3.  d  or  t  before  s  either  [a]  is  dropped,  or  {h)  passes  into  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect. 

{a)   To  divide,    divid-ere,      divis-i  (divid-s-i), 
[b)   To  yield,  go,  ced-erg,         cess-i  (ced-s-i), 
To  send,       mitt-er6,        mis-i  (mit-s-i), 

4.  {a.)  m  or  r  before  s  sometimes  passes  into  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect. 

To  press,   prem-6re,       press-i  (prem-s-i), 
To  bear,     ger-er6,  gess-i  (ger-s-i), 


Supine. 

divi-sum  (divid-sum). 
ces-sum  (ced-sum). 
mis-sum  (mit-snm). 


Supine. 

pres-sum  (prem-sum), 
ges-tum  (ger-tmn). 


{b.)  But  if  m  be  retained,  it  assumes  p  before  it. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine, 

To  take,     sum-6re,        sum-ps-i  (sum-s-I),       sump-tum  (sum-tum). 


5.  If  the  stem  ends  in  rg,  the  g  is  dropped  before  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect. 

To  scatter,  sow,   sparg-6r6,        spars-i  (sparg-s-i), 
EXERCISE. 


Supine. 

spar-sum. 


(402.)    Vocabulary. 

To  bind,  surround,  cinggre  (cinx-, 

cinct-,  401,  2). 
To  draw  up,  instriiere  (instrux-,  in- 
struct-, 401,  2). 
To   shut,   claudgre    (claus-,    claus-, 

401,  3,  a). 
To    retreat,    recedere    (re+cedSre, 

cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b). 
To  approach,  accedere  (ad+cedere, 

cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b). 
To  grant,  concedSre  (con+cedere, 

cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b). 
To  bear,  carry  on,  g6r6re  (401,  4,  a). 
To  spend,  consumere  (con+sumSre, 

sumps-,  sumpt-,  401,  4,  b). 

(403.)  Examples, 

(a)  In  all  directions, 

(b)  Upon  an  expedition. 


Rampart,  vallum,  i. 
Triple,  triplex,  (tripKc)  is  (107). 
Janus,  Janus,  I. 
Numa,  Numa,  sb. 
Veteran,  v6teranus,  S,  um. 
In  three  divisions,  tripartito  (adv.). 
Suddenly,  repente  (adv.). 
By -night,  noctu  (adv.). 
There,  ibi  (adv.). 
Dragon,  drSco,  (drScon)  is  (333). 
Arms,  arma,  orum  [used  only  in  plu- 
ral). 
Neighbouring,  finitimus,  &,  um. 
State,  civitas,  (civitat)  is  (293). 


In  omnes   partes. 
In   exp^ditionem. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  151 

(404.)   Translate  into  English. 

In  tua  epistola  nihil  mihi  scripsisti  de  tuis  rebus. — ^Bar- 
bari  vallo  et  fossa  (55,  a)  hiberna  cinxerunt. — Caesar  ti-ipli- 
cem  aciem  instruxit  legionum  veteranarum. — Romani  tem- 
plum  Jani  bis  post  Numae  regnum  clauserunt. — Imperator 
exercitum  in  duas  partes  divisit. — Caesar  tripartito  milites 
equitesque  in  expeditionem  mi  sit.  —  Principes  repente  ex 
oppido  cum  copiis  recesserunt. — Milites  noctu  usque  ad 
castra  accesserunt. — Caesar  obsidibus  (54)  libertatem  con- 
cessit.— Germani  cum  Helve tiis  bellum  gesserunt. — Mag- 
num et  grave  onus  armorum  milites  pressit. — Explorator  ad 
castra  hostium  ace es sit,  atque  ibi  magnam  partem  diei  con- 
sumpsit. — Cadmus  dentes  draconis  spars  it. 

(405.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  ambassador  wrote  nothing  concerning  his  own  affairs. — 
The  scout  approached  even-up  to  the  walls  of  the  town. — The 
aeutenant  sent-away  messengers  in  all  directions. — Caesar  sent- 
away  the  horsemen  in  three  divisions  into  the  neighbouring 
states. — Cadmus  slew  (interfecit)  the  dragon  and  sowed 
Lis  (ej  us)  teeth. — Caesar  drew  up  the  veteran  legions  in  (abl.) 
a  triple  line. — The  soldiers  spent  a  great  part  of  the  day  in  the 
camp.  —  The  enemy  approached  the  town  by-night. — The 
townsmen  shut  the  gates. — The  Helvetians  retreated  by  night 
with  all  (their)  forces. — Caesar  sent-away  the  scouts  in  three 
divisions  upon  an  expedition. — The  general  sent-away  the  mes- 
sengers by  night  in  all  directions. — The  soldiers  approached 
even-up-to  the  rampart,  and  there  spent  a  great  part  of  the  day. 


LESSON  LXV. 
Perfect-stem. — Third  Conjugation,  continued. 
(406.)  Class  II. — Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb- 

stem. 
(a)   Without  change  of  the  verb-stem  (see  list,  QQQ^  II.,  a) ; 

To  nourish,  maintain,         al-Sre,  al-u-T,  al-tam, 

2V  hwwur,   cuUivate,  c6l-6rS,  col-u-i,  ciil-tura. 


152 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIXD  CONJUGATION, 


{h)  With  change  of  verb-stem  (666,  II.,  h). 
To  place,  pon-ere,  p6s-u-i,*  pos-Ttum. 

To  begetf  gign-erS,  gen-u-i,  gen-i-tum. 

Class  III. — Perfect-stem  adds  v  or  iv  to  the  Verb- 

stem, 
(a)  Adds  V  (and  lengthens  stem-vowel,  if  short).     (List,  666, 
III.,  a.) 

[These  generally  drop  n,  r,  or  sc,t  or  change  the  order  of  the  letters. 
They  must  be  carefully  observed,  as  they  occur  in  the  vocabularies^ 
To  despise,  spem-ere,      sprev-i,         spre-tum  (spem-tum). 

To  be  accustomed,  suesc-SrS,      suev-i,  sue-tum. 

(h)  Adds  iv  (list,  666,  III.,  5). 
To  seek,  strive  after,  pet-ere,  p6t-iv-i,  pgt-i-tam. 

EXERCISE. 

(407.)    Vocabulary. 


Spaniard,  Hispanus,  i. 

Command,  jussus,  as. 

Against,  contra  (prep.,  ace). 

People,  populils,  I. 

Immediately,  statim. 

Avienus,  Avienus,  i. 

To  instigate,  stir  up,  instigare 
(av-,  at-). 

To  place  in,  to  put  into,  imponerg 
(im+ponSre,  406,  h). 

To  remove,  remoyerS  (rSmov-,  re- 
mot-,  re+movere). 

To  arrange,  distribute,  disponerS 
(dis+p6n6re,  406,  b). 

To  relate,  comm6m6rar6  (av-,  at-, 
con-^m^morarg) . 

(408.)  Examples, 
(a)  By  the  command  of  Cee- 


Property,  fkmilia,  jb. 

To  cross  over,  transirS  (trans-f-ir6^ 

iv-,  it-). 
To    decree,    determine,    decemerg 

(decrev-,  decret-,  de+cemerg). 
To    discourse,   diss6r6r6   (dissem-, 

dissert-,  dis-fs^rerS). 
To  plunder,  diripgrS   (ripu-,   rept- 

di+rapere)4 
A  beast  of  burden,  jumentum,  i. 
Sacred  rites,  sacra,  orum  (n.,  pL). 
Instead  of,  pro  (prep.,  abl.). 
Ad/vice,  counsel,  consilium,  i. 
On  account  of,  6b  (prep.,  ace). 
To  despise,  spem6re  (406,  III.,  a). 
Winter,  hiems,  (hi6m)  is  (293). 

Jussu  (abl.,  55,  a)  CaBs^ris. 


*  P6nd  =  p6sino ;  p6sui  =  pos-iv-i. 

t  In  these  verbs  the  n  or  s  c  does  not  properly  belong  to  the  root,  but  is 
employed  simply  to  strengthen  the  present  indicative  and  infinitive ;  to 
knmo,  no- ere,  strengthened  nosc-ere,  &c. 

X  Observe  that  the  compounds  of  rap6re,  facgrg,  c^pgrg,  withprcp- 
0«i^w>7ts,  change  a  into  i  m  the  infinitive;  dirip6r6,  confic6r6,  accl- 
p6r6. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION^  153 


In  naves  imponere  (put 

into  ships). 
Ad   exercitum. 
Ad  fines   iEduorum. 


(b)  To  place  on  shipboard. 

(c)  With  {near)  the  army. 
On  the   borders   of   the 

JEduans. 

Ad  is  often  used  by  Csesar  in  the  sense  of  near  or  with  (i.  e.,  along 

with). 

(409.)   Translate  into  English. 

Hispani,  jussu  Caesaris,  eos  exercitus  quos  (165)  contra  pop- 
ulum  Romanum  multos  jam  annos  (191,  a)  aluerant,  statim 
dimiserunt. — Aviene  (voc.),  quod  {because)  in  Italia  milites 
populi  Romani  contra  rempublicam  instig^sti  (349,  N.) ;  et, 
pro  militibus,  tuam  familiam  in  naves  imposuisti;  6b  eas 
res,  S,b  exercitQ  meo  te  removeo. — Csesar  legiones  quas  in 
Italia,  hibern5rum  causa  (135,  II.,  5),  disposuerat,  ad  se 
revocavit. — Cur  consilium  meum  sprevisti? — Csesar,  his  de 
causis  quas  commemoravi,  Rhenum  transire  deer  eve  rat. — 
Multi  salutem  sibi  (dat.)  in  fuga  petiverunt  (or  petierunt,  349, 
N.). — Caesar  totam  hi^mem  (191,  a)  ipse  ad  exercitum  (408,  c) 
manere  decrevit. — Caesar  duas  legiones  ad  fines  .Slduorum 
posuit. 

(410.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  Spaniards  had  maintained  an  army  (for)  many  years 
(191,  a). — Orgetorix  maintained,  at-his-own-expense  (sumptti 
suo),  a  large  number  of  soldiers. — Caesar  placed  the  camp  on- 
the-borders-of  (408,  c)  the  Sequanians. — Socrates  discoursed 
concerning  (de)  the  immortality  of  the  soul. — The  pirates 
plundered  many  towns. — Caesar  distributed  three  legions  in 
Italy,  for-the-sake-of  winter-quarters.  —  Thou-hast-despised 
my  counsels ;  thou-hast-instigated  the  soldiers  against  the  re- 
public ;  thou  hast  put  beasts-of-burden  instead  of  soldiers  into 
the  ships  :  on-account-of  these  things,  I  remove  thee  from  my 
army. — The  Romans  honoured  most-rehgiously  (maxima 
religione)  the  sacred-rites  of  Jupiter. — Caesar,  for  (de) 
these  reasons,  had  determined  to  cross  the  Rhine. — Many  sol- 
diers sought  safety  for  themselves  (by)  flight. — The  inhabitants 
sought  peace  from  (a)  the  Romans. 


154 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


LESSON  LXVI. 

Perfect-stem. — Third  Conjugation,  continued. 

(411.)    Class   IV. — Perfect-stem    reduplicates    the 
first  Consonant. 

[Some  of  these  present  votoel-changes,  which  must  be  carefully  ob- 
served, {a)  When  the  first  vowel  is  i  or  u,  the  first  consonant  is 
reduplicated  with  that  vowel ;  {b)  m  other  verbs,  with  e.  (c)  The 
compounds  of  dare,  to  give,  withi.] 

[a)  First  vowel  i,  o,  or  u. 

Infinitive. 

To  learn,  disc-ere. 

To  demand,       posc-ere, 
To  beat,  tund-6re, 

(fe)  Other  verbs  reduplicate  with  e  (note  vowel-changes  in 
stems). 

Perfect  Supine. 

ce-cid-i  (i  short),        c§-sum  (cad-sum). 
pe-piil-T,  pul-sum. 

ce-cid-I  (i  long),         caes-um. 


Perfect.  Supine. 

di-(^c-i  (s  dropped),  (no  supine). 

p6-posc-i,  (no  supine), 

tii-tud-i,  tu-sum  (tud-sum). 


Infinitive. 

To  fall,  cad-ere, 

To  drive,  repel,  pell-erg. 
To  fell,  kill,       caed-ere, 
(c)  Compounds  of  dare. 

To  add, 
To  lose. 


Infinitive. 

ad-der6, 
per-der6, 


Perfect. 

ad-did-1, 
per-did-i, 


Supine. 

ad-di-tum. 
per-di-tum. 


EXERCISE. 

(412.)   Vocabulary. 

The  whole,  umversus,  a,  um. 
Duty,    service,    munus,   (muner)   is 

(345). 
Walls,  maenia,  ium  (pi.,  neut.). 
Coming  together,  conflict,  congres- 

sus,  us. 
Seventy,  septiiaginta  (indecl.). 
To  touch,  tangerS  (t6tTg-,  tact-,  411, 

b). 
To  spare,  parcSre  (pgperc-,  parcit-, 

pars- ;  governs  dative). 

(413.)  Examples. 
(1)   To    demand   peace   of 
Caesar. 


To  surround,  cingere  (401,  2). 
Nobody,  nemo,  (nemin)  is  (m.   and 

f.,  25,  a). 
Woman,  mulier,  is  (f,  25,  a). 
Child,  infant,  infans,  (infant)  is  (c, 

25,  a). 
Thirty,  triginta. 
Ej^ghty,  octogintft. 
Immense,  immensus,  ft,  um. 
Sum-of -money,  p6cunia,  88. 
To  add,  addgre  (411,  c). 


(a)  CaesarSm  pac^m  pos- 
cSre  ;  or  (h)  pacem  a  Cae- 
sftre  poscere. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  155 

Rule  of  Syntax. — Verbs  of  demanding  {a)  govern  two  ac- 
cusatives, one  of  the  person,  the  other  of  the  thing; 
but  {h)  the  person  may  be  put  in  the  ablative  with  the 
preposition  a  or  ab. 


(2)  About  twenty. 

(3)  To  give  one's  self  wholly 
up. 

(4)  T^he  leader  spared  wom- 
en. 


Circiter  viginti. 

To  turn  se  dare   (  =  to  give 

one's  seZ/* whole  up). 
Dux  mulieribus   peper- 

cit. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — Verbs  oi  sparing  govern  the  dative. 

^^  Observe,  the  perfect  of  cadere,  to  fall,  is  cecidi;  of  caed^rS, 
to  fell  or  kill,  cecidi.  ■ 

(414.)   Translate  into  English, 

Legati  ad  Caesarem  venerunt,  eumque  pacem  (413,  1,  a) 
poposcerunt. — Hoc  a  me  (413,  1,  h)  munus  universa  pro- 
vincia  p6  pose  it. — Pueri  linguam  Latinam  di  dicer  ant. — A 
Gi-aecis  Galli  urbes  maenibus  cingere  di  dice  runt. — Nostri,  in 
primo  congressu,  circiter  septuaginta  ceciderunt;  in  his 
Quintus  Fulginius. — Arbor  vetus  cecidit,  quam  (165)  ferro 
(55,  a)  nemo  cecidit. — Legatus,  simulac  provinciam  tetigit, 
inertiae  (dat.)  totum  se  dedit. — Postquam  Caesar  venit,  obsides, 
ai'ma,  servos  p6  pose  it. — Milites  non  mulieribus,  non  infanti- 
bus,  pe p ere e runt. — Caesar  legionibus  cohortes  circiter  tri- 
ginta  addidit. — Mors  nuUi  (194,  R.  1)  hominum  (partit.  gen.) 
pepercit  (413,  4). 

(415.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  ^duans  demanded  peace  of  Caesar  (413,  1,  h) — The 
whole  province  demanded  peace  of  the  Romans  (413,  1,  a). — 
Of-our-men  (nostri,  nom.,  pi.)  about  eighty  fell;  among 
them,  Labienus. — Have  you  (135,  II.,  a)  learned  the  Latin 
language? — The  farmer  felled  very-many  (plurimas)  trees 
in  the  wood. — As  soon  as  the  lieutenant  touched  the  province, 
he  plundered  many  towns — The  general  demanded  seventy 
hostages,  and  an  immense  sum  of  money. — The  old  trees  fell. 
— This  service  the  general  demanded  of  me. — The  leader 
spared  all  the  temples  of  the  gods  ;  but  the  soldiers  spared  not 
(non)  women  nor  (non)  children. — Caesar  added  to  the  foot- 
soldiers  about  twenty  cohorts. — Caesar  added  to  the  foot-soldiers 
thirty  horse-soldiers. 


15x3 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


LESSON  LXVII. 

Perfect-stem. — Third  Conjugation^  continued, 

(416.)  Class  V. — Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem- 

vowel  of  the  Verb, 
(a)   Without  vowel-change. 


To  read,  gather,          l6g- 

6re, 

leg-i, 

lec-tum. 

To  conquer,                 vinc-6r6, 

vici, 

vic-tum. 

(6)   With  vowel-change. 

To  drive,                     ag-< 

3re, 

eg-i, 

ac-tum. 

To  break,                     frang-erS, 

freg-i, 

frac-tum. 

(c)  io  verbs  (199). 

Tojly,               fug-i6, 

fug-6re, 

fng-i, 

fug-i-tum. 

To  take,             cap-id, 

cap-er6, 

cep-i, 

cap-turn. 

To  cast,             jac-id, 

jac-er6, 

jec-i, 

jac-tum. 

To  dig,             fod-id, 

f6d-6re. 

fod-i, 

fos-sum. 

To  make,  do,     f  ac4d, 

fac-6re, 

feci, 

fac-tum. 

EXERCISE. 

(417.)   Vocabulary. 

Jtemains,  remnant,  rSliqnise,  arum 

(pl.)  (57,  R.). 
To  collect,  collig6r6  (leg-,  lect-,  con+ 

Iggere). 
To  receive,  take  hack,  reciperfi  (cep-, 

cept-,  rg-i-caperS). 
Headlong,   prseceps,   (prfecipit)    is 

(adj.,  107). 
To  receive,  accipSre  (cep-,  cept-,  ad-{- 

capere). 
To  bring-together,  to  compel,  c6g6re 

(coeg-,  coact-,  con+&g6r6). 
To  break  through,  perfringerg  (freg-, 

fract-,  peH-£rang6r6). 
Da^t,  javelin,  telum,  T. 

(418.)  Examples. 

(a)  To  betake  one's  self  back. 
He  went  hack  to  his  house, 
(h)  Within  the  memory  of  our 
fathers. 


To  hurl,  conjicer6  ( jec-,  ject-,  con-f- 

jacSre). 
To  undertake,  suscipgrfi  (cep-,  cept-, 

sub+capere). 
To  finish,  conf  icSre  (fee-,  feet-,  con-|- 

facerS). 
To  begin,  mcipgre  (incep-,  incept-, 

in-i-cap6r6). 
Safe,  tutus,  a,  um. 
Cappadocia,  Cappadocia,  oe. 
A  district,  pagus,  i. 
^gypt,  ^gyptus,  i  (f.). 
Easily,  filcil6  (adv.). 
Trial,  judicium,  i. 
Family  of  slaves,  f  Smilia,  as. 

S©  rScip^rS. 
Ss  d6mum  rScSpit. 
Patrum  nostrOrum  unfi- 
mdria  (abl.,  55,  a). 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  157 

(c)  Lucius  Cassius,  the  con-   L.  Cassius,  consul. 

sul. 

The  {prcBnomen)  first  name  is  rarely  written  out.  L .  stands  for  L  u c in  s, 
T.  for  Titus,  &c     Consul  is  in  apposition  (225,  a)  with  L.  Cassius. 

(d)  In  mid-summer,  jMedia  aBState(118,  II.,  c). 
(419.)   Translate  into  English, 

Servus  meus  wationes  et  historias  et  carmina  legit. — Le- 
gatus  reliquias  exercitus  co lie  git,  itineribusque  tutis  per  Cap- 
padociam  se  in  Asiam  recepit. — Nostri  acriter  impetum  fe- 
cerunt  atque  praecipites  hostes  egerunt. — Labienus,  cum 
his  copiis  quas  a  Caesare  acceperat,  ad  fines  ^duorum  con- 
tendit. — Pompeius  magnam  ex  Asia  et  Mgypto  classem  coe- 
gerat. — Milites  facile  (adv.)  hostium  ^ciem  per fr egerunt 
atque  in  eos  impetum  fecerunt. — ^Hic  pagus  tinus,  patrum 
nostrorum  memoria,  L.  Cassium  consulem  (418,  c)  interfece- 
rat,  et  ejus  exercitum  sub  jugum  (323,  N.)  miserat. — Hostes 
subito  tela  in  nostros  conjecerunt. — Pompeius  bellum  verS 
(in  the  spring,  118,  II.,  c)  s  usee  pit,  media  sestate  confecit. 

(420.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  general  had  collected  (cogere)  great  forces. — Pompey 
brought-together  a  great  army  from  Asia  and  Egypt. — Have 
you  read  the  books  of  Cicero  ? — The  general  collected  the 
remnant  of  his  army,  and  betook  himself  into  Gaul.  —  Our 
(men)  drove  the  enomy  headlong,  and  slew  many. — Labienus 
had  received  four  legions  from  Caesar. — Labienus,  with  the 
legions  which  he  had  received  from  Caesar,  hastened  to  the 
confines  of  the  iEduans. — Orgetorix  brought-together  to  the 
trial  all  his  family-of-slaves  from  every  side. — The  enemy 
brought-together  ail  (their)  ships  into  one  place. — The  Romans 
easily  broke-through  the  line-of-battle  of  the  JEduans. — Caesar 
finished  the  great  war  in-mid-summer  (418,  d)  which  he  had 
begun  in-the-spring  (118,  II.,  c). 

o 


158 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


LESSON  LXVIII. 


Perfect- stern.  —  Third  Conjugation,  concluded, 

(421.)  Class  VI. — Perfect-stem  =  simple  Verb-stem, 
(a)  Stems  ending  in  u  or  v  (list,  666,  VI.,  a). 


To  sharpen, 
To  roll, 


acu-gre, 
volv-Sre, 


&CU-1, 

volv-i. 


acu-tum. 
volu-tum. 


(h)  Consonant-stems  (list,  666,  VI.,  b). 

To  turn,  vert-er6,  vert-i,  ver-sum. 

(c)  Compounds  of  can  do  and  fendo  (obs.)  belong  here; 

-  i       To  burn,  incend-6rg,  incend-i,  incen-sum. 

To  defend,  ward  off,       defend-6re,  defend-i,  defen-sum. 

EXERCISE. 

(422.)    Vocabulary, 


The  hack,  tergum,  i. 

Tojlow  together,  conflugre  (conflux-, 

conflux-,  con-ffluere,  401,  2). 
Discipline,  disciplina,  se. 
Austerity,  severity,  severitas,  (seve- 

ritat)  is  (293). 
To  dissolve,  dissolvSrS  (solv-,  sdlut-, 

dis+solvere). 
To  return,  revert6re    (r6v6rt-,  re- 

vers-,  re+vertere). 

(423.)  Examples. 

(a)  The  general  appointed 
a  day  for  the  council, 

(b)  What  (number  of)  long 
skips  he  had. 

(c)  To  divide  or  distribute 
among. 


To  appoint,  to  statiori,  to  determine, 

constituerfe  (stitu-,  stitut-,  con+stS,- 

tuere). 
To  divide,  to  distribute,  distribuerfi 

(bii-,  but-,  dis-f  tribuere). 
Desirous,  covetous,  cupidus,  S,  um 

(governs  genitive). 
To  know,  learn,  cognoscSre  (cognov-, 

cognit-,  con+nosc6r6). 
To  turn,  vert6re  (421,  b). 

Imperator     diem     c  o  n  c  1 1  i  o 

(dat.)  constituit. 
Quidquid  n avium  (180)  lon- 

garum  habebat. 
Distribuere  (with  ace.  of 

thing,  and  dat.  oi person). 


(424.)    Translate  into  English. 

Hostes  terga  verterunt. — Divitise  (57,  R.)  quae  ad  Romam 
confluxerunt,  morum  disciplinam  seventatemque  dissol- 
verunt — Caesar  diem  cum  legatis  constituit. — Dies,  quam 
Caesar   constituerat  cum  legatis,  venit,  et  legati  ad  eum 


PERFECT-STEM,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  159 

(150)  reverterunt. — Milites  sese  (145,  c)  fortiter  (215,  2) 
defenderunt. — Hostes  copias  suas  in  tres  partes  distribu- 
erant. — Caesar,  quidquid  navium  longarum  habebat,  legatis 
praefectisque  (423,  c)  distribuit. — Procellge  fluctus  vastos  ad 
littora  volverant. — Cgesar  exercitum  flumen  (113,  II.,  a) 
transducere  constituit. — Caesar  Dumnorigem  jEduum  se-* 
cum  (125,  II.,  b)  ducere  constituit,  quod  (conj.)  eum  cupi- 
dura  imperii  (synt.,  698,  b,  1)  cognoverat. — ^dui  ex  itinere 
domum  (113,  III.,  R.)  reverterunt. 

(425.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  soldiers  defended  the  city  very  bravely  (376). — The 
general  stationed  the  foot-soldiers  near  (ad,  408,  c)  the  wall  of 
the  town. — On-the-next-day  (118,  II.,  c)  Caesar  stationed  all 
the  horse-soldiers  in-front-of  (p  r  o)  the  camp. — The  chiefs  of 
the  states  returned  to  Caesar. — The  day  which  Caesar  had  ap- 
pointed for  the  council  came,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  states  re- 
turned to  him.— Our  (men)  turned  their  backs. — The  riches 
of  the  Romans  had  dissolved  (their)  discipline  and  austerity  of 
manners. — What  money  (423,  b)  he  had  he  distributed  among 
(423,  c)  the  lieutenants  and  soldiers. — The  -iEduans  divided 
their  forces  into  two  parts. — The  tempests  rolled  vast  waves  to 
the  stars. — The  general  determined  to  take  (ducere)  the 
lieutenant  with  him. — The  seas  were  rolling  great  waves  to 
the  shores. 


LESSON  LXIX. 
Perfect-stem. — Fourth  Conjugation. 
(426.)  The  perfect-stem  in  the  fourth  conjugation 
is  formed  in  five  ways. 

I.  By  adding  i  v  to  verb-stem  ;  a  u  d  -ire,  a  u  d -  i  v-. 

"     II.  "  u  "  aper-ire,        ^per-u-. 

'III.  "  s  "  sep-ire,  sep-s-. 

IV.  lengthening  stem-vowel;  yen-ire  f  ven-.  , 

V.         taking  simple  verb-stem ;  c  o  m  p  6  r  -ir^,  c  o  m  p  6  r -. 


160 


PERFECT-STEM,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


(427.)  On  this  table,  observe  that  Class 

I.  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 
[Numerous  examples  have  already  occurred.    Any  peculiar  sapines 

are  given  in  the  vocabularies.] 
II.  contains /<?ttr  simple  verbs  (see  list,  667,  II.). 


Infinitive. 

To  open,  uncover,   aper-ir6, 
To  Uap,                   sal-ire, 

Perfect 

ap6r-u-j, 
sal-u-i. 

Supine 

aper-tum. 
sal-tum. 

m. 

contains  nin£  simple  verbs  (see  list,  667,  III.). 

Infinitive. 

To  bind,                  vine-ire, 

Perfect. 

vinx-i  (vinc-s-i 

Supine. 

),    vinc-tum. 

IV. 

To  think,                 sent-ire, 
contains  but  on£  verb. 

sens-i  (sent-s-i 

f  sen-sum 
''  (     (sent-sum) 

Infinitive. 

To  come,                  ven-ire, 

Perfect 

ven-i, 

Supine. 

ven-tum. 

V. 

contains  two  verbs. 

Infinitive. 

To  ascertain,  find,  comp6r-ir6, 
To  discover,             rep&r-ire. 

Perfect 

comper-1, 
r6per-i, 

Supine. 

comper-tum. 
r6per-tum. 

EXERCISE. 

(428.)   Vocabulary. 

To  leap  down,  desilire  (desilu-  and 

desili-,  desult-,  de-fsalire). 
To  come  near,  to  approach,  appr6- 

pinquare    (ftd+propinquare,   av-, 

at-),  with  dat. 
To  agree,  consentire  (con-f-sentire, 

427,  TIL). 
To  disagree,  dissentire  (dis-fsentire, 

427,  III.). 
To  com^  to,  reach,  arrive  at,  perve- 

nire  (pfir+vSnire,  427,  IV.). 

Example, 

(a)  In  a  battle  of  cavalry,      ifiqnestri  praelio. 
Rule  of  Syntax, — The  ablative  is  used  to  express  the  man- 
ner of  an  action,  especially  with  an  adjective. 

(429.)   Translate  into  English. 

MiHtes  ex  navibus  desilierunt  et  hostibus  (391.  2)  appr6- 
pinquarunt  (349,  N.). — Oppidani  portas  aperuerunt,  et  se, 
atque  oppidum  Csesftri  dSderunt. — Hostes  inter  se  dis sense- 
runt. —  Omnes  cives   una  ment^  (abl.,  428,  a)  consense- 


7^(0  come  together,  assemble,  conve- 
nire  (c6n+venire,  427,  IV.). 

To  find,  invfinire  (in+venlre,  427, 
IV.). 

Thither,  to  that  place,  eo  {adv.). 

To  open,  aperire  (427,  II.). 

When,  quum. 

Youth,  juventus,  ( juventut)  is  (f.). 

To  lay  waste,  popiilari,  dep.  (popii- 
lat-). 

After  that,  postquam  {adv.). 


PERFECT-STEM,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  161 

runt. — Helvetii  jam  per  angustias  copias  suas  transduxerant, 
et  in  iEduorum  fines  pervenerant,  eorumque  agros  popiila- 
bantui*. — Caesar  cum  Labieno  Numantiam  (713)  pervenit, 
ibique  consiiles  invenit.  —  Quum  milites  eo  convene- 
runt,  naves  unum  in  locum  coegerunt. — Eo  postquam  Cae- 
sar pervenit,  obsides  et  arma  poposcit. 

(430.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

After-that  the  townsmen  saw  the  standards,  they  opened  the 
gates,  and  gave  themselves  (up)  to  Caesar. — The  Germans,  in  the 
cavahy  battle  (428,  a),  leaped-down  from  (their)  horses. — The 
general  led  the  army  through  the  straits,  and  on  the  seventh 
day  arrived  at  the  boundaries  of  the  Germans. — The  towns- 
men leaped-down  from  the  wall.  —  All  the  soldiers  agreed 
(with)  one  mind  and  voice  (v  o  x). — When  Caesar  amved-at  the 
town,  the  townsmen  opened  the  gates. — When  the  general 
reached  Numantia,  he  called  together  the  citizens. — When  the 
horsemen  reached  the  town,  the  townsmen  opened  the  gates. 
— The  lieutenant  led-back  the  soldiers  to  the  town,  and  there 
found  the  general. 

03 


§  8. 


FORMS   OF    TENSES    FOR    COMPLETED   AC- 
TION, PASSIVE. 


LESSON  LXX. 

Tenses   of  Verbs  for   Completed  Action. — Indicative 
Passive, 

(431.)  The  tenses  for  completed  action,  passive 
{perfect,  pluperfect,  future  perfect),  are  compounded 
of  the  perfect  participle  passive  and  of  the  tenses  of 
the  verb  esse,  to  he:  thus,  amatus  sxxm^Ihave  been 
loved;  amatus  es,  thou  hast  been  loved,  &c. 

(432.)  {a)  The  perfect  participle  of  any  verb  is  the  form  of 
which  the  supine  is  the  accusative,  and  is  inflected  (like  an  ad- 
jective of  three  terminations)  with  the  endings  us,  a,  iim; 
thus  : 


^    Supines. 

Amat-iim, 

Perf.  Part 

amat-us,  a,  um, 

loved. 

M6nit-um, 

mom t- us,  a,  um, 

advised. 

Rect-um. 

rect-us,  a,  iim. 

ruled. 

Audit-um, 

audit- us,  ^,  iim. 

heard. 

(6)  The  perfect  participle,  then,  of  any  verb,  is  formed  by 
adding  the  inflection-endings  iis,  ft,  i&m  to  the  supine-stem. 


PERFECT  FORMS,  PASSIVE. 


163 


(433.) 


PARADIGM. 


PERFECT  PASSIVE.                                                                     ~1 

Smatus,  a,  um,  < 

Singular. 

sum,  I  have  been  loved. 
6s,  thou  hast  been  loved. 
est,  Jie,  she,  it,  has  been  loved. 

amati,  oe,  &,      } 

Plural. 

sumus,  we  have  been  loved. 
estis,  ye  or  you  have  been  loved. 
sunt,  they  Juwe  been  loved. 

PLUPERFECT.                                                                                   || 

amatus,  a,  um,  < 

S  ingular. 

gram,  /  had  be£n  loved. 
eras,  thou  hadst  been  loved. 
6rat,  Jie,  she,  it,  had  been  loved. 

amati,  oe,  a,       < 

Plural. 

eramus,  we  had  been  loved. 
gratis,  ye  or  you  had  been  loved. 
erant,  they  had  been  loved. 

FUTURE    PERFECT.                                                                      jl 

&matus,  5,  um,  < 

Singular. 

ero,  /  shall  have  been  loved. 
6ris,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved. 
erit,  he,  she,  it,  will  have  been  loved. 

amati,  86,  a,      J 

Plural. 

grimiis,  we  shall  have  been  loved. 
6ritis,  you  will  liave  been  loved. 
erunt,  they  will  have  been  loved. 

(434.)   Vocabulary, 

To  rout,  to  defeat,  pell6re  (p6p\il-, 

puis-,  411,  b). 
To  divulge,  enuntiare  (e+nuntiare, 

av-,  at-). 
Sure,  certain,  certus,  a,  um. 
To    drive    back,   repellgre   (rfipul-, 

repuls-,  re+pellere). 
Private  information,  indicium,  i. 

(435.)  Examples. 
(a)   To  inform  any  one. 


(6)  Ccesar  was  informed. 


(c)  All  Gaul  is  divided  into 
three  parts. 


Beginning",  mitium,  L 

Casticus,  Casticus,  i. 

Conference,  collSquium,  I. 

To  hold,  obtinerg  (obtinu-,  obtent-, 

ob+tenere). 
Departure,  discessus,  us. 
Nobility,  nobilitas,  (nobilitat)  is  (f., 

293). 


Aliquem  certiorSm  fa- 
cere  ( =  to  m/ike  any  one 
more  certain). 

Caesar  certior  factus 
est  ( =  Ceesar  was  made 
more  certain), 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa 
in  partes  tres. 


164  PERFECT  FORMS,  PASSIVE. 

The  perfect  passive  participle  is  sometimes  used  with  est  as  an  ad- 
jective, and  is  then  to  be  rendered  as  a  present  tense;  e.  g.,  in  (c),  est 
divisa  =  i 


(436.)   Translate  into  English. 

Miles  vulneratus  est. — Bella  gesta  erant. — Exercitus  Cassii 
ab  Helv6tiis  pulsus  6rat,  et  sub  jugum  missus  6rat. — Ea 
res  Helvetiis  (54)  per  indicium  enuntiata  est. — Helvetii  de 
Cassaris  adventu  certiores  facti  sunt. — IJbi  de  Caesaris  ad- 
ventu  Helvetii  certiores  facti  sunt,  legates  ad  eum  miserunt. 
— Barbari  telis  (93,  II.,  6,  E.)  et  munitione  re  puis  i  sunt. — 
Initium  fugse  a  Dumnorige  et  ejus  equitibus  factum  est. — 
Legati  a  Divitiaco,  JEduo  (225,  a)  ad  Csesarem  missi  erant. 
— Pater  Castici  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos  (191,  Rule) 
obtinuerat  et  a  senatu  populi  Romani  amicus  (80,  a)  appella- 
tus  erat. — Dies  coUoquio  (54)  const! tutus  est,  ex  eo  die 
quintus. 

(437.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  centurions  of  the  first  ranks  were  wounded  on  the  same 
day  (118,  II.,  c). — Caesar  was  informed  (435,  a)  of  (de)  the 
approach  of  the  enemy. — The  general  had  been  informed  of 
the  departure  (discessus)  of  the  Germans.—- The  beginning 
of  the  flight  had  been  made  by  the  soldiers  of  the  tenth  legion. 
— The  tenth  legion  had  been  defeated  by  the  Germans,  and  had 
been  sent  under  the  yoke. — The  conspiracy  of  the  nobility  was 
divulged  to  the  Helvetians  through  private-information. — The 
war  had  been  camed-on  (for)  many  years  (191,  Rule). — The 
enemy  were  driven-back  by  the  darts  of  the  soldiers. — Ambas- 
sadors were  sent  by  Cassius  the  consul  (225,  a)  to  the  chiefs. 
— The  JEduans  were  called  friends  (80,  a)  by  the  senate  of  the 
Roman  people. — The  townsmen  were  wounded  by  the  darts 
of  the  soldiers. — The  horsemen  of  the  enemy  were  driven-back 
by  the  darts  of  the  soldiers. — ^A  day  had  been  appointed  for  die 
conference. 


§9. 

PARTICIPLES.    (LXXI.— LXXV.) 

(438.)  The  Participle  presents  the  idea  of  the  verb 
under  the  form  of  an  adjective  :  {a)  the  rising  sun  ; 
{h)  I  saw  the  boy  writing  a  letter.  Sometimes,  as 
in  {a),  its  use  is  wholly  adjective  ;  again,  as  in  (6),  it 
governs  the  case  of  its  verb.  There  are  two  active 
participles  in  Latin,  the  participle  of  the  present  and 
the  participle  of  ihQ  future  ;  two  passive,  the  perfect 
and  the  verbal  in  dus. 


LESSON  LXXL 

Present  Participle  Active. 

(439.)  {a)  The  endings  of  the  present  participle  active  for 
the  four  conjugations  are, 

1.  2.  3.  4. 

-ans,  -ens,  ens,  -iens. 

(6)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stems  respectively  of  the 
verbs  a  m-are,  m  6  n-ere,  r  e  g-ere,  a  u  d-ire,  we  obtain  the 
present  participle  active : 

Loving^  advising,  ruling,  hearing. 

Am-ans,      mdn-ens,      rSg-ens,      aud-iens. 
(440.)  The  present  participle  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of 
the  third  class  (108). 

Singular.  Plural, 

N.  V.  Amans. 


N.  V.  Amantes,  ^mantia. 
Gen.     Amantiiim. 
Dat.      Amantabus,  &c. 
Rem.  The  abl.  sing,  ending  is  i  when  the  part,  is  used  strictly  as  an 
adj. ;  e.  ^.,  in  florenti  ros  a,  7*n  a  blvomiruc  rose. 


Gen.     Amantis. 
Dat.      Amanti,  &c. 


166 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  ACTIVE. 


(a)  Observe  cai*efully  that  the  Latin  present  pai-ticiple  ac- 
tive expresses  incomplete  or  continued  action ;  the  language  has 
no  active  participle  to  express  complete  action.  We  cannot 
translate  the  English  having  loved  by  any  Latin  active  parti- 
ciple. 

(b)  But  deponent  verbs  (206)  have  both  participles,  the  pres- 
ent  and  the  perfect ;  exhorting^  hort-ans;  having  exhorted, 
hort-atus. 


EXERCISE. 


(44 1 .)    Vocabulary. 


To  rise,  oriii  {dep.,  ort-). 

To  desire,  cup6re  (i6-,  iv-,  it-,  406, 

in.,  b). 

Labour,   toil,   labor,  (labor)  is   (m., 

319). 
Watchins^,  watchfulness,  vigilantia, 

ae. 
Especially,  proBsertim  (adv.). 
To  depart,  disceder6  (dis+cedere, 

401,  3,  b). 
To  weep,  fler6  (flev-,  flet-,  395,  II.). 
To  look  upon  or  at,  intueri  (dep.). 
All,  the  whole,  cunctras,  a,  um. 
To  worship,  adore,  adorare. 
Eye,  oculus,  i. 


A  Persian,  PersS,  ae. 

To  doubt,  diibitare  (av-,  at-). 

To  set  out,  prof  ids ci  [dep.,  prefect-). 

To  sit,  sedere  (sed-,  sess-,  394,  V.). 

Firmament,  heaven,  caelum,  L 

To  shine,  micare  (389,  f^). 

The  sun,  s5],  (sol)  is  (m.,  319). 

Full,  plenus,  a,  um  (with  gen). 

To  be  wanting,  de-esse  (with  dot.). 

Star,  Stella,  ae. 

To  set  [e.  g.,  as  the  heavenly  bod- 
ies), occidfire  (occid-,  occas-,  ob-f- 
caderS). 

To  throw  before,  projicerg  (jec-, 
ject-,  pro-f  jacere). 

(442.)  (a)  Recollect  that,  to  form  pres.  part,  act.,  you  add  to  the  stem 
ans  in  1st  conj. ;  e.  g.,  am-ans :  ens  in  2d  and  3d  conjs. ;  e.  g., 
mon-ens,  die-ens:  iens  in  4th  conj.;  e.g.,  aud-iens.  Also,  add 
iens  in  the  i6  verbs  (199)  of  3d  conj.;  e.  g.,  cup-io,  cup-iens; 
ftlc-io,  fac-iens. 
(b)  In  deponent  verbs,  the  same  rules  apply:  hort-p.ri,  hort-ans: 
6r-iri,  6r-iens;  intu-eri,  intu-ens,  &c.  The  perf.  act.  part, 
in  deponents  adds  us,  a,  um  to  the  supine-stem:  hort-ari, 
hortat-us,  &c. 

{c)  The  participle  is  used  to  abridge  discourse. 

(1)  He  heard  me  when  7C  He  heard  me  saying  that, 
said  that=  \  Me  iddicentem  audivit. 

(2)  God,  who  governs  all  C  God,  governing  all  thina^s. 
things=  ^  Deus,  omnia  gubern ans. 

(3)  To  him  thai  desires^  \  (The  man)  <fem»^. 
^  ,  I  Cupienti. 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  ACTIVE.  167 


(d)   He   threw   himself  atj 
Caesar's  feet,  J 


He  threw  himself  before  C(Bsar,  at 

his  feet. 
Se  Caesari  ad  pedes  projecit. 
(e)  Can  enim,  vero,  or  autem  stand  first  in  a  clause  or  sen- 
tence ?     (No.) 

(443.)   Translate  into  English. 

Me  id  dicentem  audivistine  ?  —  Persae  s5lem  6 rie li- 
tem (442,  c)  adorant. — Labienus,  sues  (his  men)  hortatus, 
ciipientibus  signum  dat. — Non  enim  labor  aut  vigilantia, 
ciipienti  praesertim  aliquid  (178,  5),  Cassio  deerat  (267,  b). 
— Caesar  ab  hibemis  in  Italiam  discedens,  legates  convocat. 
— Miilieres  flentes  sese  Caesari  (442,  d)  ad  pedes  projece- 
runt.— Nemo,  cunctam  i  n  t  u  e  n  s  teiTam,  de  divina  providen- 
tia  dubitabit.  —  Caesar,  in  Italiam  proficiscens,  legates 
omnes  ad  se  revocavit.  —  Divitiacus,  flens,  a  Caesare  haec 
(these  things)  petebat.  —  Cicero  Catonem  vidit  in  horto  se- 
dentem.  —  Quanta  (184,  R.  1)  est  sapientia  Dei,  omm& 
giibernantis  ? 

(444.)  Translate  into  Latin. 

[The  words  which  illustrate  the  lesson  are  in  Italic.] 
The  firmament  is  fuU  of  shining  (438,  a)  stars. — No  one, 
when  he  looks  at  (  =  looking,  442,  c,  1)  the  firmament  and  stars, 
will  doubt  respecting  (d  e)  the  wisdom  of  God. — Did  they  hear 
me  (135,  II.,  a)  when  I  said  (  =  saying)  that  (id)  ? — The  bar- 
barians were-worshipping  the  setting  sun. — Labienus,  having 
exhorted  (440,  h)  his  men,  made  an  attack  upon  the  enemy 
(in  hostes). — Caesar  willingly  gave  the  signal  to  the  soldiers 
when  they  desired  it  (  =  desiring). — To  him  that  desires  (  =  de- 
siring) anything,  no  labour  will-be-wanting  (267,  &). — -Caesar, 
departing  from  winter-quarters,  gives  rewards  to  the  soldiers. 
— The  eye,  not  seeing  itself  (se,  ace.),  sees  other-things 
(alia). — The  iEduans,  weeping,  threw  themselves  at  the  feet 
of  Caesar  (442,  d). — I  saw  my  brother  sitting  in  the  garden 
yesterday. — How-great  is  the  power  of  God,  who  governs 
(  =  governing)  the  world  ? 


168  PARTICIPLE  FUTURE  ACTIVE. 

LESSON  LXXII. 
Participle  Future  Active, 
(445.)  The  ending  of  the  future  participle  active  is 
urus,  which,  added  to  the  supine-stem^  forms  the 
participle  ;  e.  g,, 

About  to  love,        or    one  who  will  love,       amat-uriis. 
About  to  advise,    or    one  who  wiU  advise,   monit-urus. 

(446.)  PERIPHRASTIC   CONJUGATION 

The  different  tenses  of  e  s  s  e  (to  be),  joined  with  the  participle 
future  active,  form  what  is  called  the  periphrastic  conjugation* 

C  amaturiis  siim,  I  will  love,  am  about  to  love,  intend  to  love. 
Pres.  \  amaturus  es,  thou,  &c.,  &c. 

(      So  through  all  the  persons. 

C  amaturus  ^ram,  /  was  about  to  love,  intended  to  love,  &c. 
Past.  \  amaturiis  eras,  thou,  &c.,  &c. 

'      So  through  all  the  persons. 

f  amaturus  6ro,  /  shall  be  about  to  love,  shall  be  on  the  point  of  lov- 
ing, &c. 
amaturus  eris,  thou,  Sec,  &c. 

So  through  all  the  persons. 

EXERCISE. 

(447.)   Vocabulary. 

To  call  upon,  invdcare  (in+vocare, 

av-,  at-). 
To  collect  into  a  flock,  congregare 

(av-,  at-). 
Foreign,  aliSnus,  a,  ^m. 
To  procure,  comparSre  (ftv-,  at-,  con 

+parar»)- 
To  last,  durare  (durav,  durat).* 
To  implore,  implorare  (in+plorare, 

av-,  at-). 

(448.)  Example, 

The  Athenians  sent  ambas-  I  Athenienses  legates  miserunt, 
sadors  to  consult  the  oracle,  \      oraciilum  consulturos. 

*  Darare,  transitive,  =  to  harden ;  intrans.,  =  to  become  hard,  i.  e.,  to 
last. 
t  Transjicere,  transit.,  =  to  convey  aver;  intrans.,  =  to  cron  over. 


Alone,  solus,  S,  iim  (194,  1). 

To  cross  over,  trajicere  (trajec-,  trft- 
jeet-,  trans-f-jScere).]" 

Ammon,  a  surname  of  Jupiter,  Ham- 
m6n,  IS. 

To  behold,  spectare  (av-,  at). 

To  proceed,  perg6re  (perrex-,  per- 
rect-). 

To  consult,  consoldre  (consulu-,  con- 
sult-). 


PARTICIPLE  FUTURE  ACTIVE.  169 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  future  active  participle  is  used  after 
a  verb  of  motion  to  express  the  design  of  that  motion. 

(449.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  Aves,  in  alienas  terras  migraturae,  congregantur.— - 
Caesar,  in  Galliam  profecturus,  centuriones  convocat. — 
German!,  bellum  gesturi,  Deos  invocaverunt.  —  Sapiens 
bona  (  neut, pi.)  comparat  semper  duratura. 

2.  Periphrastic  Conjugation. — Caesar  de  quarta  vigilia  castra 
moturus  es  t. — S  cripturus  sum. — Dumnorix  imperium 
suae  civitatis  obtenturus  erat.  —  Imperator,  cum  sola 
decima  legione  profecturus  erat.  —  ^dui  auxilium  a 
l^opiilo  Romano  imploraturi  sunt.  —  German!  bellum 
gestur!  erant. 

3.  Future  Participle  used  to  express  a  purpose  (448). — Sc!pio 
in  Africam  trajecit,  Carthaginem  dele  turns. — Ingens  hom- 
inum  multitude  in  urbem  congregatur,  Itidos  spectatur a. — 
Alexander  in  Asiam  contendit,  regnum  Persarum  occupa- 
turus. — Alexander  ad  Jovem  Hammonem  pergit,  consul- 
t  u  r  u  s  de  origine  sua. 

(450.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  soldiers,  when-ahout-to-set-out  for  (in)  Spain,  called- 
upon  the  gods.  —  Many  (men)  have  procured  possessions 
(bona)  which-will-not-last  (  =  not  about-to-last). — The  gen- 
eral, when-about-to-cross  the  river,  sends-away  the  horse-sol- 
diers.— Caesar,  intending-to-send  a  messenger,  calls  together 
the  centurions. 

2.  Periphrastic  Conjugation. — Dumnorix  was  dbout'to-seize^ 
upon  the  royal-pow^er. — The  general  is  about-to-set-out  from  the 
camp  with  five  legions. — The  ^duans  are  about-to-carry-on  a 
fierce  war. — The  hostages  were  intending-to-implore  aid  from 
the  general. 

3.  Future  Participle  to  express  a  purpose. — ^The  ^duans 
sent  ambassadors  to-implore  help  from  Caesar. — The  enemy 
crossed  the  river  in-order-to-besiege  the  town. — The  men  flock 
(congregor)  from-every-side  to  the  town,  to-behold  the 
games. 

p 


170 


pMiJJb'i'  ^ARtictPLE  i^AssiVE. 


LESSON  LXXIII. 

Perfect  Participle  Passive. 
(451.)  {a)  The  perfect  passive  participle  is  formed  (as  stated 
432,  h)  by  adding  the  adjective-endings  us,  a,  iinai  to  the  su- 
pine-stem ;  e.  g.^ 

Inf.  Supine-stem.  Perf.  Part. 

gmare,       a m  a  t  -,       ft m  a  t  -  u  s,  ft,  u  m,     loved,  or  having  been  loved. 

C  conquered,    or   having   been 
vinc6re,     vict-,        vict-us,  ft,  urn,   ^      conquered. 

(6)  It  is  declined  throughout  like  an  adjective  of  the  first 
class  (76),  and  must  agree  with  the  substantive  in  gender,  num- 
her,  and  case  ;  e,  g.,  puer  laudatus,  puella  1  a u d a t a. 

(c)  The  deponent  verbs  use  the  perfect  participle  form  ac^ 
lively ;  e,  g,,  h  o  r  t  a  t  u  s,  having  exhorted, 

EXERCISE. 

(452.)   Vocabulary. 


Sudden,  rfipentmus,  a,  um. 
To  alarm,  perturbare  (av-,  at-). 
To  seize,  snatch  up,  arriperfi  (arrip- 

io,  arripu-,  arrept-,  ad-f-rapgrfi). 
Auxiliaries,  auxilift,  orum.* 
To  p7tt'to-Jlight,  discomfit,  f ugftre. 
To  drive-on  or  together,  compellgre 

(compul-,  compuls-,  con-f-pell6re). 
To  induce,   adducere   (dux-,  duct-, 

ad+duc6r6). 
Injluence,  auctoritas,  (auctorltat)  iS. 
To  prevail  upon,  perm6ver6  (mov-, 

mot-,  per-f-in6ver6,  i.  «„  to  move 

thor&ughl^), 

(453.)  Examples, 
(a)  At  Corinth. 

At  Rome. 

At  Carthage. 

At  Athens. 


A  wagon,  carrQs,  T. 

To  buy  up,  co6m6rS  (em-,  empt-, 

con-f-6m6re). 
Aristides,  Aristides  (Aristid)  is. 
Pharsalus,  Pharsalus,  i  (f.,  25,  a). 
To  depart-out-of,  excfidgrS  (excess-, 

excess-,  ex+ced6re). 
Rhetoric,  rhetoricft,  ae. 
To   expel,   expell6re    (expul-,   ex- 

puis-). 
To  stimulate,  indflcfirS  (dux-,  duct-). 
Strong-desire,    cupiditas,    (tat)    Dl 

(293). 


Corinthl. 
Romae. 
Carth&gind. 
Athenis. 


Rule  of  Syntax. — The  place  where  is  put  in  the  aUative, 
*Auxiliumin  fing.  =  aid,  aatiitance :  in  plur.  =  auxiliary  troops. 


PERFECT  PARTICIPLE  PASSIVE. 


171 


if  the  name  be  of  the  third  declension  or  plural  number ; 
otherwise  in  the  genitive. 


(h)   From  Rome. 
From  Carthage, 


Roma. 
Carthagin^. 


Rule  of  Syntax. — The  place  whence  is  put  in  the  ablative, 
(c)   To  Rome.  R  o  m  a  m. 

To  Athens.  A  t h  e  n  a  s. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  place  whither  is  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive if  it  be  a  town  or  small  island. 
Rem.  With  the  names  of  countries  or  large  islands,  the  prep,  in  or 
ad  is  employed:  to  Italy,  in  Italiam;  to  Egypt,  ad  iE  gyp  turn. 


{d)  The  soldiers^  having  been 
defeated,  took  to  flight. 
(Lat.  The  soldiers,  defeat- 
ed, threw  themselves  into 
flight.) 

(e)  The  chief,  when  he  was 
expelled  from  his  country, 
fled  to  Rome. 

(/)  As  large  a  number  as 
possible. 

{g)  A  sudden  occurrence. 


Milites,  pulsi,  in  fiigam  sd 
conjecerunt. 


Princeps,  patria  expulsfis, 
Komam  fugit. 

Quam  maximus    niimSr- 

us. 
Repenting  res. 


(454.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nostri  {our  men),  repentina  re  (55,  a)  perturbati,  arm& 
arripiunt. — Auxilia  perturbata,  in  fiigam  se  conjecerunt. — 
Milites  hostes  f  ii  g  a  t  o  s  in  flumen  compiilerunt. — Helvetii,  his 
rebus  adducti,  legates  ad  Csesarem  de  deditione  mittunt. — 
Galli,  his  rebus  adducti,  et  auctoritatS  Orgetorigis  per- 
moti,  jumentorum  et  carrorum  (juam  maximum  numSrum 
coemerunt. — Principes,  adventu  Romanorum  p  e  r  m  5 1  i,  lega- 
tes ad  Caesarem  de  deditione  mittunt. — Aristides,  patria  ex- 
pulsus,  Lacedaemonem  fugit. — Dionysius,  Syracusis  e  x  p  u  1- 
sus,  Corinthi  piieros  docebat. — Principes,  oppido  ex  pulsi, 
Romam  (453,  c)  venerunt — Legatus,  repentina  re  pertur- 
b  a  t  u  s,  centuriones  convocat. 

(455.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  Helvetians,  prevailed  upon  by  the  influence  of  Caesar, 
led  (their)  army  across  the  Rhine. — The  chiefs,  induced  by 


172  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

these  considerations  (=  things),  give  hostages  and  an  immense 
sum-of-money  to  tlie  lieutenant. — Pompey,  when  he  had  been 
defeated  {■=  defeated <,  453,  d)  ?it  Pharsalus,  fled  to  Alexandria. 
— Jugurtha,  when  he  was  expelled  from  Africa,  came  to  Rome. 
— The  soldiers,  alarmed  by  the  sudden  occurrence  (453,  g)^ 
take  to  flight  (453,  d). — For  (enim)  Pompey,  although-he-had- 
heen-defeated  (=r  defeated)  (in)  no  (nuUo)  battle,  departed-out- 
of  Italy.  —  Our  (men)  drove  on  the  alarmed  and  discomfited 
enemy  into  the  River  Rhine. — The  Helvetians,  induced  by 
these  considerations  (=  things),  bought-up  as  large  a  number  as 
possible  (453,  /)  of  horses  and  beasts-of-burden. — The  orator, 
having-been-exjpelledfrom  Athens,  taught  rhetoric  at  Carthage 
(453,  a,  R.). — The  general,  induced  by  these  considerations, 
gave  great  rewards  to  the  soldiers. — Orgetorix,  stimulated  by  a 
strong-desire  of  royal-power,  made  a  conspiracy  of  the  nobility. 


LESSON  LXXIV. 
Participles, — Ablative  Absolute, 

[The  ablative  absolute  is  a  very  important  part  of  Latin  construction, 
and  should  be  thoroughly  learned.] 

(456.)  The  participle  is  used  in  the  ablative  with  a 
noun^  "when  it  is  independent  of  the  subject  and  object 
of  the  sentence. 


(a)  When  Tarquin  was 
reigning,  Pythagoras 
came  into  Italy. 


Pythagoras,  Tarquinio 
regnant e,  in  Italiam  ve- 
nit. 


Here  Tarquin  is  independent  of  Pythagoras,  the  subject  of  the  sen- 
tence. 

(457.)  The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  in 
Latin  is  frequently  supplied  by  the  ablative  absolute 
with  a  passive  participle. 


(6)  Lahienus,  having  ta- 
ken possession  of  the 
mountain^  was  waiting 
for  our  men. 


Labienus,  montS  occupS.- 
1 6,  nostros  expectabat. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE.  173 

Here  it  would  be  impossible  to  say  Labjenus,  occupatas  mon- 
tem,  as  occupdtus  is  passive,  not  active. 

(458.)  A  noun  may  be  put  in  the  ablative  absolute 
with  another  noun  without  a  participle. 


(a)  In  the  pratorship  of  Cce- 
sar. 

(6)  In  the  consulship  of  Mar- 
cus Messala  and  Marcus 
Piso. 


Caesare  praetore  (=  Caesar 

being  praetor). 
M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisone 

consulibus(=  Messala  and 

Piso  being  consuls). 


[This  constraction  is  used  mostly  to  designate  the  time  of  an  event] 
EXERCISE. 

(459.)   Vocabulary. 


To  avail,  valerS  (vSlu-). 

Tiberius,  Tiberius  (i). 

To  die,  morlri  and  m6ri[  (mortu),  dep. 

A  pleading,  dictio,  (diction)  is  (333). 

Catiline,  Catilina,  se. 

Christ,  Christus,  i. 


To  finish,  perficere  (peH-facere, 
perf  ec-,  perfect-) ;  also,  conf  icSre 
(fee-,  feet-). 

To  reign,  regnare  (av-,  at-). 

Night,  nox,  (noct)  is  (294). 

Territories,  fines  (pi.  of  finis,  300). 

(460.)   Translate  into  English, 

Nihil  praecepta  valent,  nisi  adjiivante  natura  (456,  a). — 
Deo  jiivante,  facilis  est  labor. — Tiberio  regnante,  Chris- 
tus mortuus  est. — Concilio  dim  is  so,  principes  ad  Caesarem 
reverterunt. — Die  constituta  causae  dictionis,  Orgetorix  ad 
judicium  oranem  suam  familiam,  ad  hominum  millia  decem, 
undique  coegit. — Caesar,  opere  perfecto,  praesidia  disposuit. 
— Caesar,  hostibus  pulsis  (457,  b)  in  fines  ^duorum  perve- 
nit. — Caesar,  duobus  bellis  confectis,  in  hiberna  exerci- 
tum  duxit. — Bello  confecto,  principes  civitatum  ad  Caesa- 
rem, gratulatum  (379),  convenerunt.  —  Catilina,  Cicerone 
consule  (458),  conjurationem  fecit. — Natura  due 6,  nun- 
quam  errabimus.  —  Orgetorix,  Marco  Messala  et  Marco 
Pisone  consulibus,  conjurationem  nobiKtatis  fecit. 

(461.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Our  precepts  will  avail,  when  nature  assists  (=  nature  assist* 
ing). — JVhen  the  sun  rises  (=the  sun  rising),  the  night  flees. 
— When  the  council  was  dismissed  (=the  council  being  dis- 
missed), the  chiefs  began  to  beseech  Caesar. —  When  the  coun- 
cil was  dismissed^  Caesar  called  the  lieutenants  to  himself.— 
P2 


174  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

CaBsar,  when  the  worlc  was  finished  {=the  work  being  finished), 
fortified  the  towers. — Caesar,  having  defeated  Pompey  (=Pom' 
pey  being  defeated),  returned  to  Rome. — Caesar,  having  finish- 
ed the  war,  led-back  his  army  into  the  territories  of  the  Mdu- 
ans. — In  the  consulship  of  Cicero,  Catiline  was  expelled  from 
Rome. — When  God  assists  (=God  assisting),  it  is  not  difficult 
to  labour. — With  God  for  our  guide  (=  God  leader),  we  shall 
never  err. 


LESSON  LXXV. 

Ablative  Absolute,  continued, 

EXERCISE. 

(462.)   Vocabulary. 


Phalanx,  phalanx,  (phSlang)  is  (293). 
To  hinder,  prohibere  (hibu-,  hibit-, 

pro+habere). 
Cnceus  Pompey,  CncBus  Pompeius. 
Of  one's  own  accord,  ultro  (adv.). 
To  change,  commutare  (av-,  it-) 
To  be  born,  nasci  (natus),  dep. 
Senate-house,  curia,  ae. 
Augustus,  Augfustus,  i. 


To  abstain  from,  abstinere  (absti- 

nu-,  abstent-,   abs+tenere),  with 

abl. 
A  plan,  purpose,  consilitim,  i  (not 

concilium). 
To  harass,  lacessere   (iv-,  it-,  406, 

III.,  b). 
From  higher  ground,  e  loco  siipe- 

riore. 
A  dart,  pilum,  i. 

(463.)   Translate  into  English, 

Labienus,  monte  occupato,  nostros  expectabat,  praelioque 
abstlnebat. — Barbari,  consilio  commutato,  nostros  lacessere 
coeperunt. — Milites,  e  loco  siiperiore  pilis  missis,  facile  hos- 
tium  phalangem  perfregerunt  (416,  b). — Cognito  Caesaris  ad- 
ventu,  Ariovistus  legates  ad  eum  mittit. — Cnoeo  Pompeio 
at  Marco  Crasso  consiilibus,  German!  flumen  Rhenum 
transiverunt. — Nullo  hoste  prohibente,  Crassus  legionem 
in  Helv^tios  perduxit,  ibique  hiemavit. — His  rebus  cog nitis, 
imperator  ipse  ad  exercitum  contendit. — Hac  audita  pugn a, 
magna  pars  Aquitaniae  obsides  ultro  misit. — ^Belgae,  omnibus 
vicis  oppidisqu©  incensis,  ad  castrd  CaesS-ris  contendS- 
runt. — ^Axigusto  regnante,  Christus  natus  est. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE.  175 

(464.)    Translate  into  Latin. 

The  barbarians,  having  changed  tJieir  plan  ( =  plan  being 
changed),  made  an  attack  upon  our  men. — The  soldiers,  hav- 
in g -broken- through  the  phalanx^  began  to  harass  the  enemy. — 
The  Belgians,  having  heard  of  this  battle,  sent  ambassadors  to 
Caesar. — The  soldiers,  having  taken-possession-of  the  mountain^ 
easily  put  tlie  enemy  to  flight  (391,  3). — Cicero,  when  he  knew 
of  the  conspiracy,  went  to  the  Senate-house. — As  7io  enemy 
hindered  (=no  enemy  hindering),  the  lieutenant  led  the  army 
across  the  Rhine. —  When  this  battle  was  heard  (of),  the  Bel- 
gians, of-their-own-accord,  sent  hostages  and  ambassadors  to 
Caesar. — In  the  consulship  of  Cicero  and  Antony,  Augustus 
was  bom. 


'.'i 


§  10. 
INFINITIVE.— (LXXVI.—LXXIX.) 

LESSON   LXXVI. 
Infinitive  Forms. 
(465.)  The  infinitive  expresses  action  as  completed 
or  incomplete,  but  without  reference  to  person  or 
time ;  e.  g,, 

ACTIVE. 

to  lovCi  or  to  ht  loving,  loving^ 
am-are. 


Action  Incomplete, 
(Inf.  Pros.  Act.) 

Action  Completed, 
(Inf.  Perf.  Act.) 


{to  have  loved, 
amav-iss6. 

PASSIVE. 

!to  he  loved, 
am-ari. 
{to  have  he  en  loved, 
amatiis,  a,  um,  esse  orfuisse. 

\Rem.  The  names  present  and  perfect  do  not  distinguish  properly  the 
two  forms  of  the  infinitive,  but,  as  they  are  in  imiversal  use,  we 
have  to  adopt  them.  The  student  must  remember  that  the  present 
expresses  action  incomplete,  and  the  perfect  action  complete ;  but 
tiiat  the  time  of  the  action  must  depend  upon  the  verb  with  which 
the  infinitive  is  connected  in  the  sentence.] 

(466.)  FORMS   OF   THE  INFINITIVE. 


Action  Incomplete, 
(Inf.  Pres.  Pass.) 

Action  Completed, 
(Inf.  Perf.  Pass.) 


PRESENT. 

PERFECT.                                                    1 

Active. 

Passive. 

Active. 

Passive. 

1.  am-are. 

2.  mon-ere. 

3.  reg-ere. 

4.  aud-ir6. 

am-ari. 
m6n-6ri. 
reg-i. 
audiri. 

amav-  ^ 
audiv-j 

amatus,  a,  iim,  "^ 
auditus,  a,  um,  J 

Rem.  Observe  that  perf.  inf.  act.  simply  adds  the  ending  -Tss6  to 
the  perf. -stem  of  the  verb ;  and  perf.  inf.  pass,  is  formed  by  the 
perf.  pass.  part,  of  the  verb,  combined  with  essd  (sometimes 
faissS). 


INFINITIVE. 


177 


EXERCISE. 

(467.)  Vocabulary. 

Tt)  lay  waste,  vastftre  (av-,  at-). 
Ought,  debere  (debu-,  debit-). 
To  be  vacant,  vScare  (intransit.). 
/  am  able,   possum ;  /  was  able, 
pdtui. 

(468.)  Examples. 

(a)  I  wish  to  learn. 
The  enemy  began  to  cross 
the  river. 


Peace,  pax,  (pac)  is  (293). 
A  very  few,  perpanci,  ae,  a. 
Evil  deed,  mal6f  icium,  i. 
To  break  through,  perrompere  (per- 
rap-,  perrupt-). 


Ciipio  d  i  s  c  e  r  e. 
Hostes  flumen  transire  coe- 
perunt. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  infinitive  is  used,  as  in  English, 
to  complete  the  imperfect  ideas  expressed  by  many 
words. 

S^  Such  words  are,  to  wish,  to  be  able,  ought,  to  be  accustomed,  to 
hapten,  to  determine,  &c.;  also,  the  adjectives  dignus,  indignus, 
audax,  &c. 


{h)  The  Helvetians  intend. 


Helvetiis  est  in  animo  (=  it  is 
in  mind  to  the  Helvetians). 

Nonnunquam  interdiu,  sae- 
piiis  noctu. 

Itinere  prohibere  (153,  a). 

In  conspectu. 


(c)  Sometimes  by  day,  often- 
er  by  night. 

(d)  To  keep-off-from  the  road. 

(e)  In  sight  of. 

(469.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  in  Gallia  hie  mare  const!  tuit. — ^dui  se  suaque  ab 
Helvetiis  defend^re  non  potuerimt.  —  Agri  vastari  non 
debent. — Hostes  per  munitiones  perrump^re  conati  sunt. 
— Agri  Suevorum  v  a  c  a  r  e  dicuntur. — Milites  incolas  expel- 
16 re  non  potuerunt.  —  Multitudo  puerorum  miiliSrumque 
f  ii  g  6  r  e  coepit. — Helve tii  maximum  niimerum  jumentorum  et 
carrorum  c  o  e  m  e  r  e  constituerunt.  —  Germani  copias  suas 
Rhenum  transducere  conati  sunt. — Helvetii  cum  proximis 
civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare  constituerunt. 

(470.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Place  the  infinitive  before  the  verb  on  which  it  depends.] 
Our  towns  ought  not  to-be-taken-by-storm. — In  sight  of  our 
army,  the  fields  ought  not  to  be  laid-waste. — The  enemy  en- 
deavoured sometimes-during-the-day,  oftener  by-night,  to  burst- 


178  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 

through  the  fortifications. — The  JEduans  were  not  able  to  expel 
the  enemy  from  (their)  territories  (153,  a).  On  one  side,*  the 
lands  are  said  to  be  vacant. — The  boys  and  the  women  began 
to  fly-in-every-direction  (passim,  adv). — The  Helvetians  intend 
to  make  (their)  way  through  our  province. — A  very  few  are 
able  to  keep-off  the  Helvetians  from  the  road. — The  Helvetians 
ought  to  cross-over  without  any  (uUo)  evil-deed. — The  remain- 
ing multitude  of  boys  and  women  began  to  fly  in-e very-direc- 
tion. 


LESSON  LXXVII. 

Accusative  with  Infinitive. 

(471.)  Verbs  signifying  ^o  know,  to  see,  to  feel,  to 
think,  to  say,  with  some  others,  have  frequently  a 
sentence  depending  on  them,  the  subject  of  w^hich  is 
in  the  accusative,  and  the  verb  in  the  infinitive, 

Hesawihatwarwasjprepa-\  Undique  bellum  parari  vi- 
ring  on  all  sides.  |      debat. 

Here  bellum,  the  subject,  is  accusative  before  the  infinitive  parari, 
after  the  verb  videbat,  /^e  saw. 

(472.)  Many  dependent  sentences  which  are  introduced  in 
English  by  the  conjunction  that,  are  expressed  in  Latin  by  the 
accusative  and  infinitive.  To  translate  such  sentences  into 
Latin,  observe  the  following  method : 

1.  Omit  the  word  that. 

2.  Change  the  nominative  following  that  into  the  Latin 
accusative. 

3.  Change  the  English  verb  into  the  Latin  infinitive. 


The  messenger  says  that 
the  horsemen  are  hurling 
darts. 


Nuntius    dicit,    equites    tela 
conjicfire. 


(473.)  If  the  predicate  of  the  sentence  containing  the  accu- 
sative and  infinitive  be  an  adjective,  it  must  agree  with  the 
accusative  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

*  Una  €x  parts. 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 


ITO 


He  knows  that  Cicero  is  elo- 
quent. 

I  perceive  that  the  water  is 
cold. 


Scit   Cic^ronem   ess$  el6- 

quentem. 
Sentio    aquam    frigidam 

esse. 


EXERCISE. 

(474.)    Vocabulary. 


To  think  J  existimare  (av-,  at-). 

To  encamp^  considere  (consed-,  con- 

sess-,  conH-sid6re). 
To  knmo,  scire  (sciv-,  scIt-). 
Stone,  lapis,  (lapid)  fa  (m.). 
Nearer,  propius  (adv.,  376). 

(475.)  Examples, 

(a)  The  messenger  says  that 
the  horsemen  are  hurl- 
in  g  darts. 

(6)  The  messenger  said  that 
the  horsemen  i£7 ere  hurl- 
ing darts. 

(c)  The  messenger  said  that 
the  horsemen  had  hurl- 
ed darts. 

(d)  Word  is  brought  to  Cce- 
sar, 

(c)    To  have  about  himself. 

(476.)    Translate  into  English. 

Helve tii  existimant,  Romanes  discedere. — Explorator 
dixit,  hostes  consediss  e. — Caesar  scit,  Dumnorigem 
f&yere  Helvetiis. — Helvetii  dicunt,  se  cm  nam  se  Da- 
tum a  m  i  s  i  s  s  e. — Csesari  nuntiatum  est,  m  i  li  t  e  s  magnitu- 
dinem  sylvarum  time  re.  —  Nuntius  dixit,  equites  tela 
conjicer e. — Galba  certior  factus  est,  G a  1 1  o s  omnes  d i s- 
cessisse.  —  Exploratores  dicunt,  oppidum  ab  hostibus 
t  e  n  e  r  i. — Dum  haec  in  coUoquio  geruntur,  Caesari  nuntiatum 
est,  equites  Ariovisti  propius  accedere,  et  lapides  telaque 
in  nostros  conjicer e. 

[Be  careful,  in  translating  the  following  English  into  Latin,  to  write 
tirst  the  leading  sentence,  and  after  it  the  accusative  and  the  infin- 
itive, observing  the  rules  in  (472),  and  j^Upwipp  |he  order  of  wordf 
in  the  exwnples  given  above.] 


To  favour,  favere  (fav-,  faut-,  395, 

v.),  (governs  dot.). 
While,  dum  (adv.). 
To  lose,  amittdre  (a+mittere,  401, 


Nuntius   dicit    Equites    telS, 
conjic6re. 

Nuntius   dixit    equites    tel& 
conjicere. 

Nuntius    dixit    Equites    tel& 
conj  ecisse. 

Caes§,ri  nuntiatum  est  (=ii  is 

told  to  Ccesar). 
Circum  se  h&bere. 


180  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 

(477.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  knows  that  this  (thing)  is  true  (473).  —  The  scouts 
say  that  the  horsemen  of  Ariovistus  are  approaching  (475,  a). 
— The  ambassadors  said  that  the  Helvetians  had  lost  all  their 
cavahy  and  all  their  senate. — Word  was  brought  to  Caesar 
that  the  horsemen  of  Ariovistus  were  hurling  stones  against 
(in,  luith  accus.)  our  (men). — Word-was-brought  to  Caesar 
that  Ariovistus  had-departed  from  the  camp. — Caesar  was  in- 
formed by  the  scouts  that  the  enemy  had  encamped  under 
(s  ii  b,  with  ahl.)  the  mountain. — The  lieutenant  says  that  the 
mountain  is  held  by  the  enemy. — The  general  thinks  that  our 
plans  are  told  to  the  enemy. — ^Word  was  brought  to  the  gen- 
eral that  all  the  Gauls  had  departed  by  night. — The  chiefs  say 
that  Divitiacus  always  has  a  great  number  of  horse-soldiers 
about  himself. 


LESSON  LXXVIII. 
Accusative  with  Infinitive. — Perfect  Infinitive  Passive. 

(478.)  It  has  been  stated  (466,  R.)  that  the  perfect  infinitive 
passive  is  formed  by  the  perfect  participle  passive,  combined 
with  esse  (sometimes  fuisse). 

When  the  accusative  is  used  with  this  infinitive,  the  participle 
must  agree  with  the  accusative  in  gender^  number,  and  case ; 


(a)  The  messenger  says  that 
the  u^duans  have  heen 
conquered. 

(b)  Ariovistus  said  that  all 
the  forces  had  been  routed 
in  one  battle. 

(c)  The  horsemen  brought- 
back-word  that  the  town 
had  been  talc  en-by-storm. 


Nuntius  dicit,  -^duos  victos 
esse. 

Ariovistus  dixit,  omnes  c6- 

pias  tino  praeliofusas 

esse. 
Equites    r^nuntiavgrunt,    op- 

pidum       expugnatum 

esse. 


1^*  Observe  that  in  [a)  the  part,  victos  agrees  with  the  accus.  jE  d u  o  s ; 
in  {b),  fusas  with  cOpias  ;  in  (c),  expugnatum  with  oppidum. 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE.  181 

EXERCISE. 


(479.)   Vocabulary. 

Tojind-out,  rgpgrire  (427,  V.). 

To  frighten  completely,  perterrere 

(perterru-,   perterrit-,  per+ter- 

rere). 
Trihylary,  stipendiarius,  a,  um. 
To  bring  back  word,  renuntifire  (av-, 

at-). 


To  rout,  fnndere  (fud-,  fus-,  416,  a) 
To  oi^ercome,  superare  (av-,  at-). 
Bond,  chain,  vinculum,  i. 
To  hold  in  iTtemory,  to  remembert 

memoria  ten  ere. 
To  put  (or  cast)  in  chains,  in  vincu- 

la  conjicere. 


(480.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  reperiebat  initium  fugae  a  Dumnorige  factum  esse. 
— Imperator  dixit,  equitatum  esse  perterritu m. — Caesar 
memoria  tenebat,  L.  Cassium  consulem  occisum  esse  ab 
Helvetiis.  —  Ariovistus  dicit,  JEduos  sibi  (54),  stipendiarios 
ess'e  factos.  —  Csesar  certior  factus  est,  legates  in  vinciila 
conjectos  esse.  —  Equites  renuntiaverunt,  castra  esse 
m  u  n i  t a. — Dixit  bella  gesta  ess e. — Reperiebat  etiam  Cae- 
sar, initium  fugae  a  Dumnorige  atque  ejus  equitibus  factum 
esse;  eorumque  fuga  (55,  a)  reliquum  equitatum  perter- 
ritum  esse.  —  Ariovistus  dixit  omnes  Gallorum  copias  tino 
abs  se  praelio  (55,  a),  fusas  ac  superatas  esse. 

(481.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  found-out  that  the  cavaby  had  been  completely-fright- 
ened by  the  flight  of  Dumnorix. — The  iEduans  say  that  they 
(s  e)  have  been  routed  by  the  Germans. — Caesar  remembered 
(=  held  in  memory)  that  the  consul's  army  had  been  defeated 
by  the  Helvetians. — Caesar  remembered  that  the  consul  had 
been  slain,  and  his  (ejus)  army  sent  under  the  yoke  (323,  N.). 
—Caesar  was  informed  by  the  chiefs  that  hostages  had  been 
given. — The  lieutenant  said  that  the  ambassador  had  been  cast 
into  chains. — Ariovistus  said  that  all  the  forces  had  been  over- 
come by  himself. — Ariovistus  said  that  the  Gauls  had  been 
overcome  by  himself  in  one  battle. — The  JEduans  say  that  they 
(s  e)  have  been  made  tributary  to  Ariovistus  {dat,). 

Q 


182  INFINITIVE  FUTURE. 

LESSON  LXXIX. 
Infinitive  Future  Active  and  Passive, 

(482.)  By  the  combination  of  the  future  participle 
active  with  esse  (or  f  u  i  s  s  e),  an  infinitive  future 
active  is  formed  ;  e.  g.<, 
a  m  a  t  u  r  ii  s,  a,  ii  m,  e  s  s  6,  tohe  about  to  love^  to  intend  loving. 

^  (to  have  been  about  to  love,  to 

amaturus,  a,  um,  fiiisse,  {      ,         ..     j  j  i    • 

'    '        *  (      have  tntended  loving, 

(483.)  Finally,  by  combining  the  supine  with  the 
verb  iri,*  we  form  the  infinitive  future  passive ;  e,g,, 

amatum  iri,   to  he  about  to  be  loved, 
d  o  c  t  u  m  i  r  i,     to  be  about  to  be  taught. 

Rem.  1.  This  form,  being  derived  from  the  supine,  is  applied  alike  to 

nouns  of  all  genders  and  of  both  numbers. 
2.  As  there  is  no  future  injinitive  in  English,  we  must  translate  the 

Latin  Ji/^wrc  injinitive  by  a  periphrasis,  as  above. 


EXERCISE 

(484.)   Vocabulary, 

To  persuade^  persuadere  (per-f-sua- 
dere,  suas-,  suas-) ;  governs  dot. 

To  refrain,  tempSrare  (av-,  at-,  fol- 
lowed by  ab  with  abl^. 

To  neglect,  neglTgere  (ngglex-,  neg- 
lect-, nec+l6g6re). 

To  compel,  c6g6re  (coeg-,  coact-, 
c6n+ag6re). 

(484,  a,)  Example, 

The  general  said  that  he 
would  come  vAth  the  tenth 
legion  alone. 

Rem.  The  e  s  s  6  in  the  future  infinitive  is  frequently  omitted ;  e.  g., 
in  the  above,  venturura. 


To  restore,  reddere  (reddid-,  reddJt-, 

r6+dftre,  411,  c). 
Unfriendly,   Tnimicus,   a,  urn    (In+ 

amicus). 
To  demand-hack,  rfipetSre  (repStiv-, 

r6p6tit-,  re+p6t6re). 
To  r^use,  r^cusare  (av-,  at-). 


ImpSrator  dixit  s6   cum   sola 
dScima  legione  venturum. 


*  Iri  is  the  infinitive  passive  form  of  the  verb  \x^,to  go.    It  is  not  in 
use,  except  in  combination  as  above. 


INFINITIVE  FUTURE.  183 

(485.)   Translate  into  English. 

Future  Infinitive  Active. 

Dumnorix  existimat  se  regnum  obtenturum  esse. — 
Helvetii  existimabant  se  finitimis  (daU)  p  ersuas  uros. — 
Caesar  existimabat,  finitimos  tenaperaturos  ab  injuria. — 
Caesar  dicit,  se  ^duorum  injurias  non  n  e glee tu rum. — 
Helvetii  existimabant,  se  iEduos  vi  (301)  coacturos. 
—  Ariovistus  dixit,  -iEduis  (54)  se  obsides  redditurum 
ess  e. — Caesar  dicit  se,  proxima  nocte  (118,  II.,  c),  de  quarta 
vigilia,  castrS.  moturum. — ^Imperator,  homines  inimico  ammo 
(428,  a)  temp6raturos  ab  injuria  et  maleficio,  non  existi- 
mabat. 

(486.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Future  Infinitive  Active. 

CiEsar  said  that  he  would  move  his  camp. — Dumnorix  thought 
that  he  would-hold  the  militaiy-command  of  his  own  state. — 
The  general  says  that  he  is-about- to-demand-back  the  host- 
ages.— The  iEduans  say  that  they-are-about-to-implore  assist- 
ance from  (a)  the  Roman  people. — Dumnorix  assures  (them) 
that  he  is-about-to-seize  the  royal-power  with  his  own  (suo) 
army. — Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  restore  the  hostages. 
— Caesar  did  not  think  that  the  allies  would-refrain  from  injury. 
— Caesai-  thought  that  he  would-compel  the  Germans  by  force. 
— Ariovistus  said  that  he  would-refuse  the  friendship  of  the 
Koman  people. 


§  11. 

THE  GERUND. 

LESSON  LXXX. 

(487.)  (a)  The  gerund  expresses  the  action  of  the 
verb  under  the  form  of  a  noun  of  the  second  declen- 
sion, in  the  genitive,  dative,  accusative,  and  ablative 
cases  (i,  o,  ii  m,  6). 

(b)  The  gerund-stem  is  formed  by  adding  to  the 
verb-stem, 

In  the  1st  conjugation^     -and;     e,  g.,     a  m  -  a  n  d  -. 
*'      2d  **  -end;     e.g.,     mon-end-. 

"      3d  "  -end;     e.  g-.,     reg-end-. 

"      4th         "  -lend;*  6.  ^.,     aud-iend-. 

(c)  The  gerund  of  any  case  is  formed  by  annexing  the  case- 
ending  to  the  gerund-stem;  e.  g.,  gen.,  araand-i;  dat., 
amand-o;  «cc.,  amand-um ;  abZ.,  amand-o. 

(488.)  As  the  infinitive  is  used  as  a  verbal  noun  in  the  nomi- 
native and  accusative  cases,  so  the  gerund  is  used  in  the  re- 
maining cases ;  e.  g., 

Nom.     Scriber^,  writing. 

Gen.      Scribendi,  ofurriting. 

Dat.       Scribendo,  to  or  for  writing. 

.  i  Scribere,  ) 

Ace.  <  -,       _ ,         -  „        >  writing. 
(bcribendum,  )  ° 

Abl.       Scribendo,  with  writing. 

(489.)  The  rules  for  the  us^e  of  the  cases  of  nouns  apply  also 
to  the  cases  of  the  infinitive  and  gerund  ;  e,  g., 
Nom.      Writing  is  useful,  scribere  est  utile. 

n  rm,        *    J-      w       '         /•  7   (  ars  scribendi  est  uti- 

Gen.       The  art  of  writing  is  useful,  < 

*  Also  in  the  io  verbs  (199) ;  e.  g.,  cap-io,  cftp-iendT. 


THE  GERUND. 


185 


Dat,       Paper  is  tisefulfor  writing,  < 


charta  scribendo  est 

titalis. 
scribe  re  disco. 

ter    scribenduin 

disco, 
scribendo  discimus. 


)  sc 

r 


^  I  learn  writing, 
Ace.   <  I  learn  during  writing, 

Abl.        We  learn  hy  writing, 

Rem.  With  a  preposition,  the  accusative  gerund  must  be  used,  and 
not  the  infinitive  ;  a d  (inter,  ob)  scribendum,  not  a d  (inter,  ob) 
scribSre. 

(490.)  The  gerund  governs  the  same  case  as  the  verb  from 
which  it  is  derived  -,  e.  g.. 


The  art  of  training  hoys  is 
difficult. 


Ars     p  u  e  r  o  s 
difFicilis  est. 


ediioandi 


EXERCISE. 


To  deliberate^  deliberftre  (ftv-,  at-). 
To  take,  sumSre  (sumps-,  sumpt-). 
Agriculture,  Sgricultura,  bb. 
Desire,  studium,  i. 
Life,  age,  aetas,  (setftt)  is  (293). 
Mind,  mens,  (ment)  is  (355,  11.,  L) 


(491.)   Vocabulary. 

To  make  war,  bellare  (av-,  at-). 

To  plunder,  to  obtain-booty,  praedftri 

(praedat-),  dep. 
Wearied,  defessus,  S,  um. 
Sufficiently,  satis. 
To  think,  cogitare. 
Opportunity,  time  for,  spatium,  i. 

(492.)  Examples. 

(a)   Time    was    given  for  SpS,tium     armS.     c&piendi 

(=  opportunity  w^as  given  datum  est. 

of)  taJcing-up  arms, 

(h)  For  the  sake  of  collect-  Frumentandi   causa   (a&- 

ing'Corn.  lot.). 

(493.)   Translate  into  English. 

Spes  praedandi  homines  ab  agricultura  revocabat. — Spa- 
tium defessis  ex  pugna  excedendi  non  datum  est. — Br^ve 
tempus  setatis  satis  est  longum  ad  bene  beateque  vivendum. 
— Hominis  mens  discendo  ^Ktur.— Pars  equitatiis,  p r se  - 
d  a n d i  causa,  missa  est. — Nox  f inem  oppugnandi  fecit.- — 
Magna  pars  equitatiis,  frumentandi  causa,  missa  erat. — 
Cognoverat  enim  Caesar,  magnam  partem  equitatiis,  praedandi 
frumentandi  que  causa,  trans  Rhenum  missam  fuisse  (471). 
Q  2 


186  GERUND. 

— Imp^rator  diem  ad  deliberandum  sumit.  —  ImpSrator 
dixit,  se  diem  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum  (484,  a). — 
Spes  praedandi,  stiidiumque  bellandi  incolas  ab  §,gricul- 
tura  et  labore  revocabat. — D  6  c  e  n  d  o  docemur. 

(494.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  desire  of  plundering  and  maJcing-war  has  recalled  the 
farmers  from  (their)  fields. — Time  for  (492,  a)  hurling  the 
darts  was  not  given  to  the  soldiers. — Time  for  (of)  fighting 
was  not  given  to  the  horsemen. — The  horsemen  were  sent  into 
the  territories  of  the  ^Eduans  for  the  sake  of -collecting-corn. — 
The  mind  of  man  is  nourished  hy  thinking. — Time  for  depart- 
ing-out-of  the  town  was  not  given  to  the  wearied  citizens. — 
The  citizens  ask  time  for  (of)  deliberating. — ^Wisdom  is  the 
art  of  living  well. — Caesar  recalled  the  tenth  legion  into  Gaul, 
for-the-sake-of  wintering. — We  learn  by  teaching. — Oppor- 
tunity of  attacking  the  town  was  not  given  to  the  soldiers, 
though  they  desired  it  (=  desiring  it). 


§  12. 

THE  GERUNDIVE,  OR  VERBAL  ADJECTIVE 
IN  DUS,  DA,  DtJM. 


(495.)  (a)  The  gerundive  expresses  the  action  of 
the  verb  (generally  vi^ith  the  additional  idea  of  ne- 
cessity or  continuance)  under  the  form  of  an  adjec- 
tive of  the^rs^  class  (76). 

(b)  The  gerundive-stem  is  precisely  the  same  as 

the  gerund-stem.     The  cases  are  formed  by  adding 

the  endings  of  the  adjective  ;  e.  ^., 

N.  &mand-us,  ft,  iim. 
G.  amand-i,  ae,  i,  &c., 

and  so  through  all  cases  and  both  numbers. 


LESSON  LXXXL 
TJie  Gerundive  used  instead  of  the  Gerund, 
(496.)  The  gerundive  is  used  (to  express  contin- 
ued action)  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the 
noun,  instead  of  the  gerund  governing  the  noun ;  e.  g,, 


Gen.  Ofioriting  a  letter. 


Dat.  To  or  for  toriting  let- 
ters. 

Ace.   To  write  a  letter. 


Abl.  By  writing  a  letter. 


Scribendae  epistolae,  in- 
stead ofscribendi  6pis- 
t5]am. 

ScribendisSpistSlis,  in- 
stead of  s  crib  en  do  ^pis- 
tolas. 

Ad  scribendam  ^pisto- 
1am,  instead  of  ad  scri- 
bendum  fipistolam. 

Scribenda  6pist6la,  in- 
stead of  scribendo  Spis- 
tdlam. 


188 


GERUNDIVE. 


Rem.  The  gerundive  must  be  used  for  the  dative  or  accusative  of  the 
gerund  when  it  has  an  active  government.  It  may  be  used  for  it 
in  any  other  case,  u  n  1  e  s  s  the  object  of  the  gerund  is  a  neuter  ad- 
jective or  pronoun  ;  e.  g.,  of  learning  the  true  =  vera  discendi, 
not  verorum  discendorum ;  of  hearing  this,  hoc  audiendi,  not 
hujus  audiendi. 


EXERCISE. 

(497.)   Vocabulary. 

To  choose,  deligSre  (deleg-,  delect-, 

de+legere). 
To  pursue,  consequi  (consecut),  dep. 
To  fail,  to  be  insufficient,  deficere 

(defec-,  defect-,  de-ff  acere). 
To  form  a  design,  consilium  cap6re 

(io). 
Space-oftwo-years,  biemiium,  i. 

(498.)  Examples. 

{a)  The  Helvetians  reckoned 
that  the  space-of-two-years 
was  enough  for  themselves. 

(h)  The  space  of  three-days. 

(c)  The  house  was  given  to 
the  rohhers  to  plunder. 

The  farmer  gave  his  house 
to  the  robbers  to  plunder. 


To    reckon,    deem,    duc6re    (dux-, 

duct-). 
To  discern,  cemere  (406,  CI.  III.,  a). 
Care,  cura,  oe. 
To  apyply,  adhibere  (adhibu-,  adhib- 

It-). 
Negligent,  negligens,  (negligent)  is 

(107). 

Helvetii     biennium     sibi 
satis  esse  duxerunt. 

Tridui  spatium. 
Doraus  latrombus  diripien- 

d  a  data  est. 
Agiicola     domum     latrombus 

diripiendam  d^dit. 

It^  After  verbs  of  giving,  going,  sending,  receiving,  and  the 
like,  the  gerundive  expresses  a  purpose  or  object. 

{d)  For  completing  {^fin-  I  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas. 
ishing)  these  things.  \ 

(499.)   Translate  into  English. 

Urbs  a  duce  militibus  diripienda  dS,ta  est. — Urbem  dux 
militibus  diripiendam  dedit. — Subito  Galli  consilium  belli 
gerendi  ceperunt.  —  Subito  Galli  legionis  oppugnandae 
consilium  ceperant.  —  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas  Orgetorix 
deligitur. — Helvetii,  ad  eas  res  conficiendas,  biennium  sibi 
satis  esse  duxerunt. — Crassus  legates  tribunosque  militum  in 
f initimas  civitates  friimenti  petendi  causa  dimisit. — Plato 
Komam  (453,  c)ad  cognoscendas  Numae  leges  contendit. 
—In  voluptate  spernenda  virtus  maxime  cemitur. — Multi. 


GERUNDIVE.  189 

in  Squis  pS,randis,  adhibent  curam,  sed  in  Smicis  deli- 
gendis  negKgentes  sunt. — Milites,  ad  urbem  expugnan- 
d  a  m,  tridui  spatium  sibi  satis  esse  duxerunt. 

(500.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

For  completing  these  things  (498,  d)  Caesar  gave  to  the 
Gauls  the  space  of  three  days. — The  iEduans  had  suddenly 
formed  the  design  of  besieging  the  town. — Crassus  is  chosen 
for  carrying-on  the  war  (498,  d). — Pythagoras  went  to  Sparta 
(453,  c)  to  learn  (498,  i^^)  the  laws  of  Lycurgus. — Caesar 
reckoned  that  the  space  of  two  years  was  enough  for  himself, 
for  overcoming  the  Gauls  and  finishing  the  war. — The  general 
sent  all  the  cavalry  across  the  Rhine,  for  the  sake  of  seeking 
corn. — Ariovistus  hastened  (contendere),  with  all  his  forces, 
to  attack  the  town  (498,  J^*). — The  Britons  sent  ambassadors 
to  Caesar,  in-order- (a d)-to-seek  (498,  1^^)  peace. 


LESSON  LXXXII. 
.  The  Gerundive  used  to  express  Necessity,  ^c, 

THE    GERUNDIVE    AS    SUBJECT. 

(501.)  (a)  The  gerundive  in  the  nominative  neuter  (diim) 
is  used  with  esse  to  express  necessity  or  duty.  If  the  person 
be  expressed,  it  must  be  put  in  the  dative. 


One  rrvust  write, 
I  must  lorite. 


Scribendiim  est. 
Scribendiim  est  mih!. 


I^#^  Here   the   gerundive   is  the  subject  of  the   sentence 
(the  duty  of  writing  is  to  me), 

(6)  This  neuter  nominative  may  be  combined  with  all  the 
tenses  of  esse  ;  e,  g,^ 

Scribendum  est  mihi,  /  must  write, 

Scribendum  erat  mihi,  I  had  to  write, 

Scribendum  erit,  I  must  write  hereafter. 

&c.,  &c. 


190 


GERUNDIVE. 


(c)  This  neuter  nominative  may  govern  the  case  of  its  verb ; 
€•  g'* 


We  must  help  the  citizens. 
One  must  use  reason. 


Civibus   (dat)   subveniendum 

est. 
Ratione  utendum  est. 


Omnia  Caesari  6rant  agenda,. 


THE   GERUNDIVE   AS    PREDICATE. 

(502.)  The  gerundive  is  also  used  with  esse,  in  all  cases  and 
genders,  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the  noun,  to  ex- 
press necessity  or  worthiness  ;  e.  g,,  I  am  to  he  loved,  amandus 
sum ;  thou  art  to  he  loved,  amandus  es,  &c.  The  person,  if 
specified,  is  put  in  the  dative. 

I  must  love  Tullia  (=  Tul-    TulliS,  mihi  amanda  est. 

lia  is  to  he  loved  hy  me.) 
All  things  had  to  be  done 
hy  Ccesar  (=  Ceesar  had 
to  do  all  things), 
B£3^  Here  the  gerundive  is  the  predicate. 

EXERCISE. 

(503.)    Vocabulary. 

Flag,  vexillum,  i. 

To  set-up,  proponere  (pr6+p6n6re, 

p6su-.  posit-,  406,  h). 
To  go-forward,  procedSre  (pr6-f  ce- 

dere,  401,  3,  b). 
A    little    too  far,    paullo   longius 

[adv.). 
To  think,  piitare  (av-,  at-). 

(504.)  Examples, 

{a)  Caesar  causes  a  hridge  to 

he  made  (=  takes  care  that 

a  hridge  should  he  made), 
I  must  hear. 

Est  is  often  omitted  with  the 
{h)  The  centurions  thought 

that    nothing    should    he 

done  rashly. 


To  send  for,  arcess6re  (arcessiv-, 

arcessit-). 
To  understand,  perceive,  intelligfire 

(intellex-,  intellect-). 
To  determine,  statuere  (statu-,  sta- 

tut-). 
In  vain,  frustra. 
More  widely,  latius  [adv.,  376). 

Caesar  pontem  faciendum 
(esse)  curat. 

Mihi  audiendum. 
gerundive,  as  in  (a), 
Centuriones       nihil       temSre 

S,gendum  (esse)  existima- 

bant. 


*  The  accusative  is  hardly  ever  used  after  the  neut.  gerundive. 


GERUNDIVE. 


V'     or  TTix- 


(505.)   Translate  into  English, 

(1.)  Gerundive  in  the  n^ominative  neuter  (dtlm). 

Militibus  de  navibus  6rat  desiliendum.  —  Militibus 
simul  et  de  navibus  (erat)  desiliendum,  et  cum  hostibus 
^ratpugnandum.  % 

(2.)  Gerundive  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the  noun. 

Caesari  omnia  uno  tempore  (118,  II.,  c)  Srant  Agenda; 
vexillum  proponendum;  revocandi  milites  ;  qui  pauUo 
longius  processerant  arcessendi;  acies  instruenda;  mi- 
lites hortandi;  signum  dandum. — Prohibenda  est 
ira. — Bellum  nobis  est  suscipiendu m. — Caesar  sibi  latius 
distribuendum  exercitum  putat. — Imperator  dicit,  jam 
sibi  legates  audiendos. — Caesar  iibi  intellexit  frustra  tan- 
tum  laborem  sumi  (471),  statuit  expectandam  classem. — 
Caesar  pontem  f&ciendum  ctirat  atque  itfi.  exercitum  trft- 
ducit. 

(506.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

(1.)  Gerundive  in  nominative,  neuter  (dum). 
We  must  leap-down  from  the  ships.— TFe  must  read. —  You 
must  hear. —  You  must  fight  for  liberty  (pro  libertate). — All 
must  hear ;  we  must  read. — With  whom  (quibuscum)  must  I 
fight  ? —  We  must  leap  down  from  the  walls  and  fight  with  the 
horsemen. 

(2.)  Gerundive  as  a  verbal  adjective. 
I  must  do  all  things  at  once  (=  all  things  ?nust  he  done  hy  me 
at  one  time). —  You  must  give  the  signal. —  We  had  to  set  up 
the  flag. — Caesar  must  send  ambassadors. — The  soldiers  must 
fortify  the  camp. — The  general  must  encourage  the  soldiers. — 
The  Helvetians  cause  bridges  to  he  made  over  the  river. — Cae- 
sar thought  that  the  army  must  he  led-over. — Caesar  thought 
that  the  army  must  he  divided  by  him  (sibi),  and  distributed 
more-widely. — The  general  says  that  he  must  wait-for  the 
fleet. — Divitiacus  says  that  this-thing  (hoc)  must  he  done  by  all 
the  Gauls. 


§  13. 
IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


LESSON  LXXXIII. 

(507.)  The  imperative  mood  expresses  the  action 
of  the  verb  as  a  command,  wish,  entreaty,  &c. ;  e.  g,, 
Love  thou  !     Hear  thy  parents. 

(508.)  FORMS    OF    THE    IMPERATIVE. 


ACTIVE.                                                                                    j 

2d  Sing. 

3d  Sing. 

2d  Plur. 

3d  Plur. 

am- 

a or  ato. 

ato. 

ate  or  atots. 

anto. 

nion- 

e  or  eto. 

eto. 

ete  or  etote. 

ento. 

r6g- 

6  or  ito. 

Ito. 

ite  or  itote. 

unto. 

aud- 

1  or  ito. 

Ito. 

it6  or  itote. 

iunto. 

PASSIVE.                                                                                  1 

am- 

are  or  ator. 

ator. 

amim  or  ammor. 

antor. 

mon- 

er6  or  etor. 

etor. 

emini  or  emmor. 

entor. 

reg:- 

erS  or  itor. 

itor. 

imini  or  iminor. 

untor. 

aud- 

ire  or  itor. 

itor. 

imini  or  immor. 

iuntor. 

Rem.  1.  Observe  that  the  2d  per s.  sing-,  act.  can  be  obtained  from  any 
verb  by  striking  off  r  6  from  the  infinitive ;  e.  g.,  inf.,  a  m  a  r  6  ; 
imper.,  a  m  a ;  and  that  the  2d  pers.  sing.  pass,  is  the  infinitive 
form  precisely. 

2.  The  longer  forms  of  the  2d  person  are  used  especially  in  reference 
to  future  time  ;  e.  g.,  in  laws,  statutes,  and  the  like. 

3.  The  io  verbs  of  3d  conj.  take  the  imperative  endings  of  the  4th  in 
the  3d  pers.  plur.:  thus,  capiunto,  let  them  take;  cfipiuntor, 
let  them  be  taken.    P  &  c  i  o  has  2d  pers.  sing,  fa  c. 

EXERCISE. 

(509.)   Vocabulary. 

[Deponents  take,  of  course,  th6  passive  endings.] 


Enmity,  inimicitia,  ae. 

To  despise,  contemnSre  (con-j-tem- 

n6r6,  temps-,  tempt-). 
FUeting,  fugax,  (f ugac)  Is  (107). 


To  pursue,  follow,  persSqui  (persS- 

cut-),  dep. 
Association,  fellowship,  sociStfts  (fttls, 

293). 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD.  193 


Shxrw,  spScies,  sp6ciei  (117). 

To  trust,  credere  (credid-,  credit-, 

411,  c) ;  governs  dot. 
Admire^  admirari  (at-),  d^. 


Ne  audi. 

Ne  credd  c61ori. 


Frail,   perishable,   cSducus,    a,   urn 

(from  cddere,  to  fall). 
To  shun,  avoid,  vitare  (av-,  at-). 
Judge,  judex,  (judic)  is  (306;. 
To  revere,  venerari  (ven^rat-),  dep, 

(510.)  Examples, 
(a)  Do  not  hear. 
Do    not    trust    appearance 
(colour). 

Rule. — With   imperatives,   ne    must   be    used  for   noU 
(N  o  n  would  be  very  bad  Latin.) 
(6)  Let  the  judge  neither  give    Judex  praemia  ne  dat6  nev$ 

nor  take  rewards.  c  a  p  1 1  o. 

Neither  —  nor  =  ne  —  nev6. 
(c)  Instead  of  parents  =        |Parentumloco  (abl.) 

(511.)   Translate  into  English. 

Pueri  (voc),  parentes  am  ate. — Magistri  pueros  linguam 
Latinam  decent  o. — Magna  vis  est  in  virtutibus ;  eas  ( 150 ) 
e X c i t a,  si  forte  dormiunt.  —  Abstinetote  omni  injuria 
(abl.)  atque  iniraicitiis. — I  m  p  e  r  a  irse  ( 147 ).  —  Ne  perse- 
q  u  e  r  e  omnia,  quae  speciem  glorise  habent. — Haec  omnia,  quae 
hS,bent  speciem  gloriae  contemne  :  brevia,  f ugacia,  caduca 
exist! ma. — Ne  credite  omnibus. — Judices  preemium  ne 
Gapiunto,  neve  danto. — V i t a  societatem  improborum. — 
Venerare  Deum,  venerare  parentes,  et  quos  parentum 
loco  (55,  a)  tibi  (54)  natura  dedit. — Pueri  praeceptores,  a  qui- 
bus  docti  sunt,  amanto  etvenerantor. 

(512.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Boys,  revere  (your)  -parents.— Let  the  master  teach  the  boys 
the  Greek  language. — Do  not  rouse-up  (your)  vices  :  rouse-up 
(your)  virtues,  if  perchance  they  sleep. — Abstain  ye  from  (abl.) 
all  vices  and  enmities. — My  son,  rule  (your)  anger  (dat.,  147). 
— Do  not  admire  all  things  v^hich  have  the  show  of  glory.— 
Do  not  ye  fear  death. — Do  not  trust  to  the  show  of  glory. — 
Love  those  whom  Nature  has  given  to  you  in  place  of  parents. 
— Do  not  seek  the  association  of  the  wicked.— iVeiY^er  take 
(cdpSre)  nor  give  a  reward.— iJear  the  wis©  and  good, 

R 


§  14. 

SENTENCES. 

[The  student  should  now  be  made  to  understand  something  of  senten- 
ces.    The  following  simple  statements  can  readily  be  understood.] 

(513.)  (a)  The  sentence,  ^^  the  messenger  fled ^^^  ia  b.  simple 
sentence,  as  it  contains  but  one  subject  and  predicate. 

(h)  The  sentence,  "  the  messenger,  who  saw  me,  fled,''''  is  a 
compound  sentence,  as  it  contains  more  than  one  subject  and 
predicate. 

(c)  In  the  last  example,  "  the  messenger  fled''^  is  called  the 
PRINCIPAL  SENTENCE  ;  and  "  who  saw  me,"  the  subordinate 
sentence. 

(514.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  classes  of  subordinate 
sentences  : 

(a)  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  ;  e.  g.,  Nuntius  dixit, 
equitgs  tela  conjicer^  (The  messenger  said  that  the 
horsemen  were  hurling  darts).  Here  equites  tel^  conji- 
cere  (that  the  horsemen  were  hurling  darts)  is  the  subordinate 
sentence  ;  nuntius  dixit,  the  principal  sentence. 

{b)  Conjunctive  sentences,  i,  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  a 
conjunction  or  adverb  of  time  ;  e.  g»,  Ccesar,  when  he  had 
crossed  the  river,  drew  up  his  army.  Here,  Ccesar  drew 
up  his  army  is  the  principal  sentence ;  when  he  had  crossed 
the  river,  the  subordinate  sentence. 

(c)  Relative  sentences;  6.  g".,  Nuntius,  qui  missus  est, 
dixit  {The  messenger,  who  was  sent,  said).  Here  nun- 
tius dixit  is  the  principal  sentence ;  qui  missus  est, 
the  relative  subordinate  sentence. 

{d)  Interrogative  sentences  (i.  e.),  such  as  are  introduced  by 
an  interrogative  word ;  e.  g.,  Tell  me  what  you  are  doing  1 
Here  what  you  are  doing  is  a  subordinate  interrogative  sen- 
tence. 


§  15. 


CONJUNCTIONS.— (LXXXIV.—LXXXV.) 


LESSON  LXXXIV. 
Copulative  Conjunctions, 
(515.)  Copulative  conjunctions  unite  words  or 
sentences  together.     They  are, 


And, 

Neither^  nor, 
Mso, 

Et,  qu6,  ac,  atxju^.                 ^ 
N^c,  n6qud. 

Etiftm,  DecD5n,  quoquS,  it^m, 
itad^m. 

EX  ER 

CISE. 

(516.)   Vocabulary, 

Onlyy  solflm ;  not  only,  nou  sSlQin. 
A  debtor,  dbseratus,  T. 
Formerly,  at  one  time,  quondam. 
Rich,  opulens,  (dpulent)  is  (107). 
To  hasten,  to  march  rapidly,  pr6p6- 

rarfi  (&v-,  at-). 
To   give  largess,    to   bribe,   largiri 

(largit-),  dep. 
Once  aiid  again,  s6m6l  atquS  itS- 

rum. 
Estate,  res  f  amiliaris,  e  (104). 
A  wheel,  rota,  ae. 

(517.)  Examples, 
{a)  Darius  equipped  a  fleets 
and  placed  over  it  Datis  and 
Artaphernes, 

{a)  E  t  connects  independent  words   and  sentences 
word  or  sentence  to  another  Bather  as  an  appendage. 


Some  {some  persons),  nonnnlli,  ae,  & 

(ndn+nullus). 
Javelin,  tragulft,  ae. 
To  hurl  under,  subjicfirS  ( jec-,  ject-f 

sub-fjftcSre). 
I  profit,  benefit,  prosum*  (pro+sum) ; 

governs  dat. 
To  the  same  place,  e6d6m  (adv.). 
Too  much,  mmius,  S,  um. 
Top,  summit,  cubnfin,  (calmih)   is 

(345). 
To  pray,  orare  (av-,  at-). 


Darius  classem  comp§,ravit, 
eiqu6  Datim  prgefecit  et 
Aitaphemem. 

q  a  3  joins  one 
Thus,  in  {a),  6 1 


*  Prosum  is  inflected  like  sum,  but  inserts  d  before  the  vowels; 
€.^.,  prod-ess e,  prod-6s,  prod-est  (not  pro-es,  pro-est). 


19G  COPULATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

joins   Datim    and   Artaphernem;    and    qae   joins   the    sentence 
''placed  (wer  it,"  &c.,  as  an  appendage  to  the  equipment  of  the  fleet. 

Homines  feri  ac  barbari  in 
provinciam  veniebant  a  t  q  u  e 
in  Italiam  contendebant. 


(6)  Fierce  and  barbarous  men 
were  coming  into  the  prov- 
ince, and  were  hastening 
into  Italy. 

[b]  Ac  is  used  before  consonants,  but  not  before  vowels  or  h,    Atqu6 
may  be  used  before  either  vowels  or  consonants. 


(c)  Ccesar  both  had  induU 
ged  and  was  greatly  con- 
fident in  the  tenth  legion, 

{c)  E  t  followed  by  another  S  t  means  both — and. 


Decimse  legioni  Caesar  et  in- 
dulserat  et  confidebat  max- 


Etiam  atque  etiam. 

E  t  etiam. 

Non  solum — sed  etiam. 


{d)   (1)  Again  and  again. 
(2)  And  again. 
•'         (3)  Not  only — but  also. 

(518.)   Translate  into  English, 

Orgetorix  ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam  coegit,  et 
omnesclientesobseratosque  eodem  (adv.)  conduxit. — Carthago 
et  Corinthus  atque  Numantia,  opiilentissimae  quondam  et 
validissimse  civitates,  deietae  sunt  a  Romanis.  —  Caesar  finem 
properandi  (489)  f  acit,  pontem  q  u  e  ad  flumen  Rhenum  ponit. 
— Discipiili  e  t  audiunt  e  t  amant  praeceptores. — Romani  non 
solum  itinerum  causa  (135,  II.,  R.)  sed  etiam  possessionis, 
culminS,  montium  occupaverunt. — N on  solum  vires  (plural 
of  \is)  sed  etiam  tela  nostris  (dat.)  deficiebant. — His  rebus 
Dumnorix  e  t  suam  rem  f amiliarem  auxerat  e  t  facilitates  ad 
largiendiim  magnas  comparaverat. — Hostes  e  t  e  loco  sup^riore 
in  nostros  tela  conjiciebant  e  t  nonnulli  inter  carros  rotas  que 
tragiilas  subjiciebant,  nostros  que  vulnerabant. — Contemnuntiir 
ii  qui  nee  sibi  nee  alteri  (194,  R.  1)  prosunt. — Nee  melior 
vir  fuit  Scipione  (360,  c)  quisquam,  nee  clarior. — ^dui  n  e  q  u  6 
obsides  repetiverunt  n  e  q  u  e  auxilium  imploraverunt. — Sapi- 
entem  neque  paupertas  neque  mors  neque  vincula  tor- 
rent.— Nimius  somniis  neque  corpori  neque  ammo  (dat.,  516) 
prodest. — Rogo  te,  ^t  oro;  etiam  atque  etiam  te  rogo. — 
^dui  s^mel  atque  iteriim  ciim  Germanis  contenderant. — 
Milites  ex  castris  eruperunt  (erump^re)  atqu^  omnem 
spem  salutis  in  virtute  posuerunt. 


DISJUNCTIVE  AND  ADVERSATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS.    197 

LESSON  LXXXV. 

Disjunctive  and  Adversative  Conjunctions. 

(519.)  I.  The  disjunctive   conjunctions   (meaning 

or)  are  a  u  t,  v  e  I,  v  e,  and  s  i  v  e  or  s  e  u. 

Rem,  1.  Aut  indicates  a  real  difference  of  object;  e.  g,, 

Here,  soldiers,  we  must  conquer  or  I  Hie  vincendum  aut  moriendum, ml- 
die!  I      lites! 

When  a  u  t  is  used,  but  one  of  the  conditions  can  be  fulfilled, 
as  in  the  above  example. 

Rem,  2.  V  e  1  (derived  from  velle)  means  if  you  wish,  or 
rather,     (Hence  it  is  used  for  even.) 


Viri  ndbiles  v  S 1  cormmpgrg  more* 
civitatiis,  v  e  1  corriLg6r6  possunt. 


The  nobles  can  either  corrupt  or 
correct  the  morals  of  the  state 
[i.  e.,  they  can  do  whichever 
they  please). 

Rem.  3.  Ve  is  alv^ays  affixed  to  another  word;  duo,  tresve 
==  two  or  three. 

Rem,  4.  These  conjunctions  are  frequently  repeated. 
raut  —  aut. 
Either — or,  }  v  e  1  —  v  e  1. 

(sive  —  sivS. 
Whether — or,  |  seu  —  seu. 

"  (520.)  II.  The   adversative   conjunctions  express 
opposition  Q)ut). 

The  most  important  are. 

At,  atqui,  autem,  caeteriim,  sed,  veriim  {hut). 
Tamen  {however)-,  \ero  (truly). 

EXERCISE. 

(521.)   Vocabulary. 


To  run  up,  accurr6r6  (accurr-  and 
accucTirr-,  accurs-,  ad+curr6r6). 

Very  rich,  perdives,  (divit)  13  (per+ 
dives),  107. 

Chance,  casus,  us.  By  change,  casu 
(abl.). 

Goodness,  bdnltas  (atXs). 


To  pay  up,  persolvgre   (solv-,  s6- 

lut-). 
To  suffer  full  punishment,  poenas 

persolvere. 
Handsome,  formosus,  S.,  um. 
Eloquent,  f  acundiis,  ft,  um, 
Ulysses,  Ulysses,  (Ulyss)  is. 


R2 


198 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


To  possess,  possiderS  (possed-,  pos- 
sess-). 
Weeping,  fletus,  us. 
Effect,  eflfectus,  us. 
Sorrow,  sadness,  tristitia,  83, 
Generally,  plerumquS  (adv.). 
Joy,  gaudium,  I. 


Daily,  qnotldianiis,  &,  um. 

A  living  being,  animans,  (animantl 

is  (107). 
Motion,  motus,  us. 
Various,  diversus,  a,  um. 
To  swim,  natare  (av-,  at-). 
Sometimes,  interdum. 


Fortes  sunt  habendi,  non  qui 
f  aciunt,  s  e  d  qui  propulsant 
injuriam. 

Gyges  a  nullo  videbatur,  ipse 
a  u  t  e  m  omnia  videbat. 


(522.)  Examples. 
(a)  Those  are  to  he  esteemed 
brave,  not  who  do,  hut  who 
ward  off  injury, 
(h)  Gyges  was  seen  hy  no- 
body,  hut  he  himself  saw 
all  things. 

{a)  S  e  d  indicates  a  strong  opposition ;  it  always  stands  first 
in  its  clause,  as  in  {a). 

(h)  Autem  expresses  a  weaker  opposition  than  sed.  Au- 
tem  and  vero  never  stand  first  in  a  sentence,  but  always  after 
one  or  more  words. 

(523.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nostii  celeriter  accurrerunt ;  a  t  Germani  fortiter  irapetum 
gladiorum  exceperunt. — Amici  regis  duo  tresve  (519,  R.  3)  per- 
divites  sunt. — Sive  casti  (55, a)  sive  consilio  deorum  immorta- 
lium,  paenas  persolverunt. — NonnuUi,  sive  felicitate  {ahl.) 
quadam,  sive  bomtate  naturae,  rectam  vitae  secuti  sunt  viam. — 
Fortes  et  magnanimi  sunt  habendi,  non  qui  f  aciunt  sed  qui 
propulsant  injuriam. — Non  formosus  erat,  sed  erat  facundus 
Ulysses. — Avarus  non  possidet  divitias  (57,  R.)  sed  divitiae 
possident  eiim. — Fletus  plerumque  est  effectus  tristitiae  ;  inter- 
dum  vero  etiam  (even)  gaudii. — Helvetii  fere  quotidianis 
praeliis  (55,  a)  ciim  Germanis  contendunt,  quum  aut  surs  fini- 
bus  eos  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  f  inibus  bellum  gSrunt. — 
Amman tium  motiis  diversus  est ;  v  e  1  ambulant  et  currunt, 
v61  volant,  v61  n^tant. — Corpus  moritiir  (dcp.),  verum  ani- 
mus nunquam  morietiir. — Milites  nostri  fortes  f uerunt,  sed 
-  ftvari. 


§  16. 
SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.— (LXXXVI.— XCII.) 


j    (524.)  The   subjunctive  mood  expresses   affirma- 
tion  doubtfully,  indefinitely,  or   as  conceived  by  the 
mind;   e.  g.,  /  may  write;  I  might  write;  I  might 
have  written  ;  if  I  should  write ;  if  I  had  written. 
Rem. — The  subjunctive  has  no  future  tense-form. 


LESSON   LXXXVI. 

Subjunctive  Present. 
(525.)  Forms  of  e  s  s  e  (^o  be)  in  subjunctive  present. 


Pres. 


Sim, 
/  ma7/  be. 


SIS, 

thou    may- 
est  be. 


sit, 
he,  she,  it 
may  be. 


simus, 
we  may  he. 


sitis, 
'6  may  be. 


smt, 
they    may 
be. 


(526.)  Forms  of  regular  verbs, 
(a)  The  subjunctive  present  adds  the  person-endings 
m,  8,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt,  for  the  active^  and 
r,  ris  or  re,  tur,  mur,  mini,  ntur,  for  the  passive, 
to  the  verb-stem  by  means  of  the  following  connecting  vowels,  viz., 


(6) 

%ctive.                    Passive. 

1st  conj.,            e  ;     e.  g.,            fim-e-m,            am-S-r. 
2d  conj.,             6a ;  e.  g.,            m6n-ea-m,        m6n-ea-r. 
3d  conj.,             a ;     ft  g.,            r6g-a-m,           reg-a-r. 
4th  conj.,           ia ;    e.  g.,           aud-ia-m,         aud-ia-r. 

PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE    PRESENT. 

Active. — I  may  love,  advise,  rule,  hear.                                    \ 

Stem. 

Singular. 

Plural.                               1 

am- 
mon- 

aud- 

em. 
6am. 
am. 
Tam. 

es. 
6as. 
as. 
Tas. 

et. 
6at. 
at. 
iat. 

emus, 
eamus. 
amiis. 
lamGs. 

etis. 
6atis. 
atis. 
iatis. 

ent. 
6ant. 
ant. 
iant.        11 

Passive.— Jwiay  he  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard.                            |! 

.stem. 

Singular.                                 | 

Plural.                                II 

am- 
mon- 

res-- 

aud- 



er. 
ear. 
ar. 
iar. 

eris  or  ere. 
earis  or  ar6. 
arts  or  are. 
laris  or  are. 

etur. 

eatur. 

atur. 
iatur. 

emur. 
Samiir. 
amur. 
iamur. 

eminl. 
6amim. 
amini. 
iaminl. 

entur.      1; 
eantur. 
an  tur. 
iantiir. 

200 


SUBJUNCTIVE  PRESENT. 


EXERCISE. 


(527.)   Vocabulary. 

Value,  prgtium,  I. 

To  obey,  parere  (paru-) ;  governs  dat. 

To  despair,  desperare  (av-,  at-). 

Otherwise,  aliter  {adv.). 

To  hinder,  impSdire  (iv-,  it-). 

Carefully,  stiidiose  [adv.). 

To  exercise,  exercere  (exercu-,  ex- 

ercit-). 
To  grieve,  dolere  (dolii-,  dolit-). 
Would  that,  utinam  (conj.)- 
To  fear,  metuere  (metu-). 
Incredible,  incredibilis,  e  (104). 
Mind  {talent),  inggnium,  i. 

(528.)  Examples. 

[The  principal  nse  of  the  subjunctive  in  Latin  is  in  dependent  sen- 
tences ;  but  in  this  lesson  we  show  its  uses  in  principal  sentences,  in 
which  it  occurs  only  when  something  is  said  without  dejiniteness  or  cer- 
■   •   "/.] 

Nemo  sanus  de  virtutis  pr&tio 

d  u  b  i  t  e  t. 
Sim  salvus ! 
Salvus  sis! 


To  he  ignorant,  ignorare  (av-,  fit-). 
To  deny,  negare  (av-,  at-). 
To  knoio,  noscere  (nov-,  not-). 
To  afford,  praebere  (praebu-,  praebit-). 
To  make  on^s  self  a  judge,  se  judi- 

c6m  pra&berS. 
To  apply,  to  employ,  adhiberfi  (u-. 

It-). 
Cautious,  cautus,  a,  um. 
Rashly,  temerfe  {adv,). 
Ever,  unquam  {adv.}. 
Truly,  obviously,  prorsus  {adv.j. 
Finally,  denique  {adv.). 


(a)  1.  No  san.e  man  can  doubt 
ahout  the  value  of  virtue. 

2.  May  I  be  safe  ! 

3.  /  hope  you  are  well 
(==raay  you  be  safe). 

4.  May  I  not  be  safe,  if 
I  write  otherwise^hhn 
I  thinTc. 

5.  I  hope  my  father  is 
alive  ( :;=  would  that 
my  father  may  be 
alive). 

6.  I  wish  he  would  come,    Utinam  v  ^  n  i  S,  t. 
(a)  The  subjunctive  present  is  used  for  the  English  poten- 
tial, may,  can,  &c.,  and  also  to  express  a  wish,  when  the  thing 
wished  is  possible.     A  negative  wish  is  expressed  by  n  e  pre- 
fixed, as  in  (4). 


Ne  s  i  m.  salvus,  si  Mit^r  scribo 
ac  sentio. 

Utinam  pater  v  i  v  a  t. 


(b)  1.  Let  us  believe. 

2.  Let  us  obey  virtue. 

3.  Do  not  despair. 


Credamus. 

Virtuti  pareamus. 

Ne  desperes. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  201 

(b)  The  subjunctive  present  is  used,  instead  of  the  impera 
tive,  to  soften  a  command.     N  e  is  used  for  prohibition. 


(c)  Who  would  not  love  vir- 
tue? 
What  can  I  do  1 
Who  is  ignorant  1 
Who  can  douht  1 


Quis  virtutem  non  ^  m  e  t  ? 

Quid  faciam  ? 
Quis  ignoret? 
Quis  dubitet? 


(c)  The  subjunctive  present  is  used  in  direct  questions  when 
any  doubt  is  impHed.  (In  English,  we  generally  use  can^  toill, 
would,  &c.,  in  such  questions.) 

(529.)   Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Use  of  snbjunctive  as  potential,  or  to  express  a  wish  (the  latter 
indicated  by  ! ). 

Tempus  v  e  n  i  a  t.  —  Salvus  sis!  amicS.  —  F  a  v  e  a  t  for- 
tuna  ! — Utinam  hoc  verum  sit ! — Diu  vivas  ! — Nemo  bonus 
de  Providentia  Dei  dubite t. — M o r i a r,  si  alitor  scribo  ac 
sentio. — Utinam  nemo  te  i  m  p  e  d  i  a  t ! — Utinam  domum  meam 
veris  amicis  (55,  a)  impleam! 

(b)  Use  of  STibjnnctive  as  imperative. 

Se  quisque  studiose  exerceat. — Naturam,  optimam  ducem, 
sequamur,  eique  pareamus. — Amemus  patriam,  parea- 
mus  senatui,  consulamus  bonis. — Suutot  quisque  noscat 
ingeniura,  acremque  se  et  bonorum  et  yjtiilii'um  suorum  judi- 
cem  prsebeat. — Ne  ametis  improbos: — Prudentiam  adhib- 
eamus. — Cautiorem  adhibeamus  J^rudentiam.  —  In  rebus 
gravioribus  cautiorem  adhibeamus  prudajjhp,  sed  nee  in 
levioribus  temere  unquam  agamus. — N^r^apJ^ks. 

(c)  Use  of  subjunctive  in  direct  qtuestions.       r 

Quis  hoc  credat  ? — Quis  fabiilas  istas  credat  ? — Quis  im- 
probos ac  stultos  diligat? — Quis  eum^idili gat  quem  metuit? 
— Quis  credat  illiid  quod  prorsiis  inciedibile  est? — Quis  de 
virtutis  pretio  dubitet ?  —  Quid  faciimus?  —  Quis  neget 
omnes  leves,  omnes  avaros,  omnes  .denique  improbos  ess§ 
servos  ? 

(530.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

(a)  No  wise  (man)  can  doubt  concerning  the  benevolence  of 
God. — My  friends,  I  hope  you  are  well  (=  may  you  be  safe). 


202 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


— I-hope-that  (utinam)  the  commander  is  alive  (=may"  live). — 
I  hope  our  friends  may  come  ! — May  these  things  be  true  ! — 
May  the  citizens  be  wise. 

(h)  Let  us  not  believe  this. — Do  not  believe  these  fables. — 
Let  us  exercise  ourselves  diligently. — Let  us  love  our  friends, 
let  us  obey  our  parents,  let  us  worship  God. — Know  your  (own) 
mind. — Let  the  soldiers  take-possession-of  the  mountain. — Let 
us  not  love  the  wicked. 

(c)  Who  can  say  this  ? — Who  can  love  a  fool  ? — Who  would 
obey  a  wicked  king  ? — What  good  (man)  can  doubt  concerning 
the  value  of  virtue  ? — ^Who  can  deny  that  all  avaricious  men 
are  slaves  ? 


LESSON    LXXXVIL 

Subjunctive  Perfect, 
(531.)  Form  of  esse  (to  be)  in  subjunctive  perfect. 


fuerim, 
/  ma7/  have 
been. 


fuSris, 
thou  mayest 


fuerit, 
he,    she,  it\ 
'may 


fu6iimus, 
%ce  may  have 
been. 


fudrftis, 
'/emay' 
been. 


fu^rint, 

they     wiay 

have  been. 


(532.)  Forms  of  regular  verbs. 

1.  The  subjunctive  perfect  active  adds  the  endings 

6rim,     6ris,     Srit,     Primus,     iritis,    Srint, 
to  the  indie,  perf.  stem  of  the  verb;  e.  g.<,  amav-erim,  &c. 

2.  The  subjjxnctive  perfect  passive  is  formed  by  combining 
the  perfect  paieticiple  with  the  subj  unctive  present  of  e  s  s  e  ; 
e.  g.,  a  m  a  t  ii  s  s  i  m,  &c. 

[  Sld^  Deponents,  of  course,  are  formed  like  passives.] 

3.  PARADIGM,    SUBJUNCTIVE    PERFECT. 


fimav- 
mdnu- 
rex- 
audiv- 


AcTivE. — I  may  have  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heaard. 


6rim. 


6ris. 


Primus. 


SrftTs. 


Srint. 


Passive. — I  may  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


(  toifttus,  a,  um, 
Sing.  \  ^6;^tiis  a  um, 
°    I  rectus,  ft,  um, 
1^  auditus,  a,  Qm, 


sim. 
sis. 
sit. 


Plur.  \ 


'  ftmati,  88,  ft, 
mdniti,  jb,  ft, 
recti,  ae,  ft, 

i,  audit!,  86,  ft,  ^ 


simtis. 

sitis. 

sint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


208 


EXERCISE. 


(533.)    Vocabulary, 

Health,  valetudd,  (valetudin)  is  (339). 
So,  thus,  ita  [adv.] 
Kindness,  pardon,  venia,  ae. 
To  take  captive,  cap6r6   (io,  c6p-, 
capt-,  199). 


Patience,  patientia,  ab. 

To  slay,  cut  to  pieces,  caedferS  (ce- 

cld-,  caes-,  413,  i^"). 
It  makes  no  difference,  it  matters 

not,  nihil  refert. 


OC?*  Form  the  subjunctive  perfect  active  and  pass- 
ive of  the  follovs^ing  verbs  : 


Absiim,  to  be  absent  (no  passive). 
Prosiim,  to  profit  (do.). 

Desum,  to  be  wanting     (do.). 
V6car6,  to  call. 
Confirmarfi,  to  assert. 
Dicerg,  to  say  (dix-,  diet-). 
Traders,  to  assert,  deliver  (tradid-, 

tradit-). 
Laudare,  to  praise, 
Videre,  to  see. 

(534.)  Examples. 

{a)  Do  not  do  it  |  N  e  f  e  c  e  r  i  s. 

{a)  The  subjunctive  perfect  (as  well  as  the  present)  may  be 
used  in  prohibitions,  with  ne,  or  nihil,  instead  of  the  imper- 
ative. 


InvSmre,  to  find  (inven-,  invent-). 
Scrib6r6,  to  write. 
FacSre  (io-,  fee-,  fact-),  to  do. 
L6qul  (16eut-),  to  speak  {dep.). 
Censer6  (eensu-,  cens-),  to  think. 
OpprimSre    (press-,   press-),   to  re- 

press,  crush. 
Constituere  (stitii-,  stitut-),  to  place. 
Oppugnarg,  to  assault. 
Il6v6car6,  to  recall,  restore. 


(b)  By  your  leave  I  would 

say. 
Epicurus  may  have  said. 
Perchance  some  one  may  say. 


Pace  tua  dixerim;   or,  VeniH 

tua  dixerim. 
Dixerit  Epicurus. 
Forsitan  aliquis  dixerit. 


(h)  The  subjunctive  perfect  may  be  used  with  or  without  an 
adverb,  to  express  a  supposed  case  (that  may  be  true). 

(c)  I  think  I  can  assert  this.    Hoc  confirmaverim. 
You  will  scarcely  find  a  man   Vix  ullius  gentis  hominem  in- 
of  any  nation.  veneris. 

(c)  The  subjunctive  perfect  (as  well  as  present)  is  used  to 
soften  an  assertion.  (Such  phmses  as,  Probably  I  might,  I 
think  I  can,  I  would,  perhaps,  &c.,  can  be  expressed  in  Latin 
by  one  w^ord  in  the  perfect  subjunctive,  as  above.) 


204  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


Cur  rides  ? 

Die*  mihi  cur  ride  as. 


Ubi  fuisti? 
Nescio  iibi  fueris? 


(d)  (1)  Why  do  you  laugh? 
(2)    Tell    me   why   you 
laugh, 

(1 )  Where  have  you  been  ? 

(2)  I  do  not  know  where 
you  have  been. 

The  sentences  marked  (1)  are  direct  interrogative  sentences, 
and  take  the  indicative  mood  ;  those  marked  (2)  are  indirect  (or 
subordinate)  interrogative  sentences,  and  take  the  subjunctive. 
Hence, 

{e)Rule  of  Syntax. — The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  all  in- 
direct interrogative  sentences. 

Rem.  Such  sentences  are  introduced  by  the  interrogative  pronouns 
quis,  qui,  quantus,  qualis,  uter,  &c.,  or  the  adverbs  ubi,  unde,  quan- 
do,  quo,  cur,  num,  utrum,  an,  &c. 

(535.)   Translate  into  English. 

(a)  Quod  diibitas,  ne  f  e  c  e  r  i  s . — Id  ne  d  i  x  6  r  i  s. — Nihil  in- 
commodo  (to  the  injury)  valettidinis  tuae  f  e  c  e  r  i  s. — Ciim  im- 
probis  ac  stultis  nelocutus  sis. 

(b)  Faciat  hoc  aliquis. — Fecerit  hoc  aKquis. — Dix^rit 
Epicurus,  Deum  esse  nullum. — Forsitan  eum  amaveris. — 
Forsitan  ita  censueris. — Puerum  magistri  monuerint. — 
Urbem  hostes  oppugnaverint. 

(c)  Frater  (wc),  bona  tua  venia  dixerim,  med,  sententia 
melior  est. — Patientiam  laudav6rim  boum  (351,  2)  atque 
equorum.  —  Ingenia  studiaque  oppresseris  facilius  (376) 
quam  rSvocaveris. 

(d)  Nescio  cur  ridea s. — Die,  cur  ad  me  non  veneris. 
— Helvetii  ibi  erunt,  ubi  eos  Caesar  constituerit. — Magno 
ciim  periculo  (89,  II.)  id  fecit. — Intelligit,  quanto  cum  peri- 
ciilo  id  fecerit. — Multi  in  prgelio  caesi  sunt. — Multi  in  prgslio 
capti  sunt.— Ubi  (when)  victoria  amissa  est  (is  lost)  nihil  refert, 
q  u  6 1  in  praelio  c  ae  s  i  aut  in  fuga  capti  sin  t. — Die  mihi 
iibi  fueris. 

(536.)   Translate  into  Latin, 
{a)  Do  not  love  the  wicked. — Do  not  hear  the  foolish. 

•  The  imperative  of  dic6rS  is  die,  not  dic6. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


205 


(b)  §ome  philosophers  may-have-denied  the  soul  to  be  im- 
mortal.— Perhaps-you-have-advised  the  young-man. 

(c)  /  think-I-can-advise  the  young  man. —  You  may  easily 
repress  the  minds  of  young  men.—  You  cannot  easily  recall  the 
industry  (studium)  of  men. 

(d)  The  mind  itself  knows-not  what  (qualis)  the  mind  is. — 
Tell  me  where  you  were. — I-do-not-know  why  you  did  not  come 
to  me. — Tell  (me),  were  you  (fuerisne)  in  school  yesterday? — 
It  makes  no  difference  how  many  are  taken-captive. — The  boy 
will  remain  (erit)  there,  where  the  master  may  appoint  him. — 
I  will  tell  you  what  I  have  seen. — I  will  tell  you  what  I  have 
heard. — Tell  me  what  you  have  done. 


LESSON  LXXXVIII. 

Subjunctive  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect,  —  Conditional 
Conjunctions  and  Sentences. 

(537.)  The  subjunctive  imperfect  simply  adds  the 
person-endings, 

m,  s,  t,  m  u  s,  t  i  s,  n  t,  for  the  active^ 

r,  ris  (re),  tur,  mur,  mini,  ntur,  ior  \hQ  passive, 
to  the  present  infinitive  form  of  the  verb.     Thus, 


Inf.  Pres. 

esse,  to  be. 
a  mar  6,  ^o  love. 
regerS,  to  rule. 


Imperf.  Subj.  Act. 

e  s  s  e  m,  /  might  be. 

ftmare-m. 

reg6re-m. 


Imperf.  Subj.  Pass. 

ftmare-r. 
r6gere-r. 


(538.) 


PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE  IMPERFECT. 


1.  EssSm. — I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  be. 


essem. 


esses.  I  ess6t.     1|    essemus.  |  essetis.    ]  essent. 


2.  Active. — I  might,  could,  would,  SfC.,  love,  advise,  rule,  hear. 


amar- 
mSner- 
reger- 
audir- 


6t. 


emus. 


etis. 


3.  Passive. — I  might,  could,  would,  6fc.,  be  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


amar-  ^ 
monSr- 
r&g&r- 
audlr-  , 


•gr. 


'ens  or  erg. 


etur. 


6mur. 


206 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


i2ewi.— The  vowel  e  of  the  ending  is  long,  except  where  it  comes  before 
m  or  t  final,  when  it  is  short  of  necessity. 

(539.)  {a)  The  subjunctive  pluperfect  active  simply 
adds  the  person-endings, 

m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt, 
to  the  past  infinitive  form  of  the  verb.     Thus, 

Past  Infinitive.  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

f u i s s e,  to  have  been.  fuiss6-m,  / might  have  been. 

amavisse,  to  have  loved.  amavisse-m,  / might  have  loved, 

(b)  The  subjunctive  pluperfect  passive  is  formed 
by  combining  the  perfect  participle  with  the  subjunct- 
ive imperfect  of  e  s  s  e  ; 

E-  g",  amatiis  essem  (sometimes  with  the  subjunctive 
pluperfect  of  e  s  s  e  ;  e.  g.j  a  m  a  t  ii  s  f  ii  i  s  s  e  m,  &c.). 

(c)  PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE  PLUPERFECT. 


I  might,  could,  would,  should  have  been,  &fG. 


fuissem. 


I  fuisses.  I  fuisset.  ||  fuissemiis.  |  fuissetis.    |  fuissent. 


2.  Active. — I  might,  could,  (fC,  have  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


ftmav- 
monu- 
rex- 
audiv- 


isset. 


3.  Passive. — I  might,  could,  6fC.,  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


i  amatiis,  a,  iim,    J 

g-        3  monitiis,  a,  um,  f 

°'  J  rectus,  a,  iim,     ^ 

y.  auditus,  a,  um,   ) 


essem. 
esses. 
esset. 


C  amati,  as,  S, 

Plur.  {  "^^f^"'  ^J  ^' 
A  recti,  88,  a, 

'  auditi,  ae,  a. 


essemus. 

essetis. 

essent. 


Conditional  Conjunctions  and  Sentences, 

(540.)  (a)  The  conditional  conjunctions  are  si,  if;  sin,  but 
if;  nisi,  or  ni,  if  not,  unless. 

(h)  A  conditional  sentence  is  one  which  is  introduced  by  a 
conditional  conjunction;  c.  g.,  if  men  were  good,  they  would  be 
happy. 

Rem.  The  sentence  introduced  by  if  is  called  the  conditional  sen- 
tence ;  the  other,  the  consequent  sentence  :  if  men  v)ere  good  is  the 
conditional ;  they  would  be  happy,  the  consequent. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  207 

EXERCISE. 


(54 1 .)    Vocabulary, 

To  diminish^  minu6re   (minu-,  mi- 
nut-). 
To  cross  over,  transire  (irreg.). 
The  world,  orbis  terrariim. 


To  subdue,  siibiggrS  (subeg-,  subac^, 

sub+Sgere). 
Longer,  diutius  [adv.,  compar.), 
I  wish  that,  utinam  (conj.). 


(542.)  Examples  and  Rules. 


(a)    Would   that   my  father 

were  alive  ! 
I  vnsh  he  could  come  ! 


Utinam  pater  v  i  v  6  r  e  t ! 


Utinam  v  e  n  i  r  e  t ! 


i^*  In  these  examples  (which  refer  to  present  time),  the  thing  wished 
is  supposed  to  be  impossible  (the  wish  is  vain). 

I  wish  he  had  lived  I  Utinam  v  i  x  i  s  s  e  t ! 

I  wish  he  had  come  !  '  Utinam  venisset ! 

I^P*  In  these  examples  (which  refer  to  past  time),  t^e  thing  wished  is 
supposed  to  be  impossible  (the  wish  is  vain). 

(a)  Rule  of  Syntax, — The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive are  used  to  express  an  impossible  supposition^  or 
a  vain  wish  ;  the  imperfect.,  with  reference  to  present  or 
future  time  ;  the  pluperfect.,  with  reference  to  past  time. 

(b)  Conditional  Sentences, 

(1)  If  he  has  (any)  money.,    Si  pecuniam  habet,  d^t. 

he  gives  (it). 
Here  the  man  is  supposed  to  have  money ;  the  condition  expressed  by 
*  if "  is  therefore  reed. 

Si     pecuniam     habeat, 
dabit. 

Here  the  condition  is  possible,  if  not  real.    The  man  may  have  money. 

Si    pecuniam    habere t, 
d  aret. 

Here  the  man  is  supposed  to  have  tio  money :  the  condition  is  unreal, 
(Observe  that  it  refers  to  present  or  future  time.) 

(4)  If  hehadhada/i^/moTicy,  I  Si    pecuniam    h^buisset, 

he  would  have  given  it,       \      d  e  d  i  s  s  e  t. 
Here  the  man  is  supposed  not  to  have  had  any  money ;  the  condition  is 
therefore  unreal  (referring  to  past  time).     Hence, 

(6)  Rule  of  Syntax. — In  conditional  sentences  (1),  a  real 


(2)  If  he  has  {any)  money, 
he  will  give  (it). 


(3)  If  he  had  any  money.,  he 
would  give  it. 


208  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

condition  is  expressed  by  the  indicative ;  (2)  a  possible 
condition  by  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive ;  (3)  an 
unreal  or  impossible  condition  in  present  time  by  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive  ;  and  (4)  an  unreal  or  impossible  con- 
dition in  past  time  by  the  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Rem.  1.  In  cases  (3)  and  (4),  the  subjunctive  must  be  used  in  the 
consequent  as  well  as  in  the  conditional  sentence. 

2.  It  follows  that  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  indicative  can  never  be 
used  with  su     If  he  had  come  =  si  venisset,  not  si  venerit. 

(543.)   Translate  into  English. 

Utinam  salvus  esses. — Si  hoc  die  is,  erras. — Si  hoc 
d i c a s,  erres. — S  i  hoc  diceres,  errares. — S  i  hoc  d  i x - 
isses,  erravisse  s. — Si  venisses  ad  exercitum,  ab  impera- 
tore  visus  esse s. — Frater  mihi  narrabat  quid  amicus  tuus 
fecisset  (534,  d). — Memoria  minuitur,  nisi  eam  e x e r - 
c e a s. — S  i  Helvetii  flumen  transire  conentur,  Caesar  eos 
prohibebit. — S i  Helvetii  flumen  transire  conarentur,  Caesar 
eos  prohi beret.— Si  Helvetii  flumen  transire  conati 
assent,  Caesar  eos  prohibuisset. — Si  obsides  ab  Helve tiis 
Caesari  (54)  dentur,  ciim  iis  pacem  faciet. — Si  obsides  ab 
Helve  tiis  Caesari  darentur  ciim  iis  pacem  f  a  c  e  r  e  t. — S  i 
obsides  ab  Helvetiis  Caesari  dati  essent,  ciim  iis  pacem 
f e c i s s e t. — Non  siiperaremur,  cives  {voc.)  s i  nostri  fortes 
essent.  —  Non  siiperati  essemiis,  cives,  si  fortiores 
milites  nobis  (Ja^,  125,  H.,  a)  fuissent. — Alexander  totum 
fer6  orbem  terrarum  siibegit. — Alexander,  si  diutius  vixis  - 
set,  totum  orbem  terrarum  siibegisset.  '^ 

(544.)  Translate  into  Latin, 

I  wish  my  father  had  lived  longer. — /  wish  you  had  come, — 
Would-that  the  soldiers  had  been  braver. — If  you-would-read 
this  book  (542,  6,  2),  I  would  give  (it)  to  you. — Iu;ish  the  gen- 
eral had  led  the  army  across  the  Rhiue. — If  you  had  any  thing 
(quid),  you  would  willuigly  give  (it).  —  If  they  had  had  the 
money,  they  would  willingly  have  given  it. — If-you-had-loved 
the  boy,  you-would-have  advised  him. — If  you-love  the  boy, 
you-will-advise  him. — If  the  soldiers  would  come  to  the  army, 
they -would-be-praised  by  the  general. — If  the  Gennans  had-led 
(their)  army  across  the  Rhine,  Caesar  would-have-made  an  at- 
tack upon  (in)  tii§m. — Ifwe-are  brave,  we  shall  not  be  overcome 


SUBJUNCTIVE  WITH  UT,  NE. 


209 


LESSON  LXXXIX. 

Subordinate   Sentences   expressing  a  Purpose.  —  tit 
and  Ne, 
(545.)  The  subjunctive  forms  of  the  verb  posse, 
to  he  able,  are  the  following : 

[Observe  that  p  o  s  s  e  is  compounded  of  p  6 1  -,  the  stem  of  p  6 1  i  s,  able, 
and  esse;  thus,  p  6  t-e s s  6,  contracted,  posse.  So  all  similar  forms 
are  contracted,  and  the  t  changed  into  s  before  s.] 


Subj.  Pres. 
pos-         sun. 

(Potis  Sim  =  pot-sim  =  possim.) 

sis.           sit.          sTmus.          sTtis.           sint. 

Subj.  Imperf. 
pos-         s6m. 

(Potis  essem  =  potessem  =  possem.) 

ses.          set.          semus.          setis.          sent. 

Subj.Perf. 
p6tu-      6rim. 

(Potis  faerim  =  pot-fuerim  =  potuerim.) 

eris.         erit.         erimus.         eritis.         erint. 

Subj.  Plup. 
potu-       Iss^m 

(Pdtis  fuissem  =  pot-fuissem  =  potuissem.) 
isses.       iss^t.       Issemus.       issetis.       issent. 

(546.)  The^TiaZ  conjunctions  (i.  6.,  such  as  denote  o.  purpose, 
aim^  or  result)  are  ut  (or  iiti),  ne,  quin^  quo,  quo  minus. 

duo,  in  order  that,  to  the  end  that. 
duominiis,  that  (after  verbs  of  hin- 
dering). 


IJt,  or  uti,  that,  so  that,  in  order 

that. 
Ne,  that  not,  so  that  not,  lest. 
duln,  but  that. 


EXERCISE. 


(547.)   Vocabulary. 

To  cat,  eder6  (598). 

A  Rauracian,  Rauracus,  i. 

A  Tulingian,  Tulingus,  i. 

To  burn  up,  exur6re  (exuss-,  ex- 

ust-). 
Together,  una  [adv.). 
Basely,  turpiter  (215,  2). 
To  surround,   circumv6nii6    (vgn-, 

vent-). 


To  resist,  resistere  (resttt-,  restit-). 

To  fix,  hence  to  decide,  statuere 
(statu-,  statu-). 

To  decide  on  something  quite  se- 
vere, aliquid  grivius  statuSre. 

To  enjoin,  praecipere  (io,  prsBCep-, 
cept-),  prae+capere). 

To  join  battle,  praelium  committ^re. 

End,  finis,  is  (m.,  355,  Ex.  XL,  2). 


Subordinate  Sentences  expressing  a  Purpose,  End,  or  Object. 

(548.)  Examples  and  Rules, 
(a)  I  beseech  you  that  you  1 

^^  ^^ '  I  Te  obsecro,  u  t  hoc  f  ^  c  i  a  s. 

or,  I 

I  beseech  you  to  do  this,        j 

S2 


210  UT,  NE,  EXPRESSING    PURPOSE. 


Dux    imperavit,    ut    miKtes 
stationes  suas  servarent. 


Dux  imperavit  ne  milites 
stationes  suas  des^r- 
e  r  e  n  t. 


The  general  commanded  that "  i 
the   soldiers   should    keep 
their  stations ; 
or, 

The  general  commanded  the 
soldiers  to  keep  their  sta- 
tions. J 

(h)  I  beseech  you  that  you  ') 

do  not  do  this ;  I  m      .    «  ,       /.      . 

>Te  obsecro  n§  hoc  facias. 

or, 

I  beseech  you  not  to  do  this,  j 
The  general  commanded  that "  i 
the    soldiers    should    not 
desert  their  stations ; 
or, 
The  general  commanded  the 
soldiers  not  to  desert  their 
stations,  j 

(a)  These  examples  show  that  a  purpose  or  aim  may  be  ex- 
pressed in  English  by  that,  in  order  that,  or  (especially  after 
verbs  of  asking  and  commanding)  by  the  infinitive.  In  Latin, 
such  sentences  are  expressed  by  u  t,  with  the  subjunctive.* 

(h)  An  object  to  be  provided  against  is  inti'oduced  in  English 
by  that  not,  in  order  that  not,  or  by  not,  with  the  infinitive.  In 
Latin,  such  sentences  are  always  expressed  by  n  e,  with  the 
subjunctive. 

(549.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  Ut. 

Edimus  ut  vivamus,  non  vivimus  iit  6 damns. — Venio 
ii t  d i s c a m.  — Veni  iit  discerem.  —  Orgetorix  persuadet 
Castico  (dat.)  u  t  regnum  o  c  c  ii  p  e  t. — In  eo  itinere,  persuasit 
Castico,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  civitate  sua  multos  annos  (191,  a) 
obtinuerat,  ii t  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occiipare t. — Orget- 
orix persuadet  Dumnorigi  ut  idem  (150)  conetur. — Orget- 
orix persuasit  Dumnorigi  ut  idem  conaretur.  —  Helvetii 
persuadent  Rauracis,  iiti  ciim  iis  proficiscantur. — Helve- 
tii persuadent  Rauracis  et  Tulingis,  ii  t  i,  oppidis  suis  vicisque 

*  JubBr^  takes  accugative  with  infinitive. 


UT,  NE,  EXPRESSING    PURPOSE.  211 

exustis'(457),  una  cum  iis  proficiscantur. — Caesar  castella 
communit,  u  t  Helvetios  prohibere  p  o  s  s  i  t.  —  Caesar  castella 
communivit  u  t  Helvetios  prohibere  posset.  —  Caesar  rogat 
Divitiacum  iit  f  inem  orandi  faciat. — Caesar  rogavit  Divitia- 
cum  lit  finem  orandi  faceret.  —  Helvetiis  (147)  Caesar  im- 
perat  uti  perfugas  re  due  ant. — Helvetiis  Caesar  impSravit 
liti  perfugas  reducerent. 

2.  Ne. 

Te  obs^cravi  ne  hoc  faceres. — Pater  f ilium  obsecrat  nS 
quid  turpiter  f a c e r e t.— Milites,  n e  ab  hoste  circumven- 
i  r  e  n  t  u  r,  audaciiis  (376)  resistere  ac  fortius  pugnare  coepe- 
inint. — Divitiacus  Caesarem  obsecrat,  ne  quid  gi-aviiis  in  fra- 
trem  statu  at. — Divitiacus,  multis  ciim  laciymis  (89,  H.) 
Caesarem  obsScrare  coepit,  n  e  quid  gravius  in  fratrem  s  t  ^  t  u  - 
ere  t. — Pi-aeceptum  est  (perf.  pres.,  it  has  he€7i  enjoined  to  or 
upon)  Labieno,  n e  praelium  committat,  nisi  Caes8,ris  copiae 
V i  s  ae  s  i  n  t  (542,  6,  2). — Praeceptum  erat  Labieno,  ne  praelium 
committeret,  nisi  Caesaris  copiae  visae  essent. 

[Recollect  that  a  purpose  or  aim  is  often  expressed  in  English  by  the 
infinitive;  but  in  Latin  never — always  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive  for  a 
positive  aim,  by  n  e  with  the  subjunctive  for  a  negative  aim.] 

(550.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  general  commands  the  lieutenant  (147)  not  to  do  (=  that 
he  may  not  do)  this. — The  general  exhorted  the  soldiers  to  make 
(=  that  they  should  make)  the  attack  sharply. — The  father  be- 
seeches his  daughter  to  make  an  end  of  praying. — Some-men 
(quidam)  live  to  eat,  not  eat  to  live. — He  comes  to  see  the  gen- 
eral.— He  came  to  see  the  general. — The  Helvetians  persuade 
the  Tulingians  to  set  out  together  with  them. — The  captive 
beseeches  the  general  not  to  decide-on  any-thing  at-all-severe 
against  (in)  him  (se). — Caesar  commands  the  Gauls  (147)  to 
bring  hack  {=that  they  should  bring  back)  the  deserters. — 
The  Romans,  that  they  might  not  he  surrounded  by  the  Gauls, 
began  to  fight  more  bravely. — The  commander  enjoins-it-uiX)n 
the  lieutenant  not  to  join  battle. — The  commander  enjoined  it 
upon  the  lieutenant  not  to  join  battle. 


212 


SUCCESSION  OF  TENSES. 


LESSON  XC. 

Succession  of  Tenses, —  tit  expressing  a  Result 

(551.)  (1.)  We  cannot  say  in  English,  *'  He  comes^  that  he 
might  see  the  general ;"  or,  '■'•He  came,  that  he  may  see  the  gen- 
eral ;"  but  we  must  say,  •'  He  comes,  that  he  may  see  the  gen- 
eral," and,  "  He  came,  that  he  inight  see  the  general."  It  is 
obvious  that  this  tense  of  the  verb  in  the  subordinate  sentence 
depends  upon  that  of  the  principal  sentence  ;  and  this  depend- 
ence is  called  the  succession  of  tenses, 

2.  The  tenses  of  the  Latin  verb  are  divided  into  primary 
and  historical. 


{a)  Primary, 


{h)  Historical, 


'■{ 


Present. 

a  mat, 
he  loves. 

Imperfect. 

^  (  amabat, 


was  loving. 


Future. 

a  m  a  b  i  t, 
he  will  love. 

Pluperfect. 

amaverat, 
he  had  loved. 


Pres.  Perf. 

a  m  a  V  i  t, 
he  has  loved. 

Perf.  Aoriat. 

a  m  a  V 1 1, 
he  loved. 


3.  The  Rule  for  the  succession  of  tenses  then  is  :  If  there  be 
a  primary  tense  in  the  principal  sentence,  there  must  be  a  pri- 
mary tense  in  the  subordinate  sentence ;  if  a  historical  tense  in 
the  principal,  a  historical  tense  in  the  subordinate. 

[The  examples  in  the  preceding  lesson  illustrate  this  rule,  and  those  in 
the  present  lesson  will  farther  confirm  it.] 


EXERCISE. 


(552.)   Vocabulary, 

To  strive,  contend,  niti  (nis-  and 
nix-),  dep. 

Despair,  desperatid,  (desperation) 
is  (333,  R.). 

To  run  together,  concurrere  (con- 
curr-  and  concucurr-,  concurs-). 

Storm,  tempestas,  (tempestat)  is 
(293). 

To  rise  (as  a  storm),  cooriri  (coort-, 
con-f-oriri). 

Palisade  [rampart  of  stdlces)  val- 
lum, i. 


To  cut  or  tear  down,  scindSrS  (scid-, 

sciss-). 
To  begin,  incip6re  (incep-,  incept-, 

in+cap6r6). 
To  afford  means  or  facilities,  dar6 

facultatem. 
Deceit,  dolus,  i. 
RatJier,  magis. 
Integrity,    probitas,    (prSbitat)    is 

(293). 
Course,  cursus,  us. 
Change,  commutatio  (onis,  333,  R.). 


'         UT  WITH   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE.  213 

Subordinate  Sentences  expressing  a  Result. 
(553.)  Examples  and  Rules, 


So  great  is  the  power  of  in^ 
tegrity,  that  we  esteem  it 
even  in  an  enemy. 

The  Helvetians  have  been  so 
taught  by  (=have  so  learn- 
ed from)  their  fathers,  that 
they  contend  (or,  as  to  con- 
tend) rather  tvith  valour 
than  deceit. 


Tanta  vis  probitatis  est,  ut 

earn  vel  in  hoste  diliga 

mus. 
Helvetii  ita   a   patribus  suis^ 

didicerunt,  ii  t  magis  virtute 

quam  dolo  nitantur. 


(a)  These  examples  show  that  a  result  (especially  after  the 
words  such,  so,  so  great,  &c.)  is  expressed  in  English  by  that 
with  the  indicative,  or,  as  to  with  the  infinitive ;  in  Latin,  by  u  t 
with  the  subjunctive. 

(6)  Rule  of  Syntax, — Ut,  signifying  that,  and  introducing 
a  result,  governs  the  subjunctive. 

Rem.  U  t,  expressing  a  result,  generally  follows  the  correlative  words 
talis,  tantus  [such,  so  great);  ad^o,  sic,  iti  {so)\  and  verba 
signifying  to  accomplish,  to  bring  to  pass,  &c. 

(554.)   Translate  into  English. 

Imperator  perficit,  iiti  Sequani  dent  obsides. — Dumnorix 
perficit,  iiti  Sequani  dent  obsides,  ne  itinere  (153,  a)  Hel- 
vetios  prohibeant  (548,  h) — Imperator  tanta  vi  (55,  a)  oppi- 
dum  oppugnat,  ii  t  desperatio  animos  oppidanorum  o  c  c  ii  p  e  t 
(551,  3). — Imperator  t  a  n  t  a  vi  oppidum  oppugnavit  ti  t  desper- 
atio animos  oppidan5rum  occupare  t. — T  a  n  t  u  s  timer  om- 
nem  exercitum  occupavit,  ii  t  omnium  animos  perturbaret. 
— Tanta  tempestas  siibito  coorta  est  (perf.  aor.)  ut  naves 
cursum  tenere  non  p  o  s  s  e  n  t. — Imperator  t  a  n  t  a  m  sibi  (54) 
jam  in  Gallia  auctoritatem  comparaverat,  iit  undique  ad  eum 
legationes  concurrerent  (551,  3). — Galli  vallum  scindunt. — 
Galli  vallum  scindere  et  fossam  complere  incipiunt. — Galli  sic 
nosti'os  contemnunt,  iit  vallum  scindere  et  fossam  complere 
in  ci  pi  ant.  —  Oppidum  natura  (55,  a)  loci  sic  muniebatur, 
lit  magnam  ad  ducendum  (496)  bellum  daret  facultatem. — 
Auxiliorum  adventu  (55)  magna  rerum  commutatio  facta  est. 


214      auo,  auiN,  auoMiNus,  with  subjunctive. 

— Horum  adventu  t  a  n  t  a  rerum  commutatio  fact&  est,  ii  t  nos- 
tri  fortius  pugnarent  atque  hostes  repellerent. 
(555.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

[Recollect  that  as  to  with  the  English  infinitive  must  be  translated  by 
ut  with  subjunctive.] 

The  commander  hrougJit-it-to  pass  that  the  Sequanians  gave 
hostages.  —  The  Sequanians  gave  hostages  that  they  would 
not  prohibit  the  Helvetians  from  (their)  journey  (153,  a). — So- 
great-a  fear  suddenly  seizes  the  whole  army,  that  it  alarms  the 
minds  of  all. — So  great  a  tempest  suddenly  arises^  that  the 
ships  can  not  hold  their  course. — The  commander  procures  for 
himself  so  great  authority  in  Italy,  that  even  the  senators  run- 
together  to  him. — The  Helvetians  begin  to  cut-down  the  bridge. 
— The  Helvetians  so  despised  our  men,  that  they  began  to  cut 
down  the  bridge. — By  the  approach  of  the  iEduans,  so  great  a 
change  was  made  that  the  Helvetians  began  to  fight  more 
bravely. — The  Helvetians  had  so  learned  from  their  fathers, 
as  to  contend  rather  with  valour  than  deceit. 


LESSON  XCI. 

Periphrastic  Conjugation,  Subjunctive. —  Use  of  quo, 
quin,  quominus,  with  the  Subjunctive. 
(556.)  The  want  of  a  future  subjunctive  is  supplied  to  some 
extent  by  the  periphrastic  conjugation,  formed  by  combining 
the  participles  in  riis  and  d us  with  the  subjunctive  tenses  of 
e  sse,  to  6e. 


AcnvE.                                                      1 

Pres. 

Jmperf. 

Perf 

Pluperf. 

ftmaturus  sim,         /  m^y  be  about  to  love. 
amaturus  essem,     /  migkt  be  about  to  love. 
dmaturus  fa6rim,    /  may  have  been  about  to  love. 
amaturus  fuiss6m,  /  migkt  have  been  about  to  love. 

PASSIVE.                                                                                   1 

Pres. 
Imperf. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 

ftmandus  sim,          I  may  be  to  be  loved  {one  must  love  me). 
amandiis  essSm,      /  might  be  to  be  loved. 
ftmandus  fuerim,     /  may  have  been  to  be  loved. 
&mandus  fuiss6m,  /  might  have  been  to  be  loved. 

Esse  {to  he).                                                       \ 

Pres. 
Imperf. 

f  iiturus  sim,             I  may  be  about  to  be.                                  1 
f  uturiis  essgm,        /  might  be  about  to  be. 

-.-:...-i. ujt.....j.:...'...-juji  ■  -^. 3  ■  .■..-■^.■-T:r^ : : i-afr- ■■  •.  ■ 

auo,auiN,  auoMiNus,  with  subjunctive.      215 


EXERCISE. 


(557.)   Vocabulary. 

To  hold  back,  restrain,  retiuere  (re- 
tinu-,  retent-,  re+tenere). 

To  stand  in  the  way,  prevent,  ob- 
staxe  (obstit-,  obstat-,  ob-f-stare). 

To  sustain,  sustinere  (tinu-,  tent-, 
Bub-ftenere). 

Novelty,  no  vitas,  (nSvitat)  is  (293). 

To  decree,  consciscere  (consciv-,  con- 
scit-). 

To  commit  suicide,  stb!  mortem  con- 
sciscere (=  to  decree  death  to 
one's  self). 


Cowardice,  ignavia,  ae. 

To  take  away  from,  eriperS  (io-^ 
eripu-,  erept-) ;  governs  ace.  and 
ahl. 

To  train,  educate,  ednc&rg  (av-,  at-). 

To  deceive,  fallere  (f^fell-,  fals-). 

It  was  Ccesar's  fault,  Per  Caesa- 
rem  stetit  (=it  stood  through  Cae- 
sar). 

To  finish,  perficSre  (perf ec-,  per 
feet-). 

Suspicion,  suspicio,  onis  (333,  R.). 


(558.)  Examples  and  Rules, 


(a)  Caesar  erects  forts,  that 
he   may   the   more   easily 
*  keep  off  the  Helvetians. 


Caesar  castella  commumt,  quo 
f  a  c  i  I  i  u  s  Helvetios  prohib- 
ere  possit. 


(a)  Quo  is  used  to  express  a  purpose  (instead  of  ii  t),  espe- 
cially when  a  comparative  enters  the  sentence. 

Caesar  castella  communit  ut  possit  {that  he  may,  &c.). 
Caesar  castella  communit  quo  facilius  possit   {that  he  may  more 
easily,  &c.). 


(5)  (1)  There  is  no  one  but 
thinks ; 
or, 
There  is  no  one  who  does 
not  think. 

(2)  There  is  no  one  so 
brave  as  not  to  be  con- 
founded, 

(3)  It  is  not  doubtful  but 
that   the   soldiers  will 

fight  bravely. 

(4)  I  did  not  doubt  that 
the  soldiers  would  fight 
bravely. 

(6)  They  could  not  be 
resti-ained  from  hurl- 
ing darts  (=  but  that 
they  should  hurl  darts) . 


Nemo  est  quin  putet. 


Nemo   est  tarn   fortis 
perturbetur. 


quin 


Non  diibium  est  quin  milites 
forliter  pugnaturi  sint. 

Non  dubitabam  quin  milites 
fortiter  pugnaturi  es- 
sent. 

Non  pot^rant  r^tineri  quin 
tela  conjicSrent. 


Nihil    impedit,    quominus 
hoc  faciat. 


216      auo,  auiN,  auOxMiNus,  with  subjunctive. 

(b)  Quin  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  but,^^  or  "as  not,^^  after 
negative  sentences ;  and  in  the  sense  of  "  that  not^''''  and  '*  that^''^ 
after  non  dubito,  non  dubium  est,  &c. ;  in  the  sense  of 
'''from''''  (=  but  that)  after  verbs  of  restraining,  &c. 

(c)  (1)  What  stands  in  the    Quid  obstat  quominus  Ju- 

way  of  Julius   being       lius  sit  beatus? 

happy  (=  what  stands 

in  the  way   in  order 

that  Julius  may  not  be 

happy) ? 
(2)  Nothing  hinders  him 

from  doing  this  (= no- 
thing impedes,  in  order 

that  he  may  not), 
(c)  Quominus  is  used  (in  preference  to  ne)  after  verbs 
of  hindering,  preventing,  standing  in  the  way  of  &c.     (It  can 
generally  be  rendered  into  English  by  of  or  from,  with  a  parti- 
ciple, as  above.) 

(559.)   Translate  into  English, 

{a)  duo  {=in  order  that,  used  instead  of  ut,  with  comparatives). 

CaBsar  milites  hortatus  est  iit  fortes  essent. — Caesar  milites 
hortatus  est  quo  fortiores  essent. — Eo  opere  perfecto 
(456)  Caesar  praesidia  disponit,  castella  communit,  quo  facil- 
ius,  si  Helvetii  transire  conentur  (542,  6,  2)  prohibere  possit. 
— Scrips!,  ut  auctoritatem  haberem. — Scrips!  quo  in  suadendo 
(488)  plus  auctoritatis  (186,  a)  haberem. — Auxilium  rogant, 
ut  hostium  copias  sus  tine  ant. — Subsidium  rogant,  quo  fa- 
cilius  hostium  copias  sustineant. 
{h)  duin  (=  but  that). 

Nemo  est  tam  fortis  quin  re!  novitate  (55,  a)  perturbetur. 
— Orgetorix  moituus  est,  nequS  abest  suspicio  qu!n  ipse  sibi 
mortem  consc!verit. — Helvetii  non  diibitant  qu!n  Romani 
^duis  {abL,  verb  of  depriving)  libertatem  ereptur!  sint. — 
Non  dubium  est  qu!n  c!ves,  iibi  {when)  patria  in  periciilo 
fiiturS,  sit  (534,  e),  fortiter  pugnaturi  sint. — Non  dubito 
quin  puerumbene  educaturus  sis. — Turpe  estfalli. — Tur- 
piiis  est  fallere. — Non  dubium  est  quin  turpius  sit  fallere 
quam  fall!.  —  German!  r^tineri  non  poterant  quin  in  nostros 
tela  conjicfirent. 


aUUM  WITH   SUBJUNCTIVE.  217 

(c)  d  u  6  m  !  n  u  s  (=  i7i  order  that  not). 
Per  Labienum  stetit  quominus  Romani  oppidum  occupa- 
rent. — Nostrorum  ignavia  obstabat  quominus  hostes  super- 
arentur. — Non  me  impedies  quominus  id  faciam. — Sen- 
ecttis  non  impedit  quominus  litterarum  studia  teneamus. 

(560.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

[E,emember  tlie  rule   for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  (551,  3).] 
{a)  duo. 
Cajsar,  having  finished  the  work  (=  the  work  being  finished), 
exhorted  the  soldiers  to  he  of  a  braver  spirit  (fortiori  animo). — 
I  ask  your  assistance,  that  I  may  do  this  the  more  easily. 

[b)  duin. 

There  is  no  one  who  does  not  think  that  the  wise  are  always 
happy. — It  is  not  doubtful  that  Caesar  will  cross  the  Rhine. — I 
do  not  doubt  that  my  father  will  come. — I  was  not  doubting  that 
you  had  educated  the  boys  well. 

(c)  duo  minus. 

Nothing  hinders  me  from  being  happy. — It  was  the  fault  of 
the  commander  that  the  soldiers  did  not  fight  bravely. — The 
cowardice  of  the  commander  stood  in  the  way  of  our  taking- 
possession-of  the  town. 


LESSON  XCII. 

Use  of  Quiim,  with  the  Subjunctive* 

(561.)  The  conjunction  quum  (sometimes  written  cum) 
has  two  uses :  (1)  to  denote  time  simply  {when,  while) ;  (2)  to 
denote  a  cause,  or  reason  (since).  The  former  is  called  quum 
temjporal,  the  latter  quum  causal. 

EXERCISE. 

(562.)   Vocabulary. 


To  contemplate,  contemplari   (at-), 

dep. 
To  perceive,  ammadverterfi   (vert-, 

vers-,  animum+ad+vertere). 
To  delay,  tardarg  (av-,  fit-). 


To  get  sight  of,  conspIcSre  (spex-, 

spect-). 
Incessant,    continuous,    continena, 

(nent)  is  (107). 
Of  right,  ju9tly,  jur6  (ahl.  of  jos). 

T 


ai8 


aUUM  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


To  order,  juber§,  does  not  take  ut 
with  subj.,  but  ace.  with  inf. ;  Jie 
ordered  them  to  await  =jussit  eos 
expectarS. 


Destruction,  interitus,  fis. 
To  make-haste,  maturare  (av-,  at-) 
To  announce,  nuntiare  (av-,  at-). 
To  meet,  convgnire  (ven-,  vent-). 


(563.)  Examples  and  Rules, 
(a)  Whenwe contemplate  the  \(^ num.  coelum  contempla- 

Jirmament,  we  wonder  at\      mur,     Dei     magnitudinem 

the  greatness  of  God.  I      admiramur. 

(a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Quum,  when  used  simply  to  express 
the  time  (especially  with  the  primary  tenses),  is  followed 
by  the  indicative. 


Caesar,  quum  Pompeium  vi- 
c  i  s  s  e  t,  in  Asiam  trajecit. 


(6)  Ccesar^  when  he  had  con- 
quered (  =  having  con- 
quered) Pompey,  crossed 
over  into  Asia. 

(6)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Quum  temporal  is  followed  by  the 
imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  if  the  events  de- 
scribed depend  on  each  other,  and  especially  when  the 
aorist  perfect  is  used  in  the  principal  sentence. 

[In  the  above  example,  the  verb  trajecit,  of  the  principal  sentence, 
is  in  the  aorist  perfect.  In  all  such  cases,  the  subordinate  sentence  with 
quum  can  be  rendered  by  the  English  participle,  as  in  the  example 
above,  and  in  the  two  following.] 


The  prtJBtor,  having  come 
(=when  he  had  come) 
into  the  forum,  perceived. 

The  commander,  having  got 
sight  of  the  enemy,  or- 
dered. 

(c)  Since  these  things  are  so. 

Since  they  cannot  defend 
themselves. 

Although  the  soldiers  were 
retarded  hy  rains,  yet  they 
overcame  all  (obstacles). 


Praetor,  quum  in  forum  ve- 
nisset,  ^nimadvertit (perf.). 

; 

Imperator,  quum  hostes  con- 
spexissit,  jussit. 


n5n 


Quae  quum  ita  sint. 
Quum     se     d  efendSre 

p  o  s  s  i  n  t. 
Milites,  quum  imbribus  t  a  r- 

darentur,    tS,men    omnift 

siiperaverunt, 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Q  u  u  m  causal  (signifying  since,  or 
although)  is  always  followed  by  the  subjunctive.  ^ 


aUUM  WITH   SUBJUNCTIVE.  219 

(564.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  duum  temporal,  with  subjunctive  (563,  b). 

Caesar,  quum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  maturavit  ab  urbe 
proficisci. — Quum  legio  decima  constitisset,  omnes  hostes 
ad  eum  locum  contenderunt. — Quum  legatus  ad  oppidum  ac- 
cessisset,  pueri  miilieresque  pacem ab  Romanis  petiverunt. 
— Quum  Caesar  ad  oppidum  accessisset,  oppidarri  pacem 
ab  eo  petierunt. — Quum  imperator  signum  d  e  d  i  s  s  e  t,  milites 
in  hostes  impetum  f  ecerunt. — Caesar,  quum  Gallos  v  i  c  i  s  s  e  t, 
in  Italiam  contendit  (perf.). — Quum  legati  Caesarem  in  itinere 
convenissent,  eos  suum  adventum  expectare  jussit. 

2.  duum  causal  [since,  or  although),  with  subjunctive  (563,  c). 
Milites,  quum  frigore  et  imbribus  tardarentur,  tamen 

continenti  labore  (55,  a)  omnia  siiperaverunt.  —  Cicel-o  jure 
pater  pteiae  dictus  est,  quum  urbem  ab  interitu  servasset.* 
— ^dui,  quum  se  suaque  ab  Helvetiis  defendere  non  pos- 
s  i  n  t,  legatos  ad  Caesarem  mittunt,  rogatum  (379)  auxilium.— - 
Quum  omnes  homines  mortales  s  i  n  t,  etiam  tu  morieris. 

(565.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  duum  temporal,  with  subjunctive  (563,  h). 

The  ambassadors  having  asked  (=  when  the  ambassadors  had 
a^Tced)  peace  of  Caesar,  he  ordered  them  to  await  his  coming. — 
Caesar  having  ordered  them  (=when  Ccesar  had  ordered  them) 
to  await  his  coming,  (they)  obeyed. — The  lieutenant,  when  that 
was  (=had  been)  announced^  returned  to  the  citadel. — The 
fifth  legion  having  halted^  the  enemy  made  an  attack  upon 
them. — The  praetor,  having  come  into  the  forum,  saw  the  cap- 
tives.— The  boy,  having  approached  the  wood,  heard  a  voice. 

2.  duum  causal,  with  subjunctive  (563,  c). 

Since  these  things  are  so,  let  us  believe  (528,  6, 1). — Nations, 
when  they  cannot  defend  themselves,  ask  assistance.  —  The 
scout,  though  he  was  delayed  by  the  cold,  came  to  the  camp.— 
Since  Caesar  took- away  (eripere)  liberty  from  the  iEduans, 
they  rightly  feared. 

*  Contracted  from  servavisset. 


«so 


RELATIVE  SENTENCES. 


LESSON  xcm. 

Use  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Relative  Sentences, 

(566.)  The  relative  pronoun  often  takes  the  place  of  a  con- 
junction in  introducing  a  sentence,  and  is  therefore  followed  by 
the  subjunctive.  The  follov^ing  exaniples  illustrate  some  of 
these  uses. 


{a)  You  err  because  you  think = 
{b)  They  sent  men  to  seek  for 

peace  = 
(c)  I  am  not  such  a  man  as  to  be 

delighted  with  vices  = 


You  err  who  think. 

They  sent  men  who  should  seek  for 

peace. 
I  am  not  he  who  can  be  delighted 

with  vices. 


EXERCISE. 


(567.)   Vocabulary. 

A  herald,  a  proclaimer,  praBco,  (prae- 

con)  is  (333). 
A  Nervian,  Nervius,  i. 
It  pleased,  plScuit  (with  dat.). 
At  length,  demum. 
Affection,  affectio,  (tion)  is  (333,  R.). 
To  hurt,  nocere  (with  dat). 


To  be  present,  adesse  (ad+esse). 
To  bear,  ferre  {irreg.). 
Fortunate,  fortunatus,  S,  tim. 
A  youth,  adolesoens,  (cent)  is  (m. 

and  f.,  25,  «). 
Innocence,  innScentia,  sb. 
Fit  for,  idoneus,  a,  um  (with  dat). 


(568.)  Examples  and  Rule. 


(a)  Hannibal  did  wrong  in 
wintering  {■=  because  he 
wintered)  at  Capua. 


Male  fecit  Hannibal,  qui  Ga- 
puae  hiemav^rit  (=^  who 
wintered  at  Capua). 


Here  qui  introduces  the  ground  or  cause  of  the  judgment  tiiat  Hanni- 
bal erred. 


{b)  They  send  ambassadors 
to  say  {=who  may  say). 

They  sent  ambassadors  to 
say  {=who  might  say). 


Legates  mittunt,  qui  dicant. 

Legates  miserunt,  qui  dic6- 
rent. 


Here  qui  (=ut  ii)  introduces  v^ purpose. 


(c)  You  are  not  the  man  to 
be  ignorant. 

He  ordered  all  (those)  who 
could  bear  arms  to  he 
present. 


Non    is    Ss,    qui    nescias 

(=:you  are  not  he  who  can 

be  ignorant). 
Omnes    (eos  understood)   qui 

armd,  feiTe  p  o  s  s  e  n  t,  ftdessS 

jussit. 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES.  2^1 

In  these  examples,  qui  introduces  a  nearer  definition  of  the  demon- 
Btrative,  which  is  expressed  or  implied. 

(d)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  relative 
sentence  to  express  a  ground,  a  jpurpose,  or  to  give  a 
nearer  definition  of  a  demonstrative  expressed  or  implied. 

Rem.  1.  Talis,  tam,  tantus,  it  a,  &c.,  maybe  these  demonstra- 
tives, as  well  as  is,  ea,  id. 

2.  The  relative  to  express  a  purpose  is  very  common,  especially  in 
Caesar,  and  should  be  thoroughly  studied  and  practised. 

(569.)   Translate  into  English, 

[Remember  the  rule  for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  (551,  3).] 
{a)  dui,  ground,  cause,  or  reason. 

Erras  qui  censeas  Deum  esse  injustum.  —  Fortunatus 
fait  Alexander,  qui'virttitis  suae  Homerum  praeconem  (225,  a) 
invenerit. — O  fortunate  adolescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  Ho- 
merum praeconem  inveneri s. — Nervii  inctisaverunt  reliquos 
Belgas  q u i  se  populo  Romano  (54)  dedidissent. 
ib)  dvLi, purpose. 

Eripiunt  aliis  (153,  a)  quod  aliis  (54)  largiantun — 
Legates  ad  Romanes  miserunt,  qui  peterent  pacem. — Caesar 
6quitatum  praemittit,  qui*  videant  quas  in  partes  hostes  iter 
faciant  (534,  d). — Imperator  misit  exploratores,  qui  cognos- 
cerent  qualis  esset  (534,  d)  natura  mentis.  —  Caesar  copias 
suas  in  proximum  coUem  subduxit,  equitatumque,  qui  s  u  s  - 
tin  ere  t  hostium  impetum,  misit. — Ariovistus  omnes  copias, 
quae  nostros  perterrerent,  et  munitione  (153,  a)  pro- 
hiberent,  misit. — Placuit  Caesai-i  ut  ad  Ariovistum  legates 
mitteret  (548,  a). — Placuit  Caesari  ut  ad  Ariovistum  legates 
mitteret,  qui  ^beo  postularent,  iit  aliquem  locum  collo- 
quio  (54)  diceret  (548,  a). — Tum  demum  Ariovistus  partem 
suarum  copiarum  q u ae  castra  oppugnarent  misit. 
(c)  dui,  defining  a  demonstrative  [express  or  implied). 

Imperator  omnes  cives  qui  arma  ferre  possent  adesse 
jussit. — Legatus  poposcit  (411,  a)  obsides,  arma,  servos,  qui  ad 
Helvetios  perfiigissent.  —  Milites  ea  quae  imperarentur 


*  Equitatum  {cavalry)  being  a  noun  of  multitude,  the  relative  qui 
may  be  in  the  pluraL 

T  2 


222  RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

Bbenter  f  ecerunt. — Non  talis  sum  qui  te  fall  am. — Inn6- 
centia  est  affectio  talis  animi,  quae  noceat  nemini  (54). 

(570.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

(a)  Caesar  did  badly  in-crossing  {who  crossed,  perf.  subj.)  the 
Khine. — They  err  who  think  that  the  soul  is  not  immortal. — 
The  father  censured  his  son  for  setting-out*  (=  wJw  had  set  out, 
plup.  subj.)  from  the  city. 

(h)  Caesar  sends  forward  scouts,  to  choose  (=  who  may  choose) 
a  place  fit  for  the  camp. — Caesar  sent  ambassadors  to  Ariovistus 
to  demand  (=who  should  demand). — The  general  brings  back 
his  forces  to  the  hill,  and  sends  forward  the  cavalry  to  sustain 
(=  who  may  sustain)  the  attack. 

*  Proficiscor. 


§  17. 
ORATIO  OBLIQUA.     (XCIV.) 

LESSON  XCIV. 
Oratio  Ohliqua  {Oblique  Narration). 

(571.)  In  relating  the  words  of  another,  we  may  either,  (1) 
represent  him  as  speaking  in  the  first  person,  and  give  his  words 
precisely  as  they  were  uttered  ;  e.g.^  "  He  said,  ''I will  come;'  " 
or,  (2)  we  may  state  what  he  said  in  a  narrative  form ;  e.  g,^ 
"  He  said  that  he  would  come.'*^  The  former  is  called  Oratio 
recta  (direct  narration)  \  the  latter,  Oratio  obliqua  (oh- 
lique  narration), 

^p*  The  example  above  given  shows  that  the  moods  must  be  different 
in  the  two  modes  of  narration. 

(572.)  The  sentences  introduced  in  the  oratio  obliqua 
are  either  princij)al  or  subordinate  ;  e.  g.^ 

Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  wage  war  upon  the 
^  d  u  a  n  s,  if  they  paid  the  tribute  yearly. 

In  this  example,  the  sentence  in  spaced  printing  is  the 
principal  sentence  ;  the  sentence  in  italic  the  subordinate 
sentence. 

EXERCISE. 

(573.)   Vocabulary, 

To  bring  upon,  to  wage,  inferre  (il- 

lat-)»  irreg. 
Tribute,  stipendium,  i. 
Yearly,  quotannis  (used  as  adv.). 
To  pay,  pend6re  (pepend-,  pens-). 
To  shmv,  point  o^it,  ostendere  (os- 

tend-,  ostens-,  and  ostent-). 
To  excel,  praestare   (praesttt-,  praes- 

tit-,  and  praestat-). 
Because,  propt^rei  quod. 


To  get,  to  gain  for  another,  concil- 

iarg  (av-,  at-). 
To  get  possession  of,  potiri,  (pdtit) 

dep.  (governs  gen.  or  abl.). 
Very  easy,  perfacilis,  e  (with  dat.). 
Affirm  J  confirmare  (av-,  at-). 
H^*  The  Helvetians   intend,  Hel- 

vetiis    est   in   animo  (=it  is   in 

mind  to  the  Helvetians). 


224  ORATIO  OBLiaUA. 

(574.)  Examples  and  Rules, 


(a)  Ariovistus  said  that  he 
would  not  wage  war  upon 
the  JEduans. 


Ariovistus  dixit,  se  jEduis 
bellum  non  illaturum 
esse. 

(a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — In  principal  sentences  in  oratio 
o  b  1  i  q  u  a,  the  accusative  vnth  the  infinitive  is  used. 
Kem.  When  they  express  a  command  or  wish,  the  subj.  is  used. 


(b)  Ariovistus  said  that  he 
would  not  wage  war  upon 
the  JEduans^  if  they  paid 


Ariovistus  dixit,  s  e  JE  d  u  i  s 
bellum  non  esse  illa- 
turum, 5l  stlpendium  qudt^ 


the  tribute  yearly,  |      annis  penderent, 

(h)  In  subordinate  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua,  the  5W&- 
junctive  is  always  used  (e.  g.,  penderent). 


(c)  The  lieutenant  denied 
that  he  had  crossed  the 
Rhine, 

He  denies  that  he  can  give. 


Legatus,  nSgavit  se  Rhenum 
transiss©.* 


Negat  s6  poss^  d&re. 

(575.)  Translate  into  English, 

Caesar  dixit  se,  postquam  hostes  fusi  essent,  castra 
muniturum  esse.- — De  decima  legione  Caesar  non  diibitabat. 
—  Caesar  dixit,  se  de  decima  legione  non  dubitare. — 
Caesar  dixit,  se  ciim  sola  decima  legione  esse  iturum.f 
— Caesar  dixit  se  cum  sola  decima  legione,  de  qua  non  diibi- 
taret,  esse  iturum. — Imperator  dixit,  maximas  nationes 
pulsas  superatasque  esse. — Helve tiis  (54)  perfacile  erat 
totiiis  Galliae  imperio  (all.)  potiri. — Dumnorix  ostendit,  Hel- 
vetiis  perfacile  esse,  quum  virtute  (55,  a)  omnibus 
{dat.)  praestarent,  totius  Galliae  imperio  potiri. — Dumnorix 
ipse  Castico  (54)  regnum  conciliaturus  erat. — Dumnorix  con- 
firmat  se  Castico  regnum  conciliaturum  esse. — Hel- 
vStiis  est  in  animo  iter  p^r  provinciam  f  acere  ;  aliud  iter 
bS,hent  nullum. — Sibi  ess6  in  animo  (573,  ^P),dicunt  Hel- 
v^tii,  sin6  ullo  mMeficlo  iter  per  provinciam  fac^re,  prop- 
tSre^  qu6d  S,liud  iter  h^beant  nullum. — Imperator  non 
potest  iter  Helvetiis  (54)  p6r  provinciam  dare.  —  Imperator 

•  Past  infin.  of  transIrS.  ^        t  Fut.  infin.  of  ir6,  to  go. 


oRATio  eBLiauA.  225 

nSgat  sg,  m6r6  et  exemplo  popiili  Romani,  posse  iter  Hel- 
v6tiis  per  provinciam  dare. 

(576.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  said  that  he,  after  Pomjpey  was  conquered,  would 
cross-over  into  Asia,  —  Caesar  had  full  confidence  in 
(z=did  not  douht  concerning)  the  fourth  legion. — Caesar  said 
that  he  would  attack  the  town  with  the  fourth  legion 
alone,  in  which  he  had  full  confidence, — Cicero  said  that  the 
greatest  cities  had  he  en  attacked. — The  lieutenant 
affirms  that  he  will  lead  the  army  across  the 
Rhine,  if  the  enemy  attempt  to  hinder  (them)  (prohibere). — 
The  Helvetians  say  that  they  intend  (573,  8!^')  to  seek 
peace  of  Ccesar. 


§  18. 
IMPERSONAL  VERBS.    (XCV.— XCVI.) 


LESSON  XCV. 
Impersonals, — Pudet,  Piget,  TcBdet,  <^c. 

(577.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  have  no  subject, 
and  take  the  pronoun  it  before  them  in  English;  e.  g,,  pluit, 
it  rains* 

(578.)  {a)  Some  impersonals  are  never  used  in  the  personal 
form;  e.g.^  piget,  it  grieves,  &c. ;  (b)  others  are  simply  the  third 
person  of  personal  verbs :  e.  g,,  placet,  it  pleases  (placeo,  I 
please),  (c)  Again,  the  third  person  singular  of  many  intran- 
sitive verbs  is  used  impersonally  in  the  passive :  curritur, 
they  run  (it  is  run) ;  I  am  envied,  invideturmihi;  nun- 
ciatum  est,  it  was  told. 

(579.)  (a)  The  following  impersonals  (which  express  certain 
feelings)  take  the  accusative  of  the  person  and  genitive  of  the 
cause  of  the  feeling. 

Piggt,  piguit,  it  grieves. 

P-jjti.       -J-*.  ^  ^  shames, 

ud6t,  puduit,  <  .       / 

i  one  IS  ashamed, 

PoenitSt,  poenituit,  it  repents. 

Taed6t,  pertoesum  est,      it  wearies,  disgusts. 

MisSrSt,  one  pities. 

Your f ally  grieves  me.  I  Me  pigfit  stultitise  tuoe  (=i^ 

grieves  me  of  your  folly). 

(h)  Sometimes  the  cause  or  object  of  the  feeling  is  expressed 
by  the  infinitive,  or  a  sentence  with  quod. 


/  am  not  asham^  of  having  done 
J  repent  of  offending  you. 


Non  pudet  m6  hoc  f  e  c  i  s  s  6  {=ii 

does  not  shame  me  to  have  done 

this). 
Poenitet  mS    quod   te    offendl 

{=it  repents  Tne  that  I  have  of 

fended  you). 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  227 


EXERCISE, 

(580.)    Vocabulary. 

Indolent,  ignav-us,  &,  um. 
Folly,  ineptiae,  arum  (57,  R.). 
To  sin,  peccare  (av-,  at-). 
Business,  nfegotium,  i. 
Undertaken,  susceptus,  a,  iim  (part, 
of  suscipere). 


To  confess,  fat6ri  (fass-),  dep. 
Because,  since,  quoni&m  [conj.). 
Almost,  paene  {adv.). 
Some  day,  aliquandd  {adv.). 
Innocent,    iimocens,    (innocent)    is 
Lot,  sors,  (sort)  is  (293).  [(107). 


(581.)   Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Ignavum  poemtebit  aliquando  ignaviae. — Non  poeni- 
tet  m  e  hujus  c  o  n  s  i  1  i  i. — T  u  i*  m  e  miseret. — E  o  s  i  n  e  p  - 
t i a r u  m  poenitebat. — Poemtebat  me  peccat i. — Miseret  t e 
aliorum,  tui*  nee  miseret,  nee  pudet. — Nos  miseret  ca- 
lamitatis  tuae. — Nunquam  Csesarem  suscepti  negotii 
pertaesum  est. — Me  civitatis  morum   piget,  taedetque. 

{h)  Ilium  poenitet  quod  me  offenderit.  —  Socratem 
non  puduit  fateri  se  multas  res  nescire. — Teidpiiduit 
face  re.  —  Non  poenitet  me  vixisse,  quoniam  non  frustra 
vixi. — Q u e  m  poenitet  peccasse,  paene  est  innocens. 

(582.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

(a)  Thou  wilt  repent  of  thy  folly. — He  will  be  ashamed  of 
his  indolence.  —  We  shall  be  ashamed  of  thee.  —  We  pitied 
them. — He  was  ashamed  of  us. — We  shall  never  repent  of  our 
industry. — The  boy  will  some-day  be  ashamed  of  his  indolence. 
— Thou  wilt  some-day  repent  of  thy  folly. — ^We  are  weary  of 
life. — He  was  ashamed  of  the  citizens. — I  am  ashamed  of  you 
and  your  ignorance.  —  Many  are  grieved  (at)  their  lot  {gen.) 
{=z  It  grieves  many  of  their  lot). — I  am  not  only  grieved  at,  but 
also  (sed  etiam)  ashamed  of,  my  folly  (=It  not  only  grieves, 
but  also  shames  me  of  my  folly). 

(fc)  I  repent  of  having-sinned. — I  am  ashamed  of  doing  this. 
— A  wise  man  is  not  ashamed  to  confess  that  he  is  ignorant-of 
many  things. — I  am  weary  of  living  (vivere) . — I  repent  of  hav- 
ing lived  in-vain. — The  boy  repents  of  having  offended  (quod, 
with  jperf.  subj.)  the  master. — The  young  man  is  ashamed  of 
having  lived  in-vain. — The  general  repented  of  having  moved 
{inf.)  the  camp. — The  Helvetians  repented  of  having  crossed 
{inf.)  the  river. — The  barbarians  repented  of  having  approached 
(inf.)  the  i*ampart  (use  ad  before  the  accusative). 
*  Gen.  of  tt. 


>2S 


IMPERSONAL  VERB:^ 


LESSON  XCVI. 
Impersonal  Verbs,  continued. 
(583.)    Vocabulary, 


Ought,  it  behooves,  oportet,  ebat, 
uit,  &c.  (with  ace.  and  inf.). 

It  is  becoming,  dScet  (with  ace.  and 
inf.). 

It  pleases,  placet,  placmt,  &c.  (with 
dat.). 

It  is  of  importance,  it  interests,  in- 
terest (with  gen.). 

It  concerns,  it  matters,  refert  (with 
gen.). 

(584.)  Examples  and  Rules. 


It  is  agreeable,  libet,  or  lubet  (with 
dat.). 

It  is  allowed,  lawful  {one  must),  li- 
cet (licuit  and  licitum  est),  dat. 

It  happens,  contingit  {dot.).  Accidit 
(used  rather  of  evil  accidents). 

It  is  expedient,  expedit  [dat.). 

With  my  permissioii,  me  a  voluntate 
[abl.,  55,  a). 


Pueros    oportet    diligentes 
esse  (=i^  behooves  boys  to 
be  diligent). 
D  e  c  e  t     verecundum      ess6 
adolescentem. 

(a)  Oportet  and  decet  are  followed  by  the  accusative 
and  infinitive. 

[I^"  Oportet  is  also  followed  by  the  subjunctive.] 


(a)  Boys  ought  to  he  dili- 
gent. 

It  becomes  a  young  man  to 
be  modest. 


Majari  parti  pi  a  c  uit  castra 

defendere. 
P  1  a  c  u  i  t  Csesari  ut  ad  Ario- 

vistum  legates  mitteret. 


(b)  (1)  It  pleased  the  major- 
ity to  defend  the  camp. 
(2)  Ccesar  determined 
{=it  pleased  Ccesar)  to 
send  ambassadors  to 
Ariovistus. 

^(h)  Placet  (expressing  b. purpose)  may  be  followed  by  the 
dative,  with  (1)  the  infinitive,  or  (2)  the  subjunctive  with  ut. 


(c)  /  may  go  (=  it  is  allowed 

to  me  to  go). 
You  may  go. 
I  might  have  gone  (=  it  was 

allowed  to  me  to  go). 
I  may  be  idle. 
I  do  not  choose  (=  it  is  not 

agreeable  to  me). 


Mihi  ire  licet. 

Tibi  ire  licet. 
Mihi  ire  licuit. 

Mihi  6tioso  esse  1  i  e  e  t. 
Non  1  i  b  e  t  mihi. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  229 

(c)  Licet,  lib^t,  and,  in  short,  aU  impersonds  which  admit 
to  or  for  after  them  in  English,  are  followed  by  the  dative. 


{d)  It  concerns  all  (=it  is 

the  interest  of  all). 
It  concerns  me. 
It  is  your  concern. 
It  is  my  business* 


Interest  omnium. 

Mea  interest. 
Tua  refert. 
Mea  refert. 


{d)  Interest  governs  the  genitive ;  but  when  a  personal 
pronoun  is  to  be  used,  the  possessive  ablative  (mea,  tua,  &c.) 
is  used  instead  of  the  genitive  (mei,  tui,  6cc.).  Refert  is 
rarely  used  except  with  these  ablative  forms. 

(585.)   Translate  into  English. 

Omnium  interest  vera  (accus.pl.)  dicere.  —  Interest 
mea  recte  facere. — Non  libet  mihi  pi-aeliiim  committere. — 
Caesari  n5n  placuit  prselium  committere.  —  Interest  mea 
hoc  (accus.)  scribere.  —  Legatus  petebat,  ut  sibi  discedere 
liceret. — Expedit  reipublicae  (dat.,5S4:,c.). — Tibi  licet 
id  facere.  —  Mea  voluntate  tibi  id  facere  licet. — Helvetii 
rogant  ut  (548,  a)  Csesaris  voluntate  id  facere  lie  eat. — Caesa- 
rem  oportet  ad  Ariovistum  venire. — Ariovistus  dixit;  Caesa- 
rem  oportere  (574,  a)  ad  se  venire. — Placuit  Caesari  ut 
decimam  legionem  mitteret.  —  Amicitiam  immortalem  esse 
oportet.  —  Mihi  negligenti  esse  non  licet.  —  Nobis  venire 
licuit. — Liberorum  (65,  R.)  interest  parentes  vivere  et 
salvos  esse. — Tibi  ignavo  esse  non  licet. — Peccare  nemini 
lice t. — D e c e t  te  esse  diligentem. 

(586.)   Translate  into  Latin,  ] 

Boys  ought  to  be  modest  (584,  a). — You  oight  to  do  this.— 
You  ought  to  have  done  this  (oportuit,  with  pres.  infi} 
facere).  —  It  becomes  us  to  follow  nature. — It  becomes  a 
young  man  to  love  his  parents. — The  general  determined  (=  it 
pleased  the  general)  to  make  the  attack. — The  Helvetians  de- 
termined to  send  ambassadors  to  Caesar.  —  You  may  do  this 
(584,  c). — You  may  not  do  this. — I  do  not  choose  (=it  is  not 
agreeable  to  me)  to  ride-on-horseback. — I  do  not  choose  to  come 
to  the  city. — It  is  every -body's  interest  (=it  interests  all)  to  do 
rightly  (584,  d). — It  is  my  business  to  keep  (my)  word  (fides). 
— You  are  not  allowed  to  come. — We  ought  to  praise  the  brave. 

u 


§  19. 
IRREGULAR  VERBS.    (XCVII.— CII.) 


LESSON  XCVIL 

Possum,  Posse,  Pot-ui,  to  be  able,  (can). 

(587.)  Pos-sum  is  compounded  of  pot-is,  able,  and  the 
verb  sum.  The  t  before  s  is  changed  to  s ;  e.  g.,  pot-sum, 
pos-sum;  pot-sunt,  pos-sunt. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres.     Ipos-sum.  |  p6t-es.     |p6t-est.     [pos-sumns.    |p6t-estis.  1  pos-sunt. 


I7np.,  p6t-6r^Lm;  Petf.,  p6t-ui;  Plup.,  pot-ueram;  Fut.,  p6t-er6  j  Fut. 
Perf.,  p6t-u6r6 ;  all  regit lar. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.      pos-sini.     pos-sis.      pos-sit. 
Imperf.  pos-s§m,    posses,     pos-set. 


pos-simiis.      pos-sitis.    pos  sint. 
pos-semus.     ^^^^  f^^-'ic    m^a  .,«»,<- 


pos-setis.  pos-sent. 


Perf.,  pot-uerlm ;  Plup.,  pot-uissem :  regular. 


Injin.  Pres.,  pos-se ;  Perf.,  p6t-uiss6 ;  Part.,  pot-ens  (used  only  as  an 
adjective). 


EXERCISE. 


(588.)  Vocabulary, 

Laughter,  risiis,  us,  m. 

To  sow,  sSrSrS  (sev-,  sat-). 

Good  deed,  act  of  kindness,  bSnSf  i- 

cium,  i. 
Reap,  m6t6r6  (messu-,  mess-). 
To  do  good  to,  to  benefit,  prodessS 

(prof  U-,  pr6+sum) ;  governs  dot. 
Hang  over,  impendere. 

(589.)  Examples, 
(a)  To  he  very  powerful, 

(6)  Of  the  whole  of  Gaul^  the 
Helvetians  are  the  most 
powerful. 


To  render,  reddfire   (reddid-,   red- 

dit-). 
Influence,  gratia,  re. 
Fraud,  fraus,  (fraud)  is  (293). 
Restrain,  retinere  (r6tinu-,  retent-, 

re4-t6nere). 
With  equanimity,  eequo  Snimo  {abl., 

=  with  equable  mind). 


Plurimum  posse  (=  to  be  very 

much  able), 
Totius  Galliae  plurimum  Hel- 
v6tii  possunt. 


POSSE,  TO  BE  ABLE.  231 


(c)  A  very  few   can   keep 
o^(many). 

(d)  In  the  rest  of  Gaul. 


Perpauci  prdhibere  possunt. 
In  reliqua  Gallia. 


[What  is  the  rule  for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  ?    551,  3.] 
[What  case  do  the  compounds  of  sum  (prosum,  desum,  &c.)  govern  ? 
267,  b.] 

(590.)   Translate  into  English. 

Beatus  esse  sine  virtu te  nemo  potest. — Per  risum  multum 
poteris  cognoscere  stultum. — Sere  {imperative)  beneficia,  ut 
possis  (548,  <z)  metere  fructum. — Viri  boni  siiraus,  si  (iis) 
prosumus,  quibus  p  o  s  s  u  m  u  s. — Semper  ita  vivamus  (528,  6) 
ut  rationem  reddere  possimus  (553,  h). — Mons  altissimus 
impendet  ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere  possint  (553,  b), — 
Mons  altissimus  impendebat  ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere  p  o  s  - 
sen  t. — Sine  agricultura  homines  vivere  non  p  o  s  s  u  n  t. — Nostri 
hostes  consequi  non  potuerunt,  quod  equites  insiilam  capere 
non  potu^rant. — Divitiacus  plurimum  domi  {at  home)  atque 
in  reliqua  Gallia  poterat  (589,  a). — Fraus  est  accipere  quod 
non  poteris  reddere. — Non  est  diibium  quin  totius  GalliaB 
plurimum  Helvetii  possint  (558,  h), — Germani  retineri  non 

poterant  quin  in  nostros  tela  conjicerent  (558,  fe,  5) Caesar 

potest  iter  Helvetiis  (54)  dare. — Caesar  negat  se  posse  iter 
Helvetiis  dare. — Caesar  negat  se,  more  et  exemplo  (55,  a)  populi 
Romani,  posse  iter  ulli  (194,  R.)  per  provinciam  dare. 

(591.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Men  cannot  be  happy  without  virtue. — Without  arts  we  can- 
not live. — Let  us  always  so  live  (528,  h)  that  (553,  6)  we  may 
be  able  to  die  with  equanimity. — Let  us  sow  good-deeds,  that 
we  may  be  able  to  reap  fruit. — The  chief  was  very  powerful, 
not  only  (non  solum)  at  home,  but  also  (sed  etiam)  in  the 
rest  of  Gaul.— Caesar  denies  that  (574,  c)  he  is  able  to  give  a 
passage  to  the  ambassadors  through  the  province. — Caesar  finds- 
out  (reperit)  that  the  chief  is  very  powerful  {accus,  icith  inf.). 
— Caesar  finds  out  that  the  chief  is  very  powerful,  not  only  at 
home,  but  also  among  the  neighbouring  states. — The  enemy 
cannot  be  restrained  from  (quin)  hurling  darts  against  our 
soldiers. 


232 


VELLE,  NOLLE,  MALLE. 


LESSON  XCVIII. 


Velle,  to  be  willing. — Nolle,  to  be  unwilling. — Malle, 
to  be  more  willing,  to  prefer. 
(592.)  Nolo  =z  non  volo  ;  malo  =  magis  volo. 


(a)   INDICATIVE. 


Pres.) 


void, 
nolo, 
maid. 


VIS. 

nonvis. 
mavis. 


vult. 

nonvult. 

mavult. 


volumus. 
nolumus. 
malumus. 


vultis. 

nonvultis. 

mavaltis. 


v61uiit. 
nolunt. 
malunt. 


Rem.  The  following  tenses  are  regfular:  Imperf.,  volebSm,  nole- 
bam,  malebam;  Per/.,  volui,  noluT,  malui;  Fut,  vol&m, 
nolam,  malam;  FuL  Per/.,  voluer 6,  noluero,  malu6r6. 


(b)   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.     J 

vel- 
ttol- 
mal- 

>     im. 

is. 

tt. 

imus. 

itis. 

int. 

Imperf. ) 

vell- 
noU- 
mall- 

>     6m. 

es. 

§t. 

emus. 

etis. 

ent. 



Hem.  1.  Regular  are,  Perf.,  voluerim,  noluerim,  maluSrim ;  Pluperf., 
v6luissem,  noluissem,  maluissera. 

2.  Imperative,  noli,  nolltd ;  nolite,  nolitotS,  ndlunt5.     (Imperative  of 
void  and  maid  wanting.) 

3.  Participles,  vol-ens,  nol-ens. 

4.  Infinitives :   Pres.,  vellS,  nolle,  mallg ;    Past,  v61uiss6,  noluissS, 
maluissS. 

EXERCISE. 


(593.)   Vocabulary. 

To  he  empty,   unoccupied,  vftcarS 

(av-,  at-),  intrans. 
Neighbour,  finitimus,  S,  um  (with 

dat.). 
Attentive,  attentiis,  a,  um. 
Attentively,  attents  [adv). 
Grant,  concession,  concessfts,  fls. 
Content,  contentus,   &,   um    (with 

ahl). 

(594.)  Examples, 
(a)  If  they  luish  anything. 
(a)  .The  verbs  velle,  noil 
govern  the  accusative. 


To  seem,  videri  {pass,  of  viderfi). 
To  return,  to  come  back,  rSvertI 

(revers-),  dep. 
Old  man,  s6nex,  (sen)  Is  (108,  R.  1). 
On  the  Ides  of  April,  ad  idus  Apri- 

lis  (the  13th  of  April). 
April,  Aprills,  Is,  m.  (25,  <z). 
Docile,  d6cilis,  d  (104). 


I  Si  quid  v«lint. 

e,  malle,  as  transitive  verbs, 


VELLE,  NOLLE,  MALLB.  233 

(h)  He  is  willing  to  hear.      \  Vult  audire. 

(b)  The  verbs  vell^,  no  11 6,  malle,  take  the  infinitive 
ifter  them,  as  the  complementary  object  (210). 

(c)  Caesar  is  not  willing  that    Non  vult  Caesar  eiim  locum 
that  country  should  remain       v  a  c  a  r  e. 

unoccupied. 

(c)  The  verbs  v  e  1 1  e,  nolle,  malle,  admit  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive  after  them. 

[What  is  the  rule  for  principal  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua  ?    (574,  a.) 
For  subordinate  sentences  ?     (574,  b).'\ 

(595.)   Translate  into  English. 
Ego  non  eadem  volo,  senex  (225,  a)  quae  volui  adolescens. 

—  Si  vis  amari,  ama  {imperative).  —  Non  vult  Caesar  eum 
locum  vacare.  —  Noluit  Caesar  eum  locum,  unde  Helvetii 
discesserant,  vacare ;  ne  Germani  f  initimi  Galliae  (54)  essent 
(548,  h). — Boni  homines,  miseri  quam  improbi  esse,  malunt. 

—  Fere  libenter  homines  id  quod  volunt,  credunt.  —  Idem 
V  e  1 1  e  et  idem  nolle,  ea*  firma  amicitia  est. — Docilis  est  qui 
attente  vult  audire.  —  Quem  docilem  velis  facere,  simiil 
attentum  facias  oportet  (584,  a,  ^^). — Nisi  Caesar  Romanis 
(147)  soliis  imperare  voluisset  (542,  &),  a  Bruto  et  Casslo  non 
interfectus  esset. — Ariovistus  dixit  se  regnum  malle  (574,  a) 
Caesaris  concessa  (55,  a)  quam  ^duorum  beneficio  habere. — 
Malum  us,  cum  virtute,  paucis  (55,  a)  contenti  esse,  quam 
sine  virtute  multa  habere.  —  Aristides  bonus  esse  m  a  1  e  b  a  t 
quam  videri. — Habet  iracundia  hoc  mali  (186,  «,  R.) ;  non  vult 
regi. — Caesar  legatis  respondet  (574,  a)  diem  se  ad  deliberan- 
dum (489)  sumpturum  (esse) ;  si  quid  v  e  1  i  n  t  (542,  &,  2)  ad 
Idiis  Aprilis  revertantur  (574,  h). — TamSn  Caesar,  iit  spatium 
intercedere  posset  (548,  a)  dum  milites  convenirent,  legatis 
respondit,  diem  se  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum;  si  quid  vel- 
1  e  n  t,  ad  Idus  Aprilis  reverterentur. — Caesar  ab  Helvetiis  dis- 
cedere  nolebat.  —  Omnia  erunt  f acili^  si  voles  (542,  h). — 
Ariovistus  respondet;  si  quid  Caesar  a  se  velit,  ilium  ad  se 
venire  oportere. — Ariovistus  respondit,  si  quid  Caesar  a  se  v el- 
let,  ilium  ad  se  venire  oportere. 

*  Eft  is  in  apposition  with  the  clause  idem  velle  et  idem  nolle. 

U2 


234 


FERRE,  TO  BEAR,  BRING. 


LESSON  XCIX. 
Fero,  Ferre,  Tuli,  Latum,  to  hear,  bring, 

(596.)  (a)       PARADIGM    OF    IRREGULAR    FORMS. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres.  Act.       fero.       fers.        fert. 
Pres.  Pass,     feror.      ferris.      fertur. 


ferimus.      fertis.  feruiit. 

feriraur.      ferimini.      feruntur. 


INFINITIVE. 


Aci. 
Pass. 


Pres.,  ferr6,  to  bear. 
Pres.,  ferri,  to  be  borne. 


Per/.,  tulisse,  to  have 

borne. 
Perf.,  latus  ess6,  to 

fiave  been  borne. 


Fut.,  laturus  ess6. 
Put.,  f  erendum  esse. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Imperf.  Act. 
Imperf.  Pass. 


ferr- 

6m. 

es.. 

6t. 

emits. 

etis. 

ent. 

ferr- 

er. 

eris  (e). 

etiir. 

emur. 

emmi. 

entur. 

IMPEKATIVE. 


Active.        2.  fer,  ferto.  3.  ferto. 

Passive.      2.  ferre,  fertor.      3.  fertor. 


2.  ferte,  fertote.      3.  f  eruntS. 
2.  ferimim.  3.  feruntor. 


(&)  The  remaining  tenses  are  formed  regularly  from  fer-, 
the  present  stem;  till-,  the  perfect  stem;  and  lat-,  the  supine 
stem. 

1.  From  fer-, 

Imperfect  active  and  passive^  f  erebam,  f  erebar. 
Future  active  and  passive^  f  eram,  es ;  f  erar,  eris. 
Participle  active  and  passive^  f  erens,  f  erendus.    Gerund^ 
f  erendi,  &;c. 

2.  From  tul-, 

Indicative  perfect,  tuli ;  pluperfect,  tiileram ;  future  per- 
fect, tiilerS. 
Subjunctive  perfect,  tiil^rim ;  pluperfect,  tiilissem. 

3.  From  lat-, 

Participle  passive,  latiis  :  hence  all  the  passive  forms,  latus 

sum,  eram,  ero,  sim,  essem,  &c. ;  laturus  sum,  sim,  &c. 

(c)  The  compounds  are  inflected  in  the  same  way ;  e,  g., 

inferre,  to  bring  against ;   intiili,  illatum  ;*  inf 6ro,  infers,  in- 

fert,  &c. 

{d)  ToUo,  toilers,  to  raise,  to  take  away,  forms  its  perfect 
and  supine  from  tiili,  latum,  viz.,  sustuli,  sublatiim. 


*  in+l&tum=illatilm,  n  being  changed  into  1  before  L 


PEKRE,  TO  BEAR,  BRING. 


235 


EXERCISE. 


(597.)   Vocabulary. 

Frequent,  creber,  bra,  brum  (77,  a). 
Rumour,  rumor,  (rumor)  is  (319). 
To  bring  to,  bring,  aflferr6  (attul-, 

allat-,  ad+ferre). 
To  bring  together,  conferre  (contul-, 

collat-,  con+ferr6) ;  to  betake  Okie's 

self,  se  conferre. 
Poor,  helpless,  inops,  (inop)  is  (in+ 

ops),  adj.,  107. 
To  prefer,  praeferre  (tul-,  lat-,  proB+ 

ferre) ;  governs  ace.  and  dat. 
Mean,  sordid,  sordidiis,  a,  um. 

(598.)  Examples. 

(a)  It  is  the  part, 
It  is  the  duty, 
It  is  the  mark. 
It  is  the  characteristic, 
of  a  vnse  man. 
ifi)  The  jpoets  say. 

They  say. 
F  erunt  is  used  for  they  say, 
with  the  infinitive. 


To  bring  against,  inferrS  (tul-,  lat-) , 

governs  ace.  and  dat. 
To  make  war  upon  one,  bellum  fili- 

cui  inferrS. 
Especially,  praesertim. 
Giant,  gigas,  (gigant)  is,  m.  (N.  on 

p.  133). 
To  conspire,  plot,  conjurfilre  (av-,  at-). 
Impediment,  impSdimentum,  i. 
Baggage,  impedimenta,  orum  [pi.). 
Whatever,  quicquid  (n.  of  quisquis). 


Est  sapientis  (=itisofa 
wise  man). 


Poetae  f erunt. 

F^runt. 

and  followed  by  the  accusative 


(599.)   Translate  into  English. 

Eas  res  Caesar  grtlviter  fert. — Caesar  dicit,  eas  res  se  gravi- 
ter  ferrS. — Sapiens  bonS.  suS,  seciim  (125,  II.,  h)  fert. — 
Terra  circa  solem  ita  fertur  lit  circa  earn  simul  luna  ferei- 
tur. — Crebri  rumores  ad  Caesarem  afferebantur,  omnes 
Belgas  contra  populum  Romanum  conjtirare,  obsides  que  inter 
se  dare. — Helvetia  nostrorum  impetus  (ace.  pi.)  sustinere  non 
possunt. — Diutius  quum  Helvetii  nostrorum  impetus  sustinere 
non  possent  (563,  h)  alter!  se  in  montem  receperunt,  alter!  ad 
impedimenta  et  carros  s6  contiilerunt. — Helvetii  in  unum 
locum  impedimenta  contulerunt. — Ferte  misero  (54)  atque 
inop!  (54)  auxilium. — Est  sapientis  (598,  a)  injurias  aequo  ani- 
mo  f  erre. — Est  bon!  (598,  a),  raiseris  atque  inopibus  auxilium 
ferre. — Quid  quae(][ue  (178,  6)  nox  aut  dies  ferat,  inceitum 


236  FIERI,  iiDERE. 

est. — P^ctiniam  praeferre  ^micitiae  sordidum  est. — Amiciti- 
am  praeferre  pecuniae  honestum  est. — Ariovistus  populo  Ro- 
mano bellum  intiilit. — Caesari  nunciatum  est  (578,  c)  Ariovis- 
tum  populo  Romano  bellum  intulisse. — ^Equo  animo  fera- 
m u s  quicquid  n6*bis  accidat. — F  erenda  est  fortuna,  prae- 
sertim  quae  abest  a  culpa. — Improbi  ad  voluptatem  feruntur. 
— Poetae  ferunt  (598,  &),  gigantes  bellum  diis  (62,  R.  3)  in- 
t  ii  1  i  s  s  e. — Demetiius,  quum  patria  pulsus  esset  (563,  b)  ad 
Ptolemaeum regem  se  contiilit. — Catilinae  socii  arma  contra 
patriam  f e r e b an t.  —  Domos  suas  Helvetii  reliquerunt,  ut 
toti  (194,  R.  1)  Galliae  bellum  infer  rent  (548,  a). 


LESSON  C. 

Fieri,  to  become,  to  be  done,  to  happen. — E  d  e  r  e,  or 
E  s  s  e,  ^0  eat. 

1.  Fieri. 

(600.)  Fieri  forms  the  passive  of  f  a  c  e  r  e,  to  ma/ce,  to  do. 
The  tenses  are  formed  regularly  with  the  endings  of  the  4th 
conjugation,  except  the  infinitive  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres.j       fi-o,  fi-s,  fi-t,  &c.  Imperf.,       f lebSm,  has,  &c. 

Fvt,         fiam,  fies,  &c.  P^rf.,  factus  sum,  e  ,  est,  &c. 

Pluperf.,  factus  erSm,  eras,  &c.    Fut.  Perf.,  factus  ero,  eris,  &c. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.,  fi&m,  fias,  &c. Imperf.,  fierem,  fieres,  &c. 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres.,  fi6ri ;  Perf.,  factus,  a,  iim,  esse  ;  Fut,  factum  iri,  or  futuriiiu 
esse,  or  f6r6. 


PAKTICIPLES. 


P^res.  wanting  ;  Perf.,  factus  ;  Fut.,  f  adCendus. 


Rem.  Observe  that  in  all  the  forms  of  this  verb  except  fieri  and 
fierem,  res,  &c.,  the  i  is  lon^,  contrary  to  the  general  rule  that  a 
vowel  before  another  is  short. 

2.  Edere  (esse). 
(601.)  E  d 6 r ^  (or  esse),  to  eat,  forms  all  the  tenses  regu- 
larly with  the  endings  of  the  third  conjugation ;  but  it  has,  in 


FIERI,  EDERE. 


287 


iddition,  a  few  forms  similar  t»  those  of  e  s  s  6,  to  he,,  which 
ire  shown  in  the  following  table  : 


c 

edis 

edit 

edltis 

Indic.  Pres.    . 

edo. 

or 

es. 

or 

est. 

edimus. 

or 

estis. 

edunt. 

( 

gdSrSm 

ederes 

6der6t 

Sderemfis 

ederetis 

edgrent 

SUBJ.  Imperf.  { 

or 

or 

or 

or 

or 

or 

( 

essem. 

esses. 

esset. 

essemus. 

essetis. 

essent. 

C 

ede 

edito 

6dite 

editote 

Imperative.  \ 

or 

or 

or 

or 

edunto. 

\ 

es. 

esto. 

este. 

estote. 

SickiiesSf   oegritudo,    (aegritudin)   » 

(340). 
To  eat  up,  corrode,  ex6d6re  (ex+ 

6der6). 
Fate,  fatum,  i. 
Perpetual,  perpetuus,  ft,  um. 
Poor,  paupSr,  (pauper)  is  (107). 
To  drink,  bibere  (bib-,  bibit-). 


Fit,  ut  minus  late  T&gen- 
tur. 


Rem.  E  s,  from  e  s  s  e,  ^o  be,  is  short ;  from  e  s  s  e,  ^o  eat,  it  is  long  (e  s). 
EXERCISE. 

•(602.)    Vocabulary. 

To  waiider,  vSgare  {dep.). 
Fewness,    small   number,   paucitas, 

(paucitat)  is  (293). 
To  be  born,  nasci  (nat-),  dep. 
To  admonish,  admonere   (ad+mo- 

nere,  monti-,  m6nit-). 
Among,  apud  [prep.,  acc^. 
According  to,  secundum  {prep.,  ace). 
Less,  minus  {adv.). 

(603.)  Examples. 

(a)  It  happens  (it  is  brought 
to  pass)  that  they  wander 
less  widely. 

Ut  with  subjunctive,  expressing  a  consequence,  frequently 
follows  fit. 

(b)  He  was  informed  (=  he    Certior  factus  est  (may  be 
was  made  more  certain).         followed  by  ace.  with  infin.). 

(c)  Cicero  was  made  consul.    Cicero  consul  factus  est. 
The  verb  f  i  e  r  i  admits  a  predicate-nominative  after  it. 

(d)  Nothing  could  he  done.    \  Nihil  fieri  poterat. 

[Repeat  the  rule  for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  (551,  3).] 

(604.)   Translate  into  English. 

His  rebus  fit,  ut  Helvetii  minus  late  vagentur  (603,  a). — 
His  rebus  f  i  e  b  a  t,  ut  Helvetii  minus  late  vagarentur. — His 
rebus  f  it  ut  Helvetii  minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  inferrS  pos- 
sint. — De  Caesaris  adventu  Mdxxi  certiores  facti  sunt.— Cae- 


238 


IRE,  aUIRE,  NEaUIRE. 


sar,  litteris  (55,  a)  Labieni  certior  fie  bat,  omnes  Belgas  con 
tra  popiilum  Romanum  conjurare,  obsidesque  inter  se  dare.— - 
Imperator  dixit,  id  fi^ri  posse. — Nostrorum  propter  paucita 
tern  nihil  fie  ri  poterat. — Labienus  prselium  commisit,  ut  un- 
dique  uno  tempore  (118,  II.,  c)  in  hostes  impetus  fie  ret.—' 
NenK)  fit  casu  (55,  a)  bonus. — Poeta  nascitur,  non  fit. — Si 
fato  (55,  a)  omnia  fiunt  (542,  6,  1),  nihil  nos  admonere  potest 
ut  cautiores  f  i  a  m  u  s. — Contra  vim  sine  vi  nihil  f  i  e  r  i  potest. 
— Diligentia  (55,  a)  omnia  f  i  u  n  t  f  acilia  (603,  c). — Apud  vete- 
res  Romanes,  ex  agi'icolis  interdum  fie  bant  consiiles ;  ita 
Cincinnatus  consul  (603,  c)  fact  us  est.  —  Omnia  quae  se- 
cundum naturam  f  i  u  n  t,  habenda  sunt  (502)  in  bonis.* — 
Saepe  qui  ex  pauperibus  divites  fiunt,  divitiis  (abL,  316,  b) 
titi  nesciunt. — Vivimus  ut  e  d  a  m  u  s  ;  non  e  d  i  m  n  s  ut  vi- 
vamiis — Ed  ere  oportet  ut  vivamus,  non  vivere  ut  6  dam  us. 
— E  s  s  e  (601)  oportet  ut  vivas,  non  vivere  ut  edas. — Perpetu^ 
cura  animum  avail  exes  t. — Bibe,  e  s. — Bibite,  est  6. — • 
.^gritudo  animum  e  x  e  s  t. 


LESSON  CI. 
I  r  e,  ^0  go. — Q  u  i  r  e,  to  be  able  (can), — N  e  q  u  i  r  e,  ^o 
be  unable  (cannot). 
(605.)  E6,  ire,  ivi,  itiim,  to  go,  mostly  follows  the  4th  conju- 
gation ;  but  is  irregular  in  the  present  tense,  gerund,  and  su- 
pine, as  appears  by  the  following 

PARADIGM. 


TENSES. 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. 

Imperf. 

Put. 

Perf. 

Pluperf. 

Put.  Perf. 

e6,  is,  it,  imus,  itis,  eunt. 
ib&m,  ibas,  ibat,  &c. 

ibd,  ibis.  &c ibunt. 

ivi  or  ii,  ivisti,  ivit  or  iit,  &c. 
ivgrtlm,  ivSras,  &c. 
iv6rd,  iv6rls,  &c. 

earn,  eas,  eat,  6amus,  6atls,  6ant. 
ir6m,  ires,  iret,  &c. 
iturus,  sim,  sis,  sit,  &c. 
ivgrim,  iveris,  ivSrit,  &c. 
iviss6m,  ivisses,  ivisset,  &c. 

IMPEB.     I 

INFINITIVE. 

SUPINE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

GERUND. 

i,  ito,  itd. 

im,  itote. 

eantd. 

Pres.,  ir6. 
Perf.,  iviss6  or 

iss6. 
Put.,   ituriim 

ess3. 

itum. 
itu. 

Pres.,    iens  (euntis). 
Put.,      iturus,  a,  urn. 
Verbal,  eundiis,  a,  um. 

eundi. 
eundo,  &c. 

^  HabendS  sunt  in  bonis  =  should  be  reckoned  among  blessings. 


IRE,  aUIRE,  NEaUlRE.  239 

Rem.  1.  In  the  same  manner  the  compounds  are  formed ;  4.  g.,  exire, 

abire,  &c. ;  but  they  generally  drop  the  v  in  the  perfect-stem ;  thus, 

ab-ii,  ab-isti,  ab-iit,  abisse,  abissem,  &c. 
2.  Some  of  the  compounds  obtain  a  transitive  force,  and  then  take  a 

passive  form  like  other  transitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.,  proeterire,  to  pass 

hy ;  praetereor,  /  am  passed  by,  &c. 

(606.)  Queo,  I  can,  I  am  able ;  nequeo,  /  cannot,  I  am  un- 
able, are  conjugated  like  eo,  I  go ;  but  they  rarely  occur  except 
in  the  present  tense. 

EXERCISE. 

(607.)   Vocabulary. 

To  go  out,  exire  (ex-fire).  Takes 
abl.,  with  or  without  prep.  de. 

To  return,  rSdlre  (re+ir6  ;  d  insert- 
ed for  euphony). 

To  undergo,  subire  (sub+Ir6) ;  gov- 
erns accus. 

A  return^  returning,  reditio,  (rddi- 
tion)  is  (333,  R.). 

Ready,  prepared,  piratfis,  ft,  um 
{part,  oj  parare). 

To  pass  over,  transirS  (trans+Tr6). 

Before,  prae,  adv.  [or prep,  with  abl.). 

Of  Cannes,  Cannensis,  6  (104). 

Whither,  qu5,  adv. 

fi^^  Recollect,  they  went  =  lveTunt  or  iSrunt. 

he  departed  =  ah  lit,  rather  than  abivtt;  and  so  of 
other  compounds. 
[Give  the  Rule  for  u  t  (purpose),  548,  a), 

(608.)   Translate  into  English, 

Helv^tii  de  finibus  suis  exeunt. — Org^torix  Helvetiis  (dat.) 
persuadet,  ut  de  finibus  suis  ex e ant. — Orgetorix  Helvetiis 
persuasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  ommbus  copiis  (property) 
exire nt. — Domum  (113,  III.,  R.)  redeunt. — Omnia  peri- 
culS,  siibeunt.  —  Helvetii,  domiim  reditionis  spe  sublata 
(456),  paratiores  ad  omnia  pericula  siibeunda  (496)  erant. 
— Caesar  in  Asiam  transiit.  —  Pompeius  in  Asiam  trans- 
i^rat. — Domo  [abl,)  exire  possunt. — Erant  omnino  itinera 
duo,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exire  possent. — iEdui  per  fines 
suos  HelvStios  irS  p&tiuntur. — Pagus  Tigurinus  domo  exi- 


By  what  route?  quo  TtinerS  [abl., 

55,  a). 
To  perish,  pSrirS  (p6r-fire). 
Manfully,  virllit6r  (215,  2). 
Tell  me,  die  {imperat.  of  dicerfi). 
Whether — or,  utrum — an. 
Taken  away,  sublatus,  fi,  iim  [pari. 

pass,  of  sxi^erre  (sub+ferre)). 
Of  Zurich,  Tigurinus,  a,  um. 
2h  suffer,  allow,  pati  (pass-),  dep. 
To  fight,  decertare  (av-,  at-). 
To  be  sick,  segrotare  (av-,  at-). 
Light,  lux,  (luc)  IS  (293). 


240  IRE,  aUIRE,  NEaUIRE. 

^  r  a  t. — Hie  pagus  unus,  quum  domd  e  x  i  s  s  e  t,  L .  Cassium, 
consulem,  interfecerat,  6t  ejus  exercitum  siib  jiigum  miserat. 
— Helvetii  in  earn  partem  ibunt,  iibi  Caesar  constituent. — 
Quo  ittnere  (55,  a)  hostes  i  e  r  u  n  t  ? — Eodem  itinere,  quo  hos- 
tes  ierant,  Caesar  ad  eos  contendit,  equitatumque  omnem 
ante  se  mittit. — I  bam  forte  Via  Sacra  (55,  a)  sicut  meus  est 
mos. — I  prae,  ego  sequar. — Ex  pugna  Cannensi  admodum  pauci 
Roman!  do  mum  redierunt. — I,  quo  tefortuna  vocet  (534,  d)» 
— Quicquid  transiit  temporis  {186, a,  Rule)  peril t. — Quidam 
ferro  (55,  a)  decertare  acerrime  possunt,  aegrotare  vlriliter  non 
queunt.  —  Sine  luce  colores  esse  nequeunt.  —  Pompeius 
periit.  —  Die  utrum  queas  an  nequeas  mecum  ire. — 
Risiis  interdum  Ita  repente  erumplt,  ut  eam  ciipientes  (442,  c) 
tenere  nequeamus  (553,  &,  R.). 


§  20. 
DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


LESSON  CII. 
Aio,  Inquam,  Novi,  Memini,  Caspi,  OdL 
(609.)  A  i  o,  I  say^  say  yes,  affirm,  is  used  in  very  few  tenses. 


Ind.  Pres. 

aio. 

dis. 

ait. 

aiunt. 

Ind.  Irnperf. 

aiebam. 

-bas. 

-bat. 

-bftmus. 

batis. 

bant. 

Subj.  Pres. 

aias. 

aiat. 

aiant. 

Part.  Pres. 

aiens  (aientls)  used  only  as  adgec. 

(610.)  Inquam,  I  say,  is  used  between  the  words  of  a  quo- 
tation. 


Ind.  Pres. 
Ind.  Imperf. 

inquam. 

inquis. 

inquit. 
inquieb&t 

inquimus. 

inquiunt. 
inquiebant. 

Ind.  Fut. 

inquiSs. 

inquibat. 
inquiet. 

Ind.  Perf. 
Subj.  Pres. 

inquiam. 

inquisti. 
as. 

inquit. 
at. 

atis. 

ant. 

(611.)  Novi,  I  know ;  m^mini,  I  remember ;  coepi,  I 
have  begun,  I  began ;  5  d  i,  7  hate,  are  perfect  forms  with 
present  meanings.  All  the  tenses  made  on  the  perfect  stem 
exist,  regularly  formed. 


INFINITIVE. 


novisse, 
to  knmo. 


meminisse, 
to  remember. 


coepiss6,  odisse, 

to  have  begun,     to  hate. 


INDICATIVE   AND   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


nov- 


fi,  isti,  it,  &c. 
erim,  eras,  erat,  &c. 
ero,  ens,  6nt,  &c. 
erim,  6ris,  6rit,  &c. 
issSm,  isses,  iss6t,  &c. 


Ind.  Pres.,    /  know. 
Ind.  Past,     I  remembered. 
Ind.  Fut.,     /  shall  begin. 
Subj.  Pres.,  /  may  know. 
Subj.  Past,    /  might  hate. 


Imperative,  m6ment6,  mementote  (the  others  wanting). 


{^P  Recolleet,  n  5  v  i = /  kn^w  (not  I  have  known) ;  noveram,  J  kneuy 
(not  /  had  knawn),  &c.;  and  so  of  the  others.  But  coepi,  novi,  &c., 
may  be  used  as  perf.  pres.,  =  /  have  known,  I  have  begun,  &c. 

X 


242 


AIO,  maUAM,  NOVI,  ETC. 


EXERCISE. 


(612.)    Vocabulary. 

To  fall  back,  to  give  toay,  pgdem 

r6ferr6  (=  to  draw  back  the  foot). 
Young,  raw,  inexperienced,  tiro,  (tl- 

ron)  is  (107). 
Surly,  f  groculus,  a,  lim. 
Lucius  Varius,  L.  Varias,  T. 
Forgetful,  immgmor,  (immSmor)  is 

(107) ;  governs  genit. 
Calmly,  quietly,  tranquillitSr  (tran- 

quill-us,  215,  II.,  a). 

(613.)  Examples, 

(a)  He  exhorts  them  to  re- 

memher, 
(h)  ArisHdes,    when    ashed 

what    was   justy    replied, 

"  Not  to  covet  what  belongs 

to  others.^* 


Cruelty,  soevitiS,  se. 

Demonax,  Deraonax,  (ftc)  is  (a  phi- 
losopher of  Hadrian's  time). 

To  philosophize,  philosSphari  [dep.). 

In  no  way,  by  no  means,  null6  modo 
{abl). 

Conscious,  conscius,  ft,  Qm  (with  dat, 
of  person,  gen,  of  thing). 

Livy,  Livius,  i. 


Hortatur  eos  ut   mSmlnS- 

rint. 
Aristides  interrogatus  quid 
justura  esset  ?  *♦  Alienfi,," 
i n q ui t,  " non  concupiscSre" 
(=  "  Not  to  covet,"  said  he, 
"what,"  &c.). 

1^*  I  n  q  u  a  m  is  used  in  quoting  the  very  words  of  another 
(oratio  recta),  and  is  always  placed  among  the  words  quoted 
(as  *'  said  /ie"  in  English).  A  i  t  is  used  generally  in  quoting 
the  sense,  not  the  exact  words  of  another  (oratio  obliqua). 


(c)  He  began  to  build  the 

city. 
The  city  began  to  be  built. 


Urb^m  sedif icare  c  ce  p  i  t. 

Urbs  aedtficari  cceptft  est. 
'  If  a  passive  infinitive  is  used  with  the  word  begin,  you 
must  employ  the  passive  form,  coeptus  sum,  instead  of  c oe p i ; 
coeptu9  eram,  instead  of  ccepe ram,  &c. 

(614.)   Translate  into  English. 

MiJites,  vuln^ribus  defessi,  p6dem  rfiferre  coeperunt.— 
"Quid  tu,"  in  quit  Labi^nus,  "miles  tiro  (voc.)  tarn  f  6r6cii- 
lus  6s?"  Turn  miles:  "Non  sum,"  in  quit,  "tiro,  Labiene, 
s6d  de  dScima  legion^  v^teranus." — HelvStii  nostros  lacess^r© 
cceperunt. — Hostes,  qui  in  montem  sese  rScep^rant,  praelium 
rfidintegrare  coep6runt. — Caesar  dicit  (574,  a),  id  fieri  poss6, 
81  Mdui  finitimorura  ftgros  populari  coepSrint  (574,  6).— 


AIO,  maUAM,  NOVI,  MEMINI,  ETC.  243 

Milites  in  murum  l^pides  jacere  coeperunt.  —  Undique  in 
murum  lapides  jaci  (613,  c,  ^')  coepti  sunt. — Dux  milites 
hortatur  ut  veteris  gloriae  raeminerint. — Legati  dixerunt  se 
portus  (accus,  pi.)  insulasque  n  o  v  i  s  s  e. — Multi  te  o  d  e  r  u  n  t, 
si  te  solum  amas. — Germani  superbiam  L.  Varii  et  s3e\TLtiam 
6 diss 6  coeperant.  —  Omnes  immemorem  beneficii  ode- 
r u n  t. — Tullus  Hostilius,  ut  Livius  ait,  f erocior  etiam  Romiild 
(360,  c)  fuit. — Socrates  interrogatus  quinam  hCmines  tranquil- 
liter  viv6rent  (534,  6)  ?  "Qui,"  in  quit,  "nullius  turpitudi- 
nis  sibi  conscii  sunt." — Demonax  interrogatus,  quando  ccepisset 
(534,  e)  philosophari  ?  "Turn,"  in  quit,  "cum  cognoscere 
meipsum  (159)  ccepi." — Hannibal  Romanos  sic  5derat,  ut 
in  gratiam  cum  Ulis  redire  nullo  mod5  (55,  a)  posset  (553, 6,  R.). 
— Is  miser  est,  quern  omnes  boni  5derunt.  —  Novimus 
Aristidis  justitiam,  novimus  SocrS.tis  sapientiam.  —  Non 
dmabimus  bonos  mores,  si  non  od^rimus  malos. 


S^       OF  TBE    -        > 


[UNIVEHSn 


£4,: 


PART     III. 


SUMMARY    OF    ETYMOLOGY. 


X2 


SUMMARY  OF  ETYMOLOGY. 


§  1.  LETTERS,  QUANTITY,  &c. 

(615.)  1.  The  letters  are  the  same  as  in  English,  with  the  omission  of  w. 

2.  Six  are  vowels^  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y :  the  remaining  nineteen  are  coTisgrnarUs, 

3.  The  consonants  are  divided  into 

(a)  Liquids,  1,  m,  n,  r ; 

(b)  Spirants,  h,  s,  j  ; 

(c)  Muies  ;  the  remaining  consonants,  among  which  there  are 

(1)  c-sounds,  c,  g  (ch) ;  q ; 

(2)  p-sounds,  b,  p  (ph) ; 

(3)  t-sounds,  d,  t  (th) ; 

(4)  Double  consonants,  x,  z. 

4.  The  diphthongs  are,  aa,entae,  oe  (rare,  ei,  oi,  ui). 

(616.)  GENERAL  RULES  OF  QUANTITY. 

(1)  A  vowel  before  another  is  short ;  e.  g.,  via. 

(2)  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  one,  is  long  hy  post- 
tioii;  e.  g.,  am  ant. 

f  As  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  causes  some  exceptions  to  this  role, 
we  shall  mark  the  quantity,  in  that  case,  doubtful ;  thus,  igri.] 

(3)  All  diphthongs  are  long ;  e.  g.,  mens  «,  au-rum. 

(4)  Contracted  syllables  are  long ;  e,  g.,  cogo  (coago). 


§  2.  NOUN. 

(617.)  1.  The  Twun  is  the  name  of  any  object  (person  or  thing).  Nouns 
are  proper  (13,  a)y  cormnon  (13,  b),  or  abstract  (13,  c). 

2.  There  are  three  genders,  masculine,  feminine,  and  nerifer :  two  num- 
bers, singular  and  plural :  six  cases,  nomin<itive,  genitive,  dative,  accusch 
five,  vocative,  and  ablative :  ondijive  declensions. 

3.  GENERAL  RULES  OF  GENDER.  ^ 

Males,  rivers,  winds,  and  mountains  most  we  find 
With  Tuonths  and  nations  Masculine  declined  j 
"But  females,  cities,  countries,  trees  we  name, 
As  Feminine  ;  most  islands,  too,  the  same. 
Common  are  such  as  both  the  genders  take, 
And  Neuter  all  words  undeclined  we  make. 
[There  are  many  exceptions  from  these  rules,  which  must  be  learned 
by  observation.] 


First  Declension. — {Genitive-ending  se.) 


(618.) 

case-endings. 

Nom.,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

a. 
ae. 

ae. 
arum. 

8B. 

is. 

am. 
as. 

&. 

is. 

Eem.  1.  Qu<intity. — ^Final  syllables  all  long  but  a,  nom.  and  voc; 

am,  ace. ;  and  um,  gen.  plur. 
2.  Gender. — ^Nouns  of  first  declension  ^q  feminine,  except  names  of 

male  beings,  &c. 


Second  Declension. — {Genitive-ending  i.) 

(619.)  Masculine  nouns  of  second  declension  have  nominative-ending 
ds  ;  neuter  nouns,  um. 

{a)  case-endings,  masculines. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

us. 
i. 

1. 

orum. 

6. 

is. 

um. 

OS. 

6. 
1. 

6. 

IS. 

[b]   CASE-ENDINGS, 

NEUTERS. 

Il 

N.,  A.,  v. 

Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

1     IJSf: 

um. 

a. 

i.  ^ 
drum. 

6. 

1 

NOUN. 


249 


Hem,  1.  Quarvtity. — Short  final  syllables,  iis,  S,  um,  a. 
Long  "  i,  6, 1  s,  6  s. 

2.  Gender. — A  few  nouns  are  femimne  in  us,  and  a  few  neuter  (see 
62,  R.  1). 

3.  Stems  in  r. — (I)  All  nouns  whose  stems  end  in  r,  reject  the  ending 
us  in  nom.  and  g  in  voc. ;  e.  g.,Jield,  nom.,  agSr  (not  ag6r-us) ;  voc., 
ftgSr  (not  ager-6).  (2)  Most  which  have  6  in  nom.  drop  it  in  the 
remaining  cases  ;  e.g.,  nom.,  Sgfir ;  gen.,  Hgri  (not  ag6r-i). 

4.  Exceptions  to  Case-endings. — (1)  Proper  names  in  ius,  with 
filius,  genius,  mens,  have  voc.  in  I ;  e.  g.,  Georg-i,  fil-i,  mi.  (2) 
Deus  has  voc.,  deiis,  nom.  plur.,  dii,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  diis.  (3) 
A  few  take  um  in  gen.  plur.,  instead  of  orum ;  e.g.,  sestertium. 


Third  Declension. — {Genitive-ending  is.) 

(620.)  {a)  CASE-ENDINGS,  MASCULINES  AND  FEMININES. 


Nom.,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

es. 

IS. 

um  (lum). 

I. 

ibus. 

em  (un). 
es. 

6(1). 
ibus. 

{b)    CASE-ENDINGS,  NEUTERS. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

a(ia). 

is. 

um  (ium). 

I. 
ibus. 

W. 

Rem.  1.  Quantity. — Final  syllables  all  short  but  i  and  6  s. 

2.  Euphonic  Rules. — (o)  c-sound+s  =  x:  arc-s  =  arx;  leg-s  =  lex. 
{b)  t-sound before  s  is  dropped:  laud-s  =  laus  ;  mont-s  =  mons. 

3.  Rules  of  Gender  from  the  Formation  of  the  NominMive, 

[Learn  these  from  355.] 

4.  Peculiar  Case-endings. — (1)  Ace.  in  im :  {a)  commonly  in 

Febris,  puppis,  pulvis, 
S^cuiis,  restts,  turris : 
{b)  always  in 

Sitis,  tussis. 

Vis,  amussis. 

(2)  Abl.  in  I :  (a)  sometimes  in  those  which  take  im  in  ace,  with 
ignis,  civis  :  {b)  always  in  vis  ;  and  in  neuters  whose  nom.  ends 
in  &1,  &r,  or  g. 

(3)  Gen.  plur.  ium:  (a)  in  all  which  take  i  in  abl.  sing. ;  {b)  in 
monosyllables  whose  stems  end  in  two  consonants  (e.  g.,  mont-, 
mont-ium) ;  (c)  in  all  which  insert  a  vowel  before  adding  s  in 
nom.  {e.  g.,  nav-i-s,  nftv-iiim). 


350 


NOUN* 


Fourth  Beclensitm. — (Gemtive-ending  us.) 
(621.)  Masculine  nominative-ending  us  ;  tieuter  nominative-ending  tU 

(a)   CASE-ENDINGS,  MASCULINES. 


Nom.,  VoQ. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

us. 

US. 

US. 

uiim. 

ui. 
ibus. 

um. 

us. 

u. 
ibds. 

[b]   CASE-ENDINGS,  NEUTERS. 

Nom.,  Ace,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

U. 

ua. 

US,  or  u. 
uum. 

U. 

ibus. 

Rem.  1.  Quantity. — ^Us  long,  except  in  nom.  sing.,  and  dat.  and  abl. 
plur. ;  u  and  i  long  always. 

2.  Genders. — Only  the  following  nouns  are  feminine.: 

Acus,  manus,  tribus, 
Bomus,  porticus,  and  Id^is. 

3.  Peculiar  Case-ending. — The  following  take  iibus  in  dat.  and  abL 
plur.,  instead  of  i  b  u  s  : 

Arcus,  &CUS,  portus,  vSru, 

Ficus,  lacus,  artiis, 
Sp6cuSj  quercus,  also  pecu, 

Tribus  too,  and  partus. 

4.  Ddmus,  house,  is  thus  declined  : 


1 

Nom.,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

dom-us. 
dom-us. 

5 -US. 
/-I. 

\  -uum. 
\  -orum. 

-ul. 
-ibus. 

-um. 

J -OS. 

I  -us  [rarely). 

-6. 
-ibus. 

Ohs.  The  genitive  do  mi  is  used  only  in  the  sense  of  at  home,  at  i 
house. 


Fifth  Declension. — {Genitive-ending  ei.) 
(622.)  There  are  but  few  nouns  of  this  declension :  all  f^nihine  exoept 
di6s,  day,  and  meridies,  midday ;  and  even  digs  is  feminine  in  singu- 
lar when  it  means  ^  fixed  day. 

(623.)  CASE-ENDINGS. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


61. 
erum. 


Si. 
ebus. 


6m, 
es. 


ebus. 


R^m.  1.  Quantity. — The  e  in  ei  is  long  when  a  vowel  stands  before 

it,  as  di-e-i ;  short  when  a  consonant,  as  fid-6-i. 
2.  The  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative  plural  are  wanting  in  all  nouna 

of  this  declension  except  r6s,  dies,  spdeids. 


§3.  ADJECTIVE. 


(624.)  The  adjective  expresses  a  quality  or  property  belongings  to  an 
)bject ;  e.  g.y  good,  small,  white,  &c.  In  Latin,  adjectives  are  divided 
uto  three  classes,  according  to  their  endings. 

1.  CLASS  r.  (us,  a,  um). 
(625.)  These  take  the /emmw€-ending  of  first  declension  of  nouns;  mas- 
culine  and  neuter  endings  of  the  second. 

(1.)   CASK-ENDINGS. 


1 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAI..                            1 

Masc. 

Fetn. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut.       [ 

N. 

US. 

4. 

um. 

K 

1. 

S8. 

a. 

G. 

I. 

ae. 

1. 

a 

orum. 

arfim. 

orum. 

D. 

6. 

8B. 

6. 

D. 

Is. 

Is. 

IS. 

A. 

um. 

am. 

um. 

A. 

OS. 

as. 

a. 

V. 

e. 

&. 

urn. 

V. 

1. 

oe. 

a. 

A. 

o. 

a. 

6. 

A. 

IS. 

is. 

IS. 

(2.)  Stems  in  er. — Adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  er  reject  us  and  6 
in  nom.  and  voc. 

(a)  Most  of  them  also  drop  &  in  the  nom.  in  the  other  cases ;  e.  g'., 
beautiful,  pulcher. 

Nom.       Pulcher,  pulehra,  pulchrum. 

Gen.        PulchrT,  pulchrae,  pulchrl,  &c. 

{b)  But  aspSr,  lac6r,  liber,  mis^r,  prosper,  tfinfir,  retain  the  6  ;  e.  ff^ 
Nom.       Miser,  mis  era,  miserum. 

Gen.        Miserl,  misSrcB,  mis^ri,  &c. 

(3.)  Peculiar  Case-endings. — Some  adjectives,  numerals,  and  adjec- 
tive pronouns  have  gen.,  lus,  and  dat,  i;  e.g.,  unus,  unitis,  uqI. 
[They  are  unus,  totus,  solus,  nullus,  ullus,  alitts,  alter,  ut^r,  neutSr, 
uterque.] 

2.  CLASS  IL  {Two  Endings). 
(626.)  Adjectives  of  the  second  class  have  is  in  the  nominative  singular 
for  masculine  and  feminine  ending,  and  6  for  neuter. 

(1.)  CASE-ENDINGS. 


SINGULAB. 

PLURAL.                             ( 

Masc. 

Fera. 

Neut 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N.,V. 

IS. 

IS. 

6. 

N.,V. 

es. 

es. 

ia. 

G. 

IS. 

IS. 

IS. 

G. 

ium. 

iiim. 

ium. 

D. 

T. 

i. 

i. 

D. 

ibus. 

ibiis. 

ibns. 

Ace. 

Sm. 

6in. 

6. 

Ace. 

es. 

es. 

ia. 

Abl. 

1. 

1. 

i. 

Abl. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

(2.)  Some  adjectives  of  this  class  take  er  for  the  ending  of  the  nonk 
fling,  masc.  instead  of  Is  ;  e.  g.,  acSr,  Scris,  ScrS. 


252 


ADJECTIVE. 


(3.)  The  ablative  has  6  instead  of  i  in  juvSnis,  youth;  OBdilis, 
cedUe.  The  genitive  plural  has  iim  instead  of  ium  in  cSlSr, 
swift. 

3.  CLASS  III.  [One  Ending). 
(627.)  (1.)  Adjectives  of  the  third  class  have  but  one  ending  in  the  nom- 
inative for  all  three  genders  ;  e.  g.,  happy,  felix  (m.,  f.,  n.) ;  hoidt 
audax  (m.,  f.,  n.).     Participles  in  ns  fall  under  this  class. 
(2.)  The  case-endings  are  those  of  nouns  of  third  declension  (see  par- 
adigm, 108).     They  have  abl.  i  generally,  but  Sinpauper,  senex, 
and  a  few  others  (108,  R.  1);  neut.  plur.,  ia;  gen.  plur.,  ium. 
Vetiis  has  nom.  plur.,  v6ter-a,  gen.  plur.,  v6t6r-um. 
For  participles,  abl.,  6  ) 
"    adjectives,  abl.,  I  \  ''  """«  ♦"'"™°"- 

4.   COMPARISON  OF   ADJECTIVES. 

(628.)  Comparative-endrng,  i  6  r ;  superlative,  i  s  s  i  m  u  s. 

Brave,  fort-is,  fort-i6r,  fort-issimtis. 

Hard,    dur-us,  dur-ior,  dur-issimus. 

Rem.  The  comparative  is  declined  (after  third  declension  of  nouns) 
thus : 

Nom.     Durior,  duri6r,         durius. 

Gen.     Durior- is,      durior  is,    durior  is,  &c.    (See  358.) 
(629.)  Adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  r  have  rimus  for  superlative-end' 
ing  (instead  of  issimus) ;  e.  g., 

MisSr,  mis6r-i6r,  nuser-rimus. 

Pulch6r,  pulchr-i5r,  pulcher-rimus. 

(630.)  Several  adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  1  have  limus  for  superla- 
tive-endmg]  e.g., 

facil-i6r,  facfl-limfis. 


Facil-is, 
They  are 


(631.) 


Similis,  dissimilis,  and  filcilis  ; 
Humilis,  difficiKs,  and  gracilis. 

5.   IRREGULAR  COMPARISON. 

Irregulars. 


Good. 

bdnus. 

mSlidr. 

optimus. 

Bad. 

malus. 

pej6r. 

pessimus. 

Great. 

magnus. 

maj6r. 

maximiis. 

Much. 

multus. 

Cplus  (n.  sing.). 
I  plures,  a  (pi.). 

plunmus. 

Small. 

pai-vus. 

min6r. 

minimus. 

Old. 

s6nex. 

B6m6r. 

{wanting.) 

Young. 

juv6nis. 

juniSr. 

{wanting) 

Outward. 

extfirus. 

exteridr. 

extrgmus. 

BeLow. 

inferiis. 

inf^ridr. 

J  infimus. 
/  imus. 

Above. 

supSrus. 

siip6ri6r. 

5  supremtis. 
I  summus. 

Hind. 

1'*               ■     ■                -  T   -      == 

postSrus. 

post6ri6r. 

postrfimus. 

COMPARISON  or  ADJECTIVES. 


253 


(632.)  Defectives. — [Comparative  and  Superlative  formed  from  a  Prepo- 
sition, Adverb,  or  Obsolete  Word.] 


{on  this  side,  cltra.) 
■"  '  ,  intra.) 


[beyond,  ultra.) 

[near,  pr6pe.) 
{bad,  deter.) 


nearer,  citerior. 
inner,  interior. 

further,  ulterior. 

nearer,  propior. 

worse,  deterior. 
former,  prior. 
swifter,  ocior. 


nearest,  citimus. 

inmost,  intimus. 
(  furthest^ 
(  last, 


altunus. 


[  nearest,  }         «    « 
I  next,    '^Proximus. 

worst,  deterrimus. 
first,  prTmus. 
swiftest,  ocissimua. 


Rem, 


(  ditior,  (  ditlssimu 

1.  Rich,  dives ;      richer,  \  ^j^^^.^.       richest,  \  ^^^^^^^ 


I  divitissimufl. 
{CcBsar  uses  the  shorter  form.] 

2.  Compound  adjectives  in  diciis,  ficus,  vSliis,  add  entidr  for  the 
comparative  and  entissimusfor  the  superlative ;  e.  g., 

B6n6vol-us,      b6nSv6l-enti6r,     b6nev6l-entissimus. 

3.  Adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  a  vowel  prefix  to  the  positive 
magis,  more,  for  the  comparative,  and  maxim  6,  m^st,  for  the 
superlative. 

Pious,  pius,  magis  pius,  maximd  piils. 


§  4.  NUMERALS. 


(633.)  Numerals  are  divided  into  the  following  classes,  of  which  the 
first  three  are  adjectives,  the  fourth  adverbs. 


CARDINAL. 

ORDINAL. 

DISTRIBUTIVE. 

ADVERBIAL. 

One,  two,  (fC, 

First,  second,  6fc. 

One  by  one,  ifC. 

Once,  twice,  6fC 

1 

Unus. 

Primus. 

Singuli. 

SemeL 

2 

Duo. 

Secundus. 

Bini. 

Bis. 

3 

Tres. 

Tertius. 

Temi. 

Ter. 

4 

Quattuor. 

Quartus. 

Quatemi. 

Quater. 

5 

Quinque. 

Quintus. 

auini. 

Quinquiea. 

6 

Sex. 

Sextus. 

Seni. 

Sexies. 

7 

Septem. 

Septimus. 

Septem. 

Septies. 

8 

Octo. 

Octavus. 

Octoni 

Octies. 

9 

Novem. 

Nonas. 

Noveni 

Novies. 

10 

Decern. 

Decimus. 

Deni. 

Decies. 

11 

Undecim. 

Undecimus. 

Undgni. 

undecies. 

12 

Duodecim. 

Duodecimus. 

Duodeni. 

Duodecies. 

13 

Tredecim.  [im. 

Tertius- 

Temi-       ] 

Tredecies. 

14 

Quattuordec- 

Quaitus- 

Quatemi- 

Quatuordecies. 

15 

Quindecim. 

Quintus- 

Quini- 

Quindecies. 

16 

Sexdecim. 

Sextus- 

>declmiis. 

Seni- 

>dgi]5. 

Sedgcies. 

17 

Septendecim. 

Septiraus- 

Septenl- 

Decies  «fe  septies. 

18 

Octodecim. 

Octavus. 

Octoni- 

Duodevicies. 

19 

Novemdecim. 

Nonus-      J 

Noveni-     J 

Undevicies. 

20 

ViginH. 

Vicesimus. 

Viceni. 

Vicies. 

30 

Triginta. 

Tricesimus. 

Triceni. 

Tricies. 

40 

Quddraginta. 

Quadragesimus. 

Quadrageni. 

Quadragies. 

50 

Quinquaginta. 

Quinquagesimus. 

Quinquageni. 

Quinquagies. 

60 

Sexaginta. 

Sexagesimus. 

Sexageni. 

Sexagies. 

70 

Septuaginta. 

Septuagesimus. 

Septuageni. 

Septuagies. 

80 

Octoginta. 

Octogesimus. 

Octogeni. 

Octogies. 

90 

Nonaginta. 

Nonagesimus. 

Nonageni. 

Nonagies. 

100 

Centum. 

Centesimus. 

Centeni. 

Centigs. 

200 

Ducenti. 

Ducentesimus. 

Ducenteni. 

Ducenties. 

300 

Trecenti. 

Trecentesimus. 

Trecenteni. 

Trecenties. 

400 

Quadringenti. 

Quadringentesimus. 

Quadringenteni. 

Quadringenties. 

500 

Quingenti. 

Quingentesimus. 

Quingenteni. 

Quingenties. 

600 

Sexcenti. 

Sexcentesimus. 

Sexcenteni. 

Sexcenties. 

700 

Septingenti. 

Septingentesimus. 

Sepfingenteni. 

Septingenties. 

800 

Octingenti. 

Octingentesimus. 

Octingenteni. 

Octingenties. 

900 

Noningenti. 

Nongentesimiis. 

Nongenteni. 

Nongenties. 

1000 

MiUe. 

Millesimus. 

Milleni. 

MiUies. 

For  the  declension  of  unus,  duo,  and  tres,  see  194. 

Ducenti,  and  all  the  compounds  of  centi,  are  declined  like  the  plural 
of  b  o  n  u  s. 

Millia,  thousands,  the  plural  of  mi  lie,  is  declined  like  a  neuter  noun 
of  the  third  declension. 

Ordinal  numbers  are  declined  like  bonus. 

Distributives,  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

All  the  rest  are  undeclinable. 

In  the  combination  of  cardinal  numbers,  from  twenty  to  one  hundred, 
the  smaller  with  et,  or  the  larger  without  et,  precedes  ;  asquattuoret 
viginti,  orviginti  quattuor.  Above  one  hundred  the  larger  number 
precedes,  with  or  without  et;  as  centum  et  unus,  or  centum  unus. 


§  5.  PRONOUN. 


(634.)  The  pronoun  is  a  substitute  for  the  noun ;  e.  ff.,  he,  she,  it,  may 
be  substitutes  for  man,  woman,  book, 

1.  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

(635.)  (a)  Substantive  Personal,  so  called  because  used  as  substantives, 
not  as  adjectives. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL.                                       1 

N. 

G. 

D. 

Ace,  Abl. 

N.,  A. 

Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

/. 

ego. 

m6i. 

mihi. 

me. 

We. 

nos. 

nostrum,  or 
nostri. 

n<5bis. 

Thou. 

tu. 

tui. 

tibi. 

te. 

You. 

vos. 

vestrum,  or 

vobis. 

Him,    I 
her,  it.S 

— 

sui. 

sibt 

se. 

Them. 

vestri,     |                 1 
(same  as  sing*.)             i 

{b)  Adjective  Personal,  or  Possessive  (derived  from  the  above). 


Mine. 
Thine. 
His,  hers,  its. 

mens,  S,  um  (voc.,  mi), 
tuus,  a,  um. 
suus,  a,  um. 

Ours. 
Yours. 
Theirs. 

noster,  nostrS,  nostrum, 
vester,  vestra,  vestrum. 
suus,  sud,  siium.               j 

2.   DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(636.)  The  demonstrative  pronmins  are  so  called  because  they  serve  to 
point  out  an  object ;  e.  g".,  this,  that,  these,  those,  &c. 

(1.)  Is,  6 a,  id,  this,  that  {he,  she,  it),  often  antecedent  of  qui. 


Sing, 
Plur. 


Nom. 

is,  ea,  id. 
ii,  eae,  6a. 


ejus. 

eorum,  gariim.  goriim. 


Dat. 

lis,  or  6is. 


Ace. 

gum,  6am,  id. 
60s,  eas,  6a. 


Abl. 

eo,  ea,  66. 

lis,  or  61s. 


(2.)  idSm,  eadem,  id6m,  the  very  same,  compounded  of  is  and  dem. 
Declined  like  is  with  dem  added;  thus,  ejus  dem,  eid6m, 
eundem  (not  eumdem),  &c. 

(3.)  Hie,  h sec,  hoc,  this,  points  out  an  object  present  to  the  speaker, 
and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  ^rs^  person.  (It  is  also  used 
for  he,  she,  it.) 


1 

Nora. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 

hie,  haec, 
hoc. 

hujus. 

huic. 

hunc,     banc, 
hoc. 

hoc,    hae, 
hoc. 

Plur. 

hi,      hae, 
haec. 

hortim, 
rum. 

hariim,     ho- 

his. 

hos,          has, 
haec. 

his. 

(4.)  Iste,  ista,  istud,  this,  that,  points  out  an  object  present  to  the 
person  spoken  to,  and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  second,  person. 


256    PRONOUNS,  RELATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing.  ist§,  ista, 

istius. 

isti. 

istum,  istam, 

isto,   ista, 

istud. 

istud. 

isto. 

Plur.  isti,  istae, 

istorum,   istarum,   is- 

istis. 

istos,      istas, 

istIs,  istis, 

ista. 

tOrum. 

ista. 

istis. 

^^  Iste  is  often  used  to  express  contempt. 
(5.)  II le,  ilia,  illud,  points  out  an  object  remote  from  the  speaker 
{that,  the  former,  opposed  to  hie),  and  is  called  demonstrative  of 
third  person.     (It  is  often  used  for  he,  she,  it.) 

I^P"  Declined  throughout  like  istS,  istS,  istud. 
(6.)  Ips6,  ipsa,  ipsiim,  self,  is  added  to  other  pronouns,  me,  te,  se, 

&c.,  and  expresses  myself,  thyself,  himself,  &c.,  accordingly. 
5^*  Declined  like  ist§,  except  that  neuter  is  ipsum  (not  ipsud). 

3.  RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(637.)  The  relative  pronoun  {who,  which,  what)  is  so  called  because  it 
commonly  refers  to  some  other  word  called  the  antecedent. 
(1.)  dui,  quae,  qu6d,  who,  which,  what. 


Sing. 

qui,  quoB, 

cujus. 

cui. 

quem,  quam, 

quo,  qua, 

quod. 

quod. 

quo. 

Plur. 

qui,  qusB, 

quorum,  quSrum, 

quibus. 

quos,     quas. 

quibus. 

quae. 

quorum. 

quae. 

(2.)  duicunque,  quaecunqu6,  quodcunquS  {whoever,  whichever, 
whatever),  declined  like  qui,  quae,  qu6d,  with  cunque  added. 

(3.)  duis  qui  s  {whoever,  whatever),  used  without  a  substantive.  The 
following  cases  only  occur,  and  of  these  only  quisquis  and  quic- 
quid  commonly. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Nom. 

quisquis    (m.,    f.), 

quicquid  fn.). 
quiqui  (m.,  t). 


quibus  qui- 
bus. 


quemqu6m  (m.,  f.)j 
qaidquid  (n.). 


AbL 

quoquo,   quft- 
qua,  qudqud. 


4.   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

f    (638.)  The  interrogative  pronouns  {who  ?  which  ?  what  ?)  are  used  in 

asking  questions. 

(1.)  duis,  quae,  quid  {wTio?  which?  what?),  is  declined  precisely 
like  the  relative  qui,  except  #iat  in  nom.  sing.  masc.  it  has  quis, 
and  in  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  neut.,  quid,  [dui,  quae,  qu5d,  is  also 
used  interrogatively,  as  an  adjective  (172).] 

(2.)  duisn&m,  quaenftm,  quidnftm,  is  more  emphatic  than  quis. 
{Pray,  what  are  you  doing  ?  quidnftm  ftgis  ?)  It  is  declined  like 
quis,  qu88,  quid. 


PRONOUNS,  INDEFINITE  AND  CORRELATIVE.         257 

5.   INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

(639.)  The  indefinite  pronouns  denote  an  object  in  a  general  way,  with- 
out reference  to  a  particular  individual  [any  one,  some  one,  &c.). 

(  quod  dam,  used  as  an  adjective^  \ 
(1.)  auidim,  qneedim,  \  q^i^^am,  used  as  a  «<m«,  P    "^^ 

tain  (one) ;  plur.,  some.    Declined  like  qui ;  but  takes  n  generally 
before  d  instead  of  m ;  e.  g., 

duendam,  quorundam  (not  quemdam,  quorumdam). 
(2.)  duivis,      )  [any  you  please).    Declined   like   qui.    In  neut., 

duilibet,  )      quod  used  as  adjective,  quid  as  substantive. 
(3.)  duisquam  [any,  any  one;  e.g.,  when  it  is  denied  that  there 
are  any).    Neut.,  quicquam  or  quidquam.    Declined  otherwise 
like  qui.     [This  pronoun  is  used  chiefly  in  negative  sentences.] 

,   ^  „         (  quod piam,  used  as  a^/.,    \  somebody ^ 

(4.)  ttuispiSm,  qaspi&m,  \  ^^^^^^^_  ^^^^  ^  ,„j,^.^  ]     ,^. 

(  ^qudd,  as  adi,,    )  ,  . 

(5.)  AlIqnlB,  aliquS,  \  ^^^.^^  ^  ^^j^^  _  \  som^  om,  sometUng. 

...   ^     .  ^  ^    (  quodqug,  as  a^j.,    )        , 

(6.)  au.sqne,  quffique,  \  ^^._j^^^_  ^  J^^^  \  each. 

^,  .  V  ^   i  -quodqu6,  as  adj.,    )        . 

Unusquisqu6,-quaBqug,  ^         -j      «  r  ^    >  eack    on^ 

^         ^      '  1        ^      *  I  -quidqug,  as  subst,  ) 

(stronger  than   quisqu5).     Genitive,  uniuscujusquS,  &c., 

both  unus  and  quis  being  declined. 

(7.)  Ecquis  ?    Used  interrogatively  [does) ;  any  one,  anything, 

^         „  (  ecqu6d,  as  adj.,    )  neut.  plural, 

Ecquis.  ecqu»,  or  ecquS,  \  ^^^^j_j_  ^  ^^^^^  \     ^^^ 

B^P*  E  c  quis  expects  the  answer  none. 

6.   CORRELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(640.)  Correlative  pronouns  are  such  as  answer  to  each  other;  eg., 
how  great  7  so  great ;  as  many,  so  many,  &c. 
(1.)  The  following  are  declined 

(a)  Like  adjectives  of  Class  L  (625) : 

Tantiis,  so  great,  so  much;         quantuscunquS,  however  great 
Cluantus,as  great ;  Sliquantus,  somewhat  great, 

[b)  Like  adjectives  of  Class  EC.  (626) : 
Talis,  such. 

du  al i  s,  as,  of  what  hind. 
dualiscunque,  of  whatever  hind, 

(2.)  The  following  are  indeclinable  : 

T  6 1,  so  many ;  SHqu  6 1,  som£. 

^ 6\.\di^m,  just  so  many;  quotqu6t,  however  many, 

Qk,\x6t,  as  many. 

Y2 


§  6.  VERBS. 

(641.)  The  verb  declares  something  of  a  person  or  thing:  the  eagle 
fiies  i  the  queen  loves  her  daughter. 

1.  CLASSES   OF  VERBS. 

(642.)  Verbs  are  active,  passive,  or  deponent. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  express  action :  {a)  either  transitively,  requiring  an 

object ;  e.  g.,  the  queen  loves  [whom  ?)  her  daughter  ;  or  [b]  iiUraU' 

sitively,  not  requiring  an  object ;  the  eagle  ^z'es. 
(2.)  Passive  verbs  express  the  receiving  or  svffering  of  an  action ; 

/  am  loved ;  I  was  punished. 

Obviously  intransitive  verbs  have  no  passive  form.    We  cannot 
say,  /  am  danced,  I  am  slept. 
(3.)  Deponent  verbs  have  the  passive  form,  but  an  active  signification. 

2.   PARTS  OF   THE  VERB. 

(643.)  The  verb  is  divided  into, 

(a)  The  indefinite  verb,  including  certain  parts  which  do  not  refer  to 
a  definite  person  or  time. 

[b)  The  finite  verb,  including  the  parts  which  always  do  so  refer. 

Indefinite  Verb. 
(644.)  (a)  The  indefinite  verb  includes, 

(1.)  The  infinitive,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  without 
relation  to  a  definite  person,  and  partakes  also  of  the  nature  of  a 
noun  ;  e.  g.,  to  learn ;  to  love  is  pleasant. 

(2.)  The  participle,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  under  the 
form  of  an  adjective  ;  loving,  blooming. 

(3.)  The  gerund,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  under  the 
form  of  the  noun,  in  aU  cases  but  the  nominative,  and  supplies  ob- 
lique cases  to  the  infinitive. 

(4.)  The  gerundive,  which  expresses  the  acticm  of  tibe  verb  as  neces- 
sary or  continued,  under  the  form  of  an  adjective,  in  all  cases  and 
genders. 

(5.)  The  supine,  which  also  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  in  the 
form  of  two  cases  (ace.  and  abl.)  of  the  noxm. 

Finite  Verb. 
(645.)  [b)  The  finite  verb  includes  those  parts  which  express  the 
(1.)  Different  varieties  of  affirmation,  viz.,  the  moods. 
(2.)  Diflferent  times  at  which  the  action  of  the  verb  takes  place,  viz., 

the  tenses. 
(3.)  Difierent  relations  of  the  verb  to  persons  or  things,  viz.,  the  num- 
bers and  persons. 


PARTS  or   THE  FINITE   VERB.  25d 

(1.)  The  Moods. 

(646.)  The  verb  expresses  affirmation ;  the  moods  of  the  rerb  are  used 
to  vary  the  character  of  the  aflSrmation. 

(1.)  By  the  indicative,  affirmation  of  a.  fact  is  expressed ;  e.  g.,  I  write, 

I  did  not  write. 
(2.)  By  the  subjunctive,  affirmation  is  expressed  doubtfully,  contir^ 
gently,  or  indefinitely ;  e.  g.,  I  may  write,  if/  should  write,  perhaps 
some  [may]  think. 
(3.)  By  the  imperative,  affirmation  is  expressed  as  an  injunction  or 
request ;  e.  g.,  write. 

(2.)  The  Tenses. 

(647.)  Time  may  be  past^  present,  or  future,  and  the  verb  has  therefore 
three  tenses  to  express  these.  But  action  may  be  represented  as  going 
on  or  as  co'mpleted,  either  in  past,  present,  or  future  time,  and  therefore 
two  forms  are  required  for  each,  making  six  in  all. 


Present 

Past. 

Future. 

Action  going  on, 

or  imperfect. 
\  Action  completed, 
1     or  perfect. 

/  love,  or  am 

loving. 
I  have  loved. 

(Perfect.) 

/  was  loving. 

(Imperfect.) 

/   had    loved. 

(Pluperfect.) 

/  shall  love,  or  be  loving. 
(Future.) 

I  shall  have  loved.  (Fu- 
ture Perfect.) 

Rem.  1.  The  Latin  uses  its  perfect  form  in  two  ways :  (1)  like  the 
English  perfect,  to  express  action  complete  in  present  time  ;  e.  g., 
Smavi,  /  have  loved :  (2)  like  the  English  imperfect,  to  express  ac- 
tion indefinitely  in  past  time  ;  e.  g.,  amavi,  I  loved.  This  is  called 
the  perfect  aorist.  [The  latter  use  is  by  far  the  most  common. 
This  distinction  should  be  thoroughly  understood.] 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  no  future  (it  uses  the  periphrastic 
form  661). 

3.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  are  called  primary  tenses,  refer- 
ring, as  they  do,  either  to  present  or  future  time ;  the  imperfect, 
perfect  aorist,  and  pluperfect  are  called  historical  tenses,  referring, 
as  they  do,  to  past  time. 

(3.)  Numbers  and  Persons, 

(648.)  As  there  may  be  more  than  one  person  engaged  in  an  action,  the 
verb  has  two  numbers,  singular  and  plural.  These  persons  must  be  either 
/,  thou,  we,  ye,  or  some  other  person  or  thing;  therefore  the  verb  has 
three  persons,  1st,  2d,  and  3d,  which  are  denoted  in  Latin  by  different 
endings. 

3.  CONJUGATION. 

(649.)  Conjugation  is  the  inflection  (21,  R.)  of  a  verb  through  all  its 
parts.  There  are  in  Latin /(wr  conjugations  of  verbs,  distinguished  by  the 
ending  of  the  infinitive ;  thus  : 

1.  S.  3.  4k 

-arfi.  -Sr6.  -€r6,  -IrS* 


260 


PARADIGM   OF    ESSE,   TO   BE. 


4.  THE  AUXILIARY   OR  SUBSTANTIVE  VERB  ESSE,  to  he. 

(650.)  [Before  proceeding  to  the  conjugations,  we  must  give  the  forms 
of  ess 6,  ^o  be,  called  an  auxiliary,  because  it  is  used  in  forming  some  of 
the  parts  of  the  verb  ;  and  substantive,  because  it  is  the  verb  expressing 
simple  existence.] 


1.   INDICATIVE. 


ACTION  INCOMPLETE. 


Singular. 


Present. 
Imperf 
Future. 


sum, 

I  am. 
eram, 

I  was. 
6r6, 

/  shall  be. 


6s, 

thou  art. 
eras, 

thouwast. 
ens, 
thou,  Sf'C. 


est, 

he  is. 
erat, 
he  was. 
erit, 
he,  Spc. 


siimus, 
we  are. 

eramus, 
we  were. 

erimus, 
we,  SfC. 


estis, 

ye  are. 
eratis, 
ye  were. 
eritis, 
ye,  SfC. 


sunt, 

they  are. 
erant, 

they  were. 
erunt, 

they,  Spc. 


ACTION  COMPLETED. 


Singular. 


Plural. 

fuimus, 

fuistis, 

■  we  have 

ye  have 
been. 

been. 

fiieramus. 

fueratis. 

we  had 

ye  had 
been. 

been. 

fuerimus. 

fiieritis, 

we  shall, 

ye  shall, 

^c. 

SfC. 

Perfect. 
Pluperf. 
Fut.  Perf. 


fill, 
/ 


have 


fuerfim, 

/        had 

been. 
fuerd, 

/       shall 

have  been. 


fuisti, 

thou  hast 

been. 
fueras, 
thou 

hadstf^c. 
fueris. 


fuit, 
he  has 
been. 

fuerSt, 
he  had, 
been. 

fuerit, 


thou  Iheshall,^ 

shalt,  SfC]   S^c. 


fiierunt, 

they  have 

been. 
ffierant, 

they  had 

been. 
fderint, 
they  shall, 

Sfc. 


2.   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


INCOMPLETE. 


Plural. 


Present. 
Imperf. 


Sim, 

/  may  be. 
ess  em, 

/    might 

be. 


sis, 
thou,  SfC. 


thou,  8^c. 


sit, 

he,  8fC. 
esset, 
h£,  8fC. 


simus, 

we,  Sg'C. 
essemuS; 

we,  SfC. 


sitis, 

ye.  SfC. 
essetis, 

ye,  SfC. 


smt, 

they,  S^c. 
essent, 

they,  ^c. 


COMPLETED. 


Perfect. 
Pluperf. 


Singular 


fuerim, 
/       may 
have  been. 

fuiss6m, 
/     might 
have  been. 


fueris, 
thou,  ^c. 

fuisses, 
thou,  <^c. 


fuerit, 
he,  SfC. 

fuisset, 
he,  SfC. 


fu6rimus, 
we,  Spc. 

fiiissemus, 
we,  SfC. 


fiieritis, 
ye,  SfC. 

fuissetis, 
ye,  SfC. 


fuerint, 
they,  SfC. 

fiiissent, 
tJiey,  ^c. 


3.   IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


2.  6s,  estd,  be  thou. 

3.  estd,  let  him  be. 


2.  este,  estote,  be  ye. 

3.  sunt6,  let  them  be. 


4.   INFINITIVE. 


Ess6,  to  be.    ftiiss6,  to  have  been,    futurus,  ft,  um,  esse,  to  be  about  to  be. 


5.   PARTICIPLE. 


Only  in  compounds  ;  absens,  abserd 
(from  absum) ;  praesens,  present 
(from  praBsum). 


FuturGs,  ft,  um,  one  who  will  be. 


PARADIGMS  OF  REGULAR  VERBS.         261 

5.  PARADIGMS  OF  REGULAR  VERBS. 

(651.)  (1.)  Verb-stem. — The  stem  of  any  verb  is  found  by  striking  off 
;he  infinitive-ending ;  e.  g.,  of  am-are,  m6n-ere,  reg-ere,  and  aud-ire  the 
items  are  am-,  mon-,  reg-,  and-,  respectively.* 

(2.)  Tense-stem, — Each  tense  has  its  own  tense-stem,  consisting  of  the 
verb-stem  with  or  without  some  additions.    Thus,  in  the  first  conjugation : 
Pres.  tense-stem  =  verb-stem  =  am-. 
Inperf.  tense-stem  =  veijj-stem  +ab  =  amah-. 
Perf.  tense-stem  =  verb-stem  +av  =  amav-. 

[La  the  annexed  paradigms  the  tense-stems  are  shown  upon  the  left- 
hand  side.  Observe  that  the  perfect  tense-stem  serves  also  for  the  stem 
of  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  tenses.] 

(3.)  Tense-ending. — Each  tense  has  its  own  endings,  which,  added  to 
the  tense-stem,  give  the  person-forms.    Thus  : 

Imperfect-stem  &mab-  +am=  amah  am,  ]st  person. 

amah-  -j-as  =  am  abas,  2d  person,t  &c. 
(4.)  The  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  of  the  passive  voice  are 
formed  by  means  of  the  past  participle  and  forms  of  esse  ;  thus : 
Smatus  sum,  dmatus  eram,  &matus  ero. 

[No  farther  explanation  of  the  paradigm  is  necessary.  The  student 
should  learn  the  modes  of  formation,  and  the  tense-endings  for  each  tense, 
apart  from  the  stems  am-,  mon-,  &c.,  and  unite  them  afterward  with  those 
or  any  other  stems.] 

*  In  reality,  the  crude-forms  are  am  a-,  mon e-,  audi-  (the  three  pure 
conjugations),  and  reg-  (the  consonant  conjugation).  But  the  changes  of 
the  crude-form  in  inflection  form  too  great  a  difficulty  for  beginners  ;  we 
therefore  present  the  stem  as  the  language  affords  it  to  us,  without  going 
into  a  nicer  analysis. 

t  Farther,  the  person-ending  forms  part  of  the  tense-ending.  From  the 
paradigm  (active),  it  wiU  be  seen  that  in  every  tense  except  the  perfect 
the  endings  are 

o,  or  m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 

These  endings  are  added  to  the  tense-stem,  either  directly,  as  am-o,  or  by 
means  of  a  connecting-vowel,  as  reg-i-s,  or  of  a  flexion  syllable  and  con- 
necting-vowel, as  amav-er-a-s. 


262         PARADIGMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 
PARADIGMS    FOR 


ACTIVE. 


(652.) 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Pkesent,  I  love  or  am  loving,  thou  art  loving,  &fc. 


JLm- 
mon- 
reg- 
aud- 


d. 
ed. 
3. 
i6. 


as. 


at. 
6t. 
it. 
it. 


amus. 
emus, 
imus. 
imus. 


atis. 
etis. 
itis. 
Itis. 


ant. 
ent. 
unt. 
iunt. 


Imperfect,  I  was  loving,  advising,  ruling,  hearing,  6fC. 


am-ab- 
mon-eb- 
reg-eb- 
aud-ieb- 


'  Sm. 


Future,  /  ahdll  or  will  love,  advise,  rule,  hear,  6fC. 


am-ab- 
mon-eb- 

reg- 
aud-i- 


is. 


It. 
et. 


imus. 
emus. 


itts. 
etis. 


unt. 
ent. 


Perfect,  I  have  loved.    (Perfect  Aorist,  I  loved.") 


m6n-u- 

(reg-s) 

rex- 

aud-iv- 


isti. 


it 


imus. 


erunt,  or 
erg. 


Pluperfect,  I  had  loved,  9fC. 


fim-ftv- 
mon-u- 
rex- 
aud-Iv- 


•  6ram. 


Sras. 


6rat. 


eramus. 


gratis. 


Srant. 


Future  Perfect,  I  shall  have  loved,  ffc. 


ftm-av- 
m6n-u- 
rex- 
aud-iv- 


6rd. 


gris. 


grit. 


grfmus. 


grftls. 


grint. 


(653.) 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


2d  Singular. 


3d  Singular. 


2d  Plural. 


3d  Plural. 


am- 
mdQ- 

and- 


%  atd. 
&,  etd. 
6,  it«. 
i,  it«. 


atd. 
et«. 
it«. 
it«. 


ate,  atotg. 
etg,  etote. 
it6,  itotg. 
Itg,  itotg. 


ant6. 
ent6. 
untd. 
iuntfi. 


PARADIGMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS.  263 

THE    FOUR   CONJUGATIONS. 


PASSIVE. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Pbesent,  I  am  loved,  6(C. 


ftm- 
mon- 

aud- 


or. 
66r. 
dr. 
ior. 


)  aris. 

\  eris. 
[  ere. 
I  €ris. 
I  ere. 
\  iris. 
>ir6. 


atur. 
etur. 
itur. 
itur. 


amur. 
emiir. 
imur. 
imiir. 


ATYiTnT- 
emini. 
imml. 


antur. 
entur. 
nntiir. 
iuntnr. 


Impekfect,  /  was  loved,  «^. 


am-ab- 
mon-eb- 
r6g-eb- 
aud-ieb- 


)  ans. 
>are. 


atiir. 


amiiu. 


antur. 


FuTUBE,  I  shall  be  loved,  6fC. 


am-ab- 
mon-eb- 
reg- 
aud-i- 


j  6ris. 
[fire. 
[  6ris. 
>  ere. 


itur. 
etur. 


imur. 
6mur. 


imini. 
emim. 


untur. 
entur. 


Pekfect,  Ihave  been  loved,  SfC. 


amatiis.* 
monitus.* 
rectus.* 
auditus.* 


es, 

or 
fiiisti. 


est. 

or 

ftiit. 


sumus, 

or 
fuimus. 


estis, 

or 

fuistis. 


sunt, 
or 
fuerunt. 


Plupekfect,  I  had  been  loved,  6(C. 


Smatiis.* 
monitus.* 
rectus.* 
auditus.* 


•  grSm.t 


eras. 


eramus. 


eratis. 


erant. 


FuTUiiE  Perfect,  1  shall  have  been  loved,  i(c. 


ftmatiis.* 
mdnitus.* 
rectus.* 
auditus.* 


►  er«.t 


6ris. 


6rit 


Srimiis. 


6ritis. 


enmt 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


2d  Singular. 


3d  Singular. 


2d  Plural. 


3d  Plural. 


am- 

m6n- 

r6g- 
aud- 


5r6,  at6r. 
gre,  6t6r. 
erS,  itor. 
ir6,  itor. 


ator. 
Stor. 
itor. 
itor. 


amini,  aminSr. 
emini,  eminor. 
imini,  iminor. 
imini,  iminor. 


ant6r. 
entor. 
untor. 
iontor. 


*  The  participle  must  be  inflected  in  gender  and  number  to  agree  widi 
the  subject, 
t  Sometimes  fueram,  iueras,  &c. 
X  Sometimes  fuero,  faeris,  &c. 


264 


PARADIGMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 


(654.) 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Present,  I  may  love,  <^. 


am- 
mon-e- 
reg- 
aud-i- 


6m. 


es. 
as. 


St. 
at. 


emus, 
amas. 


etis. 
atis. 


6nt. 
ant. 


Imperfect,  I  might  love,  SfC. 


am-ar- 
m6n-er- 

r6g-§r- 
aud-ir- 


'  em. 


es. 


6t. 


etis. 


ent. 


Perfect,  I  mag  have  loved,  ^. 


am-av- 
mon-u- 
rex- 
aud-Iv- 


•  grim. 


6rit. 


erimtts. 


6ritis. 


6rint. 


Pluperfect,  I  might  have  loved,  SfC. 


am-av- 
mon-u- 
rex- 
aud-iv- 


'  issem. 


issSt. 


issetis. 


issent. 


(655.) 


INFINITIVE. 


Present  [to  love  or  be  loving,  6fc.]. 


&m-are, 


mon-6r§, 


r6g-6r6, 


aud-ire. 


Perfect  [to  have  loved,  Sfc.]. 


I. 
amav-iss§, 


m6nu-iss6, 


rex-is  se, 


audiv-IssS. 


Future  [to  be  about  to  love,  SfC.]. 


fimaturus  ess6,   momturus  ess6,    recturus  ess§,       auditurus  essS. 


(656.) 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present  [loving,  advising,  ruling,  hearing]. 


1. 
am-ans, 


mon-ens, 


r6g-ens, 


and-iens. 


Perfect  [having  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard]. 


"Wanting :  supplied  by  abl.  absol.,  or  by  quum  with  subj. 


Future  [about  to  love,  advise,  rule,  hear]. 


ftmaturus, 


momturus, 


recturUs, 


auditurus. 


(657.) 


GERUND   AND 


Gerunds:    &mandi,        mSnendl,        regendi,        audiendi. 


(658.) 


Supine  in  um :  fanatum, 
"  u :     ftmatu, 


monitum, 
monitu, 


rectum, 
rectfl. 


anditum. 
aa(Utd. 


PARADIGMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS.    265 


PASSIVE.                                                                 1 

_ 

subjunctive  mood. 

Pbesent,  I  may  be  loved,  6fc.                                           || 

ftm- 
mon-e- 

lud-i- 

Sr. 

j  eris. 

jaris. 
t  arS. 

etur. 
atur. 

emur. 
&mur. 

emini. 
aminl. 

entur. 
antdr. 

Impekfect,  I  might  he  loved,  «^.                                        || 

am-ar- 
mon-er- 
Y&g-er- 
audlr- 

Ver. 

(  eris. 
\  ere. 

etur. 

emur. 

emini. 

entur. 

Perfect,  ImMy  have  been  loved,  fyc.                                     \\ 

amatus. 
monitus. 
rectus, 
auditus. 

>sim 

* 

sis. 

sit. 

slmus. 

sitis. 

sint. 

Plupebfkct,  I  might  home  been  loved,  ifc.                                || 

amatus. 
monitus. 
rectus, 
auditus. 

>  essem.t 

esses. 

ess3t. 

essemus. 

essetis. 

essent. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pbesent  [to  be  Qyeing)  loved,  4«.]. 

I, 
am-ari, 

2.                                       3.                                          4. 

m6n-erT,                 r^g-i,                    aud-Iri. 

Pebfect  [to  have  been  loved,  ffc.l.                                      || 

1. 
Smfttus  essS 

2.                                        3.                                        4. 

mSnitus  essS,        rectus  ess6,        auditu^  essS. 

FuTUBE  [to  be  about  to  be  loved,  (fC.].                                      || 

1. 
amatiim  iri, 

2.                                          3.                                         4. 

monitum  iri,          rectum  ui,           audltum  iri. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pbesent  ajstd  Perfect  [loved,  being  loved,  having  been  loved,  Sfc}. 

1. 
amatus. 

3.                                       3.                                       4.                              II 

mSnitus,                rectus,                 auditus.               || 

' 

GERUNDIVE. 

Gerundive  : 

1.                                  S.                                    3.                                4. 

amSndus,        mfinendiis,        rggendus,        andi6ndus. 

*  Sometimes  fuerim.                             t  Sometimes  fuissem.            || 

266 


VERBS    IN    10    AND    DEPONENTS. 


6.   VERBS    IN   i6    OF    THE   THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

(659.)  Some  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  assume  i  before  the  person- 
ending  in  some  of  the  tenses,  as  shown  in  the  following  paradigm  of  cap- 
6  r  6,  ^o  take. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres. 

Imperf. 

Fut. 


cap- 

cap-i-eb- 
cap  i- 


1-6. 

is. 

it. 

imus. 

itis. 

am. 

as. 

at. 

am6s. 

atis. 

am. 

es. 

et. 

emiis. 

etis. 

i-unt. 

ant. 

ent. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.     I  cap-i- 


I  at. 


amus.     1  atis.        1  ant. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres. 

cap- 

i-6r. 

6ris. 

itur. 

imilr. 

imini. 

i-untur. 

Imperf. 

cap-i-eb- 

ar. 

ans. 

atur. 

amilr. 

amini. 

antur. 

Fut. 

capi- 

ar. 

ens. 

etur. 

emiir. 

emini. 

entur. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.     I  cap-i-       |  ar.       |  aris.      |  atur.     )  amur.      |  amini.    |  antur. 


IMPERATIVE. 


3d  Plur.  Active,  cap-T-unt6. 


3d  Plur.  Pass.,  cap-i-unt6r. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  Active,  cap-i-ens. 


Fut.  Pass.,  cap-i-endus. 


Gerund,  cap-i-end-i,  6,  &c. 


7.    DEPONENT    VERBS. 

(660.)  (1.)  Deponent  verbs  have  the  passive  form  with  active  significa- 
tion. As  the  endings  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  passives  (Paradigm, 
p.  263,  265),  we  need  not  repeat  them. 

(2.)  But  deponents  have  three  active  participles,  while  other  verbs  have 
but  two :  thus, 

Pres.,  exhorting,      Perf ,  having  exhorted,      Fut.,  about  to  exhort, 

hort-ans.        •      hort-atus.  hortat-uriis. 

(3.)  Also,  all  transitive  deponents  have  the  verbal  adjective  in  dus; 

e.  g.,  ho  r  tan  dus,  one  that  should  be  exhorted:  intransitive  deponents 

have  it  only  in  the  neuter ;  e.  g'.,  moriendum  est,  one  must  die. 

8.    PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATION. 

(661.)  By  means  of  the  tenses  of  e  s  s  e,  combined  with  the  future  parti- 
ciple in  rus,  and  the  verbal  in  dus,  the  periphrastic  conjugation  is  form- 
ed;  e.g.,  ^maitvLrvLS  sum,  I  am  about  to  love,  I  intend  to  love ;  a  m  an- 
d u s  snm,  I  am  to  be  loved,  I  must  be  loved,  one  must  love  me ;  and  so 
through  all  the  tenses  and  persons.  The  deponent  verbs  employ  this  per- 
iphrastic conjugation  also. 


FORMATION   OF   PERFECT-STEM. 


267 


1.    WITH    PARTICIPLE    IN   rUS. 


— 

INDICATIVE. 

^                 SUBJUNCTIVE. 

('sum,  es,  est,  &c. 
amaiurus,    j  ^^^^  fmgtl,  &C. 
^  ^^'          faeram,  fueras,  &c. 
Uro,  6ris,  &c. 

I' Sim,  sis,  sit,  &c. 
amaturus,  J  essem,  esses,  &c. 
a,  iim,        |  fuerim. 
i^fuissem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.,  amaturus  esse,  to  be  about  (or  intending)  to  love. 
Perf.,   amaturus  fuisse,  to  have  been  about  to  love, 
Fut.,    amaturus  f6re,  to  intend  to  love  hereafter. 

2.    WITH    VERBAL   IN   duS. 


INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Tsum. 
eram. 
amandus,  a,  urn,  \  fui. 

fugram. 
Ler6. 

rsTm. 
amandus,  a,  urn  J -«^^; 
i^fuissem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.,  amandus,  a,  iim,  esse,  ought  to  be  loved. 
Perf.,    amandus,  a,  iim,  fnisse,  ought  to  have  been  loved. 
Fut.,    amandus,  a,  iim,  for6,  ought  to  be  loved  hereafter. 

9.    ON    THE    FORMATION    OF    THE    PERFECT-STEM. 

(662.)  In  the  paradigms,  the  perfect-stems  are  formed  by  adding  to  the 
verb-stem  in  the  1st  conj.  av-  (am-av-) ;  in  the  2d,  ii  (mon-u-) ;  in  the  3d, 
8  (reg-s);  in  the  4th,  iv-  (aud-iv-).  But,  although  most  Latin  verbs 
form  the  perf.-stem  thus,  many  use  different  endings,  which  are  exhibited 
in  the  following  classification : 

I.    FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

(663.)  Four  ways  of  forming  the  perfect-stem : 

I.  By  adding  av  to  the  verb-stem :  am-arS— am-ftv-I. 

XI,  "  ft  "  cr6p-ar6 — cr6p-u-i. 

in.  By  reduplicating  the  first  consonant :      darS — dgd-i. 
IV.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel :  jiiv-are— juv-i. 

II.   SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

Five  ways : 

I.  By  adding  ii  to  the  verb-stem :  mfin-SrS— mon-fi-I. 

jj,           "          ev              "  del-ere — del-ev-i. 

III.    ^      .'          s                "  alg-ere— al(g)-s-i. 

rV.  By  reduplication :  inord-er6— mo-mord-L 

V.  By  lengthening  the  item-vowel :  cav-6r6— cftv-i. 


268  FORMATION   OF  PERFECT-STEM. 

III.   THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

Six  ways : 

I.  By  adding  s  to  the  verb-stem :  6crlb-6re — scrip-s-L 
^11.          "          u              "^  al-ere — &l-u-i. 

III.  "  V  or  iv      "  cem-6re — crev-i. 

arcess-6re — arcess-iv-i. 

IV.  By  reduplication :  curr-6re — cu-curr-i. 
V.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel :  6m-ere — em-i. 

VI.  By  presenting  the  simple  verb-stem :  acu-ere — acu-i. 

rV.   FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 


Five  ways : 

I.  By  adding  iv  to  the  verb-stem ; 

aud-Tr6, 

aud-iv-i. 

II.          "         ii 

aper-ire, 

ap6r-u-i. 

III.          "         s 

fulc-ire, 

ful(c)-s-L 

IV.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel : 

ven-ir6, 

ven-i. 

V.  By  presenting  the  simple  verb-stem  :  comper-irS,     comper-I. 

[In  the  following  lists,  the  verbs  are  arranged  according  to  the  above 
classification,  and  the  supines  also  given.  When  any  peculiarity  exists 
in  the  compounds,  it  is  stated.  Of  Class  I.  (which  embraces  most  of  the 
rules  in  the  language),  only  one  example  is  given  in  each  conjugation,  as 
the  student  is  familiar  with  its  form ;  but  under  the  rema,i^jLIlg  heads  a^l 
the  verbs  in  common  use  are  mentioned.] 

10.  LIST  OF  VERBS. 

(664.)  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  av  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  love,  am-5;  am-ar6,  Sm-av-i,  am-a-tum, 

II.  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  creak,  cr6p-o,  cr6p-are,  cr6p-u-i,  crep-i-tfim. 

Lie  dow7i,  cub-o,  cub-ar6,  cub-u-i,  cub-i-tum. 

So  the  compounds ;  e.  g.,  accubo,  accubarS,  acciibui,  accubitum. 
Some  compounds,  however,  which  take  m  before  b,  follow  the  3d 
conj. ;  e.  g.,  accumbd,  accumbgrd,  accubui,  accubitum. 


To  tame, 

dom-o, 

dom-arS, 

dom-u-T, 

d6m-T-tum. 

To  rub. 

fric-o, 

fne-are, 

£nc-H 

(  fric-t-um  an( 
l  fric-a-tum. 

To  glitter. 

mic-o, 

mic-ar6, 

mic-u-i. 

To  gush  forth, 

emic-o, 

emic-ar§, 

enuc-u-i, 

gmic-a-tum. 

Tofold, 

plic-o, 

plic-ar6, 

plic-u-I, 

plic-i-tum. 

PHc-fl  is  used  only  in  composition :  supplied,  duplTcft,  multiplied,  have 
avi,  atum ;  explicd,  to  explain,  avi,  atum ;  to  unfold,  ui,  itum. 
To  cut,  s6c-o,  sSc-are,  s6c-u-i,  sec-t-um. 

To  sound,         son-o,  son-arS,  s6n-u-i,  sSn-i-tum. 

To  thunder,       t6n-o,  ton-arS,  t6n-u-i,  tSn-i-tiim. 

To  forbid,         v6t-o,  vSt-arS,  v6t-ii-i,  v6t-i-tiim. 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  SECOND  CONJUGATION.  269 

III.  Pei-fect-stem  reduplicates  the  first  Consonant  with  e. 
To  give,  d-o,  d-ar6,  ded-i,  da-tum. 

So,  also,  those  compounds  of  which  the  first  part  is  a  word  of  two  syU 
lahles ;  e.  g.,  circumdS,  circumdare,  circumdedi,  circumdStum,  to  sur- 
round ;  but  the  compounds  with  monosyllables  follow  the  3d  conj. ; 
e.  g.,  addd,  add6r6,  addidi,  additum,  to  add. 
To  stand,  st-o,  st-are,  stet-i,  st-atiim. 

The  compounds  have  in  the  perfect  s  t  S  t  i  when  the  first  part  is  a 
dissyllable ;  e,  g.,  circumstd,  circumsteti ;  but  s  t  i  t  i  when  it  is  a 
Tnonosyllable ;  e.  g.,  adstd,  adstiti. 

IV.  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-vowel. 
To  assist  J         juv-o,  jiiv-arg,  juv-i,  ju-tum. 

(  lava-tum. 
To  wash,  lav-o,  lav-are,  lav-i,  <  lau-tum. 

(  lo-tum. 


(665.)  SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb-stem. 
To  admonish,   mon-eo,  mon-erg,  mon-u  i,  m6n-I-tiim. 

n.  Perfect-stem  adds  6v  to  the  Verb-stem. 
To  blot  out,       del-eo,  del-er6,  del-ev-i,  del-e-tum. 

To  weep,  fl-eo,  fl-ere,  fl-ev-i,  fl-e-tum. 

To  spin,  n-eo,  n-ere,  n-ev-i,  n-e-tum. 

To  fill  up,         compl-eo,        compl-erS,        compl-ev-i,       compl-e-tmn. 
To  abolish,        abol-eo,  &b61-er6,  abol-ev-i,  abol-i-tum. 

The  primitives  oleo  and  pleo  are  obsolete:  like  compleo  are  con- 
jugated impleo,  expleo ;  like  aboleo,  adoleo,  and  exoleo. 

TTT.  Perfect-stem  adds  s  to  the  Verb-stem. 
Euphonic  Rules. 

1.  A  t-sound  before  s  is  dropped;  e.  g^.,  ar(d)-si  =  ars-i. 

2.  Ac-sound  4-  s  =  x;  e.  g.,  aug-si  =  aux-i. 

3.  Bat  a  c-sound  after  1  or  r,  before  s,  is  dropped;  e.  g'.,  fal(g)-si=a 
fuls-i. 

To      shiver  \     ,.  „i^s-x  <  al-s-I 

Sar-s-1 
(ard-s-i). 


To  increase,      aug-eo,  aug-er6,         J  (rug-s-i).         5  ^^,^"*^"^ 

To  be  bright,    fulg-eo,  fulg-erS,         < 

Z2 


]  ful-s-i 
(fulg-s-i). 


270 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


To  stick, 

hser-eo, 

hser-ere, 

(  hae-s-i 
I  (haer-s-i). 

?  h8B-sum. 

To  indulge, 

indulg-eo, 

indulg-erg, 

C  indul-s-i 
\  (indulg-s-i), 

>  indul-tiim. 

To  command, 

jub-eo, 

jub-er6, 

jus-s-i  ( jub-s-i 

,  jas-sum. 

To  remain, 

mgln-eo, 

man-er6, 

man-s-i, 

man-sum. 

To  assuage. 

mulc-eo, 

mulc-erS, 

(  mul-s-i 
\  (mulc-s-i), 

>  mul-siim. 

To  milk, 

mulg-eo. 

mulg-erS, 

C  mul-s-i 
\  (mulg-s-i), 

>  mulc-tum. 

To  laugh. 

rid-eo, 

rid-ere, 

rl-s-i  (rid-s-i), 

ri-siim. 

To  advise, 

suad-eo, 

suad-ere, 

(  sua-s-i 
I  (suad-s-i), 

1  •  sua-sum. 

To  wipe, 

terg-eo, 

terg-erg, 

(  ter-s-i 
I  (terg-s-I), 

>  ter-sum. 

To  swell. 

turg-eo, 

turg-ere, 

(  tur-s-i 
I  (turg-s-i). 

To  twist, 

torqu-eo, 

torqu-ere, 

(  tor-s-i 

(  (torqu-s-i), 

>  tor-tum. 

To  press. 

urg-eo, 

urg-erg, 

ur-s-i  (urg-s-I 

. 

To  shine. 

luc-eo, 

luc-ere, 

lux-i  (luc-s-i). 

To  m,ourn, 

lug-eo, 

lug-ere, 

lux-i  (lug-s-i) 

IV.  Perfect-stem  reduplicates  Jirst  Consonant  and  Vowel. 

To  bite,  mord-eo,  mord-ere,  momord-i,  mor-sum. 

To  hang,  peni-eo,  pend-ere,  pepend-T,  pen-sum. 

To  betroth,  spond-eo,  spond-ere,  spopond-I,  spon-sum. 

To  shear,  tond-eo,  tond-ere,  totond-T,  ton-sum. 

The  compounds  of  these  verbs  drop  the  reduplication ;  e.  g.,  re-spondl 
(not  re-spopondl). 

V.  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-vowel. 


To  take  care. 

cav-eo, 

cav-erS, 

cav-i, 

cau-tum. 

To  favour, 

fav-eo. 

fav-erS, 

fav-i, 

fau-tum. 

To  cherish, 

fdv-eo, 

fov-ere, 

fov-i, 

fo-tiim. 

To  move. 

m6v-eo, 

mov-ere, 

mov-i, 

mo-tum. 

To  dread. 

pav-eo, 

p&v-er6, 

pav-i. 

To  sit, 

sed-eo, 

B6d-er6, 

sed-T, 

ses-sum. 

In  the  same  manner  are  conjugated  the  compounds  with  dissyllables  ; 
e.  g.,  circumsSdeo,  circumsederg,  circumsedi,  circumsessum,  to  sit 
around ;  but  those  with  monosyllables  change  6  of  the  stem  into  i; 
e.  g.,  assideo,  assidSrS,  assedi,  assessum,  to  sit  by. 

To  see,  vid-eo,  vid-6r5,  vid-i,  vi-sfim. 

To  vow  J  v6v-eo,  v6v-ef S,  v6v-i,  vO-tfim. 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


271 


666.)  THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem,  adds  s  to  the  Verb-stem. 
Euphonic  Rules, 

1.  b  before  s  =  p  ;  e.  g.,  scrib-sl  =  scrip-sT. 

2.  c-sound  H-s  =  X  ;  e.  g.^  cing-si  =  cinx-i. 

[c,  g,  h,  qu,  are  regarded  as  c-sounds.] 

3.  t-soDud  (d  or  t)  before  s  is  dropped  ;  e.  g.,  claud-s-i  =  claus-I. 

».  m  before  s  is  either  changed  into  s,  or  p  is  interposed  (prem-s-i=: 
prear^i ;  com-s-i  =  comp-s-I). 


To  write. 

To  bi^id, 
To  carry ^ 
To  cook, 

To  shuif 


scrib-o, 

cing-o, 
veh-o, 
c6qu-o, 

claud-o, 


scrib-ere, 

cing-6re, 
veh-ere, 
c6qu-er6, 

claud-ere, 


scrip-turn. 


scnp-s-i 

(scrib-s-i), 

cinxl  (cing-s-I),  cinc-tum. 

vexT  (vch-s-i),  vec-tum, 

coxi  (coqa-s-i),  coc-tum. 

clau-s-i  )   , 

,1      ,     -^       !>clau-sum. 

(claud-s-i),      5 

An  in  the  compounds  is  changed  into  u ;  e.g.,  includo,  includ6re,  in- 
clusl,  inclusum,  to  shut  in. 
To  give  way,     ced-o,  ced-Srg,  cessT  (ced-s-i),  ces-sum. 

To  scatter,         sparg-o,  sparg-^re,      \  ^  .. 

In  the  compounds    a  is  changed  into   e  ;  e.  g.,  aspergo,  aspergfirfe. 
asper-s-I,  aspersum,  to  besprinkle. 
To  adorn,  c6m-o,  c6m-6re,  com-ps-T,  com-p-tiim. 

To  press,  pr6m-o, 


prem-ere, 


C  press-I 
I  (pr( 


spar-sum. 


pres-sum. 


prem-s-l), 

In  the  compounds  6  is  changed  into  i ;  e.  g.,  comprimo,  comprim6r6, 
compress!,  compressiim,  to  press  together. 
To  carry,  g6r-o,  g6r-6re,  gess-i  (ger-s-i),  ges-tum. 

n.  Perfect-stem  adcis  u  to  the  Verb-stem, 
(a)  Without  change  of  Verb-stem. 


To  nourish, 

al-o, 

al-gr6, 

ai-u-i, 

81-i-tum. 

To  tUl, 

c6l-o, 

c6l-ere, 

c6l-u-i, 

cul-tum. 

To  ask  advice, 

consul-o, 

consul-ere, 

consul-u-i, 

consul-tum. 

To  knead. 

deps-o. 

deps-ere, 

deps-uT, 

deps-tum. 

To  murmur. 

frem-o, 

frem-ere, 

frem-u-i, 

frem-i-tum. 

To  groan, 

gem-o, 

gem-ere, 

gem-u-T, 

gem-i-tum. 

To  grind, 

mol-o, 

mol-ere, 

mol-u-T, 

mol-i-tum. 

To  conceal, 

occul-o, 

occul-ere, 

occul-u-I, 

occul-tum. 

To  grind. 

pins-o, 

pins-ere, 

pins-u-I, 

pins-i-tum. 

To  snatch, 

rftp-io, 

rap-ere, 

rap-u-I, 

rap-tum. 

To  join  to- 
gether, 

:' 

sSr-o, 

sgr-gr6, 

s6r-u-i, 

ser-tom. 

272 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


To  weave,  tex-o,  tex-gre,  tex-u-i,  tex-tiim. 

To  tremble,        trem-o,  trem-ere,  trem-u-L 

To  vomit,  v6m-o,  v5m-ere,  v6m-u-i,  vSm-i-tum. 

(&)  With  change  of  Verb-stem. 
To  beget,  gign-o,  gign-erfi,  gen-u-i,  g^n-i-ttlm. 

To  reap,  met-o^  met-ere^  mess-a-T,  mes-snm. 

To  place,  p6n-o,  pon-ere,  p6s-u-i,  pos-i-tum. 

[For  compounds  of  cmnbere,  see  664,  II.] 

•III.  Perfect-stem  adds  v  or  iv  to  the  Verb-stem, 
(a)  Adds  V,  and  lengthens  Stem- vowel  if  short. 

cem-ere,  cre-v-T,  cre-tum. 


cem-o. 


To  separate, 
perceive, 

The  perfect  and  supine  of  cemo  are  found  only  in  the  compotmds 

e.  g.,  decemo,  decernere,  decrevi,  decrStum,  to  decree. 

To  grow,  cresc-o^  cresc-ere,  cre-v-T,  cre-tum. 

To  smear,  lin-o,  lin-ere^  le-v-i,  or  li-v-i,  li-tum. 

To  know,  nosc-o,  nosc-ere,  no-v-i,  no-tum. 

So,  also,  the  compounds  inter,  ig,  per,  prae-nosco,  have  ovi,  otum  ;  bul 
cog,  ag,  praecog,  recog-nosco,  have  ovi,  itum ;.  e.  g.,  agnosco,  agnosc- 
6r6,  agnovi,  agnitum,  to  ^perceive. 
To  feed,  pasc-o,  pasc-ere,  pa-v-T,  pas-tum. 

To  rtst,  quiesc-o,.  quiesc-Sre,        quie-v-T,  quie-tum. 

To  decide,  scisc-o,  scisc-ere,  sci-v-i,  sci-tum. 

To  sow,  sSr-o,  ser-ere,  se-v-i,  s5-tum. 

The  compounds  have  the  supine  in  itum ;  e.  g.,  consero,.  consSrferJf, 
consevi,  consitum,  to  plant. 


To  allow. 

sin-o. 

sin-ere, 

sT-v-I, 

si-tufid. 

To  despise. 

Bpem-G, 

spern-ere,. 

spre-v-i. 

spr§-tum. 

To  strew. 

stem-G, 

stem-ere. 

BtrarV-i, 

sti-a-tum. 

To     become  \ 

f 

accustom^  \ 

>  suesc-o. 

suesG-er6, 

&ue-v-I, 

sue-tum. 

ed.            ! 

> 

ilf)  Ferfec^stezQ  adds  hr. 

To  summon. 

arcess-o. 

arcessere, 

arcess-iv-i, 

arcess-i-tam. 

In  the  same  manner,  capesso,  facesso,  incesso,  lacesso. 
To        seek,  1 
strive    of-  >  p6t-o,  pet-Srg,  pet-!v-i,  pgt-i-tiim. 

ter,  ) 

To  seek,  quser-o,  quoer-6re,  quses-iv-i,         qu«s-I-tam. 

The  compounds  change  ee  of  the  stem  into  i ;  e.  g.,  conqmro,  cone 
quirgrg,  conquisivi,  conquisitum,  to  examine. 


To  rub, 


t6r-o. 


tgr^rg, 


5  *^-i^-^  X 

\  (/orter-iv-i),  ) 


tii-tilm. 


LIST  OP  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  27^ 

IV.  Perfect-stem  reduplicates  the  first  Consonaiit, 

Some  of  these  present  vowel-changes,  which  must  be  carefully  observed. 
{a)  Wlien  the  first  vowel  is  i,  o,  u,  the  first  consonant  is  reduplicated  with 
that  vowel ;  {b)  in  other  verbs  with  e  ;  (c)  the  compounds  of  dare,  to  give, 
with  i. 

(a)  First  Vowel  i,  o,  or  il 
To  run,  curr-o,  curr-ere,  cu-curr-i,  cur-sum. 

Most  of  the  compounds  have  the  perfect  both  with  and  without  the 
reduplication ;  e.  g.^  accurro,  accurrere,  accurri  and  accucurrT;  ac- 
cursum,  to  run  to. 

To  learn,  disc-o,  .   disc-6r§,  dl-dici. 

The  compounds  also  reduplicate ;  e.  g.^  perdisdJ,  perdidici,  to  horn 


To  weigh,         pend-o,  pend-erS,  p6-pend-i,         pen-sum. 

The  compounds  do  not  reduplicate ;  e.  g.,  appendd,  appenderS,  ap- 
pend!, appensum,  to  hang  to. 

To  demand,      posc-o,  posc-6r6,  po-posc-L 

The  compounds  reduplicate ;  e.  g.,  r6posc6r§,  rSpoposci,  to  deffumA 
bach  again. 

To  prick,  pnng-o,  pung-erS,  pu-pug-i,  punc-tum. 

Compounds  have  perf.  punxi. 
To  beat,  tund-o,  tund-6r§,  tu-tud-i,  tun-sum. 

Compounds  have  supine  tusum;   e.  g.,  contundSrS,  contusom,  to 
crush. 

(6)  Other  Verbs  reduplicate  with  & 

To  fall,  cad-o,  cad-6riB,  c6-cid-i,  cfl-sum. 

To  cut,  csed-o,  CBBd-6r6,  c6-cid-i,  cae-flum. 

The  compounds  have  cidi,  cisum;  e.  g.,  occld6re,  occldl,  oc&s^a^to 
kill. 
To  sing,  can-o,  can-ere,  c6-cin-i,  can-tum. 

The  compounds  have  cinul ;  e.  g.,  succin^rS,  succinui,  to  sing  to. 

To  cheat,  fall-o,  fall-6r6,  f  e-fell-i,  fal-sum. 

To  bargain,      pang-o,  pang-erS,  p6-pig-i,  pac-tum. 

The  compounds  have  pingd,  pegi,  pactum ;  e.  g.,  comping6r6,  compdgiT 
comp  actum,  to  fasten  together. 


To  spare,           parc-o, 

parc-erS, 

pe-perc-i, 

par-s&xL 

To  bring  forth,  p&r-io, 

pSr-ere, 

pe-p6r-i, 

par-tuiii. 

To  drive,           pell-o, 

pell-gr6, 

pe-pul-i, 

pul-sdm. 

To  touch,          tang-o, 

tang-gr6, 

te-tig-i, 

tac-tum. 

274 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


The  compounds  have 

tingo,  tingSrg, 

tigl,  tactum; 

e,  g.,  attinggrfi, 

attigi,  attactum,  to  reach. 

(c)  Compounds  of  dare,  reduplicate  with  i. 

To  hide. 

ab-do, 

abd-6re, 

ab-did-i, 

ab-di-tnm. 

To  add. 

ad-do, 

add-er6, 

ad-did-i, 

ad-di-tum. 

To  lay  up, 

con-do, 

con-d-er6 

con-did-T, 

con-di-tum. 

To  believe, 

credo, 

cred-gre, 

cre-did-T, 

crg-di-tum. 

To  surrender, 

de-do, 

ded-6re. 

de-did-i. 

de-di-tum. 

To  publish. 

e-do, 

ed-er6, 

e-did-i, 

e-di-tum. 

To  put  in, 

in-do, 

ind-ere, 

in-did-i, 

in-di-tum. 

To  oppose, 

ob-do, 

obd-ere, 

ob-did-T, 

ob-di-tum. 

To  destroy, 

per-do. 

perd-ere, 

per-didi. 

per-di-tum. 

To  betray. 

pro-do. 

prod-erS, 

pro-did-i, 

pro-di-tum. 

To  restore. 

red-do, 

redd-ere. 

red-did-i, 

red-di-tum. 

To  deliver. 

tra-do, 

trad-erS, 

tra-did-i, 

tra-di-tum. 

To  sell, 

ven-do. 

vend-er6, 

ven-did-I, 

ven-di-tum. 

em-i, 

em-tum. 

fod-i, 

fos-sum. 

fug-T, 

fug-i-tum. 

fud-i, 

fu-siim. 

leg-i, 

lec-tum. 

V.  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-vowel  of  the  Verb, 
(a)  Without  Vowel-changes. 
To  take,  gm-o,  em-6r6, 

Componnds,  co6mo,  adim6,  eximd. 

To  dig,  fod-io,  fod-6re, 

1*0  jly,  fug-io,  fug-erg, 

To  pour,  fund-o,  fund-6re, 

To  read,  leg-o,  leg-6r6, 

The  compounds  with  per,  prae,  re,  and  sub  retain  e  ;  e.  g.,  perl6g6rg, 
perlegi,  perlectum,  to  read  through ;  but  those  with  col,  de,  e,  se, 
change  6  into  i ;  e.  g.,  coUigSre,  coUegi,  coUectiim,  to  collect :  three, 
diligo,  /  love;  intelligo,  /  understand;  neglTgo,  /  neglect,  have 
exi,  ectum ;  e.  g.,  diligfirg,  dilexi,  dilectum. 

To  leave,  linqu-o,  linqu-ere,  liqu-i, 

To  burst,  rump-o,  rump-er6,  rup-T, 

To  conquer,       vinc-o,  vinc-erS,  vic-i, 

(b)  With  Vowel-change. 
To  drive,  Sg-o,  Sg-erS,  eg-i. 

Three  of  the  compounds  retain  ft,  circum^go,  perago,  sltftgo :  two  un- 
dergo contraction,  cogo  (con  +  ago),  dego  (de  +  ago) :  compoimds 
with  ab,  amb,  ad,  ex,  prod,  sub,  change  &  into  i ;  e.  g.,  abigSrS, 
abegi,  abactum,  to  drive  avjay. 

To  take,  cap-io,  cap-6rg, 


lic-tum. 

rup-tum. 

vic-tum. 

ac-tum. 


cep-i. 


cap-turn. 


All  the  compounds  change  a  into  i,  and  have  supine  ceptum;  e.  g^ 
accip-6r6,  accepi,  acceptum,  to  receive. 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


276 


fac-io, 


fac-6r6, 


fec-T, 


factum. 


To  make, 
To  do, 

1.  Compounds  with  verbs  retain  a ;  e.  g.,  labef  acSrg,  labgf  eci,  labe- 
factiim,  to  weaken. 

2.  Compounds  with  prepositions  change  a  into  i ;  e.  g.,  aflFicgrS,  affect, 
affectum,  to  affect. 

To  break,  frang-o,  frang-6r6,  freg-i,  frac-tum. 

Compounds  change  a  into  i ;  e.  g.,  refringere,  refregi,  refractum,  to 
break  open. 
To  cast,  jac-io,  jac-erS,  jee-i,  jac-tum. 

Compounds  ab,  ad,  de,  e,  in,  ob,  re,  trans,  all  change  &  into  i ;  e,  g^ 
abjicerS,  abjeci,  abjectum,  to  throw  away. 

VI.  The  Perfect-stem  presents  the  simple  Verb-stem, 
(a)  Stems  ending  in  w  or  t?. 


To  refuse, 

abnu-o, 

abnu-er6. 

abnu-i. 

To  sharpen, 

acu-o. 

acu-gr6, 

acu-I, 

acu-tum. 

To  show. 

argu-o. 

argu-Srg, 

argu-i, 

argu-tum. 

To  agree, 

congru-o, 

congru-6r§. 

congru-i. 

To  jmt  off, 

exu-o. 

exu-gre, 

exu-i, 

exu-tiim. 

To  put  on, 

indu-o, 

indu-6re, 

indu-i, 

indu-tum. 

To  imbue. 

imbu-o. 

imbu-6r6, 

imbu-i. 

imbu-tum. 

To  pay. 

lu-o. 

lu-6re. 

lu-i. 

lu-tiim. 

Tofear, 

m§tu-o, 

m6tu-ere, 

mgtu-i. 

To  lessen, 

minu-o, 

minu-ere. 

minu-i, 

minu-tum. 

To  rush. 

ru-o, 

ru-6r6. 

ru-T, 

ru-tum. 

To  hose, 

solv-o. 

solv-ere, 

solv-i. 

sol  u-tum. 

To  spit. 

spu-o, 

spu-ere, 

spuT, 

spu  tum. 

To  place, 

statu- 0, 

statu-erS, 

statu-i, 

statu-tum. 

To  sneeze. 

stemu-o, 

stemu-ere, 

stemu-i, 

stemu-tum. 

To  sew. 

su-o. 

su-6r6. 

su-T, 

sii-tum. 

To  give. 

tribu-o, 

tribu-6re. 

tribu-i, 

tribu-tum. 

To  roU, 

volv-o, 

volv-6re. 

volv-i. 

volii-tum. 

(6) 

Consonan^stems. 

To  weigh, 

append-o, 

append-ere, 

append-I, 

appen-som. 

So,  also,  the  other  compounds  of  pendo. 

To  attend, 

attend-o, 

attend-ere. 

attend-i, 

atten-sum. 

So,  also,  the  other  compounds  of  tendo 

To  drink. 

bib-o, 

bib-erg, 

bib-i, 

bibi-tum. 

Toforge, 

cud-o, 

cud-gre, 

cudi, 

cu-sum. 

To  eat. 

6d-o, 

ed-ere, 

ed-I, 

6-sum. 

To  lick. 

lamb-o. 

lamb-ere, 

lamb-T. 

To  cheia, 

mand-o. 

mand-erg, 

mand-i, 

man-sfim. 

To  spread, 

pand-o, 

pand-grg, 

pand-i, 

pas-sum. 

276  LIST  OF  VERBS,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

To  take,  prehend-o,       prehend-ere,     prghend-i,         pr6hen-stim. 

To  scratch,        sc&b-o,  scab-ere,  scab-i. 

To  climb,  scand-o,  scand-ere,         scand-i.  scan-sum. 

Compounds  (a,  e,  de,  con,  in)  change  a  into  e ;  e.  g.,  ascendo. 
To  sink  down,  sid-o,  sid-SrS,  sid-i. 

The  compounds  take  the  perf.  and  supine  from  s6de6 ;  e.  g.,  consi 
derg,  consedi,  consessum,  to  sit  together. 
To  hiss,  strid-o,  strid-gre,  strid-i.         ^ 

To  turn,  vert-o,  vert-6re,  vert-i,  ver-sum. 

Deverto,  praeverto,  and  rSverto  are  also  used  in  the  passive  form  as 
deponents  ;  e.  g.,  rSvertor,  reverti,  reversus,  sum,  /  turn  back. 
To  brush,  verr-o,  verr-Sre,  verr-i,  ver-sum. 

To  pluck,  vell-o,  vell-er6,  vell-i,  vul-siim. 

Compounds  of  cend6  and  fend6  belong  here,  viz., 
To  bum,  incend-o,         incend-§re,       incend-i,  incen-sum. 

To  defend,         defend-o,  defend-6r6,       defend  i,  defen-sum. 

(667;)  rOUKTH   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  iv  to  the  Verb-stem. 

(Obs.)  This  class  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation; 
the  following  alone  has  a  peculiar  supine : 
To  bury,  s6p6l-io,  sepel-ir§,  s§p6l-iv-i,  sepul-tum. 

II.  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  clothe,           Smic-io,  ftmic-irg,  Smic-u-i,  amic-tum. 

To  open,            ap6r-io,  aper-ire,  ap6r-u-i,  aper-tum.* 

To  cover,           6p6r-io,  6per-ir6,  6p6r-u-i,  oper-tum. 

To  leap,             sal-io,  sSl-ir6,  sal-u-i,  sal-tiim. 

Compoxmds  change  2  into  i ;  e.  g.,  dSsilirS,  desflui,  desultum,  to  leap 
down. 

m.  Perfect-stem  adds  s  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  cram,  farc-io,  farc-irfi,         <  ,„         _,  >  farc-tiim. 

I  (farc-s-i),        5 

The  coiiipounds  change  &  into  e ;  e.  g.,  confercire,  confersi,  confertum, 
to  Jill  up. 


To  prop, 

fulc-io, 

fulc-ire, 

5  ful-s-i 
>  (fulc-s-i). 

>  ful-tuiH. 

To  draw, 

haur-io. 

haur-ire, 

i  hau-s-i 
\[  (haur-s-i), 

]  haus-tum. 

To  decree, 

sanc-io. 

sanc-ir6. 

(  sanx-i 
\  (sanc-s-i), 

)  sanc-i-tuih  «wi 
)  sanc-tum. 

*  The  compounds  of  par-id  which  begin  with  a  vowel  have  ui,  ertiim, 
as  in  Class  II.;  those  beginning  with  a  consonant  have  i,  ertiim,  as  in 
Class  V. 


LIST  OF  DEPONENT  VERBS.  277 

To  pcdck,  sarc-io,  sarc-ir6,         <  ^'*'*  >sar-tum. 

(  (sarc-s-ij,        5 

To  fed,  sent-io,  senMrS,        )  /  ^^t^  -1         ( sen-sum. 

Instead  of  kssentid,  assentiSf,  deponent  is  more  common. 

To  hedge  in,     sep-io,  s6p-irS,  sep-s-i,  sep-tflm. 

To  bind,  vinc-io,  vinciru,         <  ,  .        .^         >vinc-tam. 

I  (vmc-s-i),        > 

rV.  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-^owel. 
Contains  but  a  single  simple  verb. 
To  come,  v§n-io,  venire,  v6n-i,  ven-tilm. 

V.  Perfect-stem  takes  the  simple  Verb-stem, 
To  ascertain,    compfir-io,       comp6r-irS,       compfir-i,  comper-tuitt.* 

To  discern,       r6p6r-io,  t&pST-ir&,  r6p6r-i,  r6per-ttbh.* 

(668.)  DEPONENT  VERBS. 

FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

To  exhort,  hort-6r,  hort-ftri,  hort-§t-n8« 

The  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation  are  the  inosit  numerous,  btil  aj!% 
formed  like  hortor,  vrith  ari,  atus. 

SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

To  acknowledge,       fit-eor,  fat-eri,  fas-sus. 

The  compounds  make  fitedr,  fessils ;  e.  g.,  confiteSr,  confiteri,  ccwtt" 
fessus,  to  confess :  diffiteor  has  no  participle. 


To  bid, 

lic-eor, 

lic-erl, 

lic-it-us. 

To  heal. 

med-eor, 

m6d-eri. 

To  deserve, 

m6r-e6r, 

m6r-eri, 

mSr-it-iis. 

To  pity. 

mis6r-e6r, 

mis6r-eri, 

;  mis6r-it-us,    or 
\[  miser-tfis. 

To  think. 

r-e6r, 

r-eri, 

ra-tus. 

To  look  upon. 

tu-e6r. 

tu-eri. 

J  tu-it-us,  or 
\  tu-tus. 

Tofear, 

v6r-e6r. 

vfir-eri, 

v6r-it-us. 

THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

To  devise. 

comminisc-6r, 

comminisc-i, 

commen-t&« 

R6miniscor, 

to  remember,  has  no 

perfect. 

To  obtain, 

adipisc-6r, 

adipisc-i, 

adep-tfis. 

To  be  wixiry, 

d6fetisc-6r, 

d6fetisc-i, 

dsf(^-i^e. 

*  See  note,  p.  276. 

A 

A 

27a 


LIST  OF  DEPONENT  VERBS. 


To  awakcj 

expergisc-6r, 

expergisc-i, 

experrec-ttli. 
C  fruc-tiis    and 

To  enjoy, 

fru-6r, 

fru-i, 

I  fru-it-us. 

To  perform, 

fung-6r, 

fung-i, 

fanc-tus. 

To  proceed, 

grad-i6r, 

grftd-i, 

gres-siis. 

Compounds  change  the  &  into  6  ; 

;  e.  g.,  aggrSdl, 

aggressus,  to  assail 

To  he  angry, 

irasc-6r, 

irasc-i. 

TofaU, 

lab-6r, 

lab-i, 

lap-sus. 

To  speak, 

I6qu-6r, 

I6qu.i, 

I6cu-tus. 

To  die, 

m6r-i6r, 

m6r-i, 

mor-tuiis. 

To  obtain, 

nancisc-6r, 

nancisc-i, 

nac-tus. 

To  he  horn, 

nasc-6r, 

nasc-i, 

na-tus. 

To  lean  upon, 
strive, 

'"  j  nlt-5r. 

nlt-i, 

\  ni-sus,  or 
;  nix-US. 

Toforget, 

6blivisc-6r, 

oblivisc-i, 

obli-tus. 

To  hargain. 

pScisc-or, 

picisc-i, 

pac-tus. 

Tofeed, 

pasc-6r, 

pasc-i. 

pas-tils. 

This  verb  is  the  passive  of  pascere,  to  give  food. 
To  suffer,  p&t-i6r,  pSt-i, 

PerpStidr,  perpessus,  to  etidure,  changes  &  into  S. 


pas-sus. 


(From  plectd,  to  twine.) 


To  embrace. 

5 

amplect-6r, 
complect-6r, 

amplect-i, 
complect-i, 

amplex-us. 
complex-US. 

To  set  out, 

pr6ficisc-6r, 

proficisc-i. 

profec-tus. 

To  complain. 

qaer-6r, 

quer-i, 

ques-tus. 

To  grin. 

ring-6r, 

ring-I. 

Tofollow, 

s6qu-or. 

s6qu-i, 

s6cu-tus. 

To  revenge, 

ulcisc-dr, 

ulcisc-i, 

ul-tus. 

To  use. 

tiror, 

ut-i, 

u-sus. 

FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 


To  assent, 

assent-i6r, 

assent-iri, 

assen-sus. 

To  flatter. 

bland-i6r, 

bland-iri, 

bland-it-us. 

To  try, 

exp6r-i6r, 

exper-iri, 

exper-tus. 

To  bestow  money. 

larg-i6r, 

largiri, 

larg-it-Qs. 

To  lie, 

ment-idr, 

ment-iri, 

ment-it-us. 

To  measure. 

m6t-ior. 

met-iri, 

men-sus. 

To  move  a  mass, 

m6l-i6r, 

mol-iri, 

mol-it-us. 

To  wait  for,     - 

opp6r-i6r, 

opp6r-iri, 

opper-tus. 

To  begin. 

ord-i6r, 

ord-iri, 

or-stls. 

INCHOATIVE  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


279 


To  rise, 
To  divide, 
To    possess 
myself  of, 
To  cast  lots. 


6r-i6r, 

6r-iri, 

or-tus. 

part-ior. 

partiri, 

part-it-US 

pot-ior, 

pot-iri, 

p6t-it-us. 

sort-ior, 

sort-iri, 

sort-it-US, 

(669.) 


INCHOATIVE  VERBS. 


Inchoatives  are  verbs  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  or  other  verbs, 
expressing  a  beginning  or  becoming  of  the  act  or  state  denoted  by  the 
primitive.  Their  stems  always  end  in  sc,  and  they  all  follow  the  form  of 
the  3d  conj. ;  e.  g., 

From  puer,  boy,  we  have  puerasc-ere,  to  become  a  boy  [again), 
"     matur-us,  ripe,  we  have  matdresc-Sre,  to  become  ripe. 
"     dorm-ir6,  to  sleep,  we  have  obdormisc-6re,  to  fall  asleep, 

(1.)  It  is  enough  to  observe  on  those  derived  from  adjectives  and  nouns 

that  they  either  have  no  perfect,  or  else-form  it  in  ui. 
(2.)  As  to  those  derived  from  verbs, 

[a)  Most  are  from  verbs  in  the  second  conjugation,  and  form  their 
perfect-stem  by  adding  u  to  the  stem,  rejecting  sc;  or,  in  other 
words,  their  perf.-stem  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  simple  verb  from 
which  they  are  derived ;  e.  g., 

To  become  gray,        canesc-er§  (canere),        canu-L 
To  grow  sour,  acesc-6re  (acere),  acu-i. 

{b)  Those  derived  from  verbs  of  the  other  conjugations  take  the  per- 
fects of  the  simple  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived. 

To  grow  old,    inv6terasc-6re  [inveterdrS),   inveterav-i,   invetera-tum. 
To  come  to  life,  r&yivisc-ere  (vivSre),  rSvix-i,  rSvic-tum. 

To  fall  asleep,  obdormisc-ore  [dormirS),       obdormiv-i,   obdomu-tom  ^ 

11.  IRREGULAR  VERBS.* 


(670.)                                             INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Tenses  for  Incomplete  Action. 

Tenses  for  Complete  Action.      1] 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 

1.  posse,  to  beuble. 

potuisse,  to  have  been  able. 

2.  velle,  to  be  willing. 

voluisse,  to  have  been  willing. 

3.  nolle,  to  be  umoilling. 

noluisse,  to  have  been  unwilling. 

4.  malle,  to  be  more  willing. 

maluisse,  to  have  been  more  willing. 

5.  6der6,  or  esse,  to  eat. 

edisse,  to  have  eaten. 

6.  ferre,  to  bear. 

tuUsse,  to  have  borne,  or  suffered. 

7.  fieri,  to  become. 

factum  essS,  to  have  been  made,  or 

done. 
latum  essS,  to  have  been  borne. 

8.  ferri,  to  be  borne. 

^  See  note,  next  pa^e. 


280 


IRftEOtJLAR  VERBS. 


(671.)                                            INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present,  I  am  able,  6fC. 

Perfect,  I  have  been  able,  (fc. 

1.  possum,*     potes,         potest, 

1.  p6tu-i,             isti,      it. 

possumus,   potestis,     possunt. 

potu-imus,      istis,     erant  or  ere. 

2.  void,             vis,              vult, 

2.  v61u-i,              isti,       it, 

volumiis,     vultis,          volunt. 

volu-imus,       istis,     erunt  or  er6. 

3.  nolo,             nonvis,        nonvult, 

3.  nolu-i,              isti,       it, 

nolumus,      nonvultis,   nolunt. 

nolu-imus,      istis,     erunt  or  er6. 

4.  maid,            mavis,         mavult. 

4.  malu-i,            isti,      it. 

malumus,     mavultis,     malunt. 

malu-imus,      istis,     erunt  or  erS. 

5.  edo,              edis  or  es,  edit  or  est. 

5.  ed-i,                 isti,       it. 

edimiis,        editis  «>r  estis  ;  edunt. 

ed-imus,          istis,     erunt  or  6r6. 

6.  f  erd,             fers,             fert. 

6.  tul-i,                isti,      it. 

ferimiis,      fertis,          ferunt. 

tiil-imus,         istis,     erunt  or  ere. 

7.  fio,t              fis,               fit, 

7.  factus  sum,     gs,        est. 

fimus,          fitls,            fiunt. 

facti  sumus,    estis,    sunt. 

8.  f  6r6r,           ferris  ar  ferre  ;  fertur, 

8.  latus  sum,       es,        est, 

ferimur,      fgrimini,     feniiitur. 

lati  sumus,      estis,    sunt. 

Imperfect,  /  wets  able,.  6(C. 

Pluperfect,  /  had  been  able,  Sfc. 

1.  pot-eram,        6ras,          erfit, 

1.  p6tu-eram,     eras,          erat. 

pot-eramus,    Gratis,       grant. 

potu-eramus,  eratis,        erant. 

'z.  vol-ebam,        ebas,          ebat. 

2.  v6lu-6ram,      eras,          grat. 

vol-ebamus,    ebatis,       ebant. 

v6lu-6ramus,  eratis,        grant. 

3.  nol-ebam,       ebas,         ebat, 

3.  nolu-eram,      eras,          erat. 

nol-gbamus,   ebatis,      ebant. 

nolu-6ramus,  erStis,       grant. 

4.  mal-ebam,      ebas,         §bat, 

4.  malu-grftm,     grSs,          gillt. 

mal-ebamus,  ebatis,       ebant. 

malu-eramus,  eratis,       grant. 

5.  ed-ebam,        ebas,         ebat, 

5.  ed-eram,         gras,          grat, 

ed-ebamus,     ebatis,       ebant. 

gd-eramiis,     gratis,       grant. 

6.  f  er-ebam,        ebas,         ebat, 

6.  tul-gram,         gras,          erat, 

fer-ebamus,    ebatis,       ebant. 

tul-eramus,     eratis,       erant. 

7.  f  i-ebam,          ebas,         ebat. 

7.  factus  gram,  eras,          grat. 

fi-ebamus,      ebatis,      ebant. 

facti  gramus,  gratis,       grant. 

8.  fer-ebar,         ebarisorg,  ebatur, 

8.  latiis  gram,     eras,          erat. 

f6r-ebamur,    ebamini,  ebantiir. 

lati  eramus,    gratis,        grant. 

Future, 

Future  Perfect, 

/  shall  or  wUl  have  been  able,  6fc. 

1.  p6t-6r6,          ens,          6rit, 

1.  p6tu-grd,        gris,           grit, 

p6t-6rimus,    eritis,        erunt. 

potu-erimus,  gritis,       erint. 

2.  v6l-am,            es,              gt, 

12.  v61u-gr6,         gris,          grit, 

vol-emiis,       etis,           ent. 

v6lu-erimus,  eritis,        erint. 

3.  nol-am,           es,             gt, 

3.  nolu-ero,         eris,           grit, 

nol-emus,        etis,          ent. 

nolu-grimus,  eritis,        grint. 

4.  mal-am,           es,             et. 

4.  malu-erd,        gris,          erit, 

mal-emus,       etis,          ent. 

malu-erimus,  eritis,        erint. 

5.  ed-am,             es,             et, 

5.  ed-erd,             gris,          grit. 

6d-emus,        etis,          ent. 

ed-erimus,      gritis,        erint. 

6.  f  er-am,           es,             et, 

6.  tul-er6,            eris,          erit, 

f6r-6nius,       etis,          ent. 

tul-erimus,      gritis,        grint. 

7.  fi-am,             5s,            6t, 

7.  factus  gr6,      gris,          erit. 

fi-emus,         etis,          ent. 

facti  erimus,  eritis,        erint. 

S.fer-ar,             ens  or  6rg,  etur, 

8.  latus  ero,        gris,           erit. 

1     fer-emur,        emini,       entur. 

lati  erimus,     eritis,        grint. 

*  As  many  of  these  verbs  are  nearly  related  to  each  other,  it  seems  un- 
necessary to  separate  their  forms  of  inflection.  The  correspondent  num- 
bers will  be  sufficient  direction  in  tracing  the  several  tenses  of  each  verb. 

t  Fio,  contranr  to  the  general  rule  (24,  a),  has  i  long  throughout,  before 
▼ow«ls :  but  berore  r  it  is  short ;  as,  figri. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


281 


(672.) 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


Note. — Possum,  volo,  malo,  have  no  imperative  mood. 


3.  noli,  or  nolitS,  be  thou  unwilling. 
nolite,  or  nolitote,  be  ye,  ^c. 

5.  6d6,  6ditd,  or  es,  estd,  eat  thou. 
edite,  editdtg :  3.  6dunt6. 

6.  f  er,  or  fert6,  bear  thou. 
ferte,  or  fertotS :  3.  f  eruntd. 


7.  f i,  or  fito,  become  thou. 

f ite,  or  f itote  :  3.  fiuntd. 

8.  f  erre,  or  fertor,  be  thou  borne. 

f  erimini,  or  f  eriminor :  3.  f  enm 
tor. 


(673.) 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Present, 

1.  poss-im, 
poss-imiis, 

2.  vel-im, 
vel-imus, 

3.  nolim, 
nolimus, 

4.  mal-un, 
m&l-unus, 

5.  6d-am, 
6d-ftmus, 

6.  f  er-am, 
fer-amus, 

7.  f  i-am, 
fi-amus, 

8.  f  6r-ar, 
f6r-amur, 


I  may  he  able,  SfC 
is,  it. 


itis, 

int. 

IS, 

% 

itis, 

int. 

is, 

it. 

itis, 

int. 

is, 

it. 

itis. 

int. 

as. 

at. 

atis, 

ant. 

as. 

at, 

atis, 

ant. 

as, 

at. 

atis. 

ant. 

aris  or  are,  atur. 

amini, 

antur. 

Pebfect,  I  may 

1.  potu-erim, 
p6tu-6rimus, 

2.  v6lu-6rim, 
v6lu-6rimus, 

3.  nolu-grim, 
nolu-erimus, 

4.  malu-6rim, 
malu-6rimus, 

5.  6d-6rim, 
ed-erimus, 

6.  tul-erim, 
tul-6rimus, 

7.  factus  sim, 
facti  simus, 

8.  latas  sim, 
lati  simus, 


have  been 

eris, 

6ritis, 

eris, 

eritis, 

eris, 

Sritis, 

eris, 

iritis, 

eris, 

gritis, 

eris, 

6ritis, 

sis, 

sitTs, 

sis, 

sitis, 


able,  6fC. 

erit, 

6rint. 

erit, 

6rint. 

erit, 

erint. 

erit, 

erint. 

erit, 

6rint. 

erit, 

erint. 

sit, 

sint. 

sit, 

sint. 


Impekpect,  Imi^ht  be  able,  ifc. 


1.  Poss-6m, 
poss-emus, 

2.  veU-em, 
veil-emus, 

3.  noU-em, 
noil-emus, 

4.  mall-6m, 
mall-emus, 

5.  eder-6m  <?r  essem ;  es, 
eder-emus,        etis, 

6.  ferr-6m,  gs, 
ferr-gmus, 

7.  f  I6r-em, 
fier-emus, 

8.ferr-6r, 
ferr-emur, 


etis, 

6s, 

etis, 

es, 

etis, 

es, 

etis. 


etis. 


etis, 


6t, 

ent. 

6t, 

ent. 

6t, 

ent. 

6t, 

ent. 

6t, 

ent. 

6t, 

ent. 

6t, 

ent. 


eris  or  ere,  etur, 
emini,      entur. 


Pluperf.,  I  might  have  been  able,  «^. 

1.  potu-issem,       isses,  isset, 
potu-issemus,   issetis,  issent. 

2.  volu-issem,       isses,  iss^t, 
volu-issemus,    issetis,  issent. 

3.  nolu-issem,        isses,  isset, 
n51u-issemus,    issetis,  issent. 

4.  malu-issem,      isses,  isset, 
malu-issemus,  issetis,  issent. 

5.  ed-issem,          isses,  isset, 
ed-issemus,       issetis,  issent. 

6.  tul-issem,          isses,  isset, 
tul-issemiis,      issetis,  issent. 

7.  factus  essem,    esses,  esset, 
fact!  essemus,  essetts,  essent. 

8.  latus  essem,      esses,  esset, 
lati  essemus,     essetis,  essent. 


(674.) 


GERUNDS. 


2.  volendi,  volendo,  volendum,  of  being,  in  being,  to  be,  willing. 

3.  nolendi,  nolendo,  nolendum,        "  "  "      unwilling. 

4.  malendi,  malendo,  malendum,     "  "  "      more  willing. 

5.  edendi,  edendo,  edendum,  of  eating,  in  eating,  to  eat. 

6.  ftrendi,  ftrendo,  fferendum,  of  bearing,  in  bearing,  to  bear. 


(675.) 


SUPINES. 


Accusative.  5.  esom,  to  eat. 
6.  Utam,  to  bear. 


Ablative,  §sfi,  to  be  eaten,  to  eat. 
lata,  to  be  borne. 


A  a2 


282 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


(676.) 


PARTICIPLES. 


Active.  1.  potens,  being-  able. 

2.  volens,      "      willinf^. 

3.  nolens,      "      ummlling: 

4.  malens,     "      more  willing. 

5.  edens,  eating.  esurus,  about  to  eat. 

6.  ferens,  bearing.         laturus,  about  to  bear. 

7.  faciendus,  to  be  made  or  done. 

8.  fSrendus,  to  be  borne. 

Passive.  7.  factiis,  being  or  having  been  made  or  done. 
8.  latus,  being  or  having  been  borne  or  suffered. 


(677.) 


Eo,  /  go. 


Sitigular. 


E6,  /  go,  is  conjugated  like  audio,  except  in  the  following  tenses  : 

Imp.  Ind.  Pres.  ed, 

Past,  ibam, 

Fut.    ibd, 
Imperative. 
Imp.  Pot.  Pres.  earn, 
Gerunds.  eundi, 


is,  it. 

ibas,       ibat. 

ibis,       ibit. 

1,  or  it6. 

eas,        eat. 

eundo,    eundum. 
Particips.  Pres.  iens  {gen.  euntis),  going.    Fut.  iturus,  about  to  go. 
"      '  itum,  itu. 


Plural. 

imus,          itis,  eunt. 

ibamus,       ibatis,  ibant. 

ibimiis,       ibTtls,  ibunt. 

it6,  or  itotS.     3.  enntfi. 

eamus,       eatis,  eant. 


Rem.  In  like  manner,  the  compounds  of  eo  are  formed:  also,  qneo,  to  be 
able,  and  ngqueo,  «o  6e  unable ;  except  that  these  two  have  no  imper- 
.  ative  mood  or  gerunds. 


12.  DEFECTIVE  VERBS 


(678.)  Are  those  which  have  only  some  particular  tenses  and  moods ; 
as,  aio,  /  say ;  ausim,  /  dare ;  ave,  hail  !  Sec. 


(1.)  Aio,  /  say. 

Ind.  Pres. 
Imperfect. 
Imperative. 
Subj.  Pres, 
Participle. 

aio, 
ai-ebam, 

aiens. 

Singular.                                                   Plural. 

ais,         ait. 

ebas,        ebat.     ebamus,      ebatis, 

ai. 

aias,        aiat. 

aiunt. 
ebant. 

aiant. 

(2.)  AusTm,  /  dare. 

Ind.  Pres. 

ausim, 

ausis,        ausit. 

ausint. 

(3.)  Ave,  /lail ! 

Imperative. 
Infinitive. 

ave,  or  ftveto.                        avet6,  or  ftvetote. 
averg. 

(4 

)  Salve,  God  save  you  ! 

Imperative. 
Infinitive. 
Ind.  Fut. 

salverS. 

salve,  or  salvetS.            salvete,  or 
salvSbis. 

salvet6t§. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


283 


(5.)  Cedo,  give  me. 

Imperative, 

Singular. 

cedo. 

Plural. 

cedite. 

(6.)  Faxo,  or  faxim  [for  faciam),  I  will  or 

may  do  it. 

Ind.  Pres. 

fax-o,  or  fax-im,     is,     it.     imus, 

itis. 

int. 

(7.)  GiMsesd,  I  pray. 

Ind.  Pres. 
Injinitive. 
Participle. 

qva2s-6,     is,              it.         umus. 

quaesere. 

quae  sens. 

(8.)  Inquam,  or  Inquid,  /  say.                                      1 

Impf.  Ind.  Pres.  inqa-i6,  or  dm,     is,     it.    imus. 
Past.                                                inquiebat. 
Fut.                                    inqnies,    inquigt. 
Perf.  Ind.  Pres.                inquisti. 
Imperative.     iuqu6,        inquitS. 
Participle.       inqui^ns. 

inquite. 

iunt. 
inquie- 
[bant. 

(9.)  These  verbs, 

Nov-i,  /  know ; 

Memin-i,  I  remember; 

Coep-i,  /  begin  ; 

Od-i,  I  hate, 
have  the  forms  of  the  perfect  tenses  combined  with  the  meanings  of  the 
imperfect.    Nosco,  the  present  of  novi,  is  in  use,  and  denotes  to  learn, 
whence  novi  expresses   the   actual  knowledge  which  is  the  result  of 
past  learning. 


(  i,                       isti,  &c.     (Pres.) 

N6v. 

6r5m,                gras,  &c.     (Past.) 

Memln- 

6r6,                   eris,  &:c.     {Fut.) 
6rim,                 6ris,  &c.     {Subj.  Pres.) 

Coep- 

Od- 

issem,               isses,  &c.     {Subj.  Past.) 

I  isse,                                    {Infinitive.) 

Mement5,  mementote.     (Imperative.) 

Osus,  osuras  ;  coeptus,  coBptunis.     [Participles.) 

13.  IMPERSONAL  VERBS 
(679.)  Are  those  which  have  no  subject,  and  take  the  pronoun  it  before 
them  in  English  ;  e.  g.,  pluit,  it  rains. 
1.  Impersonals  never  used  personally. 


libet,  libuit,  it  pleases. 
Iic6t,  licuit,  or  )  one  may, 
licitum  est,   )  it  is  lawful. 

6port6t,  oportuit,  ^^^^^  ^,^^^*' 

*mTs6r6t,  one  pities. 
*piget,  it  grieves  [one). 


*poenitet,  poenituit,  it  repents. 
*   -J VI.     -J  -i.     ^  it  shames, 
*pudet,  puduit,     J  ^^^  -^  ashamed. 

*^j«i.      -*.      -         *.  \i^  wearies, 
*ttfid6t,  pertoesum  est,  j 

refert,  it  concerns. 


*  Those  marked  *  take  ace.  of  person  and  gen.  of  the  thing  (or  object  of 
the  feeling). 


284 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


2.  Impersonals  sometimes  used  personally  in  third  person  singular  or 
plural. 


"^^  ^*^^*'-- 


grandiuat, 
lucescitj 


it  hails. 

it  grows  light. 


ningit,  it  snows. 

pluit,  it  rains. 

t6nat,  it  thunders. 

vesperascit,  it  groios  dark. 


3.  Personal  verbs  used  specially  as  impersonals  in  third  person  sin- 
gular. 


accidit, 

acc6dit,*' 

apparet, 

attinet, 

conducit, 

constat, 

contingit, 

convenit, 

delectat, 

decet, 

dedecet, . 

evenit, 

expSdit, 

exciditjt 


it  happens, 
it  is  added, 
it  appears, 
it  belongs  to. 
it  is  conducive. 


\  it  is  agreed  upon, 
it  happens, 
it  suits,  agrees, 
it  is  delightful, 
it  is  becoming, 
it  is  unbecoming, 
it  turns  out. 
it  is  expedient, 
it  has  escaped  me. 


fit, 

interest, 

juvat, 

latet, 

liquSt, 

patet, 

placet, 

preestat, 

re  Stat, 

solet, 

assol3t^ 

Stat, 

sufFicit, 

vacfit, 


it  happens, 
it  concerns, 
it  is  pleasant, 
it  is  unknown,  con- 
cealed, 
it  is  clear, 
it  is  plain,  open, 
it  pleases  [I  resolve). 
it  is  better, 
it  remains. 

it  happens  usually. 

it  is  resolved. 

it  suffices. 

(/)  have  leisure. 


Rem.  These  may  be  used  in  the  different  tenses  of  indie,  and  subj. 
moods. 

4.  The  third  person  singular  of  many  intransitive  verbs  is  used  im- 
personally in  the  passive;  e.  g'.,  curritur,  they  run  (it  is  run  by 
them);  pugnfttum  est,  they  fought  (it  was  fought  by  them). 
Those  which  govern  the  dative,  govern  it  also  in  the  impersonal 
form;  e.  g.,  I  am  envied,  raihl  invidetiir. 

*Accedlt  qvLod  (or  VLt)  =  moreover. 

i  i.  e.,  de  mfimorift  excXdit  =  z^  has  slipped  from  my  memory — is 
forgotten. 


§  7.  ADVERB. 


The  adverb  qiialifies  a  verb,  adjective,  or  anotber  adverb. 

'  I.  Derivative  Adverbs, 

(680.)  Derivative  adverbs  [a)  are  nearly  all  formed  from  adjectives  or 
paHidples,  by  adding  e  or  1 1 6  r  to  their  stems : 

1.  Add  d  to  stem  of  adjectives  in  u  s,  ft,  u  m ;  e.  g., 

el  a r  -  u  s,  illustrums.  c  1  ft r -  6,  illustriously^. 

Rem.  Bonus  makes  b  8  n  S,  ivell ;  and  mains  {bad) ;  m  ft  1 6,  badly. 
All  others  end  in  e  {long), 

2.  Add  it 8 r  to  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  2d  or  3d  class ;  e.  g., 

b r 6 V - i s,  brief.  brSv-XtSr,  briefly. 

f  6  r  o  X  (feroc-s),  Jierte.  f  S  r  6  c  -  i  t  e  r,  fiercely. 

R&n.  1.  Those  which  end  in  ns  do  not  take  the  connecting  vowel  i ; 
e.g., 

-prnde  JIB,  prudent,  ]^ruden-t&r,  prudently. 

2.  Audax,  J<7Zi,  makes  audac-t6r,  < 


{b)  A  few  are  formed  from  nouns,  by  adding  tus  or  tim  to  the  stem 
by  means  of  a  connecting  vowel ;  e.  g,, 

cadi\'Vi.vci,  heaven.  ccel-i-tus,  from  heaven. 

f u n d - u s,  bottom.  fund-i-tus, from  the  bottom,  totally. 

gr  e  X  (greg-s),  flock.  greg-a-tim,  by  flocks. 

(c)  Cases  of  adjectives,  especially  in  the  neuter,  are  often  used  as  ad- 
verbs ;  c.  ^.,  d  u  1  c  6,  sweetly ;  f  a  1  s  o,  falsely,  &c. 

II.  Primitive  Adverbs. 

(681.)  Primitive  adverbs  are  such  as  cannot  conveniently  be  classed 
among  the  derivatives  above  mentioned.  The  most  common  are  arranged 
in  the  following  lists : 


286 

ADVERBS. 

1.  ADTSRBS   OF  PULCS  (fivefold). 

(1.)  In  a  Place, 

ubi? 

hie, 

iUic, 

istic, 

ibi, 

intus, 

foris, 

where? 

here. 

there, 

there,  where  you  are. 

there, 

within. 

without. 

tibiqug, 
nusquSm, 
alicubt 
alibi, 

ubivis, 

ibidSm, 

everywhere, 

naichere. 

s&mewhert. 

elsewhere, 
[anywhere    {you 
[     please). 

in  the  same  piace. 

(2.)  To  a  Place-~{o,  uc). 

qu6? 

hue, 

iUuc, 

istdc, 

intra. 

whither  t 

hither. 

thither. 

thither,  to  where  you 

are. 
to  within. 

fdras, 

eo, 

alid, 

aliquo, 

eddSm, 

to  that  place, 
to  anodker  ptaee. 
tosomeplace. 
to  the  same  piace. 

(3.)   Towards  a  Place. 

qnorsmn, 
versiis, 
sursum, 
deorsum. 

whitherward  t 
towards, 
upward, 
downward. 

rdtrorsum, 

dextrorsum^ 

sinistrorsum. 

backicard. 

to  the  right  hand. 

to  the  l^  hand. 

(4.)  From  a  Place— {nc,  nde). 

II 

undet 

hioc, 

iffic 

istmr, 

whence? 
hence, 
tkimee. 

\  thence,  from    where 
you  are. 

aliunde, 

aKcundg, 

sieuudd, 

utrinqug, 

supeme, 

infemg, 

from  elsewhere, 
from  someplace. 
%f from  any  place, 
on  both  sides, 
from  above. 
frt»nbdow. 

(5.)   Through  or  by  a  Place. 

qui? 
hac. 

which  way  ? 
this  way. 
that  way. 

ist&c, 
alia, 

that  way,  by  you. 
another  way. 

ADVERBS. 


\vV       ^Y  THE  ^      ' 


2.   ADVERBS   OF 

TiMMthrSfti^2'Tr,V.Vf.'' 

{\.)  Being  in  time,  either  J          -•-        ^                 || 

1.  PreseiU. 

protiaus,           instantly. 

nunc, 

710W. 

illico,                 straightway. 

hddiS, 

today. 

{Remote.) 

2.  Past. 

eras,                   to-morrow. 

postridie,          the  day  after. 

turn 

>  the7i. 

perendie,          two  days  hence. 

h6rT, 

yesterday. 

nondum,           not  yet. 

dudum, 
prTd6m, 
pridie, 

i  heretofore, 
the  day  before. 

4.  Indefinite. 
quando  ?           when  1 
aliquando,      "^ 

nup6r, 

lately. 

nonnunquam  >  sometimes. 

3.  Future. 

interdum,       ) 

[Very  Near.) 

semp6r,             always. 
nunquSm,          Tiever. 

jamjam, 
mox. 

^  presently. 
>  immediately. 

iS«^;          \intl^-^^ntin^. 

statim. 

}  hy-and-hy. 

quotidiS,           daily. 

(2.)  Continue 

mce  of  Time. 

quamdiu  ? 

how  long? 

jamdiu,          "> 

diu, 

long, 
so  long. 

jamdudum,    >  long  ago. 

tamdiu. 

jampridem,   j 

(3.)    Vicissitude,  or 

Repetition  of  Time. 

1.  Indefinite, 

subindS,            immediately  after. 

quSties  ? 

hmo  often  7 

identid6m,        several  times. 

soBpe, 
toties. 

often, 
so  often. 

2.  Definite,  or  in  Number, 

aliquotigs, 

for  several  times. 

s^mel,               once. 

vicissim, 

by  turns. 

bis,                    twice. 

rursus. 

again. 

tSr,                    thrice. 

itgrum, 

a  second  time. 

quatSr,             four  times. 

3.   ADVERBS   OF   ORDER. 


indg,      then. 
deindg,  thereafter. 
dehinc,  henceforth. 
porro,    m/yreover. 


deinceps,      successively. 
denuo,  anew, 

demque,       finally. 
(postrem6,t  lastly. 


prime,*  -um,t  first. 
secundojt         secondly.' 
&c. 


4.   ADVERBS   OF   QUALITY,   MANNER,  &C. 

adeo, 

SO,  and  therefore. 

nempe,      truly. 

adm6dum, 

very,  greatly. 

nimium,    too  much. 

an. 

whether  1  or  else  7 

non,           not. 

cur. 

why. 

num  ?       whether  7 

demum. 

at  length. 

omnino,    at  all,  in  general. 

etiam, 

liketcise,  yes. 

parum,     little. 

fere. 

almost. 

satis,        enough. 
SIC,           so,  thus. 

baud, 

not. 

immd, 

yes,  truly. 

scilicet,    namely. 
videlicit,  nximely. 

ita, 

so,  thus. 

magTs, 

m^re. 

vix,           scarcely. 

ne. 

TWt. 

*  Primo  =  at  first ; 
t  These  fall  under  (6i 


primum: 
10,  c). 


-first,  in  the  first  place. 


§  8.  PREPOSITION. 


(682.)  1.  Prepositions  governing:  the  accusative: 

Ante,  apud,  Sd,  adversus, 
CircGm,  circa,  citra,  cTs, 
Erga,  contra,  intdr,  extra, 
Infra,  intra,  juxta,  6b, 
Pengs,  pone,  post,  and  praetfir, 
Prope,  propter,  per,  secundum, 
Supra,  versus,  ultra,  trans. 

[Versus  is  placed  after  the  noun  which  it  govems.l 

2.  Governing  the  ablative : 

AbsquS,  a,  ab,  abs,  and  dS. 
Coram,  clam,  cum,  ex,  and  S. 
Tenus,  sme,  pro,  and  prae. 

3.  Governing  bc^h  accusative  and  ablative: 

in,  sub,  sapSr,  subtSr 


§9.  COiNJUNCTION. 


(683.)  Conjunctions  connect  words  and  sentences.    They  may  be  di- 
dded  into  the  following^  classes : 

I.  Copulative,  which  simply  unite  sentences  together  [and)-,  they  arc 
6t,  atque  or  ac,  que,  neque  or  nee,  necnon,  etiam,  quo- 
q  u  e,  with  the  adverbials  item  and  1 1  i  d  e  m. 

II.  Disjunctive,  which  connect  unlike  prepositions  {or) :  they  are  aut, 

vel,  the  suffix  v6,  and  sivS  or  seu;  [either — or):  aut — aut,  vel 

V  e  1 ;  [whether — or) :  s  i  v  6 — s  i  v  e. 

III.  Comparative  [as,  like,  as  if,  &c.) ;  they  are  u  t,  s  i  c  u  t,  v  g  1  u  t, 
prout,  ceu,  quftm,  tamquam,  quSs!,  utsi,  acsi,  together 
with  ac  and  atque,  when  they  mean  as. 

IV.  Adversative,  expressing  opposition  of  thought  [but) :  they  are  s  6  d, 
autem,  verd,  at  and  its  compounds,  t a m e n  (and  its  compounds 
with  at  sed  and  verum),  and  ceterum. 

V.  Concessive,  expressing  something  granted  [although,  even  if) :  they 
are  etsi,  etiamsi,  tSmetsi,  quamquSm,  quamvis,  quan- 
tumvig,  quamlibet,  Itcet,  with  u t  and  q u u m,  when  they 
mean  although. 

VI.  Conditional,  expressing  a  condition  [if,  if  only,  if  but) :  they  ara 
si,  sin,  ni  or  nisi,  simodd,  dummodo,  modone,  and  some 
times  d  ii  m  and  m  6  d  6  used  alone. 

VII.  Conclusive,  expressing  a  conclusion  or  inference  [therefore) :  they 
are  ergo,  igitiir,  it^que,  eo,  ideo,  idcirco,  proinde,  prop- 
ter e  a,  and  the  relatives  [wherefore)  quapropter,  quare,  qua- 
mobrem,  quocirca,  unde. 

VIII.  Causal,  expressing  a  cause  or  reason  [for,  because) :  n  a  m, 
namqu6,  6nim,  6tenim,  quia,  qu6d,  qudniam,  quippd, 
quum,   quando,  quanddquidSm,  siquidfim. 

IX.  Final,  expressing  a  purpose  or  aim  [in  order  that,  in  order  that 
n/)t):  ut  or  uti,  quo,  ne,  utne,  nev6,  neu,  quin,  quomt- 
nus. 

X.  Temporal,  expressing  a  relation  of  time  [when,  as  soon  as,  after 
that,  just  as):  quum,  ut,  ub!,  postquSm,  antequam,  pri- 
usquam,  quando,  simul,  simiilac,  dum,  usqu6  dum,  do- 
nee, quoad. 

XL  Interrogative,  used  in  asking  questions:  num,  utriim,  Sn,  nS 
(suffix). 

Bb 


§  10.  INTERJECTION. 


(684.)  Interjections  are  simply  sig^ns  of  emotion. 


ah, 

ah! 

hem, 

hem!  how! 

fipage, 

away  ! 

10, 

huzza  ! 

ecce, 

hehSUl 

oh. 

oh  !   alas  ! 

eccum, 

see  him  ! 

papre, 

O  strange  !  good  ! 

eu, 

lot 

pro, 

alas  ! 

hei,  hefl, 

alas  ! 

vae. 

woe  ! 

. 

vfth. 

O  rare  ! 

PART    IV. 


SUMMARY   OF    SYNTAX. 


SYNTAX. 


INTRODUCTION. 

(685.)  A  proposition  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words  ;  e.  g.,  the  rose 
blooms ;  the  rose  is  beautiful. 

(686.)  A  simple  sentence  consists  of  a  single  proposition  ;  e.  g.,  the  mes- 
senger was  sent ;  the  swift  messenger  arrived. 

(687.)  A  compound  sentence  is  one  made  up  of  two  or  more  propositions ; 
e.  g.,  the  messenger,  who  had  been  sent,  arrived. 

(688.)  Syntax  treats  of  the  use  of  words  in  the  formation  of  sentences, 
and  of  the  relation  of  sentences  to  each  other.    We  speak  first, 

PART   I. 

OF  SIMPLE  SENTENCES. 
I.  SUBJECT   AND   PREDICATE. 

^  1.  Definition  of  Subject  and  Predicate. 

(689.)  Every  sentence  (e.  g.,  the  eagle  flies)  consists  of  two  parts,  the 
subject  {e.g.,  eagle)  and  the  predicate  {e.  g.,  flies). 

{a)  The  subject  is  that  of  which  anything  is  declared,  and  is  generally  (1) 
a  noun,  or  (2)  some  word  used  instead  of  a  noun. 

1.  The  eagle  flies.     Here  the  noun  eagle  is  the  subject. 

2.  To  err  is  human.    Here  the  infinitive  to  err  is  used  as  a  noun, 
and  forms  the  subject. 

[b)  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  declared  of  the  subject,  and  is  gener- 
ally either  (1)  a  verb,  (2)  an  adjective  or  participle,  or  (3)  a  noun,  con- 
nected with  the  subject  by  some  form  of  the  verb  to  be. 

1.  The  eagle  j^zes.    Here  the  \erh  flies  is  the  predicate. 

2.  To  err  is  human.    Here  the  adjective  human  is  the  predicate. 

3.  John  is  a  man.    Here  the  noun  man  is  the  predicate. 

^  2.  Agreement. 
(690.)  Rule  I.  The  verb  of  the  predicate  agrees  with  the 
subject  in  number  and  person. 

The  trees  are  green.  I  Arbores  virent. 

Art  thou  happy  7  I  E  s  n  e  tu  beatus  ? 

Rem.  1.  If  the  subj.  consists  of  two  or  more  singular  nouns  denoting 
persons,  the  verb  is  generally  in  the  plural. 

Bb  2 


294  SUBJECT  AND  PREDICATE. 

2.  A  collective  noun  sometimes  has  a  plaral  verb. 

Tke  crowd  rushes.  \  Turba  ruunt. 

[This  construction  is  not  used  by  Cicero,  and  seldom,  if  at  all,  by 
Caesar.] 

3.  A  plural  verb  is  sometimes  used  with  uterque  and  quisque. 
Each  of  them  leads  his  army  out  I  Uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exercitum 

of  the  camp.  I      educunt. 

4.  The  verb  agrees  with  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second  ;  the 
second  rather  than  the  third. 

1^  you  and  Tullia  are  well,  Cicero  I  Si  tu  et  TuUia  valetis,  ego  et 
and  /  are  well.  I      Cicero  v  a  1  e  m  u  s. 

(691.)  An  adjective  may  stand  either 
(1.)  As  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  the  man  is  happy ; 
(2.)  As  modifying  the  subject ;  e.  g.,  the  good  man  is  happy ; 
(3.)  As  modifying  the  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  the  good  man  is  a  happy  man. 

In  either  case  we  have 

Rule  II.  Adjectives  agree  with  the  nouns  to  which  they 
refer  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

[This  rule  applies  to  all  adjectives,  pronouns,  and  participles.] 
Hem.  If  there  be  two  or  more  nouns  denoting  persons,  the  most  wor- 
thy* gender  prevails  ;  if  things,  the  neuter  is  used. 

My  father  and  mother  are  dead.      I  Pater  mihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt. 
Labour  and  enjoyment  are  united.  I  Labor  voluptasque  juncta  sunt. 

(692.)  Rule  III.  If  the  predicate  be  a  noun,  it  takes  the 
case  of  the  subject. 
Numa  was  made  king.  \  Numa  rex  creabatur. 

^  3.  Apposition. 
(693.)  A  noun  may  stand 
(a)  In  the  subject,  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  with  the  sub- 
ject-noun ;  e.  g.,  the  general,  a  brave  man,  led  the  army. 
{b)  In  the  predicate,  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  with  a  noun 
in  the  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  we  have  sent  the  consul,  a  brave  man. 
Nouns  thus  expressing  the  same  person  or  thing,  whether  in  the  sub- 
ject or  predicate,  are  said  to  be  in  apposition  with  each  other ;  and  in 
either  case  we  have 

Rule  IV.  Nouns  in  apposition  with  each  other  agree  in 
case. 


*  The  Tnasculine  is  said  to  be  more  worthy  than  the  feminine;  the  fem- 
inine than  the  neuter. 


GENITIVE  CASE.  295 


The  commander^  a  brave  man,  led 

the  army. 
We  sent  the  cotisuI,  a  brave  man. 


Imperator,  vir   fortis,    exerci- 

tum  duxit. 
Consulem,  virum  fortem,  misi- 
mus. 
Rem.  1.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  two  or  more  nouns  is  commonly 
put  in  the  plural. 
M.  Antony  and  C.  Crassus,  trib- 1  M.  Antonius,  C.  Crassus,   tribuni 
U7ies  of  the  people.  |      plebis. 

2.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  the  name  of  a  town  may  be  put  in  the 
ablative,  with  or  without  the  preposition  in. 
At  Roine,  the  chiei  dty  of  Italy.     |  Romse,  (in)  prima  urbe  Italiae. 

II.  USE    OF    CASES.   ^ 

^  4.  Nominative. 
(694.)  Subject-nominative. — The  subject  of  a  proposition  takes  the  nom- 
inative case,  and  is  called  the  subject-nominative. 

(2.)  Predicate-nominative. — The  predicate-nominative  (692)  is  always 
connected  with  the  subject  by  e  s  s  e,  ^<?  be,  or  some  verb  expressing  an 
incomplete  idea. 

Rem.  Of  this  class  of  verbs  are  to  appear,  apparere,  videri;  to 

become,  fieri,  evader e,  existere;  to  be  nam^d,  dici,  ap- 

pellari,  nominari;  to  be  esteemed,  existimari,  haberi,  &c. 

Ariovistus  was  called  king  by  the    Ariovistus  a  senatu  rex  appel- 

senate.  \     latus  est. 

^  5.  Genitive. 
(695.)  Rule  V.  The  genitive  answers  the  questions  whose? 
of  whom?  of  what?    e.g.,  the  love  of  glory,  amor  gloriae; 
Cicero's  orations,  C  i  c  e  r  o  n  1  s  orationes. 

Rem.  The  genitive  is  subjective  when  it  denotes  that  which  does 
something,  or  to  which  a  thing  belongs ;  e.  g'.,  Cicero nis  oratio- 
nes.   It  is  objective  when  it  denotes  that  which  is  affected  by  the 
action  or  feeling  spoken  of;  e.  g.,  amor  glorias  :  tlie  taking  of  the 
town,  expugnatio  urbis. 
"  (696.)  Rule  VI.  Genitive  of  Quality. — The  genitive  {With. 
an  adjective,  or  pronoun  of  quality,  number,  &c.)  is  used  to  ex- 
press the  quality  of  a  thing. 

A  man  of  great  bravery.  IVirmagnae  virtutis. 

A  ditch  of ff teen  feet.  I  Fossa  quindecim  pedum. 

Rem.  1.  The  ablative  is  also  used  in  the  same  way  (724). 
2.  If  the  two  nouns  are  connected,  not  hnmediately,  but  by  another 
part  of  speech,  the  accusative  must  be  used:   fossa  quindecim 
pedes  lata- 


296  GENITIVE  CASE. 

(697,)  Rule  VII.  Partitive- genitive. — The  genitive  is  used 
to  express  the  ivhole  of  which  anything  is  a  pait.     Hence, 

{a)  With  comparatives  and  superlatives  : 


The  more  learned  of  the  Uoo  broth- 
ers. 
The  most  learned  of  the  Romans. 


Doctior  fratrum  dnorum. 


Doctissimus  Romanorum. 


{h)  "With  all  words  expressing  number  or  quantity,  whether  adjectives, 
pronouns,  numerals,  or  adverbs ;  e.  g.,  many  of  the  soldiers,  m  u  1 1  i 
militum  ;  which  of  you  ?  quis  vestrum?  the  last  of  the  Romans, 
ultimus  Romanorum;  enough  eloquence^  satis  eloquentiae; 
where  (in  what  part)  of  the  world  7  ubinam  gentium? 

Rem.   This   rule   includes   the   neuters    tantum,    quantum,    ali- 
Quantum,  quid,   aliquid,  &c. 

(698.)  Rule  VIII.  Genitive  of  Mental  Affections,— ThQ 
genitive  is  used  with  verbs  and  adjectives  expressing  certain 
operations  of  the  mind  or  feelings,  to  denote  the  ohject  thereof. 

(a)   Operations  of  the  mind. 
1.  Adjectives  oi  knowledge  and  igrwrance,  remembering  end  for' 
getting,  certainty  and  doubt. 


Beneficii  memor. 

E  ventus  belli  non  erat  ignarus. 


Mindful  of  a  kindness. 
He  was  not  ignorant  of  the  re- 
sult of  the  war. 

2.  Verbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting  (recorder,  memini,  reminis- 
cor,  obliviscor). 


Meminisse  proeteritorum. 
Cohortatur  ^iduos  ut  con  trover- 
si  arum  obliviscantur. 


Ti>  remember  past  events. 
He  exhorts  the  u^duans  to  for- 
get their  disputes. 

[The  thing  remembered  is  often  put  in  the  accusative.] 

{b)  Operations  of  the  feelings. 

1.  Adjectives  expressing  desire  or  aversion,  patience  or  impatience, 
appetite  or  passion.  Participles  used  as  adjectives  fall  under  this 
rule. 

Desirous  of  praise.  I  Avidus  1  a  u  d  i  s. 

A  lover  of  (==  one  loving)  virtue.  I  Amans  virtutis. 

2.  Verbs. 

[a)  Those  expressing  pity,  viz.,  miseresco,  misereor. 

J  pity  tJi£  unfortunate.  \  Miseresco  infelicium. 

{b)  The  impersonals  pudet,  piget,  poenitet,  taedet,  miseret  [skamie, 
disgust,  repentance,  loathing,  pity). 


GENITIVE  CASE.  297. 


/  am  not  only  sorry  for  my  fol- 
ly, but  ashamed  of  it. 
I  am  weary  of  my  life. 


Me  non  solum  poenitet  stalti- 

t  i  33  meae,  sed  etiam  p  u  d  e  t. 
Me  taedet  vitae. 
Rem,  1.  Observe  that  the  person  feeling  is  expressed  by  the  accusa- 
tive. 
2.  The  cause  of  feeling  may  be  a  verb,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  instead 
of  a  noun  in  the  genitive. 
/  am  not  sorry  (=  it  does  not  re- 1  Non  poenitet  me  v  i  x  i  s  s  e. 
pent  me)  that  I  have  lived.  I 

(699.)  Rule  IX.  Genitive  of  Participation. — The  genitive 
is  used  with  adjectives  and  participles  expressing  (1)  plenty  or 
want^  (2)  power  or  weakness,  (3)  sharing  or  its  opposite,  (4) 
likeness  or  unlikeness. 


(1.)  Full  of  wrath. 

(2.)  Master  of  on£' s  faculties. 

(3 .)  He  is  like  his  brother. 


Plenus  irjB. 
Compos  mentis. 
Similis  est  fratris. 


(4.)  Man  is  a  sharer  of  reason.  \  Homo  particeps  est  rationis. 
Rem.  1.  Those  oi plenty  and  want  take  also  ablative  (716,  R.  4). 
2.  Those  of  likeness  and  unlikeness  take  also  the  dative  (704,  4). 

(700.)  Rule  X.  Genitive  of  Value. — The  genitive  of  cer- 
tain adjectives  is  used  with  verbs  of  valuing,  esteeming,  buying, 
selling,  6cc.,  to  denote  the  price  or  value. 

The  poor  man  estimates  riches  at  I  Pauper  divitias  magni  eestimat. 
a  great  value.  I 

Rem.  1.  Such  genitives  are  magni,  permagni,  pluris,  maximi, 

mi  nor  is,  and  others. 
2.  If  the   price  be  a  noun,  the  ablative  is  used   (719).    Also,   the 

ablatives  magno,  permagno,  plurimo,  parvo,  minimo,  nihi- 

lo,  are  often  used. 

(701.)  Rule  XI.  Genitive  of  Crime. — The  genitive  is  used 
with  verbs  of  accusing,  condemning,  acquitting,  &c.,  to  denote 
the  crime  or  offence  charged. 


Proditionis  accusare. 
Praetor  reum  cri minis  absolvit. 


To  accuse  of  treachery. 
The  judge  acquitted  the  prisoner 
of  the  crime. 

(702.)  Rule  XII.  Genitive  of  Property. — The  genitive  is 
used  with  esse  to  denote  (1)  that  to  which  something  belongs  ; 
(2)  that  to  which  something  is  peculiar. 

(1.)  This  book  belongs  to  my  father.  1  Hie  liber  est  mei  patris. 
(2.)  It  is  peculiar  to  the  brave  ^<7  :  Fortium  est  dolorem  fortiter  pati. 
endure  pain  with  fortitude.  \ 


298 


DATIVE  CASE. 


Hem.  1.  Under  this  last  head  come  the  following  constmctioxui  < 

'  the  property 


It  is 


peculiarity- 
duty 
mark 

characteristic 
&c. 


of  a  wise  man  =  est  sapientis. 


2.  Observe  carefully,  that  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pro- 
nouns (mei,  tui,  &c.),  the  neuter  possessives  (meum,  tuum, 
suum,  nostrum,  ve strum)  are  used;  e.g.,  it  is  'my  duty,  &c. ; 
est  meum,  &c. 

(703.)  Rule  XIII.  The  genitive  is  used  with  the  impersonal 
interest  (i7  concerns),  to  express  the  person  concerned. 

It  concerns  my  brother..  I  Mei  fratris  interest. 

It  coTicerns  the  state.  j  ReipublicaB  interest. 

Rem.  But  instead  of  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  (mei, 
tui,  &c.),  the  possessive  forms  me  a,  tua,  &c.,  are  always  used; 
and  with  them  the  impersonal  refert  has  the  same  force  as  in- 
ter e  s  t. 
It  concerns  you. 

It  is  of  great  importance  to  me  to 
see  you. 


Tua  interest  (not  tui  interest). 
Magni  m  e  a  refert  ut  te  videam- 


^  6.  Dative. 

(704.)  Rule  XIV.  The  dative  case  is  used  to  express  the 
person  or  thing  to  or  for  whom  (or  which)^  to  or  for  whose  advan- 
tage  or  disadvantage  anything  is  done  or  tends. 

f^^  Almost  every  instance  in  which  the  dative  occurs  may  be  ex- 
plained by  a  proper  application  of  this  rule.    Por  the  sake  of  fuller 
illustration,  however,  we  add  the  following  heads  : 
(1.)  Dative  of  Remote  Object. — The  dative  is  used  to  express  the  rernote 
object, 

{a)  With  transitive  verbs  governing  also  a  direct  object. 


Mitto  tibi  librum. 

Pisistratus  sibi  Megarenses  vicit. 


I  send  you  a  book. 
Pisistratus  conquered  tlie  Mega- 
renses for  himself. 

Rem.  The  accusative  is  often  omitted,  and  the  dative  alone  appears 
with  the  verb  ;  e.  g.,  I  persuade  you,  tibi  suadeo  ;  he  told  the  gen- 
eral, nuntiavit  imperatori. 

{b)  With  intransitive  verbs  expressing  an  action  done  to  or  for  some 
person  or  thing. 
/  have  leisure  for  philosophy.  |  Vaco  philosopniae. 


DATIVE   CASE.  299 

(2.)  On  the  same  principle  {advantage  or  disadvantage),  the  dative  is 
used  with  verbs  of  the  following  meanings,  viz. : 
Envy,  profit,  please,  displease,  obey, 
Help,  hurt,  resist,  excel,  or  disobey, 
Command,  indulge,  be  angry,  spare,  upbraid. 
Marry,  heal,  favour,  Tneet,  trust,  and  persuade. 
Rem.  1.  Juvo,  laedo,  delecto,  offendo,  rego,  gubemo,  govern  the  accu- 
sative. 
2.  Impero,  credo,  minor,  comminor,  are  also  used  transitively,  with 
accusative  and  dative, 
(3.)  Dative  with  Compound  Verbs. — The  dative  is  used  with  most  verbs 
compounded  with  ad,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  proe,  sub  ;  and  with  many  of 
those  compounded  with  ab,  ante,  de,  e,  post,  prae,  re,  super. 

Rem.  These  verbs  govern  the  dative  when  they  acquire  a  meaning 
from  the  preposition  which  calls  for  the  dative ;  e.  g.,  tojoin,jungere, 
takes  accusative;  but  to  join  to,  adjungere,  takes  dative  also. 
When  they  are  transitive,  they  take  both  accusative  and  dative  ; 
but  when  intransitive,  the  dative  only. 
To  prefer  unknown  men  to  knoivii.  I  Ignotos  notis  anteferre. 
Vices  creep  upon  us.  I  Vitia  nobis  obrepunt. 

(4.)  So,  also,  the  dative  is  used  with  adjectives  expressing  advantage, 
likeness,  usefulness,  ftness,  facility,  nearness  to,  and  their  opposites. 

Be  kind  to  all. 
Hurtful  to  the  body, 
A  place  Jit  for  ambush, 
Th^y  are  neighbours  to  the  Ger- 
mans. 

Rem.  1.  Adjectives  pf  likeness  or  unlikeness  may  take  the  genitive 

(699,  3). 
2.  Those  oi  ftness  and  unfitness  often  take  the  accusative  with  ad ; 

e.  g.,  locus  ad  insidias  aptus. 

(705.)  Rule  XV.  Dative  of  Possession, — The  dative  is  used 
with  esse  to  express  the  person  who  has  or  possesses  some- 
thing. 

I  have  a  book.  \  Est  mihi  liber  (=habeo  librum). 

Rem,  1.  / have  a  name  =  est  mihi  nomen  ;  but  if  the  name  be  ex- 
pressed, it  may  be  put  either  in  nominative  or  dative  ;  e.  g.,  my 
name  is  Lcelius  =  mihi  est  nomen  L  aa  1  i  u  s  (or  L  ae  1  i  o). 

2.  The  possessor  is  expressed  by  the  dative  when  the  mind  refers 
chiefly  to  the  possession  {e.  g.,  I  ha,ie  a  book  =  est  mihi  liber) ; 
but  by  the  genitive  when  the  mind  refers  chiefly  to  the  possessor 
(e.  g.,  this  book  is  my  father's  =  hie  liber  est  mei  patris). 


Cunctis  esto  benignus. 
Corpori  pemiciosum. 
Locus  insidiis  aptus. 
Proximi  sunt  Germanis. 


300  ACCUSATIVE    CASE. 

(706.)  Rule  XVI.  Dativeof  the  End  {Double Dative). — Two 
datives  are  used  with  esse,  and  with  verbs  of  giving,  commg, 
sending,  imputing  ;  one  to  express  the  person,  the  other  the 
object  or  end. 


The  Boians  were  (for)  a  'protection 

to  the  rear. 
Pausanias  came  to  aid  (for  an  aid 

to)  the  Athenians. 


Boii  novissimis  proesidio  erant. 


Pausanias  venit  Atheniensibus 
auxilio. 

Rem.  The  verbs  used  with  double  dative  are  esse,  dare,  ducere, 
tribuere,  vertere,  accipere,  relinquere,  deligere,  mit- 
tere,  venire,  habere. 
[The  dative  is  used  with  gerundives,  for  which  see  737,  ^.] 

<^  7.  Accusative. 
(707.)  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object,  and 
answers  the  questions  whom  1  what  1  to  what  place  ? 

1^^  Under  this  general  statement  we  make  three  heads  ;  (1)  the  ac- 
cusative with  verbs  ;  (2)  the  accusative  with  prepositions  ;  (3)  the 
accusative  according  to  the  usage  of  the  language. 

I.  Accusative  with  Verbs. 
(708.)  Rule  XVII.  Accusative  of  the  Direct  Object. — The 
accusative  is  used  with  transitive  verbs,  to  express  the  direct 
object, 

CcBsar  recalls  the  lieutenant.  \  Caesar  legatum  revocat. 

Hem.  1.  Some  verbs  are  used  both  ti'ansitively  and  inti*ansitively ; 

the  use  of  these  must  be  learned  by  practice. 
2.  Some  intransitives  (especially  those  of  motion),  compounded  with 
prepositions,  acquire  a  transitive  force  easily  recognised  from  their 
meaning;  thus  :  to  g^o,  ire;  to  go  across,  trans  ire,  which  takes 
the  accusative. 
P      3.  Some  intransitives  take  an  accusative  of  a  noun  from  the  same 
root  with  themselves  ;  e.  g.,  to  live  a  life,  vivere  vitam. 
(709.)  Rule  XVIII.  Accusative  with  Impersonals.  —  The 
accusative  of  the  person  affected  is  used  with  the  impersonals 
pudet,  piget,  taedet,  miseret,  poenitet. 
/  am  tired  of  life.  \  Taedet  m  e  vitae. 

Rem.  Decet  and  its  compounds  (which  admit  a  personal  subject),  also 
juvat  and  delectat,  take  the  accusative. 
Anger  becomes  wild  beasts.  J  Decet  ira  feras.  " 

(710.)  Rule  XIX.  Double  Accusative, 
(a)  Two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  the  other  of  the 


(1.)   Who    taught    Epaminondas 

music  1 
(2.)  1  conceal  nothing  from  you. 
\^.)  I  ask  this  of  you  earnestly. 
(4.)  Avarice  renders  men  blind. 


ACCUSATIVE   CASE.  301 

thing,  are  used  with  verbs  of  teachings  concealing^  asMng^  or 
entreating,  and  also  with  those  verbs  whose  passives  have  a 
double  nominative  (694,  2,  R.). 

duis    musicam    docnit   Epami- 

nondam. 
Nihil  te  celo. 
H  o  c  t  e  vehementer  rogo. 
Avaritia  homines  ccecos  reddit. 
Rem.  1.  With  verbs  oi  asking,  demanding,  the  ablative  with  a  prep- 
osition is  used  instead  of  one  of  the  accusatives. 
The    ambassadors    were    asking  \Lega.ti  pacem  a  Caesare  posce- 
peace  of  Ccesar.  I      bant. 

2.  Petere  and  postulare  always  take  the  ablative  with  ab ;  and 
quaerere,  the  ablative  with  ab,  de,  or  ex. 

(6)  Two  accusatives  are  used  also  with  verbs  compounded 
with  trans. 

CcBsar  led  the  army  across   ^Ae  I  Caesar      exercitum      Rhenum 
Rhine.  \      transduxit. 

'  The  trans  is  often  repeated;  e.g.,  Caesar  exercitum  trans  Rhenum 
transduxit. 

Rem.  1.  In  the  passive  constraction  of  verbs  which  take  a  double  ac- 
cusative, the  person  takes  the  nominative,  but  the  thing  generally 
remains  in  the  accusative. 
1  was  asked  my  opinion.  Ego  rogatus  sum  sententiam. 

The  multitude  is  led  across  the   Multitudo  Rhenum  transducitur. 
Rhine. 

2.  But  with  verbs  of  demanding  the  ablative  with  a  preposition  is 
generally  used. 
Mon^y  is  demanded  of  rm.  \  Pecunia  a  m  e  poscitur. 

II.  Accusative  with  Prepositions. 
(711.)  Rule  XX.  The  accusative  is  used  with  the  preposi- 
tions ad,  apud,  ante,  adversus,  cis,  citra,  circa,  circum, 
circiter,  contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter,  intra,  juxta, 
ob,  penes,  per,  pone,  post,  praster,  prope,  propter,  se- 
cundum, supra,  trans,  versus,  ultra.  Also,  with  in  and 
sub,  when  motion  is  expressed ;  with  super,  when  it  means 
over^  and  with  subter  nearly  always. 

III.  Accusative  according  to  the  Usage  of  the  Language. 
(712.)  Rule  XXI.  Accusative  of  Measure.— The  accusative 
is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions  how  far  ?  how  deep  ?  how 
Cc 


302  ABLATIVE  CASE. 

thick  7  how  broad  ?  how  old  ?  how  long  ?  (whether  of  time  or 
distance). 


The  dly  is  two  miles  off. 

The  ditch  is  ten  feet  vnde  {deep,  or 

long). 
Only  one  hour. 
Twenty  years  old. 


Urbs  duo  mi  Hi  a  abest. 

Fossa    decern    pedes    lata    (alta, 

longa). 
U n  a m  modo  h o r  am. 
Viginti  annos  natus. 


Rem,  1.  Hotv  far  7  is  sometimes  answered  by  the  ablative. 

Six  miles  from  Ccesar's  Camp.       I  Mil  lib  us  passuum  sex  a  Coesaris 
I      castris. 
2.  For  time  liow  long,  the  accusative  with  per  is  sometimes  used,  and 
sometimes  the  ablative  alone. 
Through  the  whole  night.  I  P  e  r  totam  noctem. 

He  was  absent  six  months.  \  Sex  mensibus  abfuit. 

(713.)  Rule  XXII.  Accusative  of  Direction,  Whither?^ 
The  accusative  is  used  with  names  of  towns  and  small  islands, 
in  answer  to  the  question,  whither  ? 

To  set  out  for  Athens.  j  A  t  h  e  n  a  s  proficisci. 

Rem.  1.  With  names  of  countries  or  large  islands  the  prepositions 
in,  ad,  must  be  used. 
He  crossed  into  Europe.  JlnEuropam  traj  ecit. 

2.  Domus  and  rus  follow  this  rule. 
To  go  home.  I  Ire  do  mum. 

I  will  go  into  the  country.  I  Rus  ibo. 

(714.)  Greek  Accusative. — The  accusative  is  used  to  express  a  special 
limitation. 
Naked  as  to  his  limbs.  I  Nudus  membra. 

For  the  most  part  [meii)  say  so.      |  M  a  x  i  m  a m  p  ar  t  e  m  ita  dicunt. 

Rem.  This  is  a  Greek  usage,  common  in  Latin  poetry,  but  not  in 
prose. 
(715.)  Exclamations. — The  accusative  is  used  in  exclamations,  either 
with  or  without  an  interjection. 
Miserable  m£!  I  Me  mi  serum. 

Behold,  four  altars  !  \  En  quattuor  aras. 

[For  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  see  751.] 

^  8.  Ablative. 
(716.)  Rule  XXIII.   General  Rule. — The  ablative  is  used 
to  express  the  (1)  cause;  (2)  manner ;  (3)  means,  material,  or 
instrument ;  (4)  supply. 


ABLATIVE    CASE.  303 

1.  Cause. — The  ablative  of  cause  is  used  with  passive  verbs,  and  with 
the  participles  natus,  genitus,  ortus,  contentus. 


The  world  is  illuminated  by  tlie 

sun. 
I  am  content  with  my  lot, 
O  thou,  born  of  a  goddess  ! 


Sole  mundus  illustratur. 


Sorte  mea  contentus  sum. 
Nate  Dea! 

f^^  If  the  cause  be  a  person  (or  a  thing  personified),  a  or  ab  must  be 
used  with  passive  verbs. 
The  world  was  built  by  God.  |  A  D  e  o  mundus  aedificatus  est. 

2.  Manner. — [a)  This  ablative  generally  occurs  in  nouns  denoting  man- 
ner; e.  §•.,  mos,  modus,  ratio,  &c. 

In  this  way  I  wrote.  \  Hoc  mo  do  scripsi. 

{b)  "With  other  nouns,  cum  is  generally  used,  unless   an  adjective  is 

joined  with  the  noun. 
He  hears  ivith pleasure.  ICumvoluptate  audit. 

He  bears  the  injury  withjirmness.  |jEquo  animo  fert  injuriam. 

3.  Means,  Material,  Instrument. — Ablative  without  a  preposition. 


Equo,  curru,  navibus,  vehi. 
Cornibus  tauri  se  tutantur. 


To  travel  by  horse,  carriage,  ships. 
Bulls  defend  themselves  with  their 
hxyrns. 

O^  If  the  instrument  or  means  be  a  person,  per  or  propter  is 
used,  with  the  accusative. 
I  was  freed  by  you.  \  Per  te  liberatus  sum. 

4.  Supply. — As  supply  may  be  either  abundant  or  defective,  the  abla- 
tive is  used  with  verbs  and  adjectives  of  abounding,  wanting,  filling, 
emptying,  &c. ;  e.g.,  abundare,  egere,  carere,  inops,  refertus, 
praeditus,  &c. 

Germany  abounds  in  rivers.  I  Germania  fluminibus  abundat. 

The  mind  is  endowed  with  per- 1  Mens   est  prasdita    m  o  t  u    sempi- 

petual  activity.  \      temo. 

(717.)  Rule  XXIV.  The  ablative  of  the  thing  needed,  and 
the  dative  of  the  person,  are  used  with  opus  est  {there  is 
need). 

We  have  need  of  a  leader.  |  Duce  nobis  opus  est. 

Rem.  If  opus  est  be  used  personally,  the  thing  needed  is  put  in  the 
nominative  as  subject. 
Leaders  are  necessary  for  us.  |  Duces  nobis  opus  sunt. 

(718.)  Rule  XXV.  The  ablative  is  used  with  the  depo- 
nents utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor. 

To  make  use  of  advice.  I  Consilio  uti. 

They  were  enjoying  peace.  |  Pace  fruebantur. 


304  ABLATIVE   CASE. 

Rem.  Potior  is  used  also  with  the  genitive. 
To  obtain  possession  of  all  Gaul.  jTotius  Galliee  potiri. 

(719.)  Rule  XXVI.  Ablative  of  Price.  — The  ablative  is 
used  with  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  valuing,  &c. ;  also  with 
the  adjectives  dignus  and  indignus,  to  express  the^Wce  or 
value. 

Patriam  auro  vendidit. 
Odio  dignus. 

Multorum    sanguine    ea  victoria 
stetit. 


He  sold  his  country  for  gold. 
Worthy/  of  hatred. 
That    battle    cost   the   blood   of 
many. 


[^p*  If  the  price  or  value  be  an  adjective^  it  is  generally  put  in  the 
genitive  (700). 

(720.)  Rule  XXVII.  Ablative  of  Limitation.— The  abla- 
tive is  used  to  denote  the  limitation  generally  expressed  in 
English  by  as  to,  in  respect  of,  in  regard  to. 

Older  (i.  e.,  greater  in  age).  Major  n  a  t  u. 

Skilled  in  the  law.  Jure  peritus. 

In  affection  a  son.  \  P  i  e  t  a  t  e  filius. 

(721.)  Rule  XXVIII.  Ablative  of  Separation.— The  abla- 
tive is  used  with  verbs  of  removing,  freeing,  depriving,  and  the 
like. 

CcBsar  removed  his  camp  from  the    Caesar  castra  loco  movit. 

spot. 
The  trees  are  stripped  of  leaves.       Arbores  foliis  nudantur. 

Rem.  Many  of  these  verbs  also  take  the  prepositions  a,  a  b,  d  e,  e  X. 

(722.)  Rule  XXIX.  Ablative  of  Quality.— The  ablative  is 
used  (with  an  adjective  of  quality)  to  express  that  one  thing  is 
a  quality  or  property  of  another. 

Ccesar  was  a  man  of  consummate    CaBsar  s  u  m  m  o  fuit  i  n  g  e  n  i  o. 

talent. 
Agesilaus  was  a  mart  of  low  stat-    Agesilaus  s  t  a  t  u  r  a  fuit  h  u  m  i  1  i. 

ure. 

Rem.  The  genitive  is  also  thus  used  (696). 

(723.)  Rule  XXX.  Ablative  of  Comparison. — The  ablative 
is  used  with  the  comparative  degree  (quam  being  omitted)  to 
express  the  object  with  which  another  is  compared. 

Cicero  was   more  eloquent   than  \  Cicero  fuit   eloquentior   Ho»'ti»n- 
Hortensius.  I     sio. 


ABLATIVE.  305 

(724.)  Rule  XXXI.  Ablative  of  Measure.— The  ablative  of 
measure  is  used, 

{a)  With  comparatives  and  superlatives^  to  express  the  meas- 
ure of  excess  or  defect. 

(6)  To  express  the  measure  of  time  before  or  after  any 
event. 


Much  greater. 

Themistocles  lived  many  years  he- 
fore  Demosthenes. 


Multo  major. 

Themistocles  permultis  annis 
ante  fait  quam  Demosthenes. 


(725.)  Rule  XXXII.  Ablative  of'Time  When.— The  abla- 
tive is  used  to  express  the  point  of  time  at  which  anything 
occurs. 

On  tlie  sixth  day.  j  S  e x  t o  die. 

Rem.  The  time  within  which  anything^  occura  is  expressed  by  the  ab- 
lative with  or  without  in  or  d  e. 
iVithin  ten  years.  Decern  annis. 

Within  those  days.  In  his  diebus. 

(726.)  Rule  XXXIII.  Ablative  of  Place. 
(a)  The  place  whence  is  expressed  by  the  ablative. 
He  departed  from  Corinth,  \  Corintho  profectus  est. 

(fe)  The  place  where  is  expressed  by  the  ablative,  if  the  noun 
be  of  the  third  declension  ov  plural  number. 

Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  I  Alexander  B  abylone  mortuus  est. 

At  Athens.  |  A  t  h  e  n  i  s. 

Rem.  If  the  nonn  be  of  the  1st  or  2d  declension  singular,  the  genitive 
is  used. 
At  Rome.    At  Corinth.  jRomae.     Corinthi. 

(Domi  follows  this  rule.) 

(727.)  The  ablative  is  used  with  the  following  prepositions. 
viz. : 

Absque,  a,  ab,  abs,  and  de. 
Coram,  clam,  cum,  ex,  and  e, 
Tenus,  sine,  pro,  and  prae. 
Also  with  i n  and  sub  (implying  rest,  not  motion),  and  super,  when  it 
means  upon.    S  u  b  t  e  r  is  sometimes,  also,  used  with  ablative. 

(728.)  Rule  XXXIV.  Ablative  with  Compound   Verbs. — " 
The  ablative  is  used  with  some  verbs  compounded  with  a  (a  b, 
abs),  de,  e  (ex),  and  super. 

Cc2 


306 


INFINITIVE. 


Urbe  abesse. 

Co2sar    prjfilio    supersedere   sta- 
tuit. 


To  be  absent  from  the  city. 
CcBsar  resolved  to  desist  from  bat- 
tle. 

Rem.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  repeated. 
To  depart  from  life  [■=  to  die).       |  Exire  de  vita, 

[For  the  Ablative  Absolute,  see  750.] 
(729.)  Verbs  followed  by  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  where  we  use  no 
preposition,  and  should  therefore  be  likely  to  put  the  accusative.     (Those 
with  asterisks  take  also  an  accusative  of  the  thing,  though  some  of  them 
only  when  the  accusative  is  a  neuter  pronoun.)* 


GENITIVE. 


obtain, 

pity, 

forget, 

remember, 
recollect, 

require, 
need, 


potior  [abl.). 
5  misereor. 
\  miseresco. 

obliviscor  [ace). 
Tmemini  [ace). 
<  recordor  [ace). 
^reminiscor  [a^c). 
S  egeo      ?  /   2,7\ 
jindigeo^(^^^-)- 


abuse, 

revile, 

advise, 

answer, 

believe, 

command, 

commission, 

charge, 

congratulate, 

displease, 

direct, 

envy. 

favour, 

flatter, 

give, 

help, 

aid, 

assist, 

succour, 

heal, 
cure. 


>  maledico. 

^suadeo. 
*respondeo. 
credo. 
*^impero. 

i  *mando. 

■^gratulor. 

displiceo. 

*praecipio. 

*invideo. 

faveo. 

adulor  iacc.) 

*do. 

f  auxilior. 
V  opitulor. 

5  subvenio. 
(  succurro. 

>  medeor. 


hurt, 

indulge, 

marry. 


pardon, 
permit, 
persuade, 
please, 


oppose, 
rival. 


spare, 
suit, 

threaten. 


noceo. 

*indulgeo. 

nubo. 
rpareo. 
<  obedio. 
(,  obtempero. 

*ignosco. 

**permitto. 

*persuadeo. 

placeo. 
?  resisto, 
)  repugno. 

aemulor  (ace). 

satisfacio. 

parco. 

convenio. 
5  *minor. 
i  ^minitor. 


ABLATIVE. 


abuse, 

discharge, 

perform, 

enfoy, 

obtain, 

require, 

need, 

want, 

iLse, 

want, 

am  loithout. 


abutor. 

i  fungor. 

fruor. 
potior  [gen.). 

I  indigeo  S 

utor. 
/  careo. 


,fte 


III.  USE   OF   THE   INDEFINITE  VERB. 

(j  9.  Infinitive. 

(730.)  Rule  XXXV.  Infinitive  as  Subject. — The  infinitive 
is  used  as  the  subject  of  a  verb,  and  is  then  regarded  as  a  neu- 
ter noun. 

To  love  (=  loving)  is  pleasant.       \  Jucundum  est  a m  ar  e. 

'  *  Arnold^  ' 


PARTICIPLE.  307 

(731.)  Rule  XXXVI.  Infinitive  as  Complementary  Object. 
— The  infinitive  is  used  (exactly  as  in  English)  to  complete  the 
imperfect  ideas  expressed  by  certain  words. 

/  wish  to  learn.  I  Capio  d  i  s  c  e  r  e. 

Worthy  to  be  loved.  \  Dignus  a  m  a  r  i. 

Rem.  1.  The  complementary  infinitive  occurs  after  verbs  denoting  to 
wish,  to  be  able,  to  be  accustomed,  ought  (debere),  to  hasten,  &c. ; 
after  the  adjectives  dignus,  indignus,  audax,  &c. 

2.  Observe  that  this  construction,  which  occurs  after  all  verbs  in 
English,  can  only  stand  in  Latin  after  those  expressing  imperfect 
ideas,  as  above  stated.  A  purpose  cannot  be  expressed  in  Latin, 
as  in  English,  by  the  simple  infinitive  ;  e.  g.,  he  conies  to  learn  = 
venit  ut  discat,  not  venit  discere. 

(732.)  Historical  Infinitive. — In  animated  narrative  the  in- 
finitive is  sometimes  used  for  the  indicative. 

The  Romans  hastened,  made  ready,  I  Ex)mani  festinare,  par  are,  &c. 

(This  construction  is  quite  common  in  Sallust.) 

[For  Accusative  with  Infinitive,  see  751.] 

^10.  Participle. 

(733.)  Rule  XXXVII.  The  participle  agrees  with  its  noun 
in  gender,  case,  and  number,  and  the  active  participle  governs 
the  same  case  as  its  verb. 


The  honoured  man. 
The  blooming  rose. 
I  saw  him  reading  a  book. 


Vir  laudatus. 
llosa  f  lor  ens. 
Eum  legentem  librum  vidi. 


(734.)  The  participle  future  active  is  used  to  express  a  pur- 
pose (where  in  English  we  should  use  to^  in  order  to,  with  the 
infinitive) . 

Alexander  goes  to  Jupiter  Ammon, 
in  order  to  inquire  concerning 
his  descent. 

(735.)  The  passive  participle  is  often  used  to  supply  the 
place  of  a  noun. 
After    Tarentum  taken  (=  after 
the  taking  of  Tarentum). 


Alexander  ad  Jovem  Ammonem 
pergit,  consultTirus  de  origine 
sua. 


Post  Tarentum  c  a  p  t  u  m. 
Ab  urbe  c  o  n  d  i  t  a. 


From  the  city  built  (=  from  the 
building  of  the  city). 

[For  Participle  in  Subordinate  Sentences,  see  749.] 


Scribere  est  utile. 

Ars  scribendi  est  utilis. 

Charta  scribendo  est  utilis. 

Scribere  disco. 

Inter  scribendum  disco. 

Scribendo  discimus. 


308  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 

^11.   Gerund. 

(736.)  Rule  XXXVIII.  As  the  infinitive  is  used  as  a  noun 
in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  so  the  gerund  is  used  in  the 
remaining  cases,  and  governs  the  same  case  as  its  verb. 

Nom.    Writing  is  useful 
Gen.    The  art  of  writing  is  useful. 
Dat.     Paper  is  useful  for  writing. 
.        (I  learn  writing. 

'  \  I  learn  during  writing. 
Abl.     We  learn  by  writing. 

Hem.  1.  With  a  preposition  the  gerund  in  the  accusative  must  be 
used,  not  the  infinitive:  ad  (inter,  ob)  scribendum,  7iot  ad 
(inter,  ob)  scribere. 

2.  The  general  rules  for  the  use  of  cases  of  nouns  (695-728)  apply  to 
the  cases  of  the  infinitive  and  gerund,  as  above  given. 

Special  Remark.  The  gerund  is  7iot  used  in  the  dative  or  accusative 
with  an  active  government;  e.  g.,  we  can  say  scribendi  episto- 
las,  of  v)riting  letters,  or  scribendo  epistolas,  by  writing  lettei's, 
but  not  charta  utilis  est  scribendo  {dat.)  epistolas,  nor  charta 
utilis  est  ad  scribendum  literas.  In  these  last  cases  the  ge- 
rundive must  be  used  (738). 

(j  12.   The  Gerundive,  or  Verbal  in  dus,  da,  dum. 

(737.)  Rule  XXXIX.  {a)  The  gerundive  in  the  nomina- 
tive neuter  (dum)  is  used  w^ith  the  tenses  of  esse,  to  denote 
that  an  action  should  or  must  be  done ;  and  these  may  govern 
the  case  of  the  verb. 

{One)  must  write.  \  Scribendum  est. 

(6)  The  person  by  whom  the  action  should  or  must  be  done 
is  put  in  the  dative. 

/  must  write.  I  Scribendum  est  m  i  h  i. 

Caius  must  write.  Scribendum  est  C  a  i  o. 

One  must  use  reason.  I  Ratione  utendum  est. 

(738.)  Rule  XL.  (a)  The  gerundive  is  used  with  esse,  in 
all  cases  and  genders,  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the 
noun,  to  express  necessity  or  worthiness, 

I  am  to  be  loved ;  she  is   to  ^eAmandussum;amandaest, 
loved,  S^c.  I      &c. 

(&)  When  the  person  is  specified,  it  must  be  put  in  the  da- 
tive* 


SUPINE.  309^ 


/  must  love  Tullia. 
All  things  were  to  be  dotie  by  C(B- 
sar  at  one  time. 


Tallia  mi  hi  amanda  est. 
C  88  sari       omnia      imo     tempore 
erant  agenda. 


Rem,  a  or  ab  with  ablative  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  dative. 
My  cause  must  be  managed  by  the  lA  consulibus  mea  causa  s  u  s- 
consuls.  j     cipienda  est. 

(739.)  Rule  XLI.  The  geinmdive  is  used  {to  express  con- 
tinned  action)  as  a  verbal  adjective,  in  all  genders  and  cases 
(but  the  nominative)  agreeing  with  the  noun,  instead  of  the 
gerund  governing  the  noun  ;  €.  ^., 

Gen.  Of  writing  a  letter. 

Scribendae  epistolsB,  instead  of  scribendi  epistolam. 
Dati-^o  or  for  writing  letters. 

Scribendis  epistolis,  instead  of  scribendo  epistolas. 
Ace.  To  write  a  letter. 

Ad  scribendam  epistolam,  instead  of  ad  scribendum  epitf» 
tolam. 
Abl.  By,  ^c,  writing  a  letter. 

Scribe  n  da  epistola,  instead  of  scribendo  epistolam. 

Hem.  As  observed  in  (736),  the  gerundive  must  be  used  for  the  dative 
or  accusative  of  the  gerund  when  it  has  an  active  government.  It 
may  be  used  for  it  in  any  other  case,  unless  the  object  of  the  ge- 
rund is  a  neuter  adjective  or  pronoun  ;  e.  g.,  of  learning  the  true  = 
vera  discendi,  not  verorum  discendorum ;  of  hearing  this  := 
hoc  audiendi,  not  hujus  audiendi. 

^  13.  Supines. 

(740.)  Rule  XLlI.  (1.)  The  supine  in  um  is  used  with 
verbs  of  motion,  to  express  the  design  of  the  motion,  and  gov- 
erns the  same  case  as  its  verb. 

/  come  to  ask  you.  \  Venio  te  rogatum. 

(2.)  The  supine  in  u  is  used, 

(a)  "With  adjectives,  to  show  in  what  respect  they  are 
used ;  e.  g., 

Pleasant  as  to  taste.  \  Dulce  gustatu. 

(b)  "With  the  nouns  fas,  nefas,  opus,  in  the  same  sense  : 
fas  est  dictu. 


PART  II. 

OF    COMPOUND    SENTENCES. 

(741.)  A  compound  sentence  is  one  made  up  of  two  or  more  simple  sea- 
tencei.    The  sentences  thus  combined  are  either  co-ordinate  or  subordinate. 


810  SENTENCES. 

I.   CO-ORDINATE   SENTENCES. 

^14.   Classes  of  Co-ordinate  Sentences. 
(742.)  Co-ordinate  sentences  are  united  together,  but  yet  independent 
of  each  other  :*  co-ordination  is  either, 

[a)  Copulative;  e.  g.,  His  father  has  abandoned  him,  and  his  friends 

have  deserted  hiin,  and  the  son  remains. 
{b)  Disjunctive ;  e.  g.,  Either  his  father  has  abandoned,  or  his  friends 
have  deserted  him. 

(c)  Adversative ;  e.  g.,  His  father  has  abandoned  him,  hut  his  friends 
have  not. 

(d)  Causal ;  e.  g.,  His  friends  will  abandon  him,  for  his  father  has 
done  so. 

(e)  Conclusive;  e.  g.,  His  father  has   abandoiled  him,  therefore  his 
friends  will  desert  him. 

II.    SUBORDINATE   SENTENCES. 

^15.   Classes  of  Subordinate  Sentences. 
(743.)  Subordinate  sentences  are  so  imited  to  others  (called  principal 
sentences)  as  to  be  dependent  upon  them. 

The  messenger,  who  was  sent,  an-  I  Nuntius>  qui  missus  est,  nun- 

nounced.  I      tiavit. 

Here  the  messenger  announced  is  the  principal  sentence ;  who  was  sent, 
the  subordinate  sentence.* 

(744.)  Subordinate  sentences  are  of  five  classes  : 

A.  Participial  sentences, 

B.  Accusative  with  infinitive. 

C.  Conjunctive  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  a  conjunc- 

tion or  adverb  of  time. 

D.  Relative  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  a  relative 

word. 

E.  Interrogative  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  an  inter- 

rogative  word. 
We  shall  treat  these  in  order,  premising  a  few  remarks  upon  the  use  of 
tke  moods  and  tenses,  which  must  be  thoroughly  understood. 

^  16.   The  Moods. 

(745.)  The  verb  expresses  affirmation.    The  moods  of  the  verb  are  used 
to  vary  the  character  of  the  affirmation. 


^  It  must  be  obvious  that  all  co-ordinate  sentences  are,  for  gra^imatical 
Tpnnposea,  principal  sentences.  Moreover,  the  doctrines  and  rules  applied 
to  simple  sentences  (Part  I.)  are  applicable  to  all  principal  sentences :  it  is 
only  in  subordinate  sentences  that  difficulty  is  likely  to  occur.  The  pupil 
should,  therefore,  obtain  as  accurate  a  knowledge  as  possible  of  the  vari- 
ous kinds  of  subordinate  sentences,  and  the  different  modes  of  affirmation 
which  they  express,  as  it  is  upon  these  that  their  syntax  depends. 


PARTICIPIAL  SENTENCES.  Sll 

1.  By  the  indicAtive,  affirmation  of  a  fact  is  expressed  ;  e.  g.,  I  write, 
I  did  not  write.* 

2.  By  the  subjunctive,  affirmation  is  expressed  doubtfully,  contingently, 
or  indefinitely ;  e.  g.,  /  may  write,  if  /  should  write,  perhaps  some 
(may)  think. 

3.  By  the  imperative,  affirmation  is  expressed  as  an  injunction  or  re- 
quest ;  e.  g.,  write. 

(746.)  It  must  be  obvious  that  in  principal  sentences  the  indicative 
mood  chiefly  occurs,  and  in  subordinate  sentences  the  subjunctive,  as  af- 
firmations of  fact  are  made  more  frequently  in  the  former  than  in  the  lat- 
ter.   But, 

(a)  The  subjunctive  is  used  (of  course),  even  in  principal  sentences, 
when  the  affirmation  is  doubtful,  contingent,  or  indefinite  (745,  2). 

(b)  The  indicative  is  used,  even  in  subordinate  sentences,  when  the  af- 
firmation is  positive. 


True  friendships  are  everlasting, 
because  nature  cannot  be  chang- 
ed. 


Verse    amicitias    sempitemflB   sun^ 
quia  natura  mutari  non  potest. 


^17.  The  Tenses. 

(a)   DIVISION. 

(747.)  The  tenses  are  either  primary  or  historical  (647,  B,.  3). 

Present.  Future.  Pres.  Perf. 

.  Camat,  amabit,  amavit, 

^  '  ^'   I  he  loves.  he  will  love.  he  has  loved. 

Imperfect  Pluperfect.  Perf.  Aorist. 

lh\  W  *    '    /Ja^^bat,  amaverat,  amavit, 

^  '  '\he  was  loving.         he  had  loved.  he  loved. 

(b)  SUCCESSION  OF  TENSES. 

(748.)  Rule  XL  III.  If  there  be  a  primary  tense  in  the 
principal  sentence,  there  must  be  a  primary  tense  in  the  sub- 
ordinate ;  if  an  historical  tense  in  the  principal,  an  historical  in 
the  subordinate. 


Principal. 

Subordinate. 

Principal. 

Subordinat*. 

I  kiww 

what  you  are  doing. 

Scio, 

quid  a  gas. 

I  was  knowing 

what  you  were  doing. 

S  c  i  e  b  a  m. 

quid  agerei. 

I  have  learned 

what  you  are  doing. 

Cognovi, 

quid  agas. 

I  learned 

what  you  were  doing. 

Cognovi, 

quid  age  res 

(A.)  ^  18.  Participial  Sentences. 
[The  participle  is  used  to  abridge  discourse,  instead  of  a  relative,  ad» 
verb,  or  conjunction  with  a  verb.    Thus  (1),  Tarquin,  when  he  was  expelled 

*  Of  course  the  action  may  be  either  positive  or  negative,  without  a^ 
fecting  the  affirmation. 


812  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 

from  Rome  —  Tarquin,  expelled,  from  Rome.     (2)  Caesar,  when  the  work 
was  finished,  departed  =  Caesar,  the  work  having  been  finished,  departed 
These  are  abridged   subordinate   sentences,  (1)  being  called  the  coiir 
junciive  participial  construction,  and  (2)  the  ablative  absolute.] 

(749.)  Conjunctive  Participial  Construction. — The  participle 
in  a  subordinate  sentence  which  has  for  its  subject  the  subject  or 
object  of  the  principal  sentence,  agi-ees  with  this  last  in  gender, 
number,  and  case. 


Aristides,  when  he  was  expelled 
from  his  country,  fled  to  Lace- 
daemon. 


Aristides,  patria  pulsus,  Lace- 
daemonem  fugit. 


D^^  Observe,  in  this  example,  that  Aristides  is  the  subject  of 

both  the  principal  and  the  subordinate   sentence,   and  pulsus 

agrees  with  Aristides  in  gender,  number,  and  case.     In  Eng- 

'■  lish   such   sentences   are  generally  expressed   by  an   adverb  or 

conjunction  with  a  verb. 

(750.)  Rule  XLIV.  Ablative  Absolute, — If  the  subordinate 
sentence  contains  a  noun  and  participle  independent  of  the  sub- 
ject of  the  leading  sentence,  both  noun  and  participle  are  placed 
in  the  ablative.  (This  construction  is  called  the  ablative  abso- 
lute.) 

When    Tarquin    was    reigning, 

Pythagoras  came  into  Italy. 
All  things  having  been  provided, 


Pythagoras,  Tarquinio  regnan- 

t  e,  in  Italiam  venit. 
Omnibus  rebus  comparatis, 

diem  dicunt. 


they  appoint  a  day. 

Rem.  Nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  are  often  used  in  the  ablative 
absolute  without  a  participle. 

Under  the  guidance  of  Nature    Natura  duce. 

(=  Nature  being  guide). 
In  the  consulship  of  Manlius.        j  Manlio  consul e. 

(B.)  ^19.  Accusative  with  Infinitive. 

(751.)  Rule  XLV.  Many  subordinate  sentences,  which  in 
English  are  introduced  by  the  conjunction  that  (especially  after 
verbs  of  thinking,  saying,  knowing,  &:c.),  are  expressed  in 
Latin  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive. 

They  said  that  they  did  not  fear    Dicebant  non  se  hostem  vereri. 

the  enemy. 
He  knows  that  Cicero  is  eloquent 


Scit  Ciceronem  esse  eloquen* 
tem. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  WITH  UT,  NE,  QUIN,  aUO,  aUOMINUS.    313 

Rem.  1.  Observe  that  the  subject  of  the  sentence  thus  subordinated 
is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  the  predicate  in  the  infinitive.  If  the 
predicate  contain  an  adjective,  it  must  agree  with  the  subject. 

I  perceive  that  the  water  is  cold.    \  Sentio  aquam  f  r  i  g  i  d  a  m  esse. 
e.  The  accusative  with  infinitive  occurs  chiefly, 

{a)  After  verba  sentiendi  et  dicendi  {thinking,  feelings 
'perceiving,  knowings  saying,  announcing,  willing,  forbidding, 
Sec). 
(b)  After  such  expressions  as  apparet  (z7  ^s  evident),  constat 
{it  is  known),  opus  est,  oportet,  necesse  est,  justum 
est  {it  is  necessary,  right,  just,  &c.).  In  this  case  the  accusative 
with  infinitive  becomes  the  subject  of  the  entire  sentence. 

It  is  known  to  all  that  the  Romans  (Constat  inter  omnes  H  o  m  a  n  o  s 
were  very  brave.  \     fuisse  fortissimo s. 

^p*  Oportet  and  necesse  est  may  take  the  subjunctive,  in- 
stead of  the  accusative  with  infinitive. 

We  ought  (  =  it  behooves  us)  ^olOportetnos  virtuti  studere  ;  or 
practice  virtue.  \  Virtuti  studeamus  oportet. 

(G.)  ^  20.   Conjunctive  Sentences. 

Relation  of  Conjunctions  to  the  Moods. 

(752.)  From  what  has  been  said  (745,  746),  it  is  obvious,  that  as  the 
moods  express  the  varieties  of  affirmation,  and  as  the  conjunctions  are 
used  to  indicate  different  relations  of  thpught  (as  positive,  conditional, 
causal,  &c.),  there  must  be  a  close  connexion  between  the  use  of  the  con- 
junctions and  that  of  the  moods.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that 
the  nature  of  the  affirmation  (except,  perhaps,  in  purely  idiomatic  ex- 
pressions) decides  both  the  mood  and  the  conjunction  that  shall  be  used. 
It  cannot  properly  be  said,  therefore,  that  the  conjunctions  govern  the 
moods  ;  but,  for  convenience'  salte,  we  treat  them  together. 

GENERAL  RULE. 

(753.)  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  all  subordinate  sentences 
in  which  affirmation  is  expressed  as  dependent  upon  some  pre- 
vious affirmation,  either  as  purpose^  aim,  consequence,  condition, 
or  imaginary  comparison, 

SPECIAL   RULES. 

1.  Final  Conjunctions,  ut,  ne,  quin,  quo,  quominus. 
(754.)  Rule  XL VI.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  sentencea 
expressing  a  purpose  or  a  consequence,  introduced  by  tjbe  finaj 
conjunctions  ut,  ne,  quin,  quo,  quominus. 
Dd 


314        SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 


1.  Ut,  ne,  ex.yressmg  purpose. 
I  did  not  write  that  in  order  to 

instruct  you. 
I  beseech  you  not  to  do  this. 

2.  Ut,  expressing-  consequence. 

The  soldiers  went  with  such  vio- 
lence that  the  enemy  betook 
themselves  to  flight. 

(3.)  duo  is  used  to  express  a  purpose,  instead  of  ut,  especially  when 
a  comparative  enters  into  the  sentence. 


Ea    non    ut    te    instituerem 

scripsi. 
Te  obsecro  n  e  hoc  facias. 

Eo  impetu  milites  ierunt,  ut  hostes 
se  fugae  man  dare  nt. 


CiEsar  erects  forts,  that  he  may 
the  more  easily  keep  off  the 
Helvetians. 


Caesar  castella  communit,  quo  fa- 
cilius  Helve tios  prohibere  pos- 
sit. 


(4.)  duin  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "but  that"  [as  not,  &c.)  after  nega- 
tive sentences,  and  after  non  dubito,  non  dubium  est,  &c. 


There  is  no  one  hut  thinks. 
It  is  not  doubtful  but  that   the 
soldiers  will  fight  bravely. 


Nemo  est  q  u  i  n  p  u  t  e  t. 
Non  dubium  est  quin  milites  for- 
titer  pugnaturi  sint. 


(5.)  duominus  is  used  (in  preference  to  ne)  after  verbs  of  hinder- 
ing, preventing,  standing  in  the  way  of,  Sec.  (It  can  generally  be 
rendered  in  English  by  "o/""  or  "from"  with  a  participle.) 

Nothing  hinders  him  from  doing  I  Nihil  impedit  quominus  hoc  f a- 
this.  J      c  i  a  t. 

a.  Conditional  Conjunctions,  si,  nisi,  dum,  dummodo,  modo. 

(755.)  Rule  XLVII.  Conditional  conjunctions  take  the  in- 
dicative if  the  condition  is  expressed  as  real  or  certain ;  the 
subjunctive,  where  it  is  not. 

If  he  has  any  money,  he  will  give     S  i  pecuniam  h  a  b  e  a  t,  dabit. 
it  (it  is  uncertain  whether  he 
has  any). 

Rem.  1.  If  the  condition  is  represented  as  impossible  or  unreal,  (1)  the 
imperfect  subjunctive  must  be  used  for  present  or  future  time; 
(2)  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  for  past  time. 

(1)  If  he  had  any  money,  he  would 


Si  pecuniam  haberet,  daret. 

Si   pecuniam   habuissit,  dedis- 
set. 


give  it  (but  he  has  none). 
(2)  If  he  had  had  any  money,  he 
would  have  given  it. 

Rem.%  As  dum,  dummodo,  modo,  in  the  sense  of  provided 
that,  can  never  express  a  real,  existing  condition,  they  always 
take  the  subjunctive. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  WITH  UUUM.  315 

3.  Concessive  Conjunctions  (683,  5). 

(756.)  The  concessive  conjunctions  take  the  indicative  when  they  intro- 
duce a  definite  statement  of  fact,  but  the  subjunctive  when  something  is 
expressed  as  possible,  not  actual.  Etsi,  quamquam,  and  t a m e t s i 
are  used  principally  in  the  former  sense  ;  in  the  latter,  etiamsi  more 
commonly,  and  licet  and  q  u  a  m  v  i  s*  nearly  always.     Hence, 

Rule  XL VIII.  Licet  and  quamvis  (although)  are  al- 
ways followed  by  the  subjunctive  ;  e  t  i  a  m  s  i,  generally. 


Veritas  licet  nullum  defensorem 

o  b  t  i  n  e  a  t. 
Sapiens  dolorem  patienter  tolerat, 

quamvis  acerbus  sit. 


Tliough  truth  should  obtain  no 

defender. 
The  wise  man  endures  pain  pa- 
tiently, even  though  it  be  griev- 
ous. 

Rem.  The  comparative  conjunctions,  when  used  concessively,  velu^ 
quasi,  acsi,  tanquamsi,  &c.  (meaning  as  if  as  though)^  al- 
ways take  the  subjunctive,  for  the  reason  given  (756)  for  licet  and 
quamvis. 


duid  testibus  utor,  quasi  res  do- 
bia  sit? 


Why  do  I  use  witnesses,  as 
though  the  master  were  doubt- 
ful? 

4.  Temporal  Conjunctions. 
(757.)   Temporal  conjunctions  {when,  after  that,  as  soon  aSf 
just  as,  &c.)  of  course  generally  take  the  indicative. 


After  Casar  drew  up  the  lin£  of 

battle. 
Every  animal,  as  soon  as  it  is 

bom. 


Postquam  Caesar  aciem  i li- 
st r  u  x  i  t. 

Omne  animal,  simulac  ortam 
est. 


SPECIAL   REMARKS. 

(A.)  Q  u  u  m  has  two  uses  :  temporal  and  causal. 

(a)  Temporal. 

1.  As  a  pure  particle  of  time,  q  u  u  m  takes  the  indicative. 

2.  In  historical  narrative  (especially  where  the  principal  clause  has 
the  indicative  perfect)  quum  temporal  is  followed  by  the  svJ)" 
junctive  imperfect  or  pluperfect. 

'When  Casar  had  conquered  Pom- \  CsesBT,  quum  Pompeium  vicis- 
pey,  he  crossed  over  into  Italy.   I      s  e  t,  in  Italiam  t  r  a  j  e  c  i  t. 

[In  many  such  cases,  the  action  introduced  by  when  is  in  some  sense 
the  cause  of  the  action  in  the  principal  sentence.] 

*  auamvis  is  used  by  the  later  writers  in  the  sense  of  quamquam,  with 
the  indicative. 


316  RELATIVE  SENTENCES. 

{b)  duum  causal,  expressing  the  relation  of  cause  and  ^ect  {since, 
because,  although),  obviously  requires  the  subjunctive. 
Since  these  things  are  so.  }  duse  cum  ita  sint. 

Hence, 

Rule  XL IX.  Quum  causal  is  always  followed  by  the 
subjunctive  ;  and  quum  temporal  by  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  when  the  aorist  perfect  indicative  is  used  in 
the  principal  sentence. 

(B.)  Antequam  and  priusquam  are  used, 

1.  To  express  simple  priority  of  one  action  to  another,  and  here  the 
indicative  is  obviously  required. 

All  these  things  were  done  before  \  Haec    omnia    ante    facta    sunt 
Verres  touched  Italy.  I      quam  Verres  Italiam  attigit. 

2.  To  express  a  connexion  between  one  action  and  another,  and  here 
the  subjunctive  is  obviously  required. 


Before  Caesar  attempted  anything, 
he  orders  Divitiacus  to  be  sum- 
moned. 


Caesar,  priusquam  quidquam 
conaretur,  Diyitiacum  ad  se 
vocari  jubet. 

3.  To  introduce  a  general  or  indefinite  statement,  requiring,  of  course, 
the  subjunctive. 

The  tempest  threatens  hQioxQ  it  \Tlem^&st^    minatur,   antequam 

rises.  j     surgat. 

(C.)  Dum,  donee,  quoad,  in  the  sense  of  until,  take  the 
subjunctive  when  the  affirmation  is  expressed  as  possible  or 
future. 

He  was  unwilling  to  leave  the  \  Dum.  Milo  veniret,  locum  relin- 
spot  until  Milo  came.  I      quere  noluit. 

[For  interrogatives,  see  {  22.] 

(D.)  ^21.  Relative  Sentences. 
(758.)  In  the  compound  sentence,  "the  messenger,  who  was  sent,  an- 
nounced," the  clause  "the  messenger  aimounced"  is  the  principal  sen- 
tenjce;  and  the  clause  "who  was  sent"  the  relative  sentence.    The  word 
"  messenger"  is  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  "  who." 

1.  Agreement. 
(759.)   Rule   L.    The   relative    pronoun   agrees   with  its 
antecedent  in  gender  and  number ;  but  its  case  depends  upon 
the  consti'uetion  of  the  relative  sentence. 

The  bridge  which  was  at  Geneva  \  Yontem,    qui    erat    ad    Q-enevam^ 
he  orders  to  be  cut  down.  |     jubet  rescindi. 


RELATIVE  SENTENCES.  317 


This  Vira§  a  kind  of  fighting  in 
which  the  Get-mans  had  exer- 
cised themselves. 


Genus  hoc  erat  pngiiaB,  quo  Ger- 
mani  se  exercuerant. 


Reih^  The  verb  in  the  relative  sentence  takes  the  person  of  thd  ante- 
cedent. 
We  who  write.  |  N  o  s  qui  s  c r  i  b  i m m  s. 

2.  The  Moods  in  Relative  Sentences. 

(760.)  (a)  The  indicative  mood  occurs  in  the  relative  sen- 
tence only  when  it  states  a  fact  distinctly,  with  reference  to  a 
particular  subject. 

The  messenger  who  was  sent.         \  Nuntius  qui  missus  est. 

(b)  But  qui  is  used  in  Latin  very  commonly  (1)  to  avoid  the 
use  of  a  conjunction,  and  (2)  to  introduce  indefinite  statements, 
or  the  words  or  opinions  of  another ;  and  in  such  cases  is  al- 
ways followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

(761.)  Rule  LI.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  senten- 
ces expressing  the  purpose^  result^  or  ground  of  the  principal 
sentence. 

1.  Purpose  (qui  =  ut  with  demonstrative).  '  'L   '" 
They  sent  ambassadors  to  sue  for  1  Miserunt  legatoS,  qui  pacem  pet- 

(=  who  should  sue  for)  peace.     |      erent  (==  ut  ii  pacem  peterent). 

2.  Result  (qui  =  ut  after  is,  tarn,  talis,  dignus,  ita,  &c.). 


T  am  not  the  man  to  do  this  (=  1 

am  not  such  "who  can  do). 
Pollio  is  worthy/  of  our  love  (= 

vs^orthy,  whom  we  may  love). 

3.  Ground  or  cause  (qui  =  cur  or  quod). 


Non  is  sum  qui  hoc  facidm. 

Dignus  est  Pollio,  quein  diliga- 
mus. 


Elf  as  qui  censeas— 


Male  fecit  Hannibal   qui   Capu89 
hiemarit. 


You  err,  who  think  (=  because  you 

think) — 
HaimibaJ  did  virrong  in  wintering 

(=  because  he  wintered)  at  Ca- 

puai 

(762.)  Rule  LII.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  ^eii- 
tences  containing  indefinite  statements,  especially  after  the 
words  there  are,  there  can  he  found,  there  is  no  one,  &c. 


There  cere  those  who  say. 
I  have  nothing  whereof  to  accuse 
(=  no  reason  to  blame)  old  age. 


Sunt  qui  die  ant. 
Nihil  habeo  quod  incuft^^tJEi  *# 
nectutem. 

Rem.  When  the  senteiicfe  introduced  by  th«  rel«livtf  expre«ffe«  t3i© 
D  D  2 


318  INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 

sentiments  of  another  (rather  than  of  the  writer),  the  subjunctive  is 
used. 


Helvetii  constituerunt  ea  quae  ad 
proficiscendum  pertinerent 
comparare. 


The  Helvetians  detertnined  to  get 
together  those  things  which 
(they  thought)  belonged  to 
marching  (were  necessary  for 
setting  out). 

^  22.  Interrogative  Sentences. 
1.  Questions. 
(763.)  duestions  are  often  expressed  in  English  without  any  interrog- 
ative word ;  e.  g.,  Is  Caius  toriting  ?  but  in  the  L  atin,  almost  invaria- 
bly, an  interrogative  word  is  used.  These  are  either  {a)  interrogative 
particles,  {b)  interrogative  pronouns,  or  (c)  interrogative  adverbs  or  con- 
junctions. 

(a)  Interrogative  Particles :  n e,  n o n n  e,  n u m,  u t r u m,  an. 

(1.)  N  e  simply  asks  for  information. 
Is  Caius  writing  ?  jScribitne  Caius  ? 

(2.)  Nonne  expects  the  answer  yes. 
Do  you  not  think  the  wise  man  I  Nonne  putas  sapientem  beatum 
happy  ?  I      esse  ? 

(3.)  N  u  m  expects  the  answer  no. 
Do  you  think  the  fool  happy  ?        j  N  u  m  putas  stultum  esse  beatum  ? 

(4.)  Utrum  is  used  in  double  questions,  with  an  {whether — or). 
(Whether)  is  that  your  fault  or  I  Utrum  eavestra  an  nostra  culpa 

ours  ?  I      est  ? 

(i)  Interrogative  Pronouns:   quis,  qui,   qualis,   quantus,   ec- 

quis,  &c. 
Who  taught  Epaminondas  mu-  I  Gl  u  i  s  Epaminondam  musicam  do- 

sicl  &c.  I      cuit? 

{c)  Interrogative  Adverbs  or  Conjunctions :    quare,    cur,    quando, 

ubi,  quomodo,  &c. 
(764.)  duestions  are  either  direct  or  indirect :  direct,  when  they  are 
not  dependent  on  any  word  or  sentence  going  before  ;  e.  g.,  Is  Caius  wri- 
ting ?    Indirect,  when  they  are  so  dependent ;  e.  g.,  Tell  me  if  Caius  is 
writing, 

2.  Use  of  the  Moods  in  Questions, 
(a)  Direct. 
(765.)  In  direct  questions  the  indicative  is  used  when  the  question  is  put 
positively,  and  the  subjunctive  when  it  is  put  doubtfully ;  e.  g,, 
(Positive.)   What  are  you  doing  7  |  duid  a  g  i  s  ?     {Indie.) 
(Doubtful.)  What  can  we  do?        \  duid  a g a m u s  ? 


ORATIO  OBLiaUA.  319 

(b)  Indirect. 

(766.)  Rule  LIII.  In  indirect  questions  the  subjunctive  is 
always  used. 


I  do  not  know  what  book  you  are 

reading. 
Tell  me  what  you  are  doing. 


Nescio  quem  librum  legas. 
Die,  quid  agas. 
^  23.   Oratio  Obliqua. 


1.  Nature  of  Oratio  Obliqua, 

(767.)  When  any  one  relates  the  words  or  opinions  of  another,  he  may 
do  it  in  two  ways  : 

(a)  He  may  represent  him  as  speaking  in  the  Jirst  person,  and  give  his 
words  precisely  as  they  were  uttered;  e.  g.,  Ariovistus  said,  " I  have 
crossed  the  Rhine^' — Ariovistus  dixit,  Rhenum  transii.  This  is 
called  oratio  recta,  direct  discourse. 

{b)  He  may  state  the  substance  of  what  the  speaker  said  in  narrative 
form  ;  e.g.,  Ariovistus  said  that  he  had  crossed  the  Rhine — Ariovistus 
dixit  se  Rhenum  transisse.  This  is  called  oratio  obliqua, 
indirect  discourse, 

2.  The  Moods  in  the  Oratio  Obliqua. 
(768.)  The  sentences  introduced  in  the  oratio  obliqua  are  either  princi- 
pal or  subordinate  ;  e.  g.,  Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  wage  war  on 
the  jEduans  if  they  paid  the  tribute  yearly.  Here  the  sentence  that  he 
would  not  wage  war  upon  the  ^duans  is  a  principal  sentence,  and  if 
they  paid  the  tribute  yearly  is  a  subordinate  sentence. 

(769.)  Rule  LIV.  (a)  Principal  sentences  in  Xh.Q  oratio  ohli" 
qua  are  expressed  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive ;  e,  g,, 
Ariovistus  dixit,  s e  jEduis  bellum  non  esse  illaturum. 

Rem.  If  the  principal  sentence  contains  a  command  or  wish,  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  subjunctive ;  e.  g., 
The  leader  said  that  the  troops  I  Dux  dixit,  milites  suae  saluti  con- 
should  consult  their  own  safety.  \     sulerent. 

(6)  Subordinate  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua  always  take  the 
subjunctive ;  e.  g.,  Ariovistus  dixit,  se  iEduis  bellum  non  esse 
illaturum,  si  stipendium  quotannis  penderent  (if 
they  paid  the  tribute  yearly). 


APPENDICES 


^ 


a  a ;)  i  a  vi  a  ■!  h  a 


APPENDIX  L 


OF  PROSODY. 
^  1.   Quantity.  ^^ 

[The  rules  of  quantify  in  Lesson  XL  11.  should  be  reviewed,  and  die 
following  additional  rules  learned.] 

1.  Penults. 
(770.)  Dissyllabic  supines  lengthen  the  penult ;  e,  g.,  visum. 
Hem.  The  following  are  short,  viz. : 

Datum,  ratum,  sStmn,  stStiun,  itum, 
Citum,  litum,  situm,  rutum,  quitum. 
(771.)  Reduplicated  perfects  shorten  both  penult  and  antepenult, 
e.g-.,  cScidi,  didici. 

Rem.  Penult  is  long-  in  cecidi  (cseddre)  and  pdpddi  (pSdSre). 
(772.)  In  ADJECTIVE  penults  observe  the  following : 

1.  Short  Penults:  -acus,  -icus,  -idus,  imus  ;  e. g'.,  JEgyptiftcus, mo- 
dicus,  cupidus,  legitimus. 

Exceptions. — Meracus,  opacus,  amicus,  aprlcus,  anticus,  posticus, 
mendicus,  umbilicus,  fidus,  infidus,  bimus,  trimus  (of  two,  three 
years,  &c.),  matrimus,  opimus,  patrimus,  imus,  primus. 

2.  Long  Penults:  -a lis,  -anus,  udus,  utus,  with  all  before  -rus, 
-vus,  -sus  ;  e.g.,  dotalis,  montanus,  percrudus,  astutus,  av&rus,  sin- 
cSrus,  delirus,  decorus,  octavus,  aestivus,  famdsus. 

Exc. — Lifferi,  post3ri,  barbfirus,  opipfirus. 

3.  Penults  sometimes  long,  sometimes  short:  -ilis,  -inus. 

(a)  -ilis,  from  verbs,  is  short ;  fh)m  nouns,  long ;  e.  g.,  facilis  {short) ; 

civilis  (long).    Exilis,  subtilis,  and  the  names  of  months  (Aprilis, 

&c.),  are  long. 
(J)  -inus,  from  noun,s  denoting  time  or  m^erial,  is  short;  from 
f  other  words,  long ;  e.  g.,  crastmus,  elephantinus  [short) ;  caninus, 

Latanus  {long). 

2.  Compound  Words. 
(773.)  Compound  words  generally  retain  the  quantity  of  the  simple 
words;  e.  ^.,  per+l6go  =  perlSgo;  per+l6gi  =  perlSgi. 


324  APPENDIX    I. PROSODY. 

Rem.  I.  A  change  of  vowels  does  not  affect  the  rule;  e+lego  = 

e  1 1  g  o. 
2.  Dejero,   pejero   (juro) ;  maledicus,  &c.   (dico) ;  cognitum,    agnitum 
(notum),  are  short,  though  the  simple  words  are  long. 
(774.)  a,  e,  de,  di,  pro,  s  e,  in  composition  are  long,  but  re  is  short. 
Exc. — Dirimo,  disertus,  refert.    Pro  is  short  in  Greek  words,  and  in 
the  compounds  of  cello^  fanum,  fari,  fateor,  festus,  fugio,  fundo, 
nepos,  neptis,  torvus  ;  also  in  proficiscor.    In  propago,  prdpino,  it 
is  doubtful.* 
(775.)  If  the  first  part  of  a  compound  word  end  in  a,  it  is  generally  long ; 
if  in  e,  i,  or  u,  generally  short ;  e.  g-.,  traduce,  trade  (contracted  from  trans) ; 
trScenti,  agricola,  quadrupes. 

^  2.  Rhythm,  Arsis,  Thesis,  Verse,  Feet. 

(776.)  {a)  By  Rhythm  we  mean  a  regular  alternation  of  elevations 
(stress)  and  depressions  of  the  voice.  In  poetry  this  alternation  follows 
certain  fixed  laws. 

(b)  The  effort  of  voice  by  which  stress  iS'laid  upon  one  syllable  is  called 
Ictus,  or  rhythmical  accent.  A  syllable  so  raised  by  the  ictus  stands  in 
the  Arsis.  The  syllable  or  syllables  on  which  the  voice  rests  or  sinks 
are  said  to  be  in  the  Thesis. 

(c)  A  Foot  is  formed  by  the  union  of  arsis  and  thesis.  A  combination 
of  feet  forms  a  Verse. 

Thus,  in  the  line  vSs6rS  mantes,  the  ictus  falls  on  the  syllables 
marked  with  the  accent ;  vis  and  mon,  therefore,  are  in  the  arsis, 
s6re  and  tes  in  the  thesis.  The  union  of  arsis  and  thesis  in 
viserS  forms  a  foot;  so  also  in  mon  tes.  The  combination  of 
these  two  feet  forms  the  verse 

VisSrg  mdntes. 

(d)  A  Dactyl  is  a  foot  composed  of  one  long  syllable  (arsis)  and  two 
short  syllables  (thesis);  e.^.,  vis  ere:  a  Spondee  of  two  long  (arsis  and 
thesis) ;  e.  g.,  m6nt6s. 

(j  3.  Scanning. 
(777.)  Scanning  is  the  measuring  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  which  com- 
pose it.     Observe  the  foUowiug  points  in  scanning  : 

1.  Synalcepha  cuts  off  a  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word  when  the  next 
word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  ;  e. g.,  instead ofregina  ad,  we 
read  re  gin'  ad;  instead  of  a  t  q  u  e  hinc,  a.tqu'  hinc. 

2.  Ecthlipsis  cuts  off  m  with  the  vowel  before  it  at  the  end  of  a  word 

*  The  following  lines  contain  the  exceptions  : 

At  rape  qam  fundo,  fugio,  neptisque,  neposqoe, 

Et  cello,  fari,  fateor,  fanum(]ue,  festumque  ; 

Atque  procusr  proficiscor,  cumque  propheta,  profocto. 


APPENDIX    I. PROSODY.  325 

when  the  next  begins  with  a  vowel ;  e.  g.,  instead  ofigndtnm 
est,  we  read  i g n 6 1*  est. 

3.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  ending  with  a  consonant  is  always 
long  if  the  next  word  begins  with  a  consonant ;  e.  g.,  m  a  n  i  b  u  s 
tremor;  here  bus  (naturally  short)  is  made  long. 

4.  SyncBresis  contracts  two  syllables  into  one;  e.  g.,  aur6a  into 
anrea  (pronounced  aurya). 

5.  Diceresis  divides  one  syllable  into  two ;  e.  g.,  pictae,  pictai; 

(j  4.  Hexameter  Verse. 
(778.)  [a)  Hexameter  verse  is  so  called  because  it  has  six  measures, 
of  a  foot  each.    The  first /owr  feet  may  be  either  dactyls  or  spondees  ;  the 
Jifth  is  regularly  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee. 


II       1- 
Sed  fugtt 

I    inffai- 


2. 

fnt€re- 

dlimRSi 


3. 

gtnaju- 


4.       I      5.  6.      n 

irrgpa-     ribilS    t^mpus. 
'       "      I6r6m.  II 


b^s  reno-jv^rS  do- 
Rem.  1.  Sometimes  a  spondee  is  found  in  the  5tb  place,  especially 
when  anything  grave  or  solemn  is  expressed.    The  line  is  then 
called  spondaic. 
2.  The  final  syllable  of  a  verse  is  always  reckoned  long ;  e.  g.,remr 
in  d  o  1  o  r  e  m. 
{b)  CcBsura  is  the  separation,  by  the  end  of  a  word,  of  syllables  enter- 
ing into  a  foot.    If  the  feet  of  a  verse  be  marked  off  like  bars  in  music^ 
whenever  a  bar  falls  in  the  middle  of  a  word  there  is  a  caesura ;  e.  g.,  the 
following  hexameter  has^^e  caesuras  : 

Ille  la-  I  tus  nivg-  |  um  mol-  |  li  ful-  j  tus,  hy^-  |  cmtho. 
(c)  The  ccBsural  pause  in  hexameter  verse  is  a  pause  or  rest  of  the 
voice  on  a  caesural  syllable,  designed  to  give  harmony  to  the  entire  verse. 
(1.)  The  most  approved  caesural  pause  {the  heroic)  falls  on  the  arsis  of 
the  third  foot,  as  in  the  following  examples : 

SM  fugit  I    intgre-    I    a    ||  ffigit  I  irrepS  I    rabilS     I  tempus. 
nie  la-    I  tus  niv6  |  um  ||  mol-  |  li  ful  j  tus  hyi- 1  cintho. 

(2;)  Next  in  excellence  is  the  coesural  pause  in  the  thesis  of  the  third 
foot,  or  in  the  arsis  of  the  fourth.  Occurring  in  other  places,  it 
mars  the  harmony  o£  the  verse. 

Eb 


APPENDIX   11. 


(779.) 


GREEK  NOUNS. 


(Mne-&s,      ae,    ob,    am  (an),      a,    a. 
1st  Decl.  \  Anchis-es,  8B,    se,    en,  e,    e.   Voo.  sometimes  a  and  a. 

(^Pen6l6p-6,  es,    sb,    en,  e,    e. 

(Del-OS,        i,      o,     um,or6n,   e,    o. 
Orph-eiis,  ei,     eo,    eum,<?r6a,  en   eo. 
[or,  N.  e^,  G.  eos,  D.  6i  (ei).  Ace.  6&  poetical.) 
Athos,        6,     6,     6n, or 6,      6s,  6.     (In  Greek,  wf .) 
Poes-is,       is,       >  i,  im,   >  is,  i.      |      es,  eon  (ibus  notfoundj, 

(eos,)  >      (in,)  5 
Nere-is, 
G.  Nereid-is,  \  i,  em,  ?  (Nerei),  e.  |   es,  mn, 


2d  DeclA 


Pericl-es, 


,  ibus,  es.  > 

(as.)  5 

s,   is,  >  i,  em,  >         es,  \  ^ 
i,  5      ea,  5  e,  5 

lDid-6,        us,     6,     6,  6.         |    (also,  6nis,  &c.) 

Ohs.  Neuters  in  a,  gen.  Stis,  have  dat.  plur.  in  atis ;  thus  :  poema,  dat. 
plur.  poemfttis,  not  poematibus. 


(780.)  EXAMPLES  OF  PATRONYMICS 

(or  names  from  a  father  or  ancestor). 
JEneas,       Anchises,        Tyndanis,       Theseus, 
Masc.    ufEneddes,  Anchisiddes,   Tyndarides,  Thesides,*    Atlantldes, 

Atlantiades. 
Fern,     [JEnMsi)     Anchisias,      Tynddris,      ThesSis, 


Atlas  (antis). 


Atlantis, 
AilaTUias. 


(781.)  EXAMPLES  OP  NAMES 

(derived  from  one's  town  or  native  country). 
Masc.  Persa,     Cres,        Tros,        Thrax,         Laco  (Lacon),    PhoBnix. 
Fern.    Persis,    Cressa,     Troas,     Threissa,    Laaena,  Phosnissa. 

Cretis,  Thressa. 

Clusinus         Atheniensis        AbdentSs  [fern.,  AbderiiU). 
{of  Clusium),  {an  Athenian),     {ofAbdera). 
Milesius  Arpinas 

{of  Miletus) .  {of  Arpinum) . 

*  For  ThesHdes.    Hence  ides  oomes  from  nom.  in  eus. 


Komftnus 
(Roman). 


APPENDIX  III. 


(782.)  THE  CALENDAR. 

(1.)  The  Roman  months  had  the  same  number  of  days  as  onrSy  bat 
were  diflFerently  divided. 

1.  The  Kalends  were  the  Is^  day  of  the  month. 

2.  The  Nones  **         5th  or  7th  day  of  the  month. 

3.  The  Ides  **        IZth  or  lUh  day  of  the  month. 

^^*  We  make  in  March,  July^  Octoher^  May^ 

The  Nones  the  seventh^  the  Ides  the  Jifteenth  day. 

In  all  the  other  months  the  5th  and  13th  were  used. 

(2.)  The  names  of  the  months  are  used  as  adjectives  agreeing  witii 
Kalendse,  Nonas,  and  Idas. 


The  1st  of  January, 

The  5th  of  June. 

The  13th  of  September, 


Kalendis  Januariis. 

Nonis  Jnniis. 

Idibus  Septembribns. 


(3.)  (a)  Instead  of  beginning  at  the  1st  of  the  month  and  nmnbering  the 
days  regularly  2d,  3d,  &c.,  as  we  do,  the  Romans  counted  them  backward 
from  the  Kalends,  Nones,  and  Ides.  Thus,  the  2d  of  January  was  called 
the  4th  day  before  the  Nones  of  January,  quarto  (die  ante)  Nonas 
Januarias  ;  the  3d,  tertio  Nonas  ;  the  4th,  pridie  Nonas  ;  the 
5th,  Nonis. 

{b)  From  the  above  cases  it  will  be  seen  that  the  day  with  which  the 
reckoning  commences  is  included  (except  pridie),  i.  e.,  the  2d  day  before 
the  Nones  is  tertio  Nonas ;  the  3d  day  before,  quarto  Nonas,  &c. 

The  13th  of  October, 


The  3d  of  June, 


Tertio  (die  ante)  Idus  Octo- 
bres. 

Tertio  (die  ante)  Nonas  Ju- 
ntas. 


(c)  Special  care  must  be  taken,  in  designating  any  day  between  the 
Ides  of  one  month  and  the  Kalends  of  another,  to  ensure  correctness. 
Thus,  III.  (die  ante)  Kalend.  Januar.  will  be  December  30 ;  but  HI.  KaL 
Maias  =  29th  April,  inasmuch  as  December  has  31  days  and  April  but  30, 
So  in.  Kal.  Martias  =  27th  February. 


328 


APPENDIX    III. CALENDAR. 


(4.)  The  following  table,  exhibiting  the  correspondence  between  the 
Koman  calendar  and  ours,  can  now  be  readily  understood  : 


The  Days 

March,    May,    July,|january,  August,  and  [April,  June,  Septem- 

February    <  has    28, 

of     our 

and  October  (have 

December     (  have 

ber,  and  November 

and  iu  Leap-years 

Months. 

31  days). 

also  31  days). 

(have  30  days). 

29  days). 

1. 

Kalendis. 

Kalendis. 

Kalendis. 

Kalendis. 

2. 

VI.  ^ 

IV.  )ante 
IIL  ^  Nonas. 

IV.  ;ante 

IV.  ?  ante 

3. 

V.     1  ante 

IIL  5  Nonas. 

IIL  5  Nonas. 

4. 

IV.  [Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

Pri^e  Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

5. 

III.  J 

Nonis. 

Nonis. 

Nonis. 

6. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

VIIL^ 

VIIL^ 

VIIL^ 

7. 

Nonis. 

VII. 

VIL 

VII. 

8. 

VIII.  ^ 

VI. 

ante 

VL 

ante 

VL 

ante 

9. 

VII. 

V. 

'Idus. 

V. 

Idus. 

V. 

Idus. 

10. 

VI. 

ante 

IV. 

IV. 

IV: 

i 

11. 

V.     • 

Idus. 

IIL     \ 
Pridi 

III.     J 

IIL    J 

12. 

IV. 

e  Idas. 

PWdie  Idus. 

Pridie  Idus. 

13. 

m.  . 

Idibus. 

Idibus. 

Idibus. 

14. 

Pridie 

J  Idus. 

XIX.     ^ 

XVIIL  ^ 

XVL1 

15. 

Idi 

bus. 

xvm. 

be 

XVIL 

.a 

XV. 

16. 

XVII.  ^ 

ho 

XVIL 

o 

xvi. 

XIV. 

i 

17. 

XVI. 

.& 

XVI. 

XV. 

1 

o 

XIIL 

't, 

18. 
19. 

XV. 
XIV. 

1 

7? 

XV. 

XIV. 

1 

XIV. 
XIIL 

XII. 
XL 

20. 

XIII. 

«s 

XIIL 

1 . 

XIL 

•s^ 

X. 

s 

21. 

XII. 

XIL 

■H 

XL 

IX. 

.rg. 

22. 

XL 

<^3* 

XL 

X. 

VIII. 

^ 

23. 

X. 

•  >£'^ 

X. 

1 

IX. 

ViL 

24. 

IX. 

f^ 

IX. 

VIII. 

1 

VL 

25. 

vin. 

VIII. 

VII. 

-s 

V. 

1 

26. 

VII. 

vn. 

VL 

^ 

IV. 

27. 

VL 

S 

VL 

V. 

<D 

m.  , 

28. 

V. 

V. 

s. 

IV. 

1 

Prid.  Kalendas 

29. 

IV. 

IV. 

III.        J 

Martias. 

30. 

IIL 

III.     , 

Prid.  Kalendas 

31. 

Prid.  Kalendas 

Prid.  Kalendas 

(of  the  follow- 

(of the  follow- 

(of the  follow- 

ing month). 

ing  month). 

ing  month). 



(5.)  The  5lh  day  before  the  Kalends  of  April  (for  instance)  may  be  ex- 
pressed in  three  ways : 

(o^  Die  quinto  ante  Kalendas  Aprildsi 

[b)  Ctuinto  Kalendas  Apfiles. 

(c)  Ante  diem  quintam  Kalendas  Apriles^}  okV  abbfrari- 
ated,  a.  d.  V:  KaL  Apr. 


APPENDIX  IV. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 
(783.)  The  following  abbreviations  of  words  occur  in  Latin  authors  t 

(a)  NAMES. 


A.     Aulas. 

M'.           Manius. 

Sept.      Septimius. 

Ap.  Appius. 

M.            Marcus. 

SeFV.      Servius. 

C.     Caius. 

Mam.       Mamercus. 

Sex.       Sextus. 

CI.    Claudius. 

M.T.C.  Marcus  TuUi- 

Sp.         Spurius. 

Cn.  Cnaeus. 

us  Cicero. 

T.           Titus. 

D.     Decimus. 

N.            Numerius. 

?i-^Tiberiua. 

B.     Decius. 

P.            Publius. 

L.     Lucius. 

CL            duintus. 

TuU.       Tullius. 

{b)                                                 PUBLIC   EXPRESSIONS. 

JEd.           Mdilm. 

Id.        Idus. 

Pr.        PrsBtor. 

Aug.          Augustus. 

Imp.     Imperator. 

Prsef.    Prsefectus. 

^y    }Kalend.. 

Impp.  Imperatores. 

Pont.    Max.     Pontifex 

Non.     Nonas. 

Maximus. 

Cos.            Consul. 

0.  M.  Optimus  Maxi- 

Resp.  Respublica. 

Coss.          Consules. 

mus. 

S.          Senatus. 

D.              Divus. 

P.  C.    Patres        Con- 

S.  C.    Senatus   consul- 

Des.           Designatus. 

scripti. 

tum. 

Eq.  Horn.  Eques     Ro- 

PI.        Plebis. 

S.  P.  a.  R.  Senatus  po- 

manus. 

Pop.      Populus. 

pulusque  Rom. 

r.                Filius. 

p.  it.    Populus  Rom. 

Tr.       Tribunus. 

[c)                                             OTHER  ABBREVIATIONS. 

A.                Anno. 

s.          s 

alutem. 

A.  C.           Anno  currente. 

S.P.  D.    S 

alntem  dicit  plurimam. 

A.  pr.          Anno  praeterito. 

c.              c 

aput. 

A.  M.           Anno  mundi. 

cf.             c 

Dnfer. 

A.  Chr.        Anno  Christi. 

e.g.          e 

xempli  gratia. 

A.  D.           Anno  Domini. 

i.  e.           i( 

lest. 

A.  U.  C.      Anno  urbis  conditae. 

1.  c.            Ic 

)co  citato. 

D.  D.           Dono  dedit. 

pag.  m.     p 

agina  mea. 

D.  D.  D.      Dono  dedit  dicavit. 

q.  d.           q 

nasi  dicat. 

D.  D.  C.  q.  Dedit  dicavit  consecra- 

q.  1.            q 

uantum  libet. 

vitque. 

q.  s.            q 

uantum  sufficit. 

D.  M.           Diis  Manibus. 

scil.            s 

cilicet. 

L.  S.            Loco  sigilli. 

seq.            s 

equens. 

M.  S.            Manuscriptus. 

V.                      V 

ersus. 

P.  S.             Postscriptum. 

V.  g.                 V 

erbi  gratia. 

a.D.B.V.  auod  Deus  bene  vertat. 

viz.             V 

idelicet. 

S.  V.  B.  E.  E.  V.  Si  vales  bene  est 

vid.            v 

ide. 

ego  valeo. 

E 

e2 

WORD-BUILDING 

▲HD 

READING  LESSONS. 


i)  v.. 


J    01 


WORD-BUILDING. 


(784.)  1.  The  generic  meaning  of  a  word  is  contained  in  its  root ;  the 
specific  meaning  is  generally  given  by  its  ertding.  Thus,  in  all  the  words 
a  m  -  o  (Z  love),  a  m  -  o  r  {love),  a  m  -  a  t  o  r  (a  lover),  a  m  -  x  c  u  s  {friend),  we 
find  the  same  generic  idea  {love)  expressed  by  the  root  am ;  while  the 
specific  meanings,  I  love  (verb),  love  (noun),  lover  {uoxmj,  friend  (adjective 
noun),  are  given  by  the  endings  o,  or,  a t o r,  I c u  s,  respectively. 

2.  The  meanings  of  words  are  farther  modified  by  certain  prefixes ; 
f..  g.,  ire  {fo  go),  amb-irc  [to  go  round). 

3.  Again,  words  may  be  compounded  with  each  other,  and  form  new 
words  ;  e.  g.,  with  agr-  (the  stem  of  di^^r, field),  and  col-  (the  stem  of 
co\&re,to  till),  we  form  agricol-a,  a  tiller  of  the  field  =  a  farmer. 

Thus  there  are  three  modes  of  forming  words :  by  suffixes,  prefixes,  and 
composition.    We  treat  them  in  order. 

(l.)    WORD-BUILDING    BY    SUFFIXES* 

(A.)  Nouns. 
(785.)  First  Declension. 

1.  The  ending  -a,  sufllxed  to  verb-stems,  expresses  an  agent  or 
doer. 

scrib-a,        writer,        from        scrib-Sre,        to  write. 
p  e r f u g - a»    deserter,     from        perfug-6re,    to  desert. 

2.  -  i  a,  -  i  t  i  a,  with  adjective-stems,  a  disposition  or  condition. 

ignav-ia»  cowardice^    from    ignav-us,        cowardly. 

prudent-ia,    prudence,     from    ^ vvl A en{t)-B,  prudent. 
trist-itia,        sadness,        fi*om    t  r  i  s  t  -  i  s,  sad. 

victor-ia,         victory,        from    vict-or,  victorious 

3.  -  u  r  a,  with  supine-stems,  the  action  or  condition  of  the  verb, 
p  i  c  t  -  u  r  a,  painting ;      pinggre  (p  i  c  t  -),  to  paint. 
prsefect-ura,  prefectship ;  prsBficere  (p  r  ae  f  e  c  t  -),  to  place  over, 

(786.)  Second  Declension. 
1.  -us,  - i u s,  with  verb-stems,  form  nouns  denoting  the  ageni  or  the 
action  of  the  verb. 


serv-us, 

slave ; 

serv-ire> 

to  serve. 

fluv-ius, 

river; 

flu(v)-6re. 

to  flow. 

coqu-us, 

cook ; 

c  o  q  u  -  S  r  e, 

to  cook. 

lud-us, 

sport  i 

lud-ire, 

to  play. 

334  WORD-BUILDING. 

2.  -um,  -ium,  with  verb-stems,  gives  a  result  of  the  action  of  the 
verb. 

JT2g-um,  J'oAe,  jung-6re,         to  join. 

V  a  d  -  u  m,  ford ;  v  a  d  -  6  r  e,  to  go. 

incend-ium,  Jire ;  i n c e n d - g r e,   ^o  bum. 

3.  -ium,  vrith  noun-stems,  (a)  an  office,  or  {b)  an  assemblage  of  men 
exercising  an  office  or  function. 

(a)    sacerdot-ium,  office  o/*sacerdos. 

minister-ium,  office  q/'minister. 

{b)    c  o  1 1  e  g  -  i  u  m,  assemblage  of  coll  eg  bs. 

conviv-ium,  assemblage  ofconvivae. 

4.  -mentum,  with  verb-stems,  the  means  of  doing  what  the  verb 
expresses. 

teg-u-mentum,        covering ;        t e g - e r e,        to  cover. 
adju-mentum,  aid ;  a  d  j  u  v  -  a  r  e,  ^o  assist. 

5.  -ulum,  -bulum,  -culum,  with  verb-stems,  m^ans  or  instru- 
ment. 

j  a  0  -  u  1  u  m,  javelin ;  j  a  c  -  6  r  e,      to  hurl. 

venab-ulum,    hunting-spear ;    v  e  n  -  a  r  i,      to  hunt. 

vehi-culum,      carriage ;  v e h - 6 r e,     to  carry. 

Rem.  culum  also  sometimes — the  place  where ;  e.  ^.,  c  oe  n  a  -  c  u  1  u  m, 

cubi-culum. 

6.  -cru  m,  -strum,  with  verb-stems,  j^/ace  or  thing  prepared  for  any 
purpose. 

lava-crum,  bath  ;  1  a  v  -  ft  r  e,  to  wash. 

claus-trum,         lock;  claud-6re,      to  shut. 

(787.)  Diminutives  of  First  and  Second  Declensions.  \ 

1  u  s,  - 1  a,  -Ium,  with  noun-stems,  form  diminutive  nouns,  of  mascn- 
line,  feminine,  and  neuter  genders. 

(a)  Connecting  vowels  i,  o,  u,  the  latter  sometimes  with  c 

fili-o-lus,  fili-o-la,  little  son,  daughter— {^ms)  ;  frater- 
culus  (frater) ;  opus -culum  (opus). 
{b)  Sometimes  1  is  doubled:    lap-illus   (lapis);   codic-illug 
(codex,  codicis) ;  s  a c  -  e  1 1  u m  (sacrum). 

(788.)  Third  Declension. 

1.  -tas,  -tus  (with  or  without  i  as  connecting  vowel),  form,  with  ad- 
jective-stems, abstract  nouns  denoting  quality,  &c. 

b  o  n  -i  - 1  a  s,  goodness ;  b  o  n  -  u  s,  good. 

hones -tas,  honour;  honest-us,      honmirable. 

fort-i-tudo,  bravery;  fort-is,  brave. 


WORD-BUILDING.  335 

S.  [a)  -or,  with  verb-stems,  the  action  or  condition  of  the  verb, 
pav-or,       fear;  pav-ere,        to  fear, 

am-or,  love;  am-are,  to  love, 

(b)  -or,  with  supine-stems,  the  agent  or  doer. 

d  o  c  t  -  o r,  teacher ;         doc-ere  (d  o  c  t  -),  to  teach, 

mo  nit -or,        adviser;        mon-ere  (monit-),        to  advise, 

3.  -io,  with  supine-stems,  the  action  of  the  verb,  especially  tiie  doing 
of  it. 

act-io,  action;  ag-ere  (act-),  to  act,  do, 

c  a  u  t  -  i  o,        caution ;  cav-ere  (c  a  u  t  -),        to  take  care, 

4.  -tudo,  with  adjective-stems,  the  abstract  quality. 

fort-i-tudo,  bravery;  fort-is,  brave* 

(789.)  Fourth  Declension, 
Most  nouns  of  the  4th  declension  are  abstracts  formed  from  verb- 
stems  or  supine-stems. 

US -us,  use;  ufi  (us-),  to  use, 

mot -us,  motion;  m6v-ere  (m6t-),        to  move, 

(790.)  Fifth  Declension, 

1.  -es,  -ies,  -ities,  with  verb  or  adjective-stems,  a  property,  oper* 
ation,  quality,  &c. 

fid-es  (fid-€re) ;  ser-ies  (ser-6re) ;  fac-ies  (fac-fire) ;  dur- 
ities  (dur-us) ;  mund-ities(mund-us). 

2.  [Those  in  -ities    coexist  with  others  in  -itia  (784,  2);   e,  g., 
munditia,  duritia,  &c.] 

(B.)  Adjectives. 
(791.)  First  Class,  us,  a,  um. 

1.  -us,  quality  in  general  (coexisting  with  verb  and  noun  stems). 

alb-US,  white;  alb-are,  iEilb-umen. 

^     curv-us,  curved;  curv-are,  curv-amen. 

dur-us,  hard;  dur-are,  dur-ities. 

viv-us,  alive;  viv-6re,  vit-a. 

2.  -tdus   and  uus,  chiefly  with   stems  of  intransitive  verbs,  the 
quality  of  the  verb,  without  addition. 

turg-idus,        swelling;  turg-ere,        to  swell. 

cal-idus,  warm;  cal-6re,  to  be  warm, 

noc-uus,  hurtful;  noc-ere,  to  hurt. 

3.  -b  u  n  d  u  s,  with  verb-stems,  force  of  present  participle,  intensified. 

hflBsita-bundus,  full  of  hesitation ;       hacsit-are,  to  hesitate, 
lacryma-bundus,  weejnng profusely ;  lacrym-are,  toweep. 


336  WORD-BUILDING. 

4.  -c  u  n  d  u  s,  same  as  bundus,  generally  with  the  additional  idea  of 
permariency. 

ira-cnndus,      passionate;        ira-sc-i,  to  be  angry, 

vere-cundus,  bashful;  vere-ri,  tofear. 

5k  -i  c  u  s,  with  noun-stems,  belonging  or  relating  to  a  thing. 

class -icus,    belonging  to  a  fieet ;        class -is,   fleet. 

civ-icus,         civic;  civ- is,         citizen* 

6.  -e  n  s,  -a  c  e  u  s,  -i  c  i  u  s,  with  noun-stems,  material  or  origin. 

ferr-eus,  of  iron;  ferr-um,        iron. 

chart-aceus,  of  paper;  chart -a,         paper. 

7.  -i  n  u  s,  with  noun-stems,  similarity,  quality,  or  material. 

asin-inus,  asinine,  like  an  ass ;        a s i n - u s,  an  ass. 

m  a  r  -  i  n  u  s,  Tnarine ;  m  a  r  -  e,  the  sea. 

crystall-inus,       crystalline;         crystall-um,  crystal, 

8.  -a  n  u  s,  with  names  of  towns  ending  in  a  or  oe,  a  native  of  such 
place. 

Rom-anus,        a  Roman ;  Roma,        Rome. 

9.  -OS us,  -lentus,  with  noun-stems,  fulness,  abundan,ce  (like  the 
English  -ous). 

fam-osus,  famous;  fam-a,       fame. 

vino-lentus,      drunken;  vin-um,     wine. 

(792.)  Second  Class,  is,  is,  e. 

1.  -is,  quality  in  general  (coexisting  commonly  with  noun  and  verb 
forms). 

lev- is,        light;  lev-ftre,  lev- it  as. 

2.  -ilis,  -hi lis,  with  verb-stems,  the  quality  of  the  verb,  or  the 
capacity  of  it,  in  two  senses,  (a)  active  and  (Z»)  passive. 

[a)  t  e  r  r  i  -  b  i  1  i  s,    exciting  terror ;        t  e  r  r  -  6  r  e,    to  terrify. 
(6)  d6c-ilis,  docile;  doc-ere,      to  Uach. 

a  m  a  b  -  i  1  i  s,      amiable ;  a  m  -  a  r  e,       to  love. 

3.  -ilis  (i  long),  with  noun-stems,  belonging  or  relating  to  a  thing. 

ci  V  - 1 1  i s,    belonging  to  a  citizen,  civil ;        c  i  v - i  s,    citizen. 
\\ost-i\iB,  hostile;  ho s -tis,  en^ny. 

[Observe  that  il  i  s,  with  verb-stems,  is  short ;  with  noun-stems,  long,^ 

4.  -alis,  -aris,  with  noun-stems,  of  or  belonging  to. 

conviv-alis,        convivial ;  conviv-a. 

cap  it -alis,  capital;  caput,  head, 

consul-aris,        consular;  consul. 

9.  -en  sis,  with  names  of  towns — a  native  of  such  town. 
Cann-ensis,        an  inhabitant  of  C&nnss. 
Arimin-entis,    an  inhabitant  of  At iminnm. 


WORD-BUILDING.  337 

(793.)   Third  Class,  one  ending-. 

-ax,  with  verb-stems,  the  tendency  of  the  verb,  generally  in  a  bad 
sense. 

pugn-ax,       pugnacious;  pngn^lre,        tojlgkt, 

rap-ax,  rapacious;  rap-6re,       to  seize, 

(C.)  Verbs. 
(794.)  First  Conjugation. 

1.  -are,  generally  a  transitive  ending,  with  noun-stems. 

numer-are,        to  count;  numer-us,  number. 

nomin-are,         to  Tiame ;  nomen  (nomin-is),      name. 

2.  Frequentative  verbs,  expressing  a  repetition  or  increase  of  the 
action  of  the  original  verb,  are  formed  by  the  endings  -are  and 
-it are  ;  thus  : 

(a)  -are,  added  to  supine-stems. 

c  u  r  s  -  a  r  e,       to  run  to  and  fro ;  currfire  (c  u  r  s  -  u  m),        to  rU7i, 
dormlt-are,  to  be  sleepy ;  dormire  (dormit-um),  to  sleep, 

{b)  -it are,  added  to  verb-stems, 
rog-itare,        to  ask  of  ten ;  rog-are,        to  ask, 

vol-itare,         to  fly  to  and  fro ;  vol-are»       to  fly, 

3.  -ari,  deponent-ending,  with  noim-stems,  is  much  used  for  express- 
ing "  to  be  that  which,  or  of  the  character  that"  the  noun  indicates. 

.    {  to  attend  as  com-  \  t         -^  -  \ 

comit-ari,  <  .  > comes  {com.it-iB),  companion, 

\      pamon;  > 

domin-ari,     to  rule  as  master ;  dLomin-ua,  m,aster, 

(795.)  Second  Conjugation. 

-ere,  frequently  an  intransitive  ending,  with  noun  and  adjective  stems, 
alb-ere,        tobe  white;  alb-us,  white.        ^ 

luc-ere,        to  shine;  lux  (luc-is),   light. 

(796.)   Third  Conjugation. 
Inchoative  verbs  express  the  beginning  or  increase  of  the  action  of 
the  verb  from  which  they  are  derived.    They  are  formed  by  adding 
sc  to  the  verb-stem,  with  the  connecting-vowels  a,  e,  or  i.    Most  of 
them  are  formed  on  stems  of  verbs  of  second  conjugation. 

pall  esc- 6  re,        to  grow  pale ;  pall- ere,        to  be  pale. 

labasc-6re,         to  totter ;  1  ab - ar e,  to  waver. 

(797.)  Fourth  Conjugation, 
Desiderative  verbs  express  a  desire  of  that  which  is  impHed  in  the 
primitive,  and  are  formed  by  adding  -urire  to  supme-stems. 
e  s  -  u  r i  r  e,        to  want  to  eat ;  edSre  (e  s  -  u  m),      to  eat, 

F  f 


388  WORD-BUILDING. 

(ll.)    WORD-BUILDING  BT   PREFIXES. 

(798.)  Under  this  head  we  place  only  the  inseparable  prepositions  (229), 
viz.,  amb-,  dis-  (di-),  re-,  se. 

1.  ArrLh-  =  about,   around,   on  both  sides;  e.g.,   amb -ire,   to  go 
round  (amb+ire). 

1^^ Before  j9  the  b  is  dropped;  e.g.,  am-plector:  before  c-sounds 
amb  is  changed  into  an  ;  e.  g.,  an-ceps,  an-quiro. 

2.  Dis  (di)  z=asunder;  eg-., dis-jung6re,  to  disjoin  (dis+jung6re). 
I^p"  Di  is  used  before  d,  g,l,m  ;  e.  ^.,  digerere,  &c.     Before/ the 

s  is  assimilated;  e.g.,  differre  (dis+ferre). 

3.  II  e  =  back,  again,  away,  un- ;  e.  ^.,  r  6  p  e  11  e  r  e,  drive-back  {re-\- 
pellere) ;  r  e  f  i  c  e  r  e,  refit  (r6+facere). 

1!^^  Before  vowels,  d  is  inserted ;  e.  g-.,  re d-ir  e  (re+ire). 
[Re  long  occurs  only  in  r  e  f  e  r  t.] 

4.  S  e  =  aside ;  e.  g.,  s  e  d  u  c  6  r  e,  lead  astray,  seduce  (se+dticere) ; 
sepon6re,  lay  aside  (se-f-ponere). 

(ill.)    WORD-BUILDING    BT    COMPOSITION. 

I.  Prepositions  in  Composition  with  other  Words. 
(799.)  1^^  Most  prepositions  are  used  to  form  compound  words,  and 
generally  modify  their  meaning  in  a  way  easily  understood ;  e.  g.,  stare, 
to  stand;  praestare,  to  stand  before,  to  excel.    We  notice  here  only 
those  which  present  some  peculiarities. 

1.  a,  ab,  abs  —  away,  from,  [a)  a  is  used  before  m  and  v;  e.  g., 
a-mittere,  to  send  away,  lose;  a-vertere,  turn  away,  [b)  au  is 
used  before  f err e  andfug6re:  auferre,  aufug6re.  [c)  as,\>e- 
fore  p  or  sp  :  asperto,  aspernor. 

2.  ad  =  to.  {a)  Assimilated  before  consonants,  except  d,  j,  v,  m  ;  e.  g., 
arripSre,  assurgfire,  adduc6re,  &c.  [b)  d  dropped  before 
gn;  e.g.,  agnoscgre,  agnatus. 

3.  con  (a  variation  of  cum)  =  with,  [a)  co  before  h  and  vowels  ;  e.  g., 
co-ortus,  co-hibere.  [b)  com  before  b,  p :*  com-burSre, 
com-pellSre.  (c)  Assimilated  before  ^  w,  r ;  col-ligSre,  com- 
movere,  cor-ripSre. 

A.  e  or  e:s.  =  out  of.    {a)  Assimilated  before  /;  e.g.,  effero  (ex+ 

fero).     (b)  e  before  liquids  and  b,  d,  g,  v. 
5.  in,  with  yerhs  =  inio,  on,  in,  against ;  with,  adjectives  has  privative 
force ;  e.  g-.,  doctus,  learned;  indoctus,  unlearned. 

(a)  Assimilated  before  I,  r,   e.  g.,  illatum  (in-|-latum) ;  irrum 
p6re  (in+rumpere). 
1.  — ■  '  J 

*  And  sometimes  before  vowels :  comedere. 


WORD-BUILDING.  339 

(b)  Changed  into  im  before  b,  p ;  e.g.,  imbibfire   (in+bibere); 
imponere  (iu+ponere). 

6.  ob  =  against;  e.  g.,  obtrude  re  (ob -|- trudere),  thrust  against. 
|c^  Assimilated  before  c^  ft  p ;  e.  g.^  oc-cidere  (ob+cadere) ; 
of-ferre,  op-ponere. 

7.  ^r  o==  forth,  fcmoard  ;  e.g.,  projic6re  (pro+jacere),  cast  forth. 
[f^^  Before  vowels,  d  is  inserted ;  e.  g.,  prod-ess e  (pro+esse). 

8.  p  r  ae  =  before ;  e.  g.,  p  r  ae  c  e  d  e  r  e  (prae+cedere),  to  go  before,  to 
surpass. 

9.  8  Tih  =^  under,  from  under ;  e.  g.,  subducSre,  to  draw  from  under. 

[a]  Generally  assimilated ;  e.g.,  sum-mov6re,  sup-ponere,  &c. 

[b)  Sometimes  sus-;  e.  g.,  sus-cipere,  sus-tinere,  &c. 

10.  trans  =  across,  over;  e.  g.,  trans  due  ere,  to  lead  across. 
^^  Tra,  instead  of  trans,  occurs  in  tradere,  traducere,  tra- 
jic6re. 

(800.)  n.  Adverbs  in  Composition  with  other  Words. 

1.  ne,  ve,  have  a  privative  force;  e.  g.,  nefas,  wicked  (ne+fas) ; 
vesanus,  insane  (ve+sanus). 

2.  beng,  well;  male,  ill;  satis,  enmigh;  e.  g.,  beneficium,  a 
good  deed;  maleficium,  an  evil  deed;  satisfacSre,  to  satisfy 
(=  to  do  enough). 

3.  bis  (and  other  numerals),  twice  {thrice),  &c:  bicorpor,  two-bod' 
zed  (bis+corp-us). 

(801.)  III.  Nouns  and  Adjectives  in  Composition  with  other  Words. 
^^  When  a  noun  or  adjective  is  compounded  with  another  word, 
the  connecting  vowel  is  always  short  i. 

agri-cola  (agr-+col-) ,        a  husbandman, 
a  r  t  i  -  f  e  X     (art-+fac-),        a7i  artificer, 

(802.)  rv.  Verbs  in  Cotnposition  with  other  Words. 

None  occur,  except  in  composition  with  facere  ;  «. g'.,  calefacere 
(calere+facere),  to  make  hot;  patefacere  (patere+facere),  to 


[  ^^  Observe  that  the  vowel  a  in  facere  remains  unchanged.] 
(803.)  V.  Common  Vowel-changes  in  Composition. 

1.  aintoi;  e.g.,  arripere  (ad  +  rapere),  conficere  (con-f-fa- 
cere),  constituere  (con+statuere),  &c. 

2.  a  into  e  (more  rarely);  e.  g.,  ascendere  (ad+scandere). 

3.  €  into  i  (not  always);  e.  g.,  collig6re  (con+legere),  absti- 
nere  (abs  +  tenere),  &c. 

4.  €B  into  i;    e.  g.,  occidSre   (ob+ctedere),  rgquirere    (rfi-f- 
quoerere). 


READING  LESSONS. 


Gallia  est  omnis  divisa^  in  partes  tres. — Belgae  unam  inco- 
lunt  ;2  Aquitani  alteram ;  Celtae  tertiam. — Hi,  ipsorum*  lingua^ 
Celtae'*  appellantur  ;5  nostra*  lingua,  Galli.'* 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres  ;  quarum  unam  inco- 
lunt  Belgae,  alteram  Aquitani,  tertiam  qui^  ipsorum  lingua 
Celtae,  nostra  Galli  appellantur. 


Hi  omnes  inter  se  difFeruntJ — Lingua,  institutis,^  legibus  dif- 
ferunt. — Garumna^  flumen  Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  dividit. — Ma- 
trona  flumen  Gallos  a  Belgis  dividit. — Horum  omnium^o  fortis- 
simi  sunt  Belgae. — Ab  humanitate^^  Provinciae  longe  absunt.^^ — - 
A  cultu^^  Provinciae  longissime  absunt. — Minime  ad  eos  merca- 
tores^^  commeant. —  Quaedam^^  animos  effeminant.^^ — Quaedara 
ad  efFeminandos  animos  pertinent.^^ 

Hi  omnes  lingua,  institutis,  legibus,  inter  se  diiFerunt. — Gallos 
ab  Aquitanis  Garumna  flumen,  a  Belgis  Matrona  e  t  Sequana 
dividit. — Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea 
quod  a  cultu  at  que  humanitate  Provinciae  longissime  ab- 
sunt, minime  q  u  e  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant,  a  t  q  u  e 
ea,  q  u  ae  ad  effeminandos  animos  pertinent,^*  i  m  p  o  r  t  a  n  t.^® 


Proximi  sunt  Germanis.^o — Germani  trans  Rhenum  incolunt. 
— Belgae  cum  Germanis  continenter^i  bellum  gerunt. 

1  435,  c— 2  in+colere.— 3  716.— *  694,  2,  R.—^  ad-j-pellai-e  (obsolete), 
799,  2,  a.— 6  167,  d,  4.-7  798,  l^*.— »  786,  2,  institaere  =  in-f-statuere, 
803,  1.— 9  225,  a.— 10  697,  a.— ^i  788,  1  (humanus),  hum.BmtdiS  =  refinement, 
— 12  ab-j-sum,  799,  1. — ^3  cultas  (civilization),  from  colere  (cult-),  789. — 
i^mercator,  from mercari  (merest-),  788, 2,  h, — ^^  Somethings. — ig eifeminare 
(to  make  effeminate),  ex-j-feminare,  799,  4,  a :  feminare,  from  femina  (wom- 
an), 794,  1.. — 17  tend  to  make  minds  effeminate,  739. — ^^  per-|-tenere,  803 » 
3. — 19  in-f-portare,  799,  5,  ^>.— 20  704,  4.-21  from  continens  (con-f  tenere), 
215,  2,  b. 

*  Ipsorum  and  nostra  precede  lingua,  instead  of  following  it,  because  op. 
posed  to  each  other,  and  therefore  emphatic. 


READING    LESSONS.  341 

Proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  qui 
)  u  s  c  u  m  22  continenter  bellum  genint. 


II. 

Helve tii  quoque^  reliquos^  Gallos  virtute^  praecedunt.'* — Fere 
quotidianis  praeliis  cum  Germanis  contendunt. — Aut^  suis  finibus 
Germanos  prohibent,^  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt. 

Qua^  de  causa^  Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtute 
prgecedunt,  q  u  o  d  ^  fere  quotidianis  praeliis  cum  Germanis  con- 
tendunt, quum  aut  suis  finibus  eos  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum 
finibus  beUum  gerunt. 

GaUi  unam  partem  obtinent.^o — Unam  partem  Gallos^^  obti- 
nere  dictum  est.^^ — Ea  pars  initium  capit  a  flumine  Rhodano. 
— Continetur  Garumna  flumine/^  Oceano,^^  finibus^^  Belgarum. 
— Attingit^^  ab  Sequanis  flumen  Rhenum. — Vergit  ad  Septen- 
triones. — Belgse  ab  extremis^^  Galliae  finibus  oriuntur. — Perti- 
nent^6  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Rheni.  —  Spectant*  in 
Septentriones  et  orientem^^  solem. 

Eorum  una  pars,  q  u  a  m  ^^  Gallos  obtinere  dictum  est,  ini- 
tium capit  a  flumine  Rhodano ;  continetur^^  Garumna  flumine, 
Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum;  attingit  etiam  ab^^  Sequanis  et 
Helvetiis  flumen  Rhenum;  vergit  ad  Septentriones.  —  Belgae 
ab  extremis  Galliae  finibus  oriuntur ;  pertinent  ad  inferiorem 
partem  fluminis  Rheni;  spectant  in  Septentriones  et  orientem 
solem. 


Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes  pertinet. 
— Una  pars  Oceani  est  ad^o  Hispaniam.  —  Aquitania  ad  earn 

22  125,  IL,  h. 

1  duo  que  never  begins  a  sentence. — 2  from  relinquere  (reliqu-),  791, 1. 
—3  718,  in  'odLmir.—A  799,  8.-5  519,  R.  4.-6  721.— 7  89,  II.— 8  dua  de  cau- 
sa =/<3r  wMck  reason. — 9  because. — ^o  ob-j-tenere,  803,  3. — 11  751. — 12  751^ 
R,  2.-13  716.— H  ad-j-tangere,  799,  2,  a,  803,  1.— is  78,  IL,  b.—^^  Pertinent 
==  they  extend,  per-|-tenere.— 17  438,  a.— 1«  759.— 19  is  bounded.— '^^  on  the 
side  of,  or  near. 

*  Spectant  in  Septentriones,  &e. :  they  look  into  the  north  and  the  rising  sunf 
i.  e^  they  lie  in  a  N.E.  direction. 

F  F  2 


342  REAPING   LESSONS. 

partem  Oeeani,  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam,  pertinet.—  Spectat  inter 
occasum^i  solis  et  Septenti'iones, 

Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes,  e  t  e  a  m 
partem  Oeeani,  q  u  ae  est  ad  Hispaniam,  pertinet ;  spectat*  in- 
ter occasmn  solis  et  Septentriones. 


III. 

Orgetorix  nobilis  fuit,  —  Apud  Helvetios  nobilissimus  fuit 
Orgetorix. — Apud  Helvetios  longe  ditissimus^  fuit  Orgetorix. — 
Is  regni  cupiditate^  inductus  conjurationem^  nobilitatis*  fecit. — 
Is  civitati^  persuadet,  ut  de  finibus  suis  exeant.^ — De  finibus  suis 
exeunt. — Perfacile  erattotius  Galliae  imperio''  potiri. — Perfacile 
esse^  (dixit),  quum  virtute  omnibus  praestarent,^  totius  Galliae 
imperio  potiri. 

Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  e  t  ditissimus  fuit  Orget- 
orix.—  Is,  Marco  Messala  et  Marco  Pisone  consul- 
ibus,^°  regni  cupiditate  inductus,  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit; 
et  civitati  persuasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis 
exirent:"  perfacile  esse  (dixit),  quum  virtute  omnibus  praes- 
tarent,  totius  Galliae  imperio  potiri. 


Id  facile  eis  persuadet.^^ — Id  hoc  facilius  eis  persuasit Un- 

dique  natura  loci^^  Helvetii  continentur. — Una  ex  parte  conti- 
nentur  flumine  Rheno  latissimo  atque  altissimo. — Altera  ex 
parte  continentur  monte  Jura  altissimo;  tertia  ex  parte  lacu 
Lemanno  et  flumine  Rhodano. — Flumen  Rhenus  agrum  Hel- 
vetium  a  Gerraanis  dividit. — ^Mons  Jura  est  inter  Sequanos  et 
Helvetios.^-Flumen  Rhodanus  provinciam  nostram  ab  Helve- 
tiis  dividit. 

21  789,  from  occidere,  ob-hcadere. 

1  371,  R.  1.— 2  jfrom  cupid-us,  by  788, 1.-^  788,  3,  con4-jurare.— 4  788, 1. 
— ^  704,  2 :  he  persuades  the  state ;  i.  e.,  the  citizens, — 6  ut  exeant  =  to  go 
out  of :  subj.  pres.,  754  (ex-fire). — "^  abl.,  718. — ^  The  sente^ce  perfacile 
esse,  Sec,  is  in  orat.  obliqua;  769,  a,  applies.— ^  799,  8. — lo  458,  b. — ^i  Why 
Is  exirent  in  subj.  imperf.  ?  748. — 12  suadere,  to  recommend ;  persuadere, 
recommend  thoroughly,  i.  e.,  persuade. — ^^  ly  fJiQ  nature  of  the  country. 

*  It  looks  between  the  setting'  of  the  sun  and  the  north ;  {.^yina,  N.  W.  direction. 


READING    LESSONS.  343 

Id  hoc  fecilius  eis  persuadet,  quod  undique  loci  natura  Hel- 
vetii  continentur ;  una  ex  parte,  flumine  Rheno  latissimo  atque 
altissimo,  q  u  i  agi'um  Helvetium  a  Germanis  dividit ;  altera  ex 
parte,  monte  Jura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helve- 
tios;  tertia,  lacu  Lemanno  et  flunaine  Rhodano,  qui  provin- 
ciam  nosti-am  ab  Helvetiis  dividit. 


Minus  late  vagantur. — His  rebus  fit,^'*  ut  minus  late  vagen- 
tur.i^ — ^Bellum  inferunt.^^ — Bellum  inferre^''  possunt. — Minus 
facile  bellum  finitimis^^  inferre  possunti — His  rebus  fit,  ut  minus 
facile  bellum  finitimis  inferre  possent. — Magno  dolore  afficie- 
bantur.^^ — Bellandi^o  erant  cupidi.^i 

His  rebus  fiebat,  ut  et  minus  late  vagarentur,  et  minus 
facile  finitimis  bellum  inferre  possint.  —  Qua  de  causa,  homines 
bellandi  cupidi  magno  dolore  afficiebantur. 


IV, 

Pro^  multitudine'  hominum,  angustoa  habebant  fines. — Pro 
gloria^  belli  atque  fortitudinis,^  an  gustos  habebant  fines. — An- 
gustos  se*  fines  habere  arbitrabantur.^ — Hi  (i.  g.,  fines)  millia 
passuum  ducenta  (CC.)  patebant.^ — Hi  in  longitudinem^  millia^ 
passuum  ducenta  et  quadraginta  (XL.)  patebant. 

Pro  multitudine  autem^  hominum,  et  pro  gloria  belli 
atque  fortitudinis,  angustos  se  fines  habere  arbitrabantur,  qui 
in  longitudinem  millia  passuum  CCXL .,  in  latitudinem 
centum  et  octoginta  (CLXXX.)  patebant. 

Ducti  sunt. — Adducti^  sunt. — Moti  sunt. — Permoti^o'  sunt. — 
Auctoritate^^  Orgetorigis  adducti  et  permoti  sunt. — Quaedam  ad 
proficiscendum^^  pertinent. — Constituerunt^^  ^a  comparare.^^* — 
Constituerunt  jumenta  et  carros  emere.^^ — Constituerunt  se- 

1*  By  these  circumstances  it  is  brought  about. — -^^  754,  2. — ^^  in+ferre. — 
17  731.— 18  704,  3.— 19  ad+facere,  799,  2;  803,  1.— 20  736.— 21  cupere,  791,  2. 

1  For,  or,  in  view  of. — "^  mult-us,  788,  4. — 3  reputation  for  war  and  cour- 
cf,ge.—^  471.— «  from  arbit-er,  by  794,  3.-6  extended.—''  712.— 8  522,  b.— 
9  Ducti  swat  =  they  were  led:  adducti  sunt=^^y  were  led  to,  i.  e.,  they 
were  induced. — ^o  Moti  sunt  =  they  were  moved  :  permoti  sunt  =  they  were 
thoroughly  moved,  1.  e.,  prevailed  upon.—^^  788,  1.— ^^  487 .~18  con+statu- 
ere,  803,  1.— ^^  con+parare,  799,  3,  b.—^^  731. 


344  READING    LESSONS. 

mentes  magnas  facere,^^  ut  in  itinere  copia  frumenti  suppet- 
eret.^'' — Cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam^®  con- 
firmant. 

His  rebus  adducti,  et  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  permoti, 
constituerunt,  ea,  q  u  se  ^^  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent,  com- 
parare ;  j umentonim  et  carrdrum  quam  maximum  nu- 
merum^o  coemere  ;2i  sementes  quam  maximas^^  facere,  ut 
in  itinere  copia  frumenti  suppeteret ;  cum  proximis  civitatibus 
pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare. 


Biennium  Helvetiis^^  satis  erat. — Biennium  sibi^  Helvetii  satis 
esse  duxerunt.^'^ — Ad  eas  res  conficiendas^^  biennium  satis  erat. 
— Profectionem^e  lege  confirmant.^^ — ^In  tertium  annum  profec- 
tionem  lege  confirmant.  —  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas^  Orgetorix 
deligjtur.28 — Is  sibi  legationem^^  suscepit.^^ — In  eo  itinere  per- 
suadet  Castico. — Casticus  C ataman taledis  erat  filius,  Sequanus. 
— Pater  Castici  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos^o  obtinuerat. 
— Pater  Castici  a  senatu  populi  Romani  amicus  appellatus  erat. 
— Orgetorix  Castico  persuadet,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occu- 
paret.^^ 

Ad  eas  res  conficiendas  biennium  sibi  satis  esse  duxerunt; 
in  tertium  annum  profectionem  lege  confirmant.  Ad  eas  res 
conficiendas  Orgetorix  deligitur.  Is  sibi  legationem  ad  civi- 
tate s  suscepit.  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Castico,  Catamentale- 
dis  filio,  Sequano,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos 
annos  obtinuerat,  eta  senatu  populi  Komani  amicus  appellatus 
erat,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occuparet,  q  u  o  d  ^^  pater  ant© 
habuerat* 


V. 

Item    Dumnorigi  persuadet.  —  Dumnorix  erat  iEduus. — 
Dumnorix  erat  frater  Divitiaci.  —  Dumnorix  principatum^  in 

IS  to  make  great  sowings,  i.  e.,  to  sow  much  land. — ^^  Sub+petere,  799, 
9,  a,  neuter;  suppeteret =m§^^^  be  in  store :  subjunc.  by  754, 1. — is  735^  2. 
— 19  759,  Rem. — 20  ^g  great  a  number  as  possible. — 21  con+emere,  to  buy 
together,  to  buy  up,  799,  3. — 22  ^5  great  sovnngs  as  possible. — ^^3  704.— 
24  reckoned.— ^^  498,  ^Z.—^e  738,  3.--27  They  fix  the  departure  by  a  law.- 
J»  de+legere,  803,  3.— 2f9  799,  9,  b.—^  712.— 3i  754.-32  759. 

1  chief  power,  from  priuceps. 


READING   LESSONS.  345 

civitate  obtinebat.  —  Dumnorix  plebi^  acceptus^  erat.  —  Dum- 
norigi,  ut  idem  conaretur  persuadet,*  eique  filiam  suam  in 
matrimonium  dat. 

Itemque  Dumnorigi  ^duo,  fratri  Divitiaci,  qui  eo  tem- 
pore'^ principatum  in  civitate  obtinebat,  ac  maxime^  plebi  ac- 
ceptus  erat,  ut  idem  conaretur  persuadet,  eique  filiam  suam  in 
matiimonium  dat. 


Perfacile  factu^  erat  conata  perficereJ — Ipse  suae  civitatis 
imperium  obtenturus  erat. — Totius^  Galliae  plurimum  Helvetii 
possunt. — Non  est  dubium  quin  plurimum  Helvetii  possint.^ — 
Ipse  illis  regnum  conciliaturus'o  erat. — Ipse,  suis  copiis  suoque 
exercitu,  illis  regnum  conciUaturus  erat. 

(Oblique  Narration^  769.)  "Perfacile  factu  esse,"  illis 
pro  bat,  '*  conata  perficere,  propterea  quod  ipse  suae 
civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  esset ;  non  esse  dubium,  quin 
totius  Galliae  plurimum  Helvetii  possent ;"  "  Se,  suis  copiis 
suoque  exercitu,  illis  regna  conciliaturum,"  confirmat. 

Helvetii  jam^^  se^^  ^d  eam  rem  paratos  esse  arbitrantur. — 
Oppida  sua  omnia,  numero  ad  duodecim,^^  incendunt. — Vices 
suos  ad  quadringentos  incendunt. — Reliqua^'*  privata  aedificia^^ 
incendunt. — Frumentum  secum  portaturi  erant. — Frumentum 
omne  comburunt. — Domum^^  reditionis^^  spes  sublata^^  est. — 
Paratiores  ad  omnia  pericula  subeunda^^  erant. 

U b i^o  jam  se  ad  eam  rem  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida 
sua  omnia,  numero  ad  duodecim,  vices  ad  quadringentos,  reliqua 
privata  sedificia  incendunt;  frumentum  omne,  praeter  quod 
secum  portaturi  erant,  comburunt,  ut,  domum  reditionis  spe^^ 
sublata,2i  paratiores  ad  omnia  pericula  subeunda  e  s  s  e  n  t.^^ 

'r-t^ 

2  702,  was  acceptable  to  the  common  people  (a  favourite). — 3  ad+capere, 
803,  1. — -t  725. — 5  376. — ^6  330.  It  was  a  very  easy  thing  to  do. — 7  to  ac- 
complish, per  +  facere,  803,  1. — ^  Of  the  whole  of  Gaul,  the  Helvetians 
are  the  m^st  powerful. — 9  754,  4. — 10  446. — ^  jam  =  a^  last. — 12  751. — 13  in 
number  (amounting)  to  twelve.  —  ^^  relinquere. — ^^  801,  cedes  +  facere.— 
16  713,  Rem.  2.— i7  788,  3.  — is  sub+fero.— 19  sub+ire,  gerundive,  739.— 
20  when.—^^  750.-22  754. 

*  Caesar  often  uses  the  historical  present,  as  in  this  instance,  instead  of  the  per- 
fect aorist  If  persuadet  were  used  really  as  the  present,  then  conaretur 
would  have  to  be  c  onetur,  by  748;  but,  as  the  historical  present,  it  requires  a 
past  tense  in  the  subordinate  sentence. 


346  EEAoiNa  LsasQNg. 

VI. 

Omnes  res  ad  profectionem  comparant Diem  dicunt^  qua 

die  omnes  conveniant.^ — Is  dies  ei*at  ante  diem  quintum  Kalen- 
das'^  Aprilis,  Lucio  Pisone,  Aulo  Gabinio  consulibus. — Is  dies 
erat  a.  d.  V.  Kal.  Apr.,  L.  Pisone,  A.  Gabinio  Coss. 

Omnibus  rebus*  ad  profectionem  comparatis,  diem  dicunt, 
qua  die  ad  ripam  Rhodani  omnes  conveniant :  is  dies  erat 
ante  diem  quintum  Kalendas  Aprilis,  Lucio  Pisone,  Aulo  Gabi- 
nio Consulibus. 


Helvetii  per  provinciam  nostram  iter^  facere  conantur. — Id 
Caesari  nuntiatum  erat. — Csesari  nuntiatum  erat,  eos  per  pro- 
vinciam nostram  iter  facere^  conari.'' — Maturat  ab  urbe  profi- 
cisci,^  et  magnis  itineribus  in  Galliam  contendit,  et  ad  Genevam 
pervenit.  —  De  ejus  adventu^  Helvetii  certiores  facti  sunt. — 
Legatos  ad  eum  mittunt. — Helvetiis  est  in  animo^  sine  uUo 
maleficio^o  iter  per  provinciam  facere  ;  aliud  iter  habent  nullum ; 
rogant,  ut,  Csesaris  voluntate,  id  facere  liceat.^^ 

Caesari  quum  id  nuntiatum  esset,^^  eos  per  provinciam 
nostram  iter  facere  conari,''  maturat  ab  urbe  proficisci,  et  q  u  a  m 
maximis  potest  itineribus,  in  Galliam  u  1 1 e r i o r e m  con- 
tendit, et  ad  Genevam  pervenit.  Ubi  de  ejus  adventu  Hel- 
vetii certiores  facti  sunt,  legatos  ad  eum  mittunt,^^  q  ^  j  d  i  c  e  - 
rent,^'*  ^^sih9^  esse  in  animo  sine  ullo  malejicio  iter  per  provin- 
ciam facere^  propterea  quod  aliud  iter  haheant  nullum ; 
rogare,  ut  ejus  voluntate  id  sibi  facere  liceat.^^ 


Lucius  Cassius,  consul,  ab  Helvetiis  occisus  erat.  —  Exer- 
citus^^  Cassii-ab  Helvetiis  pulsus^''  erat,  et  sub  jugum  missus.-^ 
ES,  Caesar  memorial®  tenebat.— Concedendum^^  non  putabat. — 
Facultas^  per  provinciam  itineris  faciendi^i   non  d^ta   est. — 

^  Thei/  appoint. — 2  con+venire ;  subj.  pres.,  766. — 3  732,  5. — *  750. — »  iter 
{ajceYe= to  make  journeT/  =  to  march. — ^  731. — "^  751. — ^  advenire  (advent-), 
789.-^  468,  5.— 10  800,  2.—"  754.— 12  757^  a..  2.-^3  historical  present. 
— '"*  761,  1. — ^^  oblique  narration. — ^6  exercere,  789. — ^"^  pellere. — ^^  me- 
moria  tenebat,  held  in  memory,  i.  e.,  remembered. — '^  737  (©sse  understood, 
504,  a). — ^20  power  of  marching  through,  or  permission  to  march  throiigh 
facultas,  788,  1,  from  facil-is,  facio.— 21  496. 


or  THE 


BEADING    L£ 


IVEESi;^; 


Homines    inimico^^   animo  ab   mjunsfe5&  maleiicio   non   tem- 
perant.  —^ — 

Caesar,  quod  memoria  tenebat,  L.  Cassium  consulem  occi- 
sum,  exercitum  q  u  e  ejus  ab  Helvetiis  pulsum  et  sub  jugum 
missum,  concedendum  non  putabat ;  n  e  q  u  e,^  homines  inim- 
ico  animo,  data  facultate  per  provinciam  itineris  faciendi,  tem- 
peratures ab  injuria"'^  et  maleficio,  existimabat. 


VII. 


Hujus  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit. — Divico,  bello  Cassi- 
ano,^  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat. — Is  ita  cum  Caesare  egit.^ — Hel- 
vetii  in  eam  partem  ibunt,  atque  ibi  erunt,  ubi  Caesar  constitu- 
ent.^— Caesar  veteris  incommodi'*  reminiscitur.^ — Caesar  pristinae 
virtutis^  Helvetiorum  reminiscitur. 

(Oblique  Narration^  present  time  J)  Is  ita  cum  Caesare 
a  g  i  t :  '*  iSi  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum  Helvetiis  fa  ciat^^ 
in  eam  partem  ituros^  atque  ibi  futuros^  Helvetios,  ubi  eos 
Ccesar  constituerit  atque  esse  voluerit ;  sin  bello  per- 
sequi  persevere t,^^  r eminiscatur^^  et  veteris  incommodi 
papuli  Romani  et  pristince  virtutis  Helvetiorum. 

Hujus  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  bello  Cassiano  dux 
Helvetiorum  fuerat.  Is  ita  cum  Ccesare  egit  (obi.  narr.,  past 
time) :  ''•Si  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum  Helvetiis  fa  ceret, 
in  eam  partem  ituros^  atque  ibifuturos  Helvetios,  ubi  Ccesar  eos 
constituisset  atque  esse  voluiss  e  t ;  sin  bello  persequi 
per  s  ever  ar  et^  r  eminiscer  etur  et  veteris  incommodi 
populi  Romani  et  pristince  virtutis  Helvetiorum,'''' 


22  722. — ^23  neque  existimabat  =  nor  did  he  think. — 24  outrage. 

1  hi  the  Cassian  war,  i.  e.,  in  which  Cassius  had  been  the  Homan  gen- 
eral.--'2  He  treated  with  Ccesar  as  follows.—^  803,  1 ;  subj.  by  766.-4  in, 
commodum,  disaster,  in-f-commodus,  799,  5 ;  con-f-modus,  799,  3,  c ;  geni- 
tive by  698,  a,  2. — 5  rg+miniscor,  stem  of  memini,  meno. — ^  vir,  gen.,  698, 
a,  2.-7  Observe  carefully  the  tenses  in  this  and  the  following  paragraph. 
^8  If  the  Roman  people  will  makepeace.—^  484,  a.— lo  542,  *.— ^  528,  b. 


348  READING    LESSONS. 

His  Caesar  ita^^  respondet. — Caesari  nihil  dubitationis^^  datur.^^ 
— Legati  Helvetii  quasdam  res  commemoraverunt.^^ — Eas  res 
Caesar  in  memoria  tenet.^^  —  Eo^''  Caesari  minus  dubitationis 
datur,  quod  eas  res,  quas  legati  Helvetii  commemoraverunt,  in 
memoria  tenet. — Eas  res  graviter^^  fert.^^ — Eoe  res  non  merito^o 
popiili  Romani  acciderunt.^^ — Eas  res  gi*aviter  fert,  quod  non 
merito  populi  Romani  acciderunt.  —  Eo^^  gravius  fert,  quo^ 
minus  merito  Populi  Romani  acciderunt. 

His  Caesar  ita  respond  et  ^^  (oblique  narration,  present 
time) :  '''' Eo  sibi  minus  dubitationis  dari,  quod  eas  res,  quas 
legati  Helvetii  commemoraverint,  memoria  ten  eat : 
atque  eo  gravius  ferre,  quo  minus  merito  populi  Romani 
acciderint.^^ 

His  Caesar  ita  respondit  {oblique  narration,  past  time)  : 
"JEJo  sibi  minus  ^bitationis  dari,  quod  eas  res,  quas  legati 
Helvetii  commemorassent,  memoria  teniret  :  atque  eo 
gravius  ferre,  quo  minus  merito  populi  Romani  acci- 
dissent.''^ 


vm. 


Helvetii  postSro  die^  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent. — Idem^  Caesar 
facit. — Quas  in  partes^  hostes  iter  faciunt  1"^ — Equitatum^  omnem 
praemittit.6 — Hi  videbunt,  quas  in  partes  hostes  iter  faciant.''' — 
Equitatus  ex  omni  Provincia  et  iEduis  atque  eorum  sociis  coac- 
tus^  erat.  —  Hunc  equitatum  praemittit,  qui  videant,^  quas  in 
partes  hostes  iter  faciant.'' — Hi  cupidius^o  novissimum"  agmen 
inseqUuntur.12 — Cum  equitatu  Helvetiorum  prcelium  commit- 

13  as  follows.— ^^  788,  3,  dubitare  (dubitat-).— ^4  2^0  Ceesar  nothing  of 
doubt  is  given  ■=  Cessar  has  no  doubt.  —  ^^  con  +  memorare  (memor). — 
16  holds  in  memory,  1.  e.,  remembers. — '7  Qn  this  account  Cessar  has  less 
doubt,  because. — ^^  215,  2,  a. — 19  ferre  graviter=^o  bear  heavily,  to  be  in- 
dignant at. — 20  716. — ii  accidere  =  ad+cadere,  803,  1,  to  happen. — 22  ^y 
so  much. — ^23  ly  how  much. — 24  Observe  the  moods  and  tenses  carefully  in 
this  and  the  following  paragraph  oi  oblique  narration. 

1  725.-2  150.--3  Into  what  parts  (of  the  country)  ?— •*  765.-5  Equitare 
(equitat-),  789. — 6  795^  s. — ''  766. — ^  had  been  collected;  cogere  =  con+ag- 
ere. — ^  who  tnay  see,  i.  e.,  to  see,  761,  1. — JO  iqq  eagerly,  adv.,  376. — ^^  novis- 
simum  agmen  =  the  newest  rank,  i.  e.,  the  rear  rank. — 12  in-f-sequi. 


READING    LESSONS.  349 

tunt. — Alieno^3  Jqco  proelium  committunt. — Pauci  de  nostris 
cadunt. 

Postero  die  casti'a  ex  eo  loco  movent:  idem  Caesar  facit; 
equitatumque  omnem  ad  numerum  quattuor  millium, 
q  u  e  m  ex  omni  provincia  et  ^duis  atque  eorum  sociis  coactum 
h  a  b  e  b  a  t,  praemittit,  qui  videant  quas  in  partes  hostes  iter  faci- 
ant. — Qui,  cupidius  novissimum  agmen  insecuti/^  alieno  loco 
cum  equitatu  Helvetiorum  proelium  committunt,  et  pauci  de 
nostris  cadunt. 


Hoc  proelio  sublati^^  sunt  Helvetii.  —  Quingentis  equitibus 
tantam  multitudinem  equitum  propulerant.^^ — Audacius^^  sub- 
sistere^^  coeperunt. — Nonnunquam^^  et^o  proelio^i  nostros  laces- 
sere  coeperunt.  —  Caesar  sues  a  proelio  continebat.^^  —  Hostera 
rapinis,23  pabulationibusque  prohibere^^  volebat.  —  Hoc  satis 
habebat  in  praesentia.^^ 

Quo  proelio  sublati  Helvetii,  quod  quingentis  equitibus 
tantam  multitudinem  equitum  propulerant,  audacius  subsistere, 
nonnunquam  et  novissimo  agmine  proelio  nosti'os  lacessere  coep- 
erunt.— Caesar  sues  a  proelio  continebat,  ac  satis  habebat  in 
praesentia  hostem  rapinis  pabulationibusque^^  prohibere. 


IX. 

Multa^  ant^hac  tacuei-at^  Liscus.  —  Haec  oratione^  Caesaris 
adductus  proponit^.  —  Sunt  nonnulli,^  quorum  auctoritas  apud 
plebem  plurimum^  valet. — Hi  privatim^  plus  possunt^  quam  ipsi 

13  In  a  place  not  their  own,  i.  e.,  on  disadvantageous  ground. — i*  451,  c. — 
16  sub+latus,  irreg.  perf.  of  tollere :  tlie  Helvetians  were  elated. — 16  tJi^y  Jiad 
driven  off,  pro+pellere. — '^'^  376. — is  to  halt,  sub-f-sistere  ;  inf.,  731. — 19  non 
-f-nunquam,  not  never,  i.  e.,  sometimes. — ^20  also. — 21  },y  an  assault. — 22  to 
hold  together,  i.  e.,  to  restrain. — 23  721,  from  plunder  and  from  foraging 
parties. — ^24  pro+habere. — 25  ace  pi.  of  praesens ;  in  prsesentia  (tempora), 
for  the  present. — ^26  517^  a. 

1  Many  things,  before  this,  Liscus  had  kept  secret. — 2  tacere,  intrant  = 
to  be  silent ;  trans  =  to  keep  secret.—^  788,  3,  orare  (orat). — ^^  pro+ponere, 
to  set  before,  to  relate. — ^  non+nullus,  not  none,  i.  e.,  some. — 6  plurimum 
valet  =  avails  very  much  (has  very  great  weight). — "^  215,  3. — ^  pj^g  pos- 
sunt  =  can  more,  i.  e.,  have  more  power.  ^ 

Gg 


350  READING    LESSONS,: 

magistratus.9 — Hi  seditiosa^°  atque  improba^^  oratione  multitu- 
dinem  deterrent.^^ — Frumentum  non  conferunt.^^ — Hi  multitu- 
dinem  deteiTent,  ne  frumentum  conferant.^* — Ipsi  quidem  prin- 
cipatum  Galliae  obtinere  non  possunt.  —  Satius^^  est  Gallorum 
quam  Romanorum  imperia  perferre.^^ 

Si  Helvetios  superaverint^^  Romani,  una^^  cum  reliqua  Gallia 
jEduis  libertatem  eripient.^^ — Dubitare  non  debent,  quin  Roma- 
ni iEduis  libertatem  sint  erepturi.^^ — Satius  est  si  jam  principa- 
tum  Galliae  obtinere  non  possint,  Gallorum  quam  Romanorum 
imperia  perferre. 

Tum  demum  Liscus,^^  oratione  CsBsaris  adductus,  quod  antea 
tacuerat  proponit. — {Oratio  obliqua) :  *'  Esse  nonnullos,  quorum 
auctoritas  apud  plebem  plurimum  valeat;  qui  privatim  plus 
possint  quam  ipsi  magistratus ;  h  o  s  seditiosa  atque  improba 
oratione  multitudinem  deterrere,  ne  frumentum  conferant, 
quod  prgestare  debeant.  Si  jam  principatum  Galliae  obtinere 
non  possint,  Gallorum  quam  Romanorum  imperia  perferre 
satius  esse,  n  e  q  u  e  dubitare  debere,  quin  si  Helvetios  super- 
averint  Romani,  una  cum  reliqua  Gallia  -^duis  libertatem  sint 
erepturi." 


X. 

Hac  oratione  Lisci,  Dumnorix,  Divitiaci  frater,  designabatur.^ 
— Id  Caesar  sentiebat.^ — Pluribus  praesentibus^  eas  res  jactari'* 
nolebat.  —  Celeriter^  concilium  dimittit  ;  Liscum  retinet. — 
Quaerit,^  ex  solo,''  ea  quae  in  conventu^  dixerat. — Dicit  liberius^ 
atque  audacius.^ — Eadem  secreto^*^  ab  aliis  quaerit. — Reperit" 
esse  vera. 

fl  The  magistrates  themselves. — 1°  791,  9  (seditio). — ^^  in+probus,  799,  5. — 
12  de+terr6re. — ^^  con+ferre,  contribute. — ^*  ne  conferant,  that  they  may 
not  cotUribute,  i.  e.,  deter  them,  from  contributing,  548,  b. — ^^  Satius,  com- 
'par.  of  satis,  376:    it  is  better. — 16  per  +  ferre,  to  endure. — ^"^  542,  b,  2.-^- 

18  they  will  wrest  liberty  from  the  ^duans,  together  with  the  rest  of  Gaul. — 

19  e+raper6,  803, 1.— 20  754,  4.— 21  Then,  finally  (then,  and  not  till  then). 

1  was  alluded  to,  de+signare. — ^  ^as  aware  of. — ^  750,  many  being 
present,  i.  e.,  in  the  presence  of  many. — ^  794,  2,  a;  from  j  acio  (jact-) : 
jactare  =  to  toss  to  and  fro ;  hence,  to  discuss. — ^  215,  2. — ^  He  inquires 
into. — 7  ex  solo  =  of  him  alont.-"^  789.—^  376.^-i9  priviftely."^^  He  finds 
(the  statements  J  are  true. 


BEADING    LESSONS.  351 

Ipse  est  Dumnorix/^  summa  audacia,^^  magna  apud  plebem 
propter  liberalitatem  gratia/''  cupidus  rerum^^  novarura. — Com- 
plures  annos^^  portoria^^  reliquaque  omnia  iEduorum  vectigalia 
habet. — Haec  vectigalia  parvo  pretio^^  redemta  sunt.^^ — Vecti- 
galia^o  parvo  pretio  redemta  habet,  propterea  quod,  illo^^  licente,^"^ 
contra  liceri^^  audet  nemo.  —  His  rebus  suam  rem  familiSrem 
auxit. — His  rebus  facultates^^  ad  largiendum^^  magnas  compar- 
avit. — Magnum  numerum  equitatus  suo  sumptu^  semper  alit.— 
Magnum  numerum  equitatus  semper  circum  se  habet.— Nod 
solum  domi,27  sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates  largiter^^  potest. 

Caesar  hac  oratione  Lisci  Dumnorigem,  Divitiaci  fratrem, 
designari  sentiebat  :  sed,  quod  pluribus  praesentibus  eas  res 
jactari  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit,  Liscum  retinet: 
quaerit,  ex  solo,  ea  quae  in  conventu  dixerat.  Dicit  liberius 
atque  audacius.  Eadem  secrete  ab  aliis  quaerit ;  reperit  esse 
vera :  "  Ipsum  esse  Dumnorigem,  summa  audacia,  magna  apud 
plebem  propter  liberalitatem  gratia,  cupidum  rerum  novarum  : 
complures  annos  portoria  reliquaque  omnia  ^duorum  vectigalia 
parvo  pretio  redemta  habere,  propterea  quod  illo  licente  contra 
liceri  audeat  nemo.  His  rebus  e  t  suam  rem  familiarem  aux- 
isse,  et  facultates  ad  largiendum  magnas  comparasse  :  magnum 
numerum  equitatus  suo  sumtu  semper  alere  et  circum  se 
habere :  n  e  q  u  e  solum  domi,  sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates 
kurgiter  posse." 


XL 

Ad  has  suspiciones  certissimae  res^  accedebant. — Dumnorix 
per  fines  Sequanorum  Helvetios  ti-ansduxerat.^ — Obsides  inter 
eos  dandos^  curaverat. — Ea  omnia  jussu^  Caesaris  fecerat. — Ea 

12  Dumnorix  is  ihe  very  person,  (a  man)  of  the  highest  audacity,  &c. — 
13  722. — 1*  influence. — ^^  698,  b. — ^^  712. — f''  transit  duties,  custom  duties. 
— ^18  719.  — 19  Iff  ere  contracted  for.  —  20  vectigalia  .  .  .  habet,  he  holds  the 
taxes  contracted  for  at  a  low  price ;  i.  e.,  holds  them  under  a  very  favour- 
able contract. — 21  456,  a,  when  he  bids. — ^22  Hceor,  liceri,  to  bid. — 23  731. 
— ^24  Means  for  making-  largesses. — ^25  489.— ize  gao  sumptu,  at  his  own 
expense.  Sumptus,  789,  from  samere. — 27  726,  R.,  at  home. — 28  largiter 
potest,  he  can  largely,  i.  e.,  he  has  extensive  power. 

1  certissimae  res  =  most  certain  (or  undoubted)  facts. — accedebant  = 
were  added ;  ad+cedere,  intransitive. — 2  trans+ducere. — 3  504,  a. — *  789  ; 
from  jubere  (juss-) :  by  the  command,  716. 


352  READING    LESSONS. 

omnia  injussu^  Caesaris  et^  civitatis  fecerat. — Ea  omnia  inscien- 
tibus  ipsis^  fecerat. — Ea  omnia  n  o  n  m  o  d  o  injussu  Caesaris  et 
civitatis,  sed  etiam  inscientibus  ipsis  fecerat. — A  magistratu^ 
^duorum  accusabatur. — Satis  est  caussse,^  quare  in  eum  ani- 
madvertat.^o — Satis  est  caussae,  quare  in  eum  civitatem  animad- 
vertSre  jubeat. — Satis  erat  caussae,  quare  in  eum  aut  ipse  ani- 
madverteret,  aut  civitatem  animadvertere  juberet. — Satis  esse^^ 
caussae  arbiti'abatur. 

Quibus  rebus  cogniti s,^^  q u u m ^^  ad  has  suspiciones 
certissimae  res  accederent — quod  per  fines  Sequanorum  Hel- 
vetios  transduxisset^* — q  u  o  d  obsides  inter  eos  dandos  curasset 
— quod  ea  omnia  non  modo  injussu  suo  et  civitatis,  sed  etiam 
inscientibus  ipsis,  fecisset — q  u  o  d  a  magisti-atu  JEduorum  accu- 
saretur;  satis  esse  caussae  arbitrabatur,  quare  in  eum  aut  ipse 
animadvertere t,  aut  civitatem  animadvertere  juberet. 


His  omnibus  rebus^^  unum  repugnabat.^^ — Divitiaci  fratris^^ 
summum  in  populum  Romanum  studium^^  cognoverat  Caesar. 
— Divitiaci  summam  in  se  voluntatem  cognoverat. — Divitiaci 
egregiam  fidem,  justitiam,^^  temperantiam,^^  cognoverat. — Dum- 
norigis  supplicio^o  Divitiaci  animum  offendet.  —  Ne^^  Divitiaci 
animum  oflfendat,  veretur.^ — Ne^^  Divitiaci  animum  offenderet, 
verebatur. 

His  omnibus  rebus  unum  repugnabat,  quod  Divitiaci  fratris 
summum  in  populum  Romanum  studium,  summam  in  se  vol- 
untatem, egregiam  fidem,  justitiam,  temperantiam  cognoverat : 
nam  ne  ejus  supplicio  Divitiaci  animum  offenderet,  verebatur. 

5  vnthout  the  command ;  in+jussu. — ^  The  English  idiom  demands  or 
instead  of  and :  without  the  command  of  Ccesar  or  the  state. — '  themselves 
not  knoioing  it,  i.  e.,  without  the  knowledge  of  Coesar  and  the  jEduan 
government. — »  By  a  magistrate,  93,  II.,  b. — ^  697,  h. — ^o  in  eum  animad- 
vertere, to  animadvert  upon  him,  i.  e.,  to  punish  him.  —  ^^  751,  R.  2.— 
12  Ctuibus  rebus  cognitis  =  Which  things  being  known  by  inquiry,  i.  e., 
after  he  had  inquired  into  these  things. — ^3  Since  (seeing  that),  757,  A,  b. 
— 14  transduxisset,  curasset,  &c.,  are  subjunctives,  because  they  express, 
not  Caesar's  own  sentiments  or  knowledge,  but  what  he  had  heard  from 
others  :  certissimce  res  accederent. — ^^  704,  To  all  these  considerations  one 
(thing)  opposed  itself. — ^^  re+pugnare. — ^''  Of  his  brother  Divitiacus,  i.  e., 
the  brother  of  Dumnorix. — ^^  zeal. — 19  785,  2. — 20  ;gy  ^Jiq  punishment  of 
Dumnorix  he  will  hurt  the  feelings  of  Divitiacus. — 21  veretur  ne  .  .  .lie. 
fears  that  he  shall. — 22  verebatur  ne  .  .  .  he  feared  that  he  should. 


BEADING    LESSONS.  353 


XII. 


Caesar  graviter^  in^  Dtimnorigem  statuet. — Divitiacus  Csesa- 
rem  complectitur. — Divitiacus  multis^  cum  lacrymis  Caesar  em 
complectitur. — Obsecrare  incipit  ne^  quid  gravius^  in^  fratrem 
statuat.  —  Scit  Divitiacus  ilia  esse  vera.  —  Nemo  ex  eo^  plus 
quam  Divitiacus  doloris"^  capit.  —  Divitiacus  gratia^  plurimum 
domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia  poterat.  —  Dumnorix  minimum^ 
propter  adolescentiam  poterat.  —  Dumnorix  per  Divitiacum 
crevit.^° — His  opibus^^  ac  neiTis^^  ad  minuendam'^  gratiam  Divit- 
iaci  utitur. — His  opibus  ad  perniciem^*  Divitiaci  utitm\ — Qui- 
bus  opibus  ac  nei*vis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam,  sed 
pene  ad  perniciem  Divitiaci  utitur.  —  Divitiacus  tamen  et^^ 
amore  fraterno  et  existimatione^^  vulgi  commovetur.^^ — Divit- 
iacus summum  locum  amicitiae  apud  Caesarem  tenet. — Nemo 
existimabit  non  ejus  voluntate  factum.^^ — Ex  hac  re  totius  Gal- 
liae  animi  a  Divitiaco  avertentur.^^ 

{Direct  Narration^  Present  Time.^^)  Scit  Divitiacus  ilia  esse 
vera,  nee  quisquam  ex  eo  plus  quam  ipse  doloris  capit, 
propter ea  quod,  quum  ipse  gratia  plurimum  domi  atque 
in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter  adolescentiam  posset, 
per  se  crevit ;  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam 
gratiam,  sed  pene  ad  perniciem  ipsius  utitur.  Divitiacus  tamen 
et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi  commovetur,  quod, 
si 21  quid  fratri  a  Csesare  acciderit,  quum 22  ipse 
t  a  1  e  m  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneat,  nemo  existimabit  non 

1  graviter  statuet  =  will  decide  severtly. — ^  against. — ^  89,  II. — ^  548,  a. 
s  quid  gravius  =  anything  more  severe  (than  usual) :  anything  at  all  se- 
vere.— ^  from  him,  i.  e.,  Dumnorix. — ^  plus  doloris,  more  pain,  697. — »  by 
his  influence  (popularity). — ^  minimum  ipoterat  =  had  very  little  power. — 
10  crescere:  grew  (in  power). — ^^  resources. — ^^  sineios,  abl.  by  716. — 
^  739,  for  diminishing  the  influence  of  Divitiacus. — ^^  790,  1. — ^^  517,  c. 
— 16  existimare,  788,  3  :  existimatione  vulgi  =  &y  the  opinion  of  the  public. 
— 17  con+movere  ;  commovetur  =  is  strongly  mxyved. — 1^  No  one  will  think 
it  was  not  done  with  his  (Divitiacus's)  consent. — 19  a+vertere :  the  affec- 
tions  of  all  Gaul  will  be  turned  away  from  him.—^^  Observe  carefully 
the  moods  and  tenses  in  the  following  paragraphs  of  direct  and  oblique 
narration.— 21  if  anything  happen  to  his  brother  from  Cassar.—^^  quum 
ipse  teneat,  seeing  thai  he  himself  holds. 

Gg2 


354  READING    LESSONS. 

ejus  voluntate  factum;   qua  ex  re  fiet^  uti  totius  Gallise 
animi  ab  eo  avertantur.^* 

{Direct  Narration^  Past  Time,)  Sciebat  Divitiacus  ilia  esse 
vera,  nee  quisquam  ex  eo  plus  quam  ipse  doloris  capiebat,  prop- 
terea  quod,  quum  ipse  gratia  plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua 
Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter  adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  crev- 
^rat;  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  grati- 
am,  sed  pssne  ad  perniciem  ipsius  utebatur.  Divitiacus  tamen 
et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi  commovebatur,  quod  si 
quid  fratri  a  Caesare  gi'avius  accidisset,  quum  ipse  talem  locum 
amicitiae  apud  eum  teneret,  nemo  erat  existimaturus  non  ejus 
voluntate  factum,  qua  ex  re  futurum  erat  uti  totius  Galliae 
animi  ab  eo  averterentur. 

Divitiacus,  multis  cum  lacrymis  Caesarem  complexus  obse- 
crare  incipit  {oblique  narration^  present  time),  **Ne  quid  gravius 
in  fratrem  statuat ;  scire  se,  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex  eo 
plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  propterea  quod,  quum  ipse  gratia 
plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter 
adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  crev^rit ;  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis 
non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam,  sed  pgene  ad  perniciem  suam 
utatur :  sese  tamen  et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi 
commoveri,  quod,  si  quid  ei  gravius  a  Caesare  accident,  quum 
ipse  eum  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneat,  neminem  existima- 
turum  non  sua  voluntate  factum ;  qua  ex  re  futurum  uti  totius 
Galliae  animi  a  se  avertantur." 

Divitiacus  multis  cum  lacrymis,  Caesarem  complexus,  obse- 
crare  coepit  {oblique  narration,  past  time),  *'  Ne  quid  gravius  in 
fratrem  statueret;  scire  se,  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex 
60  plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  propterea  quod,  quum  ipse 
gratia  plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  minimum 
propter  adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  crevisset;  quibus  opibus 
ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam,  sed  paene  ad  per- 
niciem suam  uteretur :  sese  tamen  et  amore  fraterno  et  exist- 
imatione vulgi  commoveri,  quod  si  quid  ei  a  Caesare  gravius 
accidisset,  quum  ipse  eum  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneret, 
neminem  existimaturum  non  sua  voluntate  factum ;  qua  ex  re 
futurum,  uti  totius  Galliae  animi  a  se  averterentur." 

23  from  which  thing  it  wiU  result. — s4  754,  2. 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


t^^  The  nmnbers  refer  to  paragraphs.  In  verbs,  the  perfect  and  su- 
pine-stems are  placed  in  brackets,  immediately  after  the  infinitive  end- 
ings. The  declensions  of  nouns  may  be  known  by  the  genitive  endings  ; 
the  conjugations  of  verbs  by  the  infinitive  endings. 


A,  ab,  abs,  prep,  with  abl.,  hy,from. 
Abesse  (abfu-,  ab+esse),  to  be  away 

from,  to  be  distant,  to  be  absent. 
Abrog-are  (av-,  at-),  to  abrogate. 
Abstin-ere  (abstinu-,  abstent-,  abs4- 

tenere),   to  abstain  from   (with 

abl.). 
Abund-are  fav-,  at-),  to  abound  (with 

abl.). 
Ac,  conj.,  and,  as  well  as. 
Acced-ere  (acced-,  access-,  ad-f-ced- 

ere,  401,  3),  to  approach. 
Accid-Sre    (accid-,   ad  +  cadere),   to 


Accidit,  impers.,  583,  it  happens. 
Accip-ere   (io,   accep-,  accept-,  666, 

v.,  b),  to  receive:  accep tus  erat, 

he  was  popular,  or  acceptable. 
Accurr-ere   (accurr-,  and  accucurr-, 

accurs-,  ad+currere),  to  run  to,  to 

run  up  to. 
Accus-are  (av-,  at-),  to  accuse. 
Acer,  acris,  acre,  105,  R.  1,  sharp, 


Acerrime  (superl.  of  acriter),  very 
spiritedly. 

Acies,  ei,  line  of  battle. 

Acriter,  adv.,  217,  sharply,  spirit- 
edly. 

Acut-us,  a,  um,  sharp,  acvie. 

Ad,  prep,  with  accus.,  to,  near. 

Add-ere  (addid-,  addit-,  ad  +  dare, 
411,  c),  to  add. 


Adduc-ere  (addux-,  adduct-),  to  lead 

to,  induce. 
Adeo,  adv.,  to  this  point,  to  such  a 


Adesse  (adfu-,  ad+esse),  to  be  pres- 

ent  (with  dat). 
Adhib-ere  (adhibu-,  adhibit-,  ad-f-ha- 

bere),  to  apply,  employ,  admit. 
Adhort-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  exhort. 
Adjung-ere   (adjunx-,   adjunct-),   to 

join  to. 
Adjuv-are  (adjuv-,  adjut-),  to  assist, 
Admddum,  adv.,  very. 
Admon-ere  (admonu-,  admonit-),  to 

advise,  admmiish. 
Adolescens,  (adolescent)  is,  young 

man. 
Adolescenti-a,  se,  youth. 
Ador-are  (av-,  at-),  to  adore,  worship. 
Advent-us,  us,  approach. 
Adversus,  or  adversum,  prep,  with 

accus.,  against,  towards. 
^dific-are  (av-,  at-),  to  build. 
jEdifici-um,  i,  building. 
jEda-us,  i,  jEduan  (people  of  Gaul). 
^gens,  (aegentj  is,  107,  poor. 
M^er,  gra,  grum,  sick. 
-^gritudo,   (oegritudin)  is,  339,  sor^ 

ro^u,  affliction,  sickness. 
^grot-are  (av-,  at-),  to  be  sick. 
jE  gyp  tus,  i,  f,  25,  a,  ^gypt. 
iEquor,  (aequ6r)  is,  327,  sea. 
.fistas,  (eestftt)  is,  293,  summer. 


358 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


-ffitas,  (aetat)  is,  293,  age,  time  of  life. 

^temitas,  (aetemitat)  is,  293,  eter- 
nity. 

iEtem-us,  a,  um,  eternal;  in  OBter- 
ivaxQ.,  forever. 

AiFectio,  (affection)  is,  293,  affection. 

Afferre  (attul-,  allat-,  ad+ferre),  to 
hririg,  bring  to,  adduce. 

Affic-ere  (affec-,  affect-,  ad+facere), 
to  affect,  move,  infiuence. 

Afric-a,  ae,  Africa. 

Africau-us,  i,  Africanus. 

Ager,  gri,  64,  field. 

Ag-ere  (eg-,  act-),  to  do,  act,  drive ; 
to  treat  (as  an  ambassador). 

Agmen,  (agmin)  is,  344,  a,  army  on 
march,  or  in  marching  order ;  no- 
vis  simum  agmen,  the  rear. 

Agn-us,  i,  lamh. 

Agricol-a,  se,  m.,  husbandman. 

Agricultur-a,  ee,  agriculture. 

Agripp-a,  ae,  Agrippa. 

Aio,  609,  I  say,  say  yes,  affirm. 

Al-a,  ae,  wing. 

Al-ere  (alu-,  alt-),  to  nourish,  sup- 
port, maintain. 

Alexander,  -dri,  Alexander. 

Alien-us,  a,  um,  foreign,  belonging 
to  another. 

Aliquando,  at  some  time,  some  day, 
at  last. 

Aliquant-us,  a,  um,  184,  somewhat 
great ;  aliquantum  agri,  a  pretty 
large  piece  of  ground. 
Aliquis,  quae,  quid  (quod),  178,  5, 
some  one,  something ;  aliquid  novi, 
something  new,  180. 
Aliter,  otherwise. 

Ali-us,  a,  ud,  gen.  alius,  &c.,  194,  R.  1, 
other,  another,  [of  Gaul. 

Allobroges,  um,  AUobroges,  people 
Allu-ere  (allu-),  to  wash. 
Alpes,  ium,  Alps,  mountains  between 

Gaul  and  Italy. 
Alter,  a,  um,  gen.  ius,  194,  R.  1,  an- 
other, the  second  (in  a  sferiei). 


Alt-US,  a,  um,  high,  lofty,  de^;  at 

tum,  i,  the  deep,  the  sea. 
Amabilis,  is,  e,  104,  amiable. 
Am-are  (av-,  at-),  to  love. 
Ambo,  ae,  o,  both. 
Ambul-are  (av-,  at-),  to  walk, 
Amiciti-a,  ae,  friendship. 
Amic-us,  i,  friend. 
Amitt-ere  (amis-,  amiss-),  to  lose. 
Ample,  adv.,  largely. 
Amplius,  comp.  of  ample,  morCj  lar*  j 

ger,  greater  than. 
Ancill-a,  ae,  maid-servant. 
Angli-a,  ae,  England. 
Angusti-ae,  arum,  defiles,  57,  R. 
Angust-us,  a,  um,  narrow. 
Animadvert-Sre   (veft-,   vers-),   ani- 
mum+ad+vertere),  to  turn  the 
mind  to,  to  observe ;  with  in,  t-o 
punish  ;    Caesar  in  Dumnorigem 
animadvertit,     Ccesar     punishes 
Dumnorix. 
Animal,  (animal)  is,  325,  animal. 
Animans,  (animant)  is,  living ;    as 

noun,  a  living  being. 
Anim-us,  i,  soul,  mind. 
Ann-us,  i,  year. 
Anser,  (anser)  is,  319,  goose. 
Ante,  prep,  with  accus.,  before. 
Antehac,  adv.,  before,  before  this. 
Antepon-6re  (posu-,  posit-),  to  place 

before,  to  prefer. 
Antonin-us,  i,  Antonine. 
Antoni-us,  i,  Antony. 
Aper-ire  (aperu-,  apert-,  427,  II.),  to 

open. 
Apert-us,  a,  um,  open. 
Apis,  (Ap-)  is.  Apis,  Egyptian  deity. 
Appell-are  (av-,  at-),  to  call,  name. 
Aprilis,  is  (sc.  mensis),  m.,  25,  a, 
April.  [proach. 

Appropinqu-are    (av-,    at-),    to   ap- 
Apud,  prep,  with   accus.,   among; 
apud  te,  with  you  (at  your  house) ; 
apud  Ciceronem,  in  Cicero  {i.  e., 
his  writings). 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULAKY. 


359 


Aqa-a,  8e,  water. 
Aquil-a,  ae,  eagle. 
Aquitan-us,  i,  AquUanian  (people  oS. 

Gaul). 
Arar,  (ArSr)  is^  the  SaoTie  (river  of 

Gaul). 
Ar-are  (av-,  at-),  to  plough. 
Arbitr-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  judge,  think. 
Arbor,  (arbor)  is,  f.,  tree. 
Arcess-ere    (arcessiv-,  arcessit-),   to 

send  for. 
Arethus-a,  ae,  Arethusa. 
Argent-um,  i,  silver. 
Arid-um,  i,  the  sand  (neuter  of  ari- 

dus,  a,  um,  dry). 
Ariovist-us,  i,  Ariovistus,  a  German 

chieftain. 
Aristides,  (Aristid-)  is,  Aristides. 
Anna,  orum,  arms. 
Arm-are  (av-,  at-),  to  arm. 
Arrip-ere  (axripu-,  arrept-,  ad-f-rap- 

ere),  to  snatch  up,  to  seize. 
Arroganti-a,   ae,  haughtiness,   obsti- 
nacy, arrogance. 
Ars,  (art)  is,  293,  art. 
Asper,  a,  um,  rough. 
At,  conj.,  but. 
Athenae,  arum,  Athene. 
Atheniensis,  is,  an  Athenian. 
Atque,  conj.,  and. 
Atrox,  (atrdc)  is,  107,  Jierce, 
Attent-e,  adv.,  attentively. 
Attent-us,  a,  um,  attentive. 
Attic-a,  ae,  Attica. 
Atting-ere  (attig-,  attact-),  to  touch 

on,  border  upon. 
Auctoritas,  (auctoritat)  is,  293,  au- 

tlwrity,  influence. 
Audacius,  comp.  of  audacter,  376, 

vnore  boldly. 
Audacter,  adv.,  boldly. 
Aud-ere  (ausus  sum),  to  dare. 
Aud-Ire  (audiv-,  audit-),  to  hear. 
Aug-ere  (aux-,  auct-),  to  increase. 
August-US,  i,  Augustus. 
Aur-um,  i,  gold. 


Aut,  conj.,  or. 

Autem,  conj.,  315,  but,  moreover,  also. 

Auxili-um,  i,  assistance ;  auxilia,  pL, 

auxiliary  troops. 
Avar-US,  i,  avaricious. 
Avert-ere   (avert-,  avers-),   to  turn 


Avien-us,  i,  Avienus. 
Avis,  (av)  is,  300,  bird. 

B. 

Barbar-us,  a,  um,  barbarian,  for* 
eign ;  used  as  a  noun,  a  barba- 
rian. 

Beat-us,  a,  um,  happy. 

Beat-e,  215,  1,  happily. 

Belg-a,  as,  a  Belgian,  people  of  GanL 

Bell-are  (av-,  at-),  to  wage  war, 

Bellicos-us,  a,  um,  warlike, 

Bell-um,  i,  war. 

Bene,  adv.,  well,  215,  1,  R. 

Benefici-um,  i,  good  deed,  act  of 
kindness. 

Benign-US,  a,  um,  kind,  with  dat. 

Besti-a,  ae,  beast,  brute. 

Bib-6re  (bib-,  bibit-),  to  drink. 

Bienni-um,  i,  s'pace  of  two  years. 

Bini,  ae,  a,  dist.,  189,  two  apiece,  two 
at  a  time. 

Bis,  189,  twice. 

Bonitas,  (bonitat)  is,  293,  goodness, 

Bon-US,  a,  um,  good ;  bona,  neut.  pi., 
blessings,  advantages. 

Bos,  bovis,  351,  2,  ox  or  cow, 

Brevis,  is,  e,  104,  short, 

Britanni-a,  88,  Britain. 

Britann-us,  i,  a  Briton. 

Brut-US,  i,  Brutus. 

C. 

Cad-ere  (cecid-,  cas-,  411,  b),  to  fall, 

Cadm-us,  i,  Cadmus. 

Caduc-us,  a,  uoa,  frail. 

Caed-gre  (cecid-,  cees-,  411,  b),  tofeU, 

kill,  cut  dow7i. 
Coesar,  (Caesar)  is,  Ccssar. 


S60 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


Cains,  i,  Caius. 

Calamitas,  (calamitat)  is,  calamity. 

Calcar,  (calcar)  is,  325,  spur. 

Camp-US,  i,  field,  plain. 

Can-is,  (can)  is,  c,  dog. 

Cant-are  (av-,  at-),  to  sing. 

Cant-US,  ijs,  singing. 

Cap-ere  (cep-,  capt-),  to  take. 

Captiv-us,  i,  captive,  prisoner. 

Car-ere  (caru-,  398),  to  want,  with 
abl. 

Carmen,  (carmin)  is,  344,  a,  song. 

Caro,  (cam)  is,  340,  K.,Jlesh. 

Carthaginiensis,  is,  a  Carthagin- 
ian. 

Carthago,  (Carthagin)  is,  Carthage. 

Carr-us,  i,  wagon. 

Car-US,  a,  um,  dear. 

Cassi-us,  i,  Cassius. 

Castell-um,  i,  fortress,  tower. 

Castic-us,  i,  Casticus. 

Casti'a,  orum,  camp. 

Cas-us,  us,  accident,  chance. 

Catamentales,  edis,  Catamentales, 
proper  name. 

Catilin-a,  se,  Catiline,  proper  name. 

Cato,  (Caton)  is,  Cato. 

Caus-a,  ae,  cause,  reason;  abl.,  causa, 
for  the  sake  of,  135,  II.,  h ;  salutis 
causa, /or  the  sake  of  safety. 

Caut-us,  a,  um,  cautious. 

Celebr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  celebrate. 

Celer,  (celer)  is,  107,  swift. 

Celeriter,  adv.,  215,  2,  b,  swiftly. 

Celta,  ae,  a  Celt,  people  of  Gaul. 

Centum,  indecl.,  a  hundred. 

Cens-ere.  (censu-,  cens-),  to  think, 
judge,  believe. 

Centurio,  (centurion)  is,  centurion. 

Cem-6re  (crev-,  cret-),  to  separate, 
decide,  judge. 

Cert-us,  a,  um,  certain;  certiorem 
facere,  to  make  more  certain,  i.  e., 
to  inform. 

Cerv-us,  i,  stag. 

Ceteri,  orum,  the  rest. 


Christ-us,  i,  Christ. 

Cicero,  (Ciceron)  is,  Cicero. 

Cing-ere  (cinx-,  cinct-),  to  gird,  sur- 
round. 

Circa,  prep,  with  ace,  about,  around. 

Circiter,  prep,  with  ace,  about,  near; 
circiter  viginti,  about  twenty. 

Circum,  prep,  with  accus.,  about, 
around. 

Circumst-are  [or  circumsistere),  cir- 
cumstet-,  391,  1,  to  surround,  to 
stand  about. 

Cito,  adv.,  quickly. 

Cit-us,  a,  um,  quick,  swift. 

Civis,  (civ)  is,  c,  citizen. 

Civitas,  (civitat)  is,  293,  stffie. 

Clamor,  (clamor)  is,  319,  noise,  clam- 
our. 

Clar-us,  a,  um,  illustrious. 

Classis,  (class-)  is,  300,  fleet. 

Claud-ere  (claus-,  claus-),  to  shut. 

Cliens,  (client)  is,  m.,  a  dependant. 

Coel-um,  \,firmamenti  heaven. 

Coem-6re  (coem-,  coempt-),  to  buy 
up  (con+emere). 

CcBn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  sup. 

CcEpi,  used  only  in  perf.  tenses,  / 
begin,  611. 

Cog-ere  (coeg-,  coact-),  to  bring  to- 
gether, collect,  compel. 

Cogit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  think. 

Cognosc-ere  (cognov-,  cognit-),  to 
learn,  find  out,  know. 

Cohors,  (cohort)  is,  293,  cohort,  the 
tenth  part  of  a  legion. 

Cohort-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  encourage. 

Col-6re  (colu-,  cult-),  to  cultivate, 
serve,  hon^our. 

Collig-6re  (colleg-,  collect-,  con+le- 
gere),  to  collect. 

Collis,  (coll)  is,  m.,  302,  R.,  Ull. 

CoUoc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  place. 

CoUoqui-um,  i,  conference. 

Color,  (color)  is,  319,  colour. 

Columb-a,  ae,  dove.  [bum  up. 

Combur-6re  (combusiJ-,  combust-),  to 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


361 


Comes,  (comit)  is,  c,  companion, 
Comme-are  (av-,  at-),  to  go  to,  to  go 

and  return. 
Commemor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  mention, 

to  call  to  mind, 
Committ-Sre  (commis-,  commiss-),  to 

intrust  to,  with  dative;  praelium 

committere,  to  join  battle. 
Commov-ere  (commOv-,  commot-),  to 

move  greatly,  to  excite. 
Commun-ire  (£v-.  It-),  to  fortify, 
Commiinis,  is,  e,  104,  common. 
Commut-are  (av-,  at-),  to  change. 
Commutatio,      ( comnratation )     is, 


Compar-are  (av-,  at-),  to  get  together, 
procure, 

Compell-6re  (compul-,  compuls-,  con 
+pellere),  to  §0nipel,  drive  on. 

Comper-ire  (comper-,  compert-,  427, 
v.),  to  find  out,  discover. 

Complect-i  (complex-),  dep.,  to  em- 
brace. 

Compl-ere  (complev-,  complet-,  395, 
n.),  to^ll  up. 

Complures,  ium,  327,  very  many. 

Con-ari  (at-),  to  attempt,  try. 

Conat-um,  i,  attempt. 

Conced-ere  (concess-,  concess-),  to 
yield  to,  to  grant,  give  way. 

Concess-us,  us,  grant. 

Concili-are  (av-,  at-),  to  gain  (for  an- 
other). 

Concili-um,  i,  assembly,  council. 

Concit-are  fav-,  at-),  to  stir  up,  to 
excite. 

Concupisc-ere  (concupiv-),  to  desire. 

ConcTirr-ere   (concurr-,  concurs-),  to 


Condemn-fire  (av-,  at-),  to  condemn, 
348. 

Conditio,  (condition)  is,  333,  R.,  con- 
dition. 

Conditor,  (conditor)  is,  builder,found- 
ef.  [lead  or  bring  together. 

Conduc-€re    (condux-,   conduct),   to 

H 


Conferre  (contul-,  coUat-),  to  bring 

together,  contribute, 
Confic-ere  (confec-,  confect-),  to  jin>' 

ish. 
Confid-Sre  (confid-,  confis-),  to  trust 

to,  to  confide  in. 
Confirm-are  (av-,  at-),  to  confirm,  es- 

tablish,  affirm,  fix. 
Conflu-Sre  (conflux-,  conflux-),  tojlo'ds 

together. 
Congreg-are  (av-,  at-),  to  gdther  into 

flocks. 
Congress-US,  us,  meeting. 
Conjic-ere  (conjee-,  conject-,  con-f-ja- 

cere,  416),  to  hurl. 
Conjung-ere  (conjunx-,  conjunct-),  to 

join  together,  unite. 
Conjur-are    (av-,    at-),   to   conspire, 

plot. 
Conjuratio,  (conjuration)  is,  333,  R., 

conspiracy. 
Conjux,  (conjug)  is,  c,  husband  or 

wife. 
Conscend-ere  (conscend-,  conscens-, 

con+scandere,  309),  to  climb  up. 
Conscisc-ere   (consciv-,  conscit-),  to 

decree,    determine ;    mortem    sibi 

consciscere,    to    commit    suicide, 

555. 
Consci-us,  a,  um,  conscious,  privy  to. 
Conscrib-ere  (conscrips-,  conscript-), 

to  enrol,  levy. 
Consent-ire  (consens-,  consens-),  to 

agree. 
Consid-gre  (consed-,  consess-),  to  sit 

doion,  to  encamp. 
Consili-um,  i,  plan,  judgment,  coun- 
sel, deliberation. 
Consist-6re    (constit-,   constit-),    to 

stand,  halt. 
Conspect-us,  us,  sight,  beholding. 
Conspic-ere  (conspex-,  conspect-),  to 

see,  get  sight  of 
Const-are  (stit-,  stit-  or  stat-),  to  stand 

together,  to  halt. 
Constitu-6re    ( constitu-,    constittHr; 
H 


362 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


con+statuere),  to  place,  Jix,  ap- 
point. 

Consaesc-6re  (consuev-,  cousaet-),  to 
be  accustomed. 

Consuetude,  (consuetudin)  is,  339, 
cttstom,  usa§^e. 

Consul,  (consul)  is,  consul^  chief  ma- 
gistrate of  Rome. 

Consul-€re  (consulu-,  consult-),  to 
coiisuU. 

Consult-um,  i,  decree. 

Consum-6re  (consumps-,  consumpt-, 
con-f-sumere),  to  consume. 

Contemn-6re  (contemps-,  contempt-), 
to  despise. 

Contempl-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  contem- 
plate, 

Contend-€re  (contend-,  content-),  to 
contend,  strive  after,  hasten. 

Content-US,  a,  um,  content,  with  abl. 

Contin-ere  (continu-,  content-,  con+ 
tenere),  to  contain,  restrain,  hold 
together. 

Continens,  (continent)  is,  107,  suc- 
cessive, continued. 

Continenter,  215,  2,  b,  continually. 

Contingit,  impers.,  580,  it  happens. 

Continuatio,  (continuation)  is,  333, 
R.,  continuance. 

Contra,  prep,  with  accus.,  against  ; 
adv.,  in  opposition  to. 

Contrah-6re  (contrax-,  contract-,  con 
+trahere),  to  draw  together,  col- 
lect. 

Conv6n-ire  (convfin-,  convent-,  con+ 
venire),  to  come  together,  meet, 
agree. 

Convent-u8,  As,  meeting,  assembly. 

Convert-6re  (convert-,  convers-),  to 
turn  completely  round. 

Convoc-ftre  (av-,  at-,  con+vocare),  to 
call  together. 

Coor-iri  (coort-),  dep.,  to  rise,  ai  a 
storm. 

Copi-a,  89,  abundance ;  pi.,  coj^ias, 
anim,  troops,  forces. 


Cor,  (cord)  is,  n.,  heart. 
Coriutli-us,  i,  f.,  Corinth. 
Coruiger,  a,  um,  homed. 
Com-u,  111,  horn,  wing  of  an  army* 
Corona,  bb,  crown. 
Corpus,  (corp6r)  is,  344,  J,  body. 
Corrig-€re   (correx-,   correct-,   con-f- 
regere),  to  correct,  make  straight, 
Corv-us,  i,  crow. 
Cras,  adv.,  to-morrow. 
Crass-US,  i,  Crassus. 
Cre-are  (av-,  at-),  to  create. 
Creber,  bra,  hmm,  frequ,ent. 
Cred-€re  (credid-,  credit-),  to  believe, 

intrust,  with  dat. 
Crep-are   (crepu-,  crepit-,  387,  II.), 

to  chide,  creak  (as  a  door). 
Cresc-6re  (crev-,  cr6t-),  to  groiv. 
Crimen,  (crkniii)  is,  344,  a,  crime, 
Crus,  (crur)  is,  n.,  leg. 
Cubicul-um,  i,  bed-cliamber. 
Cubile,  (cubil)  is,  314,  bed,  ptacf.  to 

lie  down. 
Culmen,  (culmin)  is,  344,  a,  top,  sum- 
mit. 
Culpa,  m, fault. 
Cultus,  us  (from  colere),  cultivation, 

civilization,  refinement. 
Cum,  prep,  with  abl.,  with;   cum, 

conj.,  same  as  quum,  when. 
Cunct-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  delay. 
Cunct-us,  a,  um,  all,  the  whole. 
Cup-€re  (io,  199,  cupiv-,  cupit-),  to 

desire. 
Cupids,  adv.,  with  desire,  215, 1  (cu«    j 

pidus). 
Cupiditas,  (cupiditat)  is,  293,  desire. 
Cupid-US,  a,  um  (with  geo.),  desk- 

rous,  eager. 
Cflr,  adv.,  why. 

Cor-a,  SB,  care.  \ 

Cur-ftre  (av-,  at-),  to  take  care,  to  see 

that. 
Cnri-a,  8B,  senate-Xouse, 
Curr-€re  (caoQns  oari-,  411,  a),  to 
run. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


863 


Cars-US,  us,  course,  running. 
Gustos,    (custod)   is,   25,   a,   guard, 

guardian. 
Cyrus,  i,  Cyrus. 

D. 

Danubi-us,  i,  Danube  (river). 

D-ire  (ded-,  dat-),  to  give. 

Dari-us,  i,  Darius,  Persian  king. 

De,  prep,  with  abl.,  of,  from,  con- 
cerning. De  tertia  vigilia,  in 
{about,  or  after)  the  third  watch. 

Deb-ere  (debu-,  debit-),  to  owe — 
ought. 

Deced-6re  (decess-,  decess-,  de+ce- 
dere),  to  go  away,  depart,  retire. 

Decern,  indecl.,  ten. 

Decem-6re  (decrev-,  decret-,  407), 
decree,  determine.. 

Decert-ftre  (av-,  at-),  to  contend, 
fight. 

Decet,  impers.,  583,  decuit,  it  is  be- 
coming. 

Decim-us,  a,  um,  tenth. 

Ded-6re  (dedid-,  dedit-),  to  surren- 
der. 

Deditio,  (dedition)  is,  333,  R.,  sur- 
render. 

Deduc-6re  (dedux-,  deduct-),  to  lead 
away. 

De-esse  (defu-,  de+esse),  to  be  want- 
ing (with  dat.),  to  be  away. 

Defend-6re  (defend-,  defens-),  to  de- 
fend. 

Defess-us,  a,  um  (part,  of  defetisci, 
obsol.),  wearied,  worn  out. 

Defic-6re  (defec-,  defect-,  'de  + fa- 
cere),  to  fail,  to  be  wanting,  with 
dat. 

Belect-are  (av-,  at-),  to  delight. 

'  Del-ere  (delev-,  del6t-),  to  destroy. 

Deliber-ftre  (av-,  at-),  to  deliberate. 

Delig-6re  (delSg-,  delect-,  de  +  le- 
gere),  to  choose. 

Demetri-us,  i,  Demetrius  (proper 
name). 


Demum,  s.dv.,  finally,  at  last. 
Denique,  adv.,  at  last,  in  short. 
Dens,  (dent)  is,  m.,  295,  R.  1,  tooth, 
•  Dens-us,  a,  um,  thick,  dense. 
Depon-6re   (deposu-,  deposit-,   de+ 

ponere),  to  lay  aside,  put  down. 
Deser-6re  (deseru-,  desert-),  to  leave, 

desert. 
Desert-um,  i,  a  desert. 
Desil-ire  (desilu-,  desult-,  de+salire, 

428),  to  leap  down. 
Design-are  (av-,  at-),  to  point  out, 

allude  to. 
Desper-are  (av-,  at-,  de+sperare),  to 


Desperatio,  (desperation)  is,  despair, 
Deterr-6re  (deterru-,  deterrit-),  to  de- 

ter,  frighten  from. 
Deus,  i,  God,  62,  R. 
Dic-6re  (dix-,  diet-),  to  say,  teU. 
Dictio,  (diction)  is,  333,  R.,  speah* 

irig,  pleading. 
Dies,  ei,  day. 
Differre  (distul-,  dilat-,  dis+ferre),  to 

differ,  to  put  off. 
DiflScilis,  is,  e  (dis+facilis),  difficult, 
Dignitas,  (dignitat)  is,  293,  dignity, 

rank. 
Dign-us,  a,  um,  worthy,  with  abl. 
Diligens,  (diligent)  is,  careful,  dilu 

gent. 
Diiigenter,  215,  2,  b,  carefully,  dili- 


Dilig-6re  (dilex-,  dilect-,  di+legere), 

to  love  (with  esteem). 
Dimitt-ere  (dimis-,  dimiss-,  di+mit- 

tere),  to  send  away,  dismiss. 
Dirip-6re   (diripu-,   dirept-,  di  +  ra- 

pere),  to  plunder. 
Disced-Sre  (discess-,  discess-,  dis+ 

cedere,  401,  3,  h),  to  go  away,  de* 

part. 
Disc-6re  (didic-,  411,  a),  to  learn, 
Discess-us,  us,  departure. 
Disciplin-a,  ae,  instruction,  discipline* 
Discipul-us,  i,  scholar,  pupil. 


364- 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Disert-us,  a,  um,  jluent,  eloquent. 

Displic-ere  (displicu-,  displicit-,  dis 
+placere),  to  displease,  with  dat. 

Dispon-ere  (disposu-,  disposit-,  dis+ 
ponere),  to  place  in  different  di- 
rections, arrange,  dispose. 

Disput-are  (av-,  at-),  to  dispute,  dis- 
cuss. 

Dissent-ire  (dissens-,  dissens-,  dis+ 
sentire,  427,  III.)»  to  differ  in 
opinion,  dissent. 

Disser-6re  (disseru-,  dissert-,  407),  to 
treat  of,  discuss. 

dissolv-ere  (dissolv-,  dissolat-,  dis+ 
solvere),  to  dissolve. 

Dist-are,  to  be  distant,  or  apart  (di+ 
stare). 

Distribu-ere  (distribu-,  distribut-),  to 
.divide  or  distribute  among,  422. 

Ditissimus,  superl.  of  dives. 

Diu,  adv.,  long;   compar.,  diutius, 


Divers-us,  a,  um, 

Dives,  (divit)  is,  371,  R.  1,  rich. 

Divico,  (Divicon)  is,  Divico,  proper 

name. 
Divid-ere  (divis-,  divis-),  to  divide. 
Divin-us,  a,  nm,  divine. 
Divitiac-us,    i,    Divitiacus,    proper 

name. 
Divitiae,  arum,  57,  R.,  riches,  wealth. 
Doc-ere  (docu-,  doct-),  to  teach. 
Docilis,  is,  e,  104,  docile,  teachable. 
Dol-ere  (dolu-,  dolit-),  to  grieve. 
Dolor,  (dolor)  is,  319,  grief ,  pain. 
Dol-us,  \,  fraud,  deceit. 
Dom-are  (domu-,  domit-,  387,  II.),  to 

subdue. 
Domicili-um,  i,  dwelling. 
Domin-us,   i,  master ^  of  house    or 

slaves. 
Dom-us,  i    and   us,   112,  3,  house, 

home;  domi,  at  hom£;  domum,  to 

one's  house. 
Dorm -Ire  (dormiv-,  dormit-),  to  sleep. 
Draco,  (dracdn)  is,  331,  dragon. 


Druides,  um,  Druids,  priests  of  ttli* 
cient  Britain. 

Dubit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  doubt,  hesi- 
tate. 

Dubitatio,  (dubitation)  is,  333,  R., 
doubt. 

Dubi-us,  a,  um,  doubtful. 

Duc-ere  (dux-,  duct-),  to  lead. 

Duleis,  is,  e,  104,  sweet. 

Dum,  conj.,  while,  so  long  as,  until. 

Dumnorix,  (Dumnorig)  is,  Dumjio* 
rix,  proper  name. 

Duo,  two,  194. 

Duodecim,  indecl.,  twelve. 

Duplic-are  (av-,  at-),  to  double. 

Dur-are  (-av-,  at-),  ifitrans.,  to  endure, 
last ;  trans.,  to  harden. 

Dur-us,  a,  um,  hard. 

Dux,  (due)  is,  leader,  guide,  com- 
mander. 

E. 

E  or  ex,  prep.  v?^ith  abl.,  out  of, 

from. 
Ecquis,  interrog.  pron.,  178,  7,  any 

onel 
Ed-6re,  or  eSse  (ed-,  es-,  601),  to  eat. 
E  due-are  (av-,  at-),  to  train,  educate. 
E  duc-ere  (edux-,  educt-),  to  lead  out. 
Effect-US,  us,  effect. 
Effemin-are  (av-,  at-,  ei+feniina),  fd 

effeminate,  make  womanish. 
Ego,  /,  120. 
Egregi-us,  a,  um,  excellent,  remark 

able. 
Elegans,  (elegant)  is,  107,  elegant. 
Eloquens,    (eloquent)    is,   107,    do 

quent. 
Em-§re  (em-,  empt-),  to  buy. 
Emic-are  (emicu-),  387,  IL,  to  shine 

or  flash  forth. 
Enim,  conj.,/<?r,  442,  e. 
Enunti-are  (av-,  at-),  to  divulge. 
Eo,  adv.,  there,  to  that  place,  on  that 

account,  by  so  much. 
Eodem,  adv.,  to  the  same  place. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


365 


i3pistol-a,  ae,  letter. 

Eques,  (equit)  is,  horse  soldier. 

Equester,  tris,  tre,  428,  a,  belonging 

to  cavalry.    Equestri  praelio,  in  a 

battle  of  cavalry. 
E  quit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  ride  on  horse- 
back. 
Equitat-us,  us,  cavalry. 
Equ-us,  i,  horse. 
Erip-ere  (eripu-,  crept,  e+rapere),  to 

take  avmy  from,  snatch  away. 
Err-are  (av-,  at-,)  to  err,  wander. 
Erump-ere  (erup-,  erupt-),  to  burst 

forth,  sally  out. 
Esse,  to  be,  650 ;  esse,  to  eat,  see 

edere. 
Et,  conj.,  and,    Et — et,  both — and. 
Etenim,  con].,  for. 
Etiam,  conj.,  also,  even. 
Etsi,  conj.,  although. 
Europ-a,  ae,  Europe. 
Evoc-are  (av-,  at-,  e-j-vocare),  to  call 

out. 
Ex,  prep,  with  abl.    See  E. 
Exced-6re  (excess-,  excess-,  ex+ce- 

dere),  to  go  away,  depart  out  of. 
Exclam-are  (av-,  at-),  to  cry  out. 
Excip-6re  (excep-,  except-,  ex+ca- 

pere),  to  receive. 
Excit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  raise,  kindle, 

excite. 
Excusatio,  (excusation)  is,  333,  R., 

excuse. 
Exe-dere  (exed-,  exes-,  ex+edere), 

to  eat  up,  consume,  corrode. 
Exempl  um,  i,  example. 
Exerc-ere  (exercu-,  exercit-),  to  ex- 
ercise, practice. 
Exercit-us,  us,  army. 
Exigu-us,  a,  um,  small, 
Ex-ire  (exiv-  and  exi-,  exit-),  to  go 

out,  depart. 
Existim-are  (av-,  at-),  to  think,  judge. 
Existimatio,  (existimation)  is,  333, 

R.,  opinion. 
Expect-are  (av-,  at-),  to  wait  for  ^ 

H 


Expedit,  impers.,  583,  it  is  expedient. 
Expeditio,  (expedition)  is,  333,  E,., 

military  expedition. 
Expell-ere  (expul-,  expuls-,  ex-f-pel- 

lere),  to  expel,  drive  out. 
Expers,  (expert)  is,  107,  devoid  of, 

with  gen.  or  abl.,  336. 
Expet-ere    (expetiv-,    expetit-),   to 

covet,  desire  earnestly. 
Explorator,  (explorator)  is,  319,  scout. 
Expon-6re  (exposu-,  exposit-,  ex+ 

ponere),  to  place  out,  set  forth,  ex- 
plain. 
Expugn-are  (av-,  at-,  ex+pugnare), 

to  take  by  storm. 
Extra,  prep,  with  accus.,  outside  of, 

without. 
Extrem-us,  a,  um,  superl.  of  exterus, 

370,  the  last,  outermost. 
Exur-6re  (exuss-,  exust-,  ex+urere), 

to  burn  up. 

F. 

Faber,  bri,  artificer ,  workman. 

Fabul-a,  as,  fable,  story. 

Fac-ere  (io,  fee-,  fact-),  to  make,  do. 

Facile,  adv.,  easily. 

Facilis,  is,  e,  104,  easy. 

Facultas,  (facultat)  is,  293,  power  of 

doing ;  hence  means,  resources. 
Facund-us,  a,  um,  eloquent. 
Fall-ere  (fefell-,  fals-),  to  deceive. 
Fam-a,  as,  rumour,  fame. 
Fames,  (fam)  is,  300,  hunger. 
Famili-a,  as,  family,  gang  of  slaves. 
Familiaris,  e,  belonging  to  the  fami- 

lia.     Res  familiaris,  property. 
Fat-eri  (fass-),  dep.,  to  confess. 
Fat-ura,  i,  fate. 
Fav-gre  (fav-,  faut-,  395,  v.),  to  fa* 

vour. 
Felix,  (felTc)  is,  104,  happy. 
Femin-a,  sb,  woman. 
Fer-a,  ae,  ivild  beast. 
Fere,  adv.,  almost. 
Ferre  (tul-,  lat-,  596),  to  bear, 

h2 


366 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Ferocul-us,  a,  um,  surly. 

Ferox,  (feroc)  is,  \Q1,  fierce. 

Ferr-uin,  i,  iron. 

Festin-are  (av-,  at-),  to  hasten, 

Fid-es,  ei,  faith. 

Fieri  (fact-),  600,  used  as  pass,  of  fa- 
cere  ;  to  be  made,  to  become. 

Figur-a,  dd,  figure. 

Fili-a,  ae,  daughter,  dat.  and  abl.  pi. 
filiabus. 

Fili-us,  i,  son,  62,  H.,  2. 

Fin-is,  (fin)  is,  m.,  end,  boundary; 
fines,  boundaries,  territories. 

Finitim-us,  a,  um,  neighbouring. 

Firm-US,  a,  um,  strong,  firm. 

Fit,  it  happens,  pres.  indie,  of  fio, 
fieri. 

Flagiti-um,  i,  disgraceful  crime,  in- 
famy. 

Flamm-a,  XB,fiame. 

Fl-ere  (flev-,  flet-,  395.  II.),  to  weep. 

Flet-us,  us,  lueeping. 

Flos,  (flor)  is,  331,  b,  fiower. 

Fluct-us,  us,  wave. 

Flumen,  (flumin)  is,  344,  a,  river. 

Fluvi-us,  i,  river. 

Foedus,  (feeder)  is,  344,  b,  treaty, 
league. 

Foli-um,  i,  leaf. 

Fons,  (font)  is,  m.,  293,  "K.,  fountain. 

Foris,  (for)  is,  300,  door ;  used  most- 
ly in  plur.,  fores. 

Form-a,  fe,form. 

Formid-are  (av-,  at-),  to  fear,  be 
afraid  of. 

Formos-us,  a,  um,  handsome. 

Forsitan,  adv.,  perhaps. 

Forte,  adv.,  by  chance. 

Fort-is,  is,  e,  107,  brave. 

Fortiter,  215,  2,  b,  bravely. 

Fortitudo,  (fortitudin)  is,  ^29,  forti- 
tude, courage. 

Fortun-a,  tB,  fortune, 

Fortunat-us,  a,  um,  fortunate. 

For-um,  i,  forum. 

Fossa,  tB,  ditch. 


Fresn-um,  i,  bridle,  396 ;  pL,  firseni 

and  fraena. 
Frater,  (fratr)  is,  brother. 
Fratern-us,  a,  woa,  fraternal. 
Fraus,  (fraud)  is,  '2^2,  fraud. 
Frigus,  (frigor)  is,  344,  b,  cold. 
Fruct-us,  us,  fruit. 
Frument-ari   (frumentat-),   dep.,   to ' 

collect  corn. 
Frument-um,  i,  cor^, 
Frustra,  adv.,  in  vain. 
Fug-a,  XB,  flight. 
Fug-are   (av-,  at-),  to  rout,  put  to 

flight. 
Fug-ax,   (fugac)   is,    107,  fugitive, 


Fug-6re  (io,  fug-,  fugit),  to  flee. 
Fulgur,  (fulgur)  is,  325,  lightning. 
Fund-ere  (fud-,  fus-),  to  pour  out,  to 

overthrow,  discomfit. 
Funditor,  (funditor)  is,  319,  slinger, 
Futur-us,  a,  um,  future. 

G. 

Galb-a,  ae,  Galba. 

Galli-a,  ae,  Gaul. 

Gallin-a,  ae,  hen. 

Gall-US,  i,  a  Gaul. 

Garumn-a,  ae,  Garonne  (river). 

Gaud-ere  (gavisus  sum),  to  rejoice. 

Gaudi-um,  i,  joy. 

Gener,  i,  son-in-law. 

Genev-a,  ae,  Geneva. 

Gens,  (gent)  is,  293,  nation. 

Genus,  (gener)  is,  344,  b,  race,  class. 

Ger-ere  (gess-,  gest-),  to  carry  on ; 
gerere  bellum,  to  carry  on  war, 

German-US,  i,  a  German. 

Gladi-us,  i,  sword. 

Glori-a,  ae,  glory. 

Graec-ufi,  a,  um,  Greek. 

Grando,  (grandin)  is,  339,  hail. 

Grati-a,  ae,  influence,  favour,  popu- 
larity. 

Gratul-ari  (gratulat-),  dap.,  to  con 
gratulate. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


367 


Grat-us,  a,  um,  agreeable. 

Gravis,  is,  e,  heavy,  severe. 

Graviter,  adv.,  heavily,  disagreea- 
ble ;  graviter  fert,  he  is  indignant 
at. 

Gregatim,  adv.,  injlocks. 

Gubern-are  (av-,  at-),  to  steer,  direct, 
govern. 

Gubeniator,  (gubemator)  is,  319,  pi- 
lot, governor. 

H. 
Hab-ere  (habu-,  habit-),  to  have,  hold, 

esteem. 
Hannibal,  (Hannibal)  is,  Hannibal. 
Haud,  adv.,  not. 
Helveti-us,  i,  a  Helvetian. 
Herb-a,  ae,  herb. 
Hercyni-us,  a,  um,  Hercynian;  Her- 

cynia  sylva,  the  Hercynian  forest. 
Heri,  adv.,  yesterday. 
Hibem-a,  orum,  winter-quarters. 
Hibemi-a,  aB,  Ireland. 
Hie,  haec,  hoc,  this,  156. 
Hiem-are  (av-,  at-),  to  winter. 
Hiems,  (hiem)'  is,  293,  winter. 
Hirundo,  (hirundin)  is,  339,  swallow. 
Hispani-a,  ae,  Spain. 
Hispan-us,  i,  a  Spaniard. 
Histori-a,  ae,  history. 
Hodie,  adv.,  to-day. 
Homer-us,  i,  Ho'tner. 
Homo,  (homin)  is,  m.,  man. 
Honest-e,  adv.,  honmirably. 
Honest-US,  a,  um,  honourable. 
Honor,  (honor)  is,  319,  honour. 
Hor-a,  ae,  hour. 
Horati-us,  i,  Horace. 
Hort-ari  (hortat-),  to  exhort,  dep. 
Hort-us,  i,  garden. 
Hospes,  (hospit)  is,  c,  guest,  host. 
Hostis,  (host)  is,  c,  enemy. 
Human-us,  a,  um,  human. 
Humanitas,  (humanitat)  is,  293,  cul- 
tivation, refinement,  humanity. 
Humilis,  is,  e,  107,  lo^o. 


I. 

Ibi,  adv.,  there. 

Idem,  eadem,  idem,  the  same,  150. 

Idone-us,  a,  yxm,fit,  suitable. 

Idus,  idaum  (4th  declen.),  the  Ides. 

112,  2. 
Ignavi-a,  ae,  indolence,  cowardice. 
Ignav-us,  a,  um,  indolent,  cowardly. 
Ignis,  (ign)  is,  m,,  302,  J\j.,fire. 
Ignomini-a,  ae,  disgrace,  ignominy. 
Ignor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  be  ignorant. 
Ignoratio,    (ignoratiou)  is,   333,   R., 

ignorance. 
nie,  ilia,  illud,  this,  that,  158. 
Imago,  (imagin)  is,  339,  image. 
Imber,  (imbr)  is,  320,  shower  of  rain* 
Immemor,    (immemor)    is,   107,  un- 

mindful,  with  gen. 
Immens-us,  a,  um,  immense. 
Immortalis,  is,  e,  104,  immortal. 
Impediment-um,  i,  hinderance;  im- 
pedimenta, pi.,  the  baggage  of  an 

army, 
Imped-ire   (iv-,   it-),   to  hinder,  im- 
pede. 
Impend-ere,  to  hang  over. 
Imper-are    (av-,   at-),   to   command, 

with  dat. 
Imperator,  (imperator)  is,  319,  com- 

mander,  general. 
Imperi-um,  i,  command. 
Impetr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  accomplish, 

eject,  obtain. 
Impet-us,  us,  anset,  attach ;  impetum 

facere,  to  make  an  attack. 
Impie,  adv.,  215,  1,  impiously. 
Impi-us,  a,  um,  impious. 
Impl-ere  (implev-,  implet-),  to  fill  up. 
Implor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  implore. 
Impon-ere    (imposu-,   imposit-,  iu+ 

ponere,  407),  to  place  in  or  upon. 
Import  are    (av-,    at-),   to   bring  in, 

import. 
Improb-us,  a,  um,  wicked,  dishonest. 
In,  prep,  with  ace,  into,  against, 

with  abl.,  in,  among. 


368 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Incend-Sre  (incend-,  incens-),  to  set 

Jire  to,  to  bum. 
Incert-us,    a,   um,   doubtful,   U7icer- 
tain. 

Incip-ere  (io,  incep-,  incept-),  to  be- 
gin. 

Incol-a,  SB,  inhabitant. 

Incol-ere  (incolu-,  incult-),  dwell  in, 
inhabit. 

Incommod-um,  i,  inconvenience. 

Incredibilis,  is,  e,  104,  incredible. 

Increp-are  (increpa-,  increpit-,  390), 
to  chide. 

Incus-are  (av-,  at-),  to  blame. 

Inde,  adv.,  thence. 

Indici-um,  i,  private  information. 

Indign-us,  a,  um,  unworthy. 

Induc-ere  (indux-,  induct-),  to  lead 
to,  induce. 

Indulg-ere  (induls-,  indult-),  with 
dat.,  to  indulge. 

Ineptioe,  arum,  57,  'R.,  folly. 

Inerti-a,  ae,  idleness. 

Infans,  (infant)  is,  c,  infant;  (in+ 
fari,  that  cannot  speak). 

Inferior,  (inferior)  is,  comp.  of  infe- 
rus,  370,  inferior,  low&r. 

Inferre  (intul-,  illat-,  in+ferre),  to 
bring  upon;  bellum  alicui  iaferre, 
to  wage  war  upon  any  one. 

Ingeni-um,  i,  talent. 

Ingens,  (ingent)  is,  107,  great,  enor- 
mous. 

Inimiciti-a,  jb,  enmity. 

Inimic-us,  a,  um,  hostile,  unfriendly, 
with  dat. 

Initi-um,  i,  beginning. 

Injuri-a,  8e,  injury,  outrage. 

Injust-us,  a,  um,  unjust. 

Innocens,  (innocent)  is,  107,  inno- 
cent. 

Innocenti-a,  ae,  innocence. 

Innumerabilis,  is,  e,  104,  innumer- 
able. 

Inops,  (inop)  is,  107,  poor. 

Inquam,  /  say  ;  inquit,  says  he,  610. 


Insciens,  (inscient)  is,  107,  not  Jcnow- 
ing. 

Insecfc-um,  i,  insect. 

Insequ-i  (insecut-),  dep.,  to  pursue. 

Insidi-se,  arum,  57,  R.,  snares,  am- 
bush. 

Instig-are  (av-,  at-),  to  instigate. 

Institut-um,  i,  purpose,  plan. 

Instru-ere  (instrux-,  instruct-,  in+ 
struere),  to  draw  up  i?^  battle  ar- 
ray. 

Insul-a,  86,  island. 

Intellig-ere  (intellex-,  iutellect-),  to 
perceive,  understand. 

Intent-us,  a,  um,  intent,  bent  upon. 

Inter,   prep,   with   accus.,   between. 


Interced-ere  (intercess-,  intercess-), 

to  intervene. 
Interdiu,  adv.^  by  day. 
Interdum,  adv.,  so'metimes. 
Inter-esse  (interfu-),  to  be  among,  to 

differ ;  nihil  interest,  it  makes  no 

difference. 
Interfector,    ( interfector )    is,    319. 

slayer. 
Interfic-6re  (interfec-,  interfect-,  ii> 

ter+facere),  to  slay,  kill. 
Interim,  adv^  in  the  mean  while. 
Interitus,  us,  perishing,  destruction, 

death. 
Interregn-um,  i,  interreign. 
Interrog-are  (av-,  at-),  to  ask,  inter- 
rogate. 
Intu-eri  (intuit-),  dep.,  to  look  upon, 
Inven-ire   (inven-,  invent-),  to  find, 

discover. 
Invoc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  call  upon,  in- 

voke. 
Ipse,  a,  um,  159,  self. 
Ir-a,  88,  anger. 

Iracundi-a,  ae,  wrathfulness,  wrath, 
ire  (iv-,  it-),  605,  to  go. 
Irrump-6re  (irrup-,  irrupt-,  in+rum 

pere),  to  break  into. 
Is,  ea,  id,  this,  that,  he,  she,  it,  153. 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


369 


Iste,  a,  nd,  that,  157. 
Ita,  adv.,  so,  thus. 
Italia,  ae,  Italy. 

Iter,   (itiner)   is,  n.,  journey,  way, 
march. 


Jac-ere  ( jec-,  jact-),  to  cast,  hurl. 

Jact-are  (av-,  at-),  to  discuss. 

Jacul-um,  i,  dart. 

Jam,  adv.,  tiow,  already. 

Jan-US,  i,  Janus. 

Jnb-ere  ( juss-,  juss-),  to  order. 

Jucund-us,  a,  um,  pleasant. 

Judex,  (judic)  ia,  306,  judge. 

Judic-are  (av-,  at-),  to  judge. 

Judici-um,  i,  trial,  judgment. 

Jugurth-a,  se,  Jugurtha. 

Jug-um,  i,  yoke. 

Jument-um,  i,  beast  of  burden, 

Jung-ere  ( junx-,  junct-),  to  join. 

Juno,  (Junon)  is,  f.,  Jvmo  (goddess). 

Jupiter,  Jovis,  351,  Jupiter. 

Jura,   ae,  Jura   (mountain   east   of 

Gaul). 
Jur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  swear. 
Jus,  (jur)  is,  344,  law,  right. 
Juss-us,  us,  command. 
Justiti-a,  vB,jtLstice. 
Just-us,  a,  um,  just. 
Juv-are  ( juv-,  jut),  to  help. 
Juvenis,  is,  a  youth. 
Juventus,  (juventut)  is,  293,  ymtth. 
Juxta,  prep,  with  ace,  n^ar. 

K. 

Kalend-ae,  arum.  Kalends. 
L. 

Labienus,  i,  Labienus,  one  of  Cae- 
sar's lieutenant-generals. 

Labor,  (labor)  is,  319,  labour,  toil. 

Labor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  labour. 

Lac,  (lact)  is,  346,  2,  milk. 

Lacess-6re  (iv-,  it-,  406,  III.,  b),  to 
provoke,  harass. 

Lacrym-a,  bb,  tear. 


Lac-US,  us,  lake. 

Lapis,  (lapid)  is,  295,  3,  stone. 

Larg-iri  (it-),  dep.,  to  give  largess, 

to  bribe,  515. 
Larg-iter,  adv.,  215,  2,  b,  largely; 

largiter   potest,   h^   can   largely, 

i.  e.,  he  is  quite  powerful. 
Lat-e,  adv.,  215,  1,  widely  (lat-us, 

wide). 
Latin-US,  a,  um,  Latin. 
Latitudo,  (latitudin)  is,  340,  breadth 

(from  latus,  broad). 
Latins,  adv.,  more  widely  (compar 

of  late,  376). 
Latro,  (latron)  is,  331,  a,  robber. 
Lat-us,  a,  um,  broad,  wide. 
Laud-are  (av-,  at),  to  praise. 
Laus,  (laud)  is,  293,  praise. 
Legatio,  (legation)  is,  333,  R.,  em- 


Legat-us,  i,  lieutenant,  ambassador. 
Leg-6re  (leg-,  lect-,  416,  a),  to  read. 
Legio,  (legion)  is,  333,  R.,  legion. 
Lemann-us,  i,  Lake  Leman,  or  Ge 

nexia. 
Leo,  (leon)  is,  333,  lion. 
Lepus,  (lepor)  is,  m.,  345,  4,  hare. 
Lev-are   (av-,  at-),  to  light&a,,  all& 

mate. 
Lex,  (leg-)  is,  293,  law. 
Libenter,  adv.,  willingly,  gladly. 
Liber,  libri,  64,  book. 
Liberalitas,  (liberalitat)  is,  293,  lib 


Liber-e,  215,  1,  freely  (from  liber, 
free). 

Liber-i,  orum,  65,  H.,  children. 

Liber-tas,  (libertat)  is,  293,  freedom, 
liberty. 

Libet,  583,  libebat,  libuit,  or  libitum 
est,  impers.,  it  is  agreeable,  it 
pleases,  it  suits. 

Lic-eri  (licit),  dep.,  to  bid  money,  to 
offer  a  price. 

Licet,  licuit,  licitum  est,  it  is  allow- 
ed, it  is  lawful,  one  must,  583. 


370 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


Lili-Tim,  i,  lily. 

Lingu-a,  sb,  language. 

Litter-a,  se,  a  letter  (as  of  the  alpha- 
bet) ;  litter-ae,  arum  (pi.),  a  letter, 
i.  e.,  an  epistle. 

Littus,  (littor)  is,  344,  b,  shore. 

Livi-us,  i,  Livy,  a  Roman  historian. 

Loc-us,  i  and  a,  309,  place. 

Long-e,  adv.,  215,  l,far,  long :  (long- 
us.) 

Longitude,  (longitudin)  is,  339, 
length:  (longus.) 

Long-us,  a,  um,  long. 

Loqu-i  (locut-),  dep.,  to  speak. 

Lubet.     See  libet. 

Luct-us,  us,  grief. 

Lud-ere  (lus-,  Itis-,  401,  3,  b),  to 
play. 

Lnd-us,  i,  sport,  gatne,  pluy. 

Lnn-a,  ae,  moon. 

Lup-us,  i,  wolf. 

Lux,  (luc)  is,  293,  light. 

M. 

Macul-are  (av-,  at-),  to  stadn. 

Magis,  adv.,  more. 

Magister,  tri  (64),  master,  teacher. 

Magistrat-us,  us,  a  magistrate. 

MagnanimHS,  a,  um  (magn-us+ani- 
mus ),  high-spirited,  magnani- 
mous. 

Magnitude,  (magnitudin)  is  (340), 
extent,  greatness. 

Magnus,  a,  um,  great ;  comp.,  ma- 
jor, greater. 

Male,  adv.  (215, 1,  R.),  badly. 

Maleficium,  i  (800,  2),  evil  deed, 
crime. 

Malle  (592),  to  be  tnore  willing,  to 
prefer ;  perf.,  malui. 

Malum,  i,  evil,  misfortune. 

Man-ere  (mans-,  mans-),  665,  III., 
to  remain. 

Manus,  us  (f.,  112,  2),  hand,  band 
of  soldiers. 

Mare,  (mar)  is  (314),  sea. 


Massilia,  se,  Marseilles. 
Mater,  (matr)  is  (f.,  25,  2),  mother, 
Matrimonium,  i,  matrimony. 
Matrona,  se,  the  Mame,  a  river  of 

Gaul. 
Matur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  hasten. 
Maxim-e    (adv.,    376),    most,   most 

greatly,  i7i  the  highest  degree. 
Maxim-us,   a,  um  (sup.  of  magnus, 

370),  greatest. 
Me  {ace.  and  abl.  of  ego,  /),  we; 

mecum,  with  me  (125,  II.,  b). 
Medicin-a,  ae,  medicine. 
Mediterrane-us,    a,   um,  Mediterra- 
nean (medi-us+terr-a). 
Medi-us,  a,  um,  middle. 
Meli-us,  adv.  (376),  better. 
Memini  (defect,  611),  /  remember; 

meminisse,  to  remember. 
Memori-a,  as,  memory ;  memoria  te- 

nere,  to  hold  in  memory,  to  re- 

member. 
Mens,  (ment)  is,  f.,  mind. 
Mercator,  (mercator)  is  (319),  wcr- 

chant, 
Meridi-es,    ei    (m.,   115),    mid-day, 

noon. 
Merit-um,  i,  m,erit,  desert. 
Metall-um,  i,  metal. 
Met-ere  (messu-,  mess-,  666,  II.,  b), 

to  reap. 
Met-iri  (mens-),  dep.,  to  measure. 
Metu-ere  (metu-,  666,  VI.,  a),  to  fear. 
Me-us,  a,  um  (122),  my,  mine. 
Mic-are  (micu-,  664,  II.),  to  glitter, 

shine. 
Migr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  migrate. 
Miles,  (milit)  is,  soldier. 
Mille  (sing.  indecL,  pi.  miUia,  ium), 

thousand. 
Minerv-a,  ae,  Minerva. 
Minim-us,   a,  um,  least  [superl.  of 

parvus,  370). 
Minor  (minus),  358,  less  (compar.  of 

parvus,  370). 
Minu-gre  (minu-,  mindt-),  to  diminish. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


371 


Mirabil-is,  is,  e,  wonderfuL  I 

Miriiic-us,    a,  um,   causing  wonder,  \ 
astonishing  (mir-us+facere) . 

Miser,    a,    um    (77,    h),    miserable, 
wretched. 

Miseret  (impers.,  579,  a),  one  pities  ; 
me  miseret,  I  pity. 

Mitig"-are  (av-,  at-),  to  mitigate. 

Mitt-ere  (mis-,  miss-,   401,  3,  b),  to 
send. 

Mod-US,  i,  measure,  manner. 

McBuia,  ium  (used  only  in  pi.),  walls. 

Moeror,  (moeror)  is  (319),  sadness. 

Mon-ere  (monu-,  monit-),  to  advise, 
warn,  remind. 

Monstr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  shoio. 

Mord-ere  (momord-,  mors-,  395,  IV.), 
to  bite,  champ. 

Mor-i,  and  mor-Iri  (mort-),  dep.,  to 
die. 

Mortal -is,  is,  e,  mortal. 

Mors,  (mort)  is,  293,  death. 

Mos,  (mor)  is,  331, 1,  b,  custom,  man- 
ner. 

Mot-US,  us,  motion,  moving. 

Mov-ere    (mov-,    mot-,    395,  V.),   to 
move. 

Miilier,  (mulier)  is,  (f.),  woman. 

Multitudo,  (multitudin)  is,  340,  mul- 
titude. 

Mult-US,  a,  um,  much,  many. 

Mund-us,  i,  world. 

Mun-ire  (iv-,  it),  to  fortify. 

Muuitio,  (munition)  is,  333,  "R^.,  forti- 
fication. 

Munus,  (muner)  is,  344,  3,  b,  office, 
gift.  ^ 

Murus,  i,  wall. 

Mut-are  (av-,  at-),  to  change. 

N. 

Nam,  con}.,  for. 

Nasc-i  (nat),  dep.,  to  be  born,  spring 

from. 
Nat-are  (av-,  at-),  to  swim. 
Naut-a,  ce  (m.),  sailor. 


Natio,  (nation)  is,  333,  R.,  nation. 
Natur-a,  a3,  nature. 
Naval-e,  (naval)  is,  314,  a  dock-yard'. 
Navigatio,  (navigatidn)  13,  333,  B;., 

navigation,  voyage. 
Nav-is,  (nav)  is,  300,  ship. 
Ne,  interrogative  particle,  135,  II.,  a. 
Ne,    adv.,    not,   used   imperatively, 

534,  a ;  conj.,  that  not,  548,  b. 
Nee,  conj.,  nor.        -^ 
Neg-are  (av-,  at-),  to  deny,  refuse. 
Neglig-ere    (neglex-,   neglect-,   666, 

v.,  a),  to  neglect. 
Negligens,  (negligent)  is,  107,  neg- 


Negoti-um,  i,  m,atterf  business. 

Nemo,  (nemin)  is,  c,  no  one. 

Neque,  conj.,  neither,  nor,  515. 

Nequidem,  adv.,  not  even,  217;  al- 
vs^ays  separated  by  the  words 
which  have  the  emphasis  ;  e.  g., 
ne  Socrates  quidem,  not  even  Soc- 
rates. 

Nervi-us,  i,  a  Nervian  (people  of 
Gaul). 

Nerv-us,  i,  a  sinew. 

Nesc-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  be  ignorant,  not 
to  knoiu  (ne+scire). 

Neuter,  tra,  trum,  194,  1,  neither  of 
the  two. 

Nidific-are  (av-,  at-),  to  build  a  nest 
(nidus-f-facere). 

Niger,  nigra,  nignim,  77,  a,  black. 

Nihil,  n.,  indecl.,  nothing. 

Nimi-us,  a,  um,  too  much. 

Nit-i  (nis-  and  nix-),  dep.,  to  strive. 

Nisi,  conj.,  unless,  if  not. 

Nobilis,  is,  e,  noble,  illustrious. 

Nobilitas,  (nobilitat)  is,  293,  nubil- 
ity. 

Noc-ere  (nocu-,  nocit-),  to  hurt,  with 
dat. 

Noctu,  adv.,  by  night. 

Nolle,  nolui,  to  be  unwilling,  592. 

Nomen,  (nomin)  is,  344,  a,  name. 

Non,  adv.,  not. 


372 


LATtN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


Nonne,  interrogative  particle  (ex- 
pects answer  yes). 

NonnuUus,  a,  um,  some ;  nonnulli, 
soTne  [persons). 

Nonnunquam,  adv.,  soTnetimes. 

Non-US,  a,  um,  ninth. 

Nos,  we,  120. 

Nosc-ere  (nov-,  not-),  to  learn,  know. 

Noster,  tra,  trum,  122,  our. 

Nov-i  (gen.  of  novus),  n^ews,  174  (vo- 
cab.). 

NOv-i,  defective,  /  know,  611 ;  no- 
visse,  to  know. 

Novissimus,  a,  um  (superl.  of  no- 
vus), newest,  latest ;  novissimum 
agmen,  the  rear-rank. 

Novitas,    (novitat)    is,    293, 
(novus). 

Nov-us,  a,  um,  Tiew. 

Nox,  (noct)  is,  293,  night. 

Nub-es,  (nub)  is,  300,  cloud. 

Nud-us,  a,  um,  naked. 

Nullus,    a,   um,    gen.   nuUius, 
nuUi,  194,  1,  no  one,  none. 

Num   ( interrog.   particle 

(expects  the  answer  no,  174). 

Numa,  ae  (m.),  Numa. 

Numer-us,  i,  number. 

Nunti-are  (av-,  at-),  to  announce. 

Nunti-us,  i,  a  messenger. 

Nunquam,  adv.,  never. 

NaptiaB,  arum,  57,  B,.,  a  marriage. 

Nutrix,  (nutric)  is,  293,  nurse. 

O. 

Ob  (prep,  with  ace),  on  account  of. 
Obaeratus,  a,  um,  a  debtor. 
Obscur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  obscure. 
Obsecr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  beseech. 
Obses,  (obsid)  is  (c),  hostage. 
Obstring-6re  (obstrinx-,  obstrict-),  to 

bind:  ob+stringere. 
Obtin-ere  (obtinu-,  obtent-),  to  hold^ 

mmntain:^  ob+ten6re. 
Occas-us,  us,  setting,  e.  g.,  of  the  sun ; 

occasu  solis,  sunset,  118,  II.,  c. 


dat. 


whether    Oi 
74).  Cjh 

r 


Occidens,  (Occident)  is,  m.  (sol  un- 
derstood), ^vest. 

Occid-6re    ( occid-,   occas-,   ob  +  ca- 
dere),  to  fall,  set,  die. 

Occid-ere    (occid-,   occis-,   ob  +  cae- 
dere),  to  slay,  kill. 

Occup-are  (av-,   at-),  to  seize,  take 
possession  of. 

Oceanus,  i,  ocean. 

Octavus,  a,  um,  eighth. 

Octoginta  (indecl.),  eighty. 

Octoni,  ae,  a,  eight  each,  eight  at  a 
time,  197. 

Ocul-us,  i,  eye. 

Odi  (defect.,  611),  I  hate;  odisse,  to 
hate. 

Odi-um,  i,  liaired. 

OjBPend-ere  (offend-,  offens-,  ob+fen- 
dere),  to  offend. 

Olim,  adv.,  once  upon  a  time,  for- 
merly. 

Omnino,  adv.,  altogether,  in  all. 

Omnis,  is,  e,  all,  every,  ths  whole; 
omnis  res,  the  whole  affair. 

Onus,  (oner)  is,  344,  b,  burden,  load. 
^^per-a,  ae,  toil,  labour. 
portet   (impers.,   583),  oportebat, 
oportuit,  it  behooves,  one  might. 

Oppidan-US,  a,  um,  of  or  belonging 
to  a  town,  a  toionsman. 

Oppid-um,  i,  a  town. 

Opprim-ere  (oppress-,  oppress-,  ob 
+premere),  to  repress,  crush. 

Oppugn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  atta/ik,  be- 
siege (ob+pugnare). 

Ops,  opis,  293,  power ;  opes,  resour- 
ces, means. 

Optim-us,    a,   um,   best   [superl.  of 
bonus). 

Opulens,  (opulent)  is,  107,  rich,  opu- 
lent. 

Opus,  (oper)  is,  344,  b,  work. 

Oracul-um,  i,  oracle. 

Or-are  (av-,  at-),  to  pray,  beg,  beseech. 

O  ratio,  (oration)  is,  333,  R,.,  oration, 
speech. 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


373 


Orator,  (orator)  is,  319,  orator. 

Orb-is,  (orb)  is  (m.,  302,  R.),  orb,  cir- 
cle ;  orbis  terrarum,  the  world. 

Ordo,  (ordin)  is  (m.,  340,  exc),  order. 

Orgetorix,  (Orgetorig)  is,  Orgetorix, 
a  Helvetian  chieftain. 

Origo,  (origin)  is,  339,  origin. 

Or-iri  (ort-),  dep.,  to  rise. 

Om-are  (av-,  at-),  to  adorn. 

Omatus,  a,  um,  adorned,  part,  of  or- 
nare.        . 

Ostend-dre.  ..(ostend-,  ostens-,  ob+ 
tendere)>  Yo  show, 

Ostent-are  (av-,  at-),  to  vaunt. 

V    ^  p. 

Pabulatio,  (pabulation)  is,  333,  B,., 
foddering,  foraging. 

Paene,  adv.,  almost. 

Pag-us,  i,  village,  canton. 

Palus,  (palud)  is,  293,  marsh. 

Par-are  (av-,  at-),  to  prepare. 

Parat-us,  a,  um,  prepared,  ready 
(part.  pass,  of  parare). 

Parc-ere  (peperc-,  pars-  and  parcit-, 
666,  IV.,  b),  to  spare,  with  dot. 

Par-6re  (paru-),  with  dat.,  to  obey. 

Pars,  (part)  is,  293,  part. 

Parsimoni-a,  ae,  parsimony,  frugal- 
ity. 

Parv-us,  a,  um,  small,  Httle. 

Pastor,  (pastor)  is,  319,  shepherd. 

Pater,  (patr)  is,  father ;  patres,  um, 
patricians  of  Rome. 

Pat-ere  (patu),  to  be  open,  extend. 

Pat-i,  (pass-),  dep.,  to  svffer. 

Patienter,  adv.,  215,  2,  b,  patiently. 

Patienti-a,  se,  patience,  endurance. 

Paucitas,  (paucitat)  is,  2^^,  fewness. 

Pauci,  SB,  a.,  few. 

Paullisper,  adv.,  for  a  little  while. 

PauUo,  adv.,  a  little ;  pauUo  longius, 
a  little  too  far. 

Pauper,  (pauper)  is,  107,  poor. 

Paupertas,  (paupertat)  is,  293,  pov- 
erty. 


Pax,  (pac)  is,  293,  peace. 

Pecc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  sin. 

Peccat-um,  i,  sin. 

Pecuni-a,  ae,  money. 

Pedes,  (pedit)  is,  306,  foot-soldier. 

Pell-6re  (pepul-,  puis-,  411,  b),  tQ 
drive,  rout,  expel,  defeat. 

Pellis,  (pell)  is,  300,  hide,  skin. 

Pend-6re  (pepend-,  pens-,  666,  IV., 
a),  to  weigh,  pay. 

Pene,  adv.,  alrnost. 

Peninsul-a,  ae,  peninsula  (pene-f  in- 
sula). 

Per   {prep,  with  accus.),   through. 


Perdives,    (perdivit-)   is,    107,  v&ry 

rich. 
Perduc-6re  (perdux-,  perduct-,  per+ 

ducere),   to  lead  through,   bring 

along. 
Perfacilis,  is,  e,  very  easy. 
Perferre  (pertul-,  perlat-,  pep+-ferre), 

to  convey,  bear  through. 
Perfic-ere  (perfec-,  perfect-,  per-ffa- 

cere),  to  accomplish,  finish,  bring 

to  pass. 
Perfring-ere  (perfreg-,  perfract-,  per 

+frangere),  to  break  through. 
Perfug-a,  ae,  deserter. 
Perg-ere  (perrex-,  perrect-),  to  go 

on,  go  straight, 
Pericul-um,  i,  danger. 
Per-ire   (peri-,   perit-,   per+ire),   to 


ii 


Peritus,   a,   um,  skilful,  skilled  in 

(with  gen.). 
Perm6v-ere   (permov-,  permot-),  to 

move  thoroughly,  to  induce. 
Pemici-es,  ei,  destruction. 
Perpauci,  ae,  a,  very  few, 
Perpetu-us,  a,  um,  perpetual. 
Perrump-6re  (perrup-,  perrupt-,  per 

+rumpere),  to  break  through. 
Pers-a,  ae,  a  Persian. 
Persequ-i   (persecut-,  per+seqm), 

dep.,  to  follow  after,  jmrsue. 


374 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


Persever-are  (av-,  at),  to  persevere. 
Persolv-ere  (persolv-,  persolut-,  per 

+solvere),  to  pay  up,  pay  in  full  ; 

pcenas   persolvere,  to  suffer  full 


Perspic-ere  (perspex-,  perspect-),  to 

observe,  get  sight  of,  see  plainly. 
Persuad-ere  (persuas-,  persuas-),  to 

persuade,  convince. 
Perterr-ere  (pertemi-,  perterrit-),  to 

frighten  thoroughly. 
Pertin-ere  (pertina-,  per+tenere),  to 

reach,  belong  to,  extend  to. 
Pertarb-are  (av-,  at-),  to  disturb,  con- 
found. 
Perven-ire  (ven-,  vent-),  to  arrive  at, 

come  to. 
Pes,  (ped)  is  (m.,  295,  3),  foot ;  pe- 

dem   referre,   to   draw   back   the 

foot,  to  retreat. 
Pet-ere  (petiv-,  petit-),  to  seek,  aim 

at,  strive  after. 
Petr-a,  as,  rock. 

Phalanx,  (phalang)  is,  293,  phalanx. 
Pharsalus,  i,  Pharsalus,  a  town  in 

Thessaly. 
Philosoph-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  philoso- 
phize. 
Piget   (impers.,    579,   a),   piguit,   it 

grieves,  pains,   disgusts ;    I  am 
Pil-um,  i,  javelin.  [grieved  at. 

Pisc-is,  (pise)  is  (m.,  302,  R.),/sA. 
Pius,  a,  um,  pious. 
Plac-ere    (placii-,  placit-),  to  please 

(with  dat.). 
Placet  (impers.,  584,  a),  placuit,  it 

pleases ;    Caesari   placuit,    Ccesar 

determined. 
Placid-US,  a,  um,  calm,  placid. 
Plant-a,  ae,  plant. 
Plan-US,  a,  um,  level,  plain. 
Plato,  (Platon)  is,  Plato. 
Plebs,  (pleb)  is,  293,  common  people. 
Plen-us,  a,  \m\,  full. 
Plerique,  pleroeque,  pleraque,  most, 

the  greater  part. 


Plerumque,  hdy.,  for  the  most  part, 

Plum-a,  as,  featJie?'. 

Plurim-us,  a,  um  (superl.  of  multus), 

most,  very  many. 
Plurimum,  adv.,  very  much,  in  the 

highest  degree. 
Pocul-um,  i,  cup. 

Pcen-a,  ae,  punishment;  pcenas  per- 
solvere, pay  tJiefull  penalty. 
Poenitet  (impers.,  579),  poenituit,  it 

repents ;  me  poenitet,  /  repent. 
Poet-a,  ae  (m.),  poet, 
Pompeius,  i,  Pompey, 
Pon-ere    (posu-,    posit-),    to   placet 

castra  ponere,  to  pitch  the  camp: 
Pons,  (pont)  is  (m.,  295,  1),  bridge. 
Popul-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  plunder,  lay 

icaste. 
Popul-us,  i,  people. 
Port- a,  ae,  gate. 
Port-are  (av-,  at-),  to  carry. 
Port-US,  lis,  harbour. 
Portori-um,  i,  tax,  customs  duty. 
Posc-6re  (poposc-,  411,  a),  to  demand 

(admits  two  accusatives). 
Posse,  potui,  to  be  able,  can,  587. 
Possessio,  (possession)  is,  333,  R., 


Possid-ere    (possed-,    possess-),   to 

possess. 
Post,  prep,  with  ace,  after,  behind. 
Postea,  adv.,  afterward. 
Poster-us$  a,  um,  after;  postero  die, 

on  the  day  after,  on  the  next  day. 
Postquam,  adv.,  after  that. 
Postul-are  (avr,  at-),  to  demand. 
Potens,  (potent)  is,  107,  poioeiful. 
Potestas,  (potestat)  is,  293,  power. 
Pot-iri  (it-),  dep.,  with  gen.  or  abl., 

to  acquire,  get  possession  of 
Prae  (prep,  with  abl.),  before. 
Praeb-ere   (praebu-,    praebit-),  to   af- 
ford. 
Praeced-ere  (cess-,  cess-),  to  go  be- 
fore, excel. 
Preeceps,  (prsecipit)  is,  107,  headlong. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


375 


ProBceptor,  (proeceptor)  is,  a  teacher, 
•preceptor. 

Praecept-um,  i,  pi-ecepjt. 

PraBcip-ere  (cep-,  cept-,  pr3B  +  ca- 
pere),  to  command,  enjoin. 

Praeclar-us,  a,  una,  illustrious. 

Praeco,  (praecon)  is,  herald. 

Praed-a,  ae,  booty,  prey. 

Praed-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  plunder,  get 
booty. 

Praedic-are  (av-,  at-),  to  declare. 

Praedo,  (praedon)  is,  pirate. 

Praeesse,  prrefui,  to  be  over,  com- 
mand (prae.+esse),  with  dat. 

Praeferre  (tnl-,  lat-),  to  prefer. 

Praefic-ere  (fee-,  feet-,  prae+facere), 
to  place  over. 

PraBmitt-ere  (juis-,  miss-),  to  send  be- 
fore. 

Prosmi-um,  i,  reicard. 

Praemmti-a,  or  praenuncia,  ae,  har- 
binger. 

Praesertim,  adv.,  especially. 

Proesidi-um,  i,  garrison,  defence. 

Praestans,  (praestant)  is,  107,  excel- 
lent. 

Praest-are  (stit-,  stit-),  to  stand  be- 
fore, excel. 

Praeter,  prep,  with  ace,  besides,  ex- 
cept. 

Praeter-ire  (iv-  and  i-,  it-,  praateH- 
ire,  605,  2),  to  pass  by. 

Praetor,  (praetor)  is,  apr<Btor  (Roman 
magistrate). 

Preti-um,  i,  price,  reward. 

Prex,  (prec)  is,  293,  'prayer. 

Primus,  a,  nra,  first. 

Princeps,  (princip)  is,  107,  cAief  (used 
only  as  a  noun). 

Princip  at- us,  us,  chieftainship,  chief 
authority. 

Principi-um,  i,  beginning,  principle. 

Pristin-us,  a,  um,  ancient,  former. 

Privatim,  adv.,  privately. 

Privat-us,  a,  um,  private. 

Priusquam,  adv.,  before  that. 


Pro  (prep,  with  abl.),  before,  for^  in 

view  of. 
Prob-are  (av-,  at-),  to  prove, 
Prob-itas,  (probitat)  is,  293,  honesty, 
Prob-us,  a,  um,  honest. 
Proced-ere  (cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b),  to 

advance,  go  forward. 
Procell-a,  ae,  tempest. 
Procurr-ere   (curr-,  curs-,  pro  +  cur- 

rere),  to  run  forward. 
Prod-esse  {pro-\-esse)t  to  profit,  with. 

dat. 
Prcelium,  i,  battle,  fight. 
Profectio,    (profection)   is,   333,   R., 

setting  out,  departure. 
Proficisc-i  (prefect-),  dep.,  to  set  out, 


Prohib-ere  (prohibu-,  prohibit-,  pro-i- 

habere),  to  restrain,  keep  off. 
Projic-ere   (jec-,  ject-,  pro+jacere), 

to  throw  forward,  throw. 
Prope  (prep,  with  ace),  n^ar,  nigh 

to ;     propius,    nearer ;    proxime, 

nearest. 
Propell-ere   (pul-,   puis-,   pro  +  pel- 

lere),  drive  on,  drive  away. 
Proper-are  (av-,  at-),  hasten. 
Propinquus,  a,  nm,  near  to,  related 

to ;  propinquus  (used  as  noun),  a 

relation. 
Propius.     See  prope. 
Propon-6re  (posu-,  posit-,  pro-f  po- 

nere),  to  set  before,  propose. 
Propter  (prep,  with  accus.),  on  ac- 
count of. 
Propterea,  adv.,  therefore;   propte- 

rea  quod,  because,  for  the  reason 

that. 
Propuls-are   (av-,   at-),  to  ward  qff, 

avert,  repel. 
Prorsus,  adv.,  straight  on,  truly,  pre- 

cisely. 
Prosequi  (prosecut-),  dep.,  to  pursue. 
Proverbi-um,  i,  proverb. 
Providenti-a,   ae,  Providence  (pro+ 

videre). 


376 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Provinci-a,  8B,  province. 

Proxira-us,  a,  um  (superl.,  371),  next, 

nearest. 
PtolemaBUS,  i,  Ptolemy. 
Pudet  (impers.,  579,  a),  puduit,   it 

shames,  one  is  ashamed. 
Puell-a,  se,  girl. 
Puer,  i,  boy. 

Pugn-are  (av-,  at-),  tojight. 
Pulvis,  (pulver)  is,  331,  b,  dust. 
Pun-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  punish. 
Put-are  (av-,  at-),  to  suppose,  think, 

reckon. 
Pyrensei    (montes),    the    Pyrenees, 

mountains     between    Gaul    and 

Spain. 

a. 

duadringenti,  vb,  ^,four  hundred. 
duaer-ere  (quaesiv-,  quassit-),  to  seek, 

ask,  inquire  irito. 
dualis,  is,  e,  of  what  kind ;  talis — 

qualis,  such — as,  184. 
duam,  conj.,  than. 
duamdiu,  adv.,  how  long. 
duamvis,  conj.,  although. 
duando,  adv.,  when. 
duantus,  a,  um,  how  great,  184. 
duantuscunque,  -acunque,  -umcun- 

que,  however  great,  184. 
duasi,  adv.,  as  if. 
duatem-i,  sb,  %four  apiece,  four  at 

a  time,  189. 
duattuor,  indecl.,/<?wr. 
due,  conj.,  arid,  517,  a. 
dueo,  I  am  able,  606. 
duer-i  (quest-),  to  complain. 
dui,  quae,  quod,  who,  which,  what, 

164. 
duia,  conj.,  because. 
duid,  neut.  of  quis,  used  interrog., 

what  ?  as  adv.,  why  ? 
duicunque,  whosoever,  164,  R. 
duidam,  quaedam,  quoddam,  or  quid- 

dam^  a  certain  one;  plur.,  some, 

178,  1. 


duid  em,  adv.,  indeed. 

duilibet,  quoelibet,  quodlibet,  any 
one,  any  you  please,  178,  2. 

duin,  conj.,  but  that,  that  not,  558,  b, 

duindecim,  mdiecl.,  fifteen. 

duingent-i,  bb,  a,  five  hundred, 

duinque,  indecl.,j'?27e. 

duiut-us,  a,  um.,  fifth. 

duire,  to  be  able,  606. 

duis,  quae,  quid,  interrog.,  who, 
which,  what?  170. 

duisnam,  quaenam,  quidnam  ?  pray 
who?  what?  171. 

duispiam,  qujepiam,  quodpiam,  quid 
piam,  somebody,  some,  178,  4, 

duisquam,  quicquam,  or  quodquam, 
any,  any  one,  178,  3. 

duisque,  quaeque,  quodqne,  quid- 
que,  each,  every  one,  178,  6. 

duis  quis,  whoever,  v)hatever,  637,  3. 

duivis,  any  one  you  please,  178,  2. 

duo,  adv.,  whither,  in  which  direc- 
tion ? 

duo,  conj.,  to  the  end  that,  that,  so 
that,  558,  a. 

duod,  conj.,  because. 

duod,  rel.  pron.  neut.  of  qui. 

duominus,  that  the  less,  that  not,  af- 
ter verbs  of  hindering,  &c.,  558,  c. 

duondam,  adv.,  formerly,  at  one 
time. 

duoniam,  conj.,  since,  because. 

duoque,  conj.,  also. 

duot,  so  many,  hoio  many  ?  184. 

duotannis,  adv.,  yearly. 

duotidian-us,  a,  um,  daily. 

duot-us,  a,  um,  what  one  ?  quota 
bora,  what  o^  clock  1 

duum,  conj.,  whenfi,  since,  561, 

R. 

Rapin-a,  8b,  rapine,  plunder. 
Ratio,  (ration)  is,  333,  R.,  reasoUj 

manner,  plan. 
Rauracus,  i,  a  Rauradan,  people  of 

Gaul.  • 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


377 


Rebellio,  (rebellion)  is,  333,  R.,  re- 
hellion. 

Ileced-ere  (cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  ^),  to 
give  way,  retreat. 

Recip-ere  (cep-,  cept-,  re+capere, 
io,  416,  c,  199),  to  receive  hack, 
take  hack ;  se  recipere,  to  take 
one's  self  hack,  to  go  hack. 

Rect-e,  adv.,  215,  1,  rightly. 

Redd  ere  (reddid-,  reddit-,  re+dare), 
666,  IV.,  c),  give  hack,  return,  re- 
store. 

Redintegr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  renew. 

Redim-ere  (redem-,  redempt-,  re  + 
emere),  to  buy  hack,  redeem,  farm. 
(as  revenues). 

Reditio,  (redition)  is,  333,  R.,  return 
(redire). 

Reduc-6re  (dnx-,  duct-,  re+ducere), 
to  hring,  hring  hack. 

Referre  (retul-,  relat-,  re+ferre),  to 
hring  hack,  to  draw  ha^k ;  pedem 
referre,  to  retreat. 

Refert,  it  matters,  it  concerns,  it  in- 
terests, 584,  d. 

Refic-ere  (fee-,  feet-,  re+facere),  to 
renew,  rehuild. 

Reg-Sre  (rex-,  rect-)  to  rule. 

Regin-a,  ae,  queen. 

Regn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  reign. 

Regn-um,  i,  kingdom,  royal  power. 

Relinqu-6re  (reliqu-,  relict-),  to  leave. 

Reliqui-as,  arum,  67,  R,  remains, 
remnant. 

Reliqu-us,  a,  um,  remaining. 

Reminisc-i  (dep.),  to  remember  (with 
gen). 

Remov-ere  (remov-,  remot-),  to  re- 
move. 

Renunti-are  (av-,  at-),  to  hring  back 
word,  report. 

Repell-6re  (repiil-,  repuls-,  re+pel- 
lere),  to  repel,  drive  hack. 

Repente,  adv.,  suddenly. 

Repentin-us,  a,  um,  sudden;  repen- 
tina  res,  the  sudden  occurrence. 


Reper-Ire  (reper-,  repert-,  427,  V.), 
to  find  out,  to  discover. 

Repet-ere  (repetiv-  and  repeti-,  re- 
petit-),  to  demand  hack,  to  ask 
again. 

Repugn-are  (av-,  at-,  re+pugnare), 
to  oppose,  resist. 

Res,  rei,  thing ;  res  novaa  (pi.),  rev- 
olution ;  res  familiaris,  private 
property. 

Rescind-ere  (rescid-,  resciss-),  to  cut 
doion,  to  cut  in  pieces. 

Resist-ere  (restit-,  restit-),  390,  in- 
trans.,  to  halt,  stop;  with  dat,  to 


Respond-ere  (respond-,  respons-,  665, 
IV.),  to  answer. 

Respublic-a,  reipublicsB,  351,  3,  re- 
public, state. 

Ret-e,  (ret)  is,  312,  net. 

Retin-ere  (retinu-,  retent-,  re+te- 
nere),  to  restrain,  hold  hack,  re- 
tain. 

Revert-ere  (revert-,  revers-,  422),  to 
turn  hack,  return. 

Revert-i  (revers),  dep.,  to  return. 

Revoc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  call  back,  re» 
call. 

Rex,  (reg)  is  (m.),  king 

Rhen-us,  i,  Rhine  (river). 

Rhetoric-a,  ae,  rhetoric. 

Rhodan-us,  i,  Rhone  (river). 

Rid-ere  (ris-,  ris-),  to  laugh. 

Rip-a,  VB,  hank  of  a  river. 

Ris-us,  us,  laughter. 

Robur,  (robor)  is,  344,  a,  strength, 

Rog-are  (av-,  at-),  to  ask. 

Roman-US,  a,  um,  Roman;  Roma- 
nus  (used  as  noun),  a  Rmnan. 

Romul-us,  i,  Romulus. 

Ros-a,  8B,  a  rose. 

Rot-a,  SB,  wheel. 

Ruber,  bra,  brum,  77,  a,  red. 

Rumor,  (rumdr)  is,  319,  rumour,  re* 
port. 

Rursus,  adv.,  backward,  again. 


Ii2 


378 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


S. 
Sacer,  era,  cram,  77,  a,  sacred,.   Mons 

Sacer,  the  Sacred  Mount;  sacra, 

orum,  sacred  rites. 
Saepe,  adv.,  often. 
SaBviti-a,  ae,  cruelty. 
Sagittari-us,  i,  archer. 
Sagunt-um,  i,  Saguntum,  a  town  in 

Spain. 
Salt-are  (av-,  at-),  to  dance. 
Salus,  (salut)  is,  293,  safety. 
SeiIv-us,  a,  um,  safe. 
San-are  (av-,  at-),  to  heal,  cure. 
Sanct-us,  a,  um,  sacred. 
Sanguis,  (sanguin)  is  (m.),  blood. 
Sapiens,   (sapient)   is,  107,  wise^  a 

wise  man. 
Sapienter,  215,  2,  b,  wisely. 
Sapienti-a,  ae,  wisdom. 
Satis,  adv.,  enough. 
Satius,  comp.  of  satis  ;  satius  est,  it 

is  better. 
Schol-a,  ae,  school. 
Scienti-a,  ae,  science,  knowledge. 
Scind-ere  (scid-,  sciss-),  to  cut,  cut 

down. 
Scipio,  (Scipion)  is,  Scipio. 
Sc-ire  (sciv-,  scit-),  to  hnoio. 
Scrib-ere  (scrips-,  script-),  to  write. 
Scriptor,  (scriptor)  is,  319,  writer. 
Se,  ace.  of  sui,  142. 
Seced-6re  (secess-,  secess-),  to  se- 
cede. 
Secreto,  adv.,  secretly,  privately. 
Secund-us,  a,  um,  second,  following. 
Sed,  but. 
Sed-ere  (sed-,  sess-,  394,  V.),  to  sit, 

sit  dmon. 
Seditios-us,  a,  um,  seditious. 
Semel,  adv.,  once ;  semel  atque  ite- 

ram,  OTice  and  again. 
Sementis,  (sement)  is,  a  sowing  (of 

com). 
Semper,  adv.,  always. 
Sempitern-us,  a,  um,  eternal. 
6enat-us,  us,  senate. 


Senex,  (sen)  is,  107,  old,  old  man. 

Senectus,  (senectut)  is,  293,  old  age, 

Sen-i,  ae,  a,  six  each,  six  at  a  time, 
distrib.,  189. 

Sententi-a,  as,  opinion. 

Sent-ire  (sens-,  ^ens-),  to  feel,  think, 
perceive. 

Separ-are  (av-,  at-),  to  separate. 

Septem,  indecl.,  seven. 

September,  bris  (m.),  September. 

Septentrion-es,  um,  the  north,  the 
seven  stars  composing  Ursa  Major. 

Septim-us,  a,  um,  seventh. 

Septuaginta,  indecl.,  seventy. 

Sequan-a,  ae,  Seine  (river). 

Sequan-us,  i,  Sequanian  (people  of 
Gaul). 

Sequ-i  (secut-),  dep.,  to  follow. 

Ser-ere  (sev-,  sat-),  to  sow,  plant. 

Sermo,  (sermdn)  is,  331,  speech. 

Serv-are  (av-,  at-),  to  keep,  preserve, 

Serv-us,  i,  slave. 

Severitas,  (severitat)  is,  293,  sever- 
ity. 

Sex,  indecl.,  six. 

Sext-us,  a,  um,  sixth. 

Si,  conj.,  if. 

Sic,  adv.,  so,  thus. 

Sicut,  conj.,  so  as,  just  as. 

Sidus,  (sider)  is,  344,  b,  star,  con- 
stellation. 

Sign-um,  i,  standard,  signal. 

Simil-is,  is,  e,  104,  like  (with  gen.  or 
dat). 

Simul,  adv.,  together,  at  the  same 
time;  simulac,  simulatque,  as  soon 
as. 

Sin,  conj.,  but  if. 

Sine,  prep,  with  abl.,  without, 

Sitis,  (sit)  is,  300,  thirst. 

Socer,  i,  65,  R.,  father-in-law. 

Societas,  (societat)  is,  293,  society, 
fellowship. 

Soci-us,  i,  companion,  ally. 

Socrates,  (Socrat)  is,  Socrates. 

Sol,  (Sol)  is.  the  Sun. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


379 


Solum,  adv.,  only;  non  solum — sed 

etiam,  not  only — but  also. 
Sol-US,  a,  um,  gen.  solius,  194,  R.  1, 
alone. 

Somn-us,  i,  sleep. 

Sordid-US,  a,  um,  sordid,  mean. 

Soror,  (soror)  is,  sister. 

Bars,  (sort)  is,  293,  lot. 

Spati-um,  i,  space,  opportunity ;  spa- 
tium  arma  capiendi.  time  for  ta- 
king up  arms,  492,  a. 

Speci-es,  ei,  appearance. 

Spect-are  (av-,  at-),  to  look,  look  at. 

Spes,  ei,  hope. 

Splendid-US,  a,  um,  brilliant,  splen- 
did. 

Splendor,  (splendor)  is,  319,  splen- 
dour, glare. 

St-are  (stet-,  stat-,  387,  IIL),  to  stand. 

Statim,  adv.,  immediately. 

Statio,  (station)  is,  333,  R,,  station, 
post. 

Statu-Sre  (statu-,  statut-),  to  appoint, 
Jix,  decide. 

Stell-a,  VB,  star. 

Stipendi-um,  i,  tribute,  tax. 

Stipendiari-us,  a,  um,  tributary. 

Stoicus,  i,  a  Stoic. 

String-6re  (strinx-,  strict-),  to  draw 
(as  a  sword). 

Studiose,  215,  1,  zealously,  studi- 
ously. 

Studi-um,  i,  zeal,  study,  desire. 

Stultiti-a,  ve,  folly, 

Stult-us,  a,  um,  foolish ;  stultus,  a 
fool. 

Suad-ere  (suas-,  suas-),  to  advise,  to 
persuade. 

Suav-is,  is,  e,  104,  sweet. 

Sub,  prep,  with  ace,  up  to,  under; 
with  abl.,  under. 

Subesse  (sub-f  esse),  to  be  under,  to 
be  near. 

Subig-gre  ( subeg-,  subact-,  sub  + 
agere),  to  subdue. 

Sub-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  go  under,  to  un- 


dergo; ad  pericula  subeunda,/or 

undergoing  perils. 
Subito,  adv.,  suddenly. 
Subjic-6re   (subjec-,  subject-,  sub  + 

jacere),  to  throio  under,  to  throw 

up. 
Sublatus,  a,  um,  part,  of  tollere,  da- 
ted, puffed  up. 
Subsist-ere  (substit-),  to  stand  still, 

to  halt. 
Subsidi-um,  i,  assistance,  a  reserve 

of  troops. 
Suev-us,   i,  a  Suevian   (people  of 

Germany). 
Sufferre  (sustul-,  sublftt-,  sub+ferre) 

to  bear,  sustain. 
Sui,  reflex,  pron.,  142,  himself,  her* 

self.  Sec. 
Sum,  I  am.     {See  esse.) 
Sum-ere  (sumps-,  sumpt-,  401,  4,  b), 

to  take. 
Summ-us,  a,  um  (superl.  of  superus, 

370),  higJiest,  top  of  a  thing ;  in 

summo  monte,  on  the  top  of  the 

mountain. 
Sumpt-us,  us,  expense ;  sumptu  suo, 

at  his  own  expense. 
Super-are  (av-,  at-),  to  overcome. 
Superior,  oris   (compar.  of  superug, 

370),  higher. 
Suppet-ere  (suppetiv-  and  suppeti-, 

suppetit-),  to  be  at  hand,  to  be  in 

store. 
Supplici-um,  i,  punishment. 
Suscip-6re  (suscep-,  suscept-,  sub-f- 

capere),  to  undertake. 
Suspicio,  (suspicion)  is,  333,  R.,  sus- 
picion. 
Sustin-ere  (sustinu-,  sustent-,  sub-f- 

tenere),  to  sustain. 
Suus,  a,  um,  owe's  own,  143. 


Tac-6re  (tacu-,  tacit-),  intrans.,  to  be 

silent ;  trans.,  to  keep  secret. 
Toedet,  pertaesum  est  (imp'ers.,  576), 


380 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


it  wearies,  it  disgusts ;  me  tsedet, 
/  am  disgusted. 

Talis,  is,  e,  184,  suck. 

Tarn,  adv.,  so. 

Tamen,  conj.;  nevertheless. 

Tang-6re  ( tetig-,  tact-,  411 ),  to 
touch. 

Tanquam,  adv.,  as,  like. 

Taptum,  so  much  (neut.  of  tantus) ; 
tantum  aari,  so  much  gold,  186. 

Taiit-us,  a,  um,  184,  so  great. 

Tard-are  (av-,  at-),  to  delay. 

Taur-us,  i,  bull. 

Tel-um,  i,  weapon,  dart. 

Temere,  adv.,  rashly. 

Temeritas,  (temeritat)  is,  293,  rash- 
ness. 

Temper-are  ( av-,  at- ),  to  refrain 
from ;  ab  injuria  temperare,  to 
refrain  from  outrage. 

Temperanti-a,  ae,  temperance. 

Tempestas,  (tempqstat)  is,  293,  storm, 
tempest. 

Templ-um,  i,  temple;  templum  de 
marmore,  temple  of  marble,  mar- 
ble temple. 

Tempus,  (tempor)  is,  344,  b,  time. 

Tenax,  (tenac)  is,  107,  tenacious, 
firm. 

Tener,  a,  um,  77,  b,  tender. 

Ten-ere  (tenu-,tent-),  to  hold. 

Terg-um,  i,  back. 

Temi,  ae,  a  (distrib.,  189),  three  apiece, 
three  at  a  tiTne. 

Ten-a,  ae,  earth ;  terra  marique,  by 
land  and  sea. 

Terr-ere  (terru-,  territ-),  to  terrify. 

Terti-us,  a,  um,  third. 

Tiberi-us,  i,  Tiberius. 

Themistocles,  (Themistocl)  is.  The- 
mistocles. 

Tigurinus  pagus,  The  canton  of  Zu- 
rich. 

Tim-ere  (timu-),  to  fear. 

Timid-US,  a,  um,  timid. 


Timor,  (timdr)  is,  319, /ear. 

Tiro,   (tiron)   is,  107,  inexperienced, 

raio. 
Toler-are  (av-,  at-),  to  endure. 
Toll-ere  (sustul-,  sublat-),  to  lift  up, 

take  away. 
Tot,  so  many,  184. 
Tot-US,  a,  um,  gen.  lus,  194,  R.  1, 

whole,  all. 
Trabs,  (trab)  is,  beam,  293. 
Trad-ere  (tradid-,  tradit-),  to  surrenr 

der. 
Tragul-a,  sb,  a  dart  (used  by  the 

Gauls). 
Trah-gre   (trax-,  tract-,  401,   2),   to 


Trajic-ere  (trajic-,  traject-),  transit., 
to  throw  or  convey  over ;  intrans., 
to  cross  over. 

Tranquill-iter,  adv.,  calmly,  tran- 
quilly (215,  2,  tranquillus,  tran^ 
quit). 

Transduc-6re  (transdux-,  transduct-) 
to  lead  across. 

Trans-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  cross  or  pass 
over. 

Transn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  swim  across. 

Tredecim,  indecl.,  thirteen. 

Tres,  tria,  194,  three. 

Tribun-us,  i,  tribune. 

Triginta,  thirty. 

Triplex,  (triplic)  is,  107,  triple,  three- 
fold. 

Tripartita,  adv.,  in  three  divisions. 

Tristiti-a,  ae,  sadness.  i*- 

Tu,  thou,  130. 

TuUus  Hostilius,  Tullus  Hostilius. 

Turn,  adv.,  then. 

Turbo,  (turbin)  is  (m.,  340),  whirU 
wind. 

Turp-is,  is,  e,  104,  base. 

Turpiter,  adv.,  215,  2,  a,  basely. 

Turris,  (turr)  is,  302,  totoer. 

Tut-us,  a,  um,  safe. 

Tu-us,  a,  um,  thy,  thine,  134. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


381 


u. 

Ubi,  adv.,  where,  wJien. 
Ubinam?  where  in  the  world?  297,  d. 
Ull-us,  a,  um,  gen.  ius,  194,  1,  any. 
Ulterior,  ius  (compar.  of  ultra,  371), 

farther. 
Ultro,  adv.,  of  07ie*$  own  ax^cord. 
Ulysses,  (Ulyss)  is,  Ulysses. 
Umbr-a,  oe,  shade,  shadow, 
Una,  adv.,  together. 
Uude,  adv.,  whence. 
Undecim,  indecl.,  eleven. 
Undique,  &dv.^from  all  sides. 
Univers-us,    a,   um,   universal,    the 

whole. 
Unquam,  adv.,  ever, 
Un-us,  a,  um,  gen.  unius,  194,  OTie. 
Unusquisque,  178,  6,  each  one. 
Urbs,  (urb)  is,  293,  city. 
Usque,  adv.,  as  far  as ;  usque  ad, 

even  up  to, 
Ut,  or  uti,  conj.,  that,  546. 
Uter,  utra,  utrum,  194,  which  of  the 

two. 
Ut-i  (us-),  dep.  (with  abl.,  316,  R.),  to 

use,  employ. 
Util-is,  is,  e,  104,  us^ul. 
Utinam,  conj.,  would  that,  O  that, 

528. 
Utrum,  conj.,  whether;  utrum — an, 

whether — or. 
Uxor,  (uxor)  is  (f.),  wife. 

V. 

Vac-are  (av-,  at-j,  to  he  empty,  to  re- 
main unoccupied. 

Vag-ari  (vagat-),  dep.,  to  wander. 

Val-ere  (valu-),  to  avail;  plurimum 
valet,  is  most  powerful. 

Valid-US,  a,  um,  strong. 

Valde,  adv.,  greatly,  very  much. 

Valetudo,  (valetudin)  is,  339,  health. 

Vall-um,  i,  rampart. 

Vast-are  (av-,  at-),  to  lay  waste. 

Vast-US,  a,  um,  vast.  [ute, 

Vectigal,  (vectigal)  is,  325,  tax,  trib- 


Veh-Sre  (vex-,  vect-),  to  carry,  drive, 
Vehementer,  adv.,  vehemently,  215, 

%b. 
Vel,  conj.,  or,  519,  2. 
Velle,  volui,  592,  to  wish,  to  be  a^fe. 
Velox,  (veloc)  is,  107,  swift. 
Venator,  (venator)  is,  huTiter, 
Vener-ari   (at-),  dep.,  to  revere,  to 

venerate. 
Venetus,  a,  um,  Venetian. 
Veni-a,  ae,  pardon. 
V6n-ire    (ven-,  vent-,   426,   IV.),  to 

come. 
Vent-US,  i,  wi7id. 
Ver,  (ver)  is,  n.,  325,  spring. 
Verber-are  (av-,  at-),  to  flog. 
Verb-um,  i,  word. 
Ver-ere  (veri!t-),  dep.,  to  fear. 
Verg-ere  (vers-),  to  incline,  tend. 
Vero,  cofij.,  but,  truly,  certainly,  173. 
Verroif  (Verr)  is,  Verres. 
Ve|pere  (vert-,  vers-,  421,  b),  to  turn, 
YM-us,  a,  um,  true, 
yrersjis,  prep,  with  ace,  towards, 
Vester,  tra,  trum,  your,  134. 
Veteran-US,  a,  um,  veteran. 
Vetus,  (veter)  is,  108,  R.  2,  old. 
Vexill-um,  i,  standard. 
Vi-a,  ge,  way;  Via  Sacra,  the  Sacred 

Way,  a  street  in  Rome. 
Victori-a,  ae,  victory. 
Vic-US,  i,  village. 
Vid-ere  (vid-,  vis-,  394,  V.),  to  see; 

videri,  pass.,  to  seem,  appear. 
Vigil  anti-a,  ae,  vigilance. 
Vigil-are  (av-,  at-),  to  watch. 
Vigili-a,  ae,  watch ;  de  tertia  vigilia, 

about  or  after  the  third  watch. 
Viginti,  indecl.,  twenty. 
Vil-is,  is,  e,  104,  cheap,  vile. 
Vinc-6re  (vie-,  vict-),  to  conquer. 
Vincul-um,  i,  bond. 
Vindex,  (vindic)  is,  avenger, 
Vin-um,  i,  wine. 

Viol-are  (av-,  at-),  to  violate,  lay  wasH. 
Vir,  i,  mfin. 


382 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Virgili-us,  i,  Virgil. 

Virgo,  (virgin)  is,  339,  virgin. 

Viriliter,  adv.,  manly,  courageously. 

Virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293,  valour,  vir- 
tue. 

Vis,  vim,  vi,  30],  2,  strength,  force ; 
pi.,  vires,  ium. 

Vit-a,  ae,  life. 

Vit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  shun,  avoid. 

Viti-um,  i,  vice. 

Viv-ere  (vix-,  vict-),  to  live* 

Vix,  adv.,  scarcely. 

Voc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  calL 


Vol-are  (av-,  at-),  to  fly. 

Volo,  I  wish.    {See  velle.) 

Voluntas,  (voluntat)  is,  293,  will, 
wish. 

Voluptas,  fvoluptat)  is,  293,  pleas- 
ure. 

Volv-Sre  (volv-,  volut-),  to  roll. 

Vos,  you,  130. 

Vox,  (voc)  is,  293,  voice. 

Vulg-us,  i,  n.,  62,  E;.  1,  the  common 
people. 

Vulner-are  (av-,  at-),  to  wound. 

Vulnus,  (vainer)  is,  344,  h,  wound. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


Ability,  facultas,  (facultat)  is,  293. 

Able  (to  be),  posse,  quire  (queo). 

Abode,  domicilium,  i. 

Abound,  abundare. 

About,  circiter  (concerning) ;  de,  abl. 

Abrogate,  abrogare. 

Absent  (to  be),  abesse. 

Abstain  from,  abstinere  (abstinu-, 
abstent-). 

Accuse,  incusare. 

AccustoTned  (to  be),  consuescere 
(suev-,  suet-). 

Acquit,  absolvere,  421,  a. 

Act,  agere. 

Act  of  kindness,  beneficium,  i. 

Add,  addere,  411,  c. 

Admire,  mirari,  admirari  (dep.). 

Admonish,  monere. 

Adore,  adorare. 

Adorn,  omare. 

Advice,  consilium,  i. 

Advise,  monere,  admonere. 

u^duan,  jEduus,  i. 

Affair,  res,  117. 

Affection,  affectio,  333,  B. 

Affirm,  confirmare. 

Afford,  praebere,  527. 

After,  post  (with  accus.) ;  de  (with 
abl.). 

After  that,  postquam. 

Again,  rorsus  ;  iterum,  adv. 

Against,  contra ;  adversus  (with  ac- 
cus.);  against  Cicero,  in  Cicero- 
nem. 

Age  (time  of  life),  cetas,  (setat)  is,  293. 

Agree,  cons  entire,  427,  III. 

Agreeable,  gratus,  a,  um  (with  dat.) ; 
it  is  agreeable,  libet,  or  lubet,  583. 

K 


Aid,  auxilium,  i;  to  aid,  adjuvflre, 

390. 
Alarm,  perturbare. 
All,  omnis,  e ;  cunctus,  a,  um ;  in  all, 

adv.,  omnino. 
Allowed  (it  is),  licet,  583. 
Ally,  socius,  i. 
Almost,  fere ;  pene,  adv. 
Alone,  solus,  194,  R.  1 ;  anus. 
Already,  jam,  adv. 
Also,  etiam,  adv. 
Altogether,  omnino,  adv. 
Although,  quamvis,  conj. 
Always,  semper. 
Ambassador,  legatus,  i. 
Ambush,  insidiae,  57,  B,. 
Amiable,  amabilis,  e,  104. 
Among,  inter  (with  ace). 
Ancients  (the),  veteres ;  pi.  of  vetas, 

old. 
And,  et,  que,  ac,  atque ;  and  not^ 

neque. 
Anger,  ira,  ce. 
Animal,  animal,  325. 
Announce,  nuntiare. 
Answer,  respondere. 
Antony,  Antonius,  i. 
Any,  uUus,  a,  um,  194,  R.  1;  any 

one,  any  you  please,  &c.   See  178. 
Apart  (to  be),  distare. 
Apiece,  use  the  distrib.  numerals,  189. 
Apply,  adhibere  (u-,  it-). 
Appoint,  constituere,  421,  a. 
Approach,    adventus,    us  ;    to    ap- 

proach,  appropinquare :  accedSre. 
Archer,  Sagittarius,  i. 
Arise  (as  a  storm),  cooriri  (coort-), 

dep. 
Arm,  armare. 
K 


386 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


Arms,  arma,  orum. 

Army,  exercitus,  us. 

Arrange,  disponere,  406,  b. 

Arrival,  adventus,  us. 

Arrive  at,  pervenire,  427,  IV. 

Art,  ars,  (art)  is,  293. 

Artificer,  faber,  fabri,  77,  a. 

As,  conj.,  ut ;  as,  of  what  kind,  qua- 
ils, 184 ;  as  far  as  to,  usque ;  as 
soon  as,  simulatque. 

Ashamed  (one  is),  pudet,  579. 

Ask,  rogare,  postulare. 

Assemble,  convenire,  427,  IV. 

Assist,  adjuvare,  390. 

Assistance,  auxilium,  i. 

Association,   societas,    (societat)   is, 

Assure,  confirmare.  [293. 

At,  ad,  apud ;  at  home,  domi ;  at 
length,  demum. 

Athenian,  Atheniensis,  is. 

Athens,  Athenae,  arum. 

Attack  (noun),  impetus,  us;  (verb), 
oppugnare. 

Austerity,  severitas,  (severitat)  is, 
293. 

Auxiliaries,  auxilia,  orum. 

Avail,  valere. 

Avaricious,  avarus,  i. 

Avoid,  vitare. 

Await,  expectare. 

B. 

Back,  tergum,  i. 

Badly,  mal6,  adv.,,  215,  R. 

Band  (of  men),  manus,  us. 

Barbarian,  barbarus,  i. 

Base,  turpis,  e,  104 ;  basely,  turpi- 

ter,  215,  2,  a. 
Battle,  pr£Elium,  i. 
Be,  esse ;  be  among,  interesse,  174 ; 

be  over,  praeesse ;  be  wanting,  de- 

esse,  with  dat. 
Beam,  trabs,  (trab)  is,  293. 
Bear  (verb),  ferre,  596. 
Beast,  bestia,  ae ;  beast  of  burden, 

jumentum,  i. 


Beautiful,  pulcher,  chra,  clinim,  77,  a. 

Because,  conj.,  quod,  quia,  propterea 
quod. 

Becoming  (it  is),  decet,  583. 

Bed,  cubile,  (cubil)  is,  312  ,  bed- 
chamber, cubiculum,  i. 

Before,  prep.,  ante  (ace.)  ;  adv.,  an- 
tea  ;  before  that,  antequam. 

Beg,  rogare,  orare. 

Begin,  incipere,  416,  c;  I  begin, 
coepi,  611. 

Beginning,  initium,  i. 

Behold,  spectare. 

Behooves  (it),  oportet,  583. 

Belgian,  Belga,  sb. 

Believe,  credere,  411,  c. 

Belong,  pertinere,  394,  I. 

Benevolejii,  benevolus,  a,  um. 

Benevolence,  benevolentia,  8B. 

Beseech,  obsecrare. 

Besiege,  oppugnare. 

Best,  optimus,  a,  um,  370. 

Betake  one's  self,  se  recipere,  418,  a. 

Better^  melior,  370. 

BHween,  inter. 

Bind,  obstringere. 

Bird,  avis  (avis),  300. 

Bit,  fraenum,  i ;  pi.,  i  and  a,  396. 

Bite,  mordere,  395,  IV. 

Black,  niger,  gra,  grum,  77,  a. 

Blame,  incusare,  vituperare. 

Blood,  sanguis,  (sanguin)  is  (m.). 

Blooming,  florens,  (florent)  is,  107. 

Boast,  prsedicare. 

Body,  corpus,  (ccwrpor)  is,  344. 

Bond,  vinculum,  i 

Book,  liber,  bri. 

Booty,  praeda,  m. 

Born  (to  be),  nasci  (nat),  dep. 

Boundary,  finis,  (fin)  is  (m,). 

Boy,  puer,  i. 

Brave,  fortis,  e ;  bravely,  fortiter 
215,  2. 

Bravery,  virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293. 

Break  through,  perfringgre  (page 
275) ;  perrump^e,  666,  V.,  a. 


ENBLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


387 


Bridge,  poTis,  (pont)  is,  295,  R.  1. 
Bring,  ducere,  agSre ;  bring  back,  re- 

ducere  ;  bring  back  word,  renun- 

tiare  ;    bring  to  pass,  perficere  ; 

bring  together,  cogere,  416,  ^. 
Britain,  Britannia,  ae  ;  Briton,  Bri- 

tannus,  i. 
Broad,  latas,  a,  um. 
Brother,  frater,  (fratr)  is. 
Build,  aedificare ;  build  a  nest,  nidi- 

ficare. 
Bull,  tauras,  i. 
Burn,  incendere ;  hum  up,  exurere, 

545. 
Burden,  onus,  (oner)  is,  344. 
Burst  into,  irrompSre,  666,  V.,  a. 
Business,  negotium,  i. 
But,  sed,  autem. 
Buy,  emere  ;  buy  up,  coemSre. 
By,  prep,  with  abl.,  a  or  ab,  93,  2. 
By  night,  noctu,  adv. 


Ccesar,  Caesar,  (Caesar)  is. 

Call,  vocare ;  to  name,  appellare  ; 
to  be  called,  nominari,  appellari. 

Call  togetlier,  convocare. 

Call-upon,  invocare. 

Camp,  castra,  orum. 

Can  (to  be  able),  posse,  587 ;  /  can- 
not, non  possum,  nequeo. 

Captive,  captivus,  i. 

Care  (noun),  cura,  ae ;  (verb),  curftre. 

Carefully,  diligenter,  studiose. 

Carry,  portare,  vehere  ;  carry  an, 
gerere,  401,  4,  a, 

Carthage,  Cartbago,  (Cartiiagin)  is. 

Cassius,  Cassius,  i. 

Casticus,  Casticus,  i. 

Catiline,  Catilina,  se. 

Cause,  causa,  ae. 

Cautious,  cautus,  a,  um. 

Cavalry,  equitatus,  us;  belonging 
to  cavalry,  equestris,  e,  104. 

Celebrate,  celebrare. 

Celt,  Celta,  ae. 


Censure,  incusare. 

Centurion,  centurio,  (centurion)  is. 

Certain,  certus,   a,  um ;    a  certain 

one,  quidam,  178.  j 

Certainly,  adv.,  certe:  profecto,vero. 
Chain,  vinculum,  i. 
Change   (noun),   commutatio,   (com- 
mutation) is  ;  (verb),  mutare,  com- 

mutare. 
Champ,  mordere,  395,  IV. 
Chide,  increpare,  390. 
Chief,  princeps,  (princip)  is,  107. 
Child,  infans,  (infant)  is,  107;  chil' 

dren,  liberi,  orum. 
Choose,  deligere,  666,  V.,  a, 
Christ,  Christus,  i. 
Cicero,  Cieero,  (Cicerdn)  is. 
Citadd,  arr,  (arc)  is,  293. 
Citizen,  civis,  (civ)  is,  c,  25,  cu 
City,  urbs,  (orb)  is,  293. 
Cloud,  nubes,   (nub)  is,  300 ;  clouiSL 

of  dust,  vis  pulveris. 
Cohort,  cohors,  (cohort)  is,  293. 
Cold,  fingidus,  a,  um ;  (noun),  frigus, 

(frigOT)  is^  344. 
Collect^  coUigere    (leg-,   lect-) ;    co 

gere  (coeg-,  coact-) ;  collect  corn^ 

frumentari,    dep. ;    collect  into  a 

flock,  congregare. 
Colour,  color,  (color)  is,  319. 
Come,  venire,  427,  IV. ;  coine  near, 

appropinquare ;    come   to,   perve- 

nire ;  corne  together,  eonvenire. 
Coming,  adventus,  us. 
Command,  imperare,  with  dat. 
Commander,  imperator,  (imperator) 

is,  319. 
Commit,   committSre ;  commit  sui- 

cide,  mortem  sibi  consciscere. 
Common,  communis,  e,  104. 
Common^ople,  plebs,.  (pleb)  is,  293. 
Companion,  socius,  ij  comes,   (co» 

mit)  is. 
Compel,  coggre,  416,  b. 
Complain,  queri  (quest),  dep. 
Complete,  conficfire. 


388 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Concerning  (prep,  with  abl.),  de. 

Concerns  (it),  interest,  refer%  584,  d. 

Condemn,  damnare,  condemnare, 
348. 

Conference,  colloquium,  i. 

Confess,  fateri,  dep. 

Confines,  fines,  j?Z.  o/"  finis. 

Conflict,  congressus,  us. 

Confirm,  confirmare. 

Confound,  perturbare. 

Congratulate,  gratulari,  dep. 

Conquer,  vincgre  (vie-,  vict-)  j  supe- 
rare. 

Conqueror,  victor,  (victor)  is,  319. 

Conspiracy,  conjuratio,  (conjuration) 
is,  333,  R,. 

Consul,  consul,  (consul)  is. 

Consult,  consulSre  (consulu-,  con- 
sult-). 

Contemplate,  contemplari,  dep. 

Contend,  contendere. 

Content,  contentus,  a,  um  (with  abl.). 

Continuous,  continens,  (continent) 
is,  107. 

Continuance,  continuatio,  (continua- 
tion) is. 

Corn,  frumentum,  i. 

Council,  concilium,  i. 

Counsel,  consilium,  i. 

Course,  cursus,  us. 

Covetous,  cupidus,  a,  um. 

Cow,  vacca,  ae. 

Cowardice,  ignavia,  ae. 

Creak,  crepare,  390. 

Create,  creare. 

Crime,  crimen,  (crimin)  is,  344,  a. 

Cross  over,  transire,  trajicere. 

Crow,  corvus,  i. 

Crown,  corona,  oe. 

Cry  out,  exclamare. 

Cultivation,  cultus,  us ;  humanitas. 

Cup,  poculum,  i. 

Cure,  sanare. 

Custom,  mos,  (mor)  is,  331,  h. 

Cut  down,  rescindgre  (rescid-,  re- 
sciss-). 


Cut  to  pieces,  caedSre,  411,  h. 
Cyrus,  Cyrus,  i. 


Daily,  ad^.,  quotidianus,  a,  um ;  ad/v», 
quotidie. 

Dance,  saltare. 

Danger,  periculum,  1, 

Danube,  Danubius,  i. 

Dare,  audere  (ausus  sum). 

Dart,  telum,  i ;  pilum,  i. 

Daughter,  filia,  ae. 

Day,  dies,  ei,  116,  R.,  by  day;  in- 
terdiu,  adv. ;  to-day,  hodie,  adv. 

Dragon,  draco,  (dracon)  is. 

Dead,  mortuus,  a,  um. 

Dear,  cams,  a,  um. 

Death,  mors,  (mort)  is,  293. 

Deceive,  faUgre  (fefell-,  fals-). 

Decide  on,  statugre. 

Decree  (verb),  decem§re  (decrev-, 
decret-) ;  (noun),  decretum,  i ;  de- 
cree  of  the  senate,  senatus  consul- 
tum. 

Deep,  altus,  a,  um. 

Defeat,  pell^re,  411,  b. 

Defend,  defendere,  421,  c. 

Defence,  munitio,  333. 

Defender,  vindex,  (vindic)  is,  306. 

Defiles,  angustiae,  arum,  57,  R. 

Delay,  cunctari  (dep.) ;  active,  tar- 
dare  (to  retard). 

Deliberate,  deUberare. 

Delight,  delectare. 

Delight  (with),  libenter,  adv. 

Demand,  posc6re,  411,  a;  postulare, 
imperare,  390;  demand  back,  re- 
petgre. 

Deny,  negare. 

Depart,  discedgre,  401,  3,  b. 

Depart  out  of,  exced^re. 

Departure,  discessus,  us.  *^*^ 

Dependant,  cliens,  (client)  is,  c.      ^^ 

Descend,  descendere. 

Desert,  desergre,  406,  a;  a  desert^ 
desertum,  i. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


389 


Deserter,  perfus^a,  ae. 

Desire,    cupiditas,    ( cupiditat )    is  ; 

(verb),  cupere  (io) :  studium,  i. 
Desirous,  cupidus,  a,  um. 
Despair  (verb),  desperare ;  (noun), 

desperatio,  333,  R. 
Despise,  spem6re,  406,  HE.,  a:  con- 

temnere. 
Destroy,  delere,  394,  II. 
Destruction,  interitus,  us. 
Determine,  constituere,  statuere. 
Devoid,  expers,  336. 
Die,  moriri,  or  morl  (mortu-),  dep. 
Difference  (it  makes  no),  nihil  inter- 
est, nihil  refert. 
Different,  diversus,  a,  um ;  alius,  194, 

R.  1. 
Difficult,  difficilis,  e,  104. 
Dignity,  dignitas,  (dignitat)  is,  293. 
Diligence,  diligentia,  se. 
Diligent,  diligens,  (diligent)  is,  107  ; 

diligently,  adv.,  diligenter. 
Diminish,  minuere,  diminuSre. 
Direct  (of  a  ship),  gubemare. 
Disagree,  dissentire,  427,  III. 
Discipline,  disciplina,  89. 
Discomfit,  fugare. 
Discover,  invenire,  427,  IV. 
Discourse,   disserere    (dissem-,  dis- 
sert-). 
Discretion,  consilium,  i. 
Dismiss,  dimittere  (mis-,  miss-). 
Displease,  displicfire  (displicu-,  dis- 

plicit-),  with  dat.,  161,  R. 
Dispute,  disputare. 
Dissolve,  dissolvere,  421,  a. 
Distant  (to  be),  distare. 
Distribute,  distribuere,  406,  a;  ar- 
range, dispongre. 
District,  pagus,  i. 
Divide,  dividere,  401,  3,  a;  divide 

among,  distribuere,  423,  c. 
Divulge,  enuntiare. 
Do,  agere,  facere. 
Dock-yard,  navale,  (naval)  is,  312. 
Dog,  canis,  (can)  is. 

K 


Door,  foris,  (for)  is,  300. 

Double,  duplicare. 

Doubt,  dubitare. 

Doubtful,  incertus,  a,  um ;  dubias, 
a,  um. 

Dove,  columba,  ae. 

Draw,  trahere  (trax-,  tract-) ;  du- 
cere  (dux-,  duct-) ;  draio  lip,  in- 
strugre,  401,  2 ;  draw  as  a  swordf 
stringere,  401 ;  draw  out,  educfire. 

Dread,  formidare. 

Drive,  aggre  ;  drive  bach,  repeUere ; 
drive  on,  or  together,  compell^re. 

Druids,  Druides,  um,  pi. 

Duty,  munus,  (muner)  is,  344. 

E. 
Each,  quisque,  178  ;  omnis,  e ;  each 

of  the  two,  uterque. 
Eagle,  ajquila,  aB. 
Earth,  terra,  ae. 
Easily,  facile  (adv.). 
East,  Oriens. 

Easy,  facilis,  e  ;  very  e«s2^,perfacilis* 
Educate,  educare. 
Egypt,  Egyptus,  i  (f.). 
Eighty,  octoginta. 
Eloquent,  facundus,  a,  um ;  disertus, 

a,  um ;  eloquens,  107. 
Embark  (upon),  conscendere,  309. 
Embrace,  amplecti  (amplex-),  dep. 
Emperor,  imperator,  (imperator)  is, 

319. 
Employ,  uti  (us-),  dep.,  with  abLi 

adhibere. 
End,  finis,  (fin)  is  (m.). 
Endeavour,  conari  (conat-),  dep. 
Endure,  durare  ;  to  bear,  tolerftre. 
Enemy,  hostis,  (host)  is,  c. 
Enjoin  upon,  proecip6re. 
Enmity,  inimicitia,  ae. 
Enough,  satis,  adv. 
Enrol,  conscribgre. 
Entreat,  rogare. 

Equanimity  (with),  aequo  animo. 
Erect,  communire. 

k2 


390 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Err,  errare. 

Especially,  adv.,  praesertim. 

Establish,  confirmare. 

Eternity,  etemitas,  (etemitat)  is,  293. 

Even  up  to,  usque  ad. 

Et^er,  unquam. 

Everlasting,  sempitemas,  a,  um. 

Every,  onmis,  e,  304. 

Evil,  malum,  i. 

Evil-deed,  maleficium,  i. 

Example,  exemplum,  i. 

Excel,  prsBstare  (praestit-),  with  dat. 

Excellent,  prsBclartis,  a,  um;  praes- 

tans,  107. 
Excite,  exeitare. 
Excuse,  excusatio,  333,  R. 
Exercise,  exercere. 
Exhort,  hortari,  dep. 
Expedient  (it  is),  expedit,  583. 
Expel,  expellere. 
Expense,  sumptus,  us;  at  his  own 

expense,  sumptu  suo. 
Eye,  oculus,  i. 

F. 

Fable,  fabula,  ee. 

Faith,  fides,  ei. 

Fail,  deficere. 

Fall,  cad6re,  411,  h. 

Fame,  fama,  sb. 

Family  of  slaves,  familia,  ©. 

Far,  longe,  adv. 

Farm  (as  revenues),  redimSre. 

Farmer,  agrieola. 

Father,  pater,  (patr)  is. 

Father-in-law,  socer,  i. 

Fault,  culpa,  ae;  peccatum,  i',^nd 

fault  with,  culpare,  incusare. 
Favour,  venia,   se ;    (verb),  favSre, 

395,  V. 
Fear,  timor,  (timor)  is,  319;  (verb), 

timere,  metuere. 
Feather,  pluma,  a3. 
Fell  (cut  down),  caedere,  413,  J^". 
Few,  pauci,   ae,  a ;   very  few,  per- 

pauci. 


Fidelity,  fides,  ei. 

Field,  ager,  gri. 

Fierce,  ferox,  (feroc)  is,  107:  atrox, 

107. 
Fifth,  quintus,  a,  um. 
Fight,  pugnare. 
Figure,  figura,  ae. 
Fill,    implere  ;  fill    up,   complere, 

395,  II. 
Finally,  denique,  adv. 
Find,  invenire,  427,  IV. ;  find  out, 

reperire,  427,  V. 
Find  fault  icith,  incusare. 
Finish,  conficere. 
Fire,  ignis,  (ign)  is  (m.). 
Firmament,  ccelum,  i. 
First,  primus,  a,  um. 
Fish,  piscis,  (pise)  is  (m.). 
Fit  for,  idoneus,  a,  um,  with  dat. 
Five,  quinque  ;  five  at  a  time,  quini, 

189. 
Flag,  vexiUum,  i. 
Flame,  flanuna,  ae. 
Flee,  fagere  (io),  416,  c. 
Fleet,  classis,  (class)  is,  300. 
Flesh,  caro,  (cam)  is  (£). 
Flight,  fuga,  oe. 
Flock,  grex,  (greg)  is  (m.) ;  in  flocks, 

gregatim,  adv. 
Flog,  verberare. 
Flow,  flu  ere ;  Jlow  together,  cottflu- 

ere,  401,  2,  422. 
Flower,  flos,  (flor)  is,  331,  b. 
Fly,  volare. 

Folloto  sequi  (secut-),  dep. 
Folly,  stultitia,  ae ;   ineptiae,  arum, 

57,  R. 
Fool,  stultus,  i]  foolish,  stultus,  a, 

um. 
Foot,  pes,  (ped)  is  (m.). 
Foot-soldier,  pedes,  (pedit)  is. 
For,  conj.,  enim,  etenim;  for  my 

sake,  mea  causa. 
Force,  vis,  vim,  vi,  301,   1 ;  forces 

(troops),  copiae,  arum,  57,  a. 
Foreign,  alienuB,  a,  um. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


391 


Forest,  sylva,  ae. 

Forever,  in  aeternum. 

Forget,  oblivisci,  with  gen. 

Form,  forma,  ae. 

Fortification, 

Fortify,  muiiire. 

Fortunate,  fortuuatus,  a,  um. 

Fortune,  fortuna,  ae. 

Forum,  forum,  i. 

Four,  quattuor ;  four  apiece,  189. 

Founder,  conditor,  319. 

Fountain,  foiis,  (font)  is  (m.). 

Frail,  fragilis,  e,  104. 

Free  from  (to  be),  carere,  348. 

Friend,  amicus,  i. 

Ftiendship,  amicitia,  ae. 

FriglUen,     terrere  ;  frighten    com,- 

pletely,  perterrere. 
From,  a,  de ;  from,  every  side,  undi- 

que,   adv. ;  frorn,  my  boylwod,   a 

puero. 
Frugality,  parsimonia,  ae. 
Fruit,  fructus,  us. 
FuU,  plenus,  a,  um,  348,  b. 
Future,  futurus,  a,  um. 

G. 

Galba,  Galba,  ae. 

Gain,  potiri,  209;  gain  for  anaiker, 

conciliare. 
Game,  ludus,  i. 
Garden^  hortus,  i. 
Garrison,  praesidium,  i 
Gate,  porta,  ae. 
Gather,  coUig^re,  416,  b. 
Gaul,  Gallia,  ae;  the  Gauls,  Galli, 

orum. 
General,  imperator,  319. 
German,  Germanus,  a,  um. 
Get  sight  of,  conspicSre  (conspex-, 

conspect-). 
Gift,  donum,  i. 
Girl,  puella,  ae. 
Give,  dare,  387,  III. 
Give  largess,  largiri  (It-),  dep. 
Glai-e,  splendor,  319. 


Glory,  gloria,  ae. 

Go,  ire,  605 ;  go  straight,  perg6re ; 
go  away,  disced^re,  401,  3,  b ;  go 
fonoard,  procedere ;  go  forthf  or 
out,  exire. 

Goad,  concitare. 

God,  Deus,  i,  62,  R.  3. 

Gold,  aurum,  i. 

Good,  bonus,  a,  um ;  good  deed,  ben- 
eficium ;  good-will,  voluntas,  293. 

Govern,  gubeniare. 

Grant  (verb),  concedere,  401,  3,  b, 
dare :  (noun),  concessus,  us. 

Great,  magnus,  a,  um;  comp.,  ma- 
jor ;  superl.,  maximus. 

Greatly,  valde. 

Greatness,  magnitude,  339. 

Greek,  Graecus,  a,  um. 

Grief,  moeror,  319  ;  luctus,  us,  113,  N. 

Grieve,  dolere*;  it  grieves  one,  piget, 
579. 

Guardian,  custos,  (custod)  is,  c, 
25,  a. 

Guest,  hospes,  (hospit)  is,  c,  25,  a. 

Guide,  dux,  (due)  is. 

H. 

Hail,  grando,  (grandin)  is,  339 

Halt, 

Hand,  manus,  us  (f.)- 

Hannibal,  Hannibal,  (Hannibal)  is. 

Happen,  accid^re ;  it  happens^  ac- 

cidit,  580. 
Happily,  be  ate. 

Happy,  beatus,  a,  um ;  felix,  107 
Harass,  lacessere,  406,  III.,  b. 
Harbinger,  praenuntia,  ae. 
Harbour,  portus,  us. 
Hard,  durus,  p,  um. 
Hasten,  festinare,  contendere. 
Hate  (to),  odisse,  611. 
Hatred,  odium,  i. 
Have,  habere  (Habu-,  habit-).    I  have 

a  book,  est  mihi  liber,  125. 
He,  is,  hie,  ille. 
i/ea^W^«',praBceps,  (praecipit)is  107. 


392 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Heal,  sanai'e. 

Health,  valetudo,  339. 

Hear,  audire. 

Heart,  cor,  (cord)  is  (n.). 

Heaven,  coelum,  i. 

Heavy,  gravis,  e,  104. 

Help,  auxilium,  i. 

Helvetian,  Helvetius,  a,  tun. 

Herald,  proeco,  (prsBcon)  is. 

Herb,  herb  a,  jb. 

Hesitate,  dubitare. 

High,  altus,  a,  um ;  higher f  superior, 

comp.  of  superus,  370. 
Hill,  coUis,  is  (m.). 
Hillock,  tumulus,  i. 
Hinder,  impedire,  prohibere. 
His,  suus,  a,  um:  ejus. 
History,  historia,  se. 
Hold,  tenere,  obtinere :  hold  back, 

retinere. 
Home  (at),  domi,  gen.  of  domus. 
Honest,  probus,  a,  um. 
Honour,  honor,  319 ;  (verb),  colore 

(colu-,  cult-). 
Honourable,  hon€Stus,  a,  um. 
Hope,  spes,  ei. 
Horn,  comu,  112. 
Horned,  corniger,  a,  nm,  77,  b. 
Horse,  equus,  i. 
Horse-soldier,  eques,  (equit)  is. 
Hostage,  obses,  (obsid)  is,  c,  25,  a. 
Hour,  hora,  ae. 

House,  dcMnus,  i  and  us  (f.),  112,  3. 
Hmisehold,  familia,  ». 
How  great,  how   many?    quantus, 

186,   obs. ;   however  great,   quan- 

tuscunque,  184  ;  how  long,  quam- 

diu,  adv. 
Humanity,  humanitas,  (humanitat) 

is,  293. 
Hunger,  fames,  (fam)  is,  300. 
Hurl,  conjicere,  416,  c  (conjee-,  con- 

ject-). 
Hurt,  nocere» 


I,  ego,  120. 

Ides,  Idus,  iduum  (f.). 

Ignorance,  ignoratio,  339. 
Ignorant,  ignarus,  a,  um ;  to  be  ig*- 

norant  of,  ignorare,  nescire. 
Illustrious,  clarus,  a,  um;  prfiBcla* 

rus,  a,  um. 
Image,  imago,  339. 
Immediately,  &tatim. 
Immense,  immensus,  a,  um. 
Immortal,  immortalis,  e,  104. 


s,  impius,  a,  um. 
Implore,  implorare. 
In,  prep.,  in,  with  abl. 
Incessant,  continens,  (continent)  is, 

107. 
Increase,  augere  (aux-,  auct-). 
Incredible,  ineredibilis,  e,  104. 
Indeed,  quidem. 

Indolence,  inertia,  ae ;  ignavia,  sew  ''\ 
Indolent,  ignavus,  a,  um. 
Induce,  induc6re,  adducgre. 
Indulge,  indulgSre,  dat. 
Infant,  infans,  (infant)  is,  c. 
Influence,  auctoritas. 
Inform  any  one,  aliquem  certiorem 

facere. 
Inhabitant,  incola,  ae. 
Injure,  violare. 

Injury,  injuria,  ae  ;  incommodum,  i 
Innocence,  innocentia,  ae. 
Insect,  insectum,  i. 
Instead  of,  pro  (prep,  with  abL). 
Instigate,  instigare. 
In  the  mean  time,  interea. 
It  interests,  interest. 
Intrust,  committere  (with  dat). 
Invoke,  invocare. 
Ireland,  Hibernia,  oe. 
Iron,  ferrum,  i. 
Island,  insula,  sa. 
Italy,  Italia,  8b. 
Itself,  159. 


OF    THE 


>^ 


ES6LISH-LATIN 
J. 


Javelin,  telum,  i ;  tragnla,  ae. 

Joi7i,  jungere   (junx-,  junct-) ;  join 

together,  conjungere. 
Journey,  iter,  (itiner)  is  (n.). 
Junior,  junior,  370. 
Jupiter,  351. 
Justy  Justus,  a,  um ;  just  so  many, 

totidem. 
Justice,  justitia,  se. 

K. 

Keep,  tenere,  servare. 

Kind,  benignus,  a,  um,  with  dat. : 

suavis,  e,  335. 
Kindle,  excitare. 
King,  rex,  (reg)  is. 
Kingdom,  regnum,  i. 
Kill,  occidere,  interficfire,  390. 
Know,  scire,  noscfire,  525 ;  cognos- 

c6re :  n/)t  to  know,  nescire. 
Knowledge,  scientia,  a. 


Labour  (noun),  labor,  319  ;    (verb), 

laborare. 
Lamb,  agnus,  i. 
Land,  terra ;  b^/  land  and  sea,  terra 

marique. 
Language,  lingua,  bs:  sermo,  331. 
Large,  m  agnus,  a,  um. 
Last  (to),  durare. 
Latin,  Latlnus,  a,  um. 
Laugh,  ridere  ;  laughter,  risus,  us. 
Law,  jus,  ( jur)  is  (n.). 
Lawful  (it  is),  licet. 
La7/  aside,  deponSre,  406,  b. 
Lay  waste,  populari  (at-),  dep. 
Lead,   ducere   ( dux-,   duct- ) ;    lead 

back,   reduc^re  ;    lead   out,   edu- 

cSre  ;    lead  together,   conducSre ; 

lead  over  or  across,  transducSre, 

113,  n. 

Leader,  dxiK,  (due)  is. 

Leaf,  folium,  i. 

League,  foedus,  (feeder)  is,  344. 


o:Er 


Lea^^^tf7¥f^d^i^ 

Learn,  discere,,  4l4 

Leave,  relinquereT 

Legion,  legio,  (legion)  is,  333,  B. 

iMter,  epistola,  sb  ;  litterae,  arum, 

58,  ]sr. 
Level,  planus,  a,  um ;  aequus,  a,  um. 
Levy,  conscribere. 
Lieutenant,  legatus,  i. 
Lightning,  fulgur,  (fulgur)  is,  325. 
Life,  vita,  as. 

Like,  similis,  e,  104  (with  dat). 
Lin^  of  battle,  acies,  ei. 
Lion,  leo,  (leon)  is. 
Literature,  litterae,  arum,  57,  IL 
Little,  parvus,  a,  um.  A 

Live,  vivSre. 
Living -being,  animans,  (animant) 

is. 
Lofty,  altus,  a,  um. 
Long,  longus,  a,  um ;  adv.,  longe ;  a 

long  time,  diu. 
Look  at,  intueri,  dep. 
Lose,  amitt6re,  perdfire. 
Lot,  sors,  (sort)  is,  293. 
Love  (verb),  amare,  diligfire ;  (noxm), 

amor,  319. 
Low,  humilis,  e,  104. 
Lycurgus,  Lycurgus. 

M. 
Magnanimous,  magnanimus,  a,  um. 
Maid-servant,  ancilla,  ae. 
Maintain,  alere. 
Make,  fac6re,  199;  make  war,  bel- 

lare ;  make  war  upon,  bellum  in- 

ferre,  with  dat. ;  make  an  attack, 

impetum  facere. 
Maker,  faber,  bri. 
Maltreat,  violare. 
Man,  homo,  vir. 
Many,  multus,  a,  um. 
Marble,  marmor,  325. 
Master  (of  school),  magister,  tri ;  (of 

slaves),  herus,  dominus. 
Matters  (it),  interest,  refert,  583. 


394 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Measure,  metiri,  206. 

Medicinej  medicina,  se. 

Mediterranean,    Mediterraneus,    a, 
um. 

Meet,  ccmvenire. 

Memory,  memoria,  ae. 

Merchant,  mercator,  319. 

Messenger,  nuntius,  i.  /' - 

Metal,  metallum,  i. 

Mid-day,  meridies,  ei. 

Middle,  medias,  a,  uin. 
Migrate,  migrare. 
Mile,  millia  (passuum),  191,  b. 
Military  command,  imperium,  i. 
Milk,  lac,  (lact)  is  (n.). 
Mind,  mens,   (m©nt)    i«   (f.) ;     ani- 
mus, i. 
Mine,  mens,  a,  um. 
Minerva,  Minerva,  8B. 
Miserable,  miser,  a,  um,  77,  b. 
Mitigate,  mitigare. 
Moderation,  modus,  i. 
Money,  pecunia,  cb. 
Moon,  luna,  ae. 

More,  plus,  pluris  ;  adv.,  magifl. 
Mortalf  mortalis,  e,  104. 
Most,  plorimus,  a,  um;  most  men, 

plerique,  195. 
Mountain,  mons,  (rrwnt)  is  (m.). 
Move,  movere. 
Muck,  multus,  a,  um ;  muck  money, 

magna  pecunia. 
Multitude,  multitude,  339, 
My,  mens,  a,  um. 

N. 
Naked,  nudus,  a,  um. 
Name,  nomen,   (nomin)  is,  344,  a; 

to  name,  nominare. 
Narrow,  angustus,  a,  um. 
Natio7i,  natio,  333,  R. ;  gens,  293. 
Nature,  natura,  8e. 
Navigation,  navigatio,  333,  R. 
Near,  prope,  juxta ;  nearest  to,  proac- 

imus,  a,  um. 
Neglect,  negligSre. 


Neighbouring,  finitimus,  a,  um: 
proximus,  a,  um. 

Neitker,  conj.  —  w<?r,  nee  —  neque  ; 
neitker  (of  two),  neuter,  tra,  trum, 
194,  R.  1. 

Net,  rete,  (ret)  is. 

Never,  nunquam  (adv.). 

Nevertheless,  tamen,  conj. 

New,  novus,  a,  um. 

Next,  posterns,  a,  um,  118;  proxi- 
mus, 371. 

Night,  nox,  (noct)  is,  293. 

Nine,  novem. 

Nintk,  nonus,  a,  um. 

Nobility,  nobilitas,  (nobilitat)  is  293. 

Noble,  nobilis,  e,  104. 

Nobody,  nemo,  (nemin)  is,  c. 

Noise,  clamor,  319. 

No  one,  nullus,  a,  um,  194,  R.  1 

Not,  non ;  witk  imper.,  n6. 

Nothing,  nihil. 

Notice,  (see)  conspicSre. 

Nourish,  alere. 

Novelty,  novitas,  (novitat)  is,  293. 

November,  November,  bris.  ^ 

Nurse,  nutrix,  (nutric)  is,  293 

Oatk,  jusjurandum,  351,  4. 

Obey,  parere  (with  dat.). 

Obscure,  obscurare. 

Obtain  booty,  praedari  (dep.). 

Obviously,  prorsus. 

Ocean,  oceanus,  i. 

Of,  de. 

Of  one's  own  accord,  ultro. 

Old,  vetus,  (veter)  is,  107. 

Old  man,  senex. 

Old  age,  senectus,  293. 

On  the  other  side  of,  trans  (ace.) ;  on 

account  of,  6b,  with  ace. 
One,  unus,  a,  um,  194,  1, 
Open,  apertus,  a,  um ;  to  open,  ape- 

rire. 
Opinion,  opinio,   333,  R. ;   sent^i- 

tia,  SB. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


395 


Opportunity  of  ( with  gerund  in 
gen.),  spatium,  i. 

Oracle,  oraculum,  i. 

Oration,  oratio,  333,  !R. 

Orator,  orator,  319. 

Order,  ordo,  (ordin)  is  (m.) ;  to  or- 
der, jubere. 

Orgetorix,  Orgetorix,  (Orgetorig)  is. 

Origin,  origo,  339. 

Other,  alius,  a,  ud,  194,  R.  1. 

Otherwise,  aliter. 

Ought  (one),  oportet,  583 

Our,  noster,  tra,  tram. 

Out  of,  e,  or  ex  (abl.). 

Overcome,  superare. 

Ox,  bos,  351,  2. 


Pain,  dolor,  319. 

Paltry,  vilis,  e,  104. 

Pardon,  venia,  ae. 

Parents,  pareutes,  iam. 

Part,  pars,  (part)  is. 

Pa^s,  iter  facere,  210. 

Passage,  iter,  (itiner)  is  (n.). 

Patience,  patientia,  ae. 

Patiently,  patienter,  adv. 

Pay,  pendere. 

Peace,  pax,  (pac)  is,  293. 

Peninsula,  peninsula,  ae. 

People,  populus,  i. 

Perceive,  animadvertfire. 

Perchance,  forsitan,  forte,  sidv. 

Persian,  Persa,  ae. 

Persuade,  suadere,  persuadere. 

Phalanx,  phalanx,  (phalang)  is. 

Philosopher,  philosophus,  i. 

Philosophize,  philosophari,  dep. 

Pilot,  gubemator,  319. 

Pious,  pius,  a,  um. 

Pirate,  praedo,  335. 

Pity,  miserere  ;  I  pity,  me  miseret, 

579. 
Place,  locus,  i ;  pi.,  i  and  a :  to  place, 

ponSre. 
Place  vUo,  imponSre 


I  Placid,  placidus,  a,  um. 
Plain,  planus,  a,  um;  aequus,  a,  um: 

a  plain,  aequor,  327. 
Plan,  consilium,  i. 
Plant,  planta,  as ;  to  plant,  serfire. 
Plato,  Plato,  334. 
Pleading,  dictio,  333,  R. 
Pleasant,  jucundus,  a,  um. 
Please,  placere  (with  dat.) ;  it  pleas- 
es, placet,  583. 
Pleasure,  voluptas,  (tat)  is,  293. 
Plough,  arare. 

Plunder,  diripere :  praedari,  dep.,  491. 
Poet,  poeta,  ae  (m.). 
Pompey,  Pompeius,  i. 
Poor,  aegens,  inops,  pauper,  107. 
Port,  portus,  us. 
Post,  statio,  333,  R. 
Possess   one's  self  of,  potiri  (with 

gen.  or  abL). 
Power,  vis,  vim,  vi,  301,  1 ;  potestas, 

(tat)  is,  293. 
Powerful,  potens,  (potent)  is,  107. 
Praise,  laus,  (laud)  is,  293  ;  topraisCt 

laudare. 
Prayers,  preces,  um,  pi.  of  prex. 
Precept,  praeceptum,  i. 
Preceptor,  proeceptor,  319. 
Precious,  carus,  a,  um. 
Prefer,  anteponere. 
Prepare,  parare. 
Present  (to  be),  adesse ;  interesse, 

267. 
Preserve,  servare;  preserve  moderd^ 

tion,  modum  habere. 
Preside  over,  praeesse. 
Prevail  upon,  permovere. 
Prevent,  prohibere,  obstare. 
Principle,  principium,  i. 
Prisoner,  captivus,  i. 
Private  information,  indicium,  L 
Proceed,  pergere,  447. 
Proclaimer,  praeco,  331,  a. 
Procure,  comparare. 
Promise,  fides,  ei ;  to  promise,  spoDr 

dOre,  395,  IV. 


396 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Property,  res  familiaris :  familia,  8b. 

Providence,  Providentia,  8B. 

Province,  provincia,  ae. 

Prudence,  prudentia,  sb. 

Pr^ident,  prudens,  (prudent)  is,  107. 

Ptolemy,  Ptolemseus,  i. 

Punish,  punire. 

Punishment,    poena,    se :    supplici- 

um,  i. 
Pursue,  persequi  (dep.). 
Put-to-JiigKt,  fugare  :  dare  in  fugam. 
Pyrenees,  Pyrenaei  (montes). 
Pythagoras,  Pythagoras,  8b. 

a. 


,  regina,  ae. 
Quickly,  cito,  adv. 

R. 

Race,  genus,  (gener)  is,  344;  gens, 

(gent)  is. 
Rain,  imber,  bris. 
Raise,  toUere :  excitere. 
Rank,  ordo,  (ordin)  is  (m.). 
Rapidly,  celeriter,  adv. 
Rashly,  temere. 
Rashness,  temeritas,  (temeritat)  is, 

293. 
Reach,  pervenire. 
Read,  legere. 
Reap,  metSre. 
Reason,  ratio,  333,  R. 
Rebellion,  rebellio,  333,  B.. 
Recall,  revocare. 
Receive,  accip6re ;  receive  back,  re- 

cip6re. 
Reckon,  ducSre. 
Recollection,  memoria,  ae. 
Red,  ruber,  bra,  brum,  77,  a. 
Refrain,  temperare. 
Refuse,  recusare. 

Reign,  regnum,  i ;  to  reign,  regnftre. 
Rejoice,  gaudere. 
Relate,  narrare :  commemorare. 
Relieve,  levare. 
Religion,  religio,  333,  R. 


Remain,  manere. 

Remains,  reliquiae,  arum,  57,  R. 

Remove,  removere. 

Rene^v,  renovare :  redintegrare. 

Repair,  reficere. 

Repel,  propulsare  (ward  off). 

Repent,  poenitere ;  /  repent,  me  poe 

nitet,  579. 
Repress,  opprimere. 
Reprove,  increpare. 
Republic,  respublica,  351,  3. 
Resist,  resistere,  with  dat.  , 

Restrain,  retinere.  , 

Retreat,  recedere. 
Return  (restore),  reddere ;  (go  back), 

revertere,  or  reverti. 
Revenue,  vectigal,  (vectigal)  is. 
Revere,  venerare. 
Revoke,  revocare,  abrogare. 
Revjard,  praemium,  i. 
Rhine,  Rhenus,  i.  \ 

Rhetoric,  rhetorica,  ae.  \ 

Rich,  dives,  (divit)  is,  107.  ; 

Riches,  divitiae,  arum,  57,  R. 
Ride  (on  horseback),  equitare. 
Right,  jus,   (jur)   is;   rightly,  jure 

(abl.  of  jus) :  recte,  adv.  ^ 

Rise,  oriri,  dep. 

River,  fluvius,  i ;  flumen,  (flumin)  is. 
Robber,  latro,  331,  a. 
i2ocA;,  petra,  ae.  ^ 

Roll,  volvere.  ^ 

Roman,  Romanus,  a,  um.  "i^ 

Rome,  Roma,  ae.  '^ 

Rose,  rosa,  ae. 
Rouse  up,  excitare. 
Rout,  fugare,  pellgre :  fundSre,  416,  a. 
Royal-power,  regnum,  i. 
RulCt  regfire :  imperare,  with  dat. 
Ru7i,  curr6re. 

S.  . 

Sacred,  sanctus,  a,  um:  sacer,  era, 

crum ;  sabred  rites,  sacrS,  orum ; 

Sacred  Way,  Via  Sacra ;  Sacred 

Mount,  Mons  Sacer. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


397 


Sadness,  tristitia,  33:  moeror,  319. 
Safe,  salvus,  a,  um ;  tutus,  a,  um. 
Safety,  salus,  (salut)  is,  293. 
Sailor,  nauta,  jb. 
Sake— for  the  sake  of,  causa,  abl., 

135,  II.,  b. 
Same,  is,  ea,  id ;    the  very  same, 

idem,  150. 
Sand,  aridum,  i. 
Say,  dicere ;  /  say,  aio,  inquam. 
Scarcely,  vix. 
Scatter,  spargere. 
Scholar,  discipulus,  i. 
School,  schola,  ae. 
ScoiU,  explorator,  319. 
Sea,  mare,  312 ;  aequor,  325. 
Secede,  secedere. 
Second,  secundus,  a,  um. 
Sedition,  seditio,  333,  B,. 
See,  videre  ;  (notice),  conspicSre. 
Seek,  quaerere. 

Seize,  occupare ;  seize  up,  arripSre. 
Self,  ipse. 
SenMe,  senatus,  us. 
Senate-house,  curia,  8B. 
Senator,  senator,  319. 
Send,  mittere ;    send  away,  dimit- 

t§re  ;  send  for,  arcessere. 
Senior,  senior,  (senior)  is,  107  (comp. 

of  senex),  370. 
Separate,  separSre:  dividfire. 
Sepulchre,  sepulchrum,  i. 
Sequanian,  Sequanus,  i. 
Serve  (worship),  colere. 
Set  (as  heavenly  bodies),  occidSre. 
Set  out,  proficisci ;  set  forth,  expo- 

nere  ;  set  up,  proponfire. 
Setting  (of  heavenly  bodies),  occa- 

sus,  us. 
Seven,  septem;   seventh,  septimus, 

a,  um. 
Seventy,  septuaginta. 
Severe,  gravis,  e,  104. 
Severity,   severitas,   (severitat)   is, 

293. 
Shadow,  umbra,  sa. 

L 


Sharp,  acutus,  a,  um. 
Shdrply,  acriter,  adv. 
Shiiie,  micare,  389,  ||^^ ;  shine  forth, 

emicare. 
Ship,  navis,  300. 
Shore,  littus,  (littor)  is,  344. 
Short,  brevis,  e,  104. 
Show,  monstrare,  ostendere ;  (noxm), 

species,  ei. 
Shower,  imber,  bris. 
Shun,  vitare. 
Shut,  claudere. 
Sick,  aeger,  gra,  grum. 
Sign,  signum,  i. 
Sight,  conspectus,  us;  in  sight  of, 

conspectu. 
Silent  (to  be),  tacere. 
Silver,  argentum,  i. 
Similar  to,  similis  (dat.). 
Sin,  peccatum,  i ;  to  sin,  peccare. 
Since,  quum,  quoniam. 
Sing,  cantare. 
Singing,  cantus,  us. 
Sister,  soror,  (soror)  is  (f). 
Sit,  sedere,  394,  V. 
Six,  sex ;  sixth,  sextus,  a,  am. 
Slave,  servus,  i. 
Slay,  occidSre,  interficgre. 
Slayer,  interfector,  319. 
Sleep,  somnus,  i ;  to  sleep,  donmre. 
Slinger,  funditor,  319. 
Small,  parvus,  a,  um. 
Snatch  up,  arripere. 
So,  ita,  tam;  so  great,  tantus ;  so 

long,  tamdiu ;  so  many,  tot. 
Socrates,  Socrates,  is. 
Soldier,  miles,  (milit)  is. 
SoTne  (persons),  nonnulli. 
Somebody,  some,  178 ;  som^  one,  ali- 

quis. 
Sometimes,  interdum,  nonnunquam. 
Someiohat  great,  aliquantus,  184. 
Son,  filius,  i. 
Son-in-law,  gener,  i. 
Song,  carmen,  344,  cu 
Soul,  animus,  i. 
L 


398 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


Spain,  Hispania,  te. 

Spaniard,  Hispanus,  i. 

Sparey  parcere  (dat.). 

Sparta,  Sparta,  ae. 

Speak,  dicere,  loqui. 

Speech,  sermo,  331. 

Spend,  consumere. 

Spiritedly,  acriter. 

Splendid,  splendidas,  a,  xim. 

Spoil,  praeda,  ae. 

Spur,  calcar,  325. 

Stag,  cervus,  i. 

Stain,  macalare. 

Stand,  stare  ;  stand  in  the  way,  ob- 
stare. 

Standard,  si^rnn,  i. 

Star,  sidus,  (sider)  is,  344;  Stel- 
la, ae. 

State,  civitas,  (civitat)  is ;  respuWi- 
ca,  351,  3. 

Station,  static,  333,  R;  to  station, 
constituere,  collocare. 

Stimulate,  induc6re. 

Stir  up,  instigare. 

Stoic,  Stoicus,  i. 

Stone,  lapis,  (lapid)  is  (m.). 

Stormy,  turbidus,  a,  um. 

Strange,  novas,  a,  ura. 

Strength,  vis,  301 ;  robnr,  344. 

Strengthen,  conftrmare. 

Strive  after,  persequi,  206. 

Strong,  validus,  a,  um. 

Strong  desire,  cupiditas,  293. 

Study,  stadium,  i. 

Subdue,  subig-Sre. 

Succour,  subsidium,  i. 

Such,  talis,  e,  184. 

Sudden,  repentinus,  a,  um. 

Suddenly,  subito,  adv. 

Sufficiently,  satis. 

Sum  oftnoney,  pecunia,  oe. 

Summer,  aestas,  (aestat)  is,  293. 

Sun,  sol,  (sol)  is  (m.). 

Sup,  caenare. 

Superior,  superior,  oris. 

Support,  alSre. 


Surrender,  deditio,  333,  R. 
Surround,    circumvenire  ;    circum- 

stftre,  391 ;  eingdre,  401,  2. 
Sure,  certus,  a,  um. 
Suspicion,  suspicio,  333,  R. 
Sustain,  sustinere. 
Swallow,  hirundo,  339. 
Sweet,  dulcis,  e,  104. 
Swift,  celer,  velox,  107. 
Swiftly,  celeriter,  217. 
Switn,  natare ;  swim  across,  trans- 

nare. 
Sioord,  gladius,  i. 
Syracuse,  Syracusae,  arum. 

T. 

Take,  sumere ;  take  away,  erip^re ; 
take  back,  recipere;  take  captive, 
capere ;  take  care  of,  curare  ;  taJce 
by  storm,  expugnare  ;  take  pos- 
session of,  occupare. 

Talent,  ingenium,  i. 

Tame,  domare. 

Teach,  docere. 

Teacher,  magister,  tri. 

Tear,  lacryma,  ae. 

Tell,  dicere,  nuntiare. 

Tempest,  procella,  ae :  tempestas. 

Temple,  templum,  i. 

Tenacious,  tenax,  (tenftc)  is,  107. 

Tender,  tener,  a,  um.  \ 

Tent,  pellis,  322. 

Tenth,  decimus,  a,  um- 

Terrify,  terrere. 

Territory,  finis  (m.). 

Than,  quam. 

That  (pron.),  ille,  is,  iste. 

That,  conj.,  in  order  that,  ut;  that 
not,  ne. 

Themselves,  sui,  142. 

Then,  tum,  adv. 

There,  ibi. 

Thick,  densus,  a,  um. 

Thine,  taus,  a,  um. 

Thing,  res,  rei;  this  thing,  hoc; 
these  things,  haec. 


ENGLISH-IiATIN   VOCABULARY. 


399 


Think,  putare,  cogitare,  existimare, 

sentire,  censere. 
Third,  tertius,  a,  mn. 
Thirst,  sitis,  300. 
Thirteen,  tredecim. 
Thirty,  triginta. 
This,  hie,  haec,  hoc 
rhither,  eo. 
Chree,  tres,  ia. 

rhrough,  per  (prep,  with  ace). 
Throw,  jac6re ;   throw  before,  pro- 

jicere. 
Thunder  (verb),  tonare. 
Thus,  ita. 
Thy,  tuus,  a,  urn. 
Tiber,  Tiberis,  is. 
Time,  tempus,  (temp6r)  is,  344. 
Timid,  timidus,  a,  um. 
To,  ad  (prep,  with  ace). 
To-day,  hodie. 
Together,  nna  (adv.). 
Toil,  labor,  319 :  opera,  m. 
To-morrow,  eras  (adv.). 
Tongue,  lingua,  ae. 
Too  much,  niinius,  a,  um. 
Tooth,  dens,  (dent)  is  (m.). 
Top  of,  summus,  297,  a. 
Touch,  tangere;  tou^h  upon,  attin- 

gere. 
Toioer,  turris,  300 :  castellum,  i. 
Town,  oppidum,  i. 
Townsman,  oppidanus,  i. 
Treaty,  foedus,  (feeder)  is,  344. 
Tree,  arbor,  (arbor)  is  (f.). 
Trial,  judicium,  i. 
Tribune,  tribunus,  i. 
Tributary,  stipendiarius,  a,  nm. 
Tribute,  stipendium,  i. 
True,  verus,  a,  um. 
Truce,  indutise,  arum,  57,  R. 
Trust  to,  credere  (with  dat.). 
Turbid,  turbidus,  a,  um. 
Turn,  vertere. 
Twenty,  viginti. 
Two-a-piece,  bini,  189. 


U. 

Ulysses,  Ulysses,  is. 
Uncertain,  incertus,  a,  um. 
Under,  sub,  prep.,  323. 
Understand,  intelligere. 
Undertake,  suscipere. 
Unfriendly,  inimicus,  a,  um. 
Unjust,  injustus,  a,  um. 
Unless,  nisi  (conj.). 
Unmindful    of,    immemor     (  with 

gen.). 
Until,  donee,  dum  (conj.). 
Use,  usus,  us  ;  to  use,  uti,  dep.  abl., 

316,  b. 
Useful,  utilis,  e,  104. 

V. 

Vacant  (to  be),  vacare. 
Vain — in  vain,  firustra  (adv.). 
Valour,  virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293. 
Value,  pretium,  i ;  to  value,  sesti- 

mare. 
Vast,  vastus,  a,  um. 
Vaunt,  ostentare. 
Vehemently,  vehementer  (adv.). 
Venetian,  Venetus,  i. 
Very,  valde,  admodum ;  very  easy, 

perfacilis,  e ;  very  few,  perpauci ; 

very  near,  proximus. 
Vice,  vitium,  i. 
Victory,  victoria,  as. 
Vile,  vilis,  e,  104. 
Village,  vicus,  i. 
Violate,  violare. 
Virgin,  virgo,  339. 
Virtue,  virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293. 
Virtuous,  probus,  a,  um. 
Voice,  vox,  (voc)  is,  293. 
Vow,  spondere,  395,  IV. 

-w. 

Wage  (e.  g.,  war),  ger6re:  helium 

inferre. 
Wagon,  carrus,  i. 
Wait  for,  expectare. 


400 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Walk,  ambulare. 

Wall,  mums,  i  ;  walls,  mcenia,  um. 

Wander,  vagare,  errare. 

Want,  carere,  348. 

Wanting  (to  be),  deesse,  267,  b. 

War,  bellum,  i. 

Warlike,  bellicosus,  a,  um. 

Warn,  monere. 

Wash,  allufere. 

Watch,    watching,    vigilia,    ae  ;    to 

watch,  vigilare. 
Water,  aqua,  88. 
Wave,  fluctus,  us. 
Way,  via,  ae ;  to  make  (their)  way, 

iter  facere. 
Wearied,  defessus,  a,  um. 
Weary  of,  taedet,  579. 
Weep,  flere. 
Well  (to  be),  valere. 
West,  Occidens. 
What  (in  number)?  quotus  ?  what 

is  the  difference  f  quid  interest  ? 
When,  quum  (conj.). 
Whence,  unde  (adv.). 
Whether,  num,  174  :  utrum. 
Where,  ubi  (adv.). 
Which  of  the  two,  uter,  194,  R.  1. 
Whirlwind,  turbo,  (turbin)  is  (m.). 
Who,  qui,  quae,  quod ;  who  ?  quis, 

quae,  quid  ? 
Whole,  omnis,  e ;  universus,  a,  um ; 

totus,  a,  um;  cunctus,  441. 
Why?  cur? 

Wicked,  improbus,  a,  um. 
Wide,  latus,  a,  um ;    widely,  late  ; 

more  widely,  latius. 
Wild  beast,  fera,  as. 
Wind,  ventus,  i. 
Willingly,  libenter. 
Wine,  vinum,  i. 
Wing,  ala,  ae. 
Winter,  hyems,  (hyem)  is,  293;  to 

winter,  hiemare ;  winter-qv4irters, 

hibema,  orum  (pi.). 
Wisdom,  sapientia,  ae.         ,^«^  Sta'-M 


Wise,   sapiens,   (sapient)   is,   107 j 

wisely,  sapienter. 
Wish,  velle,  cup6re. 
With,  cum  (prep.,  abl.). 
Without,   sine   (prep.,  abl.);   to  be 

without,  carere. 
Withstand,  resistere,  390. 
Wolf,  lupus,  i. 

Woman,  femina,  ae ;  mulier,  is  (f.). 
Wonder  at,  admirari,  dep. 
Wonderful,  mirabilis,  e,  104. 
Wood  (a),  sylva,  ae.  « 

Word,  verbum,  i ;  word  is  brought, 

nuntiatum  est. 
Work,  opus,  (oper)  is,  344. 
World,  mundus,  i :  orbis  terraram. 
Worse,   pejus,   adv. ;   worst,   pessi- 

mus,  370. 
Worship,  colfire,  adorare. 
Worthy,  dignus,  a,  um  (with  abl.). 
Would-that,  utinam,  526. 
Wound,  vulnus,  (vulner)  is,  344 ;  to 

wound,  vulnerare. 
Wretched,  miser,  77,  b. 
Write,  scrib6re. 
Writer,  scriptor,  319. 

X. 

Xenophon,  Xenophon,  (Xenophont) 

is. 

Y. 
Year,  annus,  adv. 
Yearly,  quotannis,  i. 
Yes,  immo. 
Yesterday,  heri. 
Yet,  tamen. 
Yoke,  jugnm,  i. 
Young-man,  juvenis,  is  (m.) :    ado- 

lescens. 
You,  vos  {sing.,  tu). 
Your,  vester,  tra,  trum,  134. 
Youth,  juventus,  (juventut)  is,  293; 

a  youth.    See  young  m^n. 


Z. 


Zeal,  studium,  i. 


EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS. 


What  is  a  monosyllable  7  a  dissyllable  7  a  polysyllable  7  (8.) — What  is 
inflection  7 — What  is  the  inflection  of  nouns  called  ?  oi  verbs  7  (21,  2  R.) — 
Name  the  vowels :  the  liquids  :  the  c-sounds :  p-sounds :  t-sounds  :  double 
co7isonants  :  diphthongs,  (23.) — Repeat  the  general  rules  of  quantity,  (24.) 
— Repeat  the  general  ruUs  of  gender,  (25,  a.) 


Has  the  Latin  any  article  7  (27.) — What  is  the  stem  of  a  noun  ?  (30.) — 
How  many  cases  of  nouns  are  there  ?  (31.) — What  is  the  use  of  the  nomi-  n 
native  7  the  vocative  7  the  genitive  7  (33.) — How  many  declensions  7 — How 
distin^ished  ?  (34.) — Give  nom.,  voc,  and  gen.  endings  of  1st  decl.  (nom. 
and  voc,  a  short ;  abl.,  a  long). — What  is  the  gender  of  1st  decl.  ?  (36,  c.) 


Where  do  you  put  the  unemphatic  gen.  ?     {After  its  noun,  38,  a.) — The 
emphatic  7     {Before  its  noun,  38,  b.) 


What  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence  ?  the  predicate  7  (41.) — What  is  an 
active  verb  ?  transitive  7  intransitive  7  (42.) — ^What  does  the  infinitive 
express  ?  the  indicative  7  (43.) — ^What  does  the  present  tense  express  ? 
the  imperfect  7  the  future  7  (44.) — What  is  the  infinitive-ending  of  1st 
conj.  ? — How  do  you  find  the  stem  of  a  verb  ?  (45.) — Give  the  3d  person 
endings  of  the  indicative,  (46.) — Are  the  personal  pronouns  necessarily 
used  in  Latin?  (47,  R.) — ^Where  do  you  put  the  subject  Tiominative  in  a 
sentence  1  (48,  11.) 

What  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object  7  (51.) — Give  the  accusative-end- 
ings of  1st  decl.  (52.) — Rule  of  position  for  the  ol^ect  accusative  7  (53,  H.) 


What  does  the  dative  express  ?  (54) :  the  ablative  7  (55.) — Give  the 
case-endings  complete,  1st  decl.  (618)  :  quantity  of  final  syllables  (618,  R. 
1) :  gender  (618,  R.  2) :  rule  of  position  for  rcTnote  object  (58,  II.,  a) :  for 
preposition  and  its  noun  (58,  II.,  b.) 


Case-endings,  2d  decl.,  masc.  (61.) — Name  the  feminine  nouns  of  2d  decl. 
(alvus,  colus,  hiimus,  vannus). — ^What  nouns  have  i  for  vocative-ending  ? 
(62,  R.  2.) — When  to  implies  motion,  how  do  you  render  it  in  Latin? 
(63,  S^^.) 

What  nouns  of  2d  decl.  reject  the  endings  us  and  §  ?  (64.) — ^Which  of 

L  l2 


402  EXAMINATION    aUESTIONS. 

these  retain  the  6  in  the  oblique  cases  ?  (65,  R.) — What  case  is  used  with 
words  of  abounding  and  wanting  ?  [QQ,  II.,  a.) 


Case-ending-s,  2d  decL,  neut.  (68.) — Short  final  syllables  in  2d  decl.  (us, 
e,  iim,  a). — Long  final  syllables  (i,  6,  is,  6s). — What  is  the  infinitive-end- 
ing of  verbs,  2d  conj.  ?  (70.) — Give  the  3d  person  endings,  indie,  present : 
imperfect :  future,  (71.) 

Give  the  endings  of  adjectives  of  Class  I.  (76.) — What  adjectives  reject 
the  endings  u  s  and  6  ?  (77.) — Where  do  you  put  the  unemphatic  adjective 
in  a  sentence  ?  (78,  II.,  a.) — Where  do  you  put  the  adjective  belonging  to 
a  noun  which  governs  another  in  the  genitive  ?  {Before  the  genitive,  78^ 
II.,  b.) 


Give  the  3d  pers.  endings  of  e  s  s  e,  indie.  (79) :  rule  of  syntax  for  predi- 
cate noun  (80,  a)  :  for  predicate  adjective,  (81,  b.) 


Infinitive-ending,  3d  conj.  (83.) — Indie,  3d  pers.  endings,  present :  im- 
perfect :  future,  (84.) — Infinitive-ending,  4th  conj.  (86.) — Indie,  3d  pers., 
present :  imperfect ;  future,  (87.) — Where  do  you  put  the  adjective  be- 
longing to  a  noun  governed  by  a  preposition  ?  (89,  II.) 


What  syllable  forms  the  3d  pers.  pass,  ending,  indie.  ?  (90.) — In  putting 
an  active  sentence  into  the  passive  form,  what  changes  occur  ?  (93,  II.) — 
When  is  the  preposition  omitted  ?  (93,  II.,  R.) 


Case-endings,  3d  decl.  (98.) — ^What  is  the  gender  of  most  nouns  which 
add  s  to  form  the  nom.  ?  (99.) — Decline  sermo:  urbs:  lex. 


What  is  the  gender  of  nouns  in  al,  ar,  e  ?  (102,  R.  2.) — Endings  of  ad- 
jectives of  2d  class  ?  (104.) — Decline  brSvis.  (105.) — What  adjectives 
take  &  instead  of  i  in  abl.  ?  (105,  R.  2.) — What  case  is  used  with  adjec- 
tives of  advantage  or  disadvantage  ?  of  likeness  or  unlikcTiess  ?  (106, 
II.,  c.) 


What'adjectives  form  Class  III.?  (107.)— Decline  felix.  (108.)— Which 
ending  do  participles  in  ns  take  in  a>bl.  sing.,  6  or  i  ?  (108,  R.  1,  b.) 


What  nouns  belong  to  4th  decl.  ?  (110.) — Give  the  case-endings,  masc. 
(Ill) :  neut.  (Ill) :  quantity  of  final  syllables,  4th  decl.  (621,  R.  1)  :  fern, 
nouns  of  4th  decl.  (621,  R.  2.) — What  nouns  take  iibus  in  abl.  plur.  ?  (621, 
R.  3.)— Decline  dSmus,  (112,  3.)— What  does  ddmi  mean?  (112,  4.)— 
Rule  of  syntax  for  verbs  compounded  with  trans,  (113,  II.,  a.) — Is  trans 
ever  repeated  ? 


What  nouns  belong  to  5th  decl.  ?  (1 14.)— Case-endings,  5th  decl.  ?  (116.) 
—When  is  the  e  in  ei  long  ?  wheo  short  7  (116,  R.) — What  nouns  of  5th 


EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS.  403 

decl.  have  plur.  complete  ?  (117,  R.) — Time  when  is  put  in  what  case  1 
(118,  IL,  c.) 


Decline  ego,  (120.) — What  is  the  adj.  personal  pron.  of  1st  pers.  sing.  ? 
of  1st  pers.  plur.  7  (122.) — Give  1st  pers.  endings,  1st  conj.,  act.  indie,  pres- 
ent :  imperfect :  fut'ure. — Also,  pass,  present :  imperfect :  future.  (123.)— 
What  case  is  used  with  esse  to  denote  the  possessor  ?  (125,  IL,  a.) — Is 
cum  prefixed  or  suflBxed  to  the  personal  pronouns  T  (125,  IL,  b.) 


What  are  the  1st  person  endings,  act.  and  pass.,  for  2d  conj.,  indie, 
present  1  imperfect  ?  future  ?  (126.)— The  same  for  3d  conj.  (127.)— 
Fourth,  (128.) 

Decline  tu,  (130.) — ^What  are  the  2d  pers.  endings,  1st  conj.,  act.  and 
pass.,  indie,  present  ?  imperfect  1  future  1  (131.) — The  same  for  2d  conj. 
(133.) — ^What  are  the  possessive  pronouns  of  2d  pers.  ?  (134.) — How  is  n6 
used  ?  (135,  IL,  a.) — ^Where  is  causa  placed  in  a  sentence  ?  (135,  IL,  b.) 


What  are  the  2d  pers.  endings  of  verbs,  3d  conj.,  act.  and  pass.,  indie, 
pres.  1  imperfect  1  future  ?  (136.)— The  same  for  4th  conj.  (137.) 


DecUne  the  reflexive  pronoun  sui,  (142.) — What  is  the  adjective-personal 
pronoun  of  3d  pers.  ?  (143.) — What  case  does  imperare  govern  ?  (147.) 


Why  are  demonstrative  pronouns  sa called?  (149.) — Decline  is,  e a,  id, 
(150.) — Inflect  esse,  pres.,  imperf.,  and  fat.  indie.  (151.) — Distinguish 
suus  and  ejus,  (153.) — ^What  is  the  demonstrative  of  the  1st  person? 
(156)  :  of  2d  ?  (157)  :  of  3d  ?  (158.) 


Decline  qui,  (164.)— Syntax  of  the  relative,  (167,  b.) 


Decline  quis,  (170.) — How  is  the  answer  yes  given?  (173.) — What  an- 
swer does  num  expect  ?  (175,  b.) 


Name  the  seven  indefinite  pronouns,  (178.) — How  are  indef.  pronouns 
used  with  a  genitive  ?  (180,  a.) 


Name  the  correlative  pronouns,  (184.) — Give  the  Latin  for  much  gold 
(186,  a)  :  for  much  money  {186,  a). — ^Distinguish  tan  turn  and  tantus, 
(186,  obs.) 

Repeat  the  first  twelve  numerals  in  all  four  classes,  (189.) — Give  tllQ 
rule  for  accus.  oitime  or  space,  (191.) 


Decline  nnas,  duo,  and  tres,  (194.) — ^WTiat  words  are  declined  like 
anus  ?  (194,  R.  1.) — ^Is  the  penult  of  unius  long  or  short? 


404  EXAMINATION   aUESTlONS. 

Inflect  cap  ere  in  pros.,  imperf.,  and  fat  indie.  (199.) 


"What  are  deponent  verbs  ?  (206.") — How  are  they  conjugated  ?  (Ans., 
like  passives.) 

How  do  you  form  derivative  adverbs  from  adjectives  of  Class  I.  ?  (215, 
1)  :  of  Class  II.  ?  (215,  2.) — What  is  the  general  position  of  the  adverb  in 
a  sentence  ?  (218,  a.) — Where  is  fere  placed  ?  (218,  b.) — How  is  ne gui- 
de mused?  (218,  c.) 

What  prepositions  govern  the  accus.  or  ablat.  ?  (223.) — Give  the  rule  of 
apposition,  (225,  a.) 

Give  the  person-endings,  pres.  indie,  act. :  tense-stem :  connecting- 
vowel :  Istconj.:  2d:  3d:  4th,  (234.) 


Imperfect  tense,  person-endings :  tense-stem,  four  conj's. :  connecting- 
vowel,  (237.) — Future  tense,  1st  and  2d  conj.,  person-endings  :  tense- 
stems  :  connecting-vowels  (238)  :  3d  and  4th  conj.,  fut,  person-ending : 
tense-stem:  connecting-vowel,  (240.) 


Passive-endings,  (243.) — Apparent  irregularities,  viz.,  1st  pers.  pres. 
indie. :  3d  conj.,  2d  pers.  sing.  pres. :  1st  and  2d  conj.,  fut.,  2d  pers.  sing. 
(244.) 

Rules  of  Quantity. — Monosyllables  ending  in  a  vowel  (247,  a.) :  excep- 
tions.—  Monosyllables  ending  in  a  consonant:  exceptions,  (247,  b.) — 
auantity  of  a  final  (248)  :  e  final  (249)  :  of  i  final  (250)  :  of  o  final  (251) : 
of  u  final,  (252.) — Final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant,  (253.) — Final  as, 
es,  OS :  exceptions,  (254.) — Final  is  and  us :  exceptions,  (255.) — Increase 
of  nouns  (257) :  of  verbs,  (258.) — Penults  of  perf.  tense,  (259.) — Adjectives 
in  idus,  icus  :  in  inus  :  in  ilis,  bills,  (260.) 


What  are  the  tenses  for  action  completed  ?  (262) :  their  endings  ?  (263.) 
— Give  the  perf.,  pluperf,  and  fut.  perf.  of  esse,  (264.) — Distinguish  perf. 
pres.  from  perf.  aorist,  (265.) — ^What  case  do  the  compounds  of  esse  with 
prepositions  govern  ?  (267,  b.) 


How  is  perf  stem  formed  in  most  verbs  of  1st  conj.  ?  of  2d  ?  of  4th  1 
(270.) — Give  perf.  of  amare,  monfire,  audire,  (271.) 


How  is  perf.  stem  formed  of  most  verbs  of  3d  conj.  ?  (276.) — Euphonic 
rules  :  (1)  k-sound  before  s  :  (2)  b  before  s  :  (3)  t-sound  before  s,  (277.) — 
What  answer  does  nonne  expect?  (280.) — How  is  the  pluperf  formed? 
the  fut.  perf.  ?  (283.) 


EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS.  405 

Name  the  six  classes  of  nouns  of  3d  decl.  (291.) — Euphonic  rules,  (292.) 
— How  do  you  express  "on  the  top  of  the  mountain^'  in  Latin  ?  (297.) 


Decline  Jupiter :  Bos:  Respublica:  Jusjurandum,  (351.) 


Repeat  the  rules  of  gender,  3d  decl.,  from  nominative  formation,  with 
the  exceptions  xmder  each,  (355.) 


Comparison  of  Adjectives. — ^What  is  the  compar.  ending  ?  (357.) — If  the 
stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  how  is  the  compar.  formed  ?  (357,  R.) — Syntax  of 
compar.,  when  quam  is  omitted,  (360,  c.) 


Superl.  ending,  (363.) — Stems  in  er  add  what  ending?  (364.) — Stems 
in  1,  what  ending  ?  (365.) — What  case  is  used  with  superlatives  ?  (367,  b.) 


Compare  bonus,  malus,  magnus,  multus,  parvus,  senex,  juve- 
iiis,  exterus,  inferus,  superus,  posterus,  (370.) — Comp.  dives, 
benevolus. 


Are  adverbs  compared  ? — How  ?  (376.) 


What  is  the  supine  ?  (377.) — ^Form  supine-stem,  1st  conj. :  2d  :  3d  :  4th, 
(378.) — How  is  supine  in  um  used  ?  (379.) — How  is  supine  in  u  used  ? 
(380.) — Name  the  supines  in  u  which  are  in  common  use,  (381.) — ^What 
case  answers  the  question  whither  1  (383.) 


What  are  the  _/(>Mr  ways  of  forming  perf.  stem,  1st  conj.?  (387.) — How 
many  verbs  does  each  class  contain  ?  (387.) — How  do  you  form  perf., 
pluperf.;  or  fut.  perf.  of  these  verbs  ?  (388.) 


What  are  the  jive  ways  of  forming  the  perf.  stem,  2d  conj.  ?  (394.) — 
How  many  verbs  does  each  class  contain  ?  (395.) — ^What  rules  of  euphony 
are  to  be  applied  here  ?  (395,  III.,  a,  h,  c.) 


Name  the  six  ways  of  forming  the  perf.  stem,  3d  conj.  (400.) — ^What 
rules  of  euphony  are  to  be  applied  in  forming  perf.  stems  of  verbs  of  1st 
class  ?  (401,  1,  &c.) 

How  do  verbs  of  2d  class  form  perf.  stem  ?  (406)  :  verbs  of  3d  class  ? — 
In  what  sense  is  ad  often  used  by  CaBsar?  (408,  c.) 


How  do  verbs  of  4th  class  form  perf.  stem  ?  (411.) — What  vowel  chan- 
ges must  be  observed  here  ?  (411,  a,  h,  c.) — Give  the  rule  for  verbs  of  de- 
manding (413,  1):  for  verbs  of  sparing  (413,  4.) — ^What  is  the  perf.  of 
cdd6r6?  ofcaedgrg?  (413,1^'.) 

Mm 


406  EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS. 

How  do  verbs  of  5th  class  form  perf  stem  ?  (416.) — Form  the  perf. 
Items  of  the  io  verbs  in  (416,  c). — What  is  said  of  the  prcKnomen  1  (418,  c.) 


How  do  verbs  of  6th  class  form  perf.  stem  ?  (421.)— What  cases  are 
nsed  after  distribuere  ?  (423,  c.) 


What  are  the  Jive  ways  of  forming-  the  perf.  stem  in  4th  conj.?  (426.) — 
How  many  verbs  does  each  class  contain  ?  (427.) — How  is  the  mamier  of 
an  action  expressed  in  Latin  ?  (428,  a.) 

How  are  the  passive  tenses  for  completed  action  formed  ?  (431.) — How 
is  the  perf.  part,  formed  ?  (432,  ^.)— How  is  it  inflected  ?  (432,  «.)— Inflect 
the  perf,  pluperf.,  and  fut.  perf.  pass,  of  a  mar  6,  (433.) — How  is  the  perf. 
pass.  part,  sometimes  used  with  est?  (435,  c.) 


How  many  participles  are  there  in  Latin,  act.  and  pass.  ?  (438.) — Give 
the  endings  of  the  present  part.  act.  in  the  four  conjugations,  (439,  a.) — 
How  is  it  declined?  (440i^Has  the  Latin  any  active  part,  to  express 
complete  action?  (None,  excepting  in  deponent  verbs,  440,  a,  b.) — What 
is  the  use  of  the  part,  in  discourse  ?  (442,  c.) — Give  the  words  in  which 
cannot  stand  first  in  a  clause  or  sentence,  (442,  c.) 


How  is  the  fut.  part.  act.  formed  ?  (445.) — Inflect  the  periphrastic  pres., 
past,  and  fut.  of  am  a  r  6,  (446.) — Give  the  rule  for  the  use  of  die  fut.  part, 
with  verbs  of  motion,  (448.) 

How  is  the  perf.  pass.  part,  formed  ?  (451,  a.) — How  is  it  inflected  ? 
(451,  b.) — How  do  deponent  verbs  use  the  perf.  part,  form  ?  (451,  c.) — What 
is  the  case  of  the  place  where  ?  (453,  a) :  of  the  place  whence  ?  (453,  b) :  of 
the  place  whither  ?  (453,  c.) 

When  is  the  part,  used  in  the  ablative  with  a  noun  ?  (456.) — How  is 
the  want  of  a  perf.  act.  part,  suppHed  in  Latin?  (457.) — Can  a  noun  bo 
used  in  the  ablative  absolute  with  another  noun  ?     (Yes :  458.) 


How  does  the  infin.  express  action  ?  (465.) — Give  the  iufin.  forms,  act. 
and  pass.,  in  all  the  conjugations,  (466.) — Give  the  rule  for  the  comple- 
mentary infin.  (468,  a.) 

Name  the  classes  of  verbs  which  take  after  them  the  accus.  and  infin. 
(471.) — Give  the  method  of  changing  English  sentences  commencing  with 
that  into  the  Latin  accus.  and  infin.  (472,  1,  2,  3.) 


Give  the  formation  of  the  perf  infin.  pass.  (478.) — When  the  accus.  is 
used  with  this  infin.,  with  what  does  its  part,  agree  ?  (478.) 


How  is  the  infin.  fut.  act.  formed  ?  (482) :  the  infin.  fat.  pass.  ?  (483.) 


EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS.  407 

Under  what  form  does  the  gerund  express  the  action  of  the  verb  ?  (487, 
a.) — How  is  the  gerund-stem  formed  ?  (487,  b.) — How  the  cases  of  the  ge- 
rund ?  (487,  c.) — What  rules  apply  to  the  cases  of  the  infin.  and  gerund  ? 
(489.) — Is  the  infin.  or  the  accus.  ger.  used  with  a  preposition  ?  (489,  R.) — 
What  case  does  the  ger.  govern  ?  (490.) 


How  does  the  gerundive  express  the  action  of  a  verb  ?  (495,  a.) — How 
are  its  cases  formed  ?  (495,  b.) — How  is  it  used  ?  (496.) — When  must  the 
gerundive  be  used  instead  of  the  gerund  ? — When  may  it  be  so  used  ? 
(496,  R.) — After  what  verbs  does  the  gerundive  express  a  pm-pose  or  ob- 
ject ?  (498,  11^=.) 


What  does  the  gerandive  in  the  nom.  neut.  with  esse  express  ?  (501, 
a.) — What  does  it  express  when  used  with  esse  as  a  verbal  adjective  ? 
(502.) — What  is  the  case  of  the  person  in  both  these  constructions  ? 
(The  dative.) 

How  does  imper.  mood  express  tiie  action  of  the  verb  ?  (507.) — What  is 
not  with  the  imper.  ?  (510,  Rule.) 


When  is  a  sentence  compound?  (513,  a.) — Give  an  example  of  a  prin- 
cipal sentence :  of  a  subordinate  sentence,  (513,  c.) — ^Give  some  of  the 
clajsses  of  subordinate  sentences,  (514,  a,  &c.) 


Repeat  the  copulative  conjunctions,  (515.)— How  are  et  and  que  used? 
(517,  a):  ac ?  (517,  b.) — What  does  et  followed  by  another  et  mean? 
(517,  c.) — What  is  the  Latin  for  again  and  again  ?  for  not  only — but 
also  ?  (517,  d.) 


Name  the  disjunctive  conjunctions,  (519.) — WTiat  does  aut  indicate  ? 
vel?  (519,  R.  1  and  2.)— How  is  ve  used?  (519,  R.  3.)— What  do  these 
conj.  mean  when  repeated  ?  (519,  R.  4.) — Give  the  adversatives,  (520.)— 
What  does  sed  express  ?  (522,  a):  aut  em?  (522,  b.) 


How  does  the  subjunc.  mood  express  affirmation  ?  (524.) — Inflect  subjunc. 
pres.  of  esse,  (525.) — Inflect  subjunc.  pres.  act.  and  pass,  of  amarS, 
m6ner6,  r6ggre,  audire,  (526,  b.) — How  may  a  wish  be  expressed  in 
Latin  ?  (528,  a.) — How  may  a  softened  command  be  expressed  ?  (528,  b.) — 
How  do  you  express  a  direct  question  when  doubt  is  implied  ?  (528,  c.) 


Inflect  subjunc.  perf.  of  e  s  s  e,  (531.) — How  do  regular  verbs  form  subjunc. 
perf  act.  ?  (532,  1)  :  subjunc.  perf  pass.  ?  (532,  2.) — Inflect  the  subjunc. 
perf.  act.  and  pass,  of  amarg,  monere,  r6g6r6,  audire,  (532,  3.) — How 
is  the  subjunc.  perf  used  imperatively  ?  (534,  a.) — How  may  a  supposed 
case  be  expressed  ?  (534,  b.) — How  may  a  softened  assertion  be  express- 
ed ?  (534,  c.) — What  interrogative  sentences  take  the  subjtmc.  ?  (534,  e.) 


408  EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS. 

How  is  the  subjunc.  imperf.  formed  ?  (537.) — Repeat  the  paradigm 
(538.) — How  is  the  subjunc.  pluperf.  act.  and  pass,  formed  ?  (539,  a  and  ^.) 
— Give  the  paradigm,  (539,  c.) — Repeat  the  conditional  conjunctions,  (540, 
tf.) — What  is  a  conditional  sentence  ?  (540,  h) — In  conditional  sentences 
how  do  you  express  a  real  condition  ?  a  possible  condition  ?  an  unreal  or 
impossible  in  present  time  ?  an  unreal  or  impossible  condition  in  past 
time  ?  (542,  b,  Rule.) — Can  the  perf.  or  pluperf.  indie,  ever  be  used  with 
si?     (No.) 


Inflect  posse  in  subjunc.  pres. :  imperf. :  perf. :  pluperf  (545.) — State 
the  composition  of  posse. — Repeat  the  final  conjunctions,  (546.) — How  is 
purpose  or  aim  expressed  in  English  ?  how  in  Latin  ?  (548,  a.) — How  is  an 
object  to  be  provided  against  introduced  in  English?  how  in  Latin  ?  (548, 
0.) — Can  a  purpose  or  aim  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  an  infin.  ?     (No.) 


Give  the  primary  tenses  of  the  Latin  verb  :  the  historical,  (551,  2,  a,  h.) 
— "What  is  the  rule  for  the  succession  of  tenses  ?  (551,  3.) — How  is  a  result 
expressed  in  English?  how  in  Latin?  (553,  a.) — ^What  is  the  rule  for  ut 
signifying  that  1  (553,  b) 


How  is  the  want  of  a  fut.  subjunc.  supplied  in  Latin  ?  (556.) — Give  the 
paradigm,  periph.  conj.  subjunc.  (556.) — When  does  quo  express  a  pur- 
pose instead  of  ut  ?  (558, «.) — In  what  sense  is  quin  used  ?  (l)  after  neg- 
ative sentences?  (2)  after  non  dubito,  &c.  ?  (558,^.) — When  is  quo- 
minus  used  in  preference  to  ne  ?  (558,  c.) 


W^hat  are  the  two  uses  of  quum  ?  (561.) — W^hat  is  the  first  use  called  ? 
the  second?  (561.) — ^When  is  quum  followed  by  the  indie?  (563,  a) — 
When  is  quum  temporal  followed  by  the  imperf.  or  pluperf  subjunc? 
(563,  &.)— What  is  the  rule  for  quum  causal  ?  (563,  c.) 


When  is  the  rel.  pronoun  followed  by  the  subjunc.  ?  (566.) — Give  the 
rule  for  the  use  of  subjunc.  in  a  rel.  sentence,  (568,  d) — Is  the  rel.  to  ex- 
press a  purpose  very  common  in  Caesar?     (Yes.) 


In  what  two  ways  may  we  relate  the  words  of  another  ?  (571.) — What 
is  each  method  called  ?  (571.) — What  kinds  of  sentences  are  introduced  in 
oratio  obliqua?  (Either  principal  or  subordinate.) — What  mood  is 
used  in  principal  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua?  (574,  a) :  in  subordinate 
sentences  ?  (574,  i.) 

What  are  impersonal  verbs  ?  (577.) — Give  the  classes  of  impersonals, 
(578.) — What  impersonals  are  followed  by  the  accus.  of  the  person  and 
the  gen.  of  the  cause  ?  (579,  a) 


EXAMINATION    aUESTIONS.  409 

Give  the  rule  for  oportet  and  decet  (584,  a)  :  for  placet  (584,  b) 4 
for  licet  and  libet  (584,  c) :  for  interest  and  refert  (584,  d). 


State  the  composition  of  possum,  and  repeat  the  paradigm,  (587.) 


Give  the  composition  of  nolo  and  malo,  and  repeat  the  paradigms 
(592.) — Give  the  three  rules  for  velle,  nolle,  and  malle,  in  (594). 


Repeat  the  paradigm  of  irregular  forms  of  ferre,  (596.) — How  are  the 
remaining  tenses  formed?  (596,  b.) — What  is  the  meaning  of  fgrunt? 
(598,  b.) 


Of  what  verb  does  fieri  form  the  pass.?  (600.) — How  are  the  tenses 
formed  ?  (600.) — Give  the  paradigm. — What  is  the  quantity  of  i  in  fieri  ? 
(600,  R.) — ^What  forms  of  edere  are  similar  to  those  of  esse  ?  (601.) — 
Give  the  paradigm. — ^What  is  the  quantity  of  e  s,  from  esse?  of  e  s,  from 
edere?  (601,  R.) 

What  conjugation  does  ire  follow  ?  (605.) — Give  the  paradigm. — ^What 
is  said  of  the  compounds  ?  (605,  1,  2.) — How  are  queo  and  nequeo  con- 
jugated ?  (606.) 

Inflect  aio  (609) :  inquam  (610) :  novi  (611). — How  do  you  distinguish 
between  the  use  of  aio  and  of  inquam  ?  (613,  b,  ^T-) — What  form  of 
c 03 pi  is  used  with  a  pass,  iniin.  ?  (613,  c,  i^^.) 

Mm2 


THE    END 


PROF.  M'CLmrOCK  AND  OROOES'S  SERIES 

OP 

ELEMENTARY  GREEK  AND  LATIN  BOOKS, 

IN    COURSE    OF    PUBLICATION 

BY  HARPER  &  BROTHERS,  NEW  YORK. 
DESIGNED   FOR  THE   USE   OF  SCHOOLS  AND   COLLEGES. 

I. 

A    FIRST   BOOK    IN    LATIN. 

Containing  Grammar,  Exercises,  and  Vocabularies,  on  the  Method 
of  constant  Imitation  and  Repetition.  12mo,  Sheep  extra.  75 
cents.     {Now  ready.) 

This  work  contains  a  series  of  lessons  on  the  method  of  Ollendorff,  through  which 
the  student  is  gradually  introduced  to  a  knowledge  of  Inflection,  as  well  as  to  readi- 
ness in  reading  and  writing  Latin.  It  also  contains  a  clear  outline  of  Etymology  and 
Syntax,  with  Reading  Lessons  from  Caesar  ;  thus  furnishing  every  thing  that  a  pupil 
will  need  before  commencing  the  regular  reading  of  the  classic  authors. 

II. 
ASECOND    BOOK    IN    LATIN. 

Containing  a  complete  Latin  Syntax,  with  copious  Exercises  for  Im- 
itation and  Repetition,  and  Loci  Memoriales  selected  from  Cicero. 

III. 
PRACTICAL    INTRODUCTION   TO    LATIN    STYLE. 

Principally  Translated  from  the  German  of  Grysar,  with  Exer- 
cises in  writing  Latin  on  Ciceronian  Models.    (Nearly  ready.) ' 

This  work  will  supply  a  want  which  has  long  been  felt  in  our  high-schools  and 


IV. 
ELEMENTARY   GREEK    GRAMMAR. 

Containing  full  Vocabularies,  Lessons  on  the  Forms  of  Words,  and 
Exercises  for  Imitation  and  Repetition,  with  a  Summary  of  Ety- 
mology and  Syntax. 

V. 
SECOND    BOOK   IN    GREEK. 

Containing  a  complete  Greek  Syntax,  on  the  Basis  of  Kiihner,  with 
Exercises  for  Imitation  on  Models  drawn  from  Xenophon's  Anaba- 
sis. 


Testimonials  to  the  First  Book  in  Latin, 

Although  this  work  has  been  but  a  few  weeks  before  the  public,  a  second  edition 
is  already  demanded.  In  this  edition  a  number  of  errors  in  quantity,  &c.,  which  had 
crept  into  the  first,  are  corrected,  and  a  series  of  Examination  Questions  appended. 
The  publishers  offer  it  to  the  public,  in  its  improved  form,  as  one  of  the  very  best, 
and  certainly  the  cheapest  elementary  Latin  book  published  in  the  country.  The 
following  are  selected  from  a  number  of  notices  and  testimonials  already  received  : 

I  am  satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  book  for  beginners  in  Latin  that  is  published  in 
this  country. — Dr.  J.  P.  Durhin^  Philadelphia. 

I  have  carefully  examined  the  "  First  Book  in  Latin"  of  Prof.  M'Clintock  and 
Crooks  :  from  my  knowledge  of  the  thorough  scholarship  of  the  authors,  I  was  pre_par- 
ed  to  expect  a  good  book  ;  but  the  result  of  their  labor  has  far  surpassed  my  expecta- 
tion. While  the  system  upon  which  the  work  is  framed  is  that  which  nature  sug^- 
gests  and  common  sense  approves,  the  arrangement  appears  to  be  perfect,  and  the 
views  of  the  authors  at  once  philosophical  and  practical.  I  am  confident  that  no 
teacher  who  studies  the  success  of  his  pupils  will  adopt  any  other  text-book  than  this 
in  the  beginning  of  a  course  in  Latjii,~Rev.  W.  H.  Gilder,  Belltvue,  N.  J. 


Testimonials  to  the  First  Book  in  Latin, 


-ry 


I  cheerfully  bear  testimony  to  the  excellence  of  the  "  First  Booh  in  Latin ;"  it  is 
a  work  of  prodigious  labor  and  wonderful  skill.  As  the  first  of  a  series,  it  gives  prom- 
ise of  valuable  aid  to  the  teacher  of  ancient  languages. — Rev.  J.  H.  Dashiell,  Balti- 
more Institute. 

The  book  is  not  likely  to  please  lazy  teachers,  for  it  will  make  them  work  as  hard 
as  their  pupils :  but  we  doubt  not  that  it  will  be  extensively  used  by  that  class  of 
teachers  who  prize  the  progress  of  the  youth  committed  to  their  charge  more  than 
their  own  ease. — Tribune. 

This  "  First  Book  in  Latin"  combines  all  the  advantages  of  recently-improved 
methods,  and  contains  many  features,  somewhat  out  of  the  ordinary  course,  it  is  true, 
but  decided  improvements,  as  we  think  every  teacher  will  find  who  will  give  the 
work  a  careful  examination.  A  more  philosophical,  thorough,  and  practical  system 
of  teaching  Latin  we  have  never  seen. — Professor  Salkeld,  Naugatuck,  Connecticut. 

The  authors  have  evidently  studied  the  genius  of  the  language,  and  have  called 
to  their  aid  the  best  preparatory  works  used  in  England  and  on  the  Continent,  and 
the  result  of  their  labors  is  a  work  that  will  bear  a  favorable  comparison  with  any 
elementary  book  that  we  have  examined,  while  it  possesses  many  decided  advantages,' 
among  which  are  the  more  systematic  arrangement  of  the  matter,  the  early  introduc- 
tion of  the  simple  rules  of  quantity,  and  the  great  care  in  marking  the  quantity  of  all 
syllables  that  do  not  come  under  these  rules ;  the  more  frequent  repetition  in  the 
exercises  of  the  same  words  and  principles  by  which  they  are  firmly  fixed  in  the 
mind  of  the  pupil,  and  the  avoidance  of  "all  exercises  to  be  rendered  from  English 
into  Latin  that  are  not  within-  the  capacity  of  any  student  of  ordinary  industry  who 
studies  the  book  in  order."  If  it  receives  the  patronage  that  it  deserves,  we  think 
the  wishes  of  both  authors  and  publishers  will  be  met. — Christian  Adv.  and  Journal. 

Great  advances  have  been  made  of  late  years  in  the  methods  of  teaching  modern 
languages,  and  the  books  of  Manesca,  Ollendorff,  Girault,  and  others,  in  which  the 
natural  method  of  combining  practice  with  theory  is  employed,  are  fast  superseding 
all  others.  In  the  book  before  us  this  method  is  applied  to  Latin  with  great  skill  and 
success.  The  grammatical  part  of  the  work  is  very  complete,  although  condensed 
into  a  wonderfully  short  compass.  As  reading  lessons  and  vocabularies  are  furnished, 
the  pupil  will  need  no  other  book  than  this  until  he  begins  to  read  Caesar  or  Virgil. — ■ 
Philadelphia  Inquirer. 

Among  many  other  advantages,  it  contains  precisely  such  remarks  and  explanations 
as  a  student  wishes  to  have  in  the  early  part  of  his  course,  but  which,  in  common 
grammars,  are  strangely  omitted. — James  A.  Devinny,  High  School,  Carlisle,  Penn. 

The  execution  of  the  work  is  scholar-like  in  a  high  degree.  Boys  who  commence 
Latin  with  this  book  will  not  only  be  saved  many  painful  hours,  but  will  have  a  re- 
ally scientific  induction  to  the  Latin  tongue.  We  anticipate  its  extensive  introduc- 
tion into  classical  schools. — Philadelphia  Saturday  Courier. 

An  elementary  book  constructed  on  Ollendorfi^s  principle,  with  great  ingenuity  and 
success.  It  abounds  in  admirable  exercises  for  writing  and  speaking  the  language, 
and  in  this  most  useful  particular  surpasses  any  work  we  are  acquainted  with.— iVcw 
York  Evangelist. 

Of  its  execution  we  could  speak  in  the  highest  terms.  We  venture  little  in  pre- 
dicting that  most  teachers  who  examine  this  volume  will  pronounce  it  the  best  of 
primary  text-books  in  Latin  with  which  our  schools  are  overwhelmed.  We  commend 
it  to  the  immediate  attention  of  teachers. — Zion^s  Herald,  Boston. 

We  have  examined  this  work  with  great  satisfaction.  As  an  aid  to  the  teacher 
and  a  help  to  the  pupil,  it  seems  to  supply  the  inadequacy  of  all  former  books  in  our 
language  on  the  subject.  It  is  perfectly  inductive,  and  by  constant  repetition  and 
combination  of  sentences,  the  learner  progresses  almost  without  knowing  it.  It  re- 
lieves the  study  of  Latin  from  that  irksomeness  which  too  often  makes  it  distasteful 
to  the  young  pupil,  and  gives  a  good  foundation  as  he  progresses.  The  work,  we  think, 
will  find  ready  access  to  all  our  elementary  schools. — Philadelphia  North  American. 

From  what  we  know  of  the  efficiency  of  this  method,  we  are  led  to  believe  that 
the  pupil  who  will  make  the  "  First  Book  in  Latin"  his  guide,  instead  of  spending 
years,  as  is  commonly  the  case,  before  he  is  able  to  give  a  tolerable  translation  of  sim- 
ple sentences,  will  be  able,  in  much  less  time,  to  read  almost  any  classical  author 
with  ease,  and  even  to  express  his  own  thoughts  in  good  Latin.  We  shall  be  glad  to 
see  the  series  completed,  as  we  are  sure  it  must  do  much  to  hasten  that  brighter  era 
of  classical  literature  which  is  already  dawning.— iVa/ionaZ  Intelligencer. 


VALUABLE  SCHOOL  CLASSICS 

RECENTLY    PUBLISHED    BY 

HARPER   AND   BROTHERS.   NEW  YORK. 


tCLECTIC   MORAL   PHILOSOPHY. 

By  Rev.  J.  R.  Boyd,  A.M.     12mo,  $1  00. 
ELEMENTS  OF  RHETORIC  AND   LITERARY  CRITICISM. 

On  the  Basis  of  the  recent  Works  of  Reid  and  Conaell :  with,  other  i^dditionj 
By  J.  R.  Boyd,  A.M.     18mo,  half  bound,  50  cents. 
LETTERS  ON  ASTRONOMY. 

By  Denison  Olmsted,  LL.D.     12nio,  75  cents. 
THE  USEFUL  ARTS, 

Considered  in  connection  with  the  Application  of  Science.    Bj  J.  BlGELOW,M  D 
2  vols.  12mo,  $1  50. 
LOOMIS'S  TREATISE  ON  ALGEBRA. 

8vo,  Sheep,  $1  25. 
CLARK'S   ELEMENTS  OF  ALGEBRA. 

8vo,  Sheep  extra,  $1  00. 
HACKLEYS  TREATISE  ON  ALGEBRA. 

Containing  the  latest  improvements.     8vo,  Sheep  extra,  $1  5CL 
PROF.  SALKELD'S  FIRST  BOOK  IN  SPANISH.     (In  press.y  ^ 

PROF.  SALKELD'S   CLASSICAL  ANTIQUITIES. 

1  vol.  12mo,  37i  cents. 

M'CLINTOCK  AND   CROOKS'S   FIRST  BOOK  IN   LATIN. 

12nio,  Sheep  extra,  75  cents. 
TREATISE   ON   ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY. 

By  John  William  Draper,  M.D.     Engravings.    4to,  Muslin  gilt,  $2  50 
TEXT-BOOK  ON   CHEMISTRY. 

By  John  W.  Draper,  M.D.     Nearly  300  Engravings.     12mo,  Sheep,  75  cent* 
KANE'S   ELEMENTS  OF  CHEMISTRY. 

Edited  by  John  W.  Draper,  M.D.     250  Plates.    Bvo,  Muslin,  $2  00. 
FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURAL   PHILOSOPHY. 

By  James  Renwigk,  LL.D.     Engravings.     18mo,  75  cents. 
FIRST   PRINCIPLES  OF  CHEMISTRY. 

By  James  Renwigk,  LL.D      Engravings.     18mo,  75  cents. 
PRACTICAL   MECHANICS. 

By  James  Renwigk,  LL.D.     Engravings.     18rao,  half  Sheep,  90  cents. 
LOGIC,   RATIOCINATIVE  AND   INDUCTIVE. 

By  J.  Stuart  Mill.    8vo,  Muslin  gilt,  $2  00. 
AIDS  TO   ENGLISH   COMPOSITION. 

By  Richard  Green  Parker,  A.M.     18mo,  Muslin,  80  cents  ;  Sheep  extra,  90  cm 
NEW  PICTORIAL  SCHOOL  GEOGRAPHY. 

By  Sidney  E.  Morse,  A.M.     Embellished  by  nearly  One  Hundred  and  Fifty  Ei^ 
gravings,  and  about  Fifty  Cerographic  Maps,  in  Colors.     Price  50  cents. 
PLATO   AGAINST  THE  ATHEISTS. 

By  Tayler  Lewis,  LL.D.     12mo,  Muslin  gilt,  $1  50. 
THE   PRACTICAL  ASTRONOMER. 

By  Thomas  Digk,  LL.D.     Illustrated  with   One   Hundred  Engravings.     12mo 
Muslin  gilt,  50  cents. 
ELEMENTS  OF  MORALITY, 

including  Polity.     By  William  Whewell,  D.D.    2  vols.  12mo,  Muslin   gilt, 
$1  00. 
THE  CAPTIVES,  A  COMEDY   OF  PLAUTUS. 

With  English  Notes,  for  the  Use  of  Students.    By  John  Proudfit,  D.D      ISja, 
37^  cents. 

A  CLASSICAL  DICTIONARY. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     Royal  8vo,  Sheep,  $4  75. 
A  DICTIONARY  OF  GREEK  AND   ROMAN   ANTIQUITIES 

■  Edited  by  W.  Smith,  Ph.D.     First  American  edition,  corrected  and  emargea  err 
Charles  Anthon,  LL  D.    Svo,  Sheep,  $4  75. 


Classical  Works  published  hy  Harper  ^  Brothers, 

DICTIONARY  OF  ANTIQUITIES,   ABRIDGED. 

With  Corrections  and  Improvements,  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     12mo,  hall 
Sheep,  %\  25. 

NEW  GREEK   AND    ENGLISH   LEXICON. 

By  Henry  Drisler,  A.M.,  under  the  Supervision  of  Prof.  Anthon.     8vo,  $5  00. 

A  GRAMMAR  OF  THE   LATIN    LANGUAGE. 

By  C.  G.  ZuMPT,  Ph.D.     Corrected  and  enlarged  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D. 
I2mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 

THE   ECLOGUES  AND  GEORGICS  OF  VIRGIL. 

With  English  Notes,  critical  and  explanatory.    By  Charles  Anthon,  LL  D 
12rao,  Sheep  extra,  $1  50. 

THE  ANABASIS  OF  XENOPHON. 

With  English  Notes,  critical  and  explanatory.    By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D 
12mo,  Sheep  extra.     (In  press.) 

GREEK  READER. 

Principally  from  Jacobs.    Edited  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    12mo,  Sheep 
extra,  $1  75. 
C/ESAR'S  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE   GALLIC  WAR. 

Edited  by  CHARLES  Anthon,  LL.D.     Map,  Portrait,  &c.     12mo,  Siieep  extra, 
$1  40. 
SYSTEM  OF  LATIN  VERSIFICATION. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 
THE  /ENEID   OF  VIRGIL. 

Edited  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    Portrait  and  many  Dlustratiotts.     i2iius 
Sheep  extra,  $2  00, 
THE  WORKS  OF  HORACE. 

Edited  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  $1  75. 
LATIN   GRAMMAR,   PART  I. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 
LATIN   GRAMMAR,   PART  II. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 
SYSTEM  OF  LATIN   PROSODY   AND   METRE. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 
SELECT  ORATIONS  OF  CICERO. 

Edited  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    Portrait,  12mo,  Sheep  extra,  $1  20 

SALLUST'S  JUGURTHINE  WAR    AND    CONSPIRACY  OF  CATI- 
LINE.   Edited  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  87^  cent* 
GREEK  LESSONS,   PART  I. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    12roo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 
GREEK   LESSONS,   PART  II. 
By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 

SYSTEM  OF  GREEK  PROSODY  AND  METRE. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 
HOMER'S  ILIAD. 

Edited  by  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  $1  50 
GRAMMAR  OF  THE  GREEK   LANGUAGE. 

By  Charles  Anthon,  LL.D.    12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 

<^EW  GRAMMAR   OF  THE  GREEK  LANGUAGE, 

From  the  German  of  Kiihner,  Matthias,  Buttmann,  Rost,  and  Thiersch.    Bj  Chas 
Anthon,  LL.D.    12mo,  Sheep  extra,  90  cents. 

FAMILY  CLASSICAL  LIBRARY, 

Comprising  Translations  of  the  best  Classics.    36  vols.  ISmo,  Maslin  gilt,  45  cent* 
each. 
ELEMENTS  OF  MENTAL  PHILOSOPHY. 

By  Professor  Thomas  C.  Upham.    2  vols.  12mo,  Sheep  extra,  $2  50. 
The  same  Work  abridged.     13mo,  Sheep  extra,  $1  25. 
A     PHILOSOPHICAL    AND     PRACTICAL    TREATISE    ON     THE 

WILL.    By  Professor  Thomas  C.  Upham      12ii»^  Sheep  extra,  $1  25. 


^axptx's  NetD  Catalogue. 

A  NEW  Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Harper  &  Brothers'  Pub- 
lications is  now  ready  for  distribution,  and  may  be  obtained  gra- 
tuitously on  application  to  the  Publishers  personally,  or  by  letter, 
post-paid. 

The  attention  of  gentlemen,  in  town  or  country,  designing  to 
form  Libraries  or  enrich  their  literary  collections,  is  respectfully 
invited  to  this  Catalogue,  which  will  be  found  to  comprise  a  large 
proportion  of  the  standard  and  most  esteemed  works  in  English 
Literature — comprehending  about  two  thousand  volumes — which 
are  offered  in  most  instances  at  less  than  one  half  the  cost  of  sim- 
ilar productions  in  England. 

To  Librarians  and  others  connected  with  Colleges,  Schools,  etc., 
who  may  not  have  access  to  a  reliable  guide  in  forming  the  true 
estimate  of  literary  productions,  it  is  believed  the  present  Catalogue 
will  prove  especially  valuable  as  a  manual  of  reference. 

To  prevent  disappointment,  it  is  suggested  that,  whenever  books 
can  not  be  obtained  through  any  bookseller  or  local  agent,  applica- 
tions with  remittance  should  be  addressed  direct  to  the  Publishers, 
vhich  will  be  promptly  attended  to. 

83  Cliff  Street,  New  Yorh  Nao.,  1847. 


M 


YB  00417 


